PDF Fujitsu Omni SI (GTE) Database & Maintenence
Omni SI (GTE) Database & Maintenence Omni SI (GTE) Database & Maintenence
User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 950
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
“:!
:
‘I
.I
FUJITSU GTE
BUSINESS SYSTEMS, INC.
SECTION TL-130400-1001 ISSUE 1
AUGUST 1987
Data Base
TECHNICAL PRACTICES
Purpose
:._.
32
.1 *
This Technical Practice has been prepared for FGBS Employees
who operate and maintain the equipment manufactured and sold
by Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc. The information in this
practice is subject to change and may not be suitable in all
situations. Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc. acknowledges
that a customer’s special requirements or practices may take
precedence over those supplied in this practice if a conflict
develops during installation or ongoing operation. Fujitsu GTE
Business Systems, Inc. hereby disclaims any responsibility or
liability for any consequential or inconsequential damages that
may result from the use of this practice.
This document is provided with the understanding that it shall not
be copied or reproduced in whole or in part or disclosed to
‘*others without the prior written permission of Fujitsu GTE
Business Systems, Inc.
Copyright Q1987 by FGBS, Inc.
OMNI SI@ is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc.
Comm I” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc.
FlashComm Plus’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm
Systems, Inc.
‘I1 is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
FeatureComm
Systems, Inc.
I’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
FeatureComm Ill’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm IV’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm V’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm VI’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
AnswerComm I’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
AnswerComm II’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
OMNI IVMS’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems,
Inc.
OMNI ESP” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems,
Inc.
APM” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, inc.
SPM’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc.
PD-200’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc.
CD-100’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems,lnc.
~MNI SWSVR 5216
Technical Practices
This FGBS practice is part of a series of practices for the
FGBS OMNI SI, System Version Release 5.2.1 .O. The series
includes the following:
TL-130000-1001
TL-130100-1001
TL-130200-1001
TL-130300-1001
TL-130400-1001
TL-130500-1001
TL-130600-1001
TL-100000-1001
TL-130700-1001
System Description/Features
Operation
Maintenance
Installation
Data Base
System Configuration
5120 to 5210 Upgrade
ADMP User’s Guide
Index
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
..
USER RESPONSE/REQUEST FORM
Send To:
Fujitsu GTE Business Systems
Publications Manager, Dept. 443
2411 West 14th Street
Tempe, Arizona 85281-9904
0
Document Number: TL-130400-4001
0
Do.cument Title: OMNI SI Data Base
,”
&sue Number: 1
Date: August 1987
e
Date Submitted:
q
General Comments. Enter Comments concerning overall organization, presentation, or
content of this document in the space below.
q
Suggested Revisions. Enter specific additions deletions or changes to this document in the
space below, or provide a marked up copy of the original document.
Paragraph, Figure, or Table Number
0
Comment
Revision Priority 0 1: Service Affecting Problem
I-J 2: Potentially Service Affecting Problem
0 3: Administrative, Documentation, and Other Maintenance Problems
Please attach a copy of your marked up pages.
0
May we contact you concerning your comments?
c] Y E S
q NO
May we send you information on other
available publications?
0 YES
q NO
Please enter your:
Name:
Title:
Company/Department:
Address:
Area Code/Tel. No./Ext.:
Thank you for your cooperation and comments.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
: F
:O
. L
: D
:0
: R
.
: T
: E
. A
: R
.
: H
. E
T.
.I
*
:. ER
.
:c
:A
. .
. R
: E
FOLD HERE CAREFULLY. DOCUMENT WILL BE SCANNED BY 08-I
CR EQ !UIPMENT
-1-1-1-1----1-111---------------
:* Lu
: L
. Y
.
: D
:o
. c
: u
mM
: E
. N
: T
.
(BUSINESS REPLY MAIL j
I
I
FIRST
CLASS
PERMIT
NO.
216
TEMPE,
AZ
1
I
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
FUJITSU
GTE
PUBLICATIONS
2411
TEMPE
WEST
AZ
BUSINESS
SYSTEMS
DEPARTMENT
14TH
:W
- I
: L
* L
.
STREET
85281-9904
:B
: E
.
:
s
:c
. A
: N
. N
: E
. D
-1--1-11--111--11-11----------------
FOLD HERE CAREFULLY. DOCUMENT WILL BE SCANNED BY OCR EQUIPMENT
: B
: y
.
:0
. c
:. R
:
.
:
.
:
E
cl
u
I
p
. M
: E
. N
:T
.
TL-130400-1001
PARAPAGE
D-19
D-1-9
~. . . . .
GRAPH TOPIC
-
1.0
1
.l
GENERAL
.-=l
Generic Program
D-19-- 1 . 2
Customer Data Base Program
D-l 9
1.2.1
Custom Engineered Data Base
D-20
1.2.2 ‘-
Pre-Engineered Data Base
D-21
2.0
DATA SHEET PREPARATION
D-21
2.1
Data Sheet Design
D-21
2.2
Coding Conventions
D-21
2.2.1
Alphabetic, Numeric, and Characters Rules
D-22
2.2.2
Record Code Entries
D-22
2.2.3
Directory
D-22
2.2.4
Card Slot
D-23
2.2.5
Suggested Preparation Order
D-25
3.0
FRAME IMAGE
D-26
3.1
Record Code FR: Frame Image Card
D-41
4.0
SYSTEM
D-42
4.1
Record Code DT: DTMF Receiver
D-43
4.2
Record Code OC: Office Features Circuits
D-44
4.3
Record Code OE: Office Equipment
D-48
4.4
Record Code OF: Office Features
D-55
4.5
Record Code OT: Office Timeout Values
D-60
4.6
Record Code OV: Office Timing Values
D-63
4.7
Record Code OD: Other Directory Numbers
D-65
4.8
Record Code PN: Predetermined Night Answer Pilot Numbers
D-66
4.9
Record Code PZ: Paging Zones
D-68
4.10
Record Code SL: User Security Level Password
D-70
4.11
Record Code TF: Traffic Data Facilities
SW 5210
Number
PARAMETERS
8187
AND
MISCELLANEOUS
FEATURES
D-l
TL-130400-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAPAGE
GRAPH TOPIC
D-72
4.12
D-74
-.4&l 3
D-75
4;14
D-77
4.15
Record Code FA: Facility Restriction Level Authorization Code
.I
D-79
5.0
DIGIT
D-80
5.1
Record Code AC: Access Code Translation
D-104
5.2
Record Code HD: Hundreds Groups
D-106
5.3
Record Code IR: Intercept Routing Numbers
D-109
5.4
Record Code SA: Specialized Common Carrier
D-112
5.5
Record Code II: International Country Code
D-113
6.0
CLASS OF SERVICE
D-114
6.1
Record Code DC: Displayable Class of Service
D-116
6.2
Record Code DD: Displayable Class of Service
D-120
6.3
Record Code NC: N-Displayable Class of Service
D-129
7.0
LINE
D-130
7.1
Record Code HG: Hunt Group
D-132
7.2
Record Code MH: Hunt Group Members
D-134
7.3
Record Code GC: Group Speed Calling
D-136
7.4
Record Code GS: Group Speed Calling List Numbers
D-138
7.5
Record Code ED: Extended Dial Call Pickup Numbers
D-140
7.6
Record Code CH: Change Feature by Access Code
D-142
7.7
Record Code DF: CPG Default
D-143
8.0
LINE
D-144
8.1
Record Code LD: Line Data
D-153
8.2
Record Code LM: Line Miscellaneous
D-158
8.3
Record Code LA: Line Appearances
D-160
8.4
Record Code LI: Line Identities
D-2
Record Code CD: Code Call
Record
Code CB: Code Blocked Numbers
’
./ ,”
Record Code AU: Remote Access Authorization Code
ANALYSIS
FEATURES
ASSIGNMENT
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
PARAPAGE GRAPH TOPIC
D-161 - 9.0
D-162.
9.1
D-166
9.2
ATTENDANT
./ %-*
..9.4
FEATURES
Record Code AT: Attendant Console
Record Code BD: Busy Lamp Display Unit
D - 1 6 8 -. 9.3
D-169
CONSOLE
Record Code BK: Busy Lamp Key
-
Record Code CA: Common Attendant
D-174
9.5
Record Code CN: Common Attendant Directory Numbers
D-l 75
10.0
TRUNK
D-l 76
10.1
Record Code Tl: Trunk Group Part 1
D-l 86
10.2
Record Code T2: Trunk Group Part 2
D-203
10.3
Record Code CR: Code Restriction Numbers
D-206
10.4
Record Code EC: Expanded or Conflicting Code Check Tables
D-208
10.5
Record Code AS: Allowable Service Codes
D-21 0
10.6
Record Code TC: Trunk Circuit
D-21 5
10.7
Record Code NA: Nailed Trunk Connection
D-21 7
10.8
Record Code DA: Trunk Group Digit Absorption
D-21 9
11 .o
MOST ECONOMICAL ROUTE SELECTION
D-220
11.1
Record Code MR: MERS Six-Digit Translated NPA
D-227
11.2
Record Code RP: MERS Routing List
D-231
11.3
Record Code SI: MERS Sending Instruction
D-234
11.4
Record Code TR: MERS Numbering Plan Area/ABC Translation
D-239
11.5
Record Code NR: MERS Three-Digit Translated NPA
D-242
11.6
Record Code TP: MERS Time Period
D-243
11.7
Record Code ST: Service Code MERS Translation
D-245
11.8
Record Code PC: Prefix Code Digits
D-247
11.9
Record Code TN: Tone Detector
D-248
11.10
Record Code MS: Specialized Common Carrier Authorization Codes
SVR 5210
FEATURES
8187
D-3
TL-4 30400-l 001
PARAPAGE
GRAPH TOPIC
D-249
11 .-I 1
Record Code LP: Prefix Code Digits for Listed Directory Numbers and Other
Applications
D-250
11 ..12
Record Code MO: MERS On-Net Station Numbers and Sending Instruction
Values
D-253
12.0
NETWORKING
D-254
12.1
Record Code NT: Private Network Translation
D-256
12.2
Record Code TD: Private Network Dl/D2
D-259
13.0
MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDER
D-260
13.1
Record Code MD: Message Detail Recorder
D-262
13.2
Record Code MT: Message Detail Recorder Port
D-263
13.3
Record Code Sl: Message Detail Recorder Screening Option 1
D-264
13.4
Record Code S2: Message Detail Recorder Screening Option 2
D-267
14.0
TERMINAL
D-268
14.7
Record Code CT: Customer Defined Terminal
D-271
14.2
Record Code TT: Serial Device
D-273
15.0
HEALTH CARE/HOTEL FEATURES
D-274
15.1
Record Code HM: Health Care/Motel Miscellaneous
D-277
15.2
Record Code KD: Key Entry Display Unit Assignment
D-279
15.3
Record Code KS: Key Entry Display Unit Special Function Access
D-281
15.4
Record Code MK: Master Key Entry Display Unit
D-284
15.5
Record Code PD: Printer Assignment
D-286
15.6
Record Code RN: Room Number First Digit Translation
D-288
15.7
Record Code CL: Class of Call-Controlled Routing
D-290
15.8
Record Code TL: Transaction Record Control
D-296
15.9
Record Code AL: Audit Record Control
D-301
15.10
Record Code WT: Ward Control
FEATURES
TL-130400-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAPAGE
GRAPH TOPIC
D-303 - 16.0
CENTRALIZED
ANSWERING
SERVICE
BRANCH/MAIN
D-304. 16.1 -=-. 1 * Record Code CF: CAS Branch Features
D-306: 1 6 . 2
Record Code AD: Agent Position
D-308 - 16.3
Record Code AF: Limited Automatic Call Distribution Feature
D-31 0
.16.4
Record Code AG: Agent Group
D-31 5
16.5
Record Code DK: Repertory Dial Key Code
D-31 7
16.6
Record Code RC: Release Link Trunk Circuit
D-31 9
16.7
Record Code SM: Source Messages
D-320
16.8
Record Code SP: Special Messages
D-321
16.9
Record Code TM: Supervisor Talk/Monitor Repertory Dial Key Code
D-323
16.10
Record Code RA: Recorder Announcer
D-326
16.11
Record Code SD: CAS Secondary Directory Numbers
D-329
17.0
PD-200 PACKET DATA
D-330
17.1
Record Code RT: Data System Routing
D-334
17.2
Record Code CP: Data System Common Port
D-340
17.3
Record Code AP: Data System Asynchronous Port
D-359
17.4
Record Code AQ: Data System Asynchronous Port Set/Read List
D-366
17.5
Record Code XP: Data System X.25 Port
D-372
17.6
Record Code Pl: Data System Gobal Parameter - Part 1
D-375
17.7
Record Code P2: Data System Gobal Parameter - Part 2
D-379
17.8
Record Code Cl: Data System Call Processing - Part 1
D-383
17.9
Record Code C2: Data System Call Processing - Part 2
D-385
17.10
Record Code SR: Data System Symbolic Replacement Word/String
D-389
18.0
INTEGRATED
SVR 5210
FEATUREPHONE
8187
USAGE
FORMS
D-5
TL-130400-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAPAGE GRAPH TOPIC
D-401
19.0
REFERENCES
. -=-.”
D-403
'-.'
20.0
CROSS-REFERENCE
D-404
2o.A
D-411
20.i
D-412
20.3
Record Code/Recent Change
Record Cod&/Form Sequence Number
Record Code/T Table Number
D-415
21.0
D-416
21.1
ERROR MESSAGES
CPG Error Messages
TL-130400-1001
FIGURE
PAGE
NUMBER
D-26
3.1
D-42
4.1
Record Code DT: DTMF Receiver Data Sheet
D-43 -
4.2
Record. . Code OC: Office Features Circuits Data Sheet
D-44
4.3
D-48
4.4
Record Code OF: Office Features Data Sheet
D-55
4.5
Record Code OT: Office Timeout Values Data Sheet
D-60
4.6
Record Code OV: Office Timing Values Data Sheet
D-63
4.7
Record Code OD: Other Directory Numbers Data Sheet
D-65
4.8
Record Code PN: Predetermined Night Answer Pilot Numbers Data Sheet
D-66
4.9
Record Code PZ: Paging Zones Data Sheet
D-68
4.10
Record Code SL: User Security Level Password Data Sheet
D-70
4.11
Record Code TF: Traffic Data Facilities Data Sheet
D-72
4.12
Record Code CD: Code Call Data Sheet
D-74
4.13
Record Code CB: Code Blocked Numbers Data Sheet
D-75
4.14
Record Code AU: Remote Access Authorization Code Data Sheet
D-77
4.15
Record Code FA: Facility Restriction Level Authorization Code Data Sheet
D-80
5.1
Record Code AC: Access Code Translation Data Sheet
D-l 04
5.2
Record Code HD: Hundreds Groups Data Sheet
D-l 06
5.3
Record Code IR: Intercept Routing Numbers Data Sheet
D-l 09
5.4
Record Code SA: Specialized Common Carrier Data Sheet
D-112
5.5
Record Code II: International Country Code Data Sheet
D-l 14
6.1
Record Code DC: Displayable Class-of-Service Data Sheet
D-116
6.2
Record Code DD: Displayable Class-of-Service Data Sheet
D-l 20
6.3
Record Code NC: N-Displayable Class-of-Service Data Sheet
D-l 30
7.1
Record Code HG: Hunt Group Data Sheet
D-l 32
7.2
Record Code MH: Hunt Group Members Data Sheet
SVR 5210
.j %-,.
‘.
TOPIC
Record Code FR: Frame Image Card Data Sheet
Record Code OE: Office Equipment Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE
PAGE
NUMBER
D-l 34
7.3.
Record Code GC: Group Speed Calling Data Sheet
D-136
7:4
Record Code GS: Group Speed Calling List Data Sheet
D-l 38
7-5
Record Code ED: Extended Dial Call Pickup Numbers Data Sheet
D-140
7.6
Record Code Cl-l: Change Feature by Access Code Data Sheet
TOPIC
D-142 7.7’
Record Code’ DF: CPG Default Data Sheet
D-144
Record Code LD: Line Data Sheet
8.1
D-153 8.2
Record Code LM: Line Miscellaneous Data Sheet
D-158 8.3
Record Code LA: Line Appearances Data Sheet
D-162
Record Code AT: Attendant Console Data Sheet
9.1
D-166 9.2
Record Code BD: Busy Lamp Display Unit Data Sheet
D-168 9.3
Record Code BK: Busy Lamp Key Data Sheet
D-169 9.4
Record Code CA: Common Attendant Data Sheet
D-174 9.5
Record Code CN: Common Attendant Directory Numbers Data Sheet
D-l 76
10.1
Record Code Tl: Trunk Group Part 1 Data Sheet
D-l 87
10.2A
Record Code T2: Trunk Group Part 2 Data Sheet
D-l 95
10.2B
Trunk Group Toll Restriction Flowchart
D-l 97
10.2c
Three-Digit Analysis
D-l 97
10.2D
Six-Digit Analysis
D-l 98
10.2E
Samples of Toll Restriction for Areas with Toll Access Codes
D-200
10.2F
Samples of Toll Restriction for Areas with 0 + Dialing Alone
D-201
10.2G
Toll Restriction Flowchart
D-204
10.3
Record Code CR: Code Restriction Numbers Data Sheet
D-206
10.4
Record Code EC: Expanded or Conflicting Code Check Tables Data Sheet
D-208
10.5
Record Code AS: Allowable Service Codes Data Sheet
D-21 0
10.6
Record Code TC: Trunk Circuit Data Sheet
D-21 5
10.7
Record Code NA: Nailed Trunk Connection Data Sheet
D-21 8
10.8
Record Code DA: Trunk Group Digit Absorption Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
FIGURE
PAGE
NUMBER TOPIC
D-220 - ll.lA
Record Code MR: MERS Six-Digit Translated NPA Data Sheet
D - 2 2 2 ll.lB
Non-MERS
D-223
ll.lC
Off-Network MERS Record Code Association
D-224 -
11.1 D
On-Network MERS Record Code Association
Application
D - 2 2 5 -. ll.lE-
On/Off-Network MERS Record Code Association
D-227
11.2
Record Code RP: MERS Routing List Data Sheet
D-231
11.3
Record Code SI: MERS Sending Instruction Data Sheet
D-235
11.4
Record Code TR: MERS Numbering Plan Area/ABC Translation Data Sheet
D-239
11.5
Record Code NR: MERS Three-Digit Translated NPA Data Sheet
D-242
11.6
Record Code TP: MERS Time Period Data Sheet
D-243
11.7
Record Code ST: Service Code MERS Translation Data Sheet
D-245
11.8
Record Code PC: Prefix Code Digits Data Sheet
D-247
11.9
Record Code TN: Tone Detector Data Sheet
D-248
11.10
Record Code MS: Specialized Common Carrier Authorization Codes Data
Sheet
D-249
11.11
Record Code LP: Prefix Code Digits for Listed Directory Numbers and Other
Applications Data Sheet
D-250
11.12
Record Code MO: MERS On-Net Station Numbers and Sending Instruction
Values Data Sheet
D-254
12.1
Record Code NT: Private Network Translation Data Sheet
D-256
12.2
Record Code TD: Private Network Dl/D2 Data Sheet
D-260
13.1
Record Code MD: Message Detail Recorder Data Sheet
D-262
13.2
Record Code MT: Message Detail Recorder Port Data Sheet
D-263
13.3
Record Code Sl: Message Detail Recorder Screening Option 1 Data Sheet
D-264
13.4
Record Code S2: Message Detail Recorder Screening Option 2 Data Sheet
D-268
14.1
Record Code CT: Customer Defined Terminal Data Sheet
D-271
14.1
Record Code TT: Serial Device Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE
PAGE
NUMBER TOPIC
D-274
15.1
D-277 -- . . 1. . 5 . 2
D-279
15.3
Record Code HM: Health Care/Motel Miscellaneous Data Sheet
Y.
Record Code KD: Key Entry Display Unit Assignment Data Sheet
Record Code KS: Key Entry Display Unit Special Function Access Data
Sheet
D-281
15.4
Record Code MK: Master Key Entry Display Unit Data Sheet
D-284
15.5
Record Code PD: Printer Assignment Data Sheet
D-286
15.6
Record Code RN: Room Number First Digit Translation Data Sheet
D-288
15.7
Record Code CL: Class of Call-Controlled Routing Data Sheet
D-291
15.8
Record Code TL: Transaction Record Control Data Sheet
D-297
15.9
Record Code AL: Audit Record Control Data Sheet
D-301
15.10
Record Code WT: Ward Control Data Sheet
D-304
16.1
Record Code CF: CAS Branch Features Data Sheet
D-306
16.2
Record Code AD: Agent Position Data Sheet
D-308
16.3
Record Code AF: Limited Automatic Call Distribution Feature Data Sheet
D-31 0
16.4
Record Code AG: Agent Group Data Sheet
D-31 5
16.5
Record Code DK: Repertory Dial Key Code Data Sheet
D-31 7
16.6
Record Code RC: Release Link Trunk Circuit Data Sheet
D-31 9
16.7
Record Code SM: Source Messages Data Sheet
D-320
16.8
Record Code SP: Special Messages Data Sheet
D-321
16.9
Record Code TM: Supervisor Talk/Monitor Repertory Dial Key Code Data
Sheet
D-323
16.10
Record Code RA: Recorder Announcer Data Sheet
D-326
16.11
Record Code SD: CAS Secondary Directory Numbers Data Sheet
D-330
17.1
Record Code RT: Data System Routing Data Sheet
D-334
17.2
Record Code CP: Data System Common Port Data Sheet
D-341
17.3
Record Code AP: Data System Asynchronous Port Data Sheet
D-359
17.4
Record Code AQ: Data System Asynchronous Port Set/Read List Data Sheet
D-366
17.5
Record Code XP: Data System X.25 Port Data Sheet
D-372
17.6
Record Code Pl: Data System Global Parameter Data Sheet - Part 1
TL-130400-1001
LIST OF FIGURES
PAGE
FIGURE
NUMBER TOPIC
D-376 - 17.7
Record Code P2: Data System Global Parameter Data Sheet - Part 2
D-379 ‘. 17.8 -1 Record Code Cl: Data System Call Processing Data Sheet - Part 1
D-383 1 7 . 9 ‘1 *.. Record Code C2: Data System Call Processing Data Sheet - Part 2
D-385 - 17.10
Record Code SR: Data System Symbolic Replacement Word/String Data
‘- Sheet ‘.
D-390
18.1
D-394 18.2
D-398
18.3
FeatureComm III/IV Key Plan
Multi-Line FeatureComm III/IV Feature Button Assignment.
Single-Line FeatureComm III/IV Feature Button Assignment.
TL-130400-1001
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
*
..
TL-130400-1001
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE
PAGE
D-22
D-R
NUMBER
2 . 1
2.2 ..=I.
TOPIC
Directory
Numbers
Universal Card Slot
D-27
3.1
D-33
3.2
Entry Fields
for Record Code FR
..
FR Rules
D-35
3.3
Card Types Versus Identifiers and Status
D-37
3.4
Card Types Versus Identifiers Check
D-39
3.5
Card Types Versus Slot Restriction
D-40
3.6
PD-200 Data Option Maximum Card Number
D-42
4.1
Entry Fields for Record Code DT
D-43
4.2
Entry Fields for Record Code OC
D-45
4.3
Entry Fields for Record Code OE
D-49
4.4
Entry Fields for Record Code OF
D-56
4.5
Entry Fields for Record Code OT
D-61
4.6
Entry Fields for Record Code OV
D-64
4.7
Entry Fields for Record Code OD
D-65
4.8
Entry Fields for Record Code PN
D-67
4.9
Entry Fields for Record Code PZ
D-69
4.10
Entry Fields for Record Code SL
D-71
4.11
Entry Fields for Record Code TF
D-73
4.12
Entry Fields for Record Code CD
D-74
4.13
Entry Fields for Record Code CB
D-76
4.14
Entry Fields for Record Code AU
D-78
4.15
Entry Fields for Record Code FA
D-81
5.1A
Entry Fields for Record Code AC
D-83
5.1B
Standard Access Codes
D-85
5.1c
AC Rules
D-89
5.10
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description
SVR 5210
8187
D-l 3
TL-130400-1001
LIST OF TABLES
PAGE
D-l 05
TABLE
PARA
TOPIC
D-l 06
D-110
D-l 12
5.2.
5..3’
5Y.4
5s
Entry Fields for Record Code HD
Eetry Fields for Record Code IR
Entry Fields for Record Code SA
Entry Fields for Record Code I1
..
D-115
D-117
D-l 21
D-l 27
D-l 28
6.1
6.2
6.3A
6.38
6.3C
Entry Fields for Record
Entry Fields for Record
Entry Fields for Record
N-Displayable Class of
Abbreviations
Code DC
Code DD
Code NC
Service Conflicts and Violations
D-l 31
D-l 33
D-l 35
D-l 37
D-l 39
D-l 41
D-l 42
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
D-l 45
D-l 54
D-l 59
8.1
8.2
8.3
Entry Fields for Record Code LD
Entry Fields for Record Code LM
Entry Fields for Record Code LA
D-l 63
D-l 67
D-l 68
D-l 70
D-l 74
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry
D-l 77
D-l 88
10.1
10.2
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl
Entry Fields for Record Code T2
Fields
Fields
Fields
Fields
Fields
Fields
Fields
Fields
Fields
Fields
Fields
Fields
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
Record
Record
Record
Record
Record
Record
Record
Record
Record
Record
Record
Record
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
HG
MH
GC
GS
ED
CH
DF
AT
BD
BK
CA
CN
LIST 0r
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE
PAGE
P A G E
D-360 _
D-205
10.3
Entry Fields for Record Code CR
D-207
10.4
Entry Fields for Record Code EC
D-209
10.5
Entry Fields for Record Code AS
D-21 1
10.6
Entry Fields for Record Code TC
D-216
10.1
Entry Fields for Record Code NA
D-21 8
10.2
Entry Fields for Record Code DA
D-221
11.1
Entry Fields for Record Code MR
D-228
11.2
Entry Fields for Record Code RP
D-232
11.3
Entry Fields for Record Code SI
D-404
D-236
11.4
Entry Fields for Record Code TR
D-41 1
D-240
11.5
Entry Fields for Record Code NR
D-242
11.6
Entry Fields for Record Code TP
D-244
11.7
Entry Fields for Record Code ST
D-246
11.8
Entry Fields for Record Code PC
D-247
11.9
Entry Fields for Record Code TN
D-248
11.10
Entry Fields for Record Code MS
D-249
11.11
Entry Fields for Record Code LP
D-250
11.12
Entry Fields for Record Code MO
D-254
12.1
Entry Fields for Record Code NT
D-257
12.2
Entry Fields for Record Code TD
D-261
13.1
Entry Fields for Record Code MD
D-262
13.2
Entry Fields for Record Code MT
D-263
13.3
Entry Fields for Record Code Sl
D-265
13.4
Entry Fields for Record Code S2
D-269
14.1
Entry Fields for Record Code CT
D-272
14.2
Entry Fields for Record Code TT
D-367
D-373
_
‘j
*
D-377 _
D-380
,_
D-384
PARA
TOPIC
D-386
D-401
D-412
D-41 6
J.L
TL-130400-10
TL-130400-1001
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
TABLE
-PAGE
PARA-
D-275
I,%.1
D-278
15.2
_
D-279
D-280
15.36
D-282
154
D-285
15.5
D-287
15.6
D-289
15.7
D-290
15.8A
D-292
15.88
D-296
15.9A
D-297
15.9B
D-302
15.10
D-305
16.1
D-306
16.2
D-309
16.3
D-31 1
16.4
D-31 6
16.5
D-31 8
16.6
D-31 9
16.7
D-320
16.8
D-322
16.9
D-324
16.10
D-327
16.11
D-331
17.1
D-335
17.2
D-342
17.3A
D-356
17.3B
,
D-358
17.3c
.
.I
TL-130400-1001
GENERAL
Generic Program
....
-.
CuSltgmer Data
Base Program
.I
1.0 The Fujitsu GTE Business Systems’ OMNI SI is controlled by
system software composed of the generic and customer data
base programs. The initial and update programming of the data
base is performed by the system.
1.1 The generic program contains the software instructions for
all of the features in the system. It is ordered by SVR (System
Version Release) along with the system hardware, and its
contents are the same at all sites using the same SVR.
1.2 The customer data base program contains all of the,
equipment, feature, and service parameters for the site. It is
programmed for each site before the site is placed in service.
Changes to an existing site configuration are made via data base
updates, Recent Change, and Manual Recent Change.
There are two ways of configuring the customer data base,
custom engineering or pre-engineering.
Custom Engineered
Data Base
1.2.1 Information to be programmed into the custom data base
can be sent to FGBS Manufacturing Engineering six weeks
before system installation. It is checked, converted into loading
format, put onto a floppy disk, and returned to the job site. Once
the data is put on the disk, any changes must be entered on site
after loading.
Manufacturing Engineering uses CPG (Cust6mer Programming
Generator) computer programming to process customer data,
i.e., data specific to a job site. The data is entered on data
sheets and then processed by the CPG. This document
describes the format for all of the software programming data
sheets and gives instructions for completing them. Data sheets
are divided into related groups of data by record codes. Record
codes exist for lines, trunks, Attendant Console(s), features, and
the PD-200’” Data Option, as well as other categories.
TL-130400-1001
...
xL *
Additional
Documentation
The CPG produces an error message for all data that is
incomplete. It checks for improper data format, invalid data
ranges, and data inconsistencies between fields. An engineer
from Manufacturing Engineering reviews the CPG program
print-outs after each program run. An error message guide
describes each error print-out in detail, and the engineer
decides on the corrective action to take. If clarification is
needed, Marketing Engineering or the site is contacted. The
engineer then inputs any changes to the stored data sheet record
code infor lation and returns it through the CPG program to
recheck fi errors. This procedure is repeated until no errors
are found. The data is then converted into system memory
format, placed onto a floppy disk, and returned to the job site for
. . loading into the system.
In addition to the floppy disk, the customer is provided with
several documentation listings for the site.
@ Error Summary Listing. This listing summarizes the errors
found in the input data base.
8 Customer Programming Records Listing. This listing
documents all of the data base programming values contained
in the CPG program input. It has approximately the same
format as the software data sheets.
9 Statistical Summary Listing. This listing summarizes the
results of the CPG processing for the site.
@ Alternate Sorts Listing. The line, trunk, and common port data
record codes from the CPG listing are printed in several
different orders.
0 Cable Pairs Listing. Wire pair color code and cable
designations are associated with physical locations for all lines
and trunks in the system.
0 Customer Memory Tables Listing. This listing shows a
formatted print-out of all of the site dependent memory tables
and their hexadecimal values.
Pre-Engineered
Data Base
1.2.2 An alternative to a custom engineered data base is a
standard (pre-engineered) data base. The standard data base
comes in several sizes with pre-programed values. Loading the
standard data base into the system is done at installation.
Modifications to the data base can be made on site via Recent
Change.
The same type of CPG produced documentation is sent with a
pre-engineered data base as is sent with a custom engineered
data base. Any data base changes made on site must be added
to the CPG.
TL-130400-I 00-l
DATA SHEET
PREPARATION
2.0 This section contains instructions for providing data base
information. Software programming data sheets are required.
Data sheets are ordered under part number Fm-41395. A
single sheet for each record code is provided, with a maximum
of 64 entries per sheet. Because some record codes, such as
those for line or trunk circuits, require more entries than can be
provided for by one data sheet, copies of the data sheet must be
made.
Data Sheet
Design
2.1 The data sheets are designed as keypunch input forms, with
each line relating to an 80-column tab card image. If a record
code data sheet is not used for a given site, it must be marked
“N/A” and sent in as part of the total package of forms.
. 1 x-*
Coding Conventions
Alphabetic, Numeric,
And Characters Rules
2.2 This paragraph provides information for filling in the data
sheets. The completed data sheets used for the OMNI SI are
referred to as record codes.
2.2.1 The following rules apply when filling out the data sheets:
l
1 denotes the numeral “one”
l
i denotes the letter “eye”
e 2 denotes the numeral “two”
0 Z denotes the letter “zee”
l
D denotes the letter “dee” (it should not be rounded to look like
the numeral 0)
e U denotes the letter “you”
* Zeros must be slashed (0) to prevent keypunch errors due to
confusing zeros with the letter 0.
0 A dash (-) is used within the text to indicate a not applicable
condition.
- A blank entry is interpreted by the keypunch operator as an
overlooked field, and you will be contacted for an entry. This
will delay completion of the data base.
- A dash indicates that the field was not overlooked, but
requires no entry.
- When a dash is entered and the field has a default value,
that value is assigned by the CPG.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code
Entries
2.2.2 The following entries are found on the record code sheets:
0 Job Drawing Serial Number. This preprinted entry refers to a
prefix ID and the base number for an installation identity
number assigned by Manufacturing Engineering.
e Sequence Number. This preprinted entry, located in columns
7, 8, and 9, is used by the CPG to incorporate data sheet
information to generate the site data disk.
x.1 *
Directory Number
l
Record Code. This preprinted entry, located in columns 10
and 11, refers to the type of features referenced on each data
sheet.
‘2.2.3 When a four-digit number is used, enter (0000 - 9999).
A three-digit directory number is entered as (000 - 999).
These entries are to be right justified in the four columns
provided. An example of a right justified three- and four-digit
numbering plan is shown in Table 2.1. Defining a three-digit
number requires a blank before the first digit. This is the only
application in which a blank is used in completing the record
‘codes.
Table 2.1 Directory Numbers
Three-Digit Directory Numbers
999
(a blank comes before the number)
Card Slot
2.24 The KS (Universal Card Slot) to PCS (Physical Card Slot)
numbering convention and comparison are given in Table 2.2.
I
TL-130400-1001
Table 2.2
Universal
Card Slot
00
01
02
03
Universal Card Slots
04
05
06
07
08
09
40
11
Expansion
File
Group C
(File C)
Y.
Groub D
(File D)
25
DO
19
Cl
17
c2
15
c3
13
c4
11
c5
c”G
EY
2
22
23 24
c9 C l 0 C l 1
26
Dl
27
82
28
D3
29
04
30
D5
31
D6
32
D7
33
D8
34
D9
21
A6
22
A7
23
A8
24
25 26
A9 A10 All
32
B6
33
B7
34
B8
Ii:
35
DlO
36
Dll
Get Started
File - ~Group A
(File A)
18
A0
19
A2
Group B
(File 8)
28
BO
29
B2
20
A4
30
B3
31
B5
36
Bll
NOTE: Special physical location rules:
6 Tl uses group C card slots COl-C06.
- Minimally implemented:
12 circuits CO1 , C02, CO3
16 circuits COl, C02, C03, CO4
20 circuits COl, C02, C03, C04, CO5
- Fully implemented:
24 circuits COl, C02, C03, C04, C05, CO6
@ Off-premises line cards must be engineered as 1.2-inch
cards.
@ Group A card slot 00 can only be used by a DTMF card, a
conference card, or cards used to terminate an LPB (Local
Packet Bus).
Suggested
Preparation Order
SW 5210
2.2.5 The arrangement of the record codes for this SVR allows
them to be filled out in their existing order.
8187
D-23
TL-130400-1001
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
..
TL-130400-1001
FRAME IMAGE
--
.I
*
_
‘.
SW 5210
.
3.0 This section describes Record Code FR. Record Code FR
lists the cards that are located in the universal cards slots of a
given system.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code FR:
Frame Image
Card
3.1 Record Code FR, Figure 3.1, lists the types of cards and the
FB (Functional Board) numbers of every occupied universal card
slot in the system. Certain data parameters are specified in this
record code, depending on the type of card. From one to three
data parameters can be required per card. The parameters are
coded in three different identifier fields; however, some cards do
not require an entry in any of the three fields.
This record code provides a listing of all voice and data cards
used in the system. If the PD-200 Data Option is used in the
system, cards supporting that feature must be included on this
record code. The order in which the cards are listed on the
record code does not matter. All cards of a certain FB number
can be put together, or the cards can be listed as they appear in
‘* the system. When the information from this record code is
processed and returned as part of the CPG, all cards will be
listed as they appear within the system.
Since the maximum number of card slots in the OMNI SI is 41,
the maximum number of entries on this record code is 41. The T
tables used for storing the physical location of a card depend on
the card type. The various T tables affected for a given card type
are listed with the card type descriptions. The physical location
is used as an index into Table T6566. Table 3.6 provides
information on the maximum number of PD-200 Data Option
cards allowed in the system.
~----------------I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
fz
I
I
I
1
1
0
I
I
~-------~------------------------,----------------~---~----,
I
I
I
I
I
!
T
;
I
;
I
I
I
1
I
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
I
8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
‘I
I
;
s;
:;Ti
1
I
I
f
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
r-------i
IF=
IC
I
8
s
P
E
El
@I
PI
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
k
i
I
I
I
I
I
y
I
I
I
T
I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I2 I2 I2 I2 12:; I
71*19101112l3141516171819101112131415
-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+:
I
Ol1l2lFI~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- & - - i - - 1 - - ~ - * - ~ - - L - ~ - ~ - - L - ~ - ~ - ~ ’ L
Figure 3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
$I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
!I
;
I
1
I
IR
lA’
lN’
1s;
I;c’
I 10’
I,D’
1 IE;
I
II
II
;
I
IIll
i
I;
I
I
-7--r-l-T-T-T-TT-T -T-t -T-+-’
2i2i3i3
i 3 i3i3i3i3
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4
8 1 9 1 0 1 1 12 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 011 I2
i
+- +-+-+-++-+-+-+
-+-+-.I 11 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
-*-*-LAI
I
I
t-
Record Code FR: Frame Image Card Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
Table 3.1
Entry Fields for Record Code FW
COMMENTS
-The field varies from card type to card
type, and not all card types require an entry.
-Refer to the extended card list that follows
this table to determine whether or not a
primary identifier is required, and to
determine what the allowable entries are.
-The field varies from card type to card
type, and not all card types require an entry.
-Refer to the extended card list that follows
this table to determine whether or not a
secondary identifier is required, and to
determine what the allowable entries are.
varies from card type to card
type, and not all card types require an entry.
-Refer to the extended card list that follows
this table to determine whether or not a
TL-130400-1001
Table 3.1
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
32-39
Card FBNumber
-2
.j ,”
-.
Entry Fields for Record Code FR (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
This field entry is
the FB number of
the card.
See comments
following Table
3.1.
Any ASCII
characters are
allowed.
..
COMMENTS
This field determines the FB number of the
card type listed in columns 16-l 9:
Voice cards:
AGNT = FB-17209
AIOD = FB-17276
ART = FB-17208
ATTN = FB-17208
CIP = FB-17225
CONF = FB-51279
COT = FB-17202
DTMF = FB-17203
DTMl = FB-17203
DTRK = FB-15278, FB-15280, FB-17277
or FB-15277, FB-20718 or FB-17192
DVC = FB-17236
EMT = FB-17201
EMT4 = FB-51267
ERLT = FB-17251
FP = FB-17254
FPOP = FB-17250
ILT = FB-51280
KEDU = FB-17209
OFFP = FB-17250
OPI = TR-100119
PDIC = FB-17210
POTS = FB-17254
RLT = FB-17251
SM = FB-51279
TDET = FB-17280
VCIP = FB-17235
Data cards:
ADMP(-A) = FB-17229 and
ADMP(-C) = FB-17230
BT = FB-17227
DCP = FB-17231
DCPB = FB-17231
NIC = FB-17242
PBE = FB-17227
PR = FB-4 7228
VP20 = FB-17246
VP21 = FB-17246
VPLO = FB-17226
VPLl = FB-17226
NOTE: FB numbers are repeated for different
card types, because the same card can be
used for different applications. The card
types identify the various uses of the cards.
D-28
Table 3.1
Entry Fields for Record Code FW (Continued)
COL.
NO.
COMMENTS
This field determines whether or not a card is
used for AlOD, ART, or CONF cards. all other
card types are dashed. In
service conditions for other
NOTES:
~.
1. The tables in which the physical location information is stored depend
on the card type. For tables initialized, see Note 2. The physical
location is used as an index into Table T6566.
2. The maximum number of records is 41.
3.
PD-200 cards are in bold print (see Table 3.6 for system maximum).
4. The specification of Tl spans on Record Code FR requires some
explanation. The actual printed circuit boards that make up a Tl span
in the OMNI SI consist of FB-17192 (Tl B2), FB-20718 (TlS), FB17277 (SIL), FB-15280 (LCM), and FB-15278 (FDC). These doublewidth cards are placed in physical card slots C6/XlO, C5IX12, C4/X14,
C3/X16, C2/X18 of the Expansion File. None of these card slots
corresponds to a universal card slot. An X denotes slots with no
connection to the backplane.
The DTRK (Digital Trunk) card types specified on Record Code FR
reserve the universal card slots that correspond to the hardware
addresses used by the Tl span. Each universal card slot represents
four Tl channels. A total of six universal card slots represent the entire
Tl span (COl-CO6 for the OMNI SI). The last 3 universal card slots
representing a Tl span may be used for cards types other than DTRK
card types if the full 24 Tl channel capability is not required.
5 . Several card types in the following list of cards are referred to by
relative controlling card number and relative line card number. The
following information explains how these numbers are derived.
@ Relative controlling card number is derived from tables T7053-X
(where X = PEC number). Each table contains 16 bytes which are
numbered 0 to 15. When assigning a relative controlling card
number, select an unused entry from one of these tables.
e Relative line card number is derived from T2541, 12551, 12561,
T2571, T25A1, T2581, T25C4, or T25D1, depending on the PEC
number. Each table contains 32 bytes which are numbered O-31.
When assigning a relative line card number, select an unused entry
from one of these tables.
TL-130400-1001
Valid card types are as follows:
ADMP Denotes the data system administrative processor cards (one set
maximum). The primary identifier is the ADMP number - 0000.
The secondary identifier is the ADMP card number - 0000
(ADMP-A) to 0001 (ADMP-C). The tertiary identifier is the
controlling UCBIDCP number 0000-0009. Entries are made in
T6563, T705A, and T6566.
*.j * AGNT
Denotes the agent Programmable Attendant Console Electronic
Telephone (PACET) data link card (32 maximum). No identifiers
are required.
AIOD
Denotes the AIOD card (1 maximum). Entries are made in T6111,
T6131, and T2701. No identifiers are required.
ART
Denotes asynchronous receiver/transmitter cards (3 maximum).
The primary identifier is ART card type - 0009, 0010, or 0011. No
other identifier is required. Entries are made in T6111, T6134,
T6394, and T639B. Unless the FB-17208-BO card is used, the
card may overhang into the next slot.
ATTN
Denotes attendant BLDU card (3 maximum). No identifiers are
required. Unless the FB-17208-BO card is used, the card may
overhang into the next slot.
BT
Denotes bus terminator card (for local packet buses associated
with packet routers and packet bus extender cards). The primary
identifier is packet router number - 0000 to 0001. The secondary
identifier is local packet bus/ bus segment combination - 0000 to
0003 is local packet bus 0, bus segments 0 to 3; 0004 to 0007 is
local packet bus 1, bus segments 0 to 3. Entries are made in
T6562 and T6567. See Table 3.6 for maximum cards allowed.
CIP
Denotes Featurephone data link card (16 maximum of all
Featurephone/Digital Phone data link cards). The primary identifier
is relative controlling card number - 0000 to 0015 (see Note 5).
No other identifier is required. Entries are made in T7053-0 and
T7057-0.
CONF
Denotes conference card (2 maximum). The primary identifier is
conference circuit number - 0000 to 0001. No other identifier is
required. Entries are made in T6111, T6131, T2741, and T2742.
COT
Denotes CO trunk card (16 maximum of all trunk cards). No other
identifier is required.
DCP
Denotes data device controlling data UCB card (4 maximum with
this SVR). The primary identifier is DCP number - 0000. No other
identifier is required. Entries are made in T6565.
TL-130400-1001
x-
DCPB
Denotes data device controlling data UCB card with a bus
terminator (4 maximum). The primary identifier is DCP number 0000 to 0003. The secondary identifier is packet router number 0000 to 0004. The tertiary identifier is the LPB (Local Packet Bus)
bus segment. Entries are made in T6562 and T6567.
DTMF
Denotes DTMF receiver card with four circuits (8 maximum). No
identifiers are required.
DTRK
Denotes digital trunk card (Tl spans). The engineering of digital
trunks requires that physical locations corresponding to the
hardware addresses used for Tl spans be specified (6 maximum).
No identifiers are required.
DVC‘.
Denotes data voice control interface processor card (16 maximum
of all FeaturephoneIDigital Phone data link cards, 32 maximum of
all line cards). The primary identifier is relative line card number 0000 to 0031; the secondary identifier is relative controlling card
number - 0000 to 0015 (see Note 5). No other identifier is
required. Entries are made in T2541, T6561, T7053-0, and
T7057-0.
EMT
Denotes 2-wire E&M trunk card (23 maximum of all trunk cards).
No identifiers are required.
EMT4
Denotes 4-wire E&M trunk card (23 maximum of all trunk cards).
No identifiers are required. (Cable pairs listing must show second
cable.)
ERLT
Denotes E&M trunk card used as release link trunk card (4
maximum). No identifiers are required.
FP
Denotes Featurephone line card (32 maximum of all line cards).
The primary identifier is relative line card number - 0000 to 0031
(see Note 5). No other identifier is required. Entries are made in
T2541 and T6561.
FPOP
Denotes Featurephone off-premises line card (16 maximum of all
line cards). The primary identifier is relative line card number 0000 to 0031 (see Note 5). No other identifier is required. Entries
are made in T2541 and T6.561.
ILT
Denotes incoming loop trunk card (23 maximum of all trunk cards).
No identifiers are required.
KEDU
Denotes KEDU/printer
required.
NIC
Denotes network interface card (16 maximum). The primary
identifier is controlling DCP number (0000 this SVR). No other
identifier is required. Entries are made in T6566.
card (2 maximum). No identifiers are
TL-130400-1001
OFFP
Denotes off-premises line card (32 maximum of all line cards).
The primary identifier is relative line card number - 0000 to 0031
(see Note 5). No other identifier is required. Entries are made in
T2541 and T6561.
OPI
Denotes the OMNI PMS interface card (1 maximum). No identifiers
are required.
PBE
Denotes packet bus extender card (2 maximum). The primary
identifier is packet router number - 0000 to 0001. No other
identifier is required. Entries are made in T6562 and T6567.
PDIC
Denotes paging and dictation trunk card (23 maximum of all trunk
cards).
No identifiers are required.
.
POTS
Denotes regular line card (32 maximum of all line cards). The
primary identifier is relative line card number - 0000 to 0031 (see
Note 5). No other identifier is required. Entries are made in T2541
and T6561.
PR
Denotes packet router card (2 maximum with this SW). The
primary identifier is packet router number - 0000 to 0001. No
other identifier is required. Entries are made in T6562 and
T7058-0.
RLT
Denotes release link trunk card (4 maximum). No identifiers are
required.
SM
Denotes silent monitor card (8 maximum). The primary identifier is
silent monitor card number - 0000 to 0007. No other identifier is
required. Entries are made in T5344.
TDET
Denotes SCC tone detector card (8 maximum). No identifiers are
required.
VCIP
Denotes voice control interface processor card (16 maximum of all
Featurephone/Digital Phone data link cards (16 maximum of all line
cards). The primary identifier is relative line card number - 0000
to 0031 (see Note 5). The secondary identifier is relative controlling
card number - 0000 to 0015 (see Note 5). No other identifier is
required. Entries are made in T2541, T7053-0, and T7057-0.
VP20
Denotes Voice Packet Line Cards VPLC Mark 2 or VPLC2, type 0,
eight circuit (32 maximum of all line cards). The primary identifier
is relative line card number - 0000 to 0031 (see Note 5). The
secondary identifier depends on card usage as follows:
*
.1
*
0 Voice only - relative controller card number 0000 to 0015 (see
Note 5)
0 Voice and data - relative controller card number 0000 to 0015
(see Note 5)
TL-130400-1001
0 Data only - always ---The tertiary identifier depends on card usage as follows:
0 Voice only - always 0000
0 Voice and data - always 0001
l
.I5.*
Data only - always ----
Entries are made in T2541,
T6561, T7053-0,
and T7057.
VP21
Denotes VPLC2, type 1, two circuit (32 maximum of all line cards).
The primary identifier is relative line card number - 0000 to 0031
‘- (see Note 5). No other identifier is required. Entries are made in
T2541 and T6561.
VPLO
Denotes VPLC, type 0, eight circuit (32 maximum of all line cards).
The primary identifier is relative line card number - 0000 to 0031
(see Note 5). No other identifier is required. Entries are made in
T2541 and T6564.
VPLl
Denotes VPLC, type 1, two circuit (32 maximum of all line cards).
The primary identifier is relative line card number - 0000 to 0031
(see Note 5). No other identifier is required. Entries are made in
T2541 and T6561.
Table
3.2 FR
._- ._._ -.- -- Rules
---_--
=R-01 CARD TYPE - PRIMARY, SECONDARY, AND TERTIARY IDENTIFIERS
Consult Table 3.3, Card Types Versus Identifiers and Status, to determine approximate values
to specify for each particular card type. This table specifies the valid ranges of the three
identifiers and the status given a particular card type.
FR-02 CARD TYPE - PHYSICAL LOCATION
If the card type is DTRK, then the group field must be C since Tl spans can only be installed
in this group. Specific card placement restrictions are in effect for the following card types:
. BT
. DCPB
. PBE
. PR
These cards can only be placed in the following group/slots:
. AOO, AlO, BOO, B09
@
COO, CO9, DOO, DO1 , DlO
FR-50 CARD TYPE - PEC - PRIMARY, SECONDARY, TERTIARY IDENTIFIERS
Consult Table 3.4, Card Types Versus Identifiers Checks, to determine the appropriate values
to specify for each particular card type. The table shows the meaning of the primary,
secondary, and tertiary identifiers on the FR record and checks that are applicable for each
set of card types. Also shown is Table 3.5, Card Types Versus Card Slot Restriction.
TL-130400-1001
Table 3.2
FR Rules (Continued)
FR-51 PHYSICAL LOCATION
e
The PEC, group, and slot specified for this card must be unique. PEG always = 0.
l
The DTRK cards must always be assigned from the lowest to the highest slot number
without any other type of card residing between the DTRK cards.
e
No other type of card can reside in one of the slots required to implement the Tl span
which is implied by the input of a DTRK card.
@
The-PEC, group, and slot specified must be valid for the PEC type. PEC always = 0.
@
A previous FR-record cannot define a wide card which overhangs into a specified slot.
e
The card type specified must not be assigned a physical location to which it is not
allowed.
FR-52
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
The PEC, group, and slot specified for a card must be unique. PEC always = 0.
FR-53 CARD TYPE
The data system card types (ADMP, BT, DCP, DCPB, NIC, PR, PBE, VPLO, VPLl, VP20 and
VP21) are only allowed in systems with the PD-200 Data Option.
FR-56 LOCAL PACKET BUS
The minimum local packet bus configuration is a packet router (card type PR) and a bus
,
terminator (card types BT and DCPB) in the primary file (bus 0). A second local packet bus
may be added by using a packet bus extender (card type PBE). If the second file is used
(bus l), it must contain a bus extender card and terminator card.
FR-57 LOCAL PACKET BUS
All data cards must be placed on a local packet bus segment. The ends of a local packet
bus segment are defined by the placement of PR, PBE, and bus terminator cards. All data
cards must be placed between a PR or PBE and a bus terminator.
FR-59 DATA SYSTEM CARD TYPES
If the data option is specified on Record Code OE, then at least one each of the following
cards must be defined:
0 ADMP
0 PR
0 BT (DCPB)
FR-60 CARD TYPE - PRIMARY IDENTIFIER
The primary index for SM (Silent Monitor) cards must be continuous (i.e., the SM card
numbers must be assigned from 0 to 7 corresponding to the number of SM cards 1 to 8).
TL-130400-1001
Table 3.2
FR Rules (Continued)
FR-61 PHYSICAL LOCATION
If a controlling DCP (UCB) number is used as the primary identifier for a NfC card, the same
number must be used as the primary identifier on a DCP or DCPB card.
FR-62 EXPANSION FILE STATUS
If group C or D is listed in the physical location, Expansion File status on record code OE
must be ma&d equipped.
Table 3.3
VALUE OF
CARD TYPE
Card Types Versus Identifiers and Status
ALLOWABLE PRIMARY
IDENTIFIER RANGE
ADMP
ALLOWABLE SECONDARY
IDENTIFIER RANGE
ALLOWABLE
TERTIARY IDENTIFIER RANGE
STATUS
FIELD
0000-0001
----
AGNT
AIOD
----
ART
ATTN
----
BT
0000-0001
CIP
0000-0015
CONF
COT
0000-0001
----
DCP
0000-0003
DCPB
0000-0003
DTMF
----
DTRK
----
DVC
EMT
0000-0031
----
EMT4
----
EMT
----
FP
0000-0031
FPOP
0000-0031
---_
ILT
0000 or 0004
we--
----
IS, OS
0000-0001
-w-e
0000 or 0004
0000-0015
--
----
-w-w
TL-130400-1001
Table 3.3
VALUE OF
CARD TYPE
KEDU
NC WFP
OPi
PBE ._
PDIC
Card Types Versus Identifiers and Status (Continued)
ALLOWABLE PRIMARY
IDENTIFIER RANGE
---_
ALLOWABLE SECONDARY
IDENTIFIER RANGE
ALLOWABLE
TERTIARY IDENTIFIER RANGE
STATUS
FIELD
___-
-___
--
0000-0003
__--
-_--
--
.--Tl ~0000-0031
____
----
--
----
-_--
_---
-_
-___
___-
__
----
-___
--
oooo-ooqj
--__
POTS
0000-0031
----
____
_-
PR
0000-0001
-___
----
--
____
_---
--
_-__
-_--
-_
-_--
___-
-_
_--_
--
RLT
SM
TDET
---0000-0007
----
VCIP
0000-0031
0000-0015
VP20
0000-0031
0000-0015
o r --__
VP21
0000-0031
----
___-
--
VPLO
0000-0031
_---
--_-
--
VPLl
0000-0031
__--
----
--
0000-0001
or ____
--
Table 3.4
CARD TYPE
Card Types Versus Identifiers Checks (Continue1
PRIMARY IDENTIFIER
ADMP ADMP number
AIOD
ART
N/A
IDENTIFIER
BT
Packet router number
CIP
Relative controller card
number
AnlX$le~ard
circuit
N/A
Local packet bus/ bus
segment
N/A
N/A
DCP
DCP number
DCPB
DCP number
Packet router number
DVC
Relative line card
number
Relative controller card
number
FP
Relative line card
number
N/A
FPOP
lariat&
line card
N/A
OFFP
Relative line card
number
N/A
OPI
TERTIAR
IDENTIFII
N/A
ART card number
CONF ($$erFnce
SECONDARY
N/A
N/A
N/A
NIC
Controlling DCP number
NIA
PBE
Packet router number
N/A
POTS
Relative line card
number
N/A
PR
Packet router number
N/A
SM
Etil;eyonitor
N/A
card
VCIP
Relative line card
number
Relative controller card
number
VP20
Relative line card
number
Relative controller card
number
VP21
Relative line card
number
N/A
VPLO
Relative line card
number
N/A
VPLl
Relative line card
number
N/A
Local
bus/ bus
segment
-
TL-130400-1001
TL-130400-1001
Table 3.6
NOTES:
Check 1.
Check 2.
Check 3.
v.I
*
-.
- Check 4.
Check 5.
Check 6.
Check 7.
Check 8.
Check 9.
Check 10.
Check 11.
For card type ADMP. The
card number combination
For card type ART. The P
duplicated.
For card types containing
packet bus/ bus segment i
DCPB), the packet router r
bus/bus segment identifier
across any of the card type
For card types containing r
information (CIP, DVC, VCI,
relative controller card nurr
duplicated across any of th
For card type CONF, the cc
be duplicated.
For card types containing 0
and DCPB), the DCP numbs
either of the card types.
For card types containing re
information (DVC, FP, FPOP
VP21, VPLO, and VPLl), the
number cannot be duplicate{
For card type PBE, the pack
duplicated.
For card type PR, the packet
duplicated.
For card type SM, the silent I
duplicated.
For card types AIOD and OPI
system is allowed. For card 1
must appear as the DCP num
DCPB.
PD-200 Data
Card Type
-
TL-130400-1001
SYSTEM
PARAMETERS AND
MISCELLANEOUS
FEATURES
4.0 This section describes the record codes required to define
the various system parameters and miscellaneous features. The
following record codes are required:
l
Record Code DT defines the location of the system’s DTMF
cards.
l
Record Code OC defines the location of the conference, AIOD,
and Music-On-Hold circuit cards.
l
. .
l
.
Record Code OE defines miscellaneous system data.
Record Code OF defines additional miscellaneous system
data.
0 Record Code OT defines timeout intervals.
l
Record Code OV defines additional timeout intervals.
l
Record Code OD defines non-line circuit directory numbers.
l
Record Code PN defines predetermined night answer pilot
numbers.
l
Record Code PZ defines paging zones.
l
Record Code SL defines voice and data passwords.
0 Record Code TF defines traffic study parameters.
l
Record Code CD defines code calling parameters.
0 Record Code CB defines seven- and ten-digit numbers
screened by MERS.
l
l
Record Code AU defines remote access authorization codes.
Record Code FA defines FRL (Facility Restriction Level)
authorization codes.
TL-130400-I
001
Record Code DT:
DTMF Receiver
r---------r---r-r------I
I I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
I I
"IT
T
T
4.1 Record Code DT, Figure 4.1, defines the location and
status of the system’s DTMF (FB-17203) receiver card(s).
The system can support a maximum of two DTMF receiver
cards with four circuits per card.
T---T-----------------------------------------------~
I
I
TI
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
x
Figure 4.1
Record Code DT: DTMF Receiver Data Sheet
Table 4.1 Entry Fields for Record Code DT
COL.
NO.
12-13
15
16-17
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
DTMF
Receiver
Number
00-07 = number
There can be a maximum of two DTMF
receiver cards per ONMI SI.
-If one DTMF receiver card is used, receiver
numbers 00-03 can be used.
-If a second DTMF receiver card is needed,
that card can use receiver numbers 04-07.
-Each number must be unique.
PEC
0 = PEC number
Enter PEC 0.
-A DTMF receiver circuit must appear on an
FB-17203-A or FB-17203-IA card.
-This card must be defined on Record Code
FR.
- T h e physical location for each circuit must
be unique.
Group
A-D = group
number
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within PEC 0 is
this card?
Card Slot
00-l 1 = slot
Which card slot within the group is this card?
number
18
19-20
Circuit
Number
O-3 = assigned
circuit number
Which circuit on the card is being used?
Equipped
Status
IS = in service
OS = out of service
Is the card in service or out of service?
-A slot can be reserved for a card by listing
the location and marking it out of service.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code OC:
Office Features Circuits
4.2 Record Code OC, Figure 4.2, defines the location and status
of the Music-On-Hold circuit cards.
r---------T-T-----,---7--;----------------‘-----------------------------~-~
I
I
I
,
IT,
IR'
IA,
INI
IS'
I
I
I
I
MUSIC ON
H O L D CKT
I
L--,-l---
IA,
IC,
IT,
I I I
IO1
IN,
I
ICI
IO1
ID,
IE,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-.
I
'
I
l
I
-T-T-t-t-T-T-T-t-T-T-T--r-T-,
11111111111111111111,2,212,2,2:;:;:;:2121313131313131313l3l3l4l4l
7181910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011121314151617181910,1,
’
I
I
I
I
I
,
,
1
I’
I
I
,
i-4
181
‘01
-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~ C-4
1011151()1cl01
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
i-A-.l.-a--LI-A
-~--L-~-~-_C-~--L-~-~-~--L-~-~-~-~-'~--~-~
Figure 4.2 Record Code OC: Office Features Circuits Data Sheet
Table 4.2 Entry Fields for Record Code OC
0 = PEC number
The SI has two files called PEC 0.
17524-A or the POPS FB-17250-A.
-It is recommended to mark this field OS
whether or not the feature is used.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code OE:
Office Equipment
4.3 Record Code OE, Figure 4.3, defines miscellaneous office
and equipment data.
PEC
I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4I
’
,7l819lO11
12131415161718191011
12131415161718191011
12131415161716191011
~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I
,,)lolg,ol
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L_L-L-L-L-~_~-*_*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
l------I
I
B
I
I
T
)
I
I
I
I
; EQUIPPED ;
, STATUS I
;’
:
IT:
I4 I
12 I
19 I
11 I
I I
I
I
I
RI
i
1 T
I y
A
1
I
I
I
5
7
:
I
I
I
I
1 AI
NI
I Sl
1 AI
1 Cl
I TI
I
I
I
NI
I Cl
I Cl
I
I
1 II
1 01
I NI
AI
GI
EI
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
:-,-i-,-i-
T -
cl
1 01
1b
I EI
I
I
t
TI
I ul
I SI
I
I
; T;
I RI
!
I
121
I
-r-----r-r-------r---r----------------------------------------~-~
’
I
I
I
I
I
F
;
;
I
E
I
I
I
I
I
I
UI
SI
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
r ’- + ’ - + - r - r - r - + - r - t - r - r - r-r-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-r-r-r-,
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
131415161718191011
12131415161716191011
12131415161718191011
121
L-L-L_L-L_L-L-I-L-L-I-L-l-l-l_l-l-l_l_l-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-----~-~
Figure 4.3 Record Code OE:
Office Equipment Data Sheet
IO I
I
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.3
Entry Fields for Record Code QE
COMMENTS
assigned to this system.
-This number is used for identification
r more office codes are used by a
21
Consultation
consultation
-The recommended value for this field is 3.
-If 1 is entered, a three-way conference
cannot be held by any line in the system.
Transfer Divert
Back Method on
Busy or No
Answer
P = divert to
If a call is transferred to a busy or no answer
station, this field determines whether the call
will go back to the attendant or go to the
station that forwarded the call.
-For normal applications, it is recommended
to enter P in this field. This prevents the
attendant operator from being overloaded with
calls.
transferring party
A = divert to
attendant
22
Ringing Rate
D = distinctive
R = regular
This field determines whether the system has
distinctive or regular ringing.
-If distinctive ringing is used, the station user
can tell the difference between station (inside
calls) and trunk (outside calls).
-A station call rings 1 second on, 3 seconds
off, while a trunk call rings 1 second on, 1
second off.
23
Tick Tone
Provided
Y = provided
N = not provided
This field determines whether or not a tick
tone is provided.
-The tick tone is an audible indication that the
system has recognized the access code
dialed and is waiting for more digits to be
dialed.
-This is an older feature not normally used.
TL-130400-1004
Table 4.3
Entry Fields for Record Code OE (Continued)
COMMENTS
This field only app
-This field determines whether or not a burst
of tone is heard by the station user if the call is
to go out over a route marked for burst tone.
-Normally the burst tone is put on the last
and most expensive trunk group in a route.
-This feature lets the station user decide
whether to hang up and try later on a cheaper
N = not provided
26
PD-200 Option
Y = provided
N = not provided
ermines w
requires a short cable application.
-If the site is located less than 6000 feet from
the CO, this field can be used.
-The CO can provide information on whether
or not this is required.
If the PD-200 Data Option is used, enter Y.
27-28
Equipped Status S1 = only allowed
for PEC 0
entry
29-42
Equipped Status
for Peripheral
Equipment
Complex
-- = only allowed
entry
This field is not used for the OMNI SI and
should contain dashes only.
43-44
Equipped Status
for Common
Equipment
C o m p l e x
-- = only allowed
entry
This field is not used for the OMNI SI and
should contain dashes only.
45-46
Equipped Status MD = in service
for Message
-- = out of
Detail Recorder service
If the MDR option is used, enter MD.
Electronic
Services
Processor
This field is not used for the OMNI SI and
should contain dashes only.
-- = only allowed
entry
Since the OMNI SI has only one PEC, Sl is
the only allowed entry.
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.3
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
50
Network Control
Center Port
Usage
x.j *
Entry Fields for Record Code OE (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
- = not equipped
Y = equipped
-.
51-54 -. Systems
‘I 5210 = SVR for this
System Version release
Release
55-56
Expansion File
EX = equipped
Equipped Status -- = not
equipped
COMMENTS
Enter Y If a CEC port is used for the NCC
(Network Control Center).
-The network control center provides network
administration control and maintenance
functions.
-MDR output for a network can be sent to an
NCC via an MDR port.
The SVR for the system being installed is
entered here.
Enter EX in this field.
-SVR 5210 is to be configured only as an
Expansion File system.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code OF:
Office Features
4.4 Record Code OF, Figure 4.4, provides information about
miscellaneous system features.
~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+1010121OlFl
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
l
I
l
I
l
I
l
I
I
11
I
I
l
l
L-L-L-~-i-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-
S:
RI
I
EI
M;
Ei
Ri S;
EI
EI
Di
11
Fi
RI
C Cl
H
ol
l
l
Mj
UI
DI MI R I SI CI SI LI E DI TI
GI 01 SI EI UI AI SI C El )I;
TI VI I R I R I 61 I K
I EI SI VI 1 I LI EI
BI LI
NI
I EI
EI HI CI
TI NI 0 1
W I P I NI
:I, A; DI
K; ;I
Al
Gl
EI
NI
TI
I
EI TI
DI YI
EI
QI
F
LI
I UI 0 01 HI
IFI
IIR
Cl01
: LI R I PI
KI bl
I VI Ll PI
$
DI
I AI
I I DI LI
AI GI I
LI T; ;I
I
-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-T;_‘-E_I_
T-T-T-T-T-T-r-r-T-T-T-T-1
4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 I4 I5 I5 I5 I5 I5 I5 I5 I5 I5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 8 1 6 1 6 1 7 1
4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1
1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1
1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 ~
. - l - L . - L - l.-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-~-1-IS-S-l-l-~-J-l-l-l-l-~-~-~
Figure 4.4 Record Code OF:
Office Features Data Sheet
I
l
I
I
l
Table 4.4
Entry Fields for Record Code
OF
COMMENTS
etermines the FRL default value
timeout value.
the queue time, the FRL assigned here will
temporarily be assigned to the station.
-This value should be set up to allow the call
to be routed over a more expensive route as a
reward to the station user for having stayed i n
- = feature not
-This number must be consistent throughout
the network.
-If one switch in the network has 4-digit
authorization codes, then all other switches in
the network must have 4-digit authorization
Code Number
of Digits
codes.
-The more digits used in the authorization
code, the better the security that is provided.
-A total of 10,000 authorization codes can be
used. If all 10,000 are used the number of
digits must be over 4; if not, any number
dialed will work as an access code.
21
Traveling Class
Mark Provided
Y = used
- = feature not
used
This field determines whether or not the TCM
feature is used.
-A TCM is only used for on-network MERS
calls.
-A TCM is assigned to a station user when a
valid authorization code is dialed.
-The TCM allows the call to be completed
over the network.
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.4
Entry Fields for Record Code OF (Continued)
COMMENTS
feature is activated.
-For these features to work, the tone must be
- = feature n o t
25-26
27
I
camp-on/call waiting calls that can be in
effect at the same time per station.
-A station that has calls camped on must
complete the call-back sequence before
calls can be placed. Therefore this number
must be kept low, or making calls could be a
problem. However, if this field is too low or is
set at 1, the attendant could be flooded with
calls; 2 or 3 is recommended for this field.
-If an entry is made in this field, column 22
must be marked Y.
MOTE: If stations cannot process calls
because of this feature, then the site is a good
application for the message center feature.
Camp-on Tone
We
DD = distinctive
dial tone
40 = 440 Hz tone
DT = dial tone
80 = 480 Hz tone
-- = feature not
used
This field determines the type of tone heard
when the camp-on/call waiting feature is
used.
-If an entry is made in this field, column 22
must be marked Y.
-The recommended value for this field is DD.
-If DT is used, the tone heard is the same as
the tone heard when the attendant breaks into
a conversation.
Most
Economical
Route Selection
1 + Dialing
Y = 1 + dialing is in
effect
- = 1 + dialing is
not in effect
This field determines whether or not 1 +
dialing is in effect.
-If an NPA (Numbering Plan Area) has
conflicting codes, then 1 + dialing is required.
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.4
Entry Fields for Record Code OF (Continued)
COMMENTS
This field determines the number of times the
system will try calling a busy station before
dropping it from the on-hook queue.
-Trunk call queuing, defined in columns 2836, and MERS list queuing, defined on Record
Code OV, columns 12-17, are mutually
exclusive features.
-When the station is called back by the
system and it does not answer, it is dropped
37-38
Maximum
Number of Calls
Waiting
se- = N/A
(default = 15)
the same time for the entire system.
Remote Access
Directory
Number
Displayable
Class of Service
00-l 5 = COS
This field determines the displayable class of
service assigned to the remote access
feature.
-This remote access feature does not require
an access code.
-There is only one remote access number; it
is given to all system users who are allowed to
access the remote access feature.
- When assigning the COS for a station
allowed remote access (Record Code LD,
column 51), do not assign a COS for remote
access that allows more privileges than the
COS of the station. If this occurs, the station
user can use the remote access feature to
bypass restrictions placed on the station.
-Remote access is assigned on Record
Code LD, column 51.
-If an entry is made in this field, then columns
39-40 must also have an entry.
-The remote access directory number must
be defined on Record Code OD, columns 1215.
number
-- = feature not
used
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.4
r
Entry Fields for Record Code OF (Continued)
This field determines the n-displayable class
of service assigned to the remote access
dashed, this field
-These messages are defined on Record
Code SM, columns 14-29.
45
46-47
L
for CASACD)
M = military
military time is displayed at the Agent
Instrument and on FADS (Force Administration
Data System) reports.
Number of
Active Attendant
Loops
1-4 = number
2 = default
This field determines the number of attendant
loops on which incoming calls can appear.
-If all loops are activated, the attendant may
have difficultly accessing an outside line.
-When all loops are not activated, the
attendant has the call waiting light to assist in
determining the number of calls.
-If the enhanced Attendant Console is used,
activating loop 4 is not recommended.
Authorization
Prefix Digits
00-99 = prefix
digits
-- = feature not
used
This field determines the authorization prefix
digits used to access MERS off-network
dialing after making a MERS on-network call.
-If the trunks are busy when making a MERS
on-network call, the user may decide to
continue the call over off-network facilities.
NOTE: The authorization code used to
access this feature is assigned on Record
Code AU, columns 12-13.
-
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.4
Entry Fields for Record Code OF (Continued)
COMMENTS
or 4-digit numbering plan) is used at the site.
-This feature can be used to provide a
uniform numbering plan to a private network.
-Record Code NT determines the network
ment this feature refer to
determine if the HNPA needs to be deleted or
if it must be left on.
-If the routing is over ATT, the field must
Numbering Plan
-=dial tone is not
required
tone is heard.
-The customer determines whether or not
this field should be activated or not.
51
Reserved
- = only allowed
entry
This field can only be dashed.
52
Recent Change
Save Data Base
Security Level
l-6 = number
This field determines the minimum security
level required to save the data base, entered
via recent change, to disk.
-Record Code SL, columns 13-14, defines
security levels.
-This feature allows the customer to write to
disk.
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.4
Entry Fields for Record Code OF (Continued)
COMMENTS
-The field determines whether or not an
incoming network trunk is required to have an
FRL value assigned to it.
-This feature can only be used if column 21
NOTE: If a remote switch cannot assign an
FRL value to an outgoing trunk, the OMNI SI
can assign one. This is done on Record
Code Tl, column 69.
-If an incoming default FRL is not assigned
by this switch and this field is dashed, the call
will still come through.
-If the column is marked Y, the incoming
digit screening is to be preformed by MERS
Y = mutual hold is
- = mutual hold is
This field determines whether or not the
system allows the mutual hold feature.
-If this feature is activated when two stations
are connected, both parties can place each
other on hold.
-If this feature is not in effect, only the station
-
-
TL-130400-1001
Record Code OT:
Off ice Timeout Values
r---------
I
-
4.5 Record Code OT, Figure 4.5, defines the timeout intervals
required for the various call conditions.
r-----------------------------------------------------------------~
i
I
I
T6081
I
I
I
r
,
r-----
r-----------------------------------------~-----
j T6081
I
I
I
I-
t
I
I
,
I
R
C
:i
I
I
i
I
T608D
R
:
S
:
Rk
E T
C
A H
bf
D
Figure 4.5 Record Code OT:
I
Iw
I
‘z
i
T
I
ON
E
I
I
I
tT
IR
‘U
‘N
;K
i;
Q
U
E
U
I
N
G
‘L
IL
T
I
I
z
BIR
EIE
FlP
OlE
RlR
E(T
T533D
~---------------~-~
I I
:
T639A
I I
I
I I
I*
I
T: M F
i M
ITI
Ii A L
I I
IRl
IAl
I N
z
x A
INI
;H:
ISI
I H
0
0
I 0
I 0
ICl
I K
I K
‘01
’ s
ID’
i s
I w
IEl
fw
Office Timeout Values Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.5
Entry Fields for Record Code OT
COMMENTS
suggested value,
seconds before the call is automatically
disconnected after message completion.
-The timing value must exceed the length of
the message for the complete message to be
-It is recommended that this field be made 3
000-255 = time in
When the attendant camps on to a busy
station and the station remains busy, this field
determines the number of seconds that pass
before the call is returned to the console.
station user has to dial the first digit of a
suggested value
21-23
Interdigital
Timeout
000-255 = time in
seconds
%5=
suggested value
24-26
Divert No
Answer Time
000-255 = time in
seconds
E&o=
suggested value
30 = default
-If a digit is not dialed in this amount of time,
the station user is disconnected.
-If a station user takes too long to dial,
, system traffic could be affected and resulting
in delays getting system dial tone.
-This field is used in conjunction with
columns 21-23 (interdigital time) which gives
the timeout factor for all remaining digits.
-This does not apply to the consoles.
This field determines the maximum number of
seconds a station user can take between
dialing station or telephone number digits
before system disconnect.
-In a MERS application, it is recommended
that this value be kept at 005, or the system
will take too long to outpulse a call.
-This does not apply to the consoles.
This field determines the number of seconds a
call to a POTS telephone will ring before being
forwarded to a no-answer divert destination.
-This field should always be less than
attendant no- answer time (columns 45-47).
-This value is programmable on an individual
basis for Integrated Featurephones.
TL-130400-1001
Tabie 4.5
Entry Fields for Record Code 0T (Continued)
Recall on Hold
suggested value
call put on hold and not retrieved to recall to
the attendant.
-Depending on how busy the attendant is, the
recommended value may prove too long for
some sites. A shorter value of 045 may work
better at sites where there are complaints of
Attendant Call
suggested value
Answer) service.
-If the attendant is busy when an incoming
trunk call comes in, the call is automatically
routed to UNA when this timing parameter is
-The calling party hears ringing until
connected to the UNA destination.
-The UNA feature is assigned on Record
Code CA, columns 27-30 and 43.
3 3 - 3 5 Outpulse
: Interdigital Time
Factor
003-015 = time in
tenths of a second
This field determines the amount of time, in
tenths of a second, between successive dial
pulse digits being sent from the sender.
&=
suggested value
36-38
Call Park
000-255 = time in
seconds
or
45=
suggested value
This field determines the amount of seconds
before a call that is parked or not retrieved will
recall or ring back to the station that parked
the call, to the attendant, or to another
destination if calls are forwarded.
39-41
Hunt Group
Camp-on
Rescan Rate
005 = only allowed
entry
The suggested value is 005.
42-44
Call Hold
000-255 = time in
seconds
This field determines the number of seconds
before a call that was put on hold by a station
automatically rings back to that station.
-If the station is busy or does not answer, the
call goes to the console.
&
suggested value
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.5
COL.
NO.
45-47
COL.
NAME
Attendant NoAnswer Time
%./ .”
48-50
Information
Tone
Delay
Entry Fields for Record Code CT (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
000-255 = time in
seconds
Go=
suggested value
000-255 = time in
milliseconds
,_
:;2=
suggested value
51-53
Release Link
Trunk Busy
Guard
000-255 = time in
milliseconds
Go=
suggested value
54-56
Release Link
000-255 = time in
Trunk Recall on seconds
No Answer
G5=
suggested value
57-59
Release Link
Trunk Recall
Camp-on
000-255 = time in
seconds
:;5=
suggested value
60-62
Release Link
Trunk Recall
Silent Hold
000-255 = time in
seconds
o r
030 =
suggested value
127 = default
COMMENTS
This field determines the number of seconds it
takes for a trunk-originated call to return to
the console if the attendant extended the call
to a station that did not answer.
For a CAS Branch application, indicate the
amount of time between the detection of an
RLT (Release Link Trunk) being answered (by
an ACD agent or CAS) and the start of
information tone sending.
In a CAS Branch application, this field
determines the amount of time for the busy
guard feature on RLTs to go into effect.
-The busy guard interval prevents a
reseizure of an RLT by the CAS Branch
system for a new call after a disconnect
(attendant release) is recognized.
In a CAS Branch application, this field
determines the number of seconds allowed for
a call extended by an RLT to ring.
-If the call is not answered before this timer
is up, the call is routed back to a CASACD
agent.
In a CAS Branch application, this field
determines the number of seconds a call
extended by an RLT can be camped on to a
busy station.
-If the call is not answered before this timer
is up, the call is routed back to a CASACD
agent.
In a CAS Branch application, this field
determines the number of seconds a call can
wait in the silent hold queue.
-When this timer is up, the call is routed to a
CASACD agent.
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.5
Entry Fields for Record Code OT (Continued)
COMMENTS
000-255 = time
Tone Duration
suggested value
000-255 = time i n
tone is heard.
-The camp-on tone alerts a called party that
a call is camped on.
-This time is in tenths of a second and the
d by the called party
/persons to whom the
hook trunk cal
queuing is used, thi
number of seconds
his time, the call is again placed in
72-75
Maximum
Hookswitch
Flash
0160-2000 = time
in milliseconds
iGo=
suggested value
2000 = default
76-79
Minimum
Hookswitch
Flash
0160-2000 = time
in milliseconds
:;60=
suggested value
This field determines the maximum time
allowed for a hookswitch flash.
-The maximum hookswitch timing value must
be greater than the minimum hookswitch
timing value.
-The timing value is in multiples of 20millisecond increments.
This field determines the minimum time
allowed for a hookswitch flash.
- Always make the minimum hookswitch flash
timing less than the maximum hookswitch
flash timing.
-The timing value is in multiples of 20millisecond increments.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code OV:
Office Timing Values
r--------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
4.6 Record Code OV, Figure 4.6, defines the timing intervals
required for the call conditions. This data sheet is basically an
extension of the office timing values data sheet, Record Code OT
(Figure 4.5).
r-----------------------T---T---T---T---T-----~-----------~---~-------~
I
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
I
T ;
1 T i T 1 T t
T
I
I
I
6
I
615161
I
I
I
I
ii
I
I
M
Y.
I
.1 .”
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 4.6 Record Code OV:
Office Timing Values Data Sheet
l-L-1 30400-l 00-l
Table 4.6
Entry Fields for Record Code OV
COMMENTS
queued to MERS, this field determines the
amount of time the call must be queued to the
present route before it can be routed to the
Hook Timeout
value
21-23 Speed Calling
Long Delay
000-255 = time in
seconds
&I = suggested
value
100 = default
24-25
Speed Calling
Outpulsing
Delay
Ol-lO= time in
seconds
or
03 = suggested
value
group/individual speed calling feature.
-If a speed calling short delay is given on
Record Code GS, columns 17-31, this field
determines the length of the delay.
-This feature provides a short delay between
the dialing of the number and the CO sending
dial tone (this is often required for older COs).
This field is used in support of the
group/individual speed calling feature.
-If a speed calling long delay is given on
Record Code GS, columns 17-31, this field
determines the length of the delay.
-The feature provides a long delay between
the dialing of the number and the CO sending
dial tone (this is often required for older or
busy COs if the site SCC dialer outpulses
digits faster than the CO can accept them).
-If speed calling is used over MERS routing,
it is not recommended to use a long delay
NOTE: The long timing value must exceed the
short timing value.
When processing a call using the speed
calling feature, this field determines the
number of seconds the system waits before
outpulsing the first digit of a number to the
trunk.
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.6
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code OV (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Network Control
Center Output
Scan Time
- Interval .,x1
5-15 = seconds
Integrating
Voice
Messaging
System
Message
Waiting Tone
Duration
00-20 = time in
milliseconds
..
30-32
Limited ACD
Recorder
Announcer
Playback
Timing Value
000-255 = time in
seconds
or
016 = suggested
value, depending
on the length of the
message.
This field determines the length of time
provided for the recorder announcer
message.
-This timing value should be set at a greater
value than the message (3 seconds longer is
sufficient).
33-35
Agent Call Park
Timeout
000-255 = time in
seconds
or
If an ACD agent parks an incoming trunk call
on a busy agent or an agent group, this field
determines the amount of seconds that the
call can be parked before it times out and
recalls.
26-27
28-29
-- = N/A
i; = suggested
value
120= N/A
120 seconds =
default
If the system scans the NCC (Network Control
Center) for any output, this field determines the
time between the scans.
-This field only applies to a system that is
used as an NCC.
When the OMNI IVMS” message waiting
feature is accessed, this field determines how
long the tone will be heard.
-This tone indicates that the system is ready
to accept the message.
36-38
Agent Call Hold
Timeout
000-255 = time in
seconds
or
120 = suggested
value
If an ACD agent puts a call on hold, this field
determines how long the call can be held
before it recalls to the agent.
39-40
Sender Timeout
Value
03-30 = time in
seconds
This field determines the amount of seconds a
trunk has to recognize a wink from a remote
system or CO to seize a trunk.
-This field applies to all trunks in the system.
g; = suggested
value
r
Record Code OD:
Other Directory Numbers
I
IT
I 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
; F
l 0
+R
I M
I
I
I
1 .
I
1;
11
I
I
I
T
T
6
61
4 0 ;
4
1
15;
I
4.7 Record Code 00, Figure 4.7, defines certain types of
directory numbers that are not associated with a line circuit.
T
6
4
4
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SN;R-G;
EoIE-O.,
0
;c DI
E I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
Figure 4.7 Record Code OD:
Other Directory Numbers Data Sheet
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
I
I
I
I
ITI
IRI
lAt
‘NI
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
isI
I
I
I
I
ICi
101
IDI
‘El
I I
I I
I
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.7
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Directory
Number
Entry Fields for Record Code OD
VALID
ENTRIES
0000-9999 or
000-999 for
three-digit
numbers
This field determines the directory number to
b e used to access the feature defined in
columns 16-l 8.
MDU = message
This field determines the type of directory
number.
-MDUNMS are both used for IVMS.
-RMA assigns the directory number as a
remote access number.
-SPD is used to define a directory number
that is used to access the remote call
forwarding feature. The directory number
defined here is used to access an individual
speed call list. The individual speed calling
list stores directory numbers for the remote
call forwarding feature. Up to 8 directory
numbers can be created to access all 8 of the
individual speed calling numbers.
NOTE: If the line is a DID line and is allowed
remote call forwarding, billing to the calling
party begins as soon as the call rings at the
on-site station whether or not the call is
answered at the remote forwarded location.
For this reason; it is not recommended to
assign the remote call forwarding features to
DID lines.
deskunattended
RMA = remote
access directory
number
SPD = call forward
to individual speed
call list entry
TGO = satellite
access-trunk
group outplusing
TGS = satellite
access-trunk
group select
VMS = IVMS
(Integrated Voice
Messaging
System) directory
number
19-22
Code Type
Identifier
COMMENTS
0000-0063 =
trunk group
number (MDU,
TGS, and VMS)
0000 =
remote access
directory number
(RMA)
0001-0008 =
entry number
(SW
XXW = (TGO)
number of digits to
outpulse
(XX = 00-l 5);
trunk group
number (W = OO63)
This field determines the code type identifier
for the directory number.
-If the directory number type, columns l618, is marked SPD, the numbers 0001-0008
are pointers to the 8 individual speed calling
entries. There are only 8 possible systemwide directory numbers for the remote call
forwarding feature. However, each user
allowed this feature can have up to 8 remote
call forwarding numbers stored in an individual
speed calling list. Since the external call
forward feature works in conjunction with the
individual speed calling feature, the number of
users who can access the feature is limited by
the number of individual speed calling lists.
The system will support a maximum of 31
individual speed calling lists. If the external
call forward feature is used, code type number
110 on Record Code AC must be defined.
Predetermined
Night Answer
Pilot Numbers
‘-----.----T---T-------r-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I KI
; .p..;
I x I
I
I
--..
-
hunt group or a station number required for P$A (Predetermined
Night Answer) service. A maximum number of 16 hunt
groups or station numbers can be assigned for PNA service.
____________-----------------------------------------
;5
0
2
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
1
I
‘F
0
R
M
I
I
I
.I
I
S
E
Q
I
I
I
t-c-+-+--t--t-+-+-+-+10 19 I6 I PI NI I I I I
L-A-I-L-L-LA-A-A-&-
I
T-t-T-T- T-T-T-T-TI1 I1 I1 I2 I2 I2 I2 I2 I2
I7 I8 I9 I O I1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5
+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.I-A--L-A.A.-.&.-*-*-&-
Figure 4.8 Record Code PN:
’
’
12-13
14-17
1
1
I
I
COL.
NAME
’
1
I
18;
lEl
’
’
’
’
:
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
’
I
T-T-T- T-T-T-T-T-I
p-:
T-T-T--r-t-T-T-T-TI2 12 12 I2 I3 I3 I3 I3 13 131313 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
‘8 1
151617 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1
i61718191011121314
‘0 I
+-+-+- +-+-+-+-+-4
t - i
yyy+-+-t-+-y+I
I I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
A-~-~-*-&-A-~-A-AL--L-A.A-A-A--L--A
- -
Predetermined Night Answer Pilot Numbers Data Sheet
Table 4.8
COL.
NO.
IT,
IRI
$1
iSI
I
ICI
I
’
’
’
’
I
’
I
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Entry Fields For Record Code PN
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Iestination
Vumber
00-l 5 = number
This field determines the number used to
represent the pilot/station number.
-The attendant can change the PDN number
from the console by entering a number
defined here.
Pilot/Station
Number
0000-9999 or
000-999 for
three-digit
numbers
right justify threedigit numbers
This field determines the pilot number used.
-Any valid directory number (pilot, station, or
remote acess number, etc.) can be entered.
-This number must also be defined on
Record Code TC, columns 37-40 and/or 4144.
-This number must also be defined on
Record Code CA, columns 12-15 and/or
16-19.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code PZ:
Paging Zones
: F
’ 0
4.9 Record Code PZ, Figure 4.9, defines the paging zones for
the system. The attendant and certain system stations can be
allowed to access the paging equipment. A station user can
access the paging system by dialing an access code and zone
number. The attendant can access the paging system by the
above method or by depressing.the console PAGE button. The
card used to support this feature is the FB-17210 card and
paging is assigned to circuit 2.
A I
I
2 P A I ZPA’ZPA
I
R’OARlOAR~OARt
ElNGElNGElNGE;
E I A ; E
IA;EIA
:;
NS
NS,
NS;
:3G
I~G
I~G
I
iR
IM
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
i
-T-~-T-T-T-~-T-T-T-:-T-T-T-~
i
ZPA:
Z P A ;ZPA;
OARlOARlOARl
zcH;EU;NGE;
E I A
NS;
NS;
NS;
5 G
I6G
,7G
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-T-T-T-~‘T-T-T-:-T-T-T-, I
3 ’ 2 ’ 1 10’31211
1 0 1 3 1 2 1 1 IO’
-4-4-4-4-+-4-4-4-4-4-d.-
1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 ’ 3 1 2 ’ 1 1 0 ’ 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 3 1 2 1 1 IO1
- - r - 1 - - + -,-+-a-+-+-i-a--b
-+-.+-a-4-+-+-+-+-+-+-4-+-+-+
' ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 ‘I ’ 2 ' 2 ' 2 ' 2 ' 2 ' 2 ' 2 ' 2 ' 2 ' 2 ' 3 1 3 :
3'3'3'3'3'3'3'3'4'4'4'4
I
81910111213141516171819~0111
213141516171819(0111213
i,;t,t,t,t~-t-t-t-t-t-t - t - t - t - t - t - t - t - t - t - t - t - t - t - t
718;9;O;1
;2;3;4;5;6;7;
-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-
i
L-L-L-I-LLL-LI-I-:-I
r-----------------------r-r-----------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
:T;
‘6 I
!3 I
:
I
I
6
1
I
:ZPA’
Z P A ’
A P A
lOAR!OAR!TAR’O!
;NGE;;Q;‘TGE;N’
; E I A
I E ’ A I
N S
N S ,NNS
I8G
; 9G
I
DG
I
I
I
A
I
I
I
I 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:-T-T-T- T-T-T-T-+-T-T-T-t
l3l2l1lOl3l2l1lOl3l2l1lOl
iZl
‘El
I
ID;
‘GI
iTi
’
i
ICl
‘01
IDI
I‘ E l ’
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
L-+-+-+-+-+--l-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-T-T-T
-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T--r--r--r-+-4
~4~4~4~4~4~4~5'5'5'5'5'5'5'5~6'5'6'6'6'6'6'6'6'6'6'6'7'7~7'7'7'7'7'7'7'7'8~
,4l5l6,7l8,9lO~1~2~3~4~5~6~7~8~9~O~1~2~3~4~5~6~7~8)9~O~~l2~3~4~5~6~7~8~9~O,
L-L-L-L-L-*-L-r-r-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-i-~-~-~-~-1
Figure 4.8
I
ITI
‘RI
‘Al
‘N’
Is:
Record Code PZ: Paging Zones Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.9
Entry Fields for Record Code PZ
COMMENTS
-The attendant paging area is normally an all
call for all zones.
-If this feature is allowed, Record Code CA,
This field determines whether or not the 0
zone digit must be dialed to access the zone.
-If the site only has one zone, a zone digit is
-If the site has more than one zone, a digit
must be dialed to identify what zone is to be
paged.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code SL:
User Security
Level Password
4.10 Record Code SL, Figure 4.10, defines passwords to access
both the voice and data software of the system. If the system is
equipped with the PD-200 Data Option, this record code must
be completed for the data security level. To date, eight security
levels for voice and six security levels for data have been
defined. The user can perform the functions associated with the
level accessed, including the functions associated with all lower
levels. Use one row per password for the system. Assign to
each password the appropriate voice and/or data security level.
.I%-.”
r---------r-r---r-------T------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
:
‘E’
;x;
’
;
I
I
I
I
I I
I
; F SN;RClS’D
S’ U
S
I
0
EOIE O;E;A El
rRG
;C DIGIT
C, E C
1 M
EIUIAUI
R
U
T
;
I
$- I
I
I
E
x
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IT1
IRI
,AI
‘NI
ISI
i
S l
SI
fCl
I
I
I
IO,
,DI
‘El
I
)212131SlL,~,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I
I
I
I
L-L-L-L-L-L-L-L-L-L-L_I-I-I-L-L-L-L-L-L-~-L-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~---~
Figure 4.10
I
I
Record Code SL: User Security Level Password Data Sheet
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.10
COL.
NO.
12
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code SL
VALID
ENTRIES
1-8 where:
Level 1 = traffic
Voice Security
Level Number
x.j ,”
-.
,.
studies, system
status, and recent
change display
Level 2 = recent
change of line
functions
Level 3 = feature
changes of minor
impact
Level 4 = all recent
change of all
features of major
impact
COMMENTS
This field determines the voice security level
number (l-6) associated with the password
defined in columns 15-l 8.
-The value level given here defines what
functions the user’s password accesses.
-Column 12 is preprinted on the record code
forms.
Level 5=
maintenance
request
Level 6 = generic
program changes
and manual data
base changes
Levels 7 818
= reserved
13-14
Data System
Security Level
00-05 where:
Level 00 = readonly access
Level 01 =
reserved
Level 02 =
reserved
Level 03 =
reserved
Level 04= ability to
change the
majority of fields
Level 05 = ability to
change most
fields, but files
cannot be deleted
15-18
User Security
Password
Characters:
l-4
O-9 or A-Z = four
characters
- = N/A
This field determines the data security level
number (l-6) associated with the password
defined in columns 15-18.
-Each of these levels can be assigned as
often as needed to the various voice values
(e.g. data level 00 could be assigned to voice
levels l-6).
NOTE: Enter -- for N/A if the PD-200 Data
Option is not equipped.
This field determines the password used to
access the system.
-Numbers and letters cannot be mixed in this
field.
-
TL-130400-1001
Record Code TF:
Traffic Data Facilities
4.11 Record Code TF, Figure 4.11, defines the system
parameter requirements for a traffic data study.
--------------------___c__
r---------r---------------------I--------------------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
T
6
0
4
1
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-- I
F-Sk&C;
L..bl
T U
I
0 LOI E OIE NI I S
1 R Q-. lC D IN Tl M A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;Pf
101
ILI
I
I
I
I
I
,
DATA ; A;
DUMP
IUI
HEADER ITI
I
I
I
I
I
IM
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
ICl
1
‘01
‘D’
‘IEl
I ,
I I
I I
I
I
f
1 I
I I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 4.11
Record Code TF: Traffic Data Facilities Data Sheet
IT;
lRl
‘Al
INI
ISI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.11
Entry Fields for Record Code TF
COMMENTS
command to retrieve a traffic study.
-This is required if the data is processed by
a centralized polling message system.
Characters
22
l-4
Automatic
Output indicator
Y = provided
N = not provided
This field determines whether or not a printout of the traffic study is automatically given.
-This is done by using the specified intervals
along with the data dump header site
identification.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code CD:
Code Call
4.12 Record Code CD, Figure 4.12, defines the parameters for
the code calling option. For this feature to work, at least one
class of service defined on Record Code DD, columns 26-27,
must allow code call access. The card used to support this
feature is the FB-17210 card.
r---------
r-------------------------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
x.( w
i
7
1
I
I I
! F SN:RC;
C (R C:N:
I
0 EOIE
01 0 IE 0101
1 R Q
,C
DI D-IP
Dl
1
IDE,
E
lE
El01
IM
I
I
I
IA
IFI
I
I
I C
ITCI
I
I
AIC:
I
I
I ? I
L 101
I
I
I L ;
LlDl
I
I
I
;E;
I
I
I
I
I
I
;C:
I
I
IL1
I
I
I
I
I
I
IDI
I
I
I
I
I I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IGt
,
I
I
I
ISI
-r----------
----_-___---------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T ;T 0 TIT B 1311.
B C;
!. II E 011
E III
E YI
M IM T NIM T GIM T Cl
E ;E W E;E W I ;E W L’
E E’
E Sl
::I E S ;
0;
:
;
N
,
N
,
N
I
I
I
I
T i
I
I
I
I
0 ;
I
I
i
N I
I
I
I
E I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 4.12
I
I
I
I
i
I
Record Code CD: Code Call Data Sheet
I
I
I
I
1
I
ITI
IRI
I
‘Al
I
I INI
I
IS,
I I
I ,cl
1 101
1 lDI
I
I
IEI
I
I
I
I ,
I
I
l
I I
I I
I
I
I
I I I
I I
I I ,
I I
l
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.12
COL.
NO.
12-13
COL.
NAME
Code Call Tone
Entry Fields for Record Code CD
VALID
ENTRIES
DD = distinctive
dial tone
COMMENTS
This field determines the type of tone to be
used for the code calling feature.
HZ = 440-Hz tone
14-15
-.
Repeat Code
Call
00-l 5 = number
or
-- = N/A
This field determines the number of times the
code call cycle is outpulsed after the initial
cycle is repeated (number of times overhead
ringing is heard).
Number of
O-3 = number of
Code Call Digits rings or
- = N/A
This field determines the digits outpulsed in a
code call code.
17-19
Time on Tone
000-255 = interval
in tenths of a
second
3 = suggested
value
m-v = N/A
This field determines the time for tone pulses
which make up the code call digits.
20-22
Time Between
Tones
000-255 = interval
in tenths of a
second
3 = suggested
value
s-m = N/A
This field determines the time between the
successive tone pulses that make up code
call digits.
23-25
Time Between
Digits
000-255 = interval
in tenths of a
second
7 = suggested
This field determines the amount of time
between each code call digit.
000-255 = interval
in tenths of a
second
15 = suggested
value
mm- = N/A
This field determines the amount of time
between each code call cycle.
16
value
mm- = N/A
26-28
Time Between
Cycles
130400-l 001
Record Code CB:
Code
r--------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
4.13 Record Code CB, Figure 4.13, defines the i’-and lo-digit
numbers that are screened by MERS call processing.
Blocked
Numbers
~-------------------~---------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
T63Xl
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIGITS
I
N”&R
TO BLOCK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 4.13
I
I
I
I
Record Code CB: Code Blocked Numbers Data Sheet
Table 4.13
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields For Record Code CB
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Code Blocked
Number Digit 1
to 10
2-9 and F (wild
card value of all
digits)
This field determines digit 1
Code Blocked
Number Digit 4
to 10
O-9 and F (wild
card)
This field determines digits 2-7.
Code Blocked
Number Digit 1
to 10
O-9 and F (wild
card)
or
- = N/A
Dashes are coded for 7-digit numbers. If a
dash is placed anywhere in columns 19-21,
then the rest of the columns in this field must
be dashed.
Recori ,oat
Facility Restri m L
Authoriz
_
..
I
i
I
f
I
I
-t-t-t-t-t)915101FIAI
L-L-L-L-L-L.
Figure 4.15 F
SW 5210
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TL-I 30400-l 001
TL-130400-1001
Table 4.15
Entry Fields for Wecor
Table 4.13 E
COL.
NO.
12-18
19
..
Authorization
Cpde
Digits
l-4 ‘- .-
0-9 = numbe
,.
Displayable
00-l 5 = cos
Class of Service -- = N/A
N-Displayable
00-l 5 = cos
of Service -- = N/A
( Slass
I qeserved
D-76
-- = only allov
entry
D-78
COL.
NAME
Authorization
Code Digits
Facility
Restriction
Level
VALID
ENTRIES
( I-9 = digits
= not selected
I f this field is filled
( xrt by the coder,
\ Jalid entries are:
l D-7
IIf this record code
Iis to be generated
Iby the FAREC
Iutility program, use
1the following:
FRL O=A
FRLl=B
FRL 2=C
FRL3=D
FRL4=E
FRLS=F
FRL 6=G
FRL7=H
I
8187
This field
lumber.
The numbs
defined
,Columns
This field
liven to
Nith values
sntry for
-The space
can be use
FRLs
NOTE: If a
used, they
any digit
-The digit
column 20.
TL-130400-1001
DIGIT
ANALYSIS
5.0 This section describes the record codes required to define
the various digits used by the system. The following record
codes are required:
l
Record Code AC defines the system dialing plan and access
codes.
l
Record Code HD defines the hundreds groups used as system
directory numbers.
%./ .”
,I
l
Record Code IR defines the system intercept conditions.
l
Record Code SA defines non-SCC (Specialized Common
Carrier) codes.
* Record Code I1 defines international country codes for
international dialing.
SVR 5210
8187
D-79
TL-130400-1001
5.1 Record Code AC, Figure 5.1, defines the dialing plan and
access codes used by the system. Any digit can be assigned as
a single digit access code, the first digit of a two- or three-digit
access code or the first digit of the three- or four-digit station
number.
Record Code AC:
Access Code Translation
l
Once a number is assigned as a single digit access code or
the first digit of a station number, it cannot be assigned as
the first digit of a two- or three-digit code.
l
The last two digits of a three-digit access code cannot be
the same as an existing two-digit access code.
For example, if a two-digit access of 32 exists, there
cannot be a three-digit access code of X32 (X = O-9, #
or *).
l
The last two digits of one three-digit access code cannot
be the same as the last two digits of another three-digit
access code.
For example, only one three-digit access code ending in
32 can exist.
.I
Stations equipped with DTMF keypads can use the asterisk (*)
and the octothorpe (#) characters for access codes. Access
codes and the system numbering plan supported by standard
user guides are listed in Table 5.1 B (maximum entries, 156).
Additional information can also be found in Table 5.1C.
One or more access codes can be used to precede station
numbers for station-to-station calling thus allowing the use of
more single digit access codes for special service functions.
Refer to Record Code RN, Figure 15.6.
-------------------------------------T-,
‘---------,-----,-------------~-----I
I
T
T
I
I
I
I
z
4
B
5
1
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-TT-T-T-T-T-,
111111111111111111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
718191011121314151617181910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011121
-+-+-+-c-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
9lOlOlAICI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
L.-A.--c-a-a.-*-A.-A-~-~_*_~
1
.
I
.
.
.
I
.
.
.
.
.
I
.
*
.
*
I
Figure 5.1
D-80
r-;
181
101
L - 4
I
a._.4
Record Code AC: Access Code Translation Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1A
Entry Fields for Record Code AC
COMMENTS
access code
numerical value to represent a specific feature
-All code type numbers, range 000-255, are
defined in Table 5.1 D.
-To fill in this field, find the code type
numbers associated with the first digit of the
station numbering plan.
further identify the code type in relation to
termination information.
-Table 5.1C defines the code type identifier
numbers.
Access Code
-When defining an access code, do the
following:
-To fill in this field, find the code type
identifier number associated with the first digit
of the chosen access codes in Tables 5.1 B or
5.1 D.
-Enter digits from right to left (right justified,
zero filled) in columns 18-21.
-Enter the same number in column 21 that
was used in column 12, which represents the
first digit of the access code using code type
number 10 or 11.
-When * or # is used as the first digit of an
access code, enter 11 for * and 12 for # in
columns 20 and 21.
-Enter zeros in unused columns (right
justified, zero filled).
SVR 5210
8187
D-81
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1A
COL.
NO.
Entry Fields for Record Code AC (Continued)
COL.
NAME
18-21
Code Type
cont’d) Identifier
Number x./ 1
VALID
ENTRIES
0000-9999 =
number
..
8187
COMMENTS
Station Numbering Plan
When defining a station numbering plan ,do
the following:
-To fill in this field, find the code type
identifier number associated with the first digit
of the chosen station numbering plan in Table
5.1B or 5.1D.
-For a three-digit station numbering plan,
enter in column 21 the first missing terminal
digit that normally would be dialed for DID
applications.
-Example:
x
xxx
ABC
Office
Missing
Station
Terminal
Number
Code
Digit
If the missing terminal digit cannot be
determined, a zero can be used in its place.
-Once a terminal digit is assigned, it must be
used in all applicable areas of the data
sheets.
-If there is no missing terminal digit (e.g.,
code type identifier is 12 for code type 67), the
station numbers are entered as a blank and
the three-digit number is entered on the input
sheets. This is the only case where a blank is
valid.
-The CTI range of 0000-0063 is the trunk
group number, and the CTI range of 0000 to
9999 is the station or pilot number as
indicated in Table 5.16 or 5.1 D.
-For the MERS on-network access code
type (105), the first digit of the code type
identifier must be a 0 (lo-digit dialing) or a 7
(7-digit dialing), and the last three digits must
match an NPA or on-network access code
on Record Code MR and be defined on
Record Code TR (check type 9). If ONlON4 is defined on Record Codes
MRTTR/NT/TD,
then one of code types 105,
94, 96, 126, or 127 must be defined.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.18)
Standard Access Codes
Code CT/CT1 # DESCRIPTION
0
1
:
4
1
--
:
4
5.
6
i
9
*
#
*0
*1
:;
*4
“5
“6
7
1;
9&
*#
#O
#l
z:
009 0128
067 0012
067 067
067
..=I. 0 6 7
067
067
067
010
.Oll
01q
010
001
010
010
117
0012 0012
0012
0015
0015
0015
0015
0005
0006
0007
0008
0001
0011
0012
0000
040 0000
079 021 0000 0000
024
025
033
057
032
039
028
031
118
044
080 020
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000 0000
#4
#5
#6
#7
Ei
026 0000
P
##
50
51
52
53
zz
56
57
58
029
012
000
121
125
122
123
124
047
088
049
59
000 0004
SVR 5210
Attendant Access
Three-digit station numbering system
Three-digit station numbering system
T h r e e - d i gstation
it numbering system
Three-digit station numbering system - spare
Four-digit station numbering system- spare
Four-digit station numbering system
Four-digit station numbering system - spare
Four-digit station numbering system - spare
1 st digit of two-digit feature access
Three-digit attendant access codes
Two-digit trunk access
Additional Trunk Groups (FX, WATS, TIE, SCC, etc.)
CO Trunks/MERS (Trunk Group 1)
1st digit of two-digit access codes for station features
1st digit of two-digit access codes for station features
Individual Speed Access
Call Hold
Executive Reminder Entered
Call Forward Variable (Flexible)
Group Dial Call Pickup
Extended Group Dial Call Pickup
Conference
Trunk Call On Hook (Queuing)
Meet Me Conference
Call Park
Station Camp-On
Night Answer
Individual Speed Change
Call Hold Answer
Call Executive Forward Reminder Fixed Canceled
Station Dial Call Pickup
Executive Override
Call Waiting Answer
Trunk Call On-Hook (Queuing) Cancel
Call Call Waiting Park Answer Originating
019 0000
013 0000
058 0000
014 043 0000 0000
Camp-On Cancel
Group Speed Calling
Automatic Call Distribution Feature Access (Future)
Unstaff Position T
Staff Position T
Call Supervisory ACD (Agent) T
Emergency Assistance T
Bad Line T
MDR Account Code - CTI must be # of digits used (l-8)
Priority Call
Recorder Announcer - CTI requires REC/AN TRK #
XYYY where X = PEC and YYY = PABX TRK *
Spare
0000
0000
0004
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
8187
D-83
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1B
Standard Access Codes (Continued)
Code CT/CT1 # DESCRIPTION
60#
61#
62#
63#
65#
66# _
67#
68#
69#
680
690
699
106
030
017
046
055
056
082
090
000.
075
102
083
119
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
688
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
- - - - - - -
000
001
001
001
001
022
023
034
035
036
084
085
086
0004
0002
0003
0004
0005
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
- - -
087 0000
W%
‘I
Real-Time Clock Update
Flexible Night Connection
Attendant Control of Trunk Group Off
Attendant Force Release of Trunk
RLT Day Mode
RLT Silent Mode
Executive Reminder Deactivate (Attendant)
MERS Time of Day Change (Cancel)
Spare
Message Waiting Deactivate (Attendant Administrator)
MERS Time Zone Display
Message Waiting Process - CTI requires a station #
Group Speed Calling Update (CTI is a remainder of
SID/256; enter A STATION #)
Attendant Access Two-Way Trunk - Spare
Trunk Group 2 Access
Trunk Group 3 Access
Trunk Group 4 Access
Trunk Group 5 Access
Code Call Originating
Code Call Answer
Paging Access
Page Answer
Dictation Access - CTI requires a trunk group number
Maid Service in Progress Access Code Tt
Maid Service Completed 7-t
Room Restriction Activation from Administrative Phone or
Attendant Console j-jRoom Restriction Deactivation from Administrative Phone
or Attendant Console tt
ACD Station User End
t
j-T
Access codes are custom designed in accordance with the customer data base.
(The above access codes are examples. They can be used as is, modified, or added to if
desired.)
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1C
AC Rules
AC-02 CODE TYPE
A code type must be one of the valid code types shown in Tables 3.1 and
3.3, and must be appropriate for SVR 5210.
AC-03 ACCESS CODE
When defining the access code digits., the use of dashes must be
consistent. If digit 2 equals -, then drgrt 3 must be -.
Examoles:
Ret
Code
‘- A C
AC
Access
Code
1 - l - l
Allowed
Incorrect
specification
AC-04 ACCESS CODE - CODE TYPE
Code type 10 indicates the first digit of a two-digit access code. If this
code type is used, then digits 2 and 3 must be -. Only digit 1 can be
specified.
Examples: Ret
Code
E
AC
Access
Code
1 - 111
ll-
Code
%
10
10
Allowed
Incorrect
Incorrect
specification
specification
AC-05 ACCESS CODE - CODE TYPE
Code type 11 indicates the first digit of a three-digit access code. If this
code type is used, then digits 2 and 3 must be -. Only digit 1 can be
specified.
Examples: Ret
Code
A C
AC
AC
Access
Code
2 - 222
22-
Code
9
11
11
Allowed
Incorrect
Incorrect
specification
specification
AC-51 ACCESS CODE
The access codes must be unique across the AC forms. This also applies
to any two-digit combinations.
Examples: Ret
Code
AC
AC
AC
SVR 5210
8187
Access
Code
1 o210
1 o-
Access code duplication
Access code duplication
D-85
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1C
AC Rules (Continued)
AC-52 ACCESS CODE
The listed record code is required for the code types specified
Record Codes
Code Types
AD
113
AT
15, 16, 17, 18, 45, 46, 89, 90, 102, 106, 107
,-.g)
GS
MK
PN
RC
WT
76 25
12,119
,,
;“o
53, 55, 5 6
98, 99, 100, 115
AC-52 CODE TYPE IDENTIFIER
(a)
The attendant number(s) specified in the code type ID field for code
type 9 must be defined on Record Code AT.
(b)
The pilot number specified in the code type ID field for code type 37,
38, 41, 42, 61, 62, 138, or 139 must be defined as the pilot number of
the corresponding hunt group on Record Code HG.
(c)
The intercept routing code specified in the code type ID field for code
type 0 must be defined on Record Code IR.
(d)
The SCC number specified in the code type ID field for code type 120
must be defined on Record Code SA.
(e)
The SA access code specified on Record Code SA must appear on
an AC record code with a code type of 1, 2, 3, 4, or 8.
(0
The on-net code specified in the code type ID field for code type
105 must be defined on Record Code TR.
(g)
The trunk group number specified in the code type ID field for code
types 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 27, 36, 69, 97, and 141 must be defined on
Record Code Tl.
AC-52 CODE TYPE - OTHER RECORD CODES
The listed class of service mark on Record Code DC, DD, or NC is required for the specified
code types.
Class of Service Mark
Code Type
CC (Record Code DC, DD)
22. 23
CF (Record Code NC)
20’
’
CV (Record Code NC)
21
CO (Record Code NC)
28, 29
EX (Record Code NC)
19
HD (Record Code NC)
40, 44
MC (Record Code DC, DD)
32, 33
PA (Record Code DC, DD)
34, 35
PC (Record Code DC, DD)
33. 32
PK (Record Code NC)
39; 43
RL (Record Code DC, DD)
53
SA (Record Code NC)
120
UN (Record Code NC)
31
D-86
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1C
AC Rules (Continued)
AC-53 ACCESS CODE - OTHER RECORD CODES
A feature was specified in the class of service record codes (DC, DD, NC), but an access
code for the feature was not defined.
N-Displayable
Access Code
Class of Service
Type
x./ ,”
c c
22, 23
ii
ME
it 33
48’
FAC
R L ..
34, 32, 35 33
53, 55, 5 6
::
cv
DC
K
20 28, 29
HD
40, 44
FIi
Et
83
13,14
39, 120 43
SC
119
i/t
i:, 82
2l
71, 19 72
AC-54 ACCESS CODE - TRUNK GROUP
Access codes should be defined on a Tl form for all trunk groups having an outgoing or
two-way direction. If a trunk group does not have an access code, access to the code must
be provided on another record code such as T, TD, OD (code types TGO and TGS), or RP.
AC-55 ACCESS CODE
If two-and/or three-digit access codes are defined, then the first digit of the two-and /or
three-digit access code must be defined on an AC form.
Examples:
Ret Access Code Code Type
C
Codeo d e
Type Identifier
AC
l-10
0001 First digit of a two-digit
accesscode
AC
0000 Two digit access code
1200
AC
2-11
0 0 0 2 First digit of a three-digit
access code
AC
211
02
0010 Three-digit access code
AC-56 CODE TYPE
If the ward control was specified on Record Code AT, then code types 98 and 99 are
required, and if the time period control was specified on Record Code AT, then code type 100
is required.
SVR 5210
8187
D-87
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1C
AC Rules (Continued)
AC-57 CODE TYPE
Code type 007 requires the members of the specified trunk group to have a supervisory
outgoing signal value of SO (Seize Out) on Record Code TC.
AC-58 ACCESS CODE - RECORD CODE
An access code used on Record Code SA was not found on Record Code AC.
AC-59 ‘CODE TvP.E
Code type 066 is the required input on Record Code AC whenever there are RN Record
Codes with a code type of 3DG or 4DG.
AC-66 CGDE TYPE - MERS
An access code must be provided with either code type 094, 096, 105, 126, or 127 for the
MERS on-network dialing feature to work properly on Record Code AC-53
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1 D
Code
Type
No.
000
Code Type/Code Type identifiers Definition and Description
Description of
Code Type
ACu(nU$se?for
Inter.cept
Roding Code
_
Applicable Applicable
CPG Record
SVR
Code
access
.
T
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
SVR 5210
All
DB Table - Code
Type Identifier
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
0 -15 (0 -F) as
defined in T6031
CO Access
Code
Foreign
Exchange (FX)
Access Code
CCSA Access
Code
WATS Access
Code
1st Digit of
Directory
Number Dialed
Station Code Four Digit
Termination
Processing
Tie Line- Ring
Down. Number
Digit Sending
Access Code.
Tie Line Digit
Outpulsing
needed Access
Code
Attendant
Access Code
LD (Line
e = NW)
w3N (Code
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
AC: OOO0015 as
defined on
IR record.
CL, IR, RN:
CT/CT1 are
Internally
Generated.
=SE).
AC
All
AC
All
AC
All
AC
All
AC
2.2.x.x
LC
2.2.x.x
‘o~;o,jt
AC
All
00-63 (00-3F)
Trunk Group No.
0000-0063
AC
All
00-63 (00-3F)
Trunk Group No.
0000-0063
AC
AT
CL
(Destination
Type = ATTN)
CN
All
Attendant Consoles:
128 (80) Console 0
064 (40 Console 1
or an Jombination
0Y Consoles
0000-0255
Examples:
8187
00-63
Trunk
00-63
Trunk
(00-3F)
Group No.
(00-3F)
Group No.
00-63 (00-3F)
Trunk Group No.
00-63 (00-3F)
Trunk Group No.
O - 9 O-9) for 36 i it Dialing
15 (F 7 for 4-Digit
Dialing
Remainder of Line
Software ID Divided
by 256
0000-0063
0000-0063
0000-0063
0000-0063
0000-0009
for 3 Digit
0015 for 4
Digit
CT/CT1 are
Internally
Generated
CitLt?et 0
D-89
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1D
Code Type/Code Type identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code Description of
Code Type
Type
No.
010
Oli
1 st Digit of Two
Digit-Access
Code
1st Digit of
Three Digit ”
Access Code
012 Group Speed
Calling Access
Applicable Applicable DB Table - Code
CPG Record
SVR
Type Identifier
Code
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
O-9 (0-!$)9Digits
AC
All
11 (B) Digit*
12 (C) Digit#
AC
All
O-9 (O;JgDigits
11 (B) Digit”
12 (C) Digit#
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
0000-0009
0011
0012
oooEotog
0012
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0002= 100
Speed Call
Nos.
0003 = 1000
Speed Call
Nos.
013
Call Waiting
Answer Code
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
014
Call Waiting
Originating
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
015
Access Code
for Conference
Bridge 2
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
016
Attendant
Control of Trunk
Group - On
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
017
Attendant
Control of Trunk
Group - Off
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
018
$;;;fant
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
019
Executive
Override
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
020
Call Forwarding
- Fixed
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
021
Call Forwarding
- Variable
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
022
Code Calling Origination
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
023
Code Calling
Answer
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
Direct
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1 D
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code Description of Applicable Applicable DB Table - Code
Code Type
Type Identifier
CPG Record
SVR
Type
No.
Values
in Decimal
Code
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
024 .&al Call Pick- AC
up, First Group
All
0 (0) Unassigned
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
0000
025 Dial Call
Pickup,
Extended Group
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
026
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
027 CAMA T r u n k
g~~uep Access
AC
All
00-63 (00-3F)
Trunk Group No.
028
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
029 Camp-on
Cancellation
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
030
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
032 Meet Me
Conference
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
033 Progressive
Conference
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
034 ,PP~~g
Access
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
Answer
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
AC
All
00-63 (00-3F)
Trunk Group No.
Directed Dial
Call Pickup
Camp-On
Origination
031
Flexible Night
Connection
Changes
Universal Night
Answer Pickup
035
F’a,$terg
036
Dictation
Access Code
037
Station Hunting
Pilot No. Circular
SVR 5210
AC
HG (Hunt
Group Type
= CIRC)
8187
A l l
0000-0063
0000-0063
CiZZ?r ~oUZ&oup ?$ZEilnt
Number
Gr Pilot
R
HG: &CT1
is Internal1
Generate cr
D-91
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1D
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code Description of
Code Type
TNyope
,
0 3 8
Applicable Applicable DB Table - Code
CPG Record
SVR
Type Identifier
Code
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Pare;Lysis)
$:$o{oHunting
All
Remainder of the
First Line Software
ID of the Terminal
Hunt Group Divided
by 256
AC:0000 9999 Hunt
Gr Pilot No.
HE: CT/CT1
is Internal1
Generate J
Terminal _
CPG Record
Code Type
identifier
Values
..
039 Call Park
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
040 Call Hold
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
All
00-79 (00-4F)
i:rc,udae; Hunt Group
AC:0000 9999 Hunt
Gr Pilot No
H& CTCTI’
is Internal1
Generate J
All
Remainder of the
First Line Software
ID of the Terminal
Hunt Group Divided
by 256
AC:0000 9999 Hunt
Grp Pilot No.
HG: CT/CT1
is Internal1
Generate J
0 4 1
S$$;oHunting
E%&my;>ith
G!?!!!!$e
= R C )
042 Station Hunting
Pilot No. Terminal with
Camp-on
043 Call Park
Answer
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
044 Call Hold
Answer
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
045
Attendant Busy
- Idle Check
and Setup for
Break-in If
Trunk is Busy
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
046
Attendant Force
Release a
Trunk
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
047
Access Code
;cg $c& Code
AC
All
l-8 (l-8) No. of
Digits Used
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
048 MERS Access
Code for Off
Network Dialing
ODD)
0001-0008
0000
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1 D
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code Description of
Code Type
TN’ope
.
049
Recorder
-Announcer
“Access Code
Applicable Applicable DB Table - Code
CPG Record
Type Identifier
SVR
Code
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
00-63 (00-3F)
AC
All
Trunk Number
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
0000-0063
Recorder
Anrq;;;;er
Number
.05o
Change/F&store
Feature by
Access Code
AC
All from
2.3.X.X
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
051
Change/Restore
Feature Routing
CH
SI from
5.2.1 .O
0 (0) Unassigned
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
052
Secondary
Directory
Number for a
Station
SD
All
Remainder of Line
Software ID is
Divided by 256
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
053
Release Link
Trunk (RLT)
Access Code
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
054
Release Link
Trunk (RLT)
p$;g;Y
RC
All
00-15 (O-F) RLT
Number
055
Release Link
Trunk (RLT)
Night Mode
Access Code
AC
All
0 (0) For Day Mode 0000-0001
l(1) For Night Mode
056
Release Link
Trunk (RLT)
Silent Hold
Access Code
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
057 On-HookTrunk
Call Queuin
Access Co 8e
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
058 On-HookTrunk
Call Queuing
&;;el Access
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
All
0 (0) Unassigned
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
059
SVR 5210
Remote Access
Feature/
(TypezDRM
Code Directory
Access Code
8187
A)
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
0000
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1 D
Code
Type
No.
060
061
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Description of
Code Type
Applicable Applicable DB Table - Code
CPG Record
CPG Record
SVR
Type Identifier
Code Type
Code
Values in Decimal
Identifier
(Hex Values in
Values
Parenthesis)
Values
Terminal Hunt
Obsolete .Remainder of the
AC:0000 HGqEunt for Sl, Sll, flrst line Software ID
Gro - with
9999. Hunt
Num3)‘er Display G~o~~ge.
Sill
“,;;f$
t~;$$$r” G r Tipdylf i;o.
e
Internally
Generated
Station Hunting . .
AC
AC:0000 00-79 (00-4F
All
9999 Hunt
Pilot No. -.
HG (Hunt
CirculaNJlu& Lroup
Gr . Pilot No.
~gr~laro~th
I-PG: CT/CT1
Gr=o”6 i!-$7
I e
is Internal1
and 8all
Generate J
Pressure
Indicator
062
Station Hunting
Pilot No. Terminal with
Cam -on and
Call Pressure
Indicator
Remainder of the
first line software ID
of the terminal hunt
group is2g;rded by
AC:0000 9999 hunt
r
ilot No.
14&c!!
: T/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
063
Station Silent
Monitor Access
Code
AC
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
064
A ent Silent
Ii?onitor Access
Code
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
065
Room
Termination by
Access Code
AC
All
Remainder of
Room Software ID
Divided by 256
066
3-or 4-Digit
Room Number
Access Code
(To use, Dial
Access Code
Followed by
Room/ Station
Number
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
067
First Digit of 3or 4-Digit
t;;Te%ation
AC
RN (Code
Type = 3DG
or 4DG)
All
O-9 (0:9) Missing
Drgrt r~~tMrssrng
All
E!%
. .
1 2(C)N3uz itrRoom
8
15(F) Nudm ikPoom
%
0000-9999
Directory
Number
0000
AC: OOOO0009 or 0012
or 0015
RN:CT/CTI is
Internally
Generated
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1D
Code
Type
No.
068
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Description of
Code Type
Line (Room/
Station)
“Termination
Applicable Applicable
CPG Record
SVR
Code
ACF
Destinafion
All
DB Table - Code
Type Identifier
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
Remainder of
Room Software ID
Divided by 256
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
f
YPeL’DL’ne)
00-63 00-3F)
0000-0063
,069
CLR Trunk
Access Code
AC
070
Master KEDU
p.$-gnw
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
All
Trunk Lroup No.
Access Code
071
Do Not Disturb
Activation
Access Code
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
072
Do Not Disturb
Deactivation
Access Code
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
073
Do Not Disturb
Override
Access Code
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
074
Message
Waiting
Activation
Access Code
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
075
Message
Waiting
Deactivation
Access Code
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
076
Class of Call
Controlled
Routing Access
Code
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
077
Do Not Disturb
Activation by
Occupied
Room Access
Code
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
078
Do Not Disturb
Deactivation by
Occupied
Room Access
Code
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
SVR 5210
8187
D-95
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1D
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code Description of
Code Type
Type
No.
Applicable Applicable DB Table - Code
SVR
Type Identifier
cp%Yd
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
079 Wake up Time
Entered by
Room Access
Code
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
080 Wake up Time
Cancellation by . .
Room Access
Code
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
082 Wake up Time
Access Code
AC
All
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
083
AC
All
Remainder of
Room Software ID
Divided by 256
084 Maid Service in
Progress
Access Code
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
oooo0006 = No.
of Maid ID
Digits (used
with PMS)
085 Maid Service
Completed
Access Code
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
oooo0006 = NO.
of Maid ID
Digits (used
with PMS)
086 Room
Restriction
Activation from
bcix;r;t;atrve
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
AC
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
081
Wake up Time
G&III Access
Message
Waiting
Processing
oooRo;Eg
Number
i2!E$lt
0 8 7
&m-n
Restriction
Deactivation
from Administrative Phone or
CEiZknt
088
Priority Call
Access Code
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1 D
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code Description of
Code Type
Type
No.
-089
Applicable Applicable DB Table - Code
Type Identifier
CPG Record
SVR
Values in Decimal
Code
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
Attendant
MERS Time
fg;f$.pnge
Access Code
AC
090
Attendant
MERS Time.
Period Change
Cancellation
Access Code
AC
091
Local
Termination by
the Last Four
Digits of a 7 or
10 Dtgrt Call
..
092
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
All Exce t
2.2.x. >p
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
All Exce t
2 . 2 . X . >p
0 (0) Unassigned
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
MERS Off Net 7
All Exce t
or 10 Digit
Trat!%ation
2 . 2 . X . >p
Processrng
f weTDM W
0 (0) Unassigned
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
00-63 (00-3F)
Trunk Group No.
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
0 (0) Unassigned
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
TracTation
4 ype;pC)
t
Translation
i ype = LOC)
Translation
Jype = MRS)
093 Trunk Group
Selection and
Outpulsing of all
Received Digits
NT, TD, OD All Exce t
Translation
2.2.X. >p
4 ype =TGS)
094 First Digit 7-or
1 O-Digit Call
- NPA and/or
ABC Code
Translation
needed before
Routing
095 A n a l y z e Dl/D2
or Terminal
Digit before
Routing
AC
(Trar!%ation
T pe
= 4;GT)
096 Access Code
fo&“r 10 Digit
AC
Ai .Exge
. . >p t
All Exce t
2 . 2 . X . >p
. . >p t
Al .2ExXce
Number-NPA
Translation
needed before
Routing
SVR 5210
8187
D-97
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1D
Code
Type
No.
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Description of
Code Type
Applicable Applicable DB Table - Code
CPG Record
SW
Type Identifier
Code
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
097 Special Trunk
Group,.Access
-1 Code - 1 or 2
Digit Access
-Code or Last
.Two Digits of a
Three-Digit
Access Code,
plus Remaining
Dialed Digits
are Repeated
out to Trunk
AC
All Except
2.2.x.x
00-63 00-3F)
Trunk kroup No.
098 Access Code
fD”i’s;;;d Do Not
AC
SII from
7.-S .12.~l;ll
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
AC
SII from
7.J .12.;l;ll
,
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
AC
SII from
72 .12.;16”
9
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
Sending
instruction/route list
CTI is
Internally
Generated
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
0 (0) Unassigned
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
0000-0063
Activation
099 Access Code
fD”i’scrazbrd Do Not
Deactivation
100 Access Code
for Ward Do Not
Disturb Time
Period Time
Display/
E,ni% On
101
162
Termination
directly via
MERS sending
instruction/
rsFRS routing
NT
Translation
f ype = MER)
Access Code
for Time Period
Displa on
Cons0 Ye
AC
103 Analyze ABC
Code before
Routing
D-98
2-z
. .
“Ex,ce
. . . >p t
NT
Translation Al .Exxc.e
. ft
Jype =ABC)
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
rable 5.1 D
Code Type/Code Type identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code Description of
Code Type
Type
No.
. . 104 Trunk Group
Selection and
Out ulse Last
‘X’ Kigits
,.
_
Applicable Applicable
CPG Record
SVR
Code
DB Table - Code
Type Identifier
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
Trunk Group 00-63
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
l-l 5 lPF&fvlBE$S
L
Translation Table
Numbers l-l 5
52.1.X.18.2.2.X.
AC: CTI in
(Trat!Tation
Type
= TGO)
(TraTt!?;tion
= lE0)
(Tra$?;tion
= i% 0)
105 M E R S A c c e s s
Code for On
Network Dialing
(Non DDD)
AC
All Except
2.2.x.x.
theX:oyrymat
Where:
X=7if7
Di iJso~fi~l;d
2
S e&f;$dToR”
F?
106 Access Code
for Real Time
Clock Update
from Console
AC
lo7
AC
Access Code
for Real Time
Clock Dis lay
on Cons0 Pe
108 MERS On Net
7 or 10 Digit
Processing
NT
Translation
Jwe;pW
AEF.e>p t
“i .Exxce
. . >p t
Ai .2ExXce
. . >p t
Translation
+ ype = MRN)
109
;kJzbf;ectory
Direct Access
by Station User
SVR 5210
OD dlvi!~
T ,“=
8187
SI from
52.1 .o
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
1-4 MERS
NPAABC
Translation Table
1-15
5.2.1.X.18.2.2.X
0000
00-63(00-3F)
VMS NT:U,nbeFroup
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
D-99
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1 D
Code Type/Code Typeldentifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code Description of Applicable Applicable DB Table - Code
Code Type
CPG Record
SVR
Type Identifier
Type
NO.
Code
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
110 D i r e c t o r y
Numb,er f o r
(TyptFSPD)
----. Call Fotiard to
- Individual
- Speed Call List
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
SI from
5.2.1 .o
l-8 (l-8
Individual L peed
Cak,‘;tE:try
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
,. A C
All H/M
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
112 Access Code
for Agent
Group Access
AC
AG
All CAS
O-7 (O-7) Agent
Group Number
AC:OOOO0007
AG: CT/CT1
is Internal1
Generate cr
113 Access Code
for Su et-visor
Talk &onitor
AC
All CAS
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
114 Access Code
to Deactivate
Room to Room
Blocking
AC
2.2.x.x
2.3.X.X
3.2.X.X. All
SI SII Sill
from 7.1.2.0
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
115 IDDD v a r i a b l e
numbering
plan
AC
SI from
5.2.1 .o
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
111
116
.Access C o d e
to Activate
Room to Room
Blocking
1st di it of 3or 4-.8 !git No.
‘Delqi”d;ng
AC
translation
before routing
117
SE
A.l~),&II
6.1 .l .O
Access Code
for Individual
Speed Calling
AC
All CAS
from 3.3.1 .O
O-9 (O-9) Missing
Di ,rt,. If no Missing
.8I ttl2C)for3
.
8
k
Numdge:‘. ?t(?) for
4 Ddgui;tfg;rn
0000-0009
E
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
All ss(llS”’
118
Access Code
for Individual
Spe;gd(Zgling
AC
8187
All CAS
from 3.3.1 .O
all !$Sll,
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1D
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code Description of Applicable Applicable
Code Type
CPG Record
SVR
Type
No.
Code
. 1 s-.”
.^ 1 1 9 &yx3;;uCode
DB Table - Code
Type Identifier
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
2 (3) Unassigned
0002= 100
Speed Call
No’s
0003=1000
Speed Call
No’s.
AC
All CAS from
3.3~l;ogllsI,
AC
All SI, SII, Sill O-4(0-4) SCC ID
Number
$21;~ c?alling
_
120
Access Code
foozgzzzalized
Carrier
Processing
121
Access Code
for ACD Agent
Unstaff Position
oogm&oD"
Number as
Defined on
SA Record
AC
CAS from
3.4.1 .O All Sill
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
122 Access Code
for ACD Agent
Supervisor
Assist
AC
CAS from
3.4.1 .O All Sill
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
123 Access Code
for ACD Agent
Emergency
Request
AC
CAS from
3.4.1 .O All Sill
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
124 Access Code
for ACD A e n t
Bad Line weport
AC
CAS from
3.4.1 .O All Sill
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
125 Access Code
AC
CAS from
3.4.1 .O All Sill
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
First Digit of a
Flexible
Numbering Plan
AC
CAS from
3.3.1 .l SII
from 6.1 .l .O
All SI, Sill
5-10 (5-10
Number of A igits
0005-0010
127 Access Code
for Flexible
Numbering Plan
AC
CAS from
3.3.1.1 Sll
from 6.1 .l .O
All SI, Sill
5-10 (5-10
Number of A igits
0005-0010
128 Access Code
AC
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
for ACD Agent
Staff Positron
126
for integrated
Feature hone
Station 8 nlock
SVR 5210
8187
S!L!Y?
All SI Sill
D-l 01
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.1 D
Code Type/Code Type Identifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Code
Type Description of
Code Type
No.
129.
D-l 02
Applicable
CPG Record Applicable
SVR
Code
DB Table - Code
Type Identifier
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
0000
s-
AccessCode
for IFP
Message
-Leaving
..
AC
SII from
7.2.1 .O
All SI Sill
0 (0) Unassigned
AC
All Sill
O(0) for Day Mode
l(1) for Night Mode
130
.Access -Code
for Agent Group
Night/Day
Mode
131
Internal Code
Type for FRL
Authorization
Codes
N/A
SI from
52.1 .o
0 (0) Unassigned
CPG does
not collect
data for this
code type
132
Access Code
Issued by VMS
to Turn
Message
Waiting On
AC
SI from
5.2.1 .O
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
133
Access Code
Issued by VMS
to Turn
Message
Waiting Off
AC
SI from
52.1 .o
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
134
Access Code
Issued by VMS
for Outgoing
Call to Remote
VMS
AC
E-E
. .
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
135
Access Code’
Issued by VMS
for Outgoing
Call to Remote
VMS
AC
SI from
5.2.1 .O
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
136
Access Code
Issued by VMS
for Outgoing
Call to User
AC
SI from
5.2.1 .O
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
8187
0000-0001
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
1 rable 5.1D
Code
Type
NO.
Code Type/Code Type ldentifiers Definition and Description (Continued)
Description of
Code Type
Applicable
CPG Record
Code
Applicable
SVR
DB Table - Code
Type Identifier
Values in Decimal
(Hex Values in
Parenthesis)
Values
CPG Record
Code Type
Identifier
Values
% -
. 1
. ”
- 137
Reserved for
Future Feature
AC
SI from
5.2.1 .o
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
i38
Terminal
multi--pilot hunt
group
AC, HG
SI from
5.2.1 .O
Remainder of the
First Line Software
ID of the Terminal
Hunt Group Divided
by 256
AC: OOOO9999 Hunt
GN’UP,;;;
00-79 (00-4F
Circul~J-lu& L roup
AC: OOOO9999
Circular
HuN”,‘,Gb’,“,“P
139
Circular multipilot hunt group
(HuTnt Foup
T iv?MP=)
AC, HG
(Hunt Group
Type =
CRMP)
SI from
5.2.1 .o
HG:CT/CTI
is Internal1
Generate J
HG:CT/CTI
is Internally
Generated
140
VMS Directory
Number for
Message Desk
Unattended
OD (Type =
MDU)
141
Access Code
for VMS for
Message Desk
Attended
AC
142
Display FRL
Assignment
MAP Access
Code
AC
Sill from
8.2.2.2
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
143
Update FRL
Assignment
MAP Access
Code
AC
Sill from
8.2.2.2
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
144
Second Paging
Answer Code
AC
Sill from
8.2.2.2
0 (0) Unassigned
0000
SVR 5210
8187
00-63 (00-3F)
VMS ;T$keFroup
CT/CT1 is
Internally
Generated
00-63 (00-3F)
VMS Trunk Group
Number
0000-0063
D-l 03
TL-130400-1001
Record Code HD:
Hundreds Groups
,---------,----------I
I
T
I
I
5.2 Record Code HD (Figure 5.2) defines the hundreds groups
used as directory numbers by the system. The number of
directory numbers in each hundreds group is also defined. The
audit field is used in support of the Hotel/Motel feature that allows
hotel staff telephones to be audited while guest telephones are
normally not audited.
1’
----T-~
ITI
IRI
$;
ISI
IAI
ICI
ITI
1 I
lOI
INI
ICl
101
IDI
IEl
I
I
I
I I
I l
I I
I 1
I I
I
I I
I I
I 1
I I
r-7
181
I
I
--r- T-;-T-t-+-t-+-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-,
111111111111111111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
1~8~9101112131415181718191011121314151617181910111213141516171819101112110~
-+-+-+-LJ-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
c-4
,l,1OIHIlJI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
III,
t
I
I,,,
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
. .-A-.3
-*--L-~--~-~-~-_L-~---~--L
. . . , . - . . . . . . 1
Figure 5.2
D-l 04
Record Code HD: Hundreds Groups Data Sheet
8187
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.2
CQL.
NO.
12
COL.
NAME
Selected Audit
Condition
./ %-.”
13-l 4. Hundreds
Group
15-17
SVR 5210
Number of
Directory
Numbers per
Hundreds
Group
Entry Fields for Record Code HD
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
A = audit
N = not audited
This field determines whether or not this
hundreds group can be audited.
NOTE: In a motel application, auditing is
provided to guest room telephones.
-It is not provided to management and motel
operations telephones.
., 00-99 = number
This field determines the Dl/D2 (00-99)
combination.
-One entry must be made for each hundreds
group in the system.
NOTE: If three-digit numbers are used,
column 13 must be dashed and column 14
must contain O-9.
005-l 00 = number
8f87
Assign the number of directory numbers,
reserved for this hundreds group.
-Because Recent Change cannot be used for
this field, it is recommended to always set this
value at 100. Setting this value at 100 allows
for future growth.
-It is recommended to build spare numbers
into the system. Spare numbers can be used
for pilot/phantom numbers. Spare numbers
should also be built into the hundreds group
numbers to allow for the addition of station
lines in the future.
-Each hundreds group should reserve 100
directory numbers when 25 or less hundreds
groups are used: If this number is not a
multiple of five, the amount allocated is the
next higher multiple of five.
D-l 05
TL-130400-1001
Record Code IR:
Intercept Routing
Numbers
5.3 Record Code IR, Figure 5.3, assigns, intercept conditions for
the various call configurations.
IC:
101
IDI
IEI
I I
I I
I I
I l
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
-T-~-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-TT-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-t-T-~-,
11111111111111,1,11112121212121212121212131313l3l3,3l3l3l3l3l4,4l4l18(
I
'
'
~7181910111213141516171819101112l314t51617181910111213141516171819101112110(
t-+-+-+-c--c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
1214101~
IRIOl,,l I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
L-A-A-A- -*-1_&-&-A_~--_~
.
A
*
.
.
.
.
.
*
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
.
Figure 5.3
12-13
COL.
NAME
c-4
I I
__a
Record Code IR: Intercept Routing Numbers Data Sheet
Table 5.3
COL.
NO.
r-4
Entry Fields For Record Code IR
VALID
ENTRIES
Intercept
00-15 = number
Routing Number
COMMENTS
This field determines the type of call to be
intercepted.
Routes 00 and 12-l 5 are available for
special applications and are defined by the
user. They can be routed to a station line,
attendant, recorder announcer, or 120 IPM
tone (e.g., Record Code CL, columns 18-21,
AG, columns 25-26, 31-32).
Routes 01-l 1 are predefined as listed below:
01 =The call is toll restricted. It is not
recommended to send these calls to the
console because the attendant may not be
able to answer all of them. It is preferred to
send these calls to tone.
02 = The feature dialed is not allowed for the
station line or the system.
03 = The call was made to a vacant number.
04 = The call was made to an invalid number
05=The call was a DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
to a restricted station.
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.3
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
12-13
Intercept
(cont’d) Routing Number
Entry Fields for Record Code IR (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
00-l 5 = number
06 = The call cannot be completed due to
present call configuration (e.g., the call is in
DND (Do Not Disturb).
07 = The trunk group is restricted by ACOF
(Attendant Control Of Facilities).
08= Digit timeout /no dial alarm calls should
be routed to the console or a security station.
If routed to the console once the key is
released, the station number that is causing
the alarm is no longer visible on the LCD.
09 = Wake-up or appointment reminder
answer routing.
10 = Recorder announcer for TMPI or CRPI
type hunt groups (see Record Code HG).
11 = The number called has been changed.
NOTE: The intercept routing number must be
unique across this record code.
TO = 120-IPM
This field determines whether the call will
intercept to a line, trunk, attendant, tone, or
recorder announcer.
-If the destination type is AT, it must be
defined on Record Code AT, column 12.
-If the destination type is RA, the trunk must
be defined on Record Code TC, columns 1416, and marked G in column 45.
-If the destination type is LN, it must be
defined on Record Code LD, columns 12-15.
-If the destination type is TI, the trunk must
be defined on Record Code Tl , columns 1213, and must be marked TIE in columns 1416.
. 1 %-I
_
14-15
SVR 5210
Destination
Type
COMMENTS
tone
LN = line
AT = attendant
RA = recorder
announcer
TI = Tie trunk
RL = release link
trunk
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.3
Entry Fields for Record Code IR (Continued)
c
COL.
NO.
16-19
COL.
NAME
Intercept
Destination
s.I 1
D-l 08
VALID
ENTRIES
0000 = tone (TO)
0000-9999 =
directory number
U’J)
0128 = console 0
(AT)
0064 = console 1
(AT)
0192 = either of the
two consoles
0000 = to an RLT
W-1
(--OO)-(--63)
=Tie trunk (TI)
XXXX = recorder
announcer (RA)
XXXX = the trunk
number (OOOO)(0063)
8/87
COMMENTS
This field determines the intercept destination
of the destination type.
-A destination type of TO must have an
intercept destination value of 0000.
-A destination type of LN must have an
intercept destination value of 0000-9999 or if
three-digit station numbers are used
(-000) - (-999).
-A destination type of AT must have an
intercept destination value of 0128, 0064 or
0192.
-A destination type of RL must have an
intercept destination value of 0000:
-A destination type of TI must have an
intercept destination value of (--OO)(--63).
-A destination type of RA must have an
intercept destination value of (OOOO)-(0063).
SVR 5210
TL-130400-I 001
Record Code SA:
Specialized
CommonCarrier
5.4 Record Code SA, Figure 5.4, defines the access codes,
directory numbers, and authorization codes for up to five SCC
(Specialized Common Carrier) networks. When the MERS option
is in effect, this record code is not normally used as the SCC(s)
will be in the MERS routing. This record code provides SCC
information when the SCC is not routed through MERS.
GATEWAY NUMBER
---------------------,
II
I
I
I
I
I
AUT;liRZ3~ION
I
I
I
DIRECTORY
r - - - r - r - - ---------------_-_________r_____________-------------------I ; ITI
1 0
I8
16
I
IO I
IPI
Figure 5.4
SVR 5210
Record Code SA: Specialized Common Carrier Data Sheet
8187
D-109
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.4
Entry Fields for Record Code SA
COMMENTS
are placed over an SCC.
-If a trunk is normally restricted from a
station user, an entry of TG allows SCC calls
to use the restricted trunk.
- If a station is normally toll restricted, an
entry of TL allows SCC calls to be made.
- An entry of BT allows for both types o f
Number/Access
Code
allowable entries
for column 15
O-9, *, #, or = allowable entries
for columns 16
and 17
- = N/A
three-digit access code of the SCC.
-This code tells the system that the user
wants to access the SCC.
-Column 15 cannot be dashed.
18-29
Gateway
Number/
Directory
Number
O-9, *, #, L (long
pause), S (short
pause), or
-=N/A
This field gives the directory number that
accesses the SCC.
-Column 18 cannot be dashed.
-This number must be left justified.
NOTE: If the SCC feature is used for
applications other than SCC where no
authorization code is necessary, a pound sign
(#) should be entered in column 29.
30-39
Authorization
Number
O-9, *, #= allowed
codes
-= N/A
This field gives the authorization code number.
-Column 30 cannot be dashed.
40-42
Time Between
Access and
Authorization
Number
000-254 = time in
seconds
or
045 = suggested
value
This field determines the maximum time
between the end of sending an SCC gateway
directory number and the start of authorization
code.
TL-130400-1001
Table 5.4
COL.
NAME
SW 5210
Entry Fields for Record Code SA
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Time Between
Authorization
Number
and
Digits
000-254 = time in
seconds
or
015 = suggested
value
This field determines the selected elapsed
seconds required between sending the
authorization number and the digits.
Bypass Toil
Restriction ‘,
Check on Final
Directory
Number
Y = required
N = not required
This field determines whether or not a bypass
of toll restriction is allowed when the final
directory number is entered.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code I1 :
International
Cohlntry Code
,---------7-----7-
5.5 Record Code 11, Figure 5.5, defines the valid international
country codes for MERS (Most Economical Route Selection)
IDDD (International Direct Distant Dialing) processing.
--------------------------------------------------------~-~
I
I
I
I
I
1
; F
g
M
I
-S N; R Cl V,-:C
i
.$..“I E 0, A 0 ,
,c
D L u
0 E’
I N ’
; D T ;
IR
R
rD
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
E
IC’l
101
IDI
IEl
I I
I ’
I I
I I
I
I
,
I
:-T-T-: --r-t-T-T-+-T-T-T-T-T-T
-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T--r--r--r--r-*-,
ilti 11 ~iii~i~i~i~i;ii2~2;2~2~2i2i2~2i2~2;3;3;313;313;313;313~414141
[7~~~9t0111213,4151617181910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011121
t-+-+-+-c--+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
Figure 5.5
Record Code II: International Country Code Data Sheet
Table 5.5
Entry Fields for Record Code I1
COMMENTS
O-9 = number
This field determines the valid values for
digit 1.
This field determines the valid values for
digits 2 and 3.
I
I
r-
18
IO
c-
-
-
TL-130400-1001
CLASS OF SERVICE
SVR 5210
6.0 This section describes the record codes required to define
the system classes of service. The following record codes are
required:
l
Record Code DC defines the trunk groups allowed for the
various classes of service.
l
Record Code DD defines the system features allowed for the
various classes of service.
l
Record Code NC defines additional system features allowed
for the various classes of service.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code DC:
Displayable
Class of Service
-..
6.1 Record Code DC, Figure 6.1, allows system users access
to the various trunk groups (00-63) within the system. Sixteen
different displayable classes of service are possible.
A COS provide access to certain trunk features or allows certain
types of calls to be made. The classes of service assigned in
the system are defined by three different record codes: DC, DD,
and NC. Record Code NC defines the n-displayable classes of
service. Record Codes DC and DD together define the
displayable classes of service. Since there is only one entry field
for displayable COS on line, trunk, and feature record codes,
Record Codes DC and DD must be used in conjunction with one
another. The displayable COS value assigned on Record Code
DC also applies to Record Code DD.
On a per-station basis, each station is marked with a
displayable COS number and an n-displayable COS (refer to
Record Code NC). The displayable and n-displayable COS
numbers are displayed at the Attendant Console every time a
station accesses the attendant. Table 6.3B provides a crossreference for compatible and noncompatible station features. If
remote access authorization codes are used, the COS required
must be included in Record Codes DC and NC.
TRUNK GROUP ACCESS
T -~-~-~-~-~-T-T-T-T-TT T -T-T-TI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 0101010~0101010101111
I 1 I 1 I1 II II
I 11213141516,718191011I 2 I 3 1 4 1 5 1 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II,
I
I
I
I
I
8
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I’
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-7 - r - + - r - t - r - t - t
-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t; t - t - t - t I I II I I ,I ,I I I II II ,I II 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1
7~8~9,Ol1121314151617,8l91O1112131415,6,7l8191O1
-+-+-+-+--+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-q
,‘zj’OI,jI~IOIOl 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
i
--------___-------------.
.
.
.
Figure 6.1
.
1
.
.
-T-T-T-i
- T - T - T
T
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
51515 I
I 61616161
61718 I
I
I
I
I
I 011’2’3’
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
4 -;-;-i-j
17171717171717171
10111213141516171
t - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t-t-t-
J-_----,
.
.
.
I
Record Code DC: Displayable Class-of-Service Data Sheet
--.&.-a
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.1
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code DC
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12-13
Displayable
00-l 5 = number
Class of Service
%./ .”
This field determines the number used to refer
to this displayable class of service.
-It is recommended to use 00 as a default for
trunks.
-The displayable class-of-service number
must be unique across the DC forms.
NOTE: COS 15 is normally reserved as the
COS for maintenance and is allowed access
to all trunk groups.
14-77
Trunk Group
Access
This field determines what trunk groups this
displayable COS is allowed to access.
-If a large number of CO lines are not
allowed to access one another, they can be
put in one group. Since access to these lines
is through a divert condition and each CO
requires its own trunk, the different CO users
cannot use each other’s CO.
-If toll access is indicated on Record Code
DD, columns 14-15, then at least one trunk
group in the trunk group access field must be
marked Y.
NOTE: The trunk group access must be
compared to Record Code Tl to ensure that
each trunk group with outgoing or two-way
direction can be accessed.
Y = selected
- = not selected
TL-130400-1001
Record Code DD:
Displayable
Class Of Service
#---------l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.-
6.2 Record Code DD, Figure 6.2, allows access to certain
system features. This record code is a continuation of record
code DC.
l---I
,
I
I
I
’
N
F
x
I
-+-T-+-T-T-TI1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 l2l2l2l2l2l212l2l212l3l
~7~8~9,0,11213,41516171819,0,1,2,3,415,6171819,0,
c - + - + - + - u - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
lOl3lOl~I~IOlOI
I
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I-.L--L
I
I
L-L-L-I-L-I-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-*-*-~-
Figure 6.2
T-T-T- T-T-T-t-T-1
-T-i
;
3131313131313131314141114141414141,
1121314151617181910l11213141516171,
-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-c-+-~-Jr-~-~-+-+-4
I
,,,,I
III
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
_~_~_*_~-~-~-~-~-~-I-~-.
- *
8 L-2-l
Record Code DD: Displayable Class-of-Service Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.2
COL.
NO.
12-13
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code DD
VALID
ENTRIES
00-l 5 = number
Displayable
Class of Service
_.”
14-15
Toll Access
.
COMMENTS
This field determines the number given to
each of the 16 possible displayable COSs
NOTE: COS 15 is normally reserved for
maintenance and is allowed access to all
features.
TA = allowed
-- = not allowed
If toll restriction is in effect for the trunk group
accessed, this field determines whether or not
the toll restriction can be overridden.
-An entry of TA allows the toll restriction
feature to be overridden.
-An entry of -- disallows toll restriction to
be overridden.
-Speed call numbers and numbers
accessing a non-MERS SCC route can
override toll restrictions if programmed to do
so. Speed calling is programmed on Record
Code GS, columns 15-l 6.
-SCC is programmed on Record Code SA,
columns 13-l 4.
-If this field is marked TA, Record Code NC,
columns 40-41, must be dashed.
16-17
Switch Direct
Line
SL = allowed
-- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not access to
a switched direct line is allowed.
-SL must be indicated for a hot-line service
or a CO line.
-A CO line requires its own trunk group.
-It is not recommended to terminate a hot
line to a console.
-A COS used by a hunt group that does not
divert must not be marked SL.
-If this field is marked SL, the divert
destination (Record Code LM, columns 3031) can be a line, console, recorder
announcer, or tone. A hunt group pilot number
is allowed only if it does not have the campon feature.
18-19
Meet-Me
Conference
MC = allowed
-- = not allowed
MC allows access to the progressive
conference feature.
-For this feature to work, the system must
have an (FB-51279) eight-party conference
card.
-With this feature, the user can join a
conference.
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.2
Entry Fields for Record Code DD (Continued)
COMMENTS
PC allows access to the progressive
conference feature.
-For this feature to work, the system must
have an (FB-51279) eight-party conference
-If this field is marked PC, then Record Code
NC, columns 30-31, must be marked HS for
proper operation of the feature.
-If this field is marked TA t h e n Record Code
have an FB-17210 card.
-If this field is marked TA, then Record Code
NC, columns 40-41, must be dashed.
-- = not allowed
-If this field is dashed, the line cannot call
other stations; it can only receive calls.
-A CO line does not need station access.
-When defining a trunk COS, it is important to
give the trunk station access.
-If Record Code LM, columns 30-31, is
marked LN, this field must be marked SA.
26-27
Code Call
Access
CC = allowed
-- = not allowed
CC allows access to the code calling (overhead ringing) feature.
-For this feature to work, the system must
have an FB-17210 card.
28-29
Paging Access
PA = allowed
-- = not allowed
PA allows access to the paging feature.
-For this feature to work, the system must
have an FB-17240 card.
30-31
Maintenance
Access
MA = allowed
-- = not allowed
MA allows access to the maintenance feature.
-The switch room telephone is always given
MA.
32-33
MERS Off
Network
ME = allowed
-- = not allowed
ME allows access to MERS off-network
trunks.
-See Record Codes MR, TR, SI, and RP for
requirements.
-This field can be used to allow overflow
calls on the network to overflow to the DDD
(Direct Distance Dial) trunks.
D-118
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.2
COL.
NO.
34-35
36-37
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code DD (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
Release Link
Trunks Access
.”*-
RL = allowed
Modem Access
MD = allowed
-- = not allowed
COMMENTS
RL allows access to the CAS attendant via the
RLTs.
-In a CAS application, this field should be
given at least one line for testing purposes.
This field is no longer used.
-- = not allowed
38-39
MERS On
Network
MN = allowed
-- = not allowed
MN allows access to MERS private network
trunks.
-See MR, TR, SI, and RP for requirements.
40-41
CO Line
CL = allowed
CL allows access to a CO line.
-The CO is normally given an unpublished
DN (Directory Number).
-If this field is marked CL for access to a CO
line, then the switched direct line (SL) must be
marked in columns 16-17.
-A CO line can only appear on an IFP.
-A COS used by a hunt group that does not
divert must not be marked CL.
-- = not allowed
MERSO+ orToll Restriction
TR=O+ or-
44-45
MERS
Executive
Bypass
EB = searches all
routes
-- = call is
placed into queue
before being sent
out over the most
expensive route
EB allows access to the MERS executive
bypass feature.
-With this feature, the system searches all
MERS routes before queuing an outgoing call.
NOTE: If the trunk group is busy, the call will
not route to another trunk group.
46-47
International
Direct Distant
Dialing Access
ID = allowed
-- = not allowed
ID allows access to international dialing for
calls outside the USA.
42-43
restriction
--Z”O
restriction
TR permits credit card, outside operator, or
international calls. This only applies if toll
restriction is in effect for MERS calls and the
call is routed over MERS.
-This field is only used if toll restriction is in
effect.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code NC:
N-Displayable
Class of Service
6.3 Record Code NC, Figure 6.3, defines the n-displayable
COS used to allow or restrict station access to the system
features. If remote access authorization codes are used, make
sure that Record Codes DC and DD have a field that meets the
requirements of that code. Since a class of service is assigned
on a line basis not a station basis, the term line user is used as
opposed to station user when defining class-of-service
features.
T”-------T---r-----------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
; I: I
I
I
I D ’
I
..
I
,
1., E
’
I
n I
1
!
I
~O!4~0lNICIOIOI
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r-----------------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
,
$
I
Figure 6.3
Record Code NC: N-Displayable Class-of-Service Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.3A
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code NC
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12-13
N-Displayable
00-l 5 = number
Class-ofService Number
z, .”
This field determines the number assigned to
the COS defined in this row.
-It is recommended not to assign 00 as a
station COS. COS 15 is normally reserved for
maintenance and is allowed access to all
features.
14-S
Executive
Override
EX = allowed
-- = not allowed
This feature allows a third party to break in to
a two-party connection.
-This feature cannot be enabled if the station
has call waiting non-DID (Direct Inward Dial).
‘-
16-17
Originating Call
Waiting
OC = allowed
- - = not allowed
This feature allows a line user to send a call
waiting tone to a busy station. The tone
indicates that another call is waiting to be
answered. This feature causes a call waiting
tone to be heard by the called party.
-With this feature, the originating party must
remain off-hook.
NOTE: If this field is marked OC, then Record
Code OF, column 22, must be marked Y and
columns 25-26 (of Record Code OC) cannot
be dashed.
18-19
Station Campon Call Back
CO = allowed
-- = not allowed
This feature allows a line user to camp on to a
busy station.
-Once a user has activated this feature, the
telephone can be hung up. When the calling
and called stations are both idle, the calling
station is rung. If the calling station answers,
the called station is also rung.
-If this field is marked CO, then Record Code
OF, column 22, must be marked Y and
columns 25-26 cannot be dashed.
-It is recommended that this feature be given
to the console.
20-21
Attendant
Information
Al = allowed
-- = not allowed
This feature allows access to the console by
dialing the attendant access code.
-If this feature is not allowed, the line cannot
call the attendant.
-If Record Code LM, columns 30-31, are
marked AT, this field must be marked AL.
22-23
Dial Call Pickup
DC = allowed
-- = not allowed
This feature allows a line user in a dial call
pickup group to answer a call placed to
another station within the same group.
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.3A
Entry Fields for Record Code NC (Continued)
COMMENTS
-- = not allowed
call forwarding automatically to any destination
within the system.
redetermined location when this feature is
ctivated. If the call forwarding variable
eature is allowed, that feature provides the
t o override the forwarding condition.
assign this feature to a
-- = not allowed
to z ztation with a COS marked DS.
-A hookswitch flash is used to access
system features. For normal applications, this
feature is not required for hot-line service
telephones or motel guest room telephones.
-When a hot-line service station goes offhook, the party hears the ringback tone from
the station or trunk at the far end being rung.
-If this field is marked HS t h e n Record Code
marked PC for
-- = not allowed
-- = not allowed
camped on when the station is busy.
-This feature applies to internal calls,
console extended calls, and station
transferred calls
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.3A
COL.
NO.
36-37
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code NC (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
UN = allowed
-- = not allowed
.-
Universal Night
Answer
s.I .”
UN allows retrieval of UNA calls at this line.
-The universal night answer feature is either
a bell or light that indicates an incoming call.
38-39
Originating Only
OR = allowed
-- = not allowed
OR allows a line user to make calls only, not
receive them.
-Hot line telephones are normally configured
as originating only.
.I
40-41
Terminating
Only
TM = allowed
-- = not allowed
TM allows a line user to receive calls but not
make them.
-This field is normally applied to an ACD
group.
-If a station with TM marked goes off-hook
to place a call, reorder tone is heard.
-Originating only and terminating only are
mutually exclusive features.
-If this field is marked TM, thencolumns 1415, 18-21, and 22-23 of Record Code DD
must be dashed.
42-43
Permit to
Receive DID
PD = allowed
-- = not allowed
PD allows a line user to receive DID calls.
-If the site has DID and non-DID stations,
assign PD to all stations that are to receive
DID or DID transferred calls.
44-45
Call Hold
HD = allowed
-- = not allowed
HD allows a line user to put a call on hold.
46-47
Call Park
PK = allowed
-- = not allowed
PK allows a line user to put a call into a call
park queue.
-This feature allows a call put into the park
queue to be retrieved from any station in the
system.
-For a station to retrieve a parked call, it
must have the hookswitch flash feature.
-The timeout factor is set on Record Code
OT, columns 36-38.
48-49
Administrative
Function Phone
AF = allowed
-- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not the
administration feature is allowed.
-This feature allows a station to activate or
cancel features such as reminder
service/message waiting on another
telephone.
-This is given to a message waiting
telephone and to the telephone that is used to
turn on/off hotel features.
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.3A
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code NC (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
50-51
Service
Function Phone
%.I 1
SF = allowed
-- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not the
service feature is allowed.
- A station marked SF will not be blocked if
the motel room block feature is in effect.
-Room blocking is used in a motel
application. Room blocking prevents rooms
from calling one another directly. Motel
service telephones such as the valet, maid, or
food service telephones should not be blocked
when room blocking is in effect. These
telephones should be marked SF.
52-53
Calling Number
On Display
Phone
CN = allowed
-- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not the calling
number (number of the station placing the call)
is displayed on the LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display).
-Message waiting cannot be activated on
calling number display telephones.
-This feature is only used for a display
telephone.
-This feature is normally used in a motel
application to indicate what room number is
calling.
-This telephone can be used as a message
center if required.
-Called number display service and calling
number display phone are mutually exclusive.
-If this field is marked CN, then columns 6263 must be dashed.
NOTE: Never assign this feature to an IFP.
54-55
Do Not Disturb
Activation
DD = allowed
-- = not allowed
DD allows the DND (Do Not Disturb) feature to
be turned off/on from the telephone.
-This feature is normally assigned to a POTS
telephone in a motel/hospital application for
use by guests/patients who want quiet.
-In an ACD group, this feature can be
assigned to the agent; or the supervisor can
put the agent into a work state.
-When a telephone is in DND, the calling
party hears busy.
-On an IFP, this feature can be activated by
a button on the telephone or by an access
code.
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.3A
Entry Fields for Record Code NC (Continued)
COMMENTS
-- = not allowed
the user telephone. The feature works much
like an alarm clock.
-- = not allowed
appears at a message waiting answer center.
-If a message waiting answer center
telephone answers a call from a station that
has message waiting activated, the message
waiting feature is automatically canceled.
calling number di
-This field is only u
forwarded to them.
-Called number display service and calling
number display phone are mutually exclusive.
If this field is marked C D , t h e n columns 52er assign this feature to a
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.3A
COL.
NO.
64-65
Entry Fields for Record Code NC (Continued)
COL.
NAME
Computer
Access
VALID
ENTRIES
CA = allowed
-- = not allowed
%.”
..
COMMENTS
CA allows computer access.
-This feature interfaces with compatible
equipment and is designed to interface with
Wavetech. Wavetech is a system used in
credit card checking. It determines whether
or not the card holder is over the credit
amount allowed. A dial tone is sent to the
called station (Wavetech equipment) when the
originating station disconnects. A short
across the tip and ring will exist until the dial
tone detector, which is built into the Wavetech
equipment, detects the tone and causes the
shorted circuit to open. The Wavetech
equipment is then released.
66-67
SCC Access
SA = allowed
-- = not allowed
SA allows access to non-MERS SCC.
-If the MERS option is equipped, the SCC will
normally be placed into the MERS routing.
68-69
Group Speed
Calling Allowed
SC = allowed
-- = not allowed
SC allows access to group speed calling.
-The group speed calling feature must be set
up on Record Codes GC and GS.
70-71
VMS Mailbox
VM = allowed
-- = not allowed
VM allows access to a VMS (voice mail)
mailbox.
72-73
Station Silent
Monitor Access
SM = allowed
-- = not allowed
SM allows access to the silent monitor feature.
-This feature allows a station to monitor other
station lines without being detected.
-This feature will not work on a nonprime
control line or Attendant Consloes.
74-75
Station Silent
Monitor Secure
SS = allowed
-- = not allowed
SS secures a line from the silent monitor
feature.
-If SS is entered, the silent monitor feature
cannot be used on lines with this COS.
-In a conference call, a line marked SS can
be monitored.
76-77
Trunk
Terminating
Only
TT = allowed
-- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not only
incoming calls are allowed. If this field is
marked TT, the line cannot make outgoing
calls.
78-79
PMS Calling
Number Display
PM = allowed
-- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not PMS
(Property Management System) calling
number display is allowed.
-PMS (Property Management System) is
used in motel applications to provide extensive
management features.
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.38
N-Displayable Class of Service Conflicts and Violations
SECOND FEATURE
TM
V
V
V
V
V
V
PD
V
HD
R
PK
R
SD
CD
V
CA
R
SC
V
KEY:
R = The second feature is required for the first feature to
operate properly. (Example: EX requires HS.)
v= Only one or the other of the two features can be specified
within the same class of service. (Example: EX conflicts with
TM.)
TL-130400-1001
Table 6.3C Abbreviations
I
AF - Administrative Function Phone
Al - Attendant Information Calls
I
MA - Message Waiting Answer Center
I
1OC - Originating Call Waiting
CA - Computer Access
vCD - Catled Number Display
OR - Originating Only
CF - Call Forwarding - Fixed
PK - Call Park
CN - Calling Number Display,Service
SA - Special Common Carrier Access
CO - Camp-on/Automatic Recall
SC - Group Speed Calling Allowed
CV - Call Forwarding - Variable
SD - Secondary Directory Number Access
DC - Dial Call Pickup
SF - Service Function Phone
PD - Permit to Receive DID
1DD - Do Not Disturb Activation
1TC - Terminating Call Waiting Non-DID
1DS - Data Line Security
1TD - Terminating Call Waiting DID
EX - Executive Override
1HD - Call Hold
HS - Hookswitch Flash
I
I TM - Terminating Only
I UN - Universal Night Answer
-I-WU - Wake-up Appointment Reminder
I
I
TL-130400-1001
LINE
FEATURES
7.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the various system line features. The following record
codes are required:
l
Record Code HG defines the station hunt groups.
0 Record Code MH defines the station hunt group members.
l
Record Code GC defines the system speed calling groups.
l
Record Code GS defines the system speed calling numbers.
l
Record Code ED defines the system pickup groups.
l
Record Code CH defines the “change feature by access
code” feature.
l
Record Code DF defines the system default divert condition
value.
.
SVR 5210
D-129
TL-130400-1001
Record Code HG:
Hunt Group
7.1 Record Code HG, Figure 7.1, defines the station hunt group
data requirements. The station hunting feature provides for a call
to route to an idle station of a prearranged group of stations. The
group of stations is defined by a pilot number. If the PNA
(Predetermined Night Answer) and ACD (Automatic Call
Distribution) station hunt groups are selected, they must be
assigned here.
The system supports a maximum of 256 hunt groups. Of the total
hunt groups supported, no more than 80 can be circular hunt
groups. The number of hunt groups remaining for terminal hunt
groups is determined by subtracting the number of circular hunt
groups used from the allowed total- (e.g., if 80 circular hunt
‘* groups are in use, the system can support 136 terminal hunt
groups, 256-80 = 136).
__
.”
-T-T -T-T-+-T-T-T-+-T-T-T-t-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-,
I1I1I1I1I1I1I1I111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l414l
1
,,~8:9,0,1,2,3,4,516171819101112131415161718191011121314151617181910111
c-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
10171O~Hl~I
I
III
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
I
I
III
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
III
L--c--L-A- -A-*-A.-A.-*-A-A-&L
.
.
.
.
.
*
.
*
.
8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
.
.
Figure 7.1
Record Code HG: Hunt Group Data Sheet
,,I
.
.
I 1
I
1
I 1
I 1
I I
I 1
I 1
, f
I I
I
I
'
k-4
181
101
L - 4
I I
--A_.8
TL-130400-1001
Table 7.1
COL.
NO.
12-15
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
Hunt Group Pilot 0000-9999
Number
;00)-(999) =
number
.”xA three-digit
number must have
a blank before it.
.
16-19
Hunt Group
Type
TERM
CIRC
TMCP
CRCP
TMPI
CRPI
TMMP
~RMP
SVR 5210
Entry Field for Record Code HG
COMMENTS
This field assigns the pilot number that is used
to access the hunt group.
-When a pilot number is dialed, the hunt
begins for stations assigned on Record Code
MH. When the normally assigned directory
number of a station in a hunt group is dialed,
hunting occurs only for hunt group types
TMMP and CRMP.
-Every hunt group pilot number on this record
code must have at least one member listed on
Record Code MH.
This field determines the type of station hunt
(terminal or circular).
-If terminal hunting is used, the hunt always
begins at the first station in the group and
terminates at the last station in the group (if all
stations are busy).
-If circular hunting is used, the hunt begins at
the next station following the station that
answered the previous hunt call.
-True ACD requires circular hunting.
-Limited ACD groups can be assigned
terminal hunting or terminal hunting with group
camp-on.
-If TMPI or CRPI is used, enter the recorder
announcer on Record Code IR.
TERM = terminal hunt
CIRC = circular hunt
TMCP = terminal hunt with group camp-on
CRCP = circular hunt with group camp-on
TMPI = terminal hunt with camp-on and
pressure indicator with divert to a recorder
announcer
CRPI = circular hunt with camp-on and
pressure indicator with divert to a recorder
announcer
TMMP = terminal hunt group with camp-on
and pressure indicator with no divert to a
recorder announcer
CRMP = circular hunt group with camp-on
and pressure indicator with no divert to a
recorder announcer
-The maximum number of circular hunt
groups is 80.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code MH:
Hunt Group
Members
7.2 Record Code MH, Figure 7.2, defines the station member
directory numbers for the various hunt group pilot numbers.
The order for call attempts to the hunt group members is also
defined on this record code. This record code is used in
conjunction with Record Code HG.
-.
-1
I
11
’ I
1,
$1
!I
? I
I
I
)I
JI
I
:I
)I
I[ ?I
IE - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ICIC
-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-~-~-~-~-~-,
I1 I1 I1 I1 II It I1 I1 I1 I1 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-+-+-+-~-c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
1017111~I~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
L-~-*-~--~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~
*
.
9 .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
*
.
*
.
.
.
.
.
Figure 7.2
Record Code MH: Hunt Group Members Data Sheet
I
I
I
I
I
r-7
I
IO I
18
I
*
.
--
Ic-iI
A--.8
TL-130400-1001
Table 7.2
COL.
NO.
12-15
COL.
NAME
IHunt Group Pilot
INumber
s.”
Entry Fields for Record Code MH
VALID
ENTRIES
0000-9999 =
number
or
(000)(999) =
number
A three-digit
number must have
a blank before it.
COMMENTS
This field assigns the pilot number of the hunt
group.
-Use phantom numbers for the pilot numbers;
this saves the numbering plan for station
numbers,
-Phantom numbers can be defined on
Record Code HD.
-The hunt group pilot number must have
been defined on Record Code HG.
16-18
I unt Sequence
H
I umber
N
000-255 = number
Start the sequence number within a hunt group
with zero and continue in ascending order; no
gaps are allowed.
19-22
I ember
M
I irectory
D
Number
I
0000-9999 =
Make the member directory number a valid
line or room number.
-A directory number can only be in one hunt
group.
-A hunt group member cannot be an agent
position.
-Lines with the following class-of-service
features should not be members of a hunt
group:
from COS Record Code DD, SL (Switched
Direct Line)
from COS Record Code NC, OR
(Originating Only)
-Members of a hunt group should not be
given a divert condition, with the possible
exception of the last member of the hunt
group.
-Divert conditions are defined on Record
Codes LD and LM.
number
goo)-(999) =
number
A three-digit
number must have
a blank before it.
SVR 5210
8187
D-133
TL-130400-1001
Record Code GC:
Group Speed
Calling
7.3 Record Code GC, Figure 7.3, defines the speed calling
groups used by the system’. The directory numbers that make up
this group or groups are listed on Record Code GS. This record
code allows access to portions of or all of the system’s group
speed calling list. This release allows up to a 1000 teleohone
numbers in the group speed calling list. .
,-----e-e
------,----------~-------------------------------------------I
I
Ir-s-r-T-T-t-s-t-T-T-+-~-~-t-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~i
,1,1,111,1,1,111,111,2,2,212,2,2,2,212,2~3,3l3~3~3~3~3~3~3~3,4~~~
~7~9~9,0,1121314151617181910,112,31415,6,718191011121314151617181910111
c-+-+-+-u-,.-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
lO,~lOlGlCI
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.-*-A.-a- -d-A.-A.-A-A-_L-A-*
Figure 7.3
Record Code GC: Group Speed Calling Data Sheet
!
I
.
*
--A-.4
TL-130400-1001
Table 7.3
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code GC
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12-13
Group Number
01-48 = number
This field determines the group number for the
list.
-This number is used on Record Code LD
when assigning the speed call list to users.
14-16
Group Speed
000-999 = number
Columns 14-l 9 determine the range of
entries in the group speed calling list that a
station user is allowed to access. Columns
14-16 are used to list the first entry, and
columns 17-l 9 are used to list the last entry.
-The range can be as small as a single entry
or as large as the whole list.
-If needed, several ranges can be listed for
the same group. This is done by using the
same group number on multiple records.
-Ranges must be listed in multiples of four
(e.g., 000-003 or 000-175).
000-999 = number
Columns 14-l 9 determine the range of
entries in the group speed calling list that a
station user is allowed to access. Columns
14-16 are used to list the first entry, and
columns 17-l 9 are used to list the last entry.
Calling List
Entri-es
(first entry)
17-19
Group Speed
‘-
Calling List
Entries
(last entry)
L
SVR 5210
8187
D-l 35
TL-130400-1001
Record Code GS:
Group Speed
Calling List
Numbers
r---------,--e-I
I
I
I
I
7.4 Record Code GS, Figure 7.4, defines the speed call
numbers that make up the group speed calling list. The list can
contain a maximum of 1,000 different numbers.
~----^---------
-
--------------------,-----------------------~-~
T
I
x
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I5
%a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
t:
M
!G
R
’I
I
I
CALLING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:-;-;-;-T-T-T-~-T-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
I1 I1 I1 I1 Ill1
‘1 ‘2’~‘4~5~~~7~8~~‘,,‘,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
121314151
I
I
I
I
ICl
101
I
IDI
I
I
I
I
I
I I
IEI
I
I
I I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I1 Ii I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~-'-'-'-U-~-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-:-'-'-'-'-'-"-'-'-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;z;U;o; --*-A-A.--L-A-A-A-~
G ' SI
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
.
.
*
*
.
*
Figure 7.4
I
.
I
.
I
:-:
r-T-T-+-T-t-T-T-
181
'0 t
I,
.
I I
---m-u
Record Code GS: Group Speed Calling List Numbers Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
Table 7.4
Entry Fields for Record Code GS
COMMENTS
000-999 = number
This field determines the group speed calling
-These digits should be filled in from left to
right with no imbedded dashes.
-This number must be unique across this
record code.
-This number must be listed on Record Code
should these restrictions be in effect.
accesscheck
BT = bypass both
access checks
SVR 5210
8187
D-l 37
TL-130400-1001
Record Code ED:
Extended Dial Call
Pickup Numb&s
.”s;---------,---,------
7.5 Record Code ED, Figure 7.5, assigns pickup groups to
extended dial call pickup groups. The pickup groups that make
up the extended dial call pickup groups are set up on this record
code. Because the pickup groups are created on this record
code, they are not redefined on Record Code LD. If a user is a
member of an extended dial call pickup group, Record Code LD
only lists the extended dial call pickup group to which the user
belongs, not the dial call pickup group. The dial call pickup
numbers should be filled in from left to right.
----------------_---___
~-----------------------------~-~
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
T
PICKUP
GROUP(S)
T - - - - - T - - - - -
’
ICI
101
IDI
IEI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r-T-T-~-T-t-T-t-T-T-t-T-T-t-~-~-t-~-r-+-r-~-t-r-r-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
1111111111111111111112121212121212121212l3l3l3i3l3l3l3l3~3l~~~~~~~~
~7~8~91011121314151617181910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011111
t,t;t;t;;--t-~-t-t-:-t-:-t-:-t-:-t-:-t-t-’-’-’-t-‘-~
I.
I.
L-A-A.-~_ ~A-A-A-A-A_A_~-A
.
.
.
*
.
.
. I 8I * I .
. I * I . I . I * I . I .I
Figure 7.5
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I.
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;-:
181
101
k-4
II~-~ I
Record Code ED: Extended Dial Call Pickup Numbers Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
Table 7.5
Entry Fields for Record Code ED
COMMENTS
Table Numbers
dial call pickup group to which that line
call pickup groups, each containing a
maximum of 5 pickup groups.
-There is no limitation to the number of
stations that make up a pickup group.
-The table number must be unique across
This field determines the pickup groups that
make up the primary extended dial call pickup
group. All members of this extended dial call
make up the 2nd extended dial call pickup
group. All members of this extended dial call
up each other’s calls
extended dial call
make up the 4th extended dial call pickup
group. All members of this extended dial call
pickup group can pick up each other’s calls
when they access the extended dial call
pickup group feature.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code CH:
Change Feature
by Access Code
Y.
7.6 Record Code Cl-l, Figure 7.6, determines the feature or
destination that will be temporarily changed by the use of an
access code. The line always diverts to the alternate destination
whenever that route is accessed. What the feature or destination
is temporarily changed to is also defined. The access code
used to indicate this feature is set up on Record Code AC under
code type numbers 50 (change/restore feature by access code)
and 51 (change/restore feature routing). This feature is limited to
one access code or one directory number per system.
.”
- - - - - - r - - r
I
-t-T-T-T-
i
i
ii ii
718191011
-+-+-+-c
r-r-T-t-t-T-T-t-T-T-s-+-T-t-T-T-t-T-T-T-t-T-T-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-,
11111111111111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4,4,
121314~516171819101112131415~617~819101112131415161718191011121
~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
gl,IoIcIHI
I
III
I
III
\,I
I
I,,,
1
III
I
II
-L-L-~-L---L-~-*--L-~-*-~
-*-~-~-~-~-~-*_~_~-~-~-~-*-~-~-*-*
Figure 7.6
I
t-'7
181
101
C-4
I
II
I
I,,
I
I
-A-A.-A.-A-A -
Record Code CH: Change Feature by Access Code Data Sheet
TL-130400-1001
Table 7.6
COL.
NAME
COL.
NO.
12-i4
Entry Fields for Record Code CH
VALID
ENTRIES
Old Access
COMMENTS
OOO-### = number
Enter the access code that is to be
temporarily changed.
-Columns 12-14 and 15-l 8 are mutually
exclusive. If you mark this field, do not mark
columns 15-l 8.
-This feature can only be used for intercept,
Attendant Console(s), hunt group, or agent
group.
Code
..
15-18
Old Station
Number
0000-9999 =
number
---- = not
selected
This field defines the station number that is to
be temporarily changed.
-Right justifiy three-digit numbers.
-Columns 12-l 4 and 15-l 8 are mutually
exclusive. If you mark this field, do not mark
columns 12-l 4.
-This number can only refer to DNs for lines,
Attendant Console(s), hunt groups, or agent
groups.
19-22
New Station
Number
0000-9999 =
number
--- = not
selected
Enter the station number of the new
(temporary) destination.
-Right justify three digit numbers.
-This number can only refer to DNs for lines,
Attendant Console(s), hunt groups, or agent
group.
23-25
New Code Type
000-225 =
number
-- = not
selected
Enter the new code type to be temporarily
used.
-This number can only define an intercept
route, Attendant Console(s), recorder
announcer, or agent group.
26-29
New Code Type
Identifier
0000-9999 =
number
--- = not
selected
Enter the new code type identifier to be
temporarily used.
-Right justify three-digit numbers.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code DF:
CPG 5efault
7.7 Record Code DF, Figure 7.7, defines the default line divert
condition for lines assigned a divert destination on Record Code
LD, columns 45-48.
LD,
45-48.
‘---------r---r
‘---------r---r
,, TT ,---------------------------------------------------------------~
,---------------------------------------------------------------~
II
II
II 66 II
II ;; II
ii
II
!I
I:! FF
5
I
I
I
I _ III
’ /-.“I
1F S---N
1F
S---N R C;
C; L C
Ctt
::
M
5-q
‘0
1.3
I
I
I
I
I
81:
EI
E
IT
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
:;
I
I
I
I
I
y;
ID
TI
II
II
I v 01
I E NI
IR
.I.I
II
.
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r-T-r-C-T-+-r-t-r-~-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
r-T-r-C-T-t-r-t-r-~-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
I
I
I
I
111111111111111111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4i4l4l4l4l4~
~7~8~9~0~1~2131415161718~910111213l415l6l7l8l9l0l1~2~31415161718l910~112131415,
~7~8~91011121314151617181910111213141516171819101112131415161718l9101112131415,
t-+-+-+-u-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
1010,51~!FI
1010'51D!FI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,II II ,I
I
I II I,,,
I
I
I
I
II II II I ,,I
I
I
II II II I I II II II II II I I
L-L-L-~-L-L-_~--L-L-~-L-~-~-~.-~-~-~ -~-~-i-I-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~---~-. .
Figure 7.7
I
12-13
COL.
NAME
Line Divert
Condition
II
.
Record Code DF: CPG Default Data Sheet
Table 7.7
COL.
NO.
I
I
Entry Fields for Record Code DF
VALID
ENTRIES‘
BY = divert if busy
NA = divert if no
answer
BN = divert if
busy or no answer
COMMENTS
Mark this field with the system default divert
condition.
-This record code makes it unnecessary to
program a divert condition for each line
(Record Code LM, columns 28-29) if all
system stations have the same divert
condition.
If the majority of lines have the same divert
condition, then that condition can be given
here.
-Divert conditions that are different from the
default value given here can be assigned to
the various lines on Record Code LM.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8
TL-130400-1001
LINE
ASSIGNMENT
8.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the various system lines. The following record codes are
required:
l
l
-=-
.”
.
l
.
l
Record Code LD defines the primary directory number for all
lines in the system and provides additional line information.
Record Code LM is an extension of Record Code LD.
Record Code LA defines the various line or DSS (Direct Station
Select) appearances.
Record Code LI is not input by the customer
TL-130400-1007
Record Code LB:
Line Data
8.1 Record Code LD, Figure 8.1, defines the primary directory
number for every line in the system. If an Analog/Digital
Featurephone has additional appearances of control lines such
as CO (Central Office), non-primary control, or data lines, an
entry on this record code is needed for each line type. Use this
record code to route non-working lines to a changed number
intercept. Line circuits programmed on the Attendant Console
(Record Code AT) or office features circuit (Record Code OC) do
not require an entry on Record Code LD. If the sytstem is
equipped with the PD-200 Data Option, this record code must
list the APM’“/SPM” physical location.
1 s-
T---------T-----
I
;T
I
II
I
I
I
,6
,4
I’
,I
1
--r---__--_-
T
6
4
3
1
T
6
4
4
1
T:
61
4,
‘.
’
i
IT,
1
14 ’
I4 ;
I1 ,
I
:I
I T
.
T-----T---T---
*
_---_--___--------_------------
I
a
2
I
I
I
TI
I5 I
i3 I
16 I
II I
T
5
4
1
1
!
T
I 5
I 4
I
3
I1
;
LINE
CKI-.
I
I
/
1
I
1
I
I
-,-t-,-;-,-$-$-,-,-t-t-~-~
I1 I1 I1 I1 11 11 II 11 11 I1 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
:7;8;9,0,1
12131415161718191011
12131415161718191011
1213l415161718191011
~-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-~-~-~-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+!,-l~.55iLlDl
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I I
l
L
--L--C-L-L-L-*-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-*-~_~-~-*-~-~--L-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~---J
121
i
r---r-------p-----r-r----------------------------------------------------~-~
,
I
I
x561
T22
w:
m
T2581
T25Dl
*z
i%%
ZE
T257 1
E%
ES1
T%z
I
I
1 I
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
I
T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-r-T-i
k-T-t-T-T-T-t-T-t-t-t-T-T--r-T-T-T--r1414141414141415151515151515151515161616,6i6l61616l6l6l7l7l7l7i7l
1314151617,819,0,112,3,415,6,718191011121314151617181910111213141
L-L-L-L-L-L-L-I-L-I-~_~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-----~-J
Figure 8.1
D-l 44
I
I
I
; T;
I RI
I A,
I N,
I Sl
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Gf
1 0,
1 DI
I E,
I I
’ I
1 I
1 I
1 I
1 I
I
I
1 I
I I
I
I
I
1 I
I I
1 I
I I
L-4
I8 I
IO I
Record Code LB: Line Data Sheet
SVR 5210
Table 8.1
Entry Fields for Record Code LD
COMMENTS
digit line directory
equipped line circuits in the system.
-Directory numbers can be chosen in threeand/or four-digit patterns.
-Three-digit numbers must be right justified
-Dashes must be entered in this field if the
line is used for an APM or SPM that is used in
support of the PD-200 Data Option.
-The APMs/SPMs are not accessed by a line
number, but by an X.121 address.
-This record code is only used to provide the
sical location of the APMsSPMs within the
integrated
Featurephone
APM =
Asynchronous
Packet Manager
SPM =
Synchronous
Packet Manager
DFPA = Digital
Integrated
Featurephone with
Asynchronous
Packet Manager
PACT = programmable Attendant
Console
SVR 5210
-A DIFP must appear on a VCIP, VPLO,
VPLl, VP20 (voice/voice & data), or DVC line
card.
-An APM must appear on a VPLO, VP20
(voice & data or data only), or VP21 line card.
-If necessary, an APM can be assigned to a
VPLl; however, it is recommended to use the
VPLO card, which is designed to support the
low-speed APM.
-An SPM must appear on a VPLO, VPLl,
VP20 (voice & data or data only), or VP21 line
card.
-APM and SPM should be left justified in the
four columns; e.g., APM- and SPM-.
-A DFPA must appear on a VP20 (voice &
data) line card.
-A PACT or POTS must appear on a POTS
or OFFP line card.
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.1
Entry Fields for Record Code LD (Continued)
COMMENTS
instrument line
columns 28-29 (this allows
-If columns ;6-19 are marked P O T S , PACT,
AlFP, DFPA, DIFP, APM, or SPM, columns
20-25 must not be dashed.
-If columns 16-l 9 are dashed, columns
20-25 must be dashed.
-All card locations must be defined on
Record Code FR.
Which card slot within the group is this card?
-In order to provided a sequential
appearance of line numbers on the CPG (in
groups of eight ), list all eight circuits of a line
card for each group and card slot in the
following order: 4, 0, 5, 1, 6, 2, 7, 3.
-The reason for this order is that this is the
order in which the circuits are connected on
the backplane of the system.
-The circuit numbers assigned to a digital
IFP used for (CD-100 data) voice transfer
can only be circuits O-3. Circuits 4-7 are
assigned to data connections.
-This number must match the limits given to
the card type at the specified physical
Is the line in service or out of service?
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.1
COL.
NO.
28-29
....
COL.
NAME
Line Type
-1
Entry Fields for Record Code LD (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
CO = central office
line, as in key
system CO line
(Featurephone)
DA = data line
(DIFP)
Li = CAS
,_ Main/ACD a g e n t
line
NP = non-primary
control line
(Featurephone)
NW = nonworking
line
PC = primary
control line
-- = none of the
above, e.g., POTS
telephone
COMMENTS
NP is used for a logical line, which appears in
software only and needs no line card.
-- (a double dash) is used for all tip and ring
type telephones (e.g., the FeatureComm” and
AnswerComm” 1 and 2).
When defining line 2 on a PACET
(Programmable Attendant/Agent Console
Electronic Telephone), mark this field --.
-If this field is marked Ll, Record Code NC,
columns 30-31, must be marked HS (this
allows hookswitch flash in COS).
-If columns 16-l 9 are marked POTS, this
field must be marked Ll or dashed.
-If columns 16-l 9 are marked POTS, this
field must be marked Ll or dashed.
-If columns 16-19 are marked PACT, this
field must be marked Ll.
-If columns 16-l 9 are marked AIFP or
DFPA, this field must be marked CO, NP, or
PC.
-If columns 16-19 are marked DIFP, this
field must be marked CO, DA, NP, or PC.
-If columns 16-19 are marked APM or SPM,
this field must be marked DA.
-If columns 16-l 9 are dashed, this field
must be marked NW.
-The physical location fields for a line
marked NP must match that of the controlling
IFP.
-If an entry of NP or CO is made, there must
be available space in the system tables to
assign a line software ID. A maximum of 256
lines of all kinds is allowed.
-If this field is marked NP, station silent
monitor (Record Code NC, columns 72-73)
will not work.
-Each IFP must have one and only one
primary control line.
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.1
Entry Fields for Record Code LD (Continued)
COMMENTS
-If this line is to belong to an intercom group,
this field determines which group it belongs to.
-Each line appearing on the same IFP can
be in the same or different intercom groups.
-If two lines have a DSS appearance of each
ns 28-29 (line type) are marked
, Ll, -- or NW, this field must be
-The number entered here must be defined
on Record Codes DC and DD.
-If columns 16-19 are marked POTS, PACT,
AIFP, DFPA, or DIFP, these columns must not
be dashed.
-If columns 16-l 9 are marked APM, SPM,
or dashed, these columns must be dashed.
34-35
Class of Service
N-Displayable
00-l 5 = number
Assign the n-displayable class of service for
the line.
-Each line appearing on the same instrument
can have the same or different n-displayable
classes of service.
-The number entered here must be defined
on Record Code NC.
-If columns 16-19 are marked POTS, PACT,
AIFP, DFPA, or DIFP, these columns must not
be dashed.
-If columns 16-l 9 are marked APM, SPM,
or dashed, these columns must be dashed.
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.1
Entry Fields for Record Code bD (Continued)
COMMENTS
O-7 = F R L value
Assign the FRL value given to this line.
-This can only be assigned if the FRL feature
is in effect (see Record Code OF, column 54).
-A value of 0 is the most restrictive; a value
of 7 is the least restrictive.
-This value is compared to the FRL value of
the trunk that the user is trying to access.
-If the FRL value of the user is the same as
or greater than the FRL value given to the
trunk, the call can be made.
-If the FRL value of the user is less than the
FRL value given to the trunk, the call will be
-If columns 16-19 are marked APM, SPM,
or dashed, these columns must be dashed.
group, this field is the primary group.
-The pickup group to which a member of an
extended pickup group belongs is defined on
Record Code ED.
-The Attendant Console cannot be in a
pickup group. The system maximum is 127
pickup groups, with no limit to the number of
members in each group.
-If a station line appears on the DSS, having
this feature is redundant.
MITE: If the line type is DA, Ll, or NW
(columns 28-29), this field must be dashed.
40
41-42
Dial Call Pickup: E = extended group
Extended
- = dial call
Pickup Group
pickup group
If the line belongs to an extended pickup
group, enter an E.
-Record Code ED must be completed before
this entry can be made.
-If the line type is DA, Ll, or NW (columns
28-29), this field must be dashed.
Group Speed
Calling
This field determines the speed calling group
number assigned to this station.
-Record Code GC must be completed before
this entry can be made.
-If columns 16-l 9 are marked APM, SPM,
or dashed, these columns must be dashed.
-If the line type is DA (columns 28-29), this
field must be dashed.
01-48 = number
-- = N/A
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.1
COL.
NO.
43-44
Entry Fields for Record Code LD (Continued)
COL.
NAME
Individual
Speed Calling
_ List Number
.
VALID
ENTRIES
00-30 = number
-- = N/A
,.
45-48
Divert
Destination
Identifier
0000-9999 =
station number
0-N)
or
pilot number (PN)
of a hunt group
(right justify
three-digit
numbers)
0000, 0064, 0128,
or 0192 = console
number (AT)
0000-0063 =
trunk number
m-w- = N/A
directory number
and individual
speed call list
(VW TO)
0001-0008 =
speed call list
entry number (SC)
COMMENTS
If the line is a member of an individual speed
calling list, assign the list it belongs to.
-Only one station can be assigned to each
individual speed calling list.
-A system maximum of 31 stations can have
this feature.
-If columns 16-19 are marked APM, SPM,
or dashed, these columns must be dashed.
-If the line type is DA (columns 28-29), this
field must be dashed.
Assign the divert destination (call forwarding)
type.
-It can be a line, pilot number, trunk group,
intercept route, VMX mailbox, or external
directory number.
-If the entry is SC, then the speed calling list
must not contain dashes because the remote
call forward feature is accessed through an
entry in the individual speed call list that stores
the remote number.
-A line cannot divert to itself.
-If a station number is listed, it must be
defined in columns 12-15 of this record code.
-If a pilot number of a hunt group is listed, it
must be defined on Record Code HG,
columns 12-l 5.
-If an attendant number is listed,.it must be
defined on Record Code AT.
-If a trunk number is listed, it must be defined
on Record Code TC.
-The additional information needed to
implement this feature is found on Record
Code LM, columns 28-31.
-If columns 16-19 are marked APM or SPM,
these columns must be dashed.
-If columns 16-l 9 are dashed, these
columns must be either 0003 (vacant #) or
0011 (changed ~7).
-If the line type is DA (columns 28-29), this
field must be dashed.
-If the line type is CO (columns 28-29), this
field must be marked with a trunk number and
Record Code LM, columns 28-29, must be
marked DA.
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.1
COL.
NO.
49-50
....
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code LD (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
Message Detail
Recorder Work
Group Numbers
.”
00-63 = group
number
-- = N/A
default = 00
Assign the MDR work group number to the
station.
-The stations are divided into groups
according to the information output required
for each group.
-MDR work groups are normally arranged in
groups of like users for billing purposes (e.g.,
all accounting department telephones can be
in the same group).
-The MDR print-out gives the PDN (Prime
Directory Number) of the station.
-MDR group 00 is used as the default value
and should not be assigned to stations.
-If columns 16-19 are marked POTS, PACT,
AIFP, DFPA, or DIFP, these columns must not
be dashed.
-If columns 16-19 are marked APM, SPM,
or dashed, these columns must be dashed.
R = remote access
A = authorization
code required with
remote access
- = N/A
This field determines whether or not the
remote access (or remote access requiring
an authorization code) feature can be used
from this line.
-If an R is entered in this field, then the line
can be used for remote access.
-If this field is marked with an A, the line can
be used for remote access. However, an
authorization code is required.
-By giving either of these features to a line,
the COS normally assigned to this line can be
temporarily overridden (e.g., a roving manager
could make a toll call from a toll restricted
line).
-If columns 16-l 9 are dashed, this column
must also be dashed.
-If the line type is DA (columns 28-29) this
field must be dashed.
.
51
SVR 5210
Remote Access
and
Authorization
Code
COMMENTS
8187
D-l 51
Table 8.1
COL.
NO.
52
COL.
NAME
Controlling Data
Control
_ Processor
.-Software
‘”
Entry Fields for Record Code LD (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
0 = number
-=N/A
COMMENTS
This field determines the controlling DCP
(Data Control Processor) software number
assigned to this Digital Featurephone.
-The DCP is otherwise known as the UCB
(Universal Control Board)
-This field only applies to a Digital
Featurephone used with the PD-200 Data
Option.
-If the PD-200 Data Option is in use, enter
0.
-Because one UCB can support up to 240
data ports, only one is needed in the OMNI SI.
-The UCB must be defined on Record Code
FR.
-This field is new to SVR 5210.
NOTE: UCB is the card; DCP is the software
on the card.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code LM:
Line Miscellaneous
8.2 Record Code LM, Figure 8.2, is an extension of Record
Code LD and provides additional data for lines. Any directory
number that appears on this record code must appear on
Record Code LD as well. Instrument types APM, SPM, PACET,
or ---, as well as line types Ll and NW, never have an LM
entry. LM is required for Analog Featurephones (instrument type
AIFP). LM is used whenever the signal mode is something other
than MX. It is also used if a field on LM is needed to complete
the description of a line.
%-
.”
-..
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
‘1
I
I
I
I
I
I
-T-T-f-T-t-T-T-T-t
-T-t-t-t-T-t-T-+-T-T-T-t~
I I
I1I1I1I1I1I111I1111112121212121212121:
718191011121314151617181910111213141516171~
-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+--c-+-+-+-+-+-+.
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
m--e---
_LA_A_A_A_A_A_A_*
Figure 8.2
I
I
I
31I31lj1LI~I
I
I
I
.
*
.
.
.
.
.
I
I
I
-,--;-T2121313
8191011
-+-+-+I I I
*
*
*
I
I
I
I
-,-;-,-l-,-,-,-4
1131313131313131
1131415161718191
-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-A
I
.
I
*
I
*
I
.
I
,
I
.
I
.
Record Code LM: Line Miscellaneous Data Sheet
I
.
I
I
I
I
I
1
r-:
181
101
c-4
I
------a.-~
I
TL-130400-1001
Yable 8.2
Entry Fields for Record Code LM
Assign the line directory number to the
equipped line circuits in the system.
-Three-digit numbers must be right justified.
line service, o r
-If the instrument type (columns 16-19 o f
Record Code LD) is marked POTS, this field
Record Code LD) is marked AIFP or DFPA,
this field must be marked DP.
requiring a mixture -If this field is marked NO, the SCC (nonMERS) access allowed in COS (Record Code
and dial pulse; or
NC, columns 66-67) will not work.
MX can be used in -If this field is marked NO, the following COS
features defined by Record Code DD will not
place of DP and
TC (MX is used for work: toll access, meet-me conference,
POTS,
progressive conference, dictation, paging,
maintenance access, modem access, MERS
Featurephones,
and default.)
on-net.
-If this field is marked NO, the following COS
features defined by Record Code NC will not
work: executive override, originating call
waiting, camp-on/auto recall, attendant
information, dial call pickup, call forwarding
variable, speed call, universal night answer.
18
Data Link Card
Location: PEC
0 = PEC number
-Enter PEC 0.
This is the PEC entry for the FB-17225 card
that supports the IFPs.
-Data link cards are defined for Agent
Instruments on Record Code AD.
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.2
Entry Fields for Record Code LM (Continued)
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
19
Data Link Card
-ocation: Group
4-D = group
lumber
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within the PEC is
this card?
20-21
Xtta Link Card
-ocation: Card
Slot
30-l 1 = slot
lumber
Which card slot within the group is this card?
22-23
Data Link Card
-0cation: Circuit
Vumber
J-7 = assigned
circuit number
Which circuit on the card is being used?
24-27
Zontrolling
ntegrated
=eaturephone
1000-9999 =
‘our-digit line
directory number
:-OOO)-(-999) =
:hree-digit line
Directory number
This field determines the primary line directory
number for non-prime and CO lines.
-If the instrument type (columns 16-19 of
Record Code LD) is marked POTS, this field
must be dashed.
-When defining the PDN (Prime Directory
Number), this number will be the same as the
directory number.
28-29
Call Divert
Condition
VD = no divert,
ncluding hunt
Jroup members
3Y = divert if busy
VA = divert if no
answer
3N = divert if busy
)r no answer
DA = divert always
(used for CO lines
and hot lines)
Columns 28-31 are used to define divert
conditions. Assign the conditions under which
a call will divert. Columns 30-31 define what
type of destination the call diverts to. The
destination itself is defined on Record Code
LD, columns 45-48.
-The call divert fields are used to implement
the following features: fixed call forwarding, hot
line switched direct line service, diversion of
one hunt group to another (via last member).
-Use Record Code MH to program hunt
group member searches and LD to specify the
divert destination identification for call diverts.
-The divert always condition will allow a call
to be forwarded twice only. The third attempt
rings busy.
-Columns 28-29 define the conditions that
cause a call to forward from the called station
to another location.
-If this value is set at ND, the allowable value
of columns 30-31 is --, TO, LN, AT, TR, or
PN.
-If this value is set at BT, NA, BN, or DA, the
allowable value of columns 30-31 is TO, LN,
AT, TR, or PN.
-If Record Code NC, columns 38-39, is
marked OR (for COS originating only), this
field should be marked ND.
COMMENTS
r
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.2
Entry Fields for Record Code LM (Continued)
COMMENTS
under which a call will divert. Columns 30-31
define the type of destination to which the call
diverts. The destination itself is defined on
Record Code LD, columns 45-48.
-If this value is --, the allowable value of
the divert destination identifier (Record Code
LD, columns 45-48) is ---- .
-If this value is set at LN, t h e allowable value
of the divert destination identifier (Record
Code LD, columns 45-48) is 0000-9999
(station number).
-If this value is set at AT, the allowable value
of the divert destination identifier (Record
Code LD, columns 45-48) is 0064, 0128, or
-If this value is set at TR, the allowable value
of the divert destination identifier (Record
Code LD, columns 45-48) is 0000-0063.
-If this value is set at PN, the allowable value
of the divert destination identifier (Record
Code LD, columns 45-48) is 0000-9999
(hunt group pilot number).
-If this value is set at SC, the allowable value
.of the divert destination identifier (Record
Code LD, columns 45-48) is 0001-0008
of the divert destinati
Code LD, columns 4
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.2
COL.
COL.
NO.
32-33
Entry Fields for Record Code LM (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
NAME
Ward Number
00-31 =
ward number
-- = N/A
x.”
.
34-35
36
SVR 5210
COMMENTS
This hospital feature is used to provide quiet
hours to patient room telephones.
-The system supports a maximum of 32 ward
numbers.
-The field determines which ward number is
assigned to a station.
-Ward numbers are created on Record Code
WT, columns 21-52.
-If an entry is made in this field, then at least
one entry on Record Code WT, columns 2152, must be marked A.
Reserved
-- = only allowed
entry
This field is reserved for future use and is only
to be dashed.
Multiline
Featurephone
Y = Multiline
Featurephone
-= N/A
If the instrument type is an IFP, this field
determines if it is used as a multiline
telephone.
-It is recommended to configure all IFPs as
multiline (whether or not they are) because a
multiline IFP has a hold button and a singleline IFP does not.
Record Code LA:
Line Appearances
8.3 Record Code LA, Figure 8.3, defines all the directory
numbers that appear as either a line or a DSS (Direct Station
Select) on the multiline Integrated Featurephones.
-----_
___-___________--_-------------------T---T-----‘---------T-------T---
’
1
’
I
1
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
1
I1 I1 I1 11 II II II 11 II 11 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
f7%9,0,1
,2,3,4,6,6,7,81910,1
,2,3,41516,7,8,9,011
12,3,415161718191011
~-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-~-:-+-+-:-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I,,
I
I1
1016l7l~l~l
I
l
l
L-L-L-~-L--~-~-~--L-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-*-*-*-*--L-~-~--C-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
Figure 8.3
I
’
1
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
I21
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
’
I
ITI
‘RI
‘AI
INI
,Sl
I
IC
10;
,Dl
,EI
’
I
’ I
’
I
’ I
’
I
’
I
’
I
1 I
’
I
’
I
’
I
IO1
k-4
I I
Record Code LA: Line Appearances Data Sheet
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 8.3
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code LA
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12-15
Line Number of 0000-9999
the Integrated
Featurephone
~~0-999 =
.”
number
A three-digit
number must have
a blank before it.
.
This field determines the multiline IFP line
directory number on which the lines or DSSs
appear. Right justify three-digit numbers.
-Any line appearing in this field must be
marked as a multiline IFP on Record Code LM
(Y in column 36).
-If a line appears on Record Code LA, the
CPG defaults to multiline.
16-19
Line Number of 0000-9999
Appearance or
000-999 =
number
This field determines the line number of the
appearance.
Right justify three-digit numbers.
20-21
Appearance
We
This field determines whether or not the
appearance is a line or DSS.
-Controlling numbers and logical lines are
not to appear on this record code.
-A POTS telephone can only appear as a DS
(DSS) because a POTS line cannot appear on
another phone.
-An LA (line appearance) on this record code
can only be an Analog or Digital
Featurephone.
-If a line is defined as a CO line on Record
Code LD, it cannot appear as a DS (DSS) on
this record code.
-A line directory number listed as an
appearance must be defined on Record Code
LD, columns 12-l 5.
-The system supports a maximum of eight
appearances (line or DSS) of the same line.
-A single-line Featurephone (see Record
Code LM, column 36) cannot be a line
appearance.
SVR 5210
LA = line
appearance
(Featurephone
only 1
DS = DSS
appearance
TL-130400-1001
Record Code LI:
Line Identities
8.3 Record Code LI, is not input by the customer. It is
generated by the reverse CPG to preserve the assignments of
internal system identities for re-engineering or documentation
purposes.
s.”
....
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
‘,--
ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
FEATURES
9.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the system Attendant Console(s). The following
record codes are required:
l
Record Code AT defines the Attendant Console(s).
l
Record Code BD defines the location of the BLDU
l
Record Code BK defines the KEDU unit number and the keys.
l
.r
SVR 5210
l
cards.
Record Code CA defines common data for the Attendant
Console position(s).
Record Code CN defines common DNs (Directory Numbers).
8h37
D-161
TL-130400-1001
Record Code AT:
Attendant Console
------___
9.1 Record Code AT, Figure 9.1, describes the Attendant
Consoles in the system. The system will support a maximum of
two Attendant Consoles .
T-T-------T----------;;;;TTTTTT
I
4
4
4
,2
2
2
2
5
;’
::
!
,I
0
1
1
1
1 0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-+~T~-+-‘1 I1 I1 I1
716191011l21314l516
I.. -+-+-+-+-a-+-+-+-+TlO,
I I I
:! ,151lJl~l
-.L-Ad-l-L.I.-.L-A-.&.-
6
T-T-T
‘P’G’
‘E’R’
;c;o,
I
“l
I
IPI
‘PIG’
‘E’R’
icfo’
“‘,
!
IPI
I I
I
I I
I I
.-,-;-,-;-;-;-,-;j-
1121212121212121212T
9,011
1213,415161716,
,--b-+-A.-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
,-*-~-~-1-~-~-~-~-*-~
21313131313131313131314141414141
9 , 0 1 1 ,2131415161716191011
1213141
-4-+-a-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-4
Figure 9.1 Record Code AT: Attendant Console Data Sheet
D-l 62
8437
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 9.1
Entry Fields for Record Code AT
COMMENTS
Which circuit on the card is being used?
within PEC 0 is
8187
D-l 63
TL-130400-1001
Table 9.1
Entry Fields for Record Code AT (Continued)
COMMENTS
O-7 = FRL value
If the system has the FRL option, the console
must have an FRL value.
-This field determines the FRL assigned to
-Unless the console is not allowed to access
all trunks (e.g., CO line), the recommended
number selected
- = not selected
BLDU associated with the console.
number is assigned on Record
column 13, and listed on Record
one console can use a particular
PMS (Property Management System) option is
equipped, this field determines whether or not
MERS Time
Change
M = allowed
- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not the
console is allowed to change the MERS time
period feature.
-It is recommended to give this feature to
only one console.
38
System Time
Change
S = allowed
- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not the
console is allowed to change the time setting
for the system time clock.
39
Ward Control
C = allowed
- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not the
console is allowed to activate the ward control
feature.
-Access to this feature is via a button on the
console.
40
Ward Time
Period Control
T = allowed
- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not the
console is allowed to change the automatic
ward control timer (e.g. the time is set to block
calls at a ward from 8:00 to 12:OO and the user
wants to change it to 9:00 to 12:OO).
-With this feature, the attendant can change
the timing parameter without going into Recent
Change.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 9.1
COL.
NAME
COL.
NO.
41-44
....
Entry Fields for Record Code AT (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
Billing Number
0000-9999 =
billing number
---- = not
selected
s.”
.-
SVR 5210
8187
COMMENTS
Assign the billing number used by the console.
-If the directory numbers assigned to each
console (columns 13-l 6) are different and all
consoles are to be billed as one, enter the
same billing number for both console 0 and 1.
-The MDR records will have this number
printed for calls that involve the console.
-If required, the system will support different
billing numbers for the two consoles.
D-l 65
TL-130400-1001
Record Code BD:
Busy Lamp Display Unit
T---------r-----
I
I
I
I
I
I
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
....
F
S
N:
R
9.2 Record Code BD, Figure 9.2, defines the physical location of
the BLDU cards. The system will support a maximum of four
BLDUs. Up to four BLDUs can be daisy-chained off the same
circuit. The card used to support the BLDU is the FB-17208
card, which is a double-width card. The BLDU parameters
cannot be altered by Recent Change.
----------------------------------
.”
+-------------------------~
s-
I
I
:
8
0
I
I
I
I
Ci
I
I
I
BLDU DATA LINK LINES
I
_
g
E’p - - s - - s - - - - s - - s - - s - - s - - T-T-T
-I-‘T-T-T-TT-i
l
I I
I
;P!Gf
C ;C;P:G;
C ;C;P;t
tC!P!G!
ICI
I
I
,EIRI A
IKIEIRI
A
IK,EII
IKI
IKIEIRI
,CIOI
R
ITICIOI
R
I-I-ICI, 1;
ITI
ITICIOI
IUI
D
IUI
D
I
I
I
’
I
IUI
I
I
IPI
IPI
IN,
I
I
INI
IPI
INI
I
I
, 1 I s
I
1 I F
101 I
101
I
I
101
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I
I
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
IT,
1;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I I
I I I
I I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I I
I
I
I I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I I
I
I
I
1 I
I
I
I
I
I I
/-y-T-f-T-t-t-t--T-t-t-t-t-T-t-t- t- -T-t-t-t-t-r-t-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-j
i-1
I
~111111111 I I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 121212
I ; ! 12 12 12 I2 12 I3 13 13 13 I3 13 I3 I3 I3 I3 I4 I
I7 I8 I9 I
O
II 1213
1 1Id5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2
I 11 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 6 1 9 1 0 1
I: I
-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-++- -+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-4
C-i
I,,,,
I
I
I
III,
I
I,,,
I
I I
-~-.A-d.--L-.A-A------.I.- -.I.-A-*-A-A-A-A-A.-A-A,
I::
1M
:
7;
IO
IR
ID
I
I
I
Figure 9.2
--E
i
t
B
.-E
E
F
P
Record Code BD: Busy Lamp Display Unit Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 9.2
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code BD
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12,17,
BLDU Data Link 0= PEC number
22 and Lines
27
PEG
.”
Enter PEC 0. This is the FB-17208 card.
-If column 12 is dashed, columns 13-l 6
must be dashed.
-If column 12 is marked 0, columns 13-l 6
cannot be dashed.
-If column 17 is dashed, columns 18-21
must be dashed.
-If column 17 is marked 0, columns 18-21
cannot be dashed.
-If column 22 is dashed, columns 23-26
must be dashed.
-If column 22 is marked 0, columns 23-26
cannot be dashed.
-If column 27 is dashed, columns 28-31
must be dashed.
-If column 27 is marked 0, columns 28-31
cannot be dashed.
13,18,
23 and
28
Group
A-D = group
number
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within PEC 0 is
this card?
14-15,
19-20,
25-26
and
29-30
Card Slot
00-l 1 = slot
number
Which card slot within the group is this card?
16,21,
26 and
31
Circuit Number
0 or 1 = assigned
circuit number
Which circuit on the card is being used?
SVR 5210
-
TL-130400-1001
Record Code BK:
Busy Lamp Key
9.3 Record Code BK, Figure 9.3, defines the unit number and
key identification for each BLDU.
r---------r----r--- -----------------_-----------------I
I
I
1
; r: ;
:
I
0
I
I D I
I
I E
I
:
I
I
x
1
T---------------------q
I
I
I
I
I
I
BLDU KEY IDENTITIES
Figure 9.3
Record Code BK: Busy Lamp Key Data Sheet
Table 9.3
Entry Fields for Record Code BK
COMMENTS
-A BLDU number can only appear in this
t e n distinct hundred groups.
-The numbers entered in columns 1 4 - 3 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
TL-130400-1001
Record Code CA:
Common Attendant
9.4 Record Code CA, Figure 9.4, defines the common data for
the attendant positions. There must be at least one entry on
Record Code AT before completion of this record code is
required.
ATTENDANT
ASSIGNMENT
FOR ROOM TO ROOM
BLOCKING FUNCTIONS
Li
UNA
ZONES
I
I
I 2
3 1 4 II
I
I
I 8:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-;- t -;213 I 3 1 3
9 I O 1 1 2
- + - L - + ,
I
,
-T-
1111 i11I IlIt il tl illI i212,2,2i
I
I
1 7 1 6 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1
c - + - + - + - + - c - + - + - + - c - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
101515,C,,,,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-~-~-_--L-*-~-~-~-*-_C-~-~-I-~-~-~-~-~-~I
i -T-T-
2 1 2 1 2
4 1 5 1 6
- 4 - - h ,
I
I
I
;
,
-I
I
I
I
I
;
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4
3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5
-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-c-+-+-
,
I NI
:-+-+-~-~-~-:-:-~-~-+-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-;
~ 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 )
~617181910,112~3,4~516i718,9~0~1,2l3l4,
L - L - I - L - L - L - I -~-L-l-l-l-l-l-l-l-l-~-~-~---~-,
Figure 9.4
1-i
181
101
Record Code CA: Common Attendant Data Sheet
8l87
D-169
r
TL-130400-1001
Table 9.4
Entry Fields for Record Code CA
COMMENTS
Night Answer) zones.
-The UNA zones can be in any combination.
If three-digit pilot numbers are used, they
combination of Us
and dashes = UNA
-The UNA zones can be in any combination.
If three-digit pilot numbers are used, they
must be right justified.
-The console listed here must be defined on
Record Code AT, column 12.
-The console number 0 or 1 marked in this
column, must be defined on Record Code AT,
column 12.
21-23
Attendant Call
Waiting Lamp
Light
001-255 = number
m-w = N/A
(default = 1)
This field determines the number of calls
allowed in the call waiting queue.
-When the number of calls entered in this
field is reached, the CALL WTG pushbutton on
the console lights.
-This lets the attendant know the number of
calls waiting to be answered.
24-26
Attendant Call
Waiting Lamp
Flash
001-255 = number
-mm = N/A
(default = 8)
This field determines the number of calls
waiting in queue before the CALL WTG
pushbutton on the console flashes.
-This field must be set at a greater number
than the waiting lamp light field, columns 2123.
-The flashing lamp is designed as a warning
to let the attendant know that there are a large
number of unanswered calls.
8187
SVR 5210
-
TL-130401
Table 9.4
55
Entry Fields for Record Code CA (Continued)
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
27-30
3all Waiting
3ueue Timeout
Zontrol
f = UNA zone or
cones (l-4)
.=N/A
This field determines whether or not a
(Universal Night Answer) zone is alertec
a call has been waiting in the attendant
waiting queue for a longer time than
the attendant call waiting queue on
Code OT, columns 30-32.
-If this field is used and the console has
more calls presented to it than are
answered, the calls automatically divert
UNA zone defined here. The UNA
indicator is a bell or light that alerts
users to calls that need to be answered
3verflow to
Universal Night
Answer
Y = allowed
. = not allowed
This field determines whether or not cal
the call waiting queue are allowed to
to the UNA.
-If an entry is made in this field, then an
must be made in columns 27-30 to defir
UNA to which the calls will overflow.
32
Attendant
Camp-on
Y = allowed
.= not allowed
If the attendant is allowed to camp on to
busy line, enter Y.
33
Attendant Recall
on Hold
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
If a call put on hold by the attendant is
automatically recall to the console after
predetermined amount of time, enter Y.
34
Attendant
Break-In
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
If the attendant is allowed to break in on
ongoing station call, enter Y.
35
Attendant
Paging Queue
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
If the attendant is allowed to put a call ir
page queue, enter Y.
36
Attendant
Paging
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
If the attendant is allowed to access the
paging system equipment via the PAGE
pushbutton, enter Y.
37
Attendant
Assignment for
Room-toRoom Blocking
Function
(Attendant
Assignment
Status)
A = console
assignment
required,
- = all consoles
can activate
room-to-room
blocking feature.
This field determines whether or not
both consoles are allowed to activate th
room-to-room blocking feature.
-If a first choice console is given, then c
the first choice console can activate the
feature.
-If the first choice console is in the night
mode, then the second choice console
automatically assumes the function.
-If A is entered, then only one console c
access the feature.
-If the field is dashed, then both console
allowed to access the feature.
8187
COMMENTS
TL-13C
TL-130400-1001
Record Code CN:
Common Attendant
Directory Numbers
COL.
NO.
38-45
,--I
I
I
I
I
I
r
---___
I
9.5 Record Code CN, Figure 9.5, allows the system to have
common DNs (Directory Numbers) for a variety of Attendant
Console configurations.
~-------,---------------~---------------------------------------~I
;
T
T
;
I
B
I
2
2
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
q
;’
I
I
1
I
I
1
11,11,~1,,,,,,11,,,,~2,2~21212121212121213131313131313131313~4~4~4~
~7181910,1121314151617161910111213,41516171819101112131415161718191011121
t-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-*-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
,01517,~lN,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
L-A-A-A-&-A-&-*
.
.
a *
.
.
*
.
.
.
*
*
*
.
.
.
.
A.-*_*-.I
L - A - A - A - -,
Figure 9.5
Record Code CN: Common Attendant Directory Numbers Data Sheet
Table 9.5 Entry Fields for Record Code CN
46
COL.
NO.
12-15
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
Attendant
Directory
Number
0000-9999
Attendant
Console
Number
Y =access
= number
or 000-999
47
48
49
16-23
D-l 74
- = no access
COMMENTS
If a directory number used is other than the
number defined on Record Code AT, this fie
determines the attendant directory number.
-If three-digit numbers are used, they
should be right justified.
-This number provides for a unique or
standard calling number for the Attendant
Console that allows the same DN to be used
for different consoles.
-With this number, a user can dial 2000 and
be connected to either attendant 0 or 1.
NOTE: Each Attendant Console number
assigned to answer calls via the common
attendant directory number must be listed on
Record Code AT, column 12.
For each Attendant Console number listed,
this field determines whether or not access
an attendant via the specified attendant
directory number is allowed.
SVR 52
TL-130400-1001
TRUNK
FEATURES
10.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the various system trunks and their features. The following
record codes are required:
l
l
x.
.
Record Code Tl defines the system trunk group parameters.
Record Code T2 defines additional system trunk group
parameters.
l
Record Code CR defines system toll restriction.
l
Record Code EC defines system expanded toll restriction.
l
Record Code AS defines service codes allowed with toll
restriction.
l
Record Code TC defines the system trunk group members.
l
Record Code NA defines permanent connection trunks.
0 Record Code DA defines CO digit absorption.
TL-130400-1001
Record Code Tl:
Trunk Group Part - 1
r
- - - - - - - - -
r
- - -
r
- - - - -
r
10.1 Record Code Tl , Figure 10.1, provides parameters that are
used to define trunk groups within the system. Record Code T2
also provides parameters for defining trunk groups. Individual
trunks that make up the trunk groups are defined on Record
Code TC.
- - - - - - -
r
- - -
T
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7---7---f---7-~-7-------~
I
‘R
Ci
(SEC)
;
(SEC)
(
I
I
I
1
I
-T-T-t-T-T-t-T-T-ti1616161616161616'6
I1011
12131415161718
.I-l-L-.J.~l-l-l~l-l-
Figure 10.1
D-l 76
;ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
“R
‘V
;’ E
ID
,:7
9 IO
- I -
Record Code Tl: Trunk Group Data 1 Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-I 001
Table 10.1
COL.
NO.
12-13
...
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl
VALID
ENTRIES
Trunk Group
Number
00-63 = number
This field determines the trunk group number.
-An RLT (Release Link Trunk) group does
not need trunk group assignment. The
combined line and recording trunks are
allowed access to the distant toll operator if
seizure (loop or E&M) capability is allowed.
-The trunk group number must be unique
across this record code.
- Any trunk group defined here must also be
defined on Record Code T2 and have at least
one member on Record Code TC.
-An incoming RLT from a CAS Branch is not
configured as a trunk group.
COT = DID/CO/
DOD
FXT = FX
TIE = Tie
WTS = WATS
DIC = dictation
access
PAG = paging
access
NIC = network
interface
REC = recorder
announcer access
CAS = centralized
attendant service
CLR = combined
line and recording
trunks (sometimes
used for billing of
motel guest
rooms)
Assign the type of trunk usage allowed to the
trunk group.
-The following rules apply to trunk
applications:
-COS: TIE, COT, FXT, and WTS trunks can
be assigned a COS (columns 17-20) if their
trunk direction is marked IN or TW (columns
21-22).
-DIG, PAG, REC, CAS, and CLR trunks
cannot be assigned a COS.
-If this field is marked DIC, NIC, PAG, or
REC, columns 21-50 must be dashed.
-The recommended ratio of DID trunks to
DID stations is 1 trunk to 10 stations.
-REC uses a 2-wire E&M trunk.
s.”
.-
14-16
SVR 5210
Trunk
Application
COMMENTS
6167
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.1
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl (Continued)
COMMENTS
-If columns 14-16 are marked CAS, the
displayable COS (Record Code DD) assigned
to the trunk group must be marked -- in
columns 16-17 and 36-37, and SA in
columns 24-25. The dashes disallow
switched direct line and modem access, and
SA allows station access.
-If columns 14-l 6 are marked COT, FXT, or
WTS and these are incoming trunks (marked
IN in columns 21-22) the only allowed
features for the trunk group are trunk group
access, dictation equipment access, station
access, and RLT access.
-If columns 14-16 are marked TIE, the only
features restricted from the trunk group are
switched direct line and progressive
19-20
Class of Service 00-l 5 = assigned
N-Displayable
-=N/A
(defaults to 0)
Assign the n-displayable COS for the trunk
group.
-The n-displayable COS must be defined on
Record Code NC.
-If columns 14-l 6 are marked WTS, the ndisplayable COS (Record Code NC) assigned
to the trunk group must be marked DS in
columns 28-29. DS provides the trunk group
with data line security. All other
n-displayable COS fields must be dashed.
-If columns 14-16 are marked TIE, the only
allowed features for the trunk group are
attendant information, data line security,
universal night answer, computer access,
special common carrier, and speed calling.
-If columns 14-16 are marked COT or FXT
and the trunks are incoming (marked IN in
columns 21-22), the only allowed features for
the trunk group are attendant information, data
line security, universal night answer, and
computer access.
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.1
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl (Continued)
COMMENTS
Assign the trunk di
-If this field is marked OG or
-If this field is marked OG or --, columns
17-20 must be dashed. If this field is marked
IN or TW, columns 17-20 can be dashed or
marked with any allowable digit.
-If this field is marked TW, columns 23-30
must be marked with any valid entry and not
-If this field is marked OG, columns 23-26
must be marked with dashes, and columns
27-30 can be marked with any valid entry but
must not be dashed.
-If this field is marked IN, columns 23-26
23-24
25
SW 5210
Trunk Incoming DP
Signal:
TC
Signaling Mode MX
or
-- = incoming
signaling mode
Assign the incoming signaling mode for the
trunk group.
DP = lines that use dial pulse signaling (used
for DID and Tie lines)
TC = lines that use touch calling signaling
MX= lines that can use DP or TC type
signaling
-- = N/A (used for paging/dictation, hot-line
service, recorder announcer, traffic to the
attendant, or any answer-only trunk)
Trunk Incoming
Signal:
Return Dial
Tone
This field determines whether or not the trunk
group is allowed incoming return of dial tone.
-This field is used by Tie trunk groups only.
-When this field is allowed, the incoming
trunk receives dial tone from the remote end,
indicating that dial tone is coming from the
switch.
-Columns 25 and 26 are mutually exclusive.
Y = allowed (Tie
only)
-=N/A
8187
D-l 79
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.1
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl (Continued)
COMMENTS
-This field is sometimes used for remote
-Columns 25 and 26 are mutually exclusive.
-If a Y is entered in this field, an
dial pulse type signaling.
-Touch calling signaling can connect to
touch calling type signaling.
DP = lines that use dial pulse signaling
TC = lines that use touch calling signaling
MX = lines that can u s e D P or TC type
rn
I.
-Return dial tone is used when a ground star t
signal cannot be used as an indication to st2 u-t
outpulsing to a CO. This is normally for loop 1
trunk applications. When the dial tone
returned bit is implemented, there is a 6second delay between the trunk seizure and
the start of outpulsing on speed calls (no
matter what trunk type). The dial tone return e d
bit does not indicate that return of dial tone i: 5
the only valid indication from the CO that
he CO will normally be
must be marked CM.
If columns 14-l 6 are marked CAS, this field
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.1
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
3i -32
Trunk
Disconnect
Supervision
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
CA = incoming
CD = outgoing
BT = incoming and
outgoing (Tie)
-- = N/A
x.
_
33-34
Billing Mode
AL = AIOD
CM = CAMA
-- = N/A
35-36
37
SVR 5210
COMMENTS
Assign the type of trunk disconnect
supervision for the trunk group.
-All references to the incoming or outgoing
trunk calls are from the system point of view.
-Disconnect is defined as an on-hook
condition for 300 milliseconds after the answer
condition has been received.
-Loop start trunks usually do not guarantee
disconnect supervision.
-E&M and ground start trunks, however, will
usually guarantee disconnect supervision.
This field determines whether the billing mode
used is AIOD (Automatic Identification of
Outward Dialing) or CAMA (Centralized
Automatic Message Accounting).
-AIOD is used for billing information that is
provided by the CO. This feature provides the
DN of stations placing outside calls. This
feature can be used only if the CO supports
AIOD trunks.
-If this field is marked AL, column 38 must be
marked 1, 2, 3, or 4.
-CAMA is used only on outgoing toll trunk
groups.
-If this field is marked CM, columns 21-22
must be marked OG.
Alternate Trunk
Group
00-63 = trunk
group number
-- = N/A
Trunk Transfer
Allowed
Y = allowed
Y allows a call to be transferred.
- = N/A (REC or
-Transfer should not be allowed for recorder
MERS trunk group) announcer trunks. However, when trunk
transfer is not allowed, the attendant can
transfer a call to a station, but the station
cannot transfer the call elsewhere.
8187
Assign the alternate trunk group to be used if
the trunk group is busy when a user places a
call.
-Only one alternate trunk group is allowed
per trunk group.
-If no alternate trunk group is to be used, the
field is dashed.
-If an alternate trunk group is not used, the
potential for calls to be blocked exists.
-The alternate trunk group must be defined
as a trunk group on Record Codes Tl and T2.
D-l 81
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.1
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl (Continued)
COMMENTS
-The FB-17276 card has 4 circuits. Circuits
1 and 2 are loop; circuits 3 and 4 are E&M.
-If the AIOD option is used and no circuit is
defined, the default value is circuit 1.
-If used, the AIOD card must be defined on
Record Code FR.
-If this field is marked 1, 2, 3, or 4, columns
33-34 must be marked AL.
number (CAMA) sending requirements.
ield allows billing identification to the
-When a three-digit station numbering plan
is used, the missing terminal.digit is the first
missing digit and must be specified.
NOTE: If this field is dashed, column 44 must
(ACD/DIL) Trunk
Pilot Number
number of a station hunting group. If needed
a single station can receive limited ACD/DIL
-If a single station number is used, the
D-l 82
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.1
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
45-48
Automatic Call
0000-9999 =
ICont’d)
Distribution/
Direct-In Line
(ACD/DIL) Trunk
Pilot Number
number
(right justify
three-digit
numbers)
mm-m = N/A
49
Route to RLT
(Release Link
Trunk)
Y = connect to RLT
- = connect to
local attendant
This field determines whether or not incoming
seizure is assigned to a trunk group when no
incoming signaling (ringdown) is allowed to
connect to the RLT (CAS) or to the local
Attendant Console.
NOTE: If the site is a CAS Branch and calls
are to be routed to the CAS Main location, this
field must be marked Y.
50
Answer Back
Recorder
Announcer
Y = allowed
-=N/A
This field determines whether or not the trunk
group is allowed an answer back signal when
any trunk group is routed to a recorder
announcer.
-This field should be allowed if the trunk
group is routed to a recorder announcer. This
allows the CO to bill for the time that the
calling party is connected to the recording.
51
Recorder
Announcer
Return Answer
Back
Y = allowed
-=N/A
This field determines the recorder announcer
trunk group that is to return an answer back
signal when connected to an incoming trunk.
NOTE: If this field is marked Y, columns 1416 must be marked REC.
Delete DID
Digits
01-10 = number
In a DID application, this field determines the
number of digits sent from the CO that are to
be deleted. This field is used when the CO is
sending more digits than needed (e.g., threedigit numbering plan in effect and the CO is
sending four digits).
Agent Group
Number
O-7 = number
- = not assigned
52-53
54
SVR 5210
-- = N/A
8187
For the limited ACD feature to work properly, it
is recommended to use a pilot number from a
circular hunt group.
-If an entry (other than dashes) is made in
this field, columns 23-26 must be dashed.
-If an entry (other than dashes) is made in
this field, columns 14-16 must be marked
CAS, CLR, COT, FXT, TIE, or WTS.
-The direction for any of those trunk groups,
must be marked IN or TW (columns 21-22).
Assign the agent group number for the trunk
group.
-This field is used only for CAS or full ACD.
-If columns 14-16 are marked CAS, this
field must specify an agent group O-7.
D-l 83
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.1
COL.
NO.
55
COL.
NAME
Trunk Homing
Selection
....
VALID
ENTRIES
H = allowed
- = not allowed
s.”
._
56
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl (Continued)
.-
COMMENTS
This field determines whether or not the trunk
group is allowed homing.
-Entering an H in this field provides trunk
homing, which acts like a terminal hunt group.
-Normally a dash is recommended in this
field. This provides circular hunting.
NOTE: If this field is marked H, columns 2122 must be marked OG or TW.
Automatic
Circuit
Assurance
Y = selected
- = not selected
Enter Y if the ACA (Automatic Circuit
Assurance) feature option is used by the trunk
group.
-By monitoring the holding time for both long
and short calls, this feature gives an indication
of possible trunk problems.
-The definition of a long and short call is
determined by the following parameters.
57-58
Automatic
Circuit
Assurance
Short Call
Threshold
01-15 = number
of calls in the short
call
’
-- = not selected
Enter the number of call attempts that must fall
below the seconds listed in columns 59-60
before a short call report is made.
-A default value is not provided for this field.
-This feature is also used for remote
maintenance.
59-61
Automatic
Circuit
Assurance
Short Call
Interval
001-255 =
seconds
_- = not
selected
1-3 = suggested
value
Enter the number of seconds that a trunk must
be seized before it is seen by the system as a
short call.
-This value should be set lower than the
normal amount of time the site spends on a
call (e.g., a telemarketing group may average
calls that are very short in length).
-A default value is not provided for this field.
62-64
Automatic
Circuit
Assurance
Short Call Reset
Interval
001-255 =
seconds
_- = not
selected
Enter the number of minutes that must pass
before the short call threshold is reset.
-The above listed short call parameters are
monitored for the amount of time set here.
-If the above parameters are reached within
the time frame, then a short call report is sent
to the Attendant/MDR.
-If the parameters are not met, the timer is
reset to zero and the short call parameters are
set back to zero.
-A default value is not provided for this field.
D-l 84
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.1
CQL.
NO.
65-67
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code Tl (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
Automatic
001-255 =
Circuit
minutes
Assurance Long --- = not
Calf Interval
selected
45 = suggested
value
_
COMMENTS
Enter the number of minutes that a trunk must
be seized before a report is made.
-If this value is reached, a report is sent to
the AttendantIMDR.
This value should be set higher than the
normal amount of time the site spends on a
call (e.g., a site that has the data option may
be making long data calls).
- A default value is not provided for this field.
68
Outgoing Trunk
Group Facility
Restriction
Level Outpulsed
Y = outpulse FRL
- = not selected
If the trunk group has been given an FRL
value, this field determines whether or not the
FRL value is outpulsed when an outgoing trunk
call is made.
NOTE: If the FRL option is used, this field will
normally be marked Y for Tie trunks
connecting two switches in a network.
69
Incoming Trunk
Group Default
Facility
Restriction
Level
O-7 = number
- = N/A (TCM not
equipped)
This field determines the incoming FRL value
for the trunk group.
NOTE: If a remote network system does not
have the capability to send an FRL, an FRL
value can be given to that incoming trunk.
70
Outgoing Trunk
Group Facility
Restriction
Level to Access
O-7 = number
- = N/A (TCM not
equipped)
This field determines the FRL value to be
outpulsed for the trunk group.
-The FRL value should only be outpulsed for
a MERS networking environment.
71
Integrating
V o i c e
Messaging
System Trunk
Identifier
Y = IVMS trunk
group
- = not an IVMS
trunk group
Enter Y if the trunk group is used to support
the IVMS option.
72
Reserved
- = only allowed
entry
This field is not used for this SVR.
SVR 5210
8187
D-l 85
TL-130400-1001
Record Code T2:
Trunk Group Part - 2
10.2 Record Code T2, Figure 10.2A, provides parameters that
define trunk groups. This record code is used along with Record
Code Tl in defining trunk groups.
Columns 14-28 are only used if toll restriction is in effect. If the
trunk group does not have toll restriction, dash columns 14-28.
Figures containing flowcharts and examples for toll restriction
configurations are included at the end of this record code.
Programming information is as follows:
s.”
....
D-l 86
A flowchart (Figure 10.2B) is included to explain toll restriction.
The flowchart assumes that a station classed as toll restricted
has dialed the trunk group access code. When toll restriction
. . is placed on a trunk group, the flowchart explains the
checkpoints that the system uses to determine the type of toll
restriction that is to be used.
l
l
Figures 10.2C and 10.2D explain three-digit and six-digit
analysis as applied to the system.
l
Figures 10.2E and 10.2F show a cross-section of the
columns on Record Code T2 that apply to toll and code
restriction. The three types of toll and code restriction are
categorized and shown in examples.
l
Figure 10.2G is a flowchart that shows how to fill out the
various record codes that can be used for toll and code
restriction. These record codes are T2, CR, EC, AS, and DA.
It is recommended to read the flowchart before completing
these record codes.
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
v - - - - - - - r - - I
T
I
I
I
I
1
I
r
-
r
- - -
r
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - 1 - ; T;
I RI
I A’
; .!I
I
/
I
; CI
; 81
I E’
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/
I
I
I
I
I
I
T - T -T - l--r--r--r--r--r--r--r-i
~414141414~4,41’4~4’515151515151515151516l6’6l6,6l6’6~6~
~11213141516171819101112131415161718~910111213141516171
I-L-I-L-I-L-L-I-L-*-L_L
-L-I-L-L-I-I-L-I-I-I-~-~-~-~-~-~---------------~-~
Figure 10.2A
SW 5210
Record Code T2: Trunk Group Data 2 Data Sheet
8h37
;
;
I
;
f
i
;
i
;
I
;
I
;
I
f
I
;
I
;-I
18:
101
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.2
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
12-13
Trunk Group
Number
.
16-17
D-l 88
VALID
ENTRIES
00-63 = number
. eY.
._
’ 14-15
Entry Fields for Record Code T2
..
COMMENTS
This field determines the trunk group number.
-If Record Code Tl , columns 14-l 6, are
marked DIG, PAG, REC, or NIC, columns 1440 and 45-46 must be dashed.
-Each trunk group number on this record
code must appear on Record Code Tl,
columns 12-l 3.
-Trunk group numbers must be unique
across this record code.
Trunk Toll
Restriction
TL = simple toll
restriction (threedigit analysis)
ET = expanded toll
toll restriction
(six-digit analysis)
-- = N/A
Assign the type of toll restriction placed on a
trunk group.
-TL is used for trunk groups required to
analyze the NPA dialed.
-ET is used for trunk groups required to
analyze the ABCs of the NPA dialed.
-If this field is marked ET, column 27 must
have an entry.
-If this field is marked TL, column 26 must
have an entry and columns 27-28 must be
dashed.
-If this field is marked --, columns 16-28
must be dashed.
-If a station has a displayable COS that
allows toll access, the call will bypass the toll
restriction placed on the trunk group.
-Toll access is assigned to stations on
Record Code DD, columns 14-15, by
marking the columns TA.
Toll Access
Code Digits:
Code Indicator
NM = number
allowed
QP = operator
permitted
NR = number
restricted
OR = operator
restricted
-- = allowed
Fields in columns 16-25 determine the
access codes allowed to the toll restricted
trunk group. The access codes determined
by these fields are 1 + , 0 + or 0 - . An
access code of 1 + is normally used to access
toll trunks. In an NPA with conflicting codes,
1 + is always dialed. An access code of 0 +
is used to make an operator assisted toll call.
An access code of 0- is used to make a
credit card call (or a call that is dialed after
the digit 0 is dialed).
-Columns 16-20 determine whether or not
1 + dialing is allowed.
-Columns 21-25 determine whether or not
0+ or 0- dialing is allowed.
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.2
Entry Fields for Record Code T2 (Continued)
COMMENTS
-If toll restriction is i n effect, for normal
applications this field will only be marked NM
-If this field is dashed, columns 18-20 and
23-25 must be dashed.
-If this field is not dashed, columns 18-20
and 23-25 must be marked 0-- to 999.
required for the trunk group.
-For normal applications, column 18 is
marked 1 and columns 19-20 are dashed.
-Columns 18-20 determine the digit while
columns 16-l 7 determine whether or not the
system allows access to that digit.
-If digit 1 is dashed, then digits 2 and 3 must
also be dashed.
21-22
Second Toll
Access: Code
Indicator
NM = number
allowed
OP = operator
permitted
NR = number
restricted
OR = operator
restricted
- = allowed
-Columns 21-25 are normally used to
determine whether 0 + or 0- dialing is
allowed.
-If toll restriction is in effect, for normal
applications this field will only be marked OP
or OR.
NOTE: The entry for the toll access code and
the second toll access code cannot be the
same.
23-25
Second Toll
Access Code
Digits 1, 2, or 3
O-9 = number
-=N/A
This field determines the one-, two-, or
three-digit toll access or operator code
required for the trunk group.
-For normal applications, column 18 is
marked 1 and columns 19-20 are dashed.
-Columns 18-20 determine the digit while
columns 16-17 determine whether or not the
system allows access to that digit.
-If digit 1 is dashed, then digits 2 and 3 must
also be dashed.
SVR 5210
8187
D-l 89
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.2
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
26
-..
Code
Restriction
Table Number
.”
Entry Fields for Record Code T2 (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
l-8 = number
-=N/A
..
l-8 = number
- = N/A
COMMENTS
This field determines the code restriction table
number used by the trunk group.
-This field points to Record Code CR,
column 12. Column 12 is a table number for
the allowed NPAIABC of that table.
-If an entry is made in this column, Record
Code CR must be completed.
27
Expanded or
Conflicting
Table Number
28
1+ Code
Restriction
Table Number
l-8 = number
- = N/A
Assign the code restriction table number used
by the trunk group.
-This number is used when conflicting NPA
and ABC codes exist.
-If an entry is made in this column, Record
Code CR must be completed.
29
Pad Class
(two-way)
1-9 = number
or
-=N/A
Assign pad two-way trunk application for a
trunk group.
-This is used to put additional dB pads
(decimal level) on a trunk. This is used for
volume control.
-Two-way pertains to a two-way
connection.
l=FX
2= PABWCO or PABXICRL trunks
3 = non-tandem PABX Tie trunks (This is
used in a tandem network, allowing the PABX
to access CO trunks from a remote PABX, but
not access Tie trunks that connect the remote
PABX to other PABXs in the network.
4= satellite Tie trunks (This PABX only has Tie
trunks that connect it to a main switch. Other
trunks are accessed at the main switch.)
5 = inter-tandem PABX Tie trunks (This is
used in a tandem network, allowing incoming
PABX trunks to access CO lines, but not
access Tie lines to network PABXs.)
This field determines the expanded or
conflicting table number used for the trunk
group.
-This field points to Record Code EC, column
12. Column 12 is a table number for the
allowed NPA(s) of that table.
-If an entry is made in this column, Record
Codes CR and EC must be completed.
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.2
Entry Fields for Record Code T2 (Continued)
COMMENTS
6= tandem PABX Tie trunks (This is used in a
tandem network, allowing incoming PABX
trunks to access CO lines as well as Tie
trunks to other PABXs.)
7= class 4 WATS trunks (normally a small CO
with limited capabilities)
8 = class 5 WATS trunks (This type of CO can
provide toll switching.)
9 = conference port
- = dictation access, recorder announcer
access, or N/A
ree-way pertains
to a three-way connection.
2= FX trunks, PABXCO or PABXCLR trunks,
class 5 WATS trunks
4= non-tandem PABX Tie trunks, satellite Tie
trunks, inter-tandem PABX Tie trunks,
tandem PABX Tie trunks, class 4 WATS trunks
- = dictation access, recorder announcer
access, paging access, or N/A.
31
MERS Escape
Digit
O-9 = digit
-=N/A
Assign the code used (number dialed) to
access off-network facilities after placing an
on-network MERS call.
NOTE: If an entry is made in this field, Record
Code Sl, columns 19 and 23, may require
entries.
32
MERS Pause
Value/Seizure
l-5 = seconds
After a trunk is seized, this field determines the
amount of seconds the system waits before
sending the first digit.
-This is the pause applied after the escape
digit and allows a second dial tone on the
homing switch.
NOTE: If an entry is made in this field, Record
Code SI, column 18, may require an entry.
SVR 5210
-=N/A
8187
D-l 91
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.2
COL.
NO.
33
COL.
NAME
VlERS Pause
Jalue/Escape
Entry Fields for Record Code T2 (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
l-5 = seconds
.=N/A
s.”
COMMENTS
After the escape digit is sent, this field
determines the amount of seconds the system
waits before sending the next digits.
-Normally this field is only used for
applications involving an older CO. It provides
a pause after the first digit is dialed.
NOTE: If an entry is made in this field, Record
Code SI, columns 19 and 23, may require
entries.
34
MERS Pause
dalue/Toll
3arrier Code
1-5 = seconds
- = N/A
After the toll barrier code is sent (type 1 + or
0 + ), this field determines the amount of
seconds the system waits before sending the
next digit.
NOTE: If an entry is made in this field, Record
Code SI, column 20, must be marked B.
35
3lock
Transmission
Y = blocked
N = not blocked
Enter Y if blocked transmission is to be
applied during outpulsing before dialing is
completed.
-This is used in applications where a DTMF
station accesses a trunk group with outgoing
DP signaling and is then fed to a CO that has
combined DP and DTMF receivers.
-It is recommended to apply block
transmission to systems with IFPs on Tie
trunks.
-If block transmission is required and not
performed, the result is a transmission of
double digits.
36
Ignore Reverse
Battery Check
I = ignore battery
check
- = perform
battery check
Enter Y if the reverse battery check is ignored
by the system that acknowledges disconnect
supervision.
-An area serviced by a Bell CO should be
marked I. If an FGBS pay phone is used, it is
recommended to dash this field.
-If ignore battery check is required and not
performed, the system will see it as a
disconnect.
37
Message Meter
Pegs Indicator
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if the message meter pegs indicator
for calls terminating to a trunk group is used.
-This field is only used for motel applications
that use the message meter pegs feature on
the KEDU.
8/87
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.2
Entry Fields for Record Code T2 (Continued)
COMMENTS
Enter Y if the message m
for calls terminating to a
-This field is only used fo
that use the message meter pegs feature o n
alternate trunk
feature is allowed for 24-hour a day service
on this trunk group.
Enter A if an authorization code is needed to
access the remote access trunk group feature
- = not allowed
Momentarily
Open Outgoing
hundreds of
milliseconds
43-44
Trunk
02-l 5 = time in
Momentarily
hundreds of
Open Incoming milliseconds
45-46
Outpulsing
Delay
47
SVR 5210
allowed for a loop to remain open on an
outgoing trunk before the call is dropped.
-It is recommended to enter 03 in this field.
This field determines the maximum time for a
loop to remain open on an incoming trunk call
before the call is dropped.
Assign the time the system waits before
02-l 5 = time in
100 ms intervals or beginning to send digits on an outgoing trunk.
10 = suggested
value
Attendant Recall T = allowed
After No Answer N = not allowed
Timeout
8187
Enter T if trunk calls recall to the attendant
after the no answer timeout parameter is
reached.
-This timing parameter is set on Record
Code OT, columns 45-47.
D-l 93
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.2
COL.
NO.
48
49
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code T2 (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
Facility
T = allow request
Restriction
N = disallow
Level
request
- Authorizatkm
:%ode Request
When Traveling
Class Mark Has
B e e n R e c e i v e d ‘*
MERS Queue
Allow
T = allowed MERS
queuing
N = disallowed
MERS queuing
COMMENTS
Enter T if this trunk group requests an
authorization code even if a TCM (Traveling,
Class Mark) digit is received.
Enter T if MERS queuing is allowed for the
trunk group.
NOTE: When this feature is activated, the
queuing begins with the first MERS route
allowed for the NPAIABC dialed and continues
to the other routes.
TL-130400-1001
NEEDED AFTER
J
I
/ ARE DIGITS\
1
YES
LOCATED IN TV=
(ALLOW
Figure 10.28
SVR 5210
8187
YES\/
CALL)-1
Trunk Group Toll Restriction Flowchart
D-195
-
TL-130400-1001
Y
A
COLLECT
NEXT
ALLOW CALL
Figure 10.2B
D-l 96
Trunk Group Toll Restriction Flowchart (Continued)
8/87
I
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE CR *
l-7G-j
+
XXXX = LOCAL CALLS
ALLOWED
NOT
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE CR
.”
J-Tiq
A
INTERCEPT = LOCAL CALLS
BLOCKED
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE CR **
.ITl
+
XXX + XXXX = LONG DISTANCE CALL
ALLOWED
NOT
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE CR
1-1
NOTES:
*
-
INTERCEPT = LONG DISTANCE CALL
BLOCKED
Table 10.3 of Record Code CR should contain the allowed ABC codes of
the HNPA.
**
When three-digit analysis is required for an NPA code, it also should be
placed in Table 10.3 of Record Code CR.
Figure 10.2C Three-Digit Analysis
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE
+I
+
+I
+
XXXX = LONG DISTANCE CALL
ALLOWED
NOT
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE
+J
+
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE
*i-d
INTERCEPT=
LONG DISTANCE
BLOCKED
ASSIGNED ON
RECORD CODE
+I
+
NOTE:
l
pi%q
+
XXXX = LONG DISTANCE CALL
ALLOWED
A separate code restriction table is assigned for each NPA or group of
NPAs that require six-dlgit analysis.
Figure 10.2D Six-Digit Analysis
CALL
TL-130400-1001
NOTE:
1
THESE EXAMPLES ARE JUST A FEW OF THE POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS.
SIMPLE TOLL BLOCKING
A. BLOCKS 0 C AND 1 +, ALLOWS ALL LOCAL CALLS
B BLOCKS 0 k,ALLOWS 1 + AND ALL LOCAL CALLS
1
C. BLOCKS 1 +, ALLOWS 0 + AND ALL LOCAL CALLS
Figure 10.2E
D-l 98
Samples of Toll Restriction for Areas with Toll Access Codes (1 + Most
Common) and 0+ Dialing
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
EXPANDED TOLL RESTRICTION (3.DIGIT ANALYSIS)
A.
RESTRlCllON DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
(1)
BLOCKS 0 f
(2)
ALLOWS 1 + 4CCESS?O SPECIFIC NPA CODES pt” THE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE.
ALLOWS ACCLSS EITHER TO ALL OR ONLY SPECIFIC LOCAL AaC CODES PER THE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE.
RESTRlCllON DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
(3)
a.
(1)
aLocKs
(2)
ALLOWS 0 + ACCESS TO SPECIFIC NPA CODES PLR THE CODE RESTRIcTION TABLE.
xALLOWS ACCESS EITHER TO ALL OR ONLY SPECIFIC LOCAL ABC CODES PER THE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE.
(3)
1c.
7 + AND 0
RESTRIcTION DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
_
aI.OCKS O+ A N D 1 + NPA.
(1)
p)
I
I
ALLOWS 1 + FOR LOCAL ABC CODES PER 1HE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE.
_
EXPANDED CODE RESTRICTION (3~DIGIT ANALYSIS)
RESTRICTION DIVIDED AS FOLL.OWS
(1)
BLOCKS 0 f AND 1 +
(2)
ALLOWS ACCESS ONLY TO SPECIFIC LOCAL ABC CODES PERTHE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE.
EXPANDED CODE RESTRICTION (&DIGIT ANAI.YSIS)
A.
“ESTKlCllON
DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
(1)
RLOCKS 0 f
(2)
ALLOWS 1 + ACCESS OF CERTAIN NPA CODES FOR TERMINATION TO SPECIFIC ABC CODES PER THE EXPANDED 0” CONFLICTING TABLE. *
(3)
ALLOWS ACCESS TO THE FOLLOWING PER THE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE:
(a) 1 + ACCESS OF SPECIFIC NPA CODES.
(b) ACCESS OF SPECIFIC LOCAL ABC CODES.
a.
RESTRICTION DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS.
(1)
BLOCKS 1 + AND 0 -
(2)
ALLOWS 0 + ACCESS OF CERTAIN NPA CODES FOR TERMINATION TO SPECIFIC ABC CODES PER THE EXPANDED 0” CONFLlCllNG TABLE. *
(3)
ALLOWS ACCESS TO TIIE FOLLOWING PER TI-IE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE:
(a) 0 + ACCESS OF SPECIFIC NPA CODES
(b) ACCESS OF 5PECIFIC
C.
LOCAI. ABC CODLS
RESTRlCllON DIVIDED AS FOLLOwS
(1)
BLCCKS 0 r
(2)
ALLOWS i + ACCESS 0~ CERTAIN NPA CODES (THAT CONFLICT
PERTHE 1 + RESTRICTIONTABLE *
(3)
ALLOWS ACCESS TO THE FOLLOWING PER THE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE:
WITH
LOCAL Aac CODES) fo” TERMINATION
~0 SPECIFIC Aac CODES
(a) 1 + ACCESS OF SPECIFIC NPA CODES
(b) ACCESS OF SPECIFIC LOCAL ABC CODES
D.
RESTRICTION DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS’
(1)
BLOCKS 1 + AND 0 --
(2)
ALLOWS 0 + ACCESS OF CERTAIN NPA CODES VHAT CONFLICT WITH LOCAL ABC CODES) FOR TERMINATION TO SPECIFIC ABC CODES
PER THE 1 + RESTRICUON TABLE ’
(3)
ALLOWS ACCESS TO THC FOLLOWING PER THE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE:
(a) 0 + ACCESS OF SPECIFIC NPA CODtS
(b) ACCESS OF SPFCIFIC
NOTE:
LOCAL AaC CODtS
--~THE ABC CODE5 THAT ARE LINKED TO THE NPA CODES ARE PLACED IN ANOTHER CODE “ESTRI‘UON
*
TABLE ON RECORD CODE CR.
.--
Figure 4 0.2E
SVR 5210
Ssmpilss of Tall Restriction for Areas With Toll Access Codes
(I + Most Common) and 0+ Dialing (Continued)
8187
D-l 99
TL-130400-1001
TRUNK
TOLL
17
EXPANbED TOLL RESTRICIIONO-DIGIT
2ND
TOLL ACCESS
TOLL ACCESS
I
16 17
18 19 20
0
R
0
-
N
M
0
.
.
P
0
-
-
EXPANDED
OR
I
23 24 25
26
1+
RESTRIC-
I
27
28
ANALYSIS)
B. ALLOW0 f -
~______
--1 n
.
.
..
_
( = ANY NUMBER I- 4
3
CODE
RESTRIC-
I
I
1 EXPANDED CODE RESTRICTION (3-DIGIT ANALYSIS)
I
BLOCK 0 f
-17
I
I
I
I
E
T
OR
0..
_.
__.
X
E
T
OR
0..
_.
.-.
X
I
I
I
I
( = ANY NUMBER l-4
4
EXPANDED CODE RESTRI~~ON (~-DIGIT AN ALYS IS)
BLOCK 0 C
I--I
( = ANY NUMBER l-4
(OTE:
1
---I-
I
I
I
X
I
THESE EXAMPLES ARE JUST A FEW OF THE POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS.
SIMPLE TOLL BLOCKING
BLOCK 0 f AND FOREIGN NPA CALLS, ALLOWS ALL LOCAL.
2
EXPANDED TOLL RESTRICTION (3-DIGIT ANALYSIS)
A. RESTRlCllON DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
(1) BLOCKS 0 -.
(2) ALLOWS 0 + CALLS TO NPA OR LOCAL ABC CODES PROGRAMMED IN THE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE.
(3) BLOCKS ANY DIALED NPA OR LOCAL ABC CODES NOT PROGRAMMED IN CODE RESTRlClLON TABLE
B. RESTRICTION DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
(1) ALLOWS 0 ?r
(2) BLOCKS ANY DlALED NPA OR LOCAL ABC CODES NOT PROGRAMMED IN CODE RESTRICTION TABLE
EXPANDED CODE RESTRltrlON (3-DIGIT ANALYSIS)
RESTRICTION DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
(1) BLOCKS 0 +
(2) ALLOWS ANY DIALED NPA OR LOCAL ABC CODES PROGRAMMED IN CODE RESTRICTION TABLE
4
EXPANDED CODE RESTRICTION (6.DIGIT ANALYSIS)
A. RESTRICTION DIVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
(1) BLOCKS 0 f
(2) ALLOWS ACCESS OF CERTAIN NPA CODES FOR TERMINATION TO SPECIFIC ABC CODES PER THE EXPANDED OR CONFLICTING TABLE.’
(3) ALLOWS ACCESS TO THE FOLLOWING PER THE CODE RESTRICTION TABLE:
YOTE:
l
(a)
ACCESS OF SPECIFIC NPA CODES.
(b)
ACCESS OF SPECIFIC LOCAL ABC CODES.
THE ABC CODES THAT ARE LINKED TO THE NPA CODES ARE PLACED IN ANOTHER CODE RESTRICTION TABLE ON RECORD CODE CR.
Figure 10.2F
Samples of Toll Restriction for Areas with 0 + Dialing Alone
TL-130400-1001
Record Code CR:
Code Restriction
Numbers
10.3 Record Code CR, Figure 40.3, gives toll restricted stations
limited DDD (Direct Distance Dialing) access. A maximum of
eight code restriction tables are provided in the system’s data
base. Each code restriction table can contain up to 1,000
NPA/ABC codes.
For normal applications, one code restriction table is all that is
required, and it is assigned to all applicable trunk groups. This
table includes all the allowed ABC codes of the HNPA (Home
Numbering Plan Area) and all the FNPA (Foreign Numbering
Plan Area) codes. Toll restriction stations accessing a trunk
group assigned to this table are allowed to make calls to the
NPAs/ABCs that are listed.
x.”
....
..
NOTE: When a code restriction table is assigned to a trunk
group, normal toll restriction checks are expanded. The system
allows only toll restricted stations accessing the trunk group to
complete calls to codes entered in this table. These can be
assigned per trunk group.
If greater flexibility is needed, up to eight tables can be defined
with NPA /ABC codes. These tables can be assigned to different
trunk groups. Toll restricted stations can be assigned to access
only certain trunk groups. Since these trunk groups are only
allowed to access certain NPAs/ABCs, the stations are restricted
from calling unlisted NPAs/ABCs.
If six-digit analysis is needed for any NPA(s), Record Code EC
must also be completed. Six-digit analysis is required for the
following reasons:
Q An NPA has ABC(s) that are conflicting codes. That is, the
ABC has a 0 or 1 as the middle (B) digit.
@ Cross boundary dialing is in effect (e.g., calls to certain ABCs
within an NPA other than the HNPA are dialed/billed as local
calls).
o Certain ABC(s) within the NPA will be treated in a different
manner than other ABCs. That is, they will be routed differently
because some ABCs are local calls while others are toll calls
(e.g., an FX line or toll ABCs for the HNPA).
SVR 5210
8187
D-203
TL-130400-1001
r - - - - - - -
--r-r--------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
T
hi
IDI
IEI
I
s
- - rIX1
- r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ - -
I
1
---------------------------------------t
I
I
pi
I
I
I
I
El E ;
‘RI
;$I
Tl
I
I
I
r(‘I
1NI
I
I
I
I
I
ALLOWABLE 3-DIGIT NPAIABC
CODENUMBERS
‘Ti
!?I
IL1
I I
I
II’
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
; 7-7-rI-ii
r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-T-T-T-r-s-T-T-s-T-r-T-l-n-r-i
l
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
17181910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011121314151617181910111213141
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-i
IOl9l5lCIRI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-~-*----L--C-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
-.&.-A-L-A.-&
-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~
-&-&-.&-4.-A-*-d
Figure 10.3
D-204
Record Code CR: Code Restriction Numbers Data Sheet
8f87
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.3
COL.
NO.
12
...
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code CR
VALID
ENTRIES
Code
l-8 = number
This field determines the table number
assigned to the allowable codes listed in
columns 13-72.
-This number is used by the system for
identification purposes.
-A code restriction table with no codes
allowed is programmed by entering the code
restriction table number in column 12 and
dashes for the first entry in columns 13-15.
000-999 =
NPAIABC number
- = range marker
, = end of range
marker
This field determines the allowable three-digit
code numbers (NPAABC) that can be
assigned for the possible eight different code
restriction tables.
-Commas are entered between individual
NPA/ABC codes (e.g., 220,474).
-Dashes are entered to indicate a series of
codes (e.g., 220-229).
-Column 72 can only contain a comma.
-When a code restriction table is assigned in
column 12, the codes are entered in
sequence going from left to right across the
page.
Restriction
Table
x.”
.
13-72
SVR 5210
Allowable
Three-Digit
Numbering Plan
Area/ABC Code
Numbers
COMMENTS
8187
D-205
TL-130400-1001
Record Code EC:
Expanded or
Conflicting Code
Check Tables
-=_
.”
‘------‘--r-r7-------I
I
II I
I
IN,
I
I
I
i
11
IDI
!E!
10.4 Record Code EC, Figure 10.4, is used in conjunction
with expanded code restriction capabilities. This record code
must be set up along with Record Code CR. Expanded code
restriction is used to allow access to certain ABC codes within an
NPA or for an NPA that has conflicting ABC codes. An ABC
code is a conflicting code if it has a 0 or 1 as the middle digit
(e.g., ABC = 212). 212 is an NPA in New York. A 0 or 1 as the
middle digit is only applied to NPAs. However, some NPAs have
more ABCs than they have numbers to accommodate. In these
NPA areas, the,ABCs are allowed a 0 or 1 as the middle digit,
thereby causing a conflict between the ABC and NPA codes.
Tc------------_--------------7------------------------
T
i
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 10.4 Record Code EC: Expanded or Conflicting Code Check Tables Data Sheet
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.4
COL.
NO.
12
13-15,
18-20,
,23-25,
and
28-30
16,
21,
26,
COL.
NAME
Table Number
Entry Fields for Record Code EC
VALID
ENTRIES
1-8 = number
22,
27,
and
32
SVR 5210
This field defines the table number of the
expanded or conflicting code or codes that
are allowed in the system. The table number
is used by the system for identification
purposes.
-This number must be defined on Record
Code CR, column 12.
-The table number must be unique across
this record code.
Expanded or
000-999 = N PA
Conflicting Code number
Numbers l-8
-=N/A
Enter the NPA requiring expanded toll
restriction.
-The NPA codes must be unique on a per
table (one EC form) basis.
-This field can only contain an NPA.
1 + Restriction
Code Table
1-8 =
table number
-= N/A
This field determines whether or not the NPA
listed in preceding columns has conflicting
codes.
-This field points to Record Code CR,
column 12, where the allowed ABCs for the
NPA requiring six-digit analysis are listed.
-For normal applications, either the
1 + restriction code table or the restriction
code table will have an entry, not both. There
are, however, applications that require an
entry in both of these fields (e.g., conflicting
codes in an NPA with cross boundary dialing).
-If this application exists, fields for 1 +
restriction (16, 21, 26, and/or 31) define the
NPA with conflicting codes, and fields 17, 22,
27, and/or 32 point to Record Code CR for the
ABC listing.
Restriction
Code Table
l-8=
table number
-=NlA
This field points to Record Code CR, column
12, where the allowed ABCs for the NPA
requiring six-digit analysis are listed.
-1 + restriction code tables and restriction
code tables for normal applications are
mutually exclusive; however, an entry can be
made in each of these fields when required.
and
31
17,
COMMENTS
8187
D-207
TL-130400-1001
Record Code AS:
Allowable Service Codes
10.5 Record Code AS, Figure 10.5, defines the service codes
such as 411, 611, and 911, that the system is allowed to dial.
This record code is used in conjunction with the toll restriction
feature and is applied on a trunk-group by trunk-group basis.
If service codes are accessed through MERS, Record Code ST
must be used.
T---------r---r-----r------------------~---------------~-----------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
’ -j’
I
;
N”,
:
:
ii
ii
I
I
I
..
I
I El
I
I
I
I
Ix,
,
I
1
f
I
I
I
4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
VALID SERVICE CODE VALUES
OF N ALLOWED
Figure 10.5
Record Codk AS: Allowable Service Codes Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.5
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code AS
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12-13
Trunk Group
Number
.Ix-
00-63 = trunk
group
This field determines the trunk groups allowed
to access the service codes listed in columns
17-32.
-The trunk group listed must be defined on
Record Code Tl , column 12-l 3.
-Each trunk group number defined in
columns 12-l 3 must be unique.
14-16
Service Code
Prefixing
NON = no prefixing
required
Nl 1 = format
prefixed
11 N = format
prefixed
BTH = both formats
prefixed
Assign the service code prefixing method
applied to a toll access code (1 + etc.) dialed
before a service code number.
17-24
Valid Service
Code Values of
N Allowable
11 N codes 29
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
This field determines the allowed dialed digits
that follow the digits 11 (e.g., if 112, 113, and
114 are allowed, enter a Y in fields 17, 18, and
19).
-The 11 N format is seldom found in use
today.
25-32
Valid Service
Code Values of
N Allowable
Nil codes 29
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
This field determines the allowed leading digits
that precede the digits 11 (e.g., if 411, 611,
and 911 are allowed, enter a Y in fields 27, 29,
and 32).
SW 5210
8187
D-209
TL-130400-1001
Record Code TC:
Trunk Circuit
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
10.6 Record Code TC, Figure 10.6, defines the trunk circuit data
required and its related assignment. Dictation/paging, recorder
announcer, and NIC (Network Interface Card) circuits require an
entry in columns 12-28. All other columns for these cards must
contain dashes except when recorder announcer access is
required.
I
I
I
;-,-,-;-,- t-r-f-r-r-t-t-$-T-$-f-T-t-T-T-$-T-f-T-f--~- ’
,
I
I
I
Ill1 111111111111111112l2121212121212121213131313131313131313l4i4l414141
1718191011
,2,3,415,6,71819101112l314151617~819101112,3,415161718,910111213141
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
T
1,12101TI~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-*-~----L-~-I-_C-*-~-~-_C--L-~-~_~-*-*-~_*-~-*-*-~-~-I-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-_L-I-~-*-.
Figure 10.6
D-2
Record Code TC: Trunk Circuit Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
I
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.6
COL.
NAME
CCL.
NO.
Entry Fields for Record Code TC
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12-13
Trunk Group
Number
00-63 = trunk
group number
This number must be a trunk group defined on
Record Code Tl , columns 12-l 3.
14-l 6
...
Member
Number
000-063 = trunk
group member
number
This’field determines the outgoing order of the
trunks.
-The member numbers for each trunk group
must be in sequential order beginning with
member zero.
-No gaps or duplications are allowed in the
number order.
17
PEC
0 = PEC number
Enter PEC 0.
-This card must be defined on Record Code
FR and must be valid for that trunk type.
-Each location for a trunk must be unique.
18
Group
A-D = group
number
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within PEC 0 is
this card?
Card Slot
00-l 1 = slot
number
Which card slot within the group is this card?
Circuit Number
O-3 = assigned
circuit number
Which circuit on the card is being used?
-There must be at least one trunk circuit
defined for each trunk group.
-If the trunk group is defined on Record Code
Tl, columns 14-I 6, as DIC, only circuit
position 0 or 1 can be used.
-If the trunk group is .defined on Record Code
Tl, columns 14-16, as PAG, only circuit
position 2 can be used.
-Circuits on the PADIC (Public Address and
Dictation) card are assigned as required. This
is a wiring option only; no software is needed.
The circuits on the dictation/paging card are
assigned as follows: circuit 0 dictation, circuit
1 dictation, circuit 2 paging.
-CAUTION: Tl span cards are programmed
in universal card slots in the CPG and not in
Recent Change, but they are not physically
mounted in these slots.
-The Tl cards must be mounted in the PEC
files in dedicated card slots as indicated on
the file designation strip.
19-20
21
SVR 5210
8187
D-21 1
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.6
Entry Fields for Record Code TC (Continued)
COMMENTS
GS = ground start
-If this field is marked EM, then Record Code
-If this field is marked GS or LD, then Record
Code FR, columns 16-l 9, must be marked
-If this field is marked LD, then Record Code
FR, columns 16-19, must be defined as ILT.
-If this field is marked LP, the trunk must be
defined on Record Code FR as a PDIC or as
-If the trunk is defined on Record Code Tl,
columns 14-16, as DIC or PAG, this field
must be marked LP.
-If the trunk is defined on Record Code Tl ,
columns 14-16, as REC, this field must be
marked EM.
29-30
Incoming Signal
WS = wink start
DD = delay dialing
IZ?) fast access
mm =;/A
8187
This field determines the incoming start dial
method used for the incoming trunk
requirements in a trunk group.
-Fast access is used by dial trunk groups
from non-delay dial offices or systems.
-WS is normally used for E&M, CCSA, or DID
trunks that are sent from a stepper CO.
- (--) will normally apply to DOD, ground,
and loop start trunks.
-FA is sometimes used by DID trunks.
-If FA is marked, the trunk must be marked
IN in columns 21-22 on Record Code Tl.
-If the trunk is defined on Record Code Tl ,
columns 14-16, as DIC, PAG, or REC, this
field must be dashed.
-If this field is marked FA, thenRecord Code
Tl, columns 23-24, can only be dashed or
marked DP.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.6
COL.
NO.
31-32
COL.
NAME
Dutgoing
Signal
....
Entry Fields for Record Code TC (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
ID = immediate dial
:DOD)
JllS = wink start
DD = delay dialing
SO = seize out
.- = N/A
This field determines the outgoing start dial
signal method used for outgoing trunk
requirements.
-WS is used for Tie trunks that have
supervision.
-DD is used for Tie trunks that do not have
supervision.
-SO is used for E&M and CO line trunks.
-SO must be marked if the trunk is used as a
CO line.
- (--) is used for DID, ground, or loop start
trunks.
-If the trunk group is defined on Record Code
Tl, columns 14-l 6, as DIC, PAG, or REC,
this field must be dashed.
-If this field is marked ID or SO, then Record
Code Tl, column 25, must be marked Y to
return dial tone.
Assign the CO trunk group number assigned
to a system trunk group for AIOD.
NOTES: If an entry is made in this field, an
entry must be made in columns 35-36.
-If any entry is made in this field, then Record
Code Tl, columns 33-34, must be marked Al
and column 38 must be marked 1, 2, 3, or 4.
33-34
20 Trunk Group
Vumber
IO-99 = the CO
:runk group
lumber assigned
o a system trunk
Jroup for AIOD
a- = N/A
35-36
30 Trunk Group
Vlember
lumber
IO-99 = the CO
Enter the CO trunk member number assigned
to a system trunk circuit for AIOD here.
runk group
nember number
NOTES: If an entry is made in this field, an
Issigned to a
entry must be made in columns 33-34.
;yrs;lterunk group -If any entry is made in this field, then Record
Code Tl, columns 33-34, must be marked Al
I- = N/A
and column 38 must be marked 1, 2, 3, or 4.
SVR 5210
8187
D-21 3
-
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.6 Entry Fields for Record Code TC (Continued)
redetermined
ilot number (right
combination of Us
and dashes) =
UNA zone(s)
--mm = N/A
(used for DIC,
PAG, REC, CAS,
and CLR)
This field determines the night answer position
1 destination.
-The destination can be a predetermined
pilot number or a universal night answer
position. If a UNA is used, it can be any
combination of the four UNA zones.
-If an entry of 0000-9999 is made, the
displayable COS assigned to the trunk group
(of which this trunk is a member) must allow
station access. COS for trunk groups is
2 destination.
-The destination can be a predetermined
pilot number or a universal night answer
position. If a UNA is used, it can be any
combination of the four UNA zones.
-If an entry of 0000-9999 is made, the
displayable COS assigned to the trunk group
(of which this trunk is a member) must allow
station access. COS for trunk groups is
assigned on Record Code Tl , columns 1718. Station access is defined on Record
Code DD, columns 24-25.
Guaranteed
Access
G = used for RA
access or nailed
connections
- = not required
When this field is marked G, the trunk is given
a dedicated time slot or talk path.
-Guaranteed access is always used for
recorder announcer trunks or a nailed
connection.
-If this field is marked G, then Record Code
Tl , columns 14-16, must be marked DIC or
PAG.
46-47
Source Group
00-31= number
or
--= not
assigned
This field determines the source group
assigned to the trunk circuit. A source group
is used to identify the branch trunk that is
coming into the CAS Main or ACD group.
48-51
Central Office
Line Directory
0000-9999 or
000-999
right justify threedigit numbers
This field determines the CO line directory
number.
D-21 4
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code NA:
Nailed Trunk
Connection
10.7 Record Code NA, Figure 10.7, defines the permanent
connection data between trunk circuits. Information selected
includes to and from nailed connection data.
I
I
FROM
I
-:-;-T-T-t-T-t-T-t-t-T-T-t-T-t-t-T-s-t-T-s-s-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-{
~1111111111111111111
1212121212121212121213131313131313131313
14
I
' 1, 8 1 9 ~ 0.1 1 1 2 1.3 1 4 1 5.1 6 1 7 1I8 1 9
1011121314151617181910111213141516171819101
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I III
I I IIIIIIIIIIII
I
I
I
!
-~-~-*-1-~-*-~-*-~-~-~-*-*
-~-~-~-~-~-~-~--L-~-----
i-1
Figure 10.7 Record Code NA: Nailed Trunk Connection Data Sheet
SW 5210
8187
D-21 5
TL-130400-1001
Table 10.7 Entry Fields for Record Code NA
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
12-13
Nailed
Connection
Identification
number 21
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
00-47 = number
Assign the nailed connection trunk software
identification number.
00-63 = trunk
group number
This field determines the trunk group (00-63)
number of the from trunk.
Fcom:PEC_
0.~ PEC number
This field determines the PEC number (always
0) of the from trunk.
17-19
From:Trunk
Number
000-063 = trunk
group member
number
This field determines the trunk number (OOO063) of the from trunk.
-If one of the trunks in the nailed connection
is a NIC (Tl Network Interface) used by the
PD-200 Data Option, the other trunk must be
a DTRK (digital trunk).
-This trunk must have guaranteed access
marked on Record Code TC, column 45.
-The from trunk cannot have been used on a
previous NA record.
-The from trunk number must be listed on a
TC record.
-This trunk must be engineered in the trunk
group on a TC record.
20-21
To:Trunk Group
00-63 = trunk
group number
This field determines the trunk group (00-63)
number of the to trunk.
-The to trunk number must be listed on a TC
record. This trunk must be engineered in the
trunk group on a TC record.
-The to trunk cannot have been used on a
previous NA record.
23-25
To:PEC
0 = PEC number
This field determines the PEC number (always
0) of the to trunk.
22-24
To:Trunk
Number
000-063 = trunk
group member
number
This field determines the trunk number (OOO063) of the to trunk.
-If one of the trunks in the nailed connection
is an NIC (Tl Network Interface) used by the
PD-200 Data Option, the other trunk must be
a DTRK (digital trunk).
-This trunk must have guaranteed access
marked on Record Code TC, column 45.
1 4 - 1 5 .: From:Trunk
Group
16
D-21 6
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code DA:
Trunk Group
Digit Absorption
10.8 Record Code DA, Figure 10.8, provides for the absorption
of digits by the CO on a per trunk group basis. Digits are not
absorbed but are passed over to the end office and are only
monitored by the system. These digits are used by the system to
determine the start of an NPA or toll code, which is used to
perform code restriction. The NPA or toll code must be sent
from a non-common control end office. If the end office has no
digit absorption characteristics, this record code need not be
used. However, if digit absorption is required, the absorption
pattern must be obtained.
NOTE: This record code is only required when toll restriction is
_
used. Use the following guidelines when completing this record
code.
l
If a cut-in digit is used, it and all following digits are used
for routing information.
l
If an absorbed digit is used, it is ignored and all the following
digits are used in routing.
l
If absorbed repeatedly, it is repeatedly ignored.
The two types of switches used are the single MDA (Marking
Digit Absorption) and the dual MDA-l marking switch.
When a single marking switch is used, two duplicate entries are
always needed for a digit code. When a dual marking switch is
used, each digit must be analyzed for its absorbed markings.
Entries are based on first digit markings and second plus digits.
0 Single Marking Switch
- Two duplicate entries are always required for a dialed
digit.
- Under the appropriate digit value, enter the absorption
markings (C, A, or R) in both the first digit action and
second plus digits. Refer to first digit action digit value.
e Double Marking Switch
- Each digit must be analyzed for its absorbed markings.
- The analysis is based on the entries (C, A, or R) in the first
digit action and second plus digits. Refer to first digit
action digit value.
SW 5210
8187
D-217
r
TL-I
30400-l 001
t---------,---~------------------I
I
I
I
I
1
---‘-------‘---------I---------------------~-,
I
I
5
I
I
I
I
SECOND PLUS
DIG ACCESS
DIG ACCESS
DIG VALUE
Figure 10.8
Record Code DA: Trunk Group Digit Absorption Data Sheet
Table 10.8
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code DA
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12-13
Trunk Group
00-63 = trunk
group number
Enter the trunk group number (00-63) that
needs digit absorption.
-This number must be defined on Record
Code Tl .
-A trunk group number can only appear once
on this record code.
14-23
First Digit Action
Digit Value:1 -0
C = cut in
A = absorb and
unlock
R = absorb
repeatedly
This field determines the first digit action digit
value needing digit absorption.
-There must be at least one C marked in
either the first digit action digit value or second
plus digits action digit value fields.
-The first digit actions cannot all be R.
24-33
Second Plus
Digits Action
Digit Value:1 -0
C = cut in
A = absorb and
unlock
F? = absorb
repeatedly
This field determines the second plus digit
action digit value needing digit absorption.
-The second plus digit action digit value
applies to the first digit received following a
legitimate cut-in action.
-There must be at least one C marked in
either the first digit action digit value or second
plus digits action digit value fields.
-If there is an A anywhere in the first digit
action, there must be at least one in the
second plus digit.
D-21 6
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
MOST
ECONOMICAL
ROUTE
SELECTION
11.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the MERS features. The following record codes
are required:
l
....
l
Record Code RP defines the routing list.
l
Record Code SI defines the trunks allowed by a specific
NPA/ABC.
l
Record Code TR defines the ABC codes for an NPA that
requires six-digit analysis.
l
Record Code NR defines the ABC codes for an NPA that does
not requires six-digit analysis.
l
Record Code TP defines MERS time periods.
l
Record Code ST defines the service codes allowed through
MERS.
l
Record Code PC defines SCC (Specialized Common Carrier)
prefix code digits.
l
SVR 5210
Record Code MR defines the NPA(s) requiring six-digit
analysis.
Record Code TN defines the tone detector circuit.
l
Record Code MS defines the SCC (Specialized Common
Carrier) authorization codes.
l
Record Code LP defines the prefix digits for MERS LDN
(Listed Directory Number).
l
Record Code MO defines station codes requiring a second
sending instruction.
8/87
D-21 9
TL-130400-1001
Record Code MR:
MERS Six-Digit
Translated NPA
11.1 Record Code MR, Figure ll.lA, defines the NPA(s)
(Number Plan Area) that is given six-digit analysis through
MEW. This is done before calls going to the NPA(s) are routed
to outgoing trunks.
The HNPA (Home Number Plan Area) of the site must
also be included on this record code. This is because some of
the ABCs (or NNXs) within the HNPA will be local and will not
have a toll charge, while other ABCs within the HNPA will be
foreign and will have a toll charge. Six-digit analysis is used for
calls to FNPAs (Foreign Number Plan Areas) that have different
rates for calls within that NPA depending on their ABC.
After completing Record Code MR, complete Record Codes RP,
SI, and TR. Other record codes for six-digit analysis are
optional.
Diagrams following Table 11 .l provide information for MERS
record code completion.
iTI
16 I
I3 I
19 I
I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TIF- T
I
I
I
I
;-~-~-t-T-t-T-t-s-T-t-T-t-t-T-t-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-TT-T-T-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-i
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
[2;8-A.--L’ 0 ’ hl’ RI 0 ’ 1 l
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-*-ALLL-LLJ
x
*
.
.
*
s n *
I
’
n ’ 3 .
’
Figure 1 l.lA
D-220
III
II
’
- t
Record Code MR: Most Economical Route Selection Six-Digit
Translated NPA Data Sheet
%I87
SVR 5210
TL-130400-I 001
Table 11.1
Entry Fields for Record Code MR
COMMENTS
code. This number is used by the system for
identification purposes.
-The entry for 01 must be the HNPA.
Entries 02-19 are used by NPAs that need
six-digit analysis.
-It is recommended to list NPAs used in
ascending order from 2-9.
Route Selection
-Any NPA that requires six-digit analysis
through MERS and is not listed on this record
-The NPAs must be in order. Gaps are not
allowed in the NPA numbers.
-After listing the HNPA, start with the lowest
value FNPA and continue to the highest.
-This number must be unique across the
record code.
17-19
20
SVR 5210
Like Numbering
Plan Area Code
200-999 = like
NPA code
s-w = N/A
Conflicting Code Y = six-digit
conflict exists
N = no six-digit
conflict exists
8187
This field determines the like NPA codes
(200-999).
-A like NPA code is entered if the NPA code
given is translated using the ABC codes that
are defined on Record Code TR.
This field determines whether or not a
conflicting code exists within this NPA.
-A conflicting code condition exists if one or
more ABCs within the NPA looks like an NPA.
-To look like an NPA, an ABC will have a 0
(zero) or a 1 as the center digit (e.g., an ABC
of 202 or 212 is a conflicting code because
there are also NPAs of 202 and 212. NPA 202
is the NPA for Washington D.C., and 212 is an
NPA in New York.
NOTE: If an MR record has a conflicting
code, then Record Code OF must be marked
Y in column 27 for MERS 1 + dialing.
D-221
-
-
TL-130400-1001
This diagram represents an application which can never
be used to initiate the MERS On-Net and MERS Off-Net features.
Dialed 1st Diqit of
Station Number
..
(Code ?fpe 116)
Dialed Dl/D2 Digits
TD
NOTE: Translation Type must never
specify MRN or MRS.
Figure 11 .l B
D-222
at87
Non-MERS Application
SVR 5210
TL-130400-I 001
This diagram represents an application of MERS Off-Network using an access
code defined with the MERS Off-Network code type to initiate the feature.
Dialed Access Code
AC (Code Type 48)
1
Dialed Service Code or NPA or IDDD Code/Country Code
(or Undialed Home NPA)
I
,
Dialed
ABC Code
I
Sending Instruction
List Number
Routine List
Number
4
4
Dest.
Type =
COT
Li
SI
LDN
Prefix
Index
Prefix
lndex
Figure 11.1 C
SVR 5210
MEW
SCC ID
Dest.
Type =
DGT
Dest.
Type =
INT
Dest.
Type =
LOC
TIE
see
WTS
Off-Network MERS Record Code Association
D-223
TL-130400-1001
This diagram represents an application of MERS On-Net using an access code defined with
the MERS On-Net code type to initiate the feature.
Dialed Access Code
AC (Code Type 105)
Dialed On-Network ABC Code
or Authorization Prefix Digits
+
TR
/
..
4
OF
7
Authorization
Code
4
v
Routing List
Number
AU
7
(switches to MERS Off-Net
process - See code type 48)
11
I
I
RP
I
t
+
4
Digits
Deleted
Prefix
Index
LDN
Prefix
t
MERS
SCC ID
Dest.
Type =
+
+
+
4
Dest.
Type =
Dest.
Type =
Dest.
Type =
Other
Dest.
Types
1
1
p&&$-&&&&,,-
JOTES:
*
Translation type must never specify MRN or MRS.
The MERS SCC ID and the other destination types (COT, FXT, SCC, WTS) may be
specified for On-Net MERS but the DDD network will be used to complete On-Net
MERS calls.
Figure 11 .l D
On-Net MERS Record Code Association
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
This diagram represents an application of MERS On-Net and/or MERS Off-Net.
An access code defined with the IDDD variable numbering plan, the flexible numbering plan, or
the 7-l 0 digit called number can initiate the feature. The 1 st digit of either the flexible
numbering plan or the 7-10 digit called number can also initiate the feature.
Dialed 1st Diqit of
Network Numberinq Plan
Dialed Access Code
AC (code types 96, 126)
I
Dialed 1st 3 Digits of Network Dialing Plan or
IDDD Code/Country Code
/
+T r a n s .
T;pe=
M E R
+
Trans. Type = DGT
Dialed Dl/D2 Diqits
Sendinq Inst./Routing
Pattern Specified
On-Net/NPA Code
Specified
t
I
I -l-D I
I
I
I
Trans. Type = MRN
Trans. Type = MRS
I
I
Dialed on-net ABC code
Dialed Service Code Or NPA
IOr Undialed Home NPA)
I
I
TR
ST
MR
I
1
NR
Dialed ABC Code
I
TR
I
Continued on the Next Page
Figure ll.lE
SVR 5210
On/Off-Net MERS Record Code Association
8187
D-225
TL-130400-1001
Sending Inst.
List Number
Routinq
List Number
MERS
LDN
Prefix
Index
Dest.
Type =
DGT
Dest.
Type =
INT
Dest.
Type =
LOC
Dest.
Type =
TIE
Other
Dest.
types
NOTES:
c
Translation type must never specify MRN or MRS.
te
ltld
The MERS SCC ID and the other destination types (COT, FXT, SCC, WTS) may be
specified for On-Net MERS but the DDD network will be used to complete On-Net
MERS calls.
Record Code MO is only applicable to On-Net MERS.
Figure 11.1 E
On/Off-Net MERS Record Code Association (Continued)
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code RP:
MERS Routing List
;I;
.
-.).--$.-
,NI
IDI
IEI
IXI
I
N
g
I
;
T
I
I
:
x
I
I
‘:
11.2 Record Code RP, Figure 11.2, defines the routing list data,
including the trunks to be used by the MERS feature. Any trunks
not listed on this record code cannot be accessed by calls using
the MERS feature. In addition to listing all trunks to be used for
MERS, this record code also lists the trunk order in which calls
will go out. The routing list(s) is defined here and assigned to the
variqus NPAs/ABCs on Record Codes TR and NR.
OTT!
651
, 3 4 1
,081
1111
I
I
I
T
6
3
‘:
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
T -r-t-t-r-t-r-r-t-r-t-t-t-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r-~
1 I1 I1 I1 11 11 11 11 11 II 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l41
7!8!9,Oll
12131415161718191011
12,3i41516,718191011
121314151617181910,
-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
216lOlRI
P
I I I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
III
I
III,
-Ad-l--L- t -L,d,1,,,1
-*-~-*-*-*-~-~-~-i-*-~-*-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~------
Figure 11.2
SVR 5210
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
:
CI
I
1
Record Code RP: Most Economical Route Selection Routing List Data Sheet
8187
D-227
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.2
COL.
NO.
12
13-14
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code RP
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
MERS Routing
List Number
__
O-7 = number
This field defines the identification number
given to a route.
-For most applications, only one routing
pattern list number is required.
-If only one routing pattern is used, enter 0
down the row 12 times in column 12.
-The 12 entries coincide with the 12 possible
sending instructions found on Record Code SI,
columns 12-l 3.
- All 12 entries must be made whether used
or not used. If they are not used, they will be
sent to intercept.
-When off-network MERS is used, it is
normally recommended to use a separate
routing pattern list number.
-A separate routing pattern list number can
be used for local calls.
-This number is referred on the following
record codes:
TR, columns 23, 26, 29 and/or 32
NR, columns 20, 23, 26 and/or 29
ST, column 19
NT, column 30
Select Order
1-12 = number
This field identifies the trunks that can be used
and the order of these trunks for calls placed
using this route.
-Each routing list/select order combination
must be unique across this record code.
-The select order must be continuous with no
gaps for each routing list.
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.2
COL.
NO.
15-17
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code RP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COT = CO trunks
FXT = FX trunks
TIE = Tie trunks
Destination
Type
3-
....
_
WTS = WATS
trunks
INT = intercept
LOC = local
termination
DGT = Dl /D2 digit
SCC = specialized
common carrier
COMMENTS
This field determines how the trunk group is
treated (see columns 17-18).
-LOC (Local Termination) is used in a
network environment when the system is only
to look at the last four digits dialed. Since the
first three digits (leading network digits) are all
the same, the last four digits dialed determine
the network switch to which the call is routed.
-If an SCC is used, access to more than one
local trunk group can be allowed. By allowing
access to more than one local trunk group,
the probability of accessing the SCC is
greater.
-If COT, FXT, WTS, or SCC is entered in this
field, then Record Code T2, columns 32, 33
and 34, cannot be dashed. It is
recommended to set these fields at the lowest
possible value.
18-19
Destination
Identifier
00-63 = trunk
group number
00-l 5 = intercept
routing number
-- = N/A or local
termination or
Dl /D2 digit
translation
This field determines the trunk group number,
for the trunk type defined in columns 14-l 6.
-If columns 14-16 are marked LOC or DGT,
this field must be dashed.
-If columns 14-l 6 are marked INT, this field
must be marked 00-15.
-If columns 14-16 are marked COT, FXT,
SCC, TIE, or WTS, this field must be marked
00-63.
-Trunk group numbers must be defined on
Record Code Tl, columns 12-l 3.
-The destination identifier can also be an
intercept routing number. This must be
defined on Record Code IR, columns 12-13.
20
MERS SCC
Identification
Number
O-7 = number
- = not selected
If an SCC is included in this route, this field
determines which SCC is to be used.
-SCCs are identified on Record Code MS,
column 12.
SVR 5210
8187
D-229
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.2
Entry Fields for Record Code RP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
Expensive
Route
I= tone
U = not selected
s-
.
.
_
8187
COMMENTS
Mark this field Y if a burst tone is to be heard
when the call goes out over this route.
-A burst tone is normally used to notify a
caller that the call is going out over the most
expensive route.
-The most expensive route should be the last
trunk group of the route.
-With this feature, the caller has the option of
hanging up and trying later or continuing the
call over the most expensive route.
-A tone can be assigned to as many trunk
groups within a route as wanted.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code SI:
MEW Sending
Instruction
11.3 Record Code SI, Figure 11.3, defines the special handling
requirements for a trunk group and the trunk group’s assigned
destination number. Record Code RP defines the routes for
MERS usage. Record Code SI determines what facilities, within
a route, can be accessed by a specific NPAIABC. The sending
instructions are defined on this record code and assigned to the
various NPAs/ABCs on Record Codes TR and NR.
3-
r------iL-r-------r-----------------------~-----~---------------
I
_ I
I
I
II
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
!
5
I
T
I
d
:
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
;
!
‘;
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
IO I
1718191011
1213141516171819101112131415161718191011
1213141516171819l011
I21
C-4
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
l2171Olsl~l
I
I
I
l
I
l
l
1 l
1 l
I
I
1 l 1 I
1 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 1 I
I
1 I
I I
u-u
LLL --L-L-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-*-*-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-
Figure 11.3
SVR 5210
Record Code SI: Most Economical Route Selection
Sending Instruction Data Sheet
8187
D-231
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.3
Entry Fields for Record Code St
COMMENTS
00-31 = number
Ion purposes.
-This number is referred to on the following
Record Codes:
TR, columns 21-22, 24-25, 27-28, and
NR, columns 18-l 9, 21-22, 24-25, and
NT, columns 28-29
ST, columns 17-18
-The sending instruction/select order
combination must be unique across all
NOTE: Sending instruction list number 00 is a
valid CPG entry; however, 00 should never be
used on this record code.
number that is used for this s
instruction. The routing patte
for this sending instruction is chosen from the
list of routing patterns on Record Code RP,
column 12.
-This field must be continuous with no gaps
for each sending instruction list.
16-17
Skip/Route
Usage Allowed
AL = allowed
SK = skipped
This field determines whether or not this
sending instruction is allowed access to this
trunk group.
-The trunk groups are defined for each route
on Record Code RP, and must be listed in the
order in which they appear on that record
code.
18
Pause After
Trunk Seizure
T = required
-=N/A
Enter T if a pause is required after a trunk is
seized.
-See Record Code T2, column 32, for the
timing value required for this field.
-This field is normally used for older COs.
19
Pause After
Escape Digit
Sent
E = equipped
-=N/A
Enter E if a pause is required after an escape
digit (trunk group access code) is sent.
-See Record Code T2, columns 31 and 33,
for the timing value required for this field.
D-232
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.3
Entry Fields for Record Code SI (Continued)
COMMENTS
-See Record Code T2, column 34, for the
timing value required for this field.
three digits that make up the NPA are not
needed and can be removed from the
the toll barrier code per trunk group.
25
26-27
Prefix Home
Number Plan
Area (HNPA)
Code
H = prefixed
-=N/A
Enter H if the HNPA code is to be prefixed.
Prefix Index
01-15 = prefix
This field determines whether or not a prefix
index is used. Up to l-1 5 prefix index can
used. A prefix index is defined on Record
Code PC.
index
- = not selected
28-29
30
SVR 5210
Listed Directory
Number Prefix
01-l 5 = prefix
index
- = not selected
Example: This field determines the LDN
(Listed Directory Number) prefix index (for
other examples, see Record Code LP).
-This is defined on Record Code LP.
Facility
Restriction
Level
O-7 = FRL
- = not selected
If this field is used, it determines the FRL
value placed on this sending instruction.
NOTE: An application for this field is to block
calls, thereby forcing MERS call queuing.
8187
D-233
-
TL-130400-1001
Record Code TR:
MERS Numbering Plan
Area/ABC Translation
11.4 Record Code TR, Figure 11.4, lists all of the ABC codes for
an NPA that requires six-digit analysis. NPAs that require
six-digit analysis are defined on Record Code MR. Any NPA
listed on Record Code MR must be listed on this form, including
HNPAs.
The first entry on this form must be the HNPA. The ABCs local to
the HNPA must be listed first. Next list the HNPA’s toll ABCs.
After all the ABCs for the HNPA are listed, enter all other NPAs
appearing on Record Code MR. Begin with the lowest number
and work upward (e.g., 212, 401, 813). For all NPAs listed on this
record code, first list the local ABCs followed by the toll ABCs.
....
.
“NOTES:
e An ABC for an NPA can only be listed once, as either a local
ABC or a toll ABC.
D-234
l
ABC codes can be entered either singularly or by groups of
consecutive numbers (e.g., 220-275, 277 - ---, 280299). Numbers should be entered singularly when they must
stand alone (e.g., 220-275, 277 - ---, 280-299). In this
example, the numbers 276, 278, and 279 do not exist. Only
numbers that contain conflicting codes can jump hundreds
groups (e.g., 220-399).
l
Both MERS off-network DDD (Direct Distant Dialing) and
MERS on-network ABC codes can be listed. When MERS
off-network dialing is used, this record code lists the ABC
codes for NPAs that require six-digit analysis. When MERS
on-network dialing is used, this record code lists the RNX
(Remote Numbering Exchange) codes that are dialable threedigit network codes.
l
Any ABC for an NPA not listed on this record code cannot be
called over the MERS option. Include all ABCs for a given
NPA. If denial to a certain ABC is required, that must be done
by means of toll restriction.
l
Record Code TR allows for three time periods. Time periods
1, 2, and 3 are defined on Record Code TP. Any time not
within the ranges defined by time period l-2 or l-3 is
considered to be time period 0.
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
T---------r-----------------T-----T----T-----------------,-----------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
’
I
I
I
I
2
E
f:
I
I
I
i
$
’
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
ABC
CODE
RANGE
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
l218191Tt~l
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-*-L --L-~-L-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~---~--------
I
I
I
I
I..-4
Figure 11.4 Record Code TR: Most Economical Route Selection
Numbering Plan Area/ABC Translation Data Sheet
8187
D-235
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.4
Entry Fields for Record Code TR
COMMENTS
All NPAs requiring six-digit analysis must be
ON1 -ON4 = onnetwork code
-These NPAs must first be identified on
Record Code MR, which points to TR for the
routing patterns and sending instructions
needed for the different ABCs of this NPA.
-The HNPA must be the first entry.
-For MERS on-network dialing, enter the
on-network code (ONl-ON4) that is defined
on Record Code AC (code type number 105)
NT (columns 25-27), or TD (columns 21-
NOTE: This entry must be listed on Record
Code MR for six-digit analysis or Record
columns 18-20.
NOTE: If an ABC code on this record code is
the same as an NPA code or an RNX code for
on-network dialing, the conflicting code field
on Record Code MR, column 20, must be
marked Y.
18-20
ABC Code
Range (last
code)
200-999 =
number
--- = N/A or
single code
8187
This field determines the last ABC code in a
sequence of ABC codes.
-The last ABC code (columns 18-20) must
be greater than the first ABC code (columns
15-17).
-If only one number is represented, columns
18-20 must be dashed (e.g., 221 is the only
number not used; in a sequence that ranges
from 220-299, enter 212 ---, 214-299).
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.4
COL.
NO.
21-22
..
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code TR (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
01-31 = list
Time Period 0
Sending
Instruction List
number
-- = N/A
Nurriber
.
23
Time Period 0
Route List
Time Period 1
Sending
Instruction, List
Assign the route list number for time period 0.
-This field defines the time period not
covered by time periods l-3. If no time
changes are required for any entries on
Record Code TR or NR, this is the only field
that requires an entry.
-When time changes are needed, begin the
first time period with time period 1 and put a
default value in columns 21-23. If the time
periods defined on TP cover the entire day,
the default value will not affect the routing
because the default will never be used.
-If an entry is made in columns 21-22, then
an entry must be made in this field.
-The route list number used here must be
defined on Record Code RP, column 12.
01-31 = list
Assign the sending instruction used for time
period 1.
-The sending instruction list number used
here must be defined on Record Code SI,
columns 12-l 3.
-If this field is used, then Record Code TP
must be filled out.
number
-- = N/A
Number
26
SVR 5210
Time Period 1
Route List
Number
Assign the sending instruction used for time
period 0. The sending instruction list number
used here must be defined on Record Code
SI, columns 12-l 3.
-Use only this field if no time changes are
required for entries on Record Code TR or
NR.
NOTE: When time changes are required,
begin the first time period with time period 1.
Enter routing information for the remainder of
the day in time period 0. If all time periods are
defined, time period 0 serves as a default
value.
O-7 = list number
-=N/A
Number
24-25
COMMENTS
O-7 = list number
-=N/A
8187
Assign the route list number used for time
period 1.
-If an entry is made in columns 24-25, then
an entry must be made in this field.
-The route list number used here must be
defined on Record Code RP, column 12.
-If this field is used, then Record Code TP
must be filled out.
D-237
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.4
COL.
NO.
27-28
COL.
NAME
Time Period 2
Sending
- lnstructi0.n
List
.-. Number
Entry Fields for Record’Code TR (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
01-31 = list
number
-- = N/A
Assign the sending instruction for time period
2.
-The sending instruction list number used
here must be defined on Record Code SI,
columns 12-l 3.
-If this field is used, then Record Code TP
must be filled out.
29
Time Period 2
Route List
Number
O-7 = list number
-=N/A
Assign the route list number used for time
period 2.
-If an entry is made in columns 27-28, then
an entry must be made in this field.
-The route list number used here must be
defined on Record Code RP, column 12.
-If this field is used, then Record Code TP
must be filled out.
30-31
Time Period 3
Sending
Instruction List
Number
01-31 = list
Assign the sending instruction for time period
3.
-The sending instruction list number used
here must be defined on record code SI,
columns 12-l 3.
-If this field is used, then Record Code TP
must be filled out.
Time Period 3
Route List
Number
O-7 = list number
-=N/A
32
D-238
number
-- = N/A
8187
Assign the route list number for time period 3.
-If an entry is made in columns 30-31, then
an entry must be made in this field.
-The route list number used here must be
defined on record code RP, column 12.
-If this field is used, then Record Code TP
must be filled out.
SVR 52’0
TL-130400-1001
Record Code NR
MERSThree-Digit
Translated NPA
11.5 Record Code NR, Figure 11 S, lists all of the ABC codes for
NPAs that do not require six-digit analysis. This sheet defines
the off-network routing for each time period used. The HNPA
and NPAs requiring six-digit analysis are listed on Record Code
TR and must not be listed on this record code. Time periods 0,
1, 2, and 3 are defined on Record Code TP.
r-----‘---r-----------r-----I-------------------------~-----------------------~
.-..
-
I
I
--
‘I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
x’
!
I
1
1
1
’
NPA
CODE
RANGE
IT’
R’
IAl
IN,
’
17181910111213141516171819101112l3141516171819101112131415161718191
c-+-+-c-c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
l2161411;11,?I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L - a - -- L---L-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~---~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
IS,
l
IO I
k-4
Figure 11.5 Record Code NR: Most Economical Route Selection
Three-Digit Translated NPA Data Sheet
SVR 5210
8187
D-239
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.5
Entry Fields for Record Code NR
COMMENTS
cannot be called. NPAs needing six-digit
analysis are not to appear on this record
-This field determines either the NPA code or
the first NPA code in a sequence of NPA
-Any NPA listed in in columns 12-l 7 must
200-999 = N PA
This field determines the last NPA code in a
sequence of NPA codes.
-The number entered in this field must be
he sending instruction list number must be
defined on Record Code SI, columns 12-l 3.
21-22
23
D-240
Time Period 0
Routing List
Number
O-7 = routing list
number
Time Period 1
Sending
Instruction List
Number
01-31 = = sending
Assign the routing list number for time period
0.
-The routing pattern list number must be
defined on Record Code RP, column 12.
Assign the sending instruction for time period
instruction number 1.
-The sending instruction list number must be
defined on Record Code SI, columns 12-13.
-Time periods are defined on Record Code
TP.
Time Period 1
O-7 = routing list
Routing List number
Number
8B7
Assign the routing list number for time period
1.
-The routing pattern list number must be
defined on Record Code RP, column 12.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.5
COL.
NO.
24-25
...
26
I27-28
29
SVR 5210
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code NR (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Time Period 2
Sending
Instwction List
Number
01-31 = sending
instruction number
Assign the sending instruction for time period
2.
-The sending instruction list number must be
defined on Record Code SI, columns 12-13.
Time Period 2
Routing List
Number
‘.
O-7 = routing list
number
Assign the routing list number for time period
2.
-The routing pattern list number must be
defined on Record Code RP, column 12.
Time Period 3
Sending
Instruction List
Number
Ol-31= sending
Assign the sending instruction for time period
3.
-The sending instruction list number must be
defined on Record Code SI, columns 12-l 3.
Time Period 3
Routing List
Number
O-7 = routing list
number
instruction number
8187
Assign the routing list number for time period
3.
-The routing pattern list number must be
defined on Record Code RP, column 12.
D-241
TL-130400-1001
Record Code TP
MERS Time Period
11.6 Record Code TP, Figure 11.6, defines the time of day when
each MEW time period is in effect. Time periods entered on
this record code must not overlap one another (e.g., 12:00-4:00,
5:01-l 1 :OO).
r--------- r--r---------------T -----------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I 1I
I
I
I
IN’
I
I
I
ID’
I
I
4
I
I E TI
I
1
I x I'"
I
...
t
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IN;
IO1
I I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I I
I I
I
I
I
i
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,-T-T-i-T -:-:-,-;-,-;-,-+-,-;-,-,-,
-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T--r--r-T-i
111111111111111111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
I I I
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-~
1215101TIP,,,
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L - L & A - L-~-L-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*
-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*--~-~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 11.6
I
12
D-242
COL.
NAME
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
r-4
18 I
IO I
k-4
I I
Record Code TP: Most Economical Route Selection
Time Period Data Sheet
Table 11.6
COL.
NO.
I
Entry Fields for Record Code TP
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Time Period
Number
l-3 = number
This field represents one of the four possible
time periods allowed for the MERS feature.
-This field is used by the system for
identification purposes.
-Each time period number must be unique.
Begin Time
Hours
00-23 = hour
Enter the hour that the time period is activated.
Begin Time
Minutes
00-59 = minute
Enter the minute that the time period is
activated.
End Time Hours 100-23 = hour
Enter the hour that the time period ends.
End Time
Minutes
Enter the minute that the time period ends.
00-59 = minute
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
11.7 Record Code ST, Figure 11.7, defines the service code
translation data for MERS routing, correlating the sending
instruction and routing list numbers to the service codes listed.
Record Code ST:
Service Code
MERS Translation
r---------r---r -----------T-------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; ti ;
i
:
I
I
I
I
I E I
I
I
7
I
sI
I
I
1
Y
.”
I x I
I
I
I
I
I ,
Jr I
;j
I .(
I
g
I
0 i
2 ’
’
I
I
,.--,-+----&--,-$
3
I
---,- 4
E
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
T-T-T- t - T - T - T - t - t - T - t - T - + - T - T - T
-t-r-t-t-T-t-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T--r-T-T-T--r-i
11111111111111111111121212121212121212l213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
;7i8fSIOll 121314151617181910111213141516171819101112l31415161718191011121
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+--i
12l8l5I~ITlOllI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L - L - L --L-~-L-*--L-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-*-~-~-*-*--L-~._-C-~--L
-A-A.-A-A--L--L
Figure 11.7
SVR 5210
I
I
---_
Record Code ST: Service Code MERS Translation Data Sheet
Em7
D-243
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.7
Entry Fields for Record Code ST
COMMENTS
04-20 = number
This field determines the number given to the
translation entry.
-This number is used by the system for
identification purposes.
-This number must be consecutive with no
-Each translation entry number must be
11 N = suffixed service calls allowed
Nil = prefixed service calls allowed
555 = long distance, directory, directory
assisted calls allowed
000 = local, operator assisted calls allowed
00- = toll operator, operator assistance
allowed when using equal access (MERS -0
and + 0 dialing allowed)
17-18
19
20-21
22
23-24
25
26-27
28
D-244
Sending
Instruction List
Number (0)
00-31 = number
Assign the sending instruction list number for
time period 0 here. This must be defined on
Record Code SI, columns 17-18.
Route List
Number (0)
O-7 = number
Assign the list number for time period 0 here
and define it on Record Code RP, columns 19.
Sending
Instruction List
Number (1)
00-31 = number
Assign the sending instruction list number for
time period 1 here. This must be defined on
Record Code SI, columns 17-18.
Route List
Number (1)
O-7 = number
Assign the list number for time period 1 here
and define it on Record Code RP, columns 19.
Sending
Instruction List
Number (2)
00-34 = number
Assign the sending instruction list number for
time period 2 here. This must be defined on
Record Code SI, columns 17-l 8.
Route List
Number (2)
O-7 = number
Assign the list number for time period 2 here
and define it on Record Code RP, columns 19.
Sending
Instruction List
Number (3)
00-31= number
Assign the sending instruction list number for
time period 3 here. This must be defined on
Record Code SI, columns 17-l 8.
Route List
Number (3)
O-7 = number
Assign the list number for time period 3 here
and define it on Record Code RP, columns 19.
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code PC:
Prefix Code Digits
11.8 Record Code PC, Figure 11.8, defines the MERS prefix
digits referenced by the prefix index defined on Record Codes
MO and SI. If Record Code RP (associated with MO and SI,
which reference the prefix index) specifies SCC identification,
Record Code PC must provide the restriction indicator value and
digits ,required to access the SCC.
l----------r---------------------------^-----------------------------------------~
--,
I
I
,-I
T
I
I
I
I
,
I ..^
I
I-
;FSN:R
,gpE
c
;O
IM
IR
I
ID
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
C;
0
d
El
I
PREFIX DIGITS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
N
I
D
:-r-r,T-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T’
CIIII,,,,,,,,,
I
I
I
I
I
;AI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 12
;
,Rllll,,,l,,,lll,,,,,,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
!
III
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
,
T I
I
12
;I
I
I
T - T - - r - - r - - r - T-T-T-TI
I
I
I
I
I I I I 1
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
,
12 12 12 12 12 12 I2 1 2 13
;2;3141516
17 18 ‘9 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I I
;-;-;-;-;-;11111111111111111111121212121212121212,2131313131313
I3 I3 13 13 I4 1 4
;7;8;910,1
12131415161718191011
12131415161718191011
1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 16 17 18 I9 10 11
C-+-+-u.-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-++ - + - + - + - + - + 1216151PlC1011I
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
I
,
I I I
,
I
I
I
I
I
L - L - A --LL-L--c-~-*-~-~-~-~-~~~~~~~-~-~-~-*-*-*-~-~-~-~-~-~A--L-4.-A--c-A-
Figure 11.8
SVR 5210
;--;-;-;-I
14 14,414
I
12131415,
+-+-+-+--I
I
I
I
I
I
Record Code PC: Prefix Code Digits Data Sheet
8187
D-245
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.8
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
12-13
Prefix Index
Entry Fields for Record Code PC
VALID
ENTRIES
01-l 5 = number
Indicate the prefix index.
-This number is used by the system for
identification purposes.
NO
TL
TG
BT
or
mm = indicator
Assign the restriction indicator.
-This field is applied only to an SCC dialing
pattern.
NO = perform all checks
TL = bypass toll restrictions
TG = bypass trunk group access restrictions
BT = bypass toll and trunk group access
restrictions
-- = not applicable
o-9, *, #
A
D
E
or
- = digits
Assign the prefix digits not tied to a trunk
group.
-Column 16 cannot be dashed.
O-9, *, #= telephone digits
A = obtain authorization code (SCC only)
D = pause. The next two digits specify a
pause in increments of 0.5 seconds (SCC
only)
E = switch to DTMF and recognize tone from
SCC if next digit is 1, or switch to DTMF if next
digit is 0 (SCC only)
-= unused
-If the application is not an SCC:
D = a short pause
E = a long pause
T.
.”
14-15
16-45
‘..‘Restriction
Indicator
Prefix Digits
(Dl -D30)
COMMENTS
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code TN:
Tone Detector
11.9 Record Code TN, Figure 11.9, defines the tone detector
circuit. The tone detector is used to detect and recognize tones
issued by an SCC (Specialized Common Carrier) when used as
a MERS route.
T---------T---~-------------T-----------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I;r;l
1
IAl
1
IN,
I
:c;
’
’
IS,
IO,
’
ID,
’
’
’
f
I
1
’
I
I
IEI
I
I
1 I
I
I
,
,
,
,
I
,
I
I
I ,
I
,
I I
I
’
I
I
I
I
f
F-4
I8 I
1718191011
12131415161718191011
12131415161718191011
12131415161718191011
121
10 I
c
+
+
u
+
+
+
t
t
t
t
+
+
+
+
+
C-4
il
I8
15 ITI NIOIOI
I I I I
I I
I I I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I I I I I I
I I I I I
I I
1
L - L - L -LL- L--L-L--L-A -~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~---~u-u
1
Figure 11.9
Record Code TN: Tone Detector Data Sheet
Table 11.9
COL.
NAME
COL.
NO.
12-13
I
Entry Fields for Record Code TN
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Index/Tone
Detector
Number
00-31 = number
This field determines the number assigned to
the tone detector. This number is used by the
system for identification purposes.
14
PEC
0 = PEC number
Enter PEC 0.
15
Group
A-D = group
number
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within PEC 0 is
the card?
Card Slot
00-l 1 = slot
number
Which card slot within the group is the card?
Circuit
O-3 = assigned
circuit number
Which circuit on the card is being used?
16-17
18
19-20
SVR 5210
Equipped Status IS = in service
OS = out of service
8187
Is the card in service or out of service?
D-247
TL-130400-1001
Record Code MS:
Specialized
Common Carrier
Authorization Codes
11.10 Record Code MS, Figure 11 .lO, defines the SCC
(Specialized Common Carrier) authorization codes required to
access the SCCs through MERS. Different SCC authorization
codes can be given for each MERS SCC identification or for
each MERS SCC identification and MDR (Message Detailed
Recorder) work group combination.
T---------T-----r------------------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
=-
T
f
....
I
I
:
‘“1
I
I
1
E
:
T---------------------------------------~
i
1
A
1
i
b
_
see
AUTH~~~~TION
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IIll
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I1 12131415161718191A1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;-,-,-;T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-:
I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
I
I
I
1718191011121314151617181910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011121
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
l215151~IsI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-L-* --L-~-_c-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~.-~-~--L-*
-~-~-~-i-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~~--
Figure 11.lO
I
I
I
I
I
,
1 ,
I
I
I
I
l-1
I
I
I
I
I
1
I E I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
$
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r-:
I8 I
2:
I
Record Code MS: Specialized Common Carrier
Authorization Codes Data Sheet
Table 11 .lO
Entry Fields for Record Code MS
COMMENTS
iven to the SCC.
ecorder Work
-- = not selected
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code LP:
Prefix Code Digits
for Listed Directory
Numbers and
Other Applications
11.11 Record Code LP, Figure 11 .12, specifies up to ten prefix
digits for MERS LDN (Listed Directory Number) processing and
for other prefixing applications.
‘---------r---r-------------------T-----------------------------I
I
s-
I
.-It
7
I
,
I
I
I
I
‘I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
IT;
IRI
IAl
I
I
I
I
1
INI
ISI
I
I
I
I
I
I
'
'
'
c-+-~-c-c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
12161~ILIPl
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L - i - L --L-*-L-L-L-~-*-*-~-I-1_1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1
-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~‘-~-~-~
Figure 11.11
I
I
I
b-4
I
Record Code LP: Prefix Code Digits for Listed Directory Numbers and
Other Applications Data Sheet
Table 11 .l 1
COL.
NO.
I
ICI
101
IDI
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code LP
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12-13
Prefix Index
01-l 5 = number
This field determines the prefix index number.
-This number is used by the system for
identification purposes.
14-23
Prefix Digits
(Dl -DlO)
o-9,“,# =
telephone digits
D = short pause
E = long pause
- = unused (digits
2-9 only)
This field determines the selected prefix digits.
-Column 14 cannot contain a dash.
-If this field has an entry of D, the short
pause must be defined on Record Code OV,
columns 18-20.
-If this field has an entry of E, the long pause
must be defined on Record Code OV,
columns 21-23.
SVR 5210
8187
D-249
TL-130400-1001
Record Code MO:
MERS On-Net
Station Numbers and
Sending Instruction
Values
w....
T---------T-T-
11.12 Record Code MO, Figure 11.12, lists a set of four-digit
station codes that require a second (replacement) sending
instruction application. The station codes are only impacted
if the MERS on-net process selects a sending instruction that
deletes one or more digits. If the last four dialed digits match
a station code defined on Record Code MO, the associated
sending information will be applied. This allows a MERS on-net
trunk group to be used to outpulse a different number of digits
based on the station code dialed.
--------------------------------------------------------------~
T
2
?
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
’
.-s-s-+-s-+-l-s-s-s-+-+-+-+ -s-+-+-+-+-5-+-+-+-+-+-s-T-s-s-s-s-s-s-s-7-~-4
i
i
i
ii iii1
171619101112
lililil
3141516
1;1i1;2i2;2;2;2;
7181910111213141
i
;
v--l
2;2;2i2;3;3i3i3i3;3i3;3;3;3;4;4;4;
6171819101112131415161718191011121
i8i
IO I
c--l
I2tgl81~l~lO1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-L-A -J---L-L-~-*-I-*-~-L-*-~--L-*-L-~-l -~-*-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~---~-~~--
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+--l
Figure 11.12
Record Code MO: MERS On-Net Station Numbers and Sending
instruction Values Data Sheet
Table 11 .12
Entry Fields for Record Code MO
VALID
ENTRIES
12
13-16
COMMENTS
Index
O-9 = number
This field determines the index number for the
station code.
-This number is used for identification
purposes by the system.
Station Code
0000-9999 =
Enter the station code.
-This must be a four-digit number.
number
17
Pause After
Trunk Seizure
T = trunk seizure
pause
- = no pause
Enter a T here if a pause is placed after trunk
seizure.
18
Pause After
Escape Digit
Sent
E = escape digit
pause
- = no pause
Enter an E here if a pause is entered after the
escape digit is sent.
D-250
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 11.12
Entry Fields for Record Code MO (Continued)
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
19
Pause After Toll
Barrier Code
Serg
B = toll barrier
Delete/Number
of Digits to
Delete
00-l 5 = number
2061
2 2
Prefix
Escape Digit
VALID
ENTRIES
code pause
- = not selected
COMMENTS
Enter a B if a pause is entered after the toll
barrier code is sent.
Indicate the number of digits to delete.
-- = N/A
‘-
E = escape digit
prefix
- = no prefix
Enter an E if prefixing is required on the
escape digit.
23
Prefix Toll
Barrier Code
B = toll barrier
code prefix
- = no prefix
Enter a B if prefixing is required on the toll
barrier code.
24
Prefix Home
Numbering Plan
Area Code
H = HNPA code
prefix
- = no prefix
Enter an H if prefixing is required on the HNPA
(Home Numbering Plan Area).
Prefix Index
01-15 = number
25-26
I
-- = no prefix
If a prefix index is used, assign the index
number here.
27
Sending
Instruction
Pause Usage
Y = selected
- = not selected
The sending instruction usage defines which
of the fields specified on this record code will
be used instead of the original sending
instruction pause value.
-Sending instructions are defined in columns
27-30 of this record code.
-The original sending instruction values are
defined on Record Code SI.
-This field determines whether or not a pause
is applied.
28
Sending
Instruction’
Delete Usage
Y = selected
- = not selected
Enter a Y if a delete instruction is applied.
29
Sending
Instruction
Prefix Usage
Y = selected
- = not selected
Enter a Y if a prefix instruction is applied.
30
Sending
Instruction
Prefix Index
Usage
Y = selected
- = not selected
Enter a Y if a prefix index instruction is
applied.
SVR 5210
8187
D-251
TL-130400- 1001
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
SVR 5210
- .--
TL-130400-1001
NETWORKING
12.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the various networking features. The following record
codes are required:
l
Record Code NT defines the routing for private tandem
switching networks.
l
Record Code TD defines the translation of the digits for a
tandem network.
. .
SVR 5210
8187
D-253
TL-130400-1001
Record Code NT:
Private Network
Translation
12.1 Record Code NT, Figure 12.1, defines the first level call
routing for private tandem switching networks. Use one record
for each RNX (or RNX range) with the same routing
characteristics in the RNX numbering plan.
‘---------r-----------T ---------------____ ~-----~--------------------------r------r----- - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 1----------
Figure 12.1
Record Code NT: Private Network Translation Data Sheet
Table 12.1 Entry Fields for Record Code NT
COMMENTS
Note: A conflict exists with the three-digit
translated NPA’s warning message. The
private network digit analysis is combined with
the three-digit translation (Record Code NR)
on the same data base table. A problem may
occur if the private network digits contain
MRS = off-network MERS processing o n 7
MRN
or MER = type
D-254
8187
TGS = trunk group selection and outpulsing of
received digits (see columns 21-24)
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 12.1
Entry Fields for Record Code NT (Continued)
COMMENTS
N digits (see columns 21-22)
ABC = analysis of the ABC code before routing
DGT = analysis of Dl /D2 (digit 1, digit 2) of the
last four terminal digits before sending
MRN = private network MERS processing on 7
international dialing.
given in columns 18-20 is either TGO or
TGS. Indicate the trunk group used for
outpulsing the digits.
Digits Outpulsed -- = N/A
This field is only used if the translation type
given in columns 18-20 is TGS.
-Enter the number of digits outpulsed.
25-27
Private
NetworklNPA
Code
200-999,
ONl-ON4
or
---
This field determines the private network code
(ONl-ON4) or the NPA code number (200999).
200-999 = NPA code as defined on Record
Codes MR and TR
QNl-ON4= private network code as defined
on Record Codes AC and TR
-Record Code TR defines the phantom
number used for on-network dialing.
-This field must be used if columns 18-20
are marked MRN. For all other entries in
columns 18-20, this field is dashed.
28-29,
31-32,
34-35,
37-38.
Sending
Instruction List
Number
Ol-31= number
-- = N/A
These fields can be used only if the translation
type given in columns 18-20 is MER. Assign
the sending instruction list number to be used
for the various time periods. The sending
instruction list numbers are defined on Record
Code SI, columns 12-13.
Route List
Number
O-7 = number
-=N/A
These fields can be used only if the translation
type given in columns 18-20 is MER. Assign
the routing list number to be used for the
various time periods. The routing list numbers
are defined on Record Code RP, column 12.
30,
33,
38,
39.
SVR 5210
8187
D-255
TL-130400-1001
Record Code TD:
Private Network
Dl/D2
12.2 Record Code TD, Figure 12.2, defines, in a seven- or
ten-digit, format, the translation of the digits for a tandem
network. These digits are the Dl/D2 digits of the four terminal
digits (Dl, D2, D3, D4).
NOTE: There is a conflict with the three-digit translated NPA
warning message. The private network digit analysis was
combined with the three-digit translation (Record Code NR) in
the same data base table. A possible problem exists if the
private network digits contain conflicting codes.
__
-..
(-
-----
-----
r----r----------
I
I
1
I
---------T-----------------------------------------~
.-
T
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t -T-t-T-T-t-T-t-T-t-T-T-tT-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-f-T-T-T-i
I 1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
17 18 I9 10 I1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1
c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!2;8;8
ITI 0
- - - -.L-*-A-.L- ~-*-*-*-*-~-*-~-*-i-*-~-*-*-~-~-~-~-~
- A - . & - - L - A . - A - -
Figure 12.2
D-256
Record Code TD: Private Network Dl/D2 Data Sheet
8187
SW 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 12.2
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
12-13
First Two Digits
of Terminal
Digits.”
.-.
Entry Fields for Record Code TD
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
00-99 = number
This field determines the first two digits
(Dl/D2) of the four terminal digits that require
local termination or outpulsing.
-The first two digits of the terminal digits must
be unique across all TD records.
-These digits must correspond to a hundreds
group engineered on Record Code HD.
-If the first two digits are OX, then both OX
and X hundreds groups must not be specified
on Record Code HD.
-If a number is listed here, the system will
process both hundreds groups with the first
two digits of OX for this application.
,.
14-16
Translation
Type
LOC
MRS
TGS
TGO
or
MRN
Indicate the type of translation assigned to the
route.
LOC = local termination based on the last four
digits
MRS = off-network MERS processing on 7
and 10 digits
TGS = trunk group selection and outpulsing of
all received digits (see columns 17-18)
TGO = trunk group selection and outpulsing of
last N digits (see columns 17-20)
MRN = on-network MERS processing on 7
and 10 digits (see columns 21-23)
17-18
Select Trunk
Group
00-63 = number
-- = N/A
This field is only used if the translation type
defined in columns 14-l 6 is TGO or TGS.
-Assign the trunk group used for outpulsing
the digits.
-The selected trunk group must be defined
on Record Code Tl.
-The trunk application on Record Code Tl
for this trunk group cannot have values of DIC,
PAG, or REC.
19-20
Number of
00-l 5 = number
Digits Outplused -- = N/A
SVR 5210
8187
This field is only used if the translation type
defined in columns 14-16 is TGO.
-The field determines the number of digits
outpulsed.
-If a five-digit numbering plan is in effect,
the number of outpulsed digits must be
indicated here.
D-257
I
TL-130400-1001
Table 12.2
Entry Fields for Record Code TD (Continued)
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
I
21-23
On-Net/NPA
Code
..
s-.”
200-999
ON1 -ON4= code
Or
m-s = N/A
.
D-258
8187
This field is only used if the translation type
defined in columns 14-16 is MRN.
-This field determines the on-network code
(ONl-ON4) or the NPA code number (200999).
Note: Only four unique NPAs are allowed
between the MR, NT, and TD record codes.
200-999 = NPA code as defined on Record
Codes MR and TR
ONl-ON4= on-net code as defined on
Record Codes AC and TR
SVR 5210
-
-
TL-130400-1001
MESSAGE
DETAIL RECORDER
13.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the system MDR (Message Detail Recorder) feature. The
following record codes are required:
l
Record Code MD defines the requirements for the MDR
devices,
l
Record Code MT defines the TTY requirements.
l
Record Code Sl defines the screening options.
l
Record Code S2 defines additional screening options.
__
.-.
SVR 5210
8187
D-259
TL-130400-1001
Record Code MD:
Message Detail
Recorder
13.1 Record Code MD, Figure 13.1, defines the requirements for
the MDR devices.
‘---------T-----T-------------------------~-----~
-----7---,-----
__--------___
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
4
4
1
I
I
I
I
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
h
E
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
l3lOlOI,,,,,i,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,,
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-*-L --U--L-~-I-~--C--C-~-I-~-~-~--L-~-I--L-I-*-*-~-I-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~--l--U
Figure 13.1
I
I
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Record Code MD: Message Detail Recorder Data Sheet
Table 13.1 Entry Fields for Record Code MD
COMMENTS
a trunk does not have answer supervision,
s timing value is used to estimate how much
me it takes for a two-way connection to be
If answer supervision is provided (for all
If the device used for the MDR function is a
remote polling device (CRT), enter Y in this
D-260
8167
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 13.1
Entry Fields for Record Code MD (Continued)
COMMENTS
for each colu
for each colu
stem and its physical location within the
ed by the telephone company.
represents the billing number of
-255 = number
Indicate the minimum number of seconds that
a call must be connected before a call record
is produced at the MDR terminal.
-Calls that last less than this amount of time
are not recorded.
-If this timing parameter is met, a record of
the call is made whether or not the call was
actually answered.
-The value of this field is added to the value
given in columns 12-14 when listing the
length of the call.
Minimum Call
Duration for a
Remote Polling
Device
001-255 = number
--- = N/A
Indicate the minimum number of seconds that
a call must be connected before a call record
is produced at the remote polling device.
-Calls that last less than this amount of time
are not recorded.
-If this timing parameter is met, a record of
the call is made whether or not the call was
actually answered. The value of this field is
added to the value given in columns 12-14
when listing the length of the call.
34
Output Format
Y = EBCDIC format
- = TTY format
This field determines the format of the MDR
output.
-For normal applications, the entry is TTY.
35
Output the
Second Line of
the Call Record
to MDR Port 0
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if a second line output of the call
record to MDR port 0 is allowed.
-Do not specify this if the MDR data is
transmitted to a remote processor (COMDEV
or other) that requires single line output
format.
Duration for a
31-33
SVR 5210
8187
D-261
TL-130400-1001
Record Code MT:
Message Detail
Recorder Port
r---------r-r-----
13.2 Record Code MT, Figure 13.2, defines the requirements for
the MDR (Message Detail Recorder) TTY unit interfacing
the system.
------------------------~---------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I;
Figure 13.2
Record Code MT: Message Detail Recorder Port Data Sheet
Table 13.2
COL.
NO.
12
Transmission
Rate
Entry Fields for Record Code MT
VALID
ENTRIES
COL.
NAME
Port Number
I
I
I
I
I
I
0= MDR call
records (ASCII)
1 = MDR call
record blocks
(GTE-modified
EBCDIC)
-=N/A
m-v
=
N/A
COMMENTS
This field determines the MDR format output.
This field can only be dashed.
This field can only be dashed.
IS = in service
OS = out of service
This field can only be dashed.
1 22-24 1 Input Timeout
Security Lock
Timeout
D-262
Is the card in service or out of service?
m-w
=
N/A
8187
This field can only be dashed.
SVR 5210
-
-
TL-1 E
Record Code Sl:
Message Detail Recorder
Screening Option 1
13.3 Record Code Sl , Figure 13.3, defines the scree
available with the system. A screening option is defit
as the ability to select the type of calls that are to be
cc
N(
16-1
l
~11111111111111111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4
171819)01112131415161718191011l2l3l4l5l6l7l8l9l0l1121314151617181910
Figure 13.3
Record Code Sl: Message Detail Recorder Screening Option
Sheet
Table 13.3
VALID
ENTRIES
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
12-15
Message Detail
Recorder
Device
TERM = terminal
Message Detail
Recorder Work
Group Number
00-63 = number
Indicate the MDR work group nun
numbers assigned to this device.
-MDR work groups are assigned tc
lines on Record Code LD, column!
-There must be at least one MDR \
assigned on Record Code LD.
NOTE: The MDR work group num
unique across the Sl record code
Screening
Y = required
-= not required
Enter Y if a screening indicator is I
-The combination of screening tab1
MDR work group number must be
across this record code.
16=17
18
Indicator
SVR 5
Entry Fields for Record Code Sl
SVR 5210
required
CART = remote
polling device
required
8187
COMMENTS
This field determines whether or nc
device listed here must be a devic
engineered on Record Code MD.
TL-130400-l
TL-130400-1001
Recc
Message Del
Screen
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
r-------l
I
I
I
I
Figure I 3.r
D-264
D-266
8f87
-
TL-130400-1001
TERMINAL
FEATURES
SVR 5210
14.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the various system miscellaneous terminal features.
The follotiing record codes are required:
l
Record Code CT defines the terminal parameters.
l
Record Code TT defines the TTY requirements.
8187
D-267
TL-130400-1001
Record Code CT:
Customer Defined
Terminal
14.1 Record Code CT, Figure 14.1, allows parameters to be set
for up to two customer defined terminal types. Record Code CT
is used when none of the standard terminal types in Record
Code TT (Terminal Type), field 0, meets the needs of the
application. The various terminal characteristics of the customer
defined terminal types are specified in this record code.
---------r-r-------r---------------------------------------~-1
I
I
I
I
HEXADECIMAL EQUIVALENT
THE BIT STRINGS FOR THE
FUNCTION
Figure 14.1
D-268
I
I
I
I
1
I
OF
Record Code CT: Customer Defined Terminal Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 14.1
COL.
NO.
Entry Fields for Record Code CT
VALID
ENTRIES
COL.
NAME
COMMENTS
1-2 = number
...
CustomerDefined
Terminal Type
Number
This field represents the customer defined
terminal that is being defined.
-This field is used by the system for
identification purposes.
13-16
Function Code
TNAM = terminal
type mnemonic
CLSC = clear
screen characters
ABCC = absolute
cursor control
EEOL = erase to
end of line
EEOP = erase to
end of page
WON = reverse
video on
RVOF = reverse
video off
APON = auxiliary
port on
APOF = auxiliary
pot-t off
Indicate the function code of the customer
defined terminal.
12
.-
17-32
SVR 5210
Hexadecimal
00-FF = code
Equivalent of the -- = not selected
Bit Strings for
the Function
(Bytes 1-8)
8187
This field determines the hexadecimal
equivalent codes, which represent the one to
eight ASCII characters. These characters
make up the control sequence or directive that
performs the selected function code.
-The ABCC function code includes the
specification of row and column number
position.
-Since these values are dynamically
provided when needed, non-ASCII
placeholder notation indicators are to be used
in defining the ABCC function code bytes.
These codes are as follows:
80= row number in ASCII notation
81 = column number in ASCII notation
90= row number in decimal notion
91 = column number in decimal notion
-The TNAM function code never specifies the
hexadecimal equivalent code bytes.
D-269
TL-130400-1001
Table14.1
COL.
NO.
33-36
D-270
COL.
NAME
CustomerDefined
Termina[-Name
Entry Fields for Record Code CT (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
(O-9) to (A-Z) =
name
- = not selected
8187
COMMENTS
Assign the name given to the customer
defined terminal.
-This is the one-to-four-character name
associated with this terminal type (referenced
on Record Code TT).
-This field is only supplied if the function
code is TNAM.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code TT:
Serial Device
14.2 Record Code TT, Figure 14.2, defines the requirements for
a TTY unit to interface with the system.
i
I
S N1-R
E 01-E
Q
CfPl
;g
IR
$?I
’
’
ID
I
I
I._
‘N’
‘U’
‘M’
‘B’
‘E’
I
IRI
I
I
!!
I
I
I
C’O;
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
fT jT ’
I5 16 I
I3 IO I
I4 I5 I
IO
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
-*-.l.-a.-~-.L-~-a.-A
-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~ --L-A.--I.--LFigure 14.2 Record Code TT: Serial Device Data Sheet
-
SVR 5210
8J87
D-271
TL-130400-1001
Table 14.2
Entry Fields for Record Code TT
COMMENTS
120 = 1,200 b a u d
inputted via the system
e terminals before a command is
005 = suggested
value
22-25
Terminal Type
ADDS = ADDS
Regent 60/
Viewpoint 60
DECV = DEC
VT1 00 series
LS31= Lear
Sieglar ADM31 or
ADM32
TELE = Televideo
900 series
XT 30 = GTE
XT300
system maintenance terminal to lock after the
last entry is made from the TTY.
Assign the type of terminal to be connected to
the output port.
-In addition, the customer can define up to
two other terminal types (using Record Code
CT).
-The customer-defined terminal type must
consist of characters as follows: A through Z,
0 through 9, -, or blank.
TTY=
teletypewriter
26
Echo
Y = selected
N = not selected
Enter Y if an echo is used.
27
Printer
Y = selected
N = not selected
Enter Y if a printer is used to provide a hard
copy.
28
Terminal Mode
Y = selected (CRT)
N = not selected
Enter Y if the terminal mode is a CRT.
29
FADS System
Auto Dump Port
Y = selected
N = not selected
Enter Y if if the FADS (Force Administration
Data System) is in effect.
-This feature is used in conjuction with CAS
and provides historical data.
D-272
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
HEALTH CARE/
HOTEL FEATURES
-..
SVR 5210
15.0 This section describes the record codes r ?ed to
define the various system health care and hotel features. The
following record codes are required:
l
Record Code HM defines the miscellaneous hotel features.
l
Record Code KD defines the KEDU card location.
l
Record Code KS defines the KEDU audit feature.
l
Record Code MK defines KEDU special functions.
l
Record Code PD defines the KEDU printer card location.
l
Record Code RN defines room station access codes.
l
Record Code CL defines routing information.
l
Record Code TL defines printer information.
l
Record Code AL defines additional printer information.
l
Record Code WT defines health care ward groups.
8187
D-273
TL-130400-1001
Record Code HM:
Health Care/Motel
Miscellaneous
15.1 Record Code HM, Figure 15.1, defines the miscellaneous
system functions of the hotel option.
----------------------------------------------~-----------------~
r---------rI
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9
p
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
1
I
I
’
’
’
D-274
’
’
’
I
I
’
’
’
I
’
1
I
Icl
IHI
IA,
INI
IGI
IEI
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
t-,-,-t-,-t-,-~-,-,-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-t-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 11 I1 I1 I1 I1 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-+-+-c-c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4,l,O,l.l,M,
t --L-l--L-~--L-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~--‘-J
Figure 15.1
I
I
I
I
I
’
’
’
I
I
I
’
I
’
I
’
I
I
,
I ,
’ I
’ I
’
1
I
;
’
I
’
I
I i
!,:
IO I
c - 4
(
Record Code HM: Health Care/Motel Miscellaneous Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.1 Entry Fields for Record Code #M
COMMENTS
flash is recognized on the line calling via the
-The field is used to keep track of local calls
for billing purposes.
-Another option with this feature is to disallow
a hookswitch flash on Record Code NC,
columns 30-31.
message meter p
counts on calls from
lines to outgoing t
-The field is used
tabulate the number of local calls made by a
Remove
deactivated when
a wake-up call is
answered
-- = N/A
the guest room telephone.
-The wake-up call feature overrides the do
not disturb feature.
18-19
Print on Wake
UP
WU = output is
printed
-- = N/A
Enter WU if a print-out is output by the printer
when the wake-up call feature is activated or
deactivated by a station user from the guest
room telephone.
-It is recommended to always have a printout to provide proof that the wake-up call was
received by the guest.
20-22
Print on DND
DND = output is
(Do Not Disturb) printed
-- = N/A
Enter DND if a print-out is output to the
printer when the ward control of the DND
feature is activated or deactivated by a station
user from a guest room telephone.
23-25
Print on Ward
Control by
Attendant of
DND (Do Not
Disturb)
Enter ATT if a print-out is output to the printer
when the ward control of the DND feature is
activated or deactivated by the attendant.
-The system may have an automatic timer
that controls this feature.
SVR 5210
ATT = output is
printed
-- = N/A
8187
D-275
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.1
Entry Fields for Record Code HM (Continued)
COMMENTS
is activated or deactivated by the
when a wake-up call is placed to a busy or
no answer station.
counts on trunk
35
No Dial Alarm
Y = no dial alarm
activated
- = no dial alarm
not activated
Enter Y if the no dial alarm feature is
activated.
Room
Restriction on
Occupancy
Y = room station
restriction
activated
- = room station
restriction not
activated
Enter Y if the system is to automatically
restrict a room station from making outside
calls when the room status is changed to
unoccupied.
-This prevents unauthorized use of the
telephone.
Status Change
D-276
counts that are registered up
-This feature is used to incre
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code KD:
Key Entry Display Unit
Assignment
r--------I
--r--r-------r-
; I ;T
,N,6
,D,4
7.
,E18
‘ ” ,Xl2Il
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
F
S
w
M
5’
------------T-~-------------------------------------~
;T T T T T f
,3
,2
10
1
3 6
2 4
18
2 1
3
2
2
1
3,
2,
3,
,
T
ITI
i
1
I4 I
:: !
I
1
I
16 I
II
f
I I ;
I I I
I ’ I ;
I I I
i I
I I 1
I
I
I 1
, I I ’
--r-t-t-t-t-rf
,I I1 ,I I1 I1 I1 I1
7~8~9,9111213141516
i
Figure 15.2
SVR 5210
15.2 Record Code KD, Figure 15.2, defines the physical location
of the KEDU circuit card(s) and the features that can be
activated or deactivated at each KEDU. Because the maximum
number of KEDUs that the OMNI SI will support is two, the
maximum number of entries for this record code is two.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
$;
Ii
+’
,.I.-
‘C
IR
I
I
I
I
-;I1
I I9
-+-
-t-t-t-t-t-.+-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T2 I2 12 12 12 I2 I2 12 12 I2 13 13
13 13 13 I3 13 13 I3 I3 14 14
12131415161718191011
011 12131415161718191011
-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-
I4
12
Record Code KD: Key Entry Display Unit Assignment Data Sheet
8187
D-277
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.2
Entry Fields for Record Code KD
COMMENTS
owing parameters.
mber must be unique across
Which card slot within the group is this card?
-The FB-17209 card used to support the
KEDU is a double width card.
17
Circuit
O-l = circuit
number
Which circuit on the card is being used?
- A maximum of two KEDU circuits or one
KEDU circuit and one printer circuit can be
used on the same card.
18
Wake Up
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if access to the wake-up feature is
allowed.
19
Message Meter
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if access to the message meter
feature is allowed.
-This feature requires a printer.
20
Room
Restriction
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if access to the room restriction
feature is allowed.
21
Time
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if access to the time feature is
allowed.
22
Message
Waiting
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if access to the message waiting
feature is allowed.
23
Room Status
Y = allowed
-= not allowed
Enter Y if access to the room status feature is
allowed.
24
Do Not Disturb
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if access to the do not disturb feature
is allowed.
25
Property
Management
System
P = PMS equipped
- = PMS not
equipped
Enter Y if the PMS (Property Management
System) is equipped in place of this KEDU.
-If this field is marked P, OPI must be
equipped on Record Code FR.
-For this feature to work properly, an OPI
card, a KEDU with PMS, and a KEDU printer
must be equipped.
D-278
8187
SVR 5210
--
TL-130400-1001
Record Code KS:
Key Entry Display Unit
Special Function Access
;I
I
I
=
1011
I
I
15.3 Record Code KS, Figure 15.3, defines the special functions
performed by the KEDU for the audit feature.
121314l5~617l
I l
I
I
I I
r-t-~-r-~-$-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-r-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
~11111111111111111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l
171619,011
12131415161718191011
l2131415161718191011
12131415161718191011
I21
L-+-+-c-c-~+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I/4!0!5lKI
I
I
I D IOIDIDI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-t
--~-~-~_I_~c-*-l-~--L-~-~-I-I-*-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~---
Figure 15.3
Record Code KS: Key Entry Display Unit Special Function Access Data
Sheet
Table 15.3A
Entrv Fields for Record Code KS
COMMENTS
number is used by the system for identification
all KD forms.
SVR 5210
8187
D-279
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.3A
COL.
NO.
15-22
COL.
NAME
Function
Access Digits
Allowed
__
Entry Fields for Record Code KS (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
0 = print function
without clearing
the memory
1 = function
canceled
2 = print function,
then clear the
memory (this value
isused for the
message meter
feature only)
3-7 = not defined
at this time; do not
use
ndicate the action taken by the system when
a particular function button is depressed from
:he KEDU.
NOTE: If an access digit is indicated for a specific function code,
one or more printers must be defined for that function on Record
Code AL associated with the KEDU number. See Table 153B.
Table 15.38 KS Rules
Example:
KEDU
No .
0
Message
Status
AL
Code
KS
KEDU
No .
0
Function
Diaits Allowed
Code
Oi234567
MM ()I--- _ _ _
RS
D-280
Meter
Printer
ID
01
Ret
Code
AL
8187
Room
Status
--
01-v- --a
Status
Printer
ID
--
Allowed
Incorrect
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code MK:
Master Key Entry
Display Unit
15.4 Record Code MK, Figure 15.4, defines the special functions
that are assigned to the KEDU. If more than one KEDU is in use,
one must be assigned as a master for control of the features. If
only one KEDU is in use, it is assigned as the master KEDU.
T---------r-r----------------------------------------------,-------------~
I
I
T
ITi
I
B
t
16 I
I
2
I
‘4 I
I
>- I’$ I
i
I
I
9
c
MASTER KEDU SECURITY CODES CLEAR MEMORY
sT-----‘-T---‘---T-------T--------~-------~-------~-------------~
I
’I
=I El
i RI
;N;
“u”p”’
;
;
loI
’ I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
’ I
I
I
’
I
I
I
’
I
I
I
’
I
I
I
'I
I
I
'
I
I
I
I
I
,-
II
MSG
;
M ET ER ,
;
;
I
,
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I I I
I
I
I
I
,,I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
ROOM
RESTN
TI
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
)
I
MSG
WTG
,
T-
I
T-
i
j
SVR 5210
I
ROOM
STATUS
;
ALL
FUNCTIONS
TI
I
I
c
i--~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~I I I
11111111111111111111121212
I ; '121212,2121213131313
l7,a,9io,i,2,314,5,6,7,8,9,01112
I :~ 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3
c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+,C. - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - c r3171o,MIK,
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I,
I
I
I
I,
1
L - ~ - ~ - - - - L - ~ - * - * - * - ~ - * - * - ~ - ~ - L - .A.. -~-~-~-~-*-~-~-*-~-~-
Figure 15.4
I
I
I
I
ANT!%
L
I
I
I
I
31313131313141414
~1516171819101112
-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+, I I I I I I
I
-.L-*-*-A-L-l-*-*-
Record Code MK: Master Key Entry Display Unit Data Sheet
7187
D-281
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.4
COL.
NO.
12
13-16
17-20
21-24
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code MK
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Master KEDU
Number
O-l = number
This field is used to identify the master KEDU,
which is defined by the following parameters.
The KEDU number must be unique across all
KD forms.
Clear Memory
Code for Wake
UP
0000-9999 =
Assign the security code used by the master
KEDU to clear the memory for the wake-up
feature.
Clear Memory
Code for
Message Meter
0000-9999 =
clears memory
-mm- = N/A
Assign the security code used by the master
KEDU to clear the memory for the message
meter feature.
Clear Memory
0000-9999 =
clears memory
-m-m = N/A
Assign the security code used by the master
KEDU to clear the memory for the room
restriction feature.
Code for Room
Restriction
clears memory
--:: = N/A
25-28
Clear Memory
Code for
Message
Waiting
0000-9999 =
clears memory
w-mm = N/A
Assign the security code used by the master
KEDU to clear the memory for the message
waiting feature.
29-32
Clear Memory
Code for Do Not
Disturb
0000-9999 =
clears memory
mm-m = N/A
Assign the security code used by the master
KEDU to clear the memory for the do not
disturb feature.
33-36
Clear Memory
Code for Room
Status
0000-9999 =
clears memory
w-mm = N/A
Assign the security code used by the master
KEDU to clear the memory for the room status
feature.
37-43
Clear Memory
Code for All
Functions
Allowed
0000-9999 =
Assign the security code used by the master
KEDU to clear the memory for the all functions
allowed feature.
44
W a k e - U p
Function
Allowed
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if the master KEDU is allowed access
to the wake-up feature through its control
buttons.
NOTE: If this field is dashed, the security
code corresponding to this feature must also
be dashed.
45
Message Meter
Function
Allowed
Y = allowed
- = not allowed
Enter Y if the master KEDU is allowed access
to the message meter feature through its
control buttons.
NOTE: If this field is dashed, the security
code corresponding to this feature must also
be dashed.
D-282
clears memory
m--w = N/A
7187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.4
Entry Fields for Record Code MK (Continued)
COMMENTS
s field is dashed, the security
ponding to this feature must also
- = not allowed
to the time feature through its control buttons.
NOTE: If this field is dashed, the security
code corresponding to this feature must also
NOTE: If this field is dashed, the security
sponding to this feature must also
- = not allowed
NOTE: If this field is dashed, the security
code corresponding to this feature must also
NOTE: If this field is dashed, the security
code corresponding to this feature must also
SVR 5210
7187
D-283
TL-130400-1001
Record Code PD:
PrinterAssignment
Figure 15.5
D-284
15.5 Record Code PD, Figure 15.5, defines the physical location
of the printer card circuit(s). It also gives the speed, format, and
data transfer information for the printer assigned to support the
KEDU. The card used in support of this feature is the FB17209-A card.
Record Code PD: Printer Assignment Data Sheet
7187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.5
Entry Fields for Record Code PD
COMMENTS
er number must be unique
-Each location must be unique.
Which card slot within the group is this card?
18-19
Baud Rate
03 = 300 baud
-- = 1,200 baud
Indicate the baud rate or speed of the printer.
-If an Axiom printer is used, this field can be
defaulted.
20-21
Parity
OD = odd parity
-- = even parity
Indicate the parity (used for error detection) of
the printer.
-If an Axiom printer is used, this field can be
defaulted.
22-23
Paper Form
WD = wide printout (at least 4080 columns wide)
-- = narrow
print-out (40-80
columns wide)
Indicate the paper form by checking the
number of characters that are typed by the
printer on a per line basis.
-If an Axiom printer is used, this field can be
defaulted.
24
Stop Bit
2=two stop bits
- = one stop bit
Indicate the number of stop bits needed to
stop the data flow.
-If an Axiom printer is used, this field can be
defaulted.
25
Word Length in
Bits
8 = eight-bit
words
-= seven-bit
words
Indicate the word length that is sent to the
printer.
-If an Axiom printer is used, this field can be
defaulted.
26
Parity Inhibit
Y = printer does not Enter Y if the printer needs a parity inhibit bit.
require a parity bit -If an Axiom printer is used, this field can be
- = printer does
defaulted.
require a parity bit
SVR 5210
7187
D-285
TL-130400-1001
Record Code RN:
Room Number
First Digit Translation
15.6 Record Code RN, Figure 15.6, indicates when it is
necessary to precede a room station number with an access
code for room-to-room calling.
r---------r-r---------+--------------------------------------------------------~
8;
EI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
’
-t-t-r-s-t-T-t-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~r -: :-:;:I
I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 II 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4~
I ; 718191011
12131415161718191011
12131415161718191011
12131415161718191011
-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-~
C. -+-+-+-+I
I
I
I
I : 314lOlRlN
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
1 l
1 1
01
L . -L-L J-L- t --C-l-~-~-*-~-l-l-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-*-~-~-*-~-~-~--~--’.
f
I
Figure 15.6
D-286
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I21
-4
8I
0I
I
- 1
Record Code RN: Room Number First Digit Translation Data Sheet
7187
SVR 5210
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.6
Entry Fields for Record Code RN
COMMENTS
This field determines the first digit of a threeor four-digit room directory number.
-This number is preceded by an access
code for room-to-room calling.
digits must also be entered.
er first digit must be unique
station numbers
4DG = first digit o f
numbers that do
12 = 3DG missing
column 12 is the first digit of a th
room directory number, a four-di
directory number, or the number
being defined, a move or a change call to that
number is routed to an intercept condition.
-Intercept conditions must be defined on
Record Code IR.
his field determines the missing digit required
for three-or four-digit room station numbers
or specifies the intercept routing number
assigned to an intercept condition.
-If a missing digit is required, this field also
selects the missing digit.
If a missing digit is not specified, the console
station number display will display L followed
by a three-digit station number.
-If the missing digit is specified, the console
station number display will display the missing
identifier must be O-15.
-If the code type is 3DG, the code type
identifier must be O-9 or 12.
-If the code type is 4DG, the code type
identifier must be 15. The numbers O-15 are
the intercept conditions defined or Record
Code IR. Only one of these intercept
conditions can be used in support of Record
ndition must be defined on
SVR 5210
8187
D-287
TL-130400-1001
Record Code CL:
Class of CallControlledRouting
15.7 Record Code CL, Figure 15.7, defines routing information
based on the first two digits (00-99) of the calling station’s
assigned directory number or room number.
T---------T---‘---------------I--------’-----------------------------
I
I
I
T
I
I
1
Figure 15.7
D-288
I
I
I
I
- - - - - - - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
Record Code CL: Class of Call-Controlled Routing Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.7
Entry Fields for Record Code CL
COMMENTS
-If the room or line directory numbers are
three-digit numbers and a missing digit is
listed on Record Code RN (columns 16-17),
enter the missing digit in column 12. Enter the
first digit of the three numbers in column 13.
-If the room or line directory numbers are
three-digit numbers and no missing digit is
listed on Record Code RN (columns 16-l 7)
enter 0 in column 12. Enter the first digit of the
three numbers in column 13.
-If the room or line directory numbers are
four-digit numbers, enter the first two-digits
of the room or line directory numbers in
columns 12-l 3.
ined on Record
18-21
Destination
Identifier
Console
INTC = intercept
when the access code for call control routing
is activated.
0000-9999 or
000-999 = the line
directory number if
the destination is a
line
A three-digit
number must have
a blank before it.
0128 = Attendant
Console 0
0064 = Attendant
Console 1
0192 = either of the
two Attendant
Consoles
Indicate the destination to which all calls from
the same hundreds group will terminate when
the access code for call control routing is
activated.
-The destination can be any of the following:
a room station number, a line directory
number, an Attendant Console, or an intercept
routing number.
-If the destination is a line directory number,
that number must be defined on Record Code
LD.
-If the destination is an Attendant Console
circuit, that console circuit must be defined on
Record Code AT.
-If the destination is an intercept condition,
that condition must be defined on Record
Code IR.
0000-0015 =
intercept routing
number
SVR 5210
8187
D-289
_
-, .
TL-130400-1001
Record Code TL:
Transaction Record
Control
15.8 Record Code TL, Figure 15.8, assigns printers to the
function of the transaction record. All printer numbers indicated
by the printer identification number must be valid printer numbers
on a PD form. The four printers are given the following values:
* Printer No. 0 is assigned value
e Printer No. 1 is assigned value
l Printer No. 2 is assigned value
l Printer No. 3 is assigned value
01.
02.
04.
08.
If more than one printer is designated, use Table 15.8A.
Table 15.8A Printer ID
Number
Printer
ID
D-290
8187
Printer
Number(s)
00
None
01
0
02
1
03
0, 1
04
2
05
0, 2
06
1,2
07
0, 1, 2
08
3
09
0, 3
10
1, 3
11
0, 1, 3
12
2, 3
13
0, 2, 3
14
1,293
15
0, 1, 2, 3
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
E
I
I
1
I
I
I
‘ T - - - r - - -
T
3”
Ei
MAID
STATUS
;
,
I
DISPLAY I
--7---J
;
I
I
I
1716191011121314,5
c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+1319101Tl
LI
I I
I
L-A-A.-A--L-L-A-A-A._
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
i
I
;
I
’
I
’
I
P
!
I
I
I
I
I
;-T-;-T-;-T-;.
- T - ~ - T - ~ - T - ~ - , - ~ - , - ~ - ~ - ~ - ~ - ~ - ~ - ~ -!
I1 I1 I1 I1 12121; !12121212121212131313131313131313131414
1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 I :!13141516171819101112131415161718191011
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
-~-~-~-~-I-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-
141414141
141516171
I.-A.-J.-l-,
Figure 15.8
SW 5210
Record Code TL: Transaction Record Control Data Sheet
8187
D-291
r
TL-I 30400-l 001
Table 15.88
Entry Fields for Record Code TL
COMMENTS
If this field is marked AC, DE, or BT,
umns 14-l 5 must be marked 01-l 5.
= transaction record is printed when
ssage metering is activated.
= transaction record is printed when
ssage metering is deactivated.
= transaction record is printed when
-If only one printer is used, enter the printer
value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
-If more than one printer is used, enter the
sum of the printer values from Table 15.8A
(e.g., if printers 0 and 1 are used, enter 3; if
printers 2 and 3 are used, enter 12).
16-17
R o o m S t a t u s AC
Print Status
DE
BT
or
--
Indicate the conditions required for a printout to be activated when this feature is used.
AC = transaction record is printed when
message metering is activated.
DE = transaction record is printed when
message metering is deactivated.
BT = transaction record is printed when
message metering is activated or deactivated.
-- = N/A
18-19
Room Status
Printer Number
Identification
Assign the printer(s) that will give a print-out
when this feature is used.
-If only one printer is used, enter the printer
value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
-If more than one printer is used, enter the
value from Table 15.8A (e.g., if printers 0 and
1 are used, enter 3; if printers 2 and 3 are
used, enter 12).
D-292
01-l 5 = printer
value
-- = N/A
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.88
Entry Fields for Record Code TL (Continued)
COMMENTS
Indicate the conditions
out to be activated whe
AC = transaction record is printed when
message metering is activated.
DE = transaction record is printed when
message metering is deactivated.
BT = transaction record is printed when
e metering is activated or deactivated.
rinter Number
when this feature is used.
-If only one printer is used, enter the printer
value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
-If more than one printer is used, enter the
sum of the printer values (e.g., if printers 0 and
1 are used, enter 3; if printers 2 and 3 are
used, enter 12).
out to be activated when
DE = transaction record is printed when
message metering is deactivated.
BT= transaction record is printed when
-If only one printer is used, enter the printer
value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
AC = transaction record is printed when
message metering is activated.
DE = transaction record is printed when
message metering is deactivated.
BT= transaction record is printed when
SVR 5210
8187
D-293
TL-l30400-1001
Table 15.85
Entry Field for Record Code TL (Continued)
COMMENTS
Assign the printer
when this feature
used, enter the printer
-If more than one printer is used, enter the
sum of the printer values (e.g., if printers 0 and
1 are used, enter 3; if printers 2 and 3 are
message metering is deactivated.
BT = transaction record is printed when
36-37
Printer Number
Identification
value
-- = N/A
when this feature is used.
-If only one printer is used, enter the printer
value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
-If more than one printer is used, enter the
sum of the printer values (e.g., if printers 0 and
1 are used, enter 3; if printers 2 and 3 are
used, enter 12).
Maid Status
Print Status
AC
DE
BT
Indicate the conditions required for a printout to be activated when this feature is used.
AC = transaction record is printed when
message metering is activated.
DE = transaction record is printed when
message metering is deactivated.
BT = transaction record is printed when
message metering is activated or deactivated.
-- = N/A
or
mm
38-39
Maid Status
Printer Number
Identification
01-l 5 = printer
value
-- = N/A
Assign the printer(s) that will give a print-out
when this feature is used.
-If only one printer is used, enter the printer
value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
-If more than one printer is used, enter the
sum of the printer values (e.g., if printers 0 and
1 are used, enter 3; if printers 2 and 3 are
used, enter 12).
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.8B
Entry Fields for Record Code TL (Continued)
COMMENTS
AC = transaction record is printed when
message metering is activated.
metering is activated or deactivated.
-If more than one printer is used, enter the
values (e.g., if printers 0 and
3; if printers 2 and 3 are
conditions required
out to be activated when this feature
AC = transaction record is printed wh
message metering is activated.
DE = transaction record is printed when
message metering is deactivated.
BT= transaction record is printed when
-If only one printer is used, enter the printer
value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
SW 5210
8187
D-295
TL-130400-1001
Record Code AL:
Audit Record
Control
15.9 Record Code AL, Figure 15.9, assigns a printer to a KEDU
for the audit functions associated with that KEDU. The printer is
assigned the following values:
Printer No. 0 is assigned
* Printer No. 1 is assigned
o Printer No. 2 is assigned
l Printer No. 3 is assigned
l
....
the
the
the
the
value
value
value
value
01.
02.
04.
08.
The printer ID identifies a specific printer number or several
printer numbers, depending on the value range entered. If more
than one printer is to be designated, use Table 15.9A. Example:
printer numbers 0 and 3 have the value of 9. Printer IDS and
‘numbers are found in Table 15.9A.
Table 15.9A Printer ID
Number
Printer
Number(s)
I
D-296
8187
06
112
11
0, 1, 3
12
2,3
13
0, 2, 3
14
1, 2, 3
15
0, 1, 2, 3
I
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
I NIII
I
T
I
I
I
I
A-----------
I
I
I
:
DI
EI
:
I
XI
.-----r---r-r-------r-------r--------------------------------------
xJ(
I
M
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-..
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
-+-T-f-T-T-;-T-+-T-f--r-t-T-+-T-t-r-+-T-
I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I. I
I1
11121212121212121212
71819101112131415161;
718191011
12131415161718
-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+. -+-c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+4,OlOlAl
LlOl I I I I
I
I
I,
I,
I
I
I
I
I
--A - - L - A - L - L - L - * - -~-~-~-~-*-~-*-~-*-*-*-
-T-f-T-t-T-f-T-& T-T-T-T-T- I
!131313131313131313131414141
i8
110111213141516171819101112,
IO
-+-c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-c-+-+-+-4
c l I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
-A-*-A-A.-A-*-A-A--L-A
. . . 4-L
Figure 15.9 Record Code AL: Audit Record Control Data Sheet
Table 15.98 Entry Fields for Record Code AL
F-pi-
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12
KEDU Number
O-3 = number
This field determines the selected KEDU
number and is used by the system for
identification purposes.
-This number must be defined on Record
Code KD.
13-14
Message Meter
Function Status
AL = message
metering
information is to be
printed
-- = metering
information is not
to be printed
Enter AL if the printer(s) can accept message
metering information associated with a KEDU.
-Columns 15-l 6 indicate which printer(s)
will print this information.
-l’,lke; entered, columns 15-16 cannot be
SVR 5210
8187
D-297
r
TL--l30400-1001
Table 15.95
Entry Fields for Record Code AL (Continued)
COMMENTS
rrnter
Number
accept message metering. information
associated with a KEDU.
-When only one printer is selected to print,
enter the sum of the printer values 01, 02, 04,
- W h e n more than one printer is selected to
print, enter the value from Table 15.9A (e.g.,
in this field must be
Enter AL if the printer(s) can accept message
metering information associated with a KEDU.
Printer Number
associated with a KEDU.
-When only one printer is selected to print,
enter the sum of the printer values 01, 02, 04,
-When more than one printer is selected to
print, enter the value from Table 15.9A (e.g.,
for printer numbers 0 and 1, enter 3; for
numbers 2 and 3, enter 12.
-A printer number used in this field must be
defined on Record Code PD.
will print this information.
-ll;;ez entered, columns 23-24 cannot be
8187
SW 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.96
Entry Fields for Record Code AL (Continued)
Indicate whether or not the printer(s) can
accept message metering information
associated with a KEDU.
-When only one printer is selected to print,
enter printer value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
-When more than one printer is selected to
print, enter the sum of the printer value (e.g.,
for printer numbers 0 and 1, enter 3; for
numbers 2 and 3, enter 12).
-A printer number used in this field, must be
will print this information.
-lgl;ez entered, columns 27-28 cannot be
-When more than one printer is selected to
print, enter the sum of the printer values (e.g.,
his field must be
Enter AL if the printer(s) can accept message
metering information associated with a KEDU.
SVR 5210
8187
D-299
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.98
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code AL (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
31-32
Message
Waiting Printer
Number,
Identification
01-l 5 = number
-- = N/A
Indicate whehter or not the printer(s) can
accept message metering information
associated with a KEDU.
-When only one printer is selected to print,
enter printer value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
-When more than one printer is selected to
print, enter the sum of the printer values (e.g.,
for printer numbers 0 and 1, enter 3; for
numbers 2 and 3, enter 12).
-A printer number used in this field must be
defined on Record Code PD.
33-34
Wake Up
Function Status
AL = message
metering
information is to be
printed
-- = metering
information is not
to be printed
Enter AL if the printer(s) can accept message
metering information associated with a KEDU.
-Columns 35-36 indicate which printer(s)
will print this information.
-If AL is entered, columns 35-36 cannot be
dashed.
35-36
Wake Up Printer
Number
Identification
01-l 5 = number
-- = N/A
Indicate whether or not the printer(s) can
accept message metering associated with a
KEDU.
-When only one printer is selected to print,
enter printer value 01, 02, 04, or 08.
-When more than one printer is selected to
print, enter the sum of the printer values (e.g.,
for printer numbers 0 and 1, enter 3; for
numbers 2 and 3, enter 12).
-A printer number used in this field must be
defined on Record Code PD.
D-300
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code WT:
Ward Control
...
T
I
I
I
I
I
- - - - - - - - -
r
-
r
- - -
15.10 Record Code WT, Figure 15.10, defines the ward
groupings for the system. The beginning and ending times that
the system will automatically impose the do not disturb feature
are also defined. This feature provides quiet time for hospital
patient rooms. A maximum of eight time periods can be used for
up to 32 ward numbers. Time periods entered on this record
code must not overlap one another (e.g.12:00-4:00, 5:0111 :OO).
- - - - - - - - - _ _ _ T--------------I
T
I
I
z!
I
I
:
I
------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
1
:
WARD
NUMBER(S)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~-+-~-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+--l
~413lOlWI
TIOI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A - J . - A - - L - L - ~ - ~ - I - ~ - I - * - ~ - I - * - ~ -1-1-~-~-~-1-*-~-1-1-~-~-~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; -r--r--r-T-T-T-T-T-r-r-T-i
Figure 15.10
SW 5210
I
I
I
I
I
I
-*-J.-A.-A-*-A
I
I
WARD N U M B E R ( S )
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Record Code WT: Ward Control Data Sheet
8187
D-301
TL-130400-1001
Table 15.10
COL.
NO.
12
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
O-7 = number
This field determines which time period this
field is. Up to eight time periods are allowed.
-Each time period number must be unique.
13-14 ‘Y’ Begin Time by
Hour
00-23 = number
Indicate the hour that this feature, which
prevents rooms from being rung, goes into
effect.
15-16
Begin Time by
Minute
00-59 = number
Indicate the minute of the hour that this feature
goes into effect.
17-18
End Time by
Hour
00-23 = number
Indicate the hour that the feature is no longer
in effect.
19-20
End Time by
Minute
00-59 = number
Indicate the minute of the hour that this feature
is no longer in effect.
21-52
Ward Number
A = allowed
D = disallowed
Enter A if the time periods created in columns
12-20 are in effect for this ward number.
-Ward numbers are assigned to stations on
Record Code LM, columns 32-33.
-Ward control is assigned to attendants on
Record Code AT, columns 39-40.
-If allowed, the attendant can change these
timing parameters from the console.
NOTE: If a ward number is listed on Record
Code LM, it must also be listed on this record
code.
D-302
Time Period
Number
s-.”
Entry Fields for Record Code WT
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
CENTRALIZED
ANSWERING
SERVICE
BRANCH/MAIN
16.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the various system CAS (Centralized Answering Service)
features. The following record codes are required:
l
Record Code CF defines the system CAS Branch features.
l
Record Code AD defines the CAS Main agent position.
l
Record Code AF defines ACD recorder announcer access.
l
Record Code AG defines agent group characteristics.
l
Record Code DK defines repertory dial numbers.
Y.
.”
.
.
l
Record Code RC defines RLT (Release Link Trunks)
characteristics.
l
Record Code SM defines LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
messages.
l
Record Code SP defines supervisor messages.
l
Record Code TM defines supervisor repertory dial key.
l
l
SVR 5210
Record Code RA defines CAS Main/ACD recorder
announcers.
Record Code SD defines secondary directory numbers.
$187
D-303
TL-130400-1001
Record Code CF:
CAS Branch Features
16.1 Record Code CF, Figure 16.1, defines the CAS Branch
features used by the system.
-------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
1114151ClFl
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
L-*-*-~--~_I-~-~-~-~-i-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~~-,
Figure 16.1
D-304
I
Record Code CF: CAS Branch Features Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-I 001
Table 16.1
Entry Field for Record Code CF
COMMENTS
00-15 = number
able class of service for the
00-l 5 = number
-The n-displayable class of service must
ear on Record Code NC.
announcer.
nnouncer PEC
must also be dashed.
-If an entry is made in this field, columns
18-20 must have an entry.
NOTE: If column 16 is dashed, this field must
be dashed. If column 16 is Y, this field must
not be dashed.
18-20
SVR 5210
Camp on
Recorder
Announcer
Group
000-063 = trunk
number
-mm = N/A
8187
Indicate the trunk number that the RLT camps
on to.
-The trunk listed should be a member of a
trunk group marked for recorder announcer on
Record Code Tl.
-The trunk number field must correspond to a
TC form defining a recorder announcer.
-In order to work properly, the recorder
announcer indicated must be used for this
feature only.
D-305
-
TL-130400-1001
Record Code AD:
Agent Position
r-~~~--------r-~~~~-r
16.2 Record Code AD, Figure 16.2, defines the agent position
data required for the CAS Main and ACD operations. The system
supports a maximum of 192 agents.
-------
T
-
T
-------
- r - - r - - -----------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
m I
*l = ALLOW AGENT
CALL ORIGINATION ON
; T’
I R’
A’
N’
I s;
I
I
I
I C’
I 0’
I D’
I
’
’
’
’
’
E;
I
I
I
I
I
I1 I1 I1 il I1 1111 ill1 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
17181910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011121314151617181910111213101
~-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
1~131nlAlnl
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
iii’..
.
.
.
.
.
.
Figure 16.2
.
12
COL.
NAME
.
.
.
.
Record Code AD: Agent Position Data Sheet
Table 16.2
COL.
NO.
.
Entry Fields For Record Code AD
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Agent Group
O-7 = number
Select the agent group number for each of the
agent positions.
13-15
Agent Position
Number
000-l 91= number
Select the agent position number. This field
cannot be dashed.
16-19
Line Number
0000-9999 =
number
--mm = N/A
ldentjfy the line number associated with the
line 1 pushbutton on all Agent Instrument
positions.
Supervisory
Position
(Supervisor)
Y = supervisory
position
N = agent position
Enter Y if this Agent Instrument is used as a
supervisor position.
-The system supports a maximum of 8
supervisors.
Supervisor
Position
(Line Number of
Supervisor Line
0000-9999 =
number (right
justify 3-digit
numbers)
---- = agent
position
Identify the line number for line 2 of an Agent
Instrument being used as a supervisor
position.
- All supervisor positions are allowed a
maximum of two directory numbers.
20
21-24
2)
D-306
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.2
COL.
NO.
25
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
A = originating
Allow Agent to
Originate Calls
on Line 1
s-
calls is allowed on
line 1
- = originating
calls is not allowed
on line 1
....
26-27
Supervisor
Number
Entry Fields for Record Code AD (Continued)
COMMENTS
Enter A if the Agent Instrument can make calls
on line 1.
NOTE: An Agent Instrument can be assigned
up to two directory numbers. If two directory
numbers are assigned, it is recommended to
disallow outgoing calls on line 1.
01-08 =
‘-
Indicate what supervisor number is given to
supervisor number this agent.
-The system supports a maximum of 8
supervisors per system.
28
Supervisor
Silent Monitor
Y = silent monitor
allowed
- = not selected
Enter Y if the silent monitor feature can be
used.
-This feature is used by supervisors only.
29
Link Card
Location:
PEC
0 = PEC number
- = no selection
NOTE: Enter PEC
0.
If the CAS Main/ACD instrument is a PACET
(Programmable AttendanvAgent Console
Electronic Telephone), use an unused circuit
on FB-17209 card.
-Fill in the card location here and in columns
30-33.
30
Link Card
A-D = group
Location: Group number
31-32
33
SVR 5210
Link Card
Location: Card
Slot
00-l 1 = slot
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within PEC 0 is
this card?
Which card slot within the group is this card?
number
Link Card
O-1 = circuit
Location: Circuit number
Number
- = no selection
8187
Which circuit on the card is being used?
D-307
TL-130400-1001
Record Code AF:
Limited Automatic
CallDistribution
Feature
16.3 Record Code AF, Figure 16.3, defines the ACD trunk group
pilot number or numbers allowed access to the recorder
announcer when all stations are busy. The system supports a
maximum of four ACD trunk group pilot numbers.
--mer-------------,-------------~
T
:
d
I
B
I
T
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
’
’
I
I
‘TI
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
’
I
T-T-LII II 11
ii ii il ii it
7~8~9,011121314151617
-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+.$16lOlAl
FI
I I I
I
I
-L-A-&-L-LA-L-I-A-L-
Figure 16.3
D-308
-,-i-,-,-,-
T
I
8'9iOll
-+-+-+I
I I I
.I. -a.-*-*-
1
21212121212
21314151617
-+-+-+-+-+I I I I I
-A.-a-A.-I-*-
I
819,0,112131415161718191011121
: -+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.I. -*-A-*-A-L-A.-A-A-a-A
--L--A.-
I
IO1
c-4
,I
- -
Record Code AF: Limited Automatic Call Distribution Feature Data
Sheet
8187
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.3
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code AF
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
a
12-27
....
Automatic Call
0000-9999 = pilot
Distribution Pilot number
Numbers l-4
or 000-999
m-mm = N/A
_
This field determines the ACD trunk group pilot
number (l-4) that diverts to a recorder
announcer message when all stations in the
hunt group are busy.
-All ACD pilot numbers must appear as a
pilot number on Record Code HG.
NOTE: The ACD pilot number fields must use
dashes consistently (e.g., 4321 = allowed;
---- = allowed; 43-- = not allowed).
28-30
Delay Between
Incoming
Seizure and
Divert to
Recorder
Announcer
001-255 =
seconds
m-m = N/A
When a call is in queue for the ACD group,
this field determines the number of seconds a
call will wait in that queue before it is sent to
the recorder announcer message.
-If the agent does not answer the queued call
within this timing parameter, the call is
forwarded to the recorder announcer
message.
31-32
Calls Waiting
120-IPM Flash
Rate
01-l 5 = number
-- = N/A
Indicate the number of calls waiting in queue
before the call pressure indicator flashes at a
rate of 120 IPMs.
33-34
Calls Waiting
30-IPM Flash
Rate
01-l 5 = number
-- = N/A
Indicate the number of calls waiting in queue
before the call pressure indicator flashes at a
rate of 30 IPMs.
-This number should be less than the
number entered in columns 31-32.
35-37
Tone Type After
Recorder
Announcer
RBT = ringback
tone
MQC = music on
hold
Enter MQC if a caller who has heard the
recorder announcer message hears music on
hold after the message.
Enter RBT if a caller who has heard the
recorder announcer message hears ringback
tone after the message. Ringback tone is the
sound heard when the phone is ringing.
-To set up the intercept-to-recorderannouncer condition, Record Code IR must be
used. One predefined condition for this
application is found on Record Code IR; it is
route number 10. For intercept route number
10, Record Code IR must be used.
NOTE: It is recommended to send the call to
music on hold.
SVR 5210
8187
D-309
--
TL-130400-1001
Record Code AG:
Agent Group
1
I
I.
16.4 Record Code AG, Figure 16.4, defines the characteristics of
the agent groups. The system supports a maximum of eight
agent groups.
I
I
D l
IE I
I
I
I
I
$I;
T5331
Tf0,
‘F
1::
IM
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
;
Nl
El
'G'
'R'
1~01
ILEI
I
T
SI
,
I
T5341
i
I
I
IA
;t
ID :I
I
0
R
$
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i”:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
‘RI
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
tTl
I
I
;
(SEC)
E
, ;
(SEC)
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-,-t -T-~-:-,-,-t-,-,-+-,-~-t-~-~-t-~-t-~-~-~-t-~-t-~-~-~-t-~-~-~-t-t-~-~-~
I
I
I
11111111l1111111111112121212121212121212131313131313131313i3t4141414141
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c-+-+-*-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
15l0l0lAi~,Oi I
I
l
l
l
I
I
l
l
l
1
I
l
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
l
I
I
I
L-*-*---L-L-~--C--C-*-~-*-~-~
-*-~-*-*-~-~-*-L-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-*-~-*-~-~-~
Ipl
I
I
‘N’
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T
T
I
I
I
2
2
2
2;
4 ,
I
T5341
Figure 16.4
D-31 0
3
I
I
I
,
T5331
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Record Code AG: Agent Group Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.4
Entry Fields for Record Code AG
COMMENTS
This field determines the agent group number.
musrc source IS prove
on hold. If a music source is not
is in. If the system goes down,
is set here is the mode in whit
operate 24 hours a day with no operator to
change day/mode if the system goes down.
announcer
AT = attendant
If -- (no destination) is used, then ringback
tone is heard.
0128 = console 0
0064 = console 1
0192 = console 0
announcer
message played
or no divert
SW 5210
8187
D-31 1
--
TL-130 400-l
001
Table 16.4
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
31-32
Alternate Divert
Destination
=.
..
._
Entry Fields for Record Code AG (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
LN = line
TK = trunk group
AG = agent group
RA = recorder
announcer
AT = Attendant
Console
-- = no alternate
If a call remains in an agent queue longer than
the time selected in columns 37-39, this field
determines the alternate divert destination
type.
-Columns 33-36 define what line, trunk or
agent group, etc. the destination is.
NOTE: If an entry is made in this field, then an
entry is required in columns 33-39.
33-36
Alternate Divert
Destination
Identifier
0000-9999 = line
number
0000-0063 =
trunk group
number
0000-0007 =
agent group
number
0, 64, 128, or
192 = Attendant
Console
combination
number
-- zt no
divert recorder
announcer
message played
Assign the alternate divert destination here.
-If a line is used and three-digit numbers
are in effect, the numbers must be right
justified.
-If ---- (for no divert recorder announcer
message played) is used, it defaults to
number 3, which is the night recording.
-The night recording indicates that the office
is closed.
NOTE: If an entry is made in this field, then an
entry is required in columns 31-32 and 3739.
37-39
Alternate Divert
Destination
Tlming
000-225 =
seconds
--- = not used
Assign the number of seconds a call must wait
in queue before it is forwarded to the alternate
divert destination.
Note: If an entry is made in this field, then an
entry is required in columns 31-32 and 3339.
40
Play Recorder
Announcer #l
Before Routing
to Agent Group
Y = RA #1
N = not used
Indicate whether or not recorder announcer #l
is played before the call is routed to an agent.
-The recording will play only once.
41
Recorder
Announcer #l
l=RA#l
A = alternate RA #l
- = not used
If a recorder announcer is played, this field
determines whether recorder announcer #I or
alternate recorder announcer #1 will be
played.
-The recording will play only once.
D-31 2
8187
SVR 5210
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.%
COL.
NAME
42-44
Entry Fields for Record Code AG (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Time Between
Recorder
Announcer #I
and Recorder
Announcer #2
001-255 =
seconds
--- = not used
Recorder
Announcer #2
2=RA#2
If a recorder announcer is to be played, this
A = alternate RA #2 field determines whether recorder announcer
- = not used
#2 or alternate recorder announcer #2 is
played.
-The recording is played only once unless
column 46 is marked Y.
Repeat
Recorder
Announcer #2
Y = repeat RA #2
N = not used
This field determines whether or not recorder
announcer #2 is to be repeated.
Time Between
Repeats of
Recorder
Announcer #2
001-255 =
seconds
--- = not used
This field determines the number of seconds
between playing the repeats of recorder
announcer #2.
Recorder
Announcer #3
2=RA#2
- = not used
Indicate whether or not recorder announcer #3
is played.
-Recorder announcer #3 is used for the night
recording.
51-53
Call Waiting
Level #l
001-255 = number
of calls
--- = not used
This field determines the number of calls for
call waiting level #l.
-This feature is the light on the Agent
Instrument that indicates the number of calls in
queue.
54-56
Call Waiting
Level #2
001-255 = number
of calls
--- = not used
Assign the number of calls for call waiting
level #2.
57-59
Call Waiting
Level #3
001-255 = number
of calls
--- = not used
Assign the number of calls for call waiting
level #3.
60-63
Pilot Number of
Agent Group
0000-9999 = line
n u m b e r
---- = not
used
Identify the pilot number of the agent group.
-Three-digit numbers should be right
justified.
Repertory Dial
Set
O-3 = number
- = not used
The system can support only four instruments,
with this feature.
...
45
46
47-49
50
64
SVR 5210
8167
Assign the number of seconds between
playing RA #1 and RA #2.
D-31 3
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.4
COL.
NAME
65
Entry Fields for Record Code AG (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Agent Hands Free Operation
Y = used
- = not used
This field determines whether or not the agent
is allowed hands-free operation.
66-68
Time in Work
State
‘I
001-254 =
seconds
INF = infinite time
(as much time as
is needed before
an.other call
comes in)
--- = not used
Enter the time allowed for the agent to be in
the work state.
-When the agent is in the work’state, calls
are not sent to the agent’s telephone.
-This gives the agent time to complete
necessary paper work before another call
comes in.
69-71
Force
Administration
Data System
Call Delay Time
--- = only
allowed entry
This feature is not supported by the OMNI Sl
and must be dashed.
72
Early Unstaff
E = early unstaffed
- = not allowed
If an IFP is used, the feature is built in.
-This feature acts like forward busy.
73
CAS Local
Flash
M = CAS Main or
ACD
- = CAS Branch
(default)
Enter M if a relay flash is allowed to the CAS
Main or the CAS Branch.
74
Alert Tone
M = CAS Main
- = CAS Branch
Enter M if a alerting tone is provided by the
CAS Main or the CAS Branch.
Agent Transfer
X = agent transfer
- = not allowed
Enter X if the agent is allowed to transfer calls.
76
Terminate to
Agent
T = terminate to
agent
- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not the agent
is allowed to receive transferred calls.
-If a T is marked, then the agent is allowed to
receive in-house calls.
77
Line/Attendant
Transfer to
Agent Line 1
X = allowed
- = not allowed
This field determines whether or not the agent
is allowed to receive transferred attendant or
line calls on line 1.
-If an X is marked, then the agent is allowed
to receive transferred external calls.
75
b
D-31 4
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code DK:
Repertory Dial Key Code
16.5 Record Code DK, Figure 16.5, defines the set of repertory
dial numbers that can be assigned to agent groups. The
maximum number of entries for each repertory dial set is 17,
corresponding to the repertory dial keys on the CAS Main
instrument. If the agent group is ACD, the maximum number of
code entries is 16. One entry should be made for each agent
group. Use one record for each repertory dial number in each of
the sets.
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-T-T-T-TT-T-T-T-T-TT-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-~-~-~-~-i
11111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l41
6171819101112131415161718191011121314151617181910,
-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I1 I1 I1 I
1718191011
I21
c - + - + - + - u - +
-.I._*-.A
16.5
8l87
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r-1
18 I
IO I
k-i
. A’ - J
D-315
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.5
COL.
NO.
12
COL.
NAME
Set Number
13-14
Repeat Dial Key
- N u m b e r “I
15-30
Dial Key Code
_
Entry Field for Record Code DK
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
O-3 = number
This field determines the set used.
00-l 6 = number
This field determines the repertory dial key.
A-Z
Indicate the repertory dial key characters
assigned to the indicated dial key.
-Each dial key code can be 16 characters.
NOTE: The following seven ASCII characters
can also be entered in the dial key code:
& = pause
(= in character position 1, repertory dial key
applies to line 1
) = in character position 1, repertory dial key
applies to line 2
< = in character position 1, auto connect to
line 2 auto disconnect line 2; if active, enter
line 1 on hold
> = in character position 1, auto connect to
line 2 and enter line 1 on hold
% = hookswitch flash
@ = release
o-9
I
? ‘=
.
*
9
..
.
,
w
#’
$
and blank=
allowable entries
8187
SW 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code RC:
Release Link
TrunkCircuit
16.6 Record Code RC, Figure 16.6, defines the trunk
characteristics associated with the CAS (Centralized Answering
Service) Branch RLTs (Release Link Trunks).
I- - - - - - - - - - r -.- - r -.- - - - - - - - - - - - ~ - - I 1 ;T T T T T
Ti;
f
1;163333
11
T-T-------T ---------------------------------~
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E
x
$
11
:
;
II
;I
11111
1
5
I
I
f
*1
T3161, T3171,
T3181, T3191
I
:-T-T-t-T-t- T - t - t - t - T - t - t T-t-T-t-t-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-f-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-TI I I
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
171819101112131415161718191011,2131415161718191011121314151617181910111213
~-+-+-+-c-c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+115lOlcIOIOI
I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
-L-L-I-~-L-*-~-~-I-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-*-~-~
-~^*-~-~-*-~-~-~-I-~-~-~-~-~-~-
L
Figure 16.6
SVR 5210
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
’
I
)
T'
I
R’
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
+
I
Record Code RC: Release Link Trunk Circuit Data Sheet
8l87
D-31 7
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.6
COL.
NO.
12-13
14
COL.
NAME
Release Link
Trunk Number
.=_
--PEC
.*
_
15
16-17
Group
Card Slot
Entry Field for Record Code RC
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
00-l 5 = number
The release link trunk number must be unique
across this record code. Each RLT number
must be unique across this form.
0 = PEC number
Enter PEC 0.
-The physical location for each RLT must be
unique.
-The card used is a double-width card.
.
A-D = group
number
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within PEC 0 is
this card?
00-l 1 = slot
Which card slot within the group is this card?
number
18
Circuit Number
O-3 = assigned
circuit number
Which circuit on the card is being used?
19-20
Equipped Status
IS = in service
OS = out of service
Is the card in service or out of service?
21-22
Release Link
Trunk Type
RL= RLT card type Assign the card type used to support this
23
24-27
D-31 8
on Record Code
FR
EM = ERLT type on
Record Code FR
trunk.
-If an FB-17251 card is used, enter RL.
-If an FB-17201 card is used, enter EM.
Guaranteed
Access
Y = required (CAS
Main)
- = not required
Enter Y if the system guarantees a time slot
for the RLT circuits.
-It is recommended to give RLTs guaranteed
access.
Release Link
Trunk Directory
Test Number
0000-9999 =
number
-m-e = N/A
Indicate the directory number assigned for
each RLT that provides a special lOOmillisecond tone to alert the agent that this is a
test call.
-When entering three-digit numbers, leave
column 24 blank before entering the digits.
NOTE: It is recommended that each branch
have a test line. Due to the high cost of the
RLT, this trunk should be tested daily for
malfunctions.
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code SM:
Source Messages
16.7 Record Code SM, Figure 16.7, defines the message that
appears in the LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) of the agent’s
instrument. These messages are displayed when a call from a
source group is routed to an agent.
T----------‘--r-------------------------------~-----------------------------~
I
I
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
12
;
I
I
T5333
I
I
I
r:
;
__
I
I
I
I
I
m
I
I
I
I
; T’
.._.I F S N; R’” C; S G’
I
MESSAGE
‘0 E O’E 010
RI
I
I R’
I
(
A
S
C
I
I
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
S
)
-1; 0
\C
DIU P,
I
I A’
I
,D
EIR
I
I N’
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IC
I E
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
N’
0;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ..
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r-T-T-t-T-+-L
‘T-s-r-T-T-T-T-T-r-T-T-T-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-i
I1 I1 II I1 I1 I1 11 I1 I1 I1 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l
~7:8~9,0,112,31415,6171819101112,314151617181910111213141516171819101
c-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
_
Figure 16.7
I
I
I s;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I C’
I 0’
I D’
I El
’
I
’
I
’ I
I81
IO1
Record Code SM: Source Messages Data Sheet
Table 16.7
COL.
NO.
I
I
I
COL.
NAME
Entry Field for Record Code SM
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12-13
Source Group
Number
00-31 = number
This field determines the ..5xxce group
number.
14-29
Message
A-Z
o-9
I
?
=
.
*
,
This field determines the source message up
to 16 characters long.
#’
&
and blank=
allowable entries
SVR 5210
8187
D-31 9
TL-130400-1001
Record Code SP:
Special Messages
16.8 Record Code SP, Figure 16.8, defines selected messages
that a supervisor can send to an agent. The system supports a
maximum of eight messages.
r---------r-r------‘------------------------~-------------------------------~
I
I
I 1:
I
f
I
I
I
Nl
t Dl
I
I
EI
’ ?.!
T5334
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MESSAGE
(ASCtl CHARACTERS)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
T-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T
-r-r-t-r-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-i
I1 I1 I1 I1 11 I1 11 I1 11 11 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l
~7~6~9101112131415161718191011121314151617181910111213141516171819101
c-+-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-~
51510151
PI01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--L-L-~-L-L-*-~-I-~-~-~
-1-~-1-1-~-~-1-*-~-~-*-~-*-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-*-~-----~
L
Figure 16.8
Record Code SP: Special Messages Data Sheet
Table 16.8
COL.
NO.
181
101
C-4
I I
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code SP
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12
Message
Number
O-7 = number
This field determines the number assigned to
the message.
-This number is used by the system for
identification purposes.
13-28
Message
A-Z
o-9
I
?
=
.
*
,
This field determines the special message that
will appear on the agent’s instrument.
-This message can be up to 16 characters
long.
#’
$
and blank=
allowable entries
D-320
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code TM:
Supervisor Talk/Monitor
Repertory Dial
Key Code
16.9 Record Code TM, Figure 16.9, defines the supervisor’s
repertory dial key code (one maximum). This table has been
expanded to collect key codes for the silent monitor feature.
T-----‘---r-------------------------------~-------------------------------~---~
I
I
i
I
I
I
s.”
L
I
I
I
I
T5336
i
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUPERVISOR’S SILENT
MONITOR DIAL KEY CODE
I
(ASCII CHARACTERS)
Figure 16.9
SVR 5210
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
.
IT;
; R’
I A’
I N’
I s;
IC’
Is?1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~-r-T-t-T-t-T-T-T-T-r-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-t-r-r-T-r-r-~-r-r-r-~-r-r-T-r-r-i
I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 11 I1 II 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l4l
~7~8~9~0~11213141516~7181910~1121314151617181910111213141516171819101112131
c-~-+-+-u-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
517lOlTI~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
1 I
I
I
I
I
-L-L-L-L--*-*-~-~^-~-~-~-~-~-~-~_~-~--C-*-~-*-*-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~--~
L
I
I
I
I
I
T5349
I
I
f
SUPERVISOR’S DIAL
KEY CODE
(ASCII CHARACTERS)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:-:
I81
IO I
&-.I
I
i
Record Code TM: Supervisor Talk/Monitor Repertory Dial Key Code Data
Sheet
8187
D-321
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.9
COL.
NO.
12-27
COL.
NAME
Supervisor’s
Dial Key Code
x-.”
Entry Fields for Record Code TM
VALID
ENTRIES
A-Z
O-9
I
?
=
.
*
I ‘.
..
.,
?i
$
and blank=
allowable entries
28-43
Supervisor’s A-Z
Silent Monitor O-9
Dial Key Code
/
?
=
.
*
,
..
.I
#’
$
and blank=
allowable entries
D-322
8187
COMMENTS
This field determines the supervisor’s dial
repertory key code assigned to the
supervisor’s talk monitor dial key. The dial
key code can be a maximum of 16
characters.
NOTE: The following special ASCII characters
can also be used as entries in the
supervisor’s dial key code:
& = pause
(= in character position 1, repertory dial key
applies to line 1
) = in character position 1, repertory dial key
applies to line 1
-z = in character position line 1
> = in character position line 2
% = hookswitch flash
@ = release
This field determines the supervisor’s dial
repertory key code assigned to the
supervisor’s silent monitor dial key. The dial
key code can be a maximum of 16
characters.
NOTE: The following special ASCII characters
can also be used as entries in the
supervisor’s dial key code:
& = pause
(= in character position 1, repertory dial key
applies to line 1
) = in character position 1, repertory dial key
applies to line 1
< = in character position line 1
> = in character position line 2
% = hookswitch flash
@ = release
TL-130400-1001
Record Code FM:
Recorder Announcer
.-i.
-I
I
16.10 Record Code RA, Figure 16.10, defines the recorder
announcer locations used for CAS Main/ACD functions. The
CAS Main/ACD feature supports up to five dedicated recorder
announcers; however, only three recorder announcers can be
used per agent group. One of these is used as a night
recording. The night recording advises that the “office is closed,
please call again.”
I
T5345
I
RA#l
;
,
ALT
Fa#l
I
/
I
i
I
RA#2
I
1
,
ALT
RA#2
,
/
RA #3
I
I
I
;R
,T
,N
I
T5345
I
I
R R R R;
T T T T,
N N N N,
I
I
I
1
I
I
t
I
I ’
I
’ I
’ I
’ I
I
I
’
I
’ I
’
I
’ I
’
I
’ I
1 I
’ I
’ I
I
;
1 I
’
1
; I
I
’
I
’ I
I
I
’
I
’
I
’ I
1 I
’
1
’ I
;
;
1
1 I
I’
’ I
;
I
’ I
f
I
I
I
1
ir’T-,-t-,-+-:-,-,-t-~-~-~-t-~-~-~-t-~-~-~-t-~-~-~-----I,-;
L T-T-T-T -+-T-T-T-j
’
I1 I1 I1 II I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 1 1
l212121212121212121213131313131313131313l41
I
l
I
18,
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IO,
L4-&-~
.’ .’ *’ ,’ .’ w
>I
,I .I .I
.I
&
,I .I ,I ,I .I *
;I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I I I
I
I
1 I-;-;-t-j
.
C-~-~-L-~-L-~-L-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-,
2
Figure 16.10
SW 5210
Record Code RA: Recorder Announcer Data Sheet
8187
D-323
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.10
COL.
NO.
12
COL.
NAME
Recorder
Announcer #l
PEC
~.
17-19
20
21-23
24
D-324
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
O=PECO
- = not selected
If recorder announcer #1 is used, enter 0.
000-063 = trunk
number
-- = not
selected
Identify the trunk used in support of recorder
announcer #l.
-This recording is normally used to inform
incoming calls that no agents are available to
answer the call because all agents are busy.
-Some applications use RA #l to provide
other information as well.
Alternate
Recorder
Announcer #l
PEC
O=PECO
- = not selected
If alternate recorder announcer #1 is used,
enter 0.
-The alternate RA #l can provide the same
or a different message as RA #1 and provide
additional access.
Alternate
Recorder
Announcer #l
Trunk Number
000-063 = trunk
number
-- = not
selected
Identify the trunk used in support of alternate
recorder announcer #l .
Recorder
Announcer #2
PEC
O=PEC 0
- = not selected
If recorder announcer #2 is used, enter 0.
RA #2 can provide a second recording when
agents are still busy.
Recorder
Announcer #2
Trunk Number
000-063 = trunk
number
-- = not
selected
Identify the trunk used in support of recorder
announcer #2.
Alternate
Recorder
Announcer #2,
PEC
O=PECO
- = not selected
If alternate recorder announcer #2 is used,
enter 0.
-The alternate RA #2 can provide the same
message as RA #2 or a different mesage. It
also provides additional access.
13-15 _’ Recorder
Announcer #l
-Trunk Number
_
16
Entry Fields For Record Code RA
6167
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.10
Entry Fields for Record Code RA (Continued)
000-l 27 = trunk
- = not selected
Identify the trunk used in support of alternate
recorder announcer #2.
er announcer #3 is used, enter 0.
order announcer is used for the night
Announcer #3
N = not selected
Announcer #l
-A trunk must be answered before an RA
message can be heard (a ringdown central
to an RA without answer supervision being
returned.
33
Return Answer
on Alternate
Recorder
Announcer #l
Y = return answer
N = not selected
Enter Y if alternate RA #l has message return
answer supervision.
34
Return Answer
on Recorder
Announcer #2
Y = return answer
N = not selected
Enter Y if RA #2 has message return answer
supervision.
35
Return Answer
on Alternate
Recorder
Announcer #2
Y = return answer
N = not selected
Enter Y if alternate RA #2 has message return
answer supervision.
36
Return Answer
on Recorder
Announcer #3
Y = return answer
N = not selected
Enter Y if RA #3 has message return answer
supervision.
SVR 5210
8187
D-325
TL-130400-1001
Record Code SD:
CAS Secondary
Directory Numbers
16.11 Record Code SD, Figure 16.11, defines the secondary
directory numbers of a branch that are directed to the primary
directory numbers of that branch. All secondary directory
numbers must be unique and cannot be a primary directory
number or a pilot number of a station hunt group.
I
I
I
CAS SECONDARY DIRECTORY NUMBERS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T-------T----I
I
4
5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--7-------T-------;
I
I
6
7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
5-T-L-T-T-+-T-T-T-+
I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 1 1 I1 11 11 1212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4l4l4l4l
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
171819101112131415161718~9~0i1~2t314i51617181910111213141516171819101112131
c-+-+-*-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
lOl8lOl~l~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I 1 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
L-*-~---L-L-*-~-~-~--C-~-~-*-*-~-L-~
-~-*-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
I
I
r-------------------____r_______________---------------------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c--e---I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
-------
T
-------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
;
I
:-T-T-T-+-T-T-T-+
-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T+-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-T-i
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
141516171819101112131415l6l7l8l9l011121314151617l81910111213141516171
L-*-l-*-*-~-l-l-l-*-*-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-,
9
Figure 16.11
D-326
10
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
i
IT
IR
-l
I
IA
IN
IS
Ic
IO
ID
IE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
b-:
18
I
IO I
L - J
Record Code SD: CAS Secondary Directory Numbers Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 16.11
COL.
NO.
12-15
COL.
NAME
Primary
Directory
Numbers
s-
Entry Fields for Record Code SD
VALID
ENTRIES
0000-9999 =
number
....
16-55
SVR 5210
CAS Secondary 0000-9999 =
Numbers
number
-m-w = N/A
NOTE: The
numbers must be
filled in from right
to left;
if dashes are
used, they must be
consistent,
ah37
COMMENTS
Assign the primary directory number of a line
that is to have secondary directory numbers.
-The primary directory number must have an
n-displayable class of service with SD (CAS
secondary number) specified.
-This number must be a valid directory
number appearing on Record Code LD.
This field determines the CAS Branch
secondary directory numbers.
-Enter the secondary directory numbers
associated with a primary directory number.
-These numbers are divided into IO fourdigit number groups.
-Columns 16-l 9 cannot be dashed.
-If three-digit numbers are used, they must
be right justified.
NOTE: A line number defined on Record
Code LD, with a class of service specifying a
secondary directory number, must appear as
the primary directory number on Record Code
SD.
D-327
TL-130400-1001
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
D-328
8187
SVR 5210
PD-200
PACKET DATA
17.0 This section describes the record codes required to
define the various system packet data features. The following
record codes are required:
l
Record Code RT defines the data system routing patterns.
l
Record Code CP defines additional call routing information.
l
Record Code AP defines the system’s APMs (Asynchronous
Packet Managers).
e Record Code AQ defines port parameters that can be modifiec’
by another device.
o Record Code XP defines the system’s SPMs (Synchronous
Packet Managers).
l
Record Code Pl defines the ADMP parameters.
l
Record Code P2 defines additional ADMP parameters.
l
Record Code Cl defines global information.
l
Record Code C2 defines additional global information.
e Record Code SR defines PD-200 speed call numbers.
In addition to the above record codes, FR, LD, and SL must be
completed for a data system.
SVR 5210
8187
D-329
TL-130400-I 001
Record Code RT:
Data System
Routing
17.1 Record Code RT, Figure 17.1 defines the system
numbering plan by groups according to the type of usage. Since
each server number represents one type of usage, one entry is
required per server number. The sub-port field (columns 2930) must be dashed for both asynchronous a.rld synchronous
(X.25) groups. Primary and secondary destination fields
(columns 33-42) are only used if the usage type defined in
columns 15-16 is 01 or 02. The primary and secondary
destination fields define the VPLC (Voice Packet Line Card)
location and the VPLC circuit, which is connected to the
associated SPM (Synchronous Packef Manager). Any X.121
address defined on this record code must also be defined on
Record Code CP.
NOTE: A NIC (Network Interface Card) is treated the same as an
SPM (X.25).
r---------~---------~---------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
E
E
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
z
8
;
X. 121 ADDRESS
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!A
f
x
f
E
I’
I
I
r - - i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
DNIC
t
t
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
f
: -T-t-t- T-t-T-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-;-
I
SERVER
$
PRIMARY
IX
I
I I
I M ;I X.25 ROUTE
, , DESTINATION
IU
I
I
f
I
;
I
i
IM
I
,
I
SECONDARY
I
I
I
II
SI
I
S ; S RI Pi Gi C Si C; P; G; C Si C’
U I I 01 EI R I A LI I I EI R I A LI I;
; ; ‘E A; CI 01 R 01 R I C; $1 fj
p ; El
, UI D TI CI
0 I
I PI
I PI
I u;
BI
I I
I YI
I I
’ ‘I
B I
I I I
ITI
I
I
1 TI
T-T-T-T-T-T~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7~8~91011121314151617181910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011121
: -1-~-1-1-1-1-1-~-1-1-1-1-1
1 1 1 1
I
8 I
1 I
I
I
I
1 1 1 I
I
a I
1 I
; 1-r’ ’
’
’
’
I’
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 17.1
D-330
8
I
i
Record Code RT: Data System Routing Data Sheet
6167
SVR 5210
T-L-1 30400-l 001
Table 17.1
Entry Fields for Record Code RT
COMMENTS
them. This field is generally set to 5 for
asynchronous devices. The types are:
00= X.25 single line. The device routed to is
an X.25 SPM, and only one device can
receive calls to this address.
01 = X.25 load share. Two SPMs can receive
calls to this address, and the one with the
most current LCN (Logical Channel Number)
capacity receives the call. This feature is
often used to double the LCN capacity into a
single X.25 host or to provide connections into
two physical hosts that act as a single virtual
02= X.25 backup. Two SPMs are also
addressed by this type, but the secondary
device is used only in cases where the
primary cannot be used (either the line is
down or it is at LCN capacity). This provides
an emergency route to a host via another
PD-200 or a PDN (Public Data Network).
03 = ADMP. The Administrative PseudoPacket Device Handler can be specified in the
routing tables. Calls to it are treated like a
single line X.25 route, but are sent to the
ADMP.
04 = asynchronous direct ordered non-rotary
groups. Asynchronous devices can be
directly addressed by sub-address (digits 13
and 14 of the X.121 address can be from 01
- 89), the group is built in incrementally
increasing sub-address order. Terminals
are normally put into this category.
05 = Asynchronous, direct-ordered rotary
hunt groups. Asynchronous devices can be
called directly as above or can be addressed
as a group with sub-address 00. When a
sub-address is used, the first device
available and usable in the group is selected;
if it does not answer (e.g., - host ringing
timeout), the next available usable device is
tried, and so on.
SVR 5210
8187
D-331
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.1
COL.
NO.
15-16
cont’d
Entry Fields for Record Code RT (Continued)
COL.
NAME
Usage
VALID
ENTRIES
06 = asynchronous, random-ordered nonrotary groups. Asynchronous devices are
addressed directly by sub-address 01-89,
but the actual order in which the group is built
depends only on the order in which the
devices are loaded and initialized. Unlike the
direct-ordered variety, these groups can
have any sub-address (from 01 - 89) no
matter what the group size. Direct-ordered
groups are limited in sub-address from 01 to
size-of-group. Terminals can be configured
in this type of group.
07 = asynchronous, random-ordered rotary
hunt groups. Asynchronous devices are
addressable with sub-address 00 or (directly)
with any sub-address allowed in the group.
00
__
COMMENTS
01
02
03
04
05
06
:;
17-20
X.1 21 Address
(DNIC)
21-28
X.121 Address O-9
(server)
- = not selected
Indicate the server number of the X.121
address used for this route.
29-30
X.1 21 Address
(sub-port)
Indicate the sub-port number of the X.121
address used for this route.
-This field must be dashed.
D-332
O-9 = select
- = not selected
-- = not
selected,
this is the only
allowed entry
8187
This field contains the Data Network Identifier
Code (DNIC: first 4 digits of the X.121
address), the main server address (next 8
digits), and port number (last 2 digits).
-The full address is structured as DNIC
SSSSSSSS PP, where SSSSSSSS is the 8digit server number and PP is the subaddress number of the port.
-The DNIC will usually be 3110. The server
number will identify the PD-200 network end
routing group (when data calls are made
outside this network e.g., to Telenet).
-The network assigns the X.121 sever ID
number. The port number is the portion of the
address that is used to sequence “ordered”
type asynchronous device groups.
-Column 17 cannot be dashed.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17. a
COL.
NO.
31-32
Entry Fields for 3ecord Code RT (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COL.
NAME
COMMENTS
Maximum Size
of This Rotary
01-89 = number
Identify the number of asynchronous devices
that make up this rotary group.
-This is the number of ports actually defined
for this group of devices.
-The field must be less than or equal to the
Maximum Number To Configure field.
-This field applies only if columns 15-16 are
marked 05 or 07.
-If columns 15-l 6 are marked 00, 01, 02,
03, 04, or 06, this field must be dashed.
-Since each number defined here requires a
software address, it is not recommended to
overbuild for possible growth.
Primary X.25
Route
Destination PEC
0 = PEC number
This field determines the location of the first
route used by an SPM (X.25) or NIC when the
usage type defined in columns 15-16 is 01 or
02.
-If the usage type defined in columns 15-l 6
is 00, 03, 04, 05, 06, or 07, this field must be
dashed.
Enter PEC 0.
Group
A-D = group
number
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within PEC 0 is
this card?
Card Slot
00-l 0 = slot
number
Which card slot within the group is this card?
37
Circuit Number
O-7 = assigned
circuit number
-=N/A
Which circuit on the card is being used?
38
Secondary X.25
Route
Destination. PEC
0 = PEC number
This field determines the location of the
second route used by an SPM (X.25) or NIC
when the usage type defined in columns 1516isOl or02.
-If the usage type defined in columns 15-16
is 00, 03, 04, 05, 06, or 07, this field must be
dashed.
Enter PEC 0.
39
Group
A-D = group
number
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within PEC 0 is
this card?
Card Slot
00-l 0 = slot
number
Which card slot within the group is this card?
Circuit Number
O-7 = assigned
circuit number
-=N/A
Which circuit on the card is being used?
35-36
40-41
42
L
SVR 5210
8187
D-333
TL-I
30400-l 001
Record Code CP:
Data System
Common Port
17.2 Record Code CP, Figure 17.2, defines the parameters for
the common asynchronous and synchronous (X.25) port
attributes. The parameters required by the data system ADMP
processor are also defined. The X.121 address is used for data
call setup and verification. The system requires an entry in this
record code for each of the following:
* SPM (Synchronous Packet Manager)
l APM (Asynchronous Packet Manager)
l ADMP (each two-card set)
l NIC (Network Interface Card)
,Record Code RT establishes groups of lines by usage; Record
Code CP identifies each member of each group. The sub-ports
for the asynchronous groups (established on Record Code RT)
must be defined here. Sub-ports are never defined for SPMs or
NICs. A synchronous (X.25) group can have a maximum of two
synchronous members. If a synchronous (X.25) group has two
members, both members must have the same X.121
address.
r----^----r---------~---------------------------~-----------------------------I
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
I
II
z
I
I
I
NI
ii
I
I
I
DI
I
I
El
I
1
f
0
I
I
I
Xl
1 I
1
I
I AI FI TI W I BI M I MI A, Dl , , A;
I
E
I
CI AI HI II AI AI Al C, Al S, D,
I
X. 121 ADDRESS
I Cl St RI NI RI KI Kl c, Tl
I MI
I
I 01 TI UI DI
Y
I EI El EI A, Dl PI
I
I
I UI
I PI 01 Cl I
I
’ PI
I
I
I
E
; y; 2; y; W I AI C, pt T, Si 5; 0:
I
I
I
I
I LI AI Al
I Yl IlRl
I
I
I LI
I &I Ll Ll I I Cl SI Cl
I
I
I
I
: CI AI CI
I E,M;
Fi
I
I
I
I
I AI CI LI P I’ 7 kI D’I O’
I
LI DI
I
I DI
L I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LI
CI
A,
A
I
TI
I
I Cl Ll C, Al RI
I
I s ;
I
I
I Ll EI SI Cl 01 TI Al EI El I ,
I
I ;I El “A ?I 7;
I u
I
I
IO1 L l C l
I
,DI
I
DNIC
SERVER
I B ;
I
I
T
’ 7 7; s’I K’
EI DI
I LI TI
f
I Cl 0; R Of Rf
ICI
I
I
I
UI
D
T;
5,
I
i
DI
A
I
NI
TI
EI
DI S’
I
I p I
IEI
,
I PI
I
I
I EI NI EI
I VI El
Id
I
I
I
I
f
1s
I
I
I 1’
I
I
;
I VI CI GI St 11 VI
IAI I
I
,
I
I
I
T
;
I
I
1
I T;
I
I
II El
I IICI
II
ILI
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
F
IL,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
i
I
; -T-T-+-T- t-t-t-T-t-t-T-T-T-tT-r-T-r-r-T-r-r-r-t-T-TI
I
I
I1 I1 I1 11 I1 I1 11 1
1
I1 I1 ,212,21212,21212,2,213131313131313131313l4,4,4l4l4l4l
1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 12131415,6,718191Ot112,3141~16l~l6191O1112,31415161716l9,O1112,314151
c - + - + - + - t - .+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
1615101~Ipl
I, I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-*-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-*-~-~-*-~
L-~-~----L-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-*-~-~-~-~-~
Figure 17.2
D-334
Record Code CP: Data System Common Port Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.2
Entry Fields for Record Code CP
COMMENTS
oup (A, B, C, or D) within PEC 0 is
-Card slot 11 cannot be used.
X.1 21 Address
This field determines the DNIC of the X.121
- = not selected
This is the X.121 address for the device as the
network sees it. This address is like a phone
number for a data network.
-The X.121 addresses are gotten from a
network just as DID numbers are gotten from
a CO.
-The PD-200 system requires X.121
addresses.
-This address is used in the processing of
X.25 call setup and verification.
-If the device is asynchronous, this address
must be 14 digits.
-If the device is a synchronous X.25 or if the
device is an ADMP, this address can contain
O-l 4 digits.
-X.121 addresses are checked by data base
or the UCB/DCP. All X.121 addresses must
be different.
The DNIC is the first four digits of the X.121
address and will usually be 3110.
-311 = USA or country number: 0 = Telenet or
newtork number.
-The DNIC identifies the PD-200 network.
-If data calls will be made outside this
network (e. g., to Telenet), server numbers are
assigned by the network.
-Dashes cannot be entered in column 17.
SVR 5210
8187
D-335
r
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.2
COL.
NO.
21-28
Entry Fields for Record Code CP (Continued)
COL.
NAME
X.1 21 Address
(sever number)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
O-9 = number
- = not selected
identify the sever number of the X.121
address.
-The sever number is the next eight digits
after the DNIC.
-The sever number identifies the PD-200
routing group.
9.
29-30
X.1 21 Address
(sub-port)
O-9 = number
- = not selected
Identify the sub-port number of the X.121
address.
-Only asynchronous devices require an entry
in this field.
-These last two digits of the X.121 address
are the port number and specify the specific
device.
31-34
Device or Port
Type
Term
Host
This field determines the type of endpoint
device to which the APM or SPM is
connected.
-If this field is defined as an asynchronous
terminal or host, the asynchronous
configuration tables will be used. Otherwise,
use the X.25 tables.
-Term = APM is attached to an asynchronous
terminal or modem.
-Host =APM is attached to an asynchronous
host.
-X.25 = SPM is attached to any X.25 device.
-PX25 = device is an ADMP.
NOTE: If columns 31-34 = PX25, columns
14-15 must contain the slot number of the
ADMP A card and column 16 must be marked
0.
X.25
or
PX25
35
Account Calls
From/To This
Device
Y = collected
N = not collected
(always N for
ADMP)
Enter Y if accounting of calls to/from this
device is collected.
-If this parameter is enabled, an accounting
record will be generated.
-If both devices involved in a call have this
field disabled, no account record will be
generated.
36
Fast Selected
Acceptance
Supported
Y = selected
N = not selected
(always N for
asynchronous)
Enter Y if the connected device supports
accepting of fast select.
-If this is enabled and a fast select call is
directed toward this device, that call will be
allowed to connect as long as there are no
other facility conflicts. Otherwise, the call is
cleared.
-This field is only used with SPM ports.
D-336
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.2
Entry Fields for Record Code CP (Continued)
COMMENTS
N = not selected
window and packet size negotiation that is
according to X.25 standards.
-If enabled, the window and packet size
facilities will always be placed in call request
packets to the device and checked in any call
or accept packets from the device.
-Standard CCITT X.25 negotiation rules will
be enforced. If not enabled, the facilities will
not be allowed from the device and will not be
sent to that device.
-Only X.25 SPMs can negotiate these
parameters; APMs should be set to N.
-This field determines whether or not window
and packet size negotiation is supported.
-This field is only used with SPM ports (X.25
in columns 31-34).
-If columns 31-34 are marked Term, Host
or PX25, mark this field N.
39
Bar Calls From
Device
Y = barred
N = not barred
Enter Y if the call processor allows outgoing
calls to the device through the network.
-If calls cannot be placed from the device, it
becomes a terminate-only device.
40
Bar Calls To
Device
Y = barred
N = not barred
Enter Y if the call processor can allow any
ingoing calls to the device through the
network.
-If calls cannot be placed to the device, it
becomes an originate-only device.
SVR 5210
8187
D-337
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.2
COL.
NO.
41
Entry Fields for Record Code CP (Continued)
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
Make Paid Calls Y = selected
(always Y for
.~.
ADMP)
N = not selected
-..
_
..
COMMENTS
This field is only valid for asynchronous
terminals/modems connected to APMs.
-The field specifies the charging default for
the connect command from this device.
-The default is either to make caller paid
calls or collect (reverse charge) calls.
-This is part of the facility field of the call
packet.
-If this field is enabled (Y), the default will be
the placement of paid calls. This port is billed
by the network for calls it originates.
-If disabled (N), the default will be collect
calls from this device.
-The terminal user may enter an R
(requesting reverse charging) or a P
(requesting paid call) at the end of the connect
command and this will always override the
default.
-If this column is marked Y and column 42 is
marked N, the normal connect command will
fail to work properly.
-Since the host usually pays a call charge,
most terminals do not make paid calls.
42
Accept
Calls
Collect
Y = selected
(always Y for
ADMP)
N = not selected
This field specifies whether or not this device
is billable.
, -Billable devices may initiate paid calls (or
collect calls) and should accept a call that has
the collect facility specified in the call packet.
-If this field is enabled (Y), the call processor
will allow such calls to the device and this
device will have to pay for the call.
-Otherwise, calls having the collect (reverse
charging) facility are not be able to connect to
this device (the call will be cleared).
-If this field is marked N, this device may
initiate only collect calls.
-If this column is marked Y and column 42 is
marked N, accounting information will be lost
for collect calls.
-Y is normally selected.
43
Is the Data
System
Configured as
DCE?
Y = selected
(always Y )
N = not selected
Enter Y if the system is configured as a DCE.
-Always enter Y for ADMP and NIC.
D-338
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-I 001
Table 17.2
Entry Fields for Record Code CP (Continued)
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
44
Is the Data
System a DCE?
Y-
Y = selected
NOTE: Enter Y if
SPM is connected
to a PDN (Public
Data Network)
N = not selected
(usually N)
This field determines if this device is
configured as a DCE.
ADMP or MDR
M=MDR
- = not connected
Enter M if the port is connected to an MDR.
-If columns 31-34 are marked PX25, enter
A in this field.
MDA = PX25
COMMENTS
device
SVR 5210
8187
D-339
TL-130400-1001
Record Code AP:
Data System
Asynchrouous Port
17.3 Record Code AP, Figure 17.3, defines the common
interface parameters for each APM (Asynchronous Packet
Manager). This record code is only used for asynchrouous
ports, and an entry for each APM must be found here.
There are three types of parameters that are defined for each of
the terminals or groups of terminals. They are:
.=.
....
l
l
l
X.3 parameters
Local parameters
Optional subscription parameters
For normal applications, all terminals within the same group
(having the same DNIC and server number) have the same
parameters, depending on the terminal types.
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
X .35
III
. ..J
PARAMETERS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- I
i
I I
I
I
c-+-+-l-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
,
I
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
,
1
I
t
,
1
,
,
L-~-I--L-L--L-I--L-*-~-*-~
-1-~-1-*-1-~-~-~-~-1-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
-r-------------------------------------------------------------------------I--~
1fj171,,1A#p,
1
,
,
,
1
i
,
,
1,
,
I
I
i
I
I
LOCAL X .35
PARAMETERS
I
I
I
I
I
I
Al
N’
I s,
I
I Cl
I 01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~-r-T-~-t-T-+-T-t-~-r-T;-/-/-/-T-T-+-T-T-+
-T-T-t-T-T-t-t-t-t-t-t-t--r-t
1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 ,515151515,6,61616,616161616161717171717,7l7l7l7,
1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4
,5,617,8,910,112131415161718191011121314l51617181!
c-+-+-+-+-l--+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASCII
j
ASCII
i
ASCII
Figure 17.3
SVR 5210
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
$I
El
;
, 50 MS ; 5SEC
I
I
I
I
DI
El
1
I
I
’
,
I
’
I
’
I
1
1
I
I
I
I
I-’ -+-;
7181
9101
-c-4
I
I
I
A. -.I.-.4
Record Code AP: Data System Asynchronous Port Data Sheet
t-v87
D-341
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.3A
Entry Fields for Record Code AP
COMMENTS
-Enter PEC 0.
Which circuit on the card is being used?
suggested value =
1 for terminals
20
Pad Echo
0 = no echo
1 = echo
suggested value =
1 for terminals
0 for host
8187
transfer mode.
0 = escape not possible
1 = DLE character initiates escape
2-127 = selected character initiates escape
-If another ASCII character is required, see
Table 17.3B.
-This parameter specifies the character used
to indicate to the terminal that the user wants
to enter command mode.
-The value is the decimal equivalent of the
ASCII character to be typed.
-This is X.3 parameter 1.
This field specifies the default value of ECHO.
-If this parameter is enabled, then ECHO will
occur in data transfer mode; otherwise, no
echoing will occur in data transfer mode.
-This field is normally set at 0 for full duplex
and 1 for half duplex.
If station equipment does not display
information that is keyed in, then try setting this
field to 1.
-This is X.3 parameter 2.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.3A
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
21-23
3ata
Forwarding
Zhalacters
24-26
1
SVR 5210
,dle Timer
Entry Fields for Record Code AP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
0
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
suggested value =
2 for terminals
0 for host
0 = data will not be
forwarded in the
timeout.
l-255 = length of
delay in 50-ms
increments
suggested value =
20 for terminals
0 for host
8187
COMMENTS
Indicate a predefined character or set of
characters that are typed by the user (DTE) to
tell the terminal to transmit/forward a packet.
0 = user cannot initiate data forwarding
1 = alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, O9)
2 = carriage return
4= characters ESC, BEL, ENQ, ACK
8 = characters DEL, CAN, DC2
16 = characters ETX, EOT
32= characters HT, LF, VT, FF
64= a character inserted by the user in user
text column 0 or 1 which is not any of the
characters listed in O-32 above
128 = all other characters not mentioned
above
-This is X.3 parameter 3.
Indicate the allowed interval between input
(DTE) characters.
-When this interval is exceeded, the timeout
causes the forwarding of a packet.
-The time is selected in 50-ms increments,
so a selection of 2 = 100 ms.
-This field specifies the default value of the
idle timer.
-This timer clocks the time between
characters.
-If this timer expires, all of the characters
buffered up to that point will be forwarded in a
packet.
-This is X.3 parameter 4.
D-343
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.3A
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
27
Device
Control
Flow
>-
...
_
28
D-344
Entry Fields for Record Code AP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
0
or
1
suggested value =
0 for terminals
1 for host
.-
Printing of
0
Service Signals 1
or
5
suggested value =
5 for terminals
0 for host
8187
COMMENTS
This field allows the PAD (remote end) to
temporarily slow the output from this device
when the PAD is momentarily unable to
receive more data .
This parameter determines the default value of
device flow control.
-If this parameter is enabled, the PAD will be
able to flow control the device when the PAD
falls behind in processing or if the amount of
characters buffered becomes too great due to
transmission condition or network slow-down.
-When the PAD sends a control-S, the
device stops transmission to the PAD. If the
device continues to transmit and overruns the
buffer, data is lost.
-When the PAD becomes unblocked, it
transmits a control-Q. It continues to
transmit this character until the device starts
sending data. Then the PAD sends an
indication to the connected device that it can
continue.
0 = disable use of flow control
1 = enable use of flow control
-This is X.3 parameter 5.
Indicate wehther or not this device prints
network service signals.
-Example: Network tells you “connected”
upon completing a connection.
0 = no service signals sent to DTE
1 = all service signals except PAD prompt are
sent
5 = all service signals sent including PAD
prompt
-This is X.3 parameter 6.
-This parameter sets the default value for
control of PAD service signals.
-This parameter controls the sending of the
PAD generated messages and disallows or
allows different classes of messages.
-These message classes are user
acknowledgments and prompts.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.3A
Entry Fields for Record Code AP (Continued)
COMMENTS
uggested value =
_ 1 for terminals
8 = escape from the data transfer mode
21 = send an interrupt plus an indication of a
break message to PAD and discard output to
O-31 = number o f
Indicate how many padding characters are to
be inserted after a carriage return.
-Printing devices need sufficient time for the
mechanism to perform the carriage return.
-This parameter determines the number of
null characters to wait before continuing to
send any other characters.
-There are no real characters sent. The
APM/SPM waits the amount of time it would
take to transmit those characters.
-This is X.3 parameter 9.
suggested value =
7 for terminals
33-35
SVR 5210
Line Width
0
or
1-255
suggested value =
80 for terminals
0 for host
8187
Indicate the maximum number of output
characters printed per line at the user (DTE)
device.
0 = this function will not be performed
automatically
l-255 = number of characters per line
-This parameter specifies the default value of
line folding.
-This parameter determines the number of
characters to transmit before an automatic
carriage return/line feed is sent. This causes
long lines to fold or wrap onto the next line.
-If this parameter is 0, the function is
disabled. A backspace will cause the internal
counter to be decremented by one for each
backspace character received. A carriage
return will reset the counter.
-This parameter is normally set at 0 since
most station equipment performs this function
automatically. Otherwise, standard line
lengths are 80 or 132 characters.
-This is X.3 parameter 10.
D-345
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.3A
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
36-37
Transmission
Speed
.=.
.
_
Entry Fields for Record Code AP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
0
2
3
identify the transmission rate at which data is
sent.
-This is a read-only parameter.
0= 110 bps
(uses 2 stop bits)
2 = 300 bps
(uses 1 stop bit)
3= 1.2 kbps
(uses 1 stop bit)
12 = 2.4 kbps
(uses 1 stop bit)
13 = 4.8 kbps
(uses 1 stop bit)
14 = 9.6 kbps
(uses 1 stop bit)
15= 19.2 kbps
(uses 1 stop bit)
This is X.3 parameter 11.
12
13
14
or
15
38
Flow Control of
PAD
39
Line Feed
0
Insertion After 1
Carriage Return 4
5
(CR)
6
or
7
suggested value =
4 for terminals
0 for host
D-346
COMMENTS
0 = PAD flow
control not
allowed.
1 = PAD flow
control allowed
suggested value =
1 for terminals
1 for host
8187
This field determines whether or not a signal is
sent by the user terminal (DTE) to warn the
remote end that this terminal is temporarily
unable to receive more data.
-This field specifies the default value of flow
control.
-If this parameter is enabled (Y), then the
device and/or user of the device can flow
control the PAD.
-This will disallow transmission of control-S
and control-Q. However, if this parameter is
disabled (N), the device cannot flow control
the PAD, but the device can transmit the flow
control characters through the network.
-Control-S stops the PAD and control-Q
ends flow control. This is commonly done by
printers and users that get behind in some
type of listing and wish to catch up.
-This is X.3 parameter 12.
Indicate whether or not an automatic insertion
of a line feed after any carriage return is
transmitted.
0 = no line feed inserted
1 = insert line feed after each carriage return
sent to the user terminal (DTE) as data
4= insert line feed after each carriage return
sent to user terminal (DTE) as an echo
5= combination of 1 and 4
6= insert line feed after each carriage return
sent from the user terminal as data and to the
user terminal as an echo
7= combination of 1 and 6
-This is X.3 parameter 13.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.3A
Entry Fields for Record Code AP (Continued)
COMMENTS
suggested value =
2 for terminals
suggested value =
0 for terminals
perform the line feed.
-This parameter determines the default value
of line feed padding.
-This is the number of null characters after a
line feed is sent to a device that the system
will pause before sending additional data.
-The carriage return padding field is normally
assigned. If terminals lose information at the
beginning of each line, the value in this field
during the data Vans
previously inputted b
-The next three parameters determine the
control characters to be used if editing is
0 = editing not enabled during data transfer
1 = editing enabled during data transfer
-This parameter sets the default mode of the
editing function that the PAD performs. If this
parameter is enabled, the PAD will process
editing characters. This only applies to data
transfer mode. Editing will always be enabled
(Y) for command mode on terminals. If this
field is enabled, timers should be turned off
and the forwarding condition should be set to
transmit on carriage return. If this field is
disabled (N), all editing characters (LF, BS,
etc.) are lost in data transfer mode.
-This is X.3 parameter 15.
43-45
SW 5210
Backspace
Character
O-l 27 = character
suggested value =
8 (Control H) for
terminals
0 for host
8187
Identify the editing character that will delete
the previous character entered (backspace
function).
-See the previous ASCII character set to
select another character.
O-l 27 = ASCII character to be used for
character delete
-This is X.3 parameter 16.
D-347
TL-130400-1001
select another character.
O-127= ASCII character to be used for line
O-l 27 = character
suggested value =
18 (Control R) for
Identify the character to be used in editing
which will display the current contents of the
-See the previous ASCII character set to
select another character.
ASCII character to be used for line
r the appropriate value (O-127) from
Table 17.3B.
-This option selects local (not CCITT
standardized) parameter number 1.
-Asynchronous host = 127
-Each APM user can specify the device type
while connecting a call.
-The terminal type in this field will be used if
no other is specified by the user.
-The terminal type number choices are listed
in Table 17.3C.
-This option selects local (not CCITT
standardized) parameter number 1.
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.314
Entry Fields for Record Code AP (Continued)
COMMENTS
transparently through network (transmit parity
received through network)
1 = check local parity and send space parity
through network (ignore parity received
through network)
-This parameter determines the default value
of eighth bit transparency.
-This function specifies that the PAD should
or should not check parity.
-This field is normally set to N for
asynchronous devices.
-This field selects local (not CCITT
standardized
arameter number 2.
1 for terminals
sk the site if the host is
configured for odd or even parity.
-This parameter determines the parity of the
device if the device is a permanent terminal or
arameter number 3.
standardized) parameter number 4.
suggested value =
0 for terminals
l-255 = number of 50-ms increments before
the timer expires
-The selection must be made in increments
of 50 ms, so a selection of 2 = 100 ms.
-This option selects local (not CCITT
1 standardized) parameter number 5.
SVR 5210
8187
D-349
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.3A
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
61-63
Break Signal
Timing
%
....
6 4 - 6 6Command
Inactivity Timer
67-69
D-350
Entry Fields for Record Code AP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
002-006 = number
of increments
suggested value =
5 (250 ms) for
terminals
5 (250 ms) for host
Assign the length of the break signal to the
asynchronous device.
-The selection must be made in increments
of 50 ms, so a selection of 2 = 100 ms.
O-255 = number
of increments
suggested value =
12 (60 seconds)
for terminals
0 for host
If this timer is enabled, it drops the
connection when no user commands are sent
within the time period specified.
-The user may disable this timer by the user
command signal “Test No-Disconnect.”
-The selection must be made in increments
of 5 seconds each, so a selection of 2 = 10
seconds.
Data Transfer 0
Inactivity Timer or
l-255
suggested value =
0 for terminals
0 for host
6187
If this timer is enabled, it drops the
connection when data is not transmitted or
received within the time period specified.
0 = timer disabled.
l-255= number of increments (5 minutes
each)
-The selection must be made in increments
of 5 minutes, so a selection of 2 = 10 minutes.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.3A
COL.
NO.
70
...
SVR 5210
COL.
NAME
Data Set Signal
Wait-Down
Timer
.”
Entry Fields for Record Code AP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
Y = timer enabled
N = timer disabled
suggested value =
Y for terminals
N for host
8187
COMMENTS
This field determines whether or not this timer
is enabled or disabled.
-The timer controls the delay between the
time when the user disconnects (goes onhook) and the time when the connection is
actually dropped.
-If Y is selected (enable), mark Record
Code Cl, columns 46-48, with the actual
delay time.
-This configuration parameter determines
whether or not the port is configured to use
the DSS wait-down option.
-This option specifies the use of the
disconnect delay timer.
-This timer comes into effect any time the
PAD disconnects the device (terminal or
host). When a PAD drops its DSS, it begins
running this timer. When the timer expires,
the PAD can continue on to its next DSS
state.
-This parameter specifies whether or not
this timer value can be used.
=lf this field is enabled, the PAD will use the
timer that is defined on Record Code AP,
columns 24-26, for APMs or XP, columns
60-62, for SPMs; otherwise, no timer will be
run. This allows hosts that do not scan their
DSS very quickly to catch ports that were
remotely disconnected.
D-351
TL-130400-1001
Record Code AQ:
Data System
Asynchronous Port
Set/Read List
17.4 Record Code AQ, Figure 17.4, provides a list of parameters
applied to the remote end of a data call. These parameters
temporarily override the pre-existing parameters of the remote
end of a data call while a data call is connected to/from the port
specified on this record code. This allows the port specified in
this record code to control the configuration of its call partner on
both incoming and outgoing data calls. The remote port may be
reconfigured while the call is set up. It is restored to the original
configuration when the call is disconnected.
This option is normally implemented for host ports; however, any
asynchronous or synchronous (X.25) port can be assigned this
record code. The following rules apply for this record code:
l
Any port defined in columns 12-l 6 of this record code must
have an entry on Record Code CP.
l
If the port is asynchronous, it requires an entry on Record
Code AP.
l
If the port does not reconfigure the port at the remote end, an
entry on this record code is not needed.
The values assigned to the options defined on this record code
depend on the requirements of the device which is attached to
the port. For parameters that do not need reconfiguration
at call setup, enter a dash in the field.
T---------T---------------------------------------------------------------~---~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9
171819101112131416161718191011121314151617181910111213141516171819101112131
c-+-+-c-c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
1618101~l~l
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I I
I I1
L-~-I-~-L-L-I-I-I-~-~-~-~
-*-1-1-1-1-~-*-1-~-*-~-*-~-~-*-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-*-~
Figure 17.4
I
I
I
I
i
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
10’
L--I
L-2
Record Code AQ: Data System Asynchronous Port Set/Read List Data
Sheet
SVR 5210
8167
D-359
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.4
COL.
NO.
12
COL.
NAME
PEC
Entry Fields for Record Code AQ
VALID
ENTRIES
0 = PEC number
This field determines the location of the port.
What PEC is this card located in?
A-D = group
number
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within the PEC is
this card?
Card Slot
00-l 0 = slot
number
Which card slot within the group is this card?
Circuit Number
O-7 = assigned
circuit number
Which circuit on the card is being used?
.~.
13
14-15
16
17-19
20
D-360
COMMENTS
.r Group
Escape from
O-l 27
Data Transfer
Character
(ASCII Value)
Assign the ASCII character that allows a user
to stop the flow of data.
-This parameter specifies the character that
will be received to indicate that the terminal
user wants to enter command mode.
0 = escape not allowed
1 = DLE character initiates escape
2-l 27 = decimal representation of selected
ASCII character (see ASCII character set
table )
-This is X.3 parameter 1.
PAD Echo
Enter 1 if PAD echo is provided.
-This field determines the default value of
echo. If this parameter is enabled, then echo
will occur in data transfer mode; otherwise, no
echoing will occur in data transfer mode.
Generally, this field should be set to N for full
duplex and Y for half duplex. If station
equipment displays two of each character, set
this field to N. If station equipment does not
display information that is keyed in, then try
setting this field to Y.
-PAD echo provides for all input characters
to be echoed back to the device attached
during the data transfer mode
-This is applied only to full-duplex devices.
-This is X.3 parameter 2.
0 = no echo
1 = echo allowed
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.4
Entry Fields for Record Code AQ (Continued)
COMMENTS
device to begin transmission of a packet.
0 = user cannot initate data forwarding
1 = alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, O-
128 = number
4 = characters ESC, BEL, ENQ, ACK
8 = characters
16 = characters
32 = characters
64 = a character inserted by the user in text
column 0 or 1, which is not any of the
characters listed in O-32 above
Indicate the allowed intervals between the user
input characters.
-This field specifies the default value of the
l-255 = number
increments
27
SVR 5210
Ancillary Device
Flow Control
0 = disables flow
control
1 = enables flow
control
8187
-This timer clocks the time between
characters. If this timer expires, all of the
characters buffered up to that point will be
forwarded in a packet.
-Zero disables this timer.
-If this interval is exceeded, the timeout
causes the forwarding of a data packet.
-The time is selected in 50-ms increments,
so a selection of 2 = 100 ms.
-This is X.3 parameter 4.
Indicate whether or not the PAD (Packet
Assembler Disassembler) can temporarily
slow the output from this device when the PAD
is unable to receive more data.
-This parameter sets the default value of
device flow control.
-If this parameter is marked 1, the PAD can
flow control the device.
-Flow control is used when the PAD cannot
process data fast enough or when the amount
of characters buffered is too great (due to the
transmission condition or network slowdown).
D-361
TL-130400-1001
Entry Fields for Record Code AQ (Continued)
Table 17.4
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
27
Ancillary Device
(cont’d) Flow Control
%.
VALID
ENTRIES
0 = disables flow
control
1 = enables flow
control
..
28-29
Break Options 0
1
2
8
-The PAD sends a control-S, signaling the
device to stop transmission to the PAD.
Should the device continue to transmit and
overrun the buffer, data will be lost. When the
PAD becomes unblocked, it transmits a
control-Q. Transmission of this character
continues until the device starts sending data.
The PAD then signals the connected device to
continue data flow.
-This field is dependent upon column 35
being set to Y.
-This is X.3 parameter 5.
This field determines the action to be taken by
an APM when a user depresses the break key
at the device attached to the APM.
0 = nothing
1 = send an interrupt packet (X.25 special
packet) to the PAD
2= send a reset packet (X.25 special packet);
this can cause data to be lost.
8 = escape from data transfer mode
21 = send an interrupt packet (X.25 special
packet) plus indication of the break message
to the PAD; also discard the output to the user
U-E)
-This is X.3 parameter 7.
;i
30-31
COMMENTS
Padding
O-31 = number of
Characters After characters
Carriage Return inserted
8187
Assign the amount of padding characters,
inserted after a carriage return is depressed.
-Printing devices need sufficient time for the
mechanism to perform the carriage return.
-This parameter sets the number of null
characters to wait before continuing to send
any other characters.
NOTE: There are no real characters sent.
The APMSPM waits the amount of time it
would take to transmit those characters.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.4
CQL.
NO.
32-34
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
Line Width
.=.
...
_
Entry Fields for Record Code AQ (Continued)
0 = function
performed
automatically
l-255 = number
of characters per
line
Assign the the number of output characters to
be printed per line at the user device.
-This parameter sets the default value of line
folding. This determines the number of
characters to transmit before an automatic
carriage return/line feed is sent. This causes
long lines to fold or wrap to the next line. If
this field is set at 0, this function is disabled.
A backspace will cause the internal counter to
be decremented by one for each backspace
character received, and carriage return will
reset the counter. This field is normally set to
0 because most station equipment does this
automatically. Otherwise, standard line
lengths are 80 or 132 characters.
-This is X.3 parameter 10.
0 = PAD flow
control not allowed
1 = PAD flow
control allowed
If selected, this field determines that the APM
will send a signal when the device attached to
it is temporarily unable to receive more data.
-This field sets the default value of flow
control.
-If this field is marked 1, the device and/or
user of the device can flow control the PAD.
This disallows transmission of control-S and
control-Q.
-If this field is marked 0, the device cannot
flow control the PAD. However, the device
can transmit flow control characters through
the network.
-Control-S stops the PAD and control-Q
ends flow control.
This is commonly done by printers and users
that get behind and need to catch up.
-This is X.3 parameter 12.
..
35
Pad Flow
Control
36
Line Feed After 0
Carriage Return 1
4
(CR)
5
6
or
7 = number
SW 5210
COMMENTS
8187
This option allows automatic insertion of a line
feed after any carriage return is transmitted.
-This parameter sets the default LF (Line
Feed) insertion. This causes the PAD to insert
an LF character into the transmission stream.
0 = no line feed inserted
1 = insert line feed after each carriage return
sent to the user terminal (DTE) as data
D-363
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.4
Entry Fields for Record Code AQ (Continued)
COMMENTS
5= combination of (1) and (4)
6= insert line feed after each carriage return
sent from the user terminal as data, plus to the
user terminal as an echo
7= combination of (1) and (6)
-This field will usually be set to 0 or 1. If the
user’s terminal is double spacing lines, this
field should be changed to 0. If the user’s
terminal is overprinting lines, this field should
-This parameter sets the default value o f line
feed padding. It is the amount of null
characters after a line feed is sent to a device
that the switch will pause before sending
additional data. Normally, the carriage return
padding field is put in first. If terminals are still
losing information at the beginning of each
line, the value in this field is increased.
-This is X.3 parameter 14.
39
Line Editing
0
This option allows corrections to be made,
during the data transfer mode, to data
previously inputted by the user.
-The parameter specifies the default mode of
the editing function that the PAD performs.
-If this parameter is enabled, the PAD will
process editing characters. This only applies
to data transfer mode. Editing will always be
enabled (1) for command mode on terminals.
If this field is enabled, timers should be turned
off and the forwarding condition should be set
to transmit on carriage return. If this field is
disabled, all editing characters (LF, BS, etc.)
are lost in data transfer mode.
0= editing not enabled during data transfer
1 = editing enabled during data transfer
-This is X.3 parameter 15.
or
1
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-I 001
Table 17.4
COL.
NO.
40
Entry Fields for Record Code AQ (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COL.
NAME
LocalParity
0
Check
Y-
Ot-
1 = number
....
_
41-43
_
Interval Timer 0
or
l-255 = number
SVR 5210
8187
COMMENTS
Indicate whether or not a local parity check is
performed.
-This parameter sets the default value of
eighth bit transparency. This determines if the
PAD checks the parity bit. If enabled, the PAD
will check parity. Normally, this field is set at 0
for asynchronous devices.
0 = no local parity check and send
transparently through the network (transmit
parity received through the network)
1 = check local parity and send space parity
through the network (ignore parity received
through the network)
-This is local parameter 2.
Indicate the maximum time period during
which the PAD collects characters for one
packet.
-When this timer expires, the current packet
is sent.
- The selection must be made in increments
of 50 ms, so a selection of 2 = 100 ms.
0 = packet will not be forwarded when timer
expires
l-255 = number of 50-ms increments before
timer expires
D-365
-
TL-130400-1001
Record Code XP:
Data System
x.25 Port
17.5 Record Code XP, Figure 17.5, defines the parameters
required to describe the X.25 port attributes. An XP record is
required for every SPM (Synchronous Packet Manager) on the
system. One is also required for the ADMP. The parameters
below specify situations where the SPM ports must be configured
differently than the ADMP ports. If this is not specified, configure
the ADMP ports the same as SPM ports.
NOTE: For an ADMP (defined as PX25 in Record Code CP,
columns 31 through 34), enter the PEC and slot position of the
ADMP-A card. For an SPM, enter the slot position of
the associated line card.
....
r---------r-------------------------------------------------------------~
II
II
II
is
II
II
II
II
II
II
,
LOGICAL
CHANNEL
NUMBER ASSIGN- I
(PI AI FI FI SI xIxl~l
101 LI RI RI Ul .I .1x
I
I
I
I
i IRI LI AI AI PI 2, 2,Ti
ID
E;
5 ;T,OIMIMI p1515;;; ,
L
fM
I
1 CI EI EI Ch
I
I
I
S IMIAI
I W AICINI
I
I
P I A, TI L; LI T; g; ‘&y
I
I
I
E ; Y; EI EI EI
I
I
I
I
I VI VI t R I NI
I
I
I
D ICI LI EI EI XI EI ElCt
I
I
I
I
;
f;
$;
LI LI TI SI CI L I
I
I
I
I
I
E,S;;;g;
I
I
I
I
I L,
I BI H I NI
I
I
I
I
I
101
1,
DI
“t
3;
D; ‘: 1
I
I
’ PI GI C S, CI
I II R I SI LI
I
I
’
E,
RI
A
Ll
I
I
ITIDI
YI
Cl
A
I
BIDIN,
I
I
; Cl 01 R 0, RI
I
S, EI NI I Ci
I IIGI
I
I
I
I
I
I
IE,RICI
IR
IRI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P, D TI 5:
IL1
I
I
IEI
I
II I I lJ’
I SI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I II
IF;
I
I
I
I
ITI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I TI
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
,
I
’
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;- T-r-t-r-t-t-t-r-t-t-r-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-r-~-T-t-~-r-~-t-r-~-r-t-T-~-T-i
I
I
I
11 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 I1 It I1 l212121212121212121213131313131313131313,4l4l4l
1718191011121314151617l8l9l01112,3,4,5,6l71819101112131415161718~9~0l1121
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-t-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I, I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I I
L-I-I-J-I-I-~-I-*-I-I- 1-1-1-1-1-1-~-*-1-*-1-1-1-1 -1-~-1-1-1-~-~-1-~-1-~-~
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - x
I~lfil,,lXlPl
I
I
T; R R T; C R T: R R T; C R T:
; TI
I
R
E
IIEE IIAE IIEE IILE I
I
I
I RI
I
;
I
2
I
?
IATMIST~V~LTUSTUETU
I Ai
I
I
M R E, T R EI L R EI E R EI A R EI
‘::
I
I Nf
“7;
z
I
E
I
il
IE
b
R;i
i
R
iFOTANWR(jW
;A;
I s,
;
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
I
M
y$IsIwIEI
I TS
I
I
I
I Cl
I
I
I
I
I
I
,?I
“:I
f,
$1
4
I
I 01
8
I
I
I
I
2
I
I DI
I
I
;
I
z
I
I
I
I
:I
I
I El
E
I
I
z
I
i
I
I
0
1
I
I
L
:
I
z
I
I
I
II
’
:
;
E
1
I
I
w
I
I
I
I
I
I
k
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
18,
iI
;I
;I
iIS
I
1;
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
s
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
z
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; 2 0 0 M S
; 10SEC 1 10SEC ; 10SEC ( 10SEC ;
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-+-T-T-t-T-T-t-T-T-t-T-T-tT-T-t-T-T-t-T-T-t-T-i--k- T-t-i
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
13141516~7~8~9~O,,~2~3~4~5~6~7~8~9,O,,12,314151617~8191O1112~314~5~6,7~8~9~O~
c-+-+--+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-t-t-t-t-t-t-+-~
III
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-~-~II--L-L-I-I-~-I-~-~-~-*-~-*-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
! MENT
I
I
0
I
u
b
I
l
TWI
I
1
8
;
I
I
Figure 17.5
D-366
F!
F;
R’I
F
R
Record Code XP: Data System X.25 Port Data Sheet
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.5
COL.
NO.
I
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code XP
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
12
PEC
0 = PEC number
What PEC is this card located in?
13
13
Group
s.”
A-D = group
number
Which group (A, B, C, or D) within the PEC is
this card?
Card Slot
00-l 0 = slot
Which card slot within the group is this card?
...
14-15
number
16.
17-18
Circuit Number
O-7 = assigned
circuit number
Which circuit on the card is being used?
X.25 Speed
01 = 1,200 baud
This field determines the X.25 speed of the
device.
-For ADMP, enter the speed of the device
used for remote access to the ADMP (see
Record Code Pl, column 12).
-The speed for the value 5 is different when
used for a NIC. If NIC, then the X.25 speed
must be 05-07 as follows:
ADMP
NIC
01 = 1,200 baud
02 = 2,400 baud
03 = 4,800 baud
04 = 9,600 baud
05 = 19.2 kbps
05 = 32 kbps
06 = 48 kbps
06=48 kbps
07= 56 kbps
07=56 kbps
08 = 64 kbps
02 =
03 =
04 =
05 =
06 =
07 =
08 =
2,400 baud
4,800 baud
9,600 baud
19.2 kbps
48 kbps
56 kbps
64 kbps
19
Port May Call
Itself
Y = port may call
itself
N = port may not
call itself
ADMP = N
SPM=Y
Enter Y if this port or ADMP is allowed to call
itself. This field allows the X.25 device to
route a call to itself.
-This is a special bit intended for network
programmers who are experienced with
routing. This will enable testing of a single
device. No external routing loop detection will
be made by the switch while this field = Y.
20
Allocate LCNs
in Ascending
Order
Y=yes
Enter Y if LCNs are allocated in ascending
order.
-Enter Y for ADMP and all ports except the
port connected to a public data network.
SW 5210
N=no
8187
D-367
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.5
Entry Fields for Record Code XP (Continued)
COMMENTS
This field must be
N = not HDLC
supports
Extended
Addressing
N = not selected
synchronous device.
-This field must be marked N because
bisynchronization is not supported in this SVR.
-This field specifies the frame sync character
for the bisynchronous protocol only. If this
= 1, the character will be hex 32, which is
the EBCDIC equivalent of the sync character.
Otherwise the sync character will be hex 16,
e ASCII equivalent of the sync
ermines w
device attached to this port uses frame level
HDLC format.
-Enter Y for all devices except NIC which
device attached to this port supports frame
level extended addressing.
-Enter N for all devices.
24
Is X.25 Frame
Y = address A
Level Address A N = address B
or B?
This field determines whether or not this
device uses X.25 frame level address A or
address B.
-Enter Y (address A) for all ports connected
to a PDN (Public Data Network).
-Enter N for all other devices.
-When programing two NIC cards on different
systems that are used together, one should be
marked Y and the other N.
25
Is X.25 Device
Directly
Connected?
This field determines whether the SPM is
directly connected to the X.25 device or to a
modem.
-Enter Y for all devices not connected to
modems.
-Enter N for devices connected by modems.
Y = direct connect
N = not direct
connect
SVR 5210
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.5
COL.
NO.
26
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code XP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
External
Clocking
_.
...
COMMENTS
Y = externally
clocked
N = not externally
clocked
Indicate whether or not this device is clocked
from an external source.
-Enter N for all devices except NIC which
must be marked Y.
-If this field = Y, the SPM will be clocked via
pins 15 and 17 of the RS-232 or V35
connector connected to the X.25 SPM. If N,
the SPM provides clocking to the line (must
not be a modem).
-If this field is marked Y, column 25 must be
marked N.
-If this field is marked N, column 25 must be
marked Y.
-This field is not used for the NIC.
..
27-30
Incoming Low
LCN
0000-255 = LCN
range
Enter 0000 in this
field.
Identify the the lower limit of the LCN (Logical
Channel Number) range to be used only for
incoming calls. a
31-34
Incoming High
L6N
0000-255 = LCN
range
Enter 255 in this
field.
Identify the the upper limit of the LCN range to
be used only for incoming calls.
35-38
Bidirectional
Low LCN
0000-255 = LCN
range
Enter 0000 in this
field.
Identify the lower limit of the LCN range to be
used for both incoming and outgoing calls.
39-42
Bidirectional
High LCN
0000-255 = LCN
range
Enter 255in this
field.
Identify the upper limit of the LCN range
(0000-4095) to be used for both incoming
and outgoing calls.
43-46
Outgoing Low
LCN
0000-255 = LCN
range
Enter 0000 in this
field.
Identify the lower limit of the LCN range
(0000-4095) to be used only for outgoing
calls.
47-50
Outgoing High
LCN
0000-255 = LCN
range
Enter 0000 in this
field.
Identify the upper limit of the LCN range
(0000-4095) to be used only for outgoing
calls.
SVR 5210
8187
D-369
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.5
COL.
NO.
COL.
NAME
51-53
Frame Size
w-
Entry Fields for Record Code XP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
000-007
suggested value =
005
This field determines the frame size or number
of bits per packet.
000= 16
001 = 32
_
002 = 64
003= 128
004 = 256
005= 512
006 = 1,024
007 = 2,048
54-56
Frame Window
Size
001-l 27 = window
size
suggested
value = 007
Identify the maximum number of
unacknowledged frames that can be sent or
received at one time. This can range from 1
to 7 (module 8) if extended addressing is not
used.
-If extended addressing is used, then this
field could range from 1 to 127 (module 128).
-Extended addressing is not supported in this
release, so only values from l-7 should be
used in this field.
57-59
Retries
000-031
suggested value =
10 for all ports
This field determines the number of frame
level retransmissions of any packet type
before that packet is considered
untransmittable.
-This causes an error condition that is dealt
with by the X.25 SPM. This corresponds to
CCITT X.25 N2 parameter.
60-62
Frame
01
Retransmission 02
Timer (20004
10
ms)
20
30
Indicate the time for frame retransmission
(002-255) (multiples of 200 ms).
-The X.25 speed is set in columns 17-18.
-If X.25 speed = 1,200 baud, enter 50.
-If X.25 speed = 2,400 baud, enter 30.
-If X.25 speed = 4,800 baud, enter 20.
-If X.25 speed = 9,600 baud, enter 10.
-If X.25 speed = 19.2 kbps,enter 04.
-If X.25 speed = 48 kbps,enter 02.
-If X.25 speed = 56 kbps, enter 01.
-If X.25 speed = 64 kbps, enter 01.
&
63-65
Restart
Retransmission
Timer
(1 O-second)
002-063 = timer
range
Enter 006 for all
devices.
8187
This field determines the time limit between a
restart indication and a restart confirmation.
This value is specified in increments of 10
seconds.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.5
COL.
NO.
66-68
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code XP (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Call
Retransmission
Timer
(1 &Second)
002-063 = timer
range
Enter 018 for all
devices.
This field determines the timing factor for
retransmitting calls.
-This value is specified in increments of 10
seconds.
Reset
Retransmission
Timer
(1 O-Second) ‘-
002-063 = timer
range
Enter 006 for all
devices.
This field determines the timing factor for
sending resets.
-This value is specified in increments of 10
seconds.
-When a reset is sent, an acknowledgment
must be received before the timer runes out.
72-74
Clear
Retransmission
Timer
(1 O-Second)
002-063 = timer
range
Enter 006 for all
d e v i c e s .
This field determines the timing factor for
retransmitting clear signals.
-This value is specified in increments of 10
seconds.
75-77
Maximum Calls 000-063 =
Active
maximum calls
Enter 005 for
ADMP
Enter 255 for all
other devices.
....
69-71
SVR 5210
8187
This field determines the maximum number of
active calls.
D-371
TL-130400-1001
Record Code Pl:
Data System
Global Parameter Part 1
17.6 Record Code Pl , Figure 17.6, defines the parameters
required by the data system ADMP processor. The PI Record
Code will contain only one record.
r---------r-------r-----r---r-T
---------------------------------------------~
I
1
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
,F
$
I
I
S’-NIR
&YE
QDI
I
I
I
; AI
I
I
; DI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
C,Ai
ICI
I SI
I
I
I
1
1
:
P
.o
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I1 7I1 8I1 9 1 111111111111111111111212121212121212121213131313131313131313l4i4l4l
011121314151617181910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011121
I -
~-+-+-*-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
l,j13tOipl~I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
L-A.-Ad-_L- L-*-~-~-~_*-~_~-~_~_~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-*-~-*-*-~-*-*-~
Figure 17.6
D-372
I
1
1
1
1
1
’
1
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
181
101
I
I
I
Record Code Pl: Data System Global Parameter Data Sheet - Part 1
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.6
COL.
NO.
12
...
13-15
COL.
NAME
ADM P Access
from Data
Network and
RSr232
Entry Fields for Record Code Pl
VALID
ENTRIES
Y=yes
N=no
COMMENTS
This field determines whether or not the ADMP
user interface can be accessed from ports
other than the ADMP maintenance terminal.
-This field allows or disallows access to the
ADMP from the data network.
Universal
000-255 = number
Controller Board of seconds for
Polling Cycle
polling
suggested value =
10 to 15 seconds
-suggested entry
is 5 seconds
This field determines how often the ADMP
should poll the UCB to check its operation.
-The selection must be made in increments
of 1 second, so 005 = 5 seconds.
-This field is the number of seconds which
elapse before polling all UCBs again.
-If this value is 20, the ADMP UCB poller
runs through the list of UCBs, polling each of
them. This is repeated after waiting 20
seconds.
16
AccounWEvent
Record Report
Type
Identify what type of report is printed.
-“Event” reports relate to malfunctions of the
system and “account” reports relate to has to
do with call acounting.
-Because there are two types of reports, they
are normally sent to different locations (2).
17
Information/
- = only allowed
Warning Record entry
Report Type
Not used in this SVR.
0 = warning
1 = information
2 = information/ warning separate
3 = information/ warning combined
18
Overflow
Account/Event
Record Report
Type
- = only allowed
entry
Not used in this SVR.
0 = overflow accounts
1 = overflow events/accounts
2 = overflow events/accounts separate
3 = overflow events/accounts combined
19
Call MDR on
System Startup
Y = selected
N = not selected
The suggested entry is Y if MDR is to report
account/events/information/warning to the
ADMP.
SVR 5210
0 = accounts
1 = events
2 = events/
accounts separate
3 = events/
accounts
combined
8187
D-373
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.6
COL.
NO.
Entry Fields for Record Code Pl (Continued)
COL.
NAME
20
Stop Account
Recording on
File Full _.- .
VALID
ENTRIES
Y = stop recording
N = overwrite old
accounting
records
.
21
User Inter-face
Package
Timeout
Y = timeout
N = no timeout
8187
COMMENTS
This field determines the action that is taken
when the file is full.
Y = recording is stopped when the event file is
full
N = overwrite the oldest event record
-This currently impacts systems where event
reports are saved until a device calls the
ADMP.
-Up to 4,000 event reports can be saved
simultaneously.
-It is recommended to enter an N in this field;
this keeps the most recent information.
This field determines whether or not the user
interface package timeout is used.
-The user interface package timeout is the
timeout applied when the ADMP terminal is in
the UI (User Interface) mode. The UI mode is
listed within the system table which is listed
within the table edit.
-If no entry is made from the ADMP terminal
keyboard within 10 minutes, the system
automatically cancels the UI mode and returns
to the diagnostic mode.
-The timeout value for this field is a
predetermined 10 minutes and cannot be
changed.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code P2:
Data System
Global Parameter Part 2
s
....
17.7 Record Code P2, Figure 17.7, defines the parameters
required by the data system ADMP processor. Record Codes
Pl and P2 define the type of report the ADMP generates
and the destination for sending these reports. The ADMP
can generate accounting records and event records.
Accounting and events are stored in files.
Only one P2 record will exist for each ADMP report type;
therefore, this record code will contain a maximum of two
records. The two types are account and event. If a P2 record
is missing for either of the two types, that particular type of
report is not generated by ADMP.
The ADMP records can be reported to an RS-232C connection
that is linked to the ADMP maintenance console or a specified
X.121 incoming or outgoing address (columns 27 through 42).
If the destination is an outgoing X.121, the ADMP maintains
a permanent connection to this port, which is specified in the
following’ X.121 address. That port can never be assigned to
a user. The recommended configuration is outgoing to an
X.121 address and use a dedicated device.
If the destination is incoming, the ADMP waits for a call from
the port specified in the following X.121 address (and reports
only to that port). Since the ADMP cannot initiate a disconnect,
the originating end controls this call. It is suggested that the
incoming X.121 address be assigned only for this purpose.
SVR 5210
8l87
D-375
TL-130400-1001
I
I
I
I
1
--Fi
’ RI
1AI
1 NI
; SI
1
,
I
I
I
.I
I
I
DI Cl RI
1Ml
k
s;
1
-.
.-AI
1
II
1’
I
TI
.m
0;
’ El
!DI
1SEC
!
I
I
I
I
1
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1HR
DNIC
j
SERVER
I
I
I
I
i
’
g
P
l
;
g
I
I
T
1 c:
’ 01
’ DI
; EI
I
1 I
1 1
1 I
’
!
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
;
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c-+-+-t-+--c--c--+
-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-t-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
l6141OlPl
21AICI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
101
c-4
I
i-i
;-;
;-;
1-i
A-:
Figure 17.7
D-376
Record Code P2: Data System Global Parameter Data Sheet - Part 2
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.7
COL.
NAME
COL.
NO.
12-13
VALID
ENTRIES
Report Type
s-
...
,14
Entry Fields for Record Code P2
AC = accounts
EV = events
IN = information
OA = overflow
account
OE = overflow
event
WA = warning
Report Records 0
to Destination 1
2
:L number
COMMENTS
This field determines the type of report
generated.
This field determines where the system will
send the report(s) listed in columns
12-13.
0 = nowhere, reports are discarded
1 = RS-232C (ADMP maintenance console),
the reports appear on the ADMP terminal
2 = outgoing to specified X.1 21 address
(recommended), the reports are to be sent to
another device
3 = incoming from specified X.1 21 address,
the reports are stored until a device calls in
requesting the reports
-If account and event reports are to be sent to
separate devices, this field will appear once
for each report.
-It is recommend to send reports to a
dedicated outgoing hard-copy terminal.
15
Report to CEC
N=no
This field determines whether or not reports
are sent to the CEC.
-This field must be marked N.
16
Format
Y=yes
N=no
This field determines whether or not the
records are reported in formatted ASCII or
Binary.
-Enter Y if records are reported to the ASCII
device.
-This field only applies to incoming or
outgoing reports.
-Reports sent to the ADMP terminal
(RS-232) will always be in ASCII format.
-This field is normally set to 1 (ASCII).
-All report examples given earlier are in
ASCII format.
SVR 5210
8187
D-377
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.7
COL.
NO.
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Time Between
Outgoing Calls
(1 Second)
300-255 =
seconds
suggested value =
10 (010) seconds
This field determines the time (in seconds)
between outgoing calls.
-This field is only for outgoing reports or
reports to the ADMP terminal.
-The field determines the number of seconds
the system will wait before retrying an outgoing
call.
Start Time Hour
30-23 = hour
qumber
This field determines the hour for the start time
(00-23) for the 24-hour clock.
22-23
Start Time
Minute
30-59 = minute
7umber
This field determines starting time in minutes
(00-59) to make an outgoing account call.
24-26
Period (1 Hour)
300-255 = hour
7umber
This field determines the number of hours to
wait between outgoing account calls.
27-30
X.1 21 Address
(DNIC)
3-9 = number
If the system is configured for incoming or
outgoing call reports, this is the only X.121
address that can send or receive a data call.
-Calls from or to other incoming or outgoing
addresses will not be accepted.
-This field is only used if column 14 is
marked 2 or 3.
-This field determines the DNIC of the X.121
address.
X.1 21 Address
(server number)
O - 9 = number
This field determines the server number of the
X.1 21 address.
-This field is only used if column 14 is
marked 2 or 3.
X.1 21 Address
(sub-port)
O - 9 = number
This field determines the sub-port number of
the X.121 address.
-This field is only used if column 14 is
marked 2 or 3.
D-378
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code P2 (Continued)
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code Cl:
Data System
Call Processing Data Part 1
17.8 Record Code Cl, Figure 17.8, defines the global
information for call processing. One record is required per
system.
- - - - - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
T---------T-----------‘------------------------------------------------
I
I
I
I
Y- I
I
I
I
I
I
:-.F
S
k::
E”IE
N;
ID
I”-
I
R
i
8
d
)
g
DP;
‘ES
f AK
,lJE
E(
I
‘FY
F N
ST’
38
LW
T
I
x
s
2
5
E
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MS I
AZ;
XE
I
I
I
x
<
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t-T-T-t-T-T-T-t-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T’T-T-T-T-r-r-r-r-r-~
t- r-r-t-r-+-r-r-r-t-r-r1111111111,11111,1,112,21212,21212l2,2,21313l3,3,313l313l3l3l4l4l4l4l
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c-+-+-u-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
l6l6,OlxIpl
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
,
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-*-~----L-*-*-~-I-*-*--L-~-*-*_~-~-*-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-l-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-*--L--L-~
‘----------T--------‘------------------------------------------------------~
I
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
141516,71819,011,2,3,4,5,6,7,819,0,,,2,3141516171819101112,3141516171819101
c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-+-+-~-+-+-+-~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I, I ,I,,,,,,,,,,,,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-~-L-~-*-L-~-*-~-~-*-~-~-*-~-~-~
_*_~-~-~^~-~-~-L-~-~-~-*-~-~-*-~-*-*-~-~-~
Figure 17.8
SVR 5210
I
I
I
I
I
Record Code Cl: Data System Call Processing Data Sheet - Part 1
8t87
o-379
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.8
Entry Fields for Record Code Cl
COMMENTS
This field determines the maximum number of
ports configured in the system including the
Number of Ports
Indicate the maximum number of routing
records entered in the system.
-See Record Code RT, columns 12-l 4.
(Record Code RT, columns 15-l 6) it will try
devices in this routing group until either an idle
device is found, all devices in this routing
record are tried, or the number of devices
ines the maximum number of
e to a rotary hunt group.
ort in a rotary is allocated to a
call and there is no answer, the call
processing will allocate another free port to
try.
-This option defines the number of free ports
the call is tried on before the call is rejected.
This is to avoid unnecessary repetition of tries
when a device connected to the rotary hunt
group cannot be reached.
22-25
Maximum
Number of
Virtual Circuits
Supported
0005-l 000
This field determines the the maximum
suggested value = number of virtual circuits (i.e., active calls) that
1000
can be supported by the system at any one
time
26-28
Number of
Administrative
Virtual Circuits
suggested value = This field determines the number of virtual
5
circuits to be allocated to exclusive
administrative.
-This field allows the system administrator to
reserve virtual circuits for ADMP usage (no
restriction on incoming or outgoing).
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.8
COL.
NO.
29-31
....
COL.
NAME
Entry Fields for Record Code Cl (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
Default
Maximum X.25
Packet
Size
s-. .
..
COMMENTS
004 = 16 bytes
005 = 32 bytes
006 = 64 bytes
007 = 128 bytes
008 = 256 bytes
009 = 512 bytes
010 = 1024 bytes
suggested value =
007
This is the default X.25 data packet maximum
size to be used when packet size negotiation
is not in effect.
-Codes are CCITT standard.
-This value is used when packet size
negotiation is not in effect (see Record Code
CP, column 38).
This field determines the default window size
used for X.25 calls that do not use window
size negotiation.
-This is the window size used when the
window size negotiation is not in effect (see
Record Code CP, column 38).
32-34
Default X.25
Window Size
001-007 = number
35-37
Default X.25
Throughput
Class
This field allows X.25 throughput class
003-015
suggested value = negotiation.
8
38-40
System
004-015
This value should
always be 10.
Maximum
Packet Size
41-43
44
SVR 5210
This field determines the maximum valid X.25
data packet size that the Netlink can support.
-The default is 10 and should be treated as a
constant.
Minimum
Number Of Call
Buffers
This field determines the minimum number of
000-255
suggested value = call buffers to be maintained by the system.
-This field is used by the switch to self-limit
25
the number of calls active at any one time.
-It is only checked for new,
non-administrative calls in order to limit
typing up system resources.
E n a b l e
Accounting
Y=Yes
This field determines whether or not
accounting is enabled.
N=No
suggested value = -This field is set in the switch version of the
table by messages sent from the Account
Y
Administrator table.
-If delays are being experienced, or for some
other reason accounting is to be temporarily
suspended, this bit is reset and the type of
accounting field (column 45) remains intact.
8187
D-381
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.8
COL.
NO.
45
Entry Fields for Record Code Cl (Continued)
COL.
NAME
Type of
Accounting to
Perform .~.
VALID
ENTRIES
o-2
suggested value =
2
..
46-48
49
50-55
D-382
Time of
Accounting to
Perform
COMMENTS
This field determines the type of data call
accounting performed by the system.
-This field is only valid when column 44 is Y.
0= no accounting, statistics are kept only on a
per-port basis
1 = X.25 accounting, APM-to-APM calls are
not accounted for
2 = full accounting, all calls are to be
accounted for
-For values 1 or 2, column 35 on Record
Code CP is checked for each device, and if
both devices indicate “no accounting” for that
port, then no accounting record is generated.
002-255
This field determines the time for an APM to
suggested value = wait between calls.
8 (i.e., 20
-The value is in 2.5second increments.
seconds)
-This value is used when the value in column
73 of Record Code AP is Y.
Terminal
Command
Service Signal
Prompt
@ = Suggested
character
This character is displayed as a prompt by the
terminal when in the command mode.
-This character will tell the user to enter a
command.
-The valid character set includes all ASCII
characters with a decimal value from 33 to
127.
-This prompt should be a printable ASCII
character, except “(” (ASCII 5B Hex) and “)‘I
(ASCII 5D Hex).
No Disconnect
Password
see comments
This password allows a terminal user to
remain in command mode indefinitely without
timeout disconnect.
-The password should be a printable ASCII
character string.
-The password should not contain “(” (ASCII
5B Hex) and “)” (ASCII 5D Hex).
-This password is used with the terminal user
command “Test No Disconnect.”
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Record Code C2:
Data System
Call Processing
Data - Part 2
17.9 Record Code C2, Figure 17.9, provides the global
information for data call processing. The “Private Herald” is
displayed when an asynchronous terminal is connected to its
local APM. The “Profile Identifier” is displayed to request
terminal characteristics identification. One ‘record is required per
system.
T---------T---------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
‘-I
-I
I
s-
.”
’
I
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
_
PRIVATE HERALD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:-:-:-:-:-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T
-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-T-l
,111,,,111,111111111121212121212121212121313131
111213,415~6~7~8~910111213141516171819101112131415161718191011121
-r-r-t-T-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-i
I I I
1111111111111111111112121212121212121212131313131313131313l3l4l4l4141
171819101112131415161718191011121314151617191910111213141516171819101112131
c-+--+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
l6l~l~I~l2l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
L-~-L-L-L-I-I-~-~-I-~-~-~-~-~-~-~
-1-*-1-1-*-*-1-*-*-~-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-,
r--------------------------------------------------------------T---------T
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
PROFILE IDENTIFIER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T-T-T-T -T-T-T-T-T-T-T-t-T-T-T-T-T-TT - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - T - ,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I1 11 11 11 II II I1 1 1 I1 I1 1212121212121212l2l21313131
1112131415161718191011121314151617181910111213141516171819101112,
~-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-t-i
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
141516171819101112l3141516171819101112131415161718(91011121314151
c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-~
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
L-~-~-~-~-~-i-~-~-~-~-*-~
-~-*-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-*-~-~-~-~
-A.-*-A.-A.-d
Figure 17.9
SW 5210
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
: TI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RI
At
NI
SI
I
Cl
01
DI
EI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;--I
I81
IO1
C-4
I
I
-------A-,
Record Code C2: Data System Call-Processing Data Sheet - Part 2
8187
D-383
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.9
COL.
NO.
12-43
COL.
NAME
Private Herald
W-V
Entry Fields for Record Code C2
VALID
ENTRIES
A-Z = letter
This field determines the printable ASCII string
for private herald.
-This is the actual private herald displayed
when a terminal comes up and has gone
through hunt-confirm sequence.
-Any ASCII characters are valid.
-It should not contain “(” (ASCII 56 Hex) or
“)” (ASCII 5D Hex). For example,” FGBS Data
Network” would be a valid entry to notify that a
user is now connected to the particular data
network.
-Other than the above exception, any ASCII
characters are valid.
A-Z = letter
This field determines the printable ASCII string
for profile identifier.
-This is a prompt for a user at an
asynchronous terminal to specify terminal
characteristics identifier.
-An example would be “Terminal Type = “.
=-
44-75
D-384
Profile Identifier
COMMENTS
8187
SVR 5210
-
TL-130400-1001
Record Code SR:
Data System
Symbolic Replacement
Word/String
J
T---------T-----T---
I
I
I
I
I
I
I....
I
I
I
I
I
‘I
I
’
I-F S N; R c
I:
& “IE
g
;hAID
E
’
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
I
,
I
I
I
.I
17.10 Record Code SR, Figure 17.10, provides mapping of
symbolic user terminal input to actual terminal commands. A
maximum of 8 records are allowed. This is the only optional
record code for the PD-200 data feature.
-------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9
21
::
;r
z
$
SYMBOLIC
REPLACEMENT
WORD/STRING
CHAR ACTERS
I
1
1
I
I
,*
,----------------------em-----w7--w7
:
:
:
I’
I
I
I
’
1
’
I
!
i
I
I
I
I
:
\ i
\ ,
\ \
\\ \\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
’
I
;Ti
IR’
IA’
TN’
IS’
IF’
IE’
IR;
I
r--r--r--r-T-T-T-T-T-T-r-T-T-T-l
,
l51515151515151515161616161
,
I11213141516171819101112131
c-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-A-+-+-&-J
i6i6i6i6i6i7i7i7;7i7171717,
I5 16 I7 I8 I9 IO I1 12 13 1415 I6
I
Figure 17.10
I
I
17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
#
I
I
I
L-J
I
I
I
I8 I
IO I
Record Code SR: Data System Symbolic Replacement Word/String Data
Sheet
8187
D-385
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.10
COL.
NO.
12-13
14
COL.
NAME
VALID
ENTRIES
COMMENTS
Symbolic
Replacement
Entry Number
00-8 = number
This field defines a unique number that is
associated with the symbolic replacement
data entry found in columns 15-77.
Symbolic
Replacement
Word Type
0
or
This field determines the type of symbolic
replacement that is to be used.
-0 = normal replacement. When this field is
marked with a 0, the symbolic character string
is taken as equivalent to a command. The
replacement string and the command are
defined in columns 15-77. The system
replaces the word with the specified character
string when the word is encountered in a user
input. Normal replacement is used to define
commands other than X.1 21 addresses.
These commands are input by the user to the
terminal and are used to perform certain
functions (e.g., S = Stat, user’s name =
Help).
-1 = address replacement. When this field is
marked with a 1, the symbolic character string
is taken as equivalent to an X.121 address.
The replacement string and the X.121 address
are defined in columns 15-77. The data
system replaces the word with the X.121
address specified in this record. It also
replaces the X.121 address with the specified
word whenever it has to output a message
containing the particular address. For
example, “Computer 70300271 I’. When a
user types “C Computer” at a terminal during
the command mode, the system replaces
“Computer” with “70300271” and the
command will actually be “C 70300271”.
Also, the system output “70300271
Disconnected” is printed to terminal as
“Computer Disconnected”.
1
,.
D-386
Entry Fields for Record Code SR
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 17.10
COL.
NO.
15-77
...
SVR 5210
COL.
NAME
Symbolic
Replacement
Word/String
Chkacters
Entry Fields for Record Code SR (Continued)
VALID
ENTRIES
A-Z = letter
8187
COMMENTS
This field determines the symbolic
replacement word and the symbolic
replacement string.
-The format of this field is as follows:
-First, enter the symbolic replacement word
in ASCII characters. This enrty must start in
the first open field and can contain any
printable characters (no control or space
characters). The entry is followed by a single
space. The space informs the Call Handler
CH where the symbolic replacement word
ends and the symbolic replacement string
starts.
-Second, leave a blank space and then enter
the symbolic replacement string. The
symbolic replacement string can contain any
character sequence at all including spaces
and commas, but cannot contain any control
characters. For example, COMP C 30100123,
COMP is the keyword that the CH would look
for in the user’s command line and, if found,
would be replaced by C 30100123.
NOTES: The symbolic replacement word
must be entered first.
-The symbolic replacement word cannot
contain any space.
-Enter one space after the symbolic
replacement word; then enter the actual
command string. For example: If the string is
MAIL C 70300442, then the word MAIL can be
used instead of the string C 70300442.
-In this example, 70300442 is the server
number of the X.121 address.
D-387
TL-130400-1001
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
D-388
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
INTEGRATED
FEATUREPHONE
USAGE FORMS
FeatureComm
Key Plan
_
Instructions
Company Name
Location
Telephone Number
Originator
Sales Order Number
s.w.o./c.w.o.
18.0 This section provides detailed instructions for completing
three customer-specific usage forms. Each of the following
forms is to be completed by the customer:
l
FeatureComm Key Plan ( Figure 18.1)
l
Multi-Line FeatureComm Control Programming and Feature
Button Assignments (Figure 18.2)
l
Single Line FeatureComm Control Programming and Feature
Button Assignments (Figure 18.3)
18.1 The Feature Comm Key Plan will include information
on station designation, instrument type, directory number, and
line appearance designation. Changes to this form must be
provided for in the data base prior to station(s) implementation.
18.2
18.2.1 Enter name of customer (company).
18.2.2 Enter customer’s address or other appropriate major
building designation.
18.2.3 Enter the customer’s main (listed) telephone number - not
the telephone numbers used on the Key Plan.
18.2.4 Enter the name of the person responsible for collecting
information shown on the Key Plan and related forms.
18.2.5 Enter the appropriate sales order number for this
customer and for this job.
18.2.6 Enter, if applicable, the appropriate work order number
(Service Work Order/
ChangeWork Order)
Dbte
Key Plan Number
Rev.
(Revision)
Page- Of _
Location
SVR 5210
18.2.7 Enter the date of the issuance form.
18.2.8 Enter the Key Plan number that is consistent with the
number plan accepted or developed for this account.
18.2.9 Enter, when applicable, a revision number each time a
change to the previous Key Plan is requested. If new, enter 0.
18.2.10 If more than one page is needed to diagram the basic
Key Plan, enter the page number in the space indicated for each
page, followed by the number of pages included in the full
diagram.
18.2.11
Enter a brief description of the specific location within
the customer’s site where the Key Plan exists.
8187
D-389
TL-130400-1001
Company Name
Location
Telephone
Number
Rev.
Of
Originator
Sates Order Number
Page
Comments
Customer
Location
Signature
1s.viy0./c.w.0
Statlon
FC3 = Featurecomm
Instrument
1 Date
rrtrnent
i
‘i
~
/
Designation
IFP= Featurecomm Ill or IV
Type
POTS = All Other
IV
FC4A = Featurecomm IV W/Add on Module
FC4S
FC4SA
Line Appearance Designation
Ill
FC3A = Featurecomm III W/Add on Module
FC4= Featurrcomm
(POTS)
All Other
= Featurecomm IV W/Speakerphone
= Featurecomm IV W/Speakerphone &Add on Module
Figure 18.1
D-390
Key PlqNO.
8187
CI=Comm I
FLC = Flashcomm Plus
FCl =Featurecomm \
FClS=Featurecomm
I W/Speakerphone
FCZ = Featurecomm II
FCZS = Featurecomm II W/Speakerphone
OTHR=AII Other
’
C = Control Appearance
LC = Logical Control Appearance
NC = Non-Control Appearance
LNC = Logical Non-Control Appearance
DSS = DSS Appearance
NB = No Button Appearance
I
FeatureComm Key Plan (Form 1)
5210
TL-130400-1001
Department
18.2.12 Enter, if known, the specific name of the customer’s
department where the Key Plan exists.
Station Dir # (Station
DirectoryNumber)
Station Designation
s..
18.2.13 As the first entry in each of the vertical columns on the
diagram, enter the PABX directory number specifically assigned
to that station and considered the prime directory number for that
station
18.2.14 As the second entry in each vertical column on the
diagram, enter either:
l
l
l
l
POTS (non-integrated and all other telephones)
AIFP (Analog Integrated Featurephone)
DIFP (Digital Integrated Featurephone)
DFP/APM (Digital Integrated Featurephone with APM)
This properly designates the type of station hardware to be used.
It also indicates the type of line equipment and software needed
in the PABX to implement the line appearance.
Instrument Type
18.2.15 As the third entry in each vertical column on the
diagram, enter a specific destination from the list (as shown in
Figure 18.1) to indicate the kind of station equipment involved.
If the previous entry in Station Designation was IFP, only those
equipment codes shown for IFP should be entered. If the
previous entry in Station Designation was POTS, only those
equipment codes shown for POTS should be entered.
Instruments not specifically represented for POTS should be
shown as Other.
Line Appearance
Designation
18.2.16 The horizontal entries on the Key Plan diagram are
used to individually show the relationship of each directory
number to each instrument involved in the Key Plan. In the Line
Appearance Designation list, several different mnemonics or
codes are used to describe how and why each line or directory
number appears at each station. There are six different codes.
These codes are as follows:
e C (Control Appearance). The use of code C indicates a
programmed line button appearance of the directory number at
a station that has the right to privacy or control of that
directory number.
SVR 5210
l
LC (Logical Control Appearance). The use of code LC
indicates a programmed line button appearance of a software
only or logical directory number at a station that has the right to
privacy or control of that logical directory number.
l
NC (NonControl Appearance). The use of code NC indicates
a programmed line button appearance of the directory number
at a station that does not have the right to privacy or control of
that directory number.
8187
D-391
-
-
TL-130400-1001
l
LNC (Logical Non-Control Appearance). The use of code
LNC indicates a programmed line button appearance of a
software only or logical directory number at a station that does
not have the right to privacy or control of that logical directory
number.
NOTE: The use of the four previous codes (C, LC, NC, and LNC)
is limited to appearances of directory numbers under the control
of IFP (FeatureComm) only.
l
DSS (Dialing Station Select). The use of code DSS indicates
a programmed DSS button appearance of the directory
number that is under control of a POTS telephone or IFP. This
is the only way a standard POTS line circuit can appear on an
IFP. A DSS button is used to answer calls and automatically
dial the directory number only. The LED (Light Emitting Diode)
associated with the DSS button also provides line status.
Outgoing calls cannot be originated via a DSS button.
l
NB (No Button Appearance). The use of code NB indicates
the termination of a directory number at a single-line
telephone where no button is allowed or provided. When the
code is used in conjunction with an IFP station, control for the
directory number is assumed to be at that station.
NOTES:
o An IFP controlled line is limited to a maximum of eight line
button and DSS button appearances.
0 Only one control appearance is allowed per directory
number.
0 The prime directory number for a multi-line IFP will
automatically be downloaded from the PABX software to the
IFP when the telephone is initialized (plugged in) and will
appear on feature button number 8 (bottom button, first row
nearest keypad).
o Feature button number 5 on a multi-line IFP will
automatically be downloaded for hold when the telephone is
initialized.
l
Multi-Line FeatureComm III/IV Feature
Button Assignments
D-392
Any changes on the Key Plan must be provided for in the
PABX data base prior to implementation at the station(s).
18.3 The Multi-line FeatureComm Feature Button
Assignments (Figure 18.2) include information on line selection
preference (incoming and outgoing), feature button number and
functional assignment, and button label information.
8f87
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Instructions
Key Plan Number
18.4
18.4.1 Enter the number on the associated Key Plan (Figure
18.1).
Prime Directory Number
18.4.2 Enter the assigned or prime directory number for this
specific telephone.
Instrument Type
w-
18.4.3 Enter the appropriate code for this telephone as shown on
the Key Plan.
User Name
18.4.4 Enter the user’s name using the last name only, if known.
...
If unknown, leave blank.
-
User Location
Intercom Group
Call Pickup Group
Line Selection
Preference
18.4.5 Enter a brief description of the user’s location, i.e., room
number, post number, or grid location or floor.
18.4.6 Enter S.A.K.P. (Same As Key Plan) since all IFPs on this
Key Plan should be in the same intercom group. If more than
one intercom group is desired per Key Plan, enter S.A. (Same
As) followed by the directory numbers to be included in the
specific group.
18.4.7 Enter the number of the call pickup group assigned on the
basis of overall station reviews, typically by user department,
functional group, or physical layout. If assignment has not been
made or is unknown, enter S.A. (Same As) followed by the
directory numbers to be in the group.
18.4.8 Select and enter one of four codes to designate userspecific incoming preference. The codes are as follows:
0
e
0
0
Ringing line (10)
Flashing line (01)
Either line (11)
No preference (00)
Select and enter one of four codes to designate user-specific
outgoing preference. The codes are as follows:
0 Prime line (100)
l Last line used (010)
l Any idle line (001)
l No preference (000)
NOTE: No entry in the area will cause the use of the default
code for preference. The default code is l-O-1 -0-O.
SIR 5210
8187
D-393
TL-i30400-1001
Prime Directory
Instrument
#
Key Plan #
User Name
Type
User Location
Line Selection Preference
Incoming
Outgoing
Ringing Line
11101
Either
Flashing
10
No Preference
Line
/
Line
Input Via “Instrument Control’ Programming
[II
PrimeLine
[I
A
n
Last Line Used
“‘.*
Default =
y
IdleLine
m[
Intercom Grbup&her X’s in Group
No Preference
Preference Code
(,
_
Button Data Entry Programming
1 -Push &Hold FB (“Beep’)
2 -Key in Data Via Keypad
3 -Push & Hold FB (“Beep’)
Enter
(2)
0 3
04.
05.
85:
Flash
Monitor
New Call
EyPeeaNt;;t$umber
08. Station Speed Call
09. Repertory Dial
10. Dual Access
11 . Direct Station Selection (DSS)
12 -Extended Group
13. Reminder
14 -Time/Alarm
15. Time and Date
16. Di I Display
17. ReB eaw
18.5 eakerphone (Optional)
19. &II Forward
Figure 18.2
D-394
8187
S#aia,all
Forward
Intercom
Auto Intercom
Group Pickup
Extended Pickup
Call Pick-UpGroupOther #‘sin Group
(1)
40 -Account Code
41 -Unassigned
42. Line Buttons
43 -Shift
44. Remote TOW?
45. Bad Line
46. Privacy R&a e
47. System Spee d Calling
_
-
;
If DSS Button Enter
(2)
(3)
Ring Type
1
2
3
4
= Immed. Visual
= Immed. Visual. No Audible
= Immed. Visual. Dela Audible
= Delay Visual Delay 1 udlble
Enter “X’ Under Type Selected
Coverage Type
1 = Always
2 = Al ernate
3 = CaI I Only. No Status
4=
Enter “X’ Under Type Selected
Multi-Line FeatureComm Feature Button Assignments (Form 2)
5210
TL-130400-1001
Feature Button
18.4.9 The number shown in this column designates the feature
button to be used to assign and program the desired functions on
this specific IFP. Physically, the buttons are numbered starting
with the row of buttons nearest the keypad, starting at the top of
the row and proceeding downward in order, i.e., button number 1
is the top button in the first row; button number 9 is the top button
in the second row.
NOTE: A FeatureComm II has one row of buttons (8) and the
FeatureComm IV has two rows of buttons (16).
...
Function Assignment
..
Code
Feature Button Data
18.4.10 Enter the name of the function or feature to be assigned
to the designated button. Examples of 47 feature and function
descriptions are shown at the bottom of Figure 18-2.
18.4.11 Enter the two-digit code corresponding to the feature or
function shown in the previous column. Examples of 47 codes
are shown at the bottom of Figure 18-2.
18.4.12 If the following functions or features have been selected,
additional information about the feature button needs to be
entered:
Station speed calling
Repertory dial
l Dual access
l Reminder
0 Time and date
l Call forward
l Special call forward
l Auto intercom
l Message waiting
l Special call waiting
l Manual signal
l
l
If the information is known at the time of form preparation, enter it
in the column under the heading “If Feature Button Only”. If the
information is not available, the user must be alerted at the time
of user training and/or telephone installation to add the
appropriate information. Consult the User’s Manual or
Programming Manual as necessary.
If the feature button has been designated a line button, enter the
directory number and ring type of the line in the column under “If
Line Button Enter”. If the feature button has been designated a
DSS button, enter the directory number, ring type, and coverage
type of the line in the column under the heading of “If DSS Button
Enter”. Examples of the ring and coverage types are
summarized at the bottom of Figure 18.2. Consult the User’s
Manual or Programming Manual for detailed input directions as
necessary.
SVR 5210
8187
D-395
TL-130400-1001
Remarks
18.4.13 At the originator’s discretion, enter any note or comment
to further clarify the programmable information.
Button Label
18.4.14 Enter, if known, the description that should appear on the
button label when the telephone is installed. Preprinted labels
are available for most features and are packaged with the
instrument at the factory. Blank labels are also provided to allow
the user discretion in button labeling.
For stations to be equipped with add-on modules, the reverse
side of the form can be used in a similar fashion to describe
feature button assignments on the add-on module. The button
numbering on the add-on module begins with the top-left
button (row number 1, button number 1) and ends with the
bottom-right button (row number 3, button number 30).
....
Single-Line FeatureComm Feature
Button Assignments
Instructions
Key Plan Number
Prime Directory Number
Instrument Type
18.5 The Single-Line FeatureComm Feature Button
Assignments (Figure 18.3) include information on intercom
group, call pickup group, feature button number and functional
assignment, feature/function code, feature button data, and button
label information.
18.6
18.6.1 If the instrument is associated with a Key Plan, enter the
number of the Key Plan as shown on Key Plan (Figure 18.1). If it
is not associated with the Key Plan, enter “None”.
18.6.2 Enter the assigned or prime directory number for this
specific telephone.
18.6.3 Enter one of the following codes to properly describe the
instrument to be used:
e
.
.
e
0
8
0
Q
D-396
FC3 =
FC3A=
FC4 =
FC4A=
FC3S=
C4AS=
FCV =
FCVI =
8187
FeatureComm
FeatureComm
FeatureComm
FeatureComm
FeatureComm
FeatureComm
FeatureComm
FeatureComm
III
III
IV
IV
IV
IV
V
VI
w/Add-on Module
w/Add-on Module
w/Speakerphone
w/Add-on Module & Speakerphone
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
User Name
User Location
Intercom Group
s...
- Call Pickup Group
Feature Button
18.6.4 Enter user’s name using last name only, if known. If
unknown, leave blank.
18.6.5 Enter a brief description of user’s location, i.e., room
number, post number, or grid location or floor.
18.6.6 Enter S.A.K.P. (Same As Key Plan) since all IFPs on this
Key Plan should be in the same intercom group. If more than
one intercom group is desired per Key Plan, enter S.A. (Same
As) followed by the directory numbers to be included in the
specific group.
18.6.7 Enter the number of the call pickup group assigned on the
basis of overall station reviews, typically by user department,
functional group, or physical layout. If assignment has not been
made or is unknown, enter S.A. (Same As) followed by the
directory numbers to be in the group
18.6.8 The number shown in this column designates the feature
button to be used to assign and program the desired functions on
this specific IFP. Physically, the buttons are numbered in order,
starting at the top-left button (row number 1, button number 1)
and ending with the bottom-right button (row number 2, button
number 16).
FunctionAssignment
Code
SVR 5210
18.6.9 Enter the name of the function or feature to be assigned
to the designated button. Examples of 47 feature and function
descriptions are shown at the bottom of Figure 18 3.
18.6.10 Enter the two-digit code corresponding to the feature or
function shown in the previous column. Examples of 47 codes
are shown at the bottom of Figure 18 3.
8187
D-397
TL-130400-1001
i
Prime Directory
Instrument
#
key
User Name
User
Type
Location
Function Assignment Programming
1 Push & Hold FB (“Beep’)
2. Push &Hold 2 (“Beep-Beep’)
3. Key In Function CodeVia Keypad
4. Push & Hold FB (“Beep’)
IntercOrn G r o u p _ _ _
Other x’s in Group
Button Data Entry Programming
1 . Push & Hold FB (“Beep’)
2 - Key in Data Via Keypad
3. Push & Hold FB (“Beep’)
I
I
plan #
If Feature Button
0nlv
Enter User Data,
I
I
-
‘:
Call Pick-UpGroupOther b’s in Group
-
____
If DSS Button Enter
(1)
(2)
(3)
Remarks
As Required
Button Label
12
13
14
15
16
10 -Dual Access
11 Direct Station Selection (DSS)
12. Extended Group
13. Reminder
14. Time/Alarm
15. Time and Date
16. Di I Display
17. RePease
18.5 eakerphone (Optional)
19. &II Forward
Figure 18.3
D-398
8187
S,~;ci$&ll
Forward
P
Intercom
Auto Intercom
Message Wait,ing
Message Leavmg
40. Acco”“~ Code
41 -Unassigned
$$ : QF;Buttons
44 Remote Tone
45. Bad Line
46. Privacy Relea e
47. System Spee d Calling
Ring Type
1
2
3
4
= Immed. Visual
= immed. Visual . No Audible
= Immed. Visual - Delat;Au,dlble
= Delay Visual. Delay
udlble
Enter “X’ Under Type Selected
Coverage Type
1 = Always
2 : Alternate
3 = Call Only - No Status
4=
Enter “X’ Under Type Selected
Single-Line FeatureCommFeature Button Assignments (Form 3)
5210
TL-130400-1001
Feature Button Data
...
..
18.6.11 If the following functions or features have .been selected,
additional information about the feature button needs to be
entered:
0 Station speed calling
l Repertory dial
l Dual access
l Reminder
l Time and date
l Call forward
l Special call forward
l Auto inercom
l Message waiting
l Special call waiting
l Manual signal
If the information is known at the time of form preparation, enter it
in the column under the heading “If Feature Button Only”. If the
information is not available, the user must be alerted at the time
of user training and/or telephone installation to add the
appropriate information. Consult the User’s Manual or
Programming Manual as necessary.
If the feature button has been designated a DSS button, enter the
directory number, ring type, and coverage type of the line in the
column under the heading of “If DSS Button Enter”. As a
reminder, line buttons are not allowed on single-line configured
FeatureComm III/IV telephones. Examples of the ring and
coverage types are summarized at the bottom of Figure 18.3.
Consult the User’s Manual or Programming Manual for detailed
input directions as necessary.
For stations to be equipped with add-on modules, the reverse
side of the form may be used in a similar fashion to describe
feature button assignments on the add-on module. The button
numbering on the add-on module begins with the top-left
button (row number 1, button number 1) and ends with the
bottom-right button (row number 3, button number 30). Also,
line buttons cannot be assigned or programmed on the add-on
module.
Remarks
SVR 5210
18.6.12 At the originator’s discretion, enter any note or comment
to further clarify the programmable information.
8187
D-399
-
-
TL-130400-1001
Button Label
18.6.13 Enter, if known, the description that should appear on the
button label when the telephone is installed.
Preprinted labels are available for most features and are
packaged with the instrument at the factory. Blank labels are
also provided to allow user discretion in button labeling.
...
Upon completion, this form, along with the Key Plan and MultiLine Feature Button Assignments, if applicable, must be sent to
the persons responsible for the following tasks:
PABX Data Base Generation and Maintenance
0 Station Installation
,-* Customer Training
l
D-400
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
REFERENCES
19.0 The following reference documents (Table 19.1)
complement/supplement the information provided in this practice:
Table 19.1 References
DOCUMENT
Fujitsu
GTEPractices:
NUMBER
TL-130000-1001
3
Introduction/Features
TL-130500-1001
3
System Configuration
TL-130100-1001
13
Operation
278-904-l 80
I 3
TL-130300-1001 3
TL-130200-1001
Hardware
Ordering
Guide:
Ordering Guide
FM-41 444-A,
-B, or -C
Ordering Sheets
Configuration
Management:
CM-638202-SV I
CM-638202SVR
4186
Software Programming Data
Sheets (Instructions for
completing the software
programming data sheets are
contained in Technical Practice
TL-130400-1001.)
System Version Stocklist
I
I
I
System Version Release 52.1 .O
I
Cl-278-248
2
Cl-278-294
I
12
Cl-278-401
1
Attendant Manual Hotel/Motel
Health-Care Features Insert
Cl-278-402
1
Key Entry Display Unit
Instructions
8187
I
Maintenance
FM-41 444
FM-41 479
SVR 5210
I PD-200 Packet Data System
Hardware/Software Installation
3
Data Base
Sheets:
Customer
Instructions:
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE
Executive Features Insert
I
Busy Lamp Display Unit
D-401
TL-130400-1001
Table 19.1
References(Continued)
BESCRlPTlQN
D-402
Cl-278-41 0
1
OMNI Series Attendant Manual
Cl-278-41 1
1
Maid Service Features Insert
Cl-278-41 2
1
OMNI Series Generic Station
User’s Guide (No Access Codes
Included)
Cl-278-41 7
1
Asynchronous Packet Manager
User’s Guide
Cl-278-41 8
1
Integrated Voice Messaging
System User’s Guide
Cl-473-365
1
FeatureComm V/VI Handbook
for CD-100 Data
Cl-473-366
1
FeatureComm V/VI User’s
Manual (Voice Features Only)
Cl-473-395
1
FeatureComm V/VI Handbook
for PD-200 Data
Cl-473-396
1
FeatureComm VNI User’s
Manual for PD-200 Data
Cl-473-397
1
OMNI FeatureComm Handbook
(Voice Features Only)
Cl-473-398
1
OMNI FeatureComm User’s
Manual (Voice Features Only)
Cl-473-51 9
1
FeatureComm Quick Reference
Guide
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
CROSS REFERENCE
-..
SW 5210
20.0 This section provides cross-references to other
documents which may prove useful in configuring the
data base.
Record Code
Number to
Recent Change
Number
20.1 Table 20.1 provides a cross-reference of the record code
numbers to Recent Change numbers. When the Recent Change
number pertains to a specific record code column number, the
column number is included.
Record Code
=: Number to
Form Sequence
Number
20.2 Table 20.2 provides a cross-reference of the record code
numbers to the form sequence numbers.
Record Co,de
Number to
T Table Number
20.3 Table 20.2 provides a cross-reference of the record
numbers to the T table numbers.
8i87
code
D-403
r
TL-130400-1001
Table 20.1
Record
Codes
Used
Feature
Access
Code
Cross Reference of Features to Record Codes and Recent Change
AC
.
Attendant
AT,.
ConSole C A
DC
DD
NC.
OF
OT
Record Code
Column(s)
Numbers
Recent Change Numbers Used in
Support of Feature
all
all
all
all
all
-all
all
30-32, 45-47
AT=117, 181, 184, 188, 218
BD= 189
BK= 190
CA=183, 185, 186, 187
NC=203, 211, 213
OF = 89, 209
ACA
Tl
56-67
ACD
AD
AF
AG
DK
DT
HG
LD
z:
OF
RA
SD
Tl
all
all
all
all
all
all
16-18
all
all
42
all
all
45-48
AIOD
Tl
38
BLDU
AT
BD
BK
CA
37
all
all
61
189
190
CAS
Branch
CF
OE
OT
SD
Tl
all
15-17
51-62
all
49
218
CAS Main
AD
AF
AG
AL
DK
HG
MH
TM
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
46, 61, 65, 66, 45, 142, 218
D-404
8187
HG= 125, 127, 128
MH=126
OF = 89, 209
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 20.1
Record
Codes
Used
Feature
CAS Main
(Cont’d)
...
-
Cross Reference of Features to Record Codes and Recent Change
OE
OT
RC _i.
zr .‘
Tl
TM
CD-100 FR
LD
CO line
DD
LD
LM
TC
Record Code
Column(s)
Numbers
14, 15, 17
48-62
all
all
all
14-l 6, 49
all
all
all
FR=215
16-l 7, 40-41
45-48
28-29, 30-31
31-32
Code Call CD
all
Conference Calls
DD
18-l 9, 20-21
COS
AT
AU
DC
DD
LD
NC
OF
Tl
33-36
18-21
all
all
32-35
all
38-41
17-20
Customer
Defined
Terminal
CT
all
Dial Call
Pickup
ED
LD
NC
22-23
37-39, 40
22-23
Dictation
Access
DC
DD
Tl
allowed trunks
22-23
14-16
FADS
OE
SL
TT
47-49
12, 15-18
29
OE
NT
48
23-24
Five-Digit
Dialing
SVR 5210
Recent Change Numbers Used in
Support of Feature
DD=213
DC=211, 213
DD=166, 211, 2 1 3
LD=112,114
NC= 167, 212, 2 1 4
OF = 89, 209
8187
ED=135, 136, 137, 138, 139, 1 4 0
D-405
..~
TL-130400-1001
Table 20.1
r
Feature
Cross Reference of Features to Record Codes and Recent Change
Record
Codes
Used
Record Code
Column(s)
Numbers
FR
all
AT
FA
L D OF
SI
Tl
43
all
.36
12-21, 54
30
68-70
Hunt Group
HG
i- MH
Recent Change Numbers Used in
Support of Feature
FR = 221
215
219
all
all
127
126
CL
IR
RN
14-17
all
14-16
CL = 205, 206
IR = 205, 206
Intercom
Groups
LD
LM
all
all
LD=119
LM=144
IFP
LA
LD
LM
all
IFP Line
Appearances
LA
all
IVMS
AC
LD
LM
NC
OD
ov
Tl
140,141 = code
type #
45-48
30-31
70, 71
all
28,29
71
KD
KS
all
all
I
I
D-406
LD=105, 107, 108, 109, 117, 121, 1 4 1
LM=106,113,117,141
110, 112, 114, 118, 119, 132-134, 136, 144145
8187
LA=118, 145
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Cross Reference of Features to Record Codes and Recent Change
Table 20.1
Record
Codes
Feature
Used
MERS
on/off-net
..
AC
AC
AC ~.
A C ‘.
AC
AT
“c;..
DD
DD
IR
LP
MO
MR
MS
NR
:‘E
OF
OF
OV
PC
MDR
Record Code
Column(s)
Numbers
48, 89, 90, 94,
96, 102, 105,
115, 116, 126
and 127 = code
type #
37
14-17
1 f-21
32-33, 38-39,
42-47
all
all
all
all
all
all
24 18-20, 28-30
s”p
ST
T2
TD
TP
TR
TN
NT
27, 45-47, 50
and 55-56
12-17
all
all
all
all
28, 31-34, 49
12-16
all
all
all
18-20
LD
MD
MS
MT
OE
Sl
s2
TF
TT
49-50
all
all
all
15-l 7, 45-46
all
all
all
13-28
SVR 5210
Recent Change Numbers Used in
Support of Feature
8187
D-407
-..
TL-130400-i
ooi
Table 20.1
Feature
Mist
System
Features
..
Motel
Health
Care
Music on
Hold
D-408
-
Cross Reference of Features to Record Codes and Recent Change
Record
Codes
Used
CA
IR
;g
Record Code
Column(s)
Numbers
12-19
all
all
all
52
all
all
OF
OF
OT
A C AL
CL
HM
IR
KD
KS
LM
MK
PD
RN
T2
TL
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
32-33
all
all
all
all
all
all
AF
AG
o
35-37
13-15
all
c
CA
NC
PN
TC
20-31
36-37
all
39-44
CA
NC
TC
12-I 9, 27-30
36-37
37-44
PZ
Tl
all
14-16
8187
Recent Change Numbers Used in
Support of Feature
CA = 203
IR = 205, 206
MS=216, 217
OD = 218, 221, 222
OF=89
OF = 209
OT = 201
KD = 206
203
NC=212, 214
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 20.1
Cross Reference of Features to Record Codes and Recent Change
Record
Codes
Used
Feature
PD-200 AP
AQ
C l ~.
c 2 -‘
....
CP
FR
LD
NA-OE
Pl
Record Code
Column(s)
Numbers
all
all
all
all
all
all
12-15
all
all
all
Cl = Call Processing Information,
C2 = X.25 and ASYN. Characteristics
Common Port Information
FR = 221
NA= 168
:‘L
SR
RT
XP
all
13-14, 15-18
all
all
all
Recorder AF
Announcer AG
CF
IR
OT
RA
Tl
28-30, 35-37
25-26, 31-32
17
65-66
all
14-16
12-14
Remote AU
Access LD
OD
OF
T2
SCC
MS
TD
all
51
all
38-40
40
all
all
Silent
Monitor
72-73, 74-75
SVR 5210
OT = 201, 204
216
217
all
Speed Call GC
GS
LD
NC
ov
Pl = System Table, AccourWEvents Report
option, Account Administration
P2 = AccouWEvents Report
SL = System Access Password Table
SR = Symbolic Replacement Table
RT = Routing Table
XP = X.25 Frame Level Information, Packet
Level
OD = 218, 221, 222
OF = 89, 209
Security SL
Lock
NC
Recent Change Numbers Used in
Support of Feature
all
all
41-44
68-69
18-23
GC=207
GS = 202
LD=llO, 113
8187
D-409
TL-130400-1001
Table 20.1
Cross Reference of Features to Record Codes and Recent Change
Record
Codes
Used
Feature
Tandem
Network
..
MO
NT
OR
OE ‘.
OV
Tl
T2
TD--
Toll
Restriction
TCM
Traffic
D-41 0
all
K
IR
SA
T2
all
all
all
14-15
all
14-15
12,13
13-14
14-28
FA
all
TF
all
AT
LM
WT
Recent Change Numbers Used in
Support of Feature
all
all
all
50
26, 27
68-70
AS
CR
DA
DD
Trunk
CR
Group and EC
Member NA
F e a t u r e s
Tl
T2
TC
Ward
Control
Record Code
Column(s)
Numbers
O E
all
all
all
18-19
all
all
all
FA=215
CR = none
EC = none
NA=l68
OE = none
Tl=l60, 161, 169
T2= 160, 161
TC=151, 153, 154, 156, 157, 158, 159
39
32-33
all
8187
SVR 5210
r
TL-130400-1001
Table 20.2
Record
Code
AC
AD
AF
AG
AL
;;
Form Sequence Number for the Various Record Codes
Form Sequence
Number
Record
Code
Form Sequence
Number
900
520
460
500
400
670 680
MK
MO
MR
MS
MT
NA NC
370
268
280
255
290
040 125
AS
AT
AU
BD’
140
050
310
-046
NR
K
284
286
015
068
Et
CB
CD
CF
CH
CL
047 055
272
235
145
910
350
057
650
095
215
600
610
OE OF
OT
030 130
031
005
560
180
097
045
950
s”:
::
012 060
200
010
070
410
240
360
405
067
065
013
066
266
300
071
SR ST
Tl
T2
TC
TD
CN
CP
CR
CT
Cl
c2
i”c
DD
DF
DK
DT
EC
ED
FA
E
GS
HD
HG
HM
IR
KD
KS
LA
LD
LI
LM
LP
MD
MH
SVR 5210
‘:
‘-
OD
ov
Pl
P2
PC
PD
PZ
RA
RC
RN
RP
SD
Si
SL
SM
SP
-T-F
TL
TM
TN
TP
TR
TT
XP
8187
001 002
020
021
630
640
265
380
230
495
150
340
260
620 320
330
245
080
270
223
540
550
690 285
100
110
120
288
210
390
570
185
250
289
220
43
660
D-41 1
TL-130400-1001
Table 20.3
D-41 2
Record Code/T Table Cross-Reference
8/87
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 20.3
T Table
Number
Record Code/T Table Cross-Reference
Record T Table Record
Code(s) Number Code(s)
I
I
T5391
LD
T5401
AT, LD,
LM, OC
T5671
1T2
T Table Record
Number Code(s)
---I-T5931
C A
T5941
T P
1AT
LD
T5691
ED
T5701
LD
1 T5711
IT1
T5961’
KS
T5721
1Tl
T 5 9 6 2 1AT
T5731
1Tl
TC
T5741
1Tl
1 T5481
RP
T5751
1Tl, T2
1 T5491
TC
T5761
1T2
T5801
1T2
T 6 0 1 3 1LD
1 T5811
IT2
T6014
1 T5431
1AS
T5991
1Tl
T5511
j T5541
TC
T5551
T 6 0 1 5 1OD
T5571
T6021
I
OF
T5841
T5591
t
T2
T 5 8 4 2 1Tl
T5601
T2
I
I
1T2
I
T5861
A T
T5871
C A
I
T6031
1IR
---I-T6041 TF
T6046 --
T6180
AT, LD,
o c
T605D - -
T6194 LD, LM,
MH
I
I
--
CA, DT,
PN, SA
I
T5572
T5611
T6195 W T
T5881 CA
T6211
- -
T 6 0 5 3 j --
T6221
- -
T 6 0 5 5 1SL
T6231
O E
T6058 OE
T6241
A C
T6251
A C
T5891
1AT
T6051
T5641
T5901
1CA
T5651
1 T5911
ICA
T5661
j
SVR 5210
1AD
8187
1TT
D-41 3
TL-130400-1001
Table 20.3
D-41 4
Record Code/T Table Cross-Reference
TL-130400-1001
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
21.0 Table 21 .l describes the error messages that are
detected by the CPG program. These massages are used to
correct the errors that are generated in a CPG run.
..
SVR 5210
8187
D-415
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages
DESCRlPTlON OF MESSAGES
AS SHOWN IN THE CODE SYMBOL MODULE
V A L U E O F ‘ELEMENT TOO
PRIATE FOR THE CODE TYPE.
L MODULE FOR VALID VALUES
INVALID VALUE
DIGIT
D-41 6
COMBINATIONS.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
AC-52
....
TITLE
CPG Error Messages
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FEATURE NOT
USABLE
WITHOUT
INDICATED
.
RECORDCODE
..
THE LISTED RECORD CODE IS REQUIRED FOR THE
CODE TYPE SPECIFIED.
RECORD CODES
CODE TYPES
AD
113
AT
5-18, 45-46, 89-90,
102, 106-l 07
CL
76
225
:“s
12,119
MK
70
PN
30
RC
53, 55-56
WT
98-l 00, 115
AC-52
AGENT GROUP
NUMBER NOT
FOUND
THE AGENT GROUP NUMBER SPECIFIED IN THE CODE
TYPE IDENTIFIER FIELD FOR CODE TYPE 112 MUST
BE DEFINED ON AN AG RECORD.
AC-52
ATTENDANT
NOT FOUND
THE ATTENDANT NUMBER/S SPECIFIED IN THE CODE
TYPE IDENTIFIER FIELD FOR CODE TYPE 9 MUST BE
DEFINED ON AN AT RECORD.
AC-52
CLASS OF
SERVICE
REQUIRED
AC-52
FEATURE NOT
USABLE’
WITHOUT
CLASS OF
SERVICE MARK
THE LISTED CLASS OF SERVICE MARK ON RECORDS
DC, DD OR NC IS REQUIRED FOR THE SPECIFIED
CODE TYPES TO WORK.
CLASS OF SERVICE MARK
CODE TYPE
CC (RECODE CODE DC, DD)
22,23
CF (RECODE CODE NC)
20
CV RECODE CODE NC)
21
CO (RECODE CODE NC)
28,29
EX (RECODE CODE NC)
19
HD (RECODE CODE NC)
40,44
MC (RECODE CODE NC)
32,33
PA (RECODE CODE DC, DD)
34,35
PC (RECODE CODE DC, DD)
33,32
PK (RECODE CODE NC)
39,43
RL (RECODE CODE DC, DD)
53
SA (RECODE CODE NC)
120
UN (RECODE CODE NC)
31
(ENDCHK)
AC-52
SODE TYPE
IDENTIFIER DN-NET CODE
3N TR
THE ON-NET CODE SPECIFIED IN THE CODE TYPE
IDENTIFIER FIELD FOR CODE TYPE 105 MUST BE
DEFINED ON A TR RECORD.
SVR 5210
8187
D-41 7
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
WITH TRUNK
MUST BE DEFINED WITH A COMPATIBLE
APPLICATION ON A Tl RECORD.
’
ECIFIED ON AN SA REC
RECORD WITH A CODE
THE PILOT NUMBER SPECIFIED IN THE CODE TYPE
IDENTIFIER FIELD FOR CODE TYPES 37, 38, 41, 42, 61,
62 ,138, OR 139 MUST BE DEFINED AS THE PILOT
NUMBER OF THE CORRESPONDING HUNT GROUP ON
Tl AND TC RECORDS AS A RECORDER ANNOUNCER.
D-41 8
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
AC-53
.i_
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CLASS OF
SERVICE/
ACCESS CODE
ERROR
A FEATURE WAS SPECIFIED IN THE CLASS OF
SERVICE RECORD CODES (DC, DD, NC),
BUT AN ACCESS CODE FOR THE FEATURE WAS NOT
DEFINED.
DISPLAYABLE ACCESS
CLASS OF SERVICE TYPE
22,23
c c
DA
36
MC
32,33
ME
48
PA
34,35
PC
32,33
RL
53,55,56
CODE
N-DISPLAYABLE
ACCESS CODE
CLASS OF SERVICE TYPE
20
EL
28,29
21
cv
24
DC
71,72
DD
EX
19
HD
40,44
MA
83
13,14
oc
39,43
120
ri:
SC
119
UN
31
81,82
wu
(ENDCHK)
AC-54
SVR 5210
NO ACCESS
CODE FOUND
FOR TRUNK
GROUP. NO
ACCESS FOUND
FOR TRUNK
GROUP
Em7
ACCESS CODES SHOULD BE DEFINED FOR ALL
TRUNK GROUPS HAVING A DIRECTION OF OUTGOING
OR TWO-WAY ON A Tl RECORD.
IF A TRUNK GROUP DOES NOT HAVE AN ACCESS
CODE, ACCESS TO IT MUST BE PROVIDED ON
ANOTHER RECORD CODE SUCH AS NT, TD, LS, OR
D-419
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
DEFINED ON AN AC RECORD.
ACCESS CODE CODETYPE
IDENTIFIER
FIRST DIGIT OF
A TWO DIGIT
ACCESS CODE
TWO DIGIT
ACCESS CODE
FIRST DIGIT OF
A THREE DIGIT
ACCESS CODE
REQUIRED, AND IF TIME PERIOD CONTROL WAS
SPECIFIED ON AN AT RECORD,THEN CODE TYPE 100
IS REQUIRED.
NEVER THERE-ARE RN RECORDS WITH
OF 3DG OR 4DG.
FOR SILENT MONITOR ACCESS CODE (64),
FR RECORD.
EQUIPPED ON
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PREVIOUSLY
THE MERS ON-NET NPA MUST HAVE BEEN DEFINED
ON A TR RECORD.
MERS ON-NET NPA MUST HAVE BEEN DEFINED
M R F O R M .v
AN ACCESS CODE MUST BE PROVIDED WITH ONE OF
THE FOLLOWING CODE TYPES: 94, 96, 105, 126, O R
FIELD VALUE
IF THE OPI CARD IS EQUIPPED ON FR,
ODE TYPE IDENTIFIER MUST BE IN THE RANGE
SVR 5210
SUPERVISOR
AGENT LINE’2 FOR OTHER AGENTS IS ASSIGNED ON
AN LD RECORD.
CHARACTER
IF THE SUPERVISOR FIELD IS SPECIFIED.
8187
D-421
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INCOMPATIBLE
ALLOWED FOR
DATA LINK PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
DEFINED ON
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”,
THAT INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS
TION IS A WIDE CARD AND
ERHANGS INTO THIS PYHSICAL LOCATION ON
NONEXISTENT
IRCUIT SPECIFIED IS
DEFINED ON
RECORD CODE
AD-56
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
DATA LINK PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
THE AGENT DATA LINK MUST BE UNIQUE.
AD-58
REQUIRED
VALUE NOT
FOUND ON
LISTED FORM
THE LINE NUMBER OF SUPERVISOR LINE 2 MUST BE
A VALID ENTRY ON AN LD RECORD.
AD-59
FUNCTION OF
SELF - EXPLANATORY
AGENT GROUP
MUST BE ACD IF
DATA LINK
EQUIP IS -
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
THEN ANOTHER AGENT SUPERVISOR CANNOT
THE ALREADY DEFINED SUPERVISOR NUMBER.
-..
ON LINE 1 HAS
FEATUREi OC, CO, DC, CV, CF,TC, TD, UN, TM, PD,
HD, PK, CN, DD,WU, MA AND SD ARE NOT ALLOWED
WHEN THE FIELD ALLOW AGENT CALL ORIGINATION
ON LINE 1 HAS THE VALUE ‘A’.
IT IS SPECIFIED
PROVIDED ON FR RECORD.
EQUIPPED ON
CONSISTENTLY
SVR 5210
8187
D-423
r
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
AF-02
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
THE 9TH ART CARD MUST USE DASHES
CONSISTENTLY.
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
CHECK ON EQUIPPED STATUS
IF PEC, GROUP, AND CARD SLOT FIELDS ARE
DASHES, THEN THE EQUIPPED STATUS MUST BE ‘N’.
AF-51
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
THE 9TH ART CARD MUST CONTAIN A UNIQUE
PHYSICAL LOCATION.
AF-51
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
THE CARD WAS ASSIGNED TO A NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL LOCATION.
AF-51
CARD OVERHANGS INTO A
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED SLOT
THIS CARD IS AN OVERSIZED CARD AND IS TRYING
TO FILL TWO SLOTS.
OF THE TWO SLOTS IT FILLS,
THE RIGHT HAND ONE HAS ALREADY BEEN FILLED.
AF-51
PREVIOUS
THE CARD TO THE LEFT OF THIS SLOT IS AN
CARD
1OVERSIZED CARD
OVERHANGS
THE RIGHT HALF 6F THAT CARD FILLS THIS SLOT.
INTO TH,lS SLOT
AF-52
INVALID PILOT
NUMBER
SPECIFICATION
THE PILOT NUMBER SPECIFIED IN THE ACD PILOT
NUMBERS 1 THRU 4 MUST APPEAR AS A PILOT
NUMBER ON AN HG RECORD.
AF-53
PEC NUMBER IS
NOT EQUIPPED
THE PEC NUMBER SPECIFIED MUST BE MARKED
EQUIPPED ON THE OF RECORD.
AG-01
NIGHT DAY
MODE - NIGHT
DIVERT
DESTINATION
IF NIGHT MODE IS SPECIFIED,
THEN A NIGHT DIVERT DESTINATION MUST BE
SPECIFIED.
D-424
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CPG Error Messaaes (Continued)
we
TITLE
AG-02
I
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
NIGHT DIVERT
A NIGHT DIVERT DESTINATION ID MUST CONTAIN
DESTINATION ONLY THE ALLOWABLE VALUES ASSIGNED TO THE
NIGHT DIVERT
CORRESPONDING NIGHT DIVERT DESTINATION TYPE
DESTINATION ID AS FOLLOWS:
.,ALLOWABLE VALUE:
...
NIGHT DIVERT
DESTINATION
LN (LINE)
TK (TRUNK GROUP)
AG (AGENT GROUP)
RA (REC. ANN. #3)
AT (ATTENDANT)
AG-03
.
ALTERNATE
DIVERT
DESTINATION ALTERNATE
DIVERT
DESTINATION ID
NIGHT DIVERT
DESTINATION ID
0000 TO 9999
0000 TO 0063
DEPENDING ON SVR
0000 TO 0007
DEPENDING ON SVR
---0000 TO 0128
AN ALTERNATE DIVERT DESTINATION ID MUST
CONTAIN ONLY THE ALLOWABLE VALUES ASSIGNED
TO THE CORRESPONDING ALTERNATE DIVERT
DESTINATION TYPE AS FOLLOWS:
ALLOWABLE VALUE:
ALTERNATE DIVERT
ALTERNATE NIGHT
DESTINATION
DIVERT DESTINATION ID
LN
TK
AG
RA
(LINE)
0000 TO 9999
(TRUNK GROUP)
0000 TO 0063
(AGENT GROUP)
0000 TO 0007
(RECORDER ANNOUNCER) PXXX WHERE
P= PEC NUMBER
XXX=TRUNK NUMBER
AT (ATTENDANT)
0000 TO 0128
AG-04
NIGHT/ALTERNATE DIVERT
DESTINATION AGENT GROUP
IF A CAS MAIN/ACD GROUP IS SPECIFIED AS THE
NIGHT/ALTERNATE DIVERT DESTINATION,
IT CANNOT BE THE SAME GROUP.
AG-05
ALTERNATE
DIVERT
DESTINATION
TIMING
THE ALTERNATE DIVERT DESTINATION TIMING IS
REQUIRED IF AN ALTERNATE DIVERT DESTINATION IS
SPECIFIED.
AG-06
PLAY RA #I
BEFORE
ROUTING - RA
#l
RECORDER ANNOUNCER #l MUST BE PLAYED IF
PLAY RA #1 BEFORE ROUTING TO AGENT GROUP IS
SPECIFIED AS ‘Y’.
AG-07
TIME BETWEEN
RA #l AND RA
#2
THE TIME BETWEEN RA #l AND RA #2 IS REQUIRED IF
BOTH RECORDER ANNOUNCERS ARE TO BE PLAYED.
SVR 5210
8187
D-425
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PEAT OF RA #2 MUST
CALL WAIT LEVEL 2 MUST BE GREATER THAN CALL
ORK STATE VALUE MUST BE DASHED.
ATE VALUE MUST BE
SFER, AND ALERT
FLASH/ALERT
TONE
AG-14
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
AG-51
RECORDCODE
TYPE NOT
FOUND
AG-51
AGENT GROUP
NUMBER NOT
FOUND
EACH AGENT GROUP ASSIGNED TO A TRUNK GROUP
ON A Tl RECORD MUST APPEAR ON AN AG RECORD.
(INTER & ENDCHK)
AG-52
DUPLICATE
AGENT GROUP
NUMBER
THE AGENT GROUP NUMBER ON EACH AG RECORD
MUST BE UNIQUE.
D-426
8187
IF RECORDER ANNOUNCER (‘RA’) IS SPECIFIED AS
NITE DIVERT DESTINATION,
THEN RA #3 MUST NOT BE DASHED.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
AG-53
%...
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
NIGHT DIVERT
IF A NIGHT DIVERT DESTINATION ID IS SPECIFIED, IT
DESTINATION ID MUST EXIST;
I.E., IT MUST ALSO BE ENTERED ON AN APPROPRIATE
RECORD AS FOLLOWS:
NIGHT DIVERT
DESTINATION ID
CORRESPONDING
REQUIRED RECORD
_
LN
TK
AG
RA
AT
-AG-54
ALTERNATE
DIVERT
DESTINATION ID
LINE NUMBER
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
AGENT GROUP NUMBER
---- (REC. ANN. #3)
ATTENDANT MASK
----
IF AN ALTERNATE DIVERT DESTINATION ID IS
SPECIFIED, IT MUST EXIST;
I.E., IT MUST ALSO BE ENTERED ON AN
APPROPRIATE RECORD AS FOLLOWS:
ALTERNATE DIVERT
DESTINATION ID
LN
TK
AG
RA
OF
AT
--
AG-55
SVR 5210
FUNCTION NOT
SAME AS THE
DIVERTING
GROUP
8/W
LD
Tl AND T2
AG
RA
AT
NONE
CORRESPONDING
REQUIRED RECORD
LINE NUMBER
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
AGENT GROUP NUMBER
PEC AND TRUCK NUMBER
RECORDER/ANN
ATTENDANT MASK
----
LD
Tl AND T2
AG
TC
AT
NONE
IF A CAS MAIN/ACD GROUP IS SPECIFIED AS THE
NIGHT/ALTERNATE DIVERT DESTINATION,
IT MUST HAVE THE SAME FUNCTION AS THE
DIVERTING GROUP;
I.E. BOTH MUST BE CAS OR BOTH MUST BE ACD.
(ENDCHK)
D-427
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
AG-56
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FIELD DOES
NOT HAVE
REQUIRED
VALUE
._
RA #l, RA #2 AND RA #3 FIELDS IF SPECIFIED ON AN
AG RECORD REQUIRE CERTAIN FIELDS TO BE
EQUIPPED ON AN RA RECORD, DEPENDING ON THE
VALUE SPECIFIED:
THE REQUIREMENTS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
...
FIELD AND VALUE
ON AG RECORD
VALUES REQUIRED
ON RA RECORD
RA #l: 1
A
RA #2: 2
A
RA #3: 3
A
RA #1
ALT RA #l
RA #2
ALT RA #2
RA #3
ALT RA #3
,-
AL-01
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
AL-01
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
AL-01
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
FUNCTION STATUS - PRINTER ID
THERE ARE CERTAIN VALUES REQUIRED IN THE
PRINTER ID FIELD DEPENDING ON THE FUNCTIONS
STATUS VALUE:
FUNCTION
STATUS
AL
--
AL-51
D-428
KEDU NUMBER
NOT FOUND
8187
ALLOWABLE VALUES OF
PRINTER NUMBER ID
01-15
--
THE SPECIFIED KEDU NUMBER MUST BE A VALID
KEDU NUMBER ON A KD RECORD.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
AL-52
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
PRINTER
NUMBER NOT
FOUND
._-
....
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
THE PRINTER ID IDENTIFIES A SPECIFIC PRINTER
NUMBER OR SEVERAL PRINTER NUMBERS
DEPENDING ON THE VALUE RANGE ENTERED.
ALL PRINTER NUMBERS INDICATED BY THE PRINTER
ID MUST BE VALID PRINTER NUMBERS ON A PD
RECORD.
PRINTER
ID
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
AP-52
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
AP-52
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
AP-52
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
SVR 5210
PRINTER
NUMBER(S)
NONE
0
1
0,1
2
02
12
0,1,2
3
0,3
1,3
0,1,3
23
023
1,2,3
0,123
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE). ASYNCHRONOUS PORT
MUST APPEAR ON A VPLO, VPLl, VP20 (VOICE OR
VOICE AND DATA) OR VP21 CARD. (PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”
THAT INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS
LOCATION IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO
THIS PHYSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
8187
D-429
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
AP-53
..
AP-53
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
DEFINED ON
RECORD CODE
LD:
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
DEFINED
..
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT OF AN
ASYNCHRONOUS PORT MUST BE DEFINED ON AN LD
RECORD.
AP-53
USE OF
PHYSICAL LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOC
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT OF AN
CONFLICTS
ASYNCHRONOUS PORT MUST BE DEFINED ON AN LD
WITH INSTR.
RECORD WITH AN INSTRUMENT TYPE OF ‘DFPA’ OR
TYPE SPECIFIED ‘APM’ (DEPENDING ON THE SVR).
ON LD
AP-54
DUPLICATE
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS ALL AP RECORDS.
AP-56
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
FOUND ON
RECORD CODE
CP
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT OF AN
ASYNCHRONOUS PORT MUST BE DEFINED ON A CP
RECORD WITH A DEVICE TYPE OF EITHER ‘TERM’ OR
‘HOST’.
AP-56
HOST LINE
ADAPT. SPEED
IS VALID ONLY
FOR DEVICE
TYPE
HOST ON CP
PHYSICAL LOCATION - HOST LINE ADAPTIVE SPEED
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT OF AN
ASYNCHRONOUS PORT MUST BE DEFINED ON A CP
RECORD WITH A DEVICE TYPE ‘HOST’ IF HOST LINE
ADAPTIVE SPEED IS SPECIFIED AS ‘Y’.
AP-82
PHYSICAL
LOCATION IS
MISSING ON
NAMED
RECORDCODE
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE COMPLETE DEFINITION ON AN ASYNCHRONOUS
PORT INCLUDES AN LD, CP AND AP RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
AQ-52
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
D-430
8187
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
AQ-52
-..
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
%
. CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON AN FR RECORD (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
AN ASYNCHRONOUS PORT MUST APPEAR ON A VPLO,
VPLl, VP20 (VOICE AND DATA OR DATA) OR VP21
CARD. (PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “ OVER “,
THAT INDICATES THAT THE CARD IN THE PREVIOUS
LOCATION IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO
THIS PHYSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
AQ-52
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
AQ-52
PHYSICAL
PHYSICAL LOCATION
LOCATION NOT THE PEC, GROUP, AND SLOT SPECIFIED WAS NOT
DEFINED ON
DEFINED ON AN FR RECORD.
RECORD CODE (PHYLOC)
FR
AQ-53
USE OF
PHYSICAL LOC
CONFLICTS
WITH INSTR.
TYPE SPECIFIED
ON LD
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT OF AN
ASYNCHRONOUS PORT MUST BE DEFINED ON AN LD
RECORD WITH AN INSTRUMENT TYPE OF ‘DFPA’ OR
‘APM’.
AQ-54
DUPLICATE
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS ALL AQ RECORDS.
AQ-55
SITE HAS
INCONSISTENT
DATA BASE
AN INCONSISTENCY HAS BEEN DETECTED IN THE
SET/READ LIST OF THE LISTED PORT TABLE ENTRY.
AS-51
TRUNK GROUP
NOT FOUND
THE TRUNK GROUP SPECIFIED MUST HAVE A
CORRESPONDING Tl RECORD.
AS-52
DUPLICATE
TRUNK GROUP
NUMBER
THIS NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS AS
RECORDS.
AT-01
ATTENDANT
BILLING
NUMBER
DASHES MUST BE USED CONSISTENTLY IN FIELD.
SVR 5210
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED IS
NOT VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE. (PHYLOC)
8187
D-431
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
AT-03
PEC - PEC
INDICATED BY
THE CONSOLE
AT-04
....
SECOND FIELD
PATTERN MUST
BE SPECIFIED IF
FIRST FIELD IS
Y
AT-04
SE&ND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
AT-04
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
AT-05
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
AT-05
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
THE ATTENDANT BILLING NUMBER MUST BE IN THE
SAME PEC AS INDICATED BY THE CONSOLE.
PROGRAMMABLE ATTENDANT CONSOLE PROGRAMMABLE SWITCHES ONLY ONE TYPE OF
CONSOLE MAY BE USED ON THE SYSTEM
(I.E., STANDARD AND PROGRAMMABLE SWITCHES
MAY NOT CO-EXIST).
ATTENDANT NUMBER - PEC
THE PLACEMENTS OF ATTENDANTS IN THE PECS ARE
AS FOLLOWS:
ATTENDANT NUMBER
0 TO 1
2 TO 3
4 TO 5
6TO7
PEC
0
1
2
3
AT-06
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
EQUIPPED STATUS - LINE STATUS
IF THE EQUIPPED STATUS OF THE DATA LINK IS
IS/OS, THE LINE STATUS OF LINE DATA MUST BE THE
SAME OR --.
AT-07
CKT MUST BE 0
IF PROGRAMMABLE
ATTENDANT
CONSOLE IS ‘-’
CIRCUIT - PROGRAMMABLE ATTENDANT CONSOLE
IF PROGRAMMABLE ATTENDANT CONSOLE IS
DASHED,
THEN THE CIRCUIT OF THE DATA LINK MUST BE 0.
AT-51
DUPLICATE
ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
NUMBER
THE ATTENDANT NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS
THE AT RECORDS.
D-432
8J87
SVR 5210
r
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
AT-52
...
Ai-
CPG
-~ _ -Error
.._. . Messaoes
..- ---=-- fContinued\
t-----------t
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
JNCOMING
CARD
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
!NCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
AT-52
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
DATA LINK PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
ATTENDANT DATA LINK MUST APPEAR ON AN ATTN
CARD.
(PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER” THAT
INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS LOCATION
IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO THIS
PYHSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
AT-52
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
DATA LINK PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED IS
NOT VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
(PHYLOC)
AT-52
PHYSICAL
DATA LINK PHYSICAL LOCATION
LOCATION NOT THE PEC, GROUP, AND SLOT SPECIFIED WAS NOT
DEFINED ON
DEFINED ON AN FR RECORD.
RECORD CODE (PHYLOC)
FR
AT-52
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
AT-55
PEC NUMBER IS PEC NUMBER
NOT EQUIPPED THE PEC SPECIFIED MUST BE MARKED EQUIPPED ON
THE OE RECORD.
AT-55
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
SVR 5210
DATA LINK PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
THE ATTENDANT DATA LINK MUST BE UNIQUE.
(PHYLOC)
THE CARD WAS ASSIGNED TO A NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL LOCATION.
8h37
D-433
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
AT-55
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO A
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED SLOT
THIS CARD IS AN OVERSIZED CARD AND IS TRYING
TO FILL TWO SLOTS. OF THE TWO SLOTS IT FILLS,
THE RIGHT HAND ONE HAS ALREADY BEEN FILLED.
AT-55
PREVIOUS
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO THIS SCOT
THE CARD TO THE LEFT OF THIS SLOT IS AN
OVERSIZED CARD. THE RIGHT HALF OF THAT CARD
FILLS THIS SLOT.
AT-56
PEC/BLDU NOT
FOUND
THE PEC AND BLDU SPECIFIED DID NOT HAVE A
CORRESPONDING BK RECORD.
AT-58
PEC NUMBER
NOT FOUND ON
BD
THE BLDU NUMBER SPECIFIED ON AN AT RECORD
MUST HAVE AN EQUIPPED STATUS ON A BD RECORD.
AT-59
DUPLICATE
PEC/BLDU
NUMBER
ONLY ONE ATTENDANT CONSOLE CAN USE A
PARTICULAR BLDU.
AT-60
ALL AT FORMS
ONLY ONE TYPE OF CONSOLE MAY BE USED ACROSS
MUST HAVE
ALL AT RECORDS.
ONLY ONE TYPE (ENDCHK)
OF CONSOLE
AT-61
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
AT-61
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
AT-61
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
D-434
8187
LINE PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
ATTENDANT LINE MUST APPEAR ON A POTS OR OFFP
LINE CARD.
(PHYLOC)
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
Tl!:PEC GROUP SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED IS
NOT VALiD FOR Ti-lIS PEC TYPE.
DEFINED ON
FR.
DEFINED ON AN FR OR L R RECORD.
‘ND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
MUST BE UNIQUE.
AT-80
FRL MUST BE
SPECIFIED
FRLS HAVE BEEN EQUIPPED FOR THIS SYSTEM ON
RECORD CODE OF AND MUST THEREFORE BE
SPECIFIED FOR EVERY ATTENDANT ON RECORD
CODE AT.
AT-80
INCONSISTENT
ENGINEERING
OF FRLS
FRLS HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED FOR SOME PARTS OF
THE SYSTEM AND NOT OTHERS.
ENSURE THAT ALL ATTENDANTS, LINES, TRUNK
GROUPS, MERS ROUTES, ETC. HAVE FRLS ENTIRELY
ENABLED OR DISABLED.
AT-82
OPI CARD NOT
EQUIPPED
RECEIVE PMS MESSAGES WAS INDICATED BUT OPI
CARD WAS NOT EQUIPPED.
AT-83
DTMF
ATTENDANT CONSOLES REQUIRE USE OF A DTMF
RECEIVER NOT RECEIVER.
EQUIPPED ON
RECORD FR
SVR 5210
8187
D-435
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
AU-51
DUPLICATE
AUTHORIZATIO
N CODE
NUMBER
THE AUTHORIZATION CODE NUMBER MUST BE
UNIQUE ACROSS ALL AU RECORDS.
AU-52
CLASS OF
SERVICE NOT
DEFINED
THE DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE NUMBER MUST
BE DEFINED ON A DC RECORD.
AU-53
C L A S S O F ‘m
SERVICE NOT
DEFINED
THE N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE NUMBER
MUST BE DEFINED ON AN NC RECORD.
BD-01
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
PEC - GROUP - CARD SLOT - CIRCUIT
DASHES MUST BE USED CONSISTENTLY ACROSS THE
ENTIRE PHYSICAL LOCATION (PEC, GROUP, CARD
SLOT, CIRCUIT).
IF ANY OF THE FIELDS CONTAIN DASHES, THEN ALL
MUST BE DASHED.
IF ONE OF THE FIELDS IS SPECIFIED (NONDASHED),
THEN ALL MUST BE SPECIFIED.
BD-51
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
BD-51
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
BD-51
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED IS
NOT VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
(PHYLOC)
BD-51
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
DEFINED ON
RECORD CODE
FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, AND SLOT SPECIFIED WAS NOT
DEFINED ON AN FR RECORD.
(PHYLOC)
D-436
8187
SVR 5210
-.
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
BD-51
.~_
_
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
.
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
A BLDU CIRCUIT MUST APPEAR ON AN ATTN CARD.
(PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESsAGE IS “OVER” THAT
INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS LOCATION
IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO THIS
PHYSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
BD-51
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
THE BLDU CIRCUIT MUST BE UNIQUE.
(PHYLOC)
BD-51
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO A
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED SLOT
THIS CARD IS AN OVERSIZED CARD AND IS TRYING
TO FILL TWO SLOTS. OF THE TWO SLOTS IT FILLS,
THE RIGHT HAND ONE HAS ALREADY BEEN FILLED.
BD-51
PREVIOUS
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO THIS SLOT
THE CARD TO THE LEFT OF THIS SLOT IS AN
OVERSIZED CARD.
THE RIGHT HALF OF THAT CARD FILLS THIS SLOT.
BD-55
PEC NUMBER
NOT EQUIPPED
PEC NUMBER
THE PEC SPECIFIED MUST BE EQUIPPED ON THE OE
RECORD.
BK-51
PEC NUMBER
NOT FOUND ON
BD
EACH PEC SPECIFIED ON A BK RECORD,
MUST ALSO BE SPECIFIED IN THE BD RECORD.
BK-52
DUPLICATE
PECIBLDU
NUMBER
THE COMBINATION OF PEC AND BUSY LAMP DISPLAY
UNIT NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS ALL BK
RECORDS.
BK-53
HUNDREDS
GROUP NOT
FOUND
THE SPECIFIED HUNDREDS GROUP WAS NOT
ENGINEERED ON AN HD RECORD.
CA-02
SECOND
ATTENDANT CALL WAITING QUEUE SIZES QUEUE lELEMENT LESS QUEUE 2.
THAN FIRST
ATTENDANT CALL WAITING QUEUE 2 MUST BE
ELEMENT
LARGER THAN ATTENDANT CALL WAITING QUEUE 1.
SVR 5210
8187
D-437
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CA-04
ONLY ONE
FIELD CAN BE
SPECIFIED
NIGHT ANSWER POSITIONS 1 AND 2 PNA
DESTINATION NUMBER - UNA ZONES ONLY ONE OF
THESE FIELDS CAN BE SPECIFIED.
PNA
DEST
UNA
ZONES
NO
---02
ALLOWED
-uu-ALLOWED
15
UUUU INCORRECT
CA-05
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
IF THE ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT STATUS IS DASH,
THEN THE CHOICE OF CONSOLE ORDER FIELDS
MUST ALL BE DASHES.
CA-51
ATTENDANT
NOT FOUND
THE ATTENDANT MARKED FOR NIGHT ANSWER
CONTROL MUST APPEAR ON AN AT RECORD.
CA-52
HUNDREDS
GROUP NOT
FOUND
THE FIRST TWO DIGITS OF DIRECTORY NUMBER
FIELDS SHOULD BE VALID NUMBERS
CORRESPONDING TO THE DIRECTORY NUMBERS IN
USE.
CA-56
A REQUIRED
RECORD TYPE
NOT FOUND
IF A CA RECORD IS SUPPLIED AT LEAST ONE AT
RECORD MUST BE SUPPLIED ALSO.
CA-57
P N A
DESTINATION
NUMBER
THE PNA DESTINATION NUMBER SPECIFIED MUST BE
A VALID PNA DESTINATION NUMBER DEFINED ON A
PN RECORD.
CA-57
TOO MANY PNA
PILOT
NUMBERS
MORE THAN THE SVR MAXIMUM NUMBER OF UNIQUE
PNA PILOT NUMBERS HAVE BEEN USED.
CA-58
ATTENDANT
NOT FOUND
IF AN ATTENDANT NUMBER IS SPECIFIED IN ANY OF
THE EIGHT CHOICES OF CONSOLE FIELDS,
THAT NUMBER MUST BE A VALID ATTENDANT
CIRCUIT NUMBER DEFINED ON AN AT RECORD.
CB-01
INVALID
RECORD CODE
- DIGITS
INCONSISTENT
CODE BLOCKED DIGITS 8 - 10 MUST BE ENTIRELY
DASHED OR NOT DASHED AT ALL.
CB-50
7/l O-DIGIT
CHECKING NOT
SPECIFIED ON
RECORDCODE
OF
IF A -/-DIGIT CODE BLOCKED NUMBER IS SPECIFIED
THEN 7-DIGIT CHECKING MUST BE ENABLED ON
RECORD CODE OF.
IF A lo-DIGIT CODE BLOCKED NUMBER IS SPECIFIED
THEN lo-DIGIT CHECKING MUST BE ENABLED ON
RECORD CODE OF.
D-438
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CB-51
DUPLICATE
ENTRY
A DUPLICATE CB RECORD HAS BEEN DETECTED.
CD-52 c
CLASS OF
SERVICE
REQUIRED
AT LEAST ONE DC OR DD RECORD SHOULD SPECIFY
CODE CALL ACCESS (‘CC’).
-CF-01
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
CF-01
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
CF-01
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
CF-02
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
CF-02
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
CF-02
SECOND
PATTERN MUST
BE SPECIFIED IF
FIRST FIELD IS
‘Y
CF-02
CF-02 DASHES
IF RLT BUSY DIVERT TO RECORDER ANNOUNCER IS
MUST BE USED DASHED, CAMP-ON RECORDER ANNOUNCER MUST
CONSISTENTLY BE DASHED.
IN FIELD
IF RLT BUSY DIVERT TO RECORDER ANNOUNCER IS
‘Y’, CAMP-ON RECORDER ANNOUNCER MUST BE
SPECIFIED (NOT DASHED).
CF-51
CLASS OF
SERVICE NOT
DEFINED
SVR 5210
8187
CAMP-ON RECORDER ANNOUNCER PEC NUMBER PABX TRUNK NUMBER.
DASHES MUST BE CONSISTENT.
IF ONE FIELD IS DASHED THEN THE OTHER MUST BE
DASHED.
THE DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE MUST APPEAR
ON A DD RECORD AND THE N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS
OF SERVICE MUST APPEAR ON AN NC RECORD.
D-439
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRlPTlON OF MESSAGES
BETWEEN DISPLAYABLE AND N-DISPLAYABLE
CLASSES OF SERVICE, SEE APPENDIX 1.
NUMBER NOT
FOUND
_
DEFINING A RECORDER ANNOUNCER.
THE RECORDER ANNOUNCER INDICATED MUST BE
USED FOR THIS FEATURE ONLY. IN ORDER TO WORK
PROPERLY THIS RECORDER ANN
NCER CANNOT
ANNOUNCER ON A Tl RECORD.
CONSISTENTLY
HED THEN DIGITS 2 AND 3 MUST BE DASHES.
2 IS DASHED THEN DIGIT 3 MUST BE
RY NUMBER
S E FIELDS MUST BE FILLED WITH DASHES
E OTHER FIELD MUST SPECIFY A NON-DASH
R Y NUMBER - NEW COD
ONE OF THESE FIELDS MUST BE FILLED WITH
DASHES AND THE OTHER FIELD MUST SPECIFY A
NON-DASH VALUE.
D-440
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1004
Table 21.1
C’PG ERROR
MESSAGES
CH-05
*
-..
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRlPTlON OF MESSAGES
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
CH-05
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
CH-05
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
NEW CODE TYPE - NEW CODE TYPE IDENTIFIER
THE CODE TYPE IDENTIFIER SPECIFIED IS
INAPPROPRIATE FOR THE CODE TYPE.
SEE THE CODE SYMBOL MODULE FOR VALID VALUES
FOR EACH CODE TYPE.
CH-51
ACCESS CODE
NOT FOUND
THE OLD ACCESS CODE REFERENCED ON THE CH
RECORD MUST BE DEFINED ON AN AC RECORD.
(TABGENIGENDIG)
CH-52
A CH RECORD
REQUIRES A
CODE TYPE OF
50 ON AC AND
VICE VERSA
AN AC RECORD WITH A CODE TYPE OF 50
(CHANGE/RESTORE ACCESS CODE) REQUIRES THAT
A CH RECORD BE SPECIFIED AND VICE VERSA.
(ENDCHK)
CH-53
INVALID CODE
TYPE FOR
CHANGE/
RESTORE
THE CODE TYPE OF THE OLD OR NEW STATION
NUMBER OR THE OLD OR NEW CODE TYPE ITSELF IS
NOT APPROPRIATE FOR USE WITH THE
CHANGE/RESTORE FEATURE.
(TABGENIGENDIG)
CH-54
AGENT GROUP
NUMBER NOT
FOUND
THE AGENT GROUP NUMBER SPECIFIED IN THE CODE
TYPE IDENTIFIER FIELD FOR CODE TYPE 112 MUST
BE DEFINED ON AN AG RECORD.
CH-54
ATTENDANT
NOT FOUND
THE ATTENDANT NUMBER(S) SPECIFIED IN THE CODE
TYPE IDENTIFIER FIELD FOR CODE TYPE 9 MUST BE
DEFINED ON AN AT RECORD.
CH-54
INTERCEPT
ROUTING CODE
NOT FOUND
IF THE CODE TYPE IS 000,
THEN THE CODE TYPE IDENTIFIER MUST BE A VALID
INTERCEPT ROUTING NUMBER ON AN IR RECORD.
CH-54
REFERENCED
THE TRUNK NUMBER SPECIFIED IN THE CODE TYPE
TRUNK IS NOT A IDENTIFIER FOR CODE TYPE 49 MUST BE DEFINED ON
RECORDER
Tl AND TC RECORDS AS A RECORDER ANNOUNCER.
ANNOUNCE
SVR 5210
ah37
D-441
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CERTAIN VALUES IN THE DESTINATION TYPE FIELD
REQUIRE SPECIFIC VALUES OR RANGE OF VALUES IN
THE DESTINATION IDENTIFIER FIELD:
DESTINATION
DESTINATION
IDENTIFIER
1. IF THE DESTINATION TYPE IS ‘LINE’,
THE DESTINATION IDENTIFIER VALUE SPECIFIED
MUST BE A VALID LINE STATION NUMBER DEFINED
ON AN LD RECORD.
2. IF THE DESTINATION TYPE IS ‘ATTN’,
THE DESTINATION IDENTIFIER VALUE SPECIFIED
MUST BE A VALID ATTENDANT CIRCUIT DEFINED
ON AN AT RECORD.
3. IF THE DESTINATION TYPE IS ‘INTC’,
THE DESTINATION IDENTIFIER VALUE SPECIFIED
MUST BE A VALID INTERCEPT ROUTING NUMBER
THE SPECIFIED HUNDREDS GROUP WAS NOT
ENGINEERED ON AN HD RECORD.
HUNDREDS GROUP ‘OX’ AND ‘X’ EXIST AT Tl-iE SITE.
D-442
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CP-01
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INVALID
CHARACTER
STRING
X.1 21 ADDRESS
THE X.121 ADDRESS MUST CONSIST OF FROM ONE
TO FOURTEEN NUMERIC DIGITS FOLLOWED BY
DASHES.
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
DEVICE TYPE - X.121 ADDRESS
IF THE DEVICE TYPE IS ‘TERM’ OR ‘HOST’, THEN THE
X.121 ADDRESS MUST CONSIST OF FOURTEEN
NUMERIC DIGITS AND NO DASHES.
ASYNCHRONOUS DEVICES MUST SPECIFY A FULL
X.121 ADDRESS (DNIC, SERVER, SUBPORT). IF THE
DEVICE TYPE IS ‘X25’, ‘PX25’ OR ‘NIC’, THE SUBPORT MAY BE DASHES.
CP-03
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
DEVICE TYPE - WINDOW AND PACKET NEGOTIATION
IF THE WINDOW AND PACKET NEGOTIATION FIELD IS
‘Y’,
THEN THE DEVICE OR PORT TYPE FIELD MUST BE
‘X25’ OR ‘NIC’. ONLY SYNCHRONOUS DEVICES MAY
PERFORM WINDOW AND PACKET NEGOTIATION.
CP-04
ELEMENT 2 IS A
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
CP-04
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
*
CP-02
_
DEVICE TYPE - ADMP OR MDR FIELD
CERTAIN VALUES IN THE ADMP OR MDR FIELD
REQUIRE SPECIFIC VALUES IN THE DEVICE TYPE OR
PORT TYPE FIELD:
ADMP OR MDR
A
M
CP-51
NO PACKET
ROUTER FOR
PORT
CP-52
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
SVR 5210
DEVICE TYPE
PX25
TERM
TERM,HOST,X25,NIC
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
EVERY DATA PORT MUST APPEAR ON A LOCAL
PACKET BUS WHICH IS CONTROLLED BY A PACKET
ROUTER.
(TABGEN/GENDAT)
$187
D-443
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CP-52
...
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRlPTlON OF MESSAGES
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
.
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
CP-52 -
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT ,_
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
DEVICE TYPE TERM MUST APPEAR ON A VPLO, VPLl,
VP20 (DATA OR VOICE AND DATA), OR VP21 CARD.
DEVICE TYPE HOST MUST APPEAR ON A VPLO, VPLl,
VP20 (DATA OR VOICE AND DATA), OR VP21 CARD.
DEVICE TYPE X25 MUST APPEAR ON A VPLO, VPLl,
VP20 (DATA OR VOICE AND DATA), OR VP21 CARD.
DEVICE TYPE PX25 MUST APPEAR ON AN ADMP
CARD.
DEVICE TYPE NIC MUST APPEAR ON A NIC CARD.
(PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”, THAT
INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS LOCATION
IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO THIS
PHYSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
CP-52
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED IS
NOT VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
(PHYLOC)
CP-52
PHYSICAL
PHYSICAL LOCATION
LOCATION NOT THE PEC, GROUP, AND SLOT SPECIFIED WAS NOT
DEFINED ON
DEFINED ON AN FR RECORD.
RECORD CODE (PHYLOC)
FR
CP-53
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
DEFINED ON
RECORD CODE
LD
CP-53
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
DEFINED
D-444
8l87
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CP-53
-r
-..
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
USE OF
DEVICE TYPE - PHYSICAL LOCATION THE PEC,
PHYSICAL LOC
GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT OF SOME DATA PORTS
CONFLICTS
MUST BE DEFINED ON AN LD RECORD.
WITH
DEVICE TYPE TERM MUST APPEAR ON AN LD
INSTRUMENT
RECORD WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘DFPA’ OR ‘APM’.
TYPE SPECIFIED DEVICE TYPE HOST MUST APPEAR ON AN LD
ON LD
RECORD WITH
.INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘DFPA’ OR ‘APM’.
DEVICE TYPE X25 MUST APPEAR ON AN LD RECORD
WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘SPM’.
DEVICE TYPE NIC MUST APPEAR ON A TC RECORD
AS A MEMBER OF A NIC TRUNK GROUP.
CP-54
DUPLICATE
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
CP-55
X.121 ADDRESS X.121 ADDRESS
NOT IN ROTARY AN ASYNCHRONOUS PORT (DEVICE TYPE OF ‘TERM’
OR ‘HOST’) MUST BE PART OF AN ASYNCHRONOUS
GROUP
(ORDER ROTARY, ORdER DIRECT, RANDOM ROTARY,
RANDOM DIRECT) DEFINED ON AN RT RECORD.
(TABGENIGENDAT)
CP-57
MPR MUST BE
SPECIFIED ON
RECORD CODE
OE AND Pl
ADMP OR MDR FIELD
IF THIS DATA PORT IS SPECIFIED AS INTERFACING TO
THE MDR PROCESSOR THEN MDR MUST BE
EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD.
THE MDR FIELD ON SYSTEM START-UP (MDR
EQUIPPED) MUST BE ‘Y’ ON THE Pl RECORD.
CP-58
ONLY ONE MDR
AND ONE ADMP
X.121 ADDRESS
MAY BE
SPECIFIED
ADMP OR MDR FIELD
THE DATA PORT INTERFACING TO THE MDR
PROCESSOR AND THE PSEUDO DATA PORT
INTERFACING TO THE ADMP MUST BE UNIQUE.
CP-59
AN ADMP CARD
MUST BE
DEFINED ON
RECORD CODE
FR
ADMP OR MDR FIELD
IF THIS DATA PORT IS SPECIFIED AS INTERFACING TO
THE PSEUDO DATA PORT, THEN AN ADMP CARD
MUST BE DEFINED ON AN FR RECORD.
(ADMPCK)
SVR 5210
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS ALL CP RECORDS.
8187
D-445
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PORTS DEFINED
ESS SPECIFIED MUST BE UNIQUE
ACROSS ALL CP RECORD. IN ADDITION,
THERE MUST BE NO CONFLICT BETWEEN THE
TWELVE NUMERIC DIGIT X.121 ADDRESSES FOR
SYNCHRONOUS DATA PORTS (DEVICE TYPES ‘X25’,
‘NIC’ AND ‘PX25’) AND THE FOURTEEN NUMERIC DIGIT
X.121 ADDRESSES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS DATA
PORTS (DEVICE TYPES ‘TERM’ AND ‘HOST’)
EN ROTARY MUST HAVE THE
DCP SPECIFIED ON RECORD
NED ON RECORD CODE FR
SPECIFIED IN ADMP OR
(ADMPCK)
CP-82
PHYSICAL
LOCATION IS
MISSING ON
NAMED
RECORD CODE
PHYSICAL LOCATION
EVERY DATA PORT APPEARING ON AN LD RECORD
MUST ALSO APPEAR ON A CP RECORD. EVERY NIC
APPEARING ON A TC RECORD MUST APPEAR ON A CP
RECORD. (ENDCHK)
CR-01
ENTRY
ATTEMPTED IN
NONVACANT
LOCATION
AN ENTRY INTO THE CODE RESTRICTION TABLES
HAD BEEN ATTEMPTED, BUT THAT LOCATION AND BIT
POSITION WAS ALREADY FULL. THE ENTRY WAS NOT
MADE. CHECK THE THREE DIGIT NPA/ABC CODE
NUMBER IN THE DESIGNATED COLUMN AGAINST
CODES PREVIOUSLY ENTERED IN THAT CODE
RESTRICTION TABLE FOR A DUPLICATION.
(TABGEN/GENDIG)
D-446
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CR-02
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INVALID
SEQUENCE
AN INVALID SEQUENCE OF NPA/ABC CODES HAD
BEEN SPECIFIED TO BE ENTERED.
NO ENTRIES WERE MADE.
CHECK THE SEQUENCE CONTAINING THE
DESIGNATED COLUMN FOR A LOWER BOUND LESS
THAN OR EQUAL TO THE UPPER BOUND.
(TABGEN/GENDIG)
Y-..
C R - 0 3 IMPRObER
STARTING
COLUMN
THE CPG HAS DETERMINED THAT THE FIRST
NPA/ABC CODE LISTED ON THE CODE RESTRICTION
RECORD IS NOT IN THE PROPER COLUMNS.
PROPER TABLE GENERATION IS NOT GUARANTEED.
(TABGEN/GENDIG)
CR-04
INVALID
SYNTAX
THE NPA/ABC CODE TO BE ENTERED IS NOT
STRICTLY NUMERIC AND CONVERSION FROM THE
RECORD TO A VALUE HAD FAILED.
(TABGEN/GENDIG)
CR-05
LAST
OPERATOR
INVALID
A DASH (SIGNIFYING A SEQUENCE) IS FOLLOWED
ONLY BY BLANKS.
CHECK FIRST TO VERIFY THAT A SEQUENCE WAS
MEANT INSTEAD OF A SINGLE ENTRY AND, IF IT WAS,
PROVIDE THE TERMINAL NUMBER OF THE SEQUENCE
ON THE SAME RECORD.
(TABGEN/GENDIG)
CR-06
INVALID
OPERATOR
A CHARACTER OTHER THAN COMMA, DASH, OR
BLANK HAD BEEN USED IN AN OPERATOR’S POSITION
IN THE DESIGNATED COLUMN.
(TABGEN/GENDIG)
CR-07
MISPLACED
BLANK
A BLANK HAD BEEN USED IN AN OPERATOR’S
LOCATION.
A COMMA WAS ASSUMED.
(TABGENIGENDIG)
CT-01
VALUES TO BE
FILLED LEFT TO
RIGHT
HEXADECIMAL EQUIVALENT BYTES
HEXADECIMAL EQUIVALENT BYTES MUST BE FILLED
IN FROM LEFT TO RIGHT,
WITH DASHED BYTES IN THE RIGHTMOST BYTES OF
THE HEXADECIMAL BYTE FIELDS.
CT-02
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
HEXADECIMAL EQUIVALENT BYTES
IF ONE DIGIT OF A HEXADECIMAL EQUIVALENT BYTE
IS DASHED,
THE THE OTHER DIGIT OF THE BYTE MUST BE
DASHED.
SVR 5210
8187
D-447
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CT-03
...
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FOR FUNCTION
CODE, TNAM,
BYTES l-8
MAY NOT BE
SPECIFIED
FUNCTION CODE - HEXADECIMAL EQUIVALENT
BYTES
IF THE FUNCTION CODE IS ‘TNAM’,
THEN THE HEXADECIMAL EQUIVALENT BYTES MAY
NOT BE SPECIFIED.
CT-04 -
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATItjN
CT-04
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
FUNCTION CODE - HEXADECIMAL EQUIVALENT
BYTES
IF THE FUNCTION CODE IS ‘TNAM’,
THEN THE CUSTOMER DEFINED TERMINAL NAME
MUST BE SPECIFIED.
IF THE FUNCTION CODE IS NOT ‘TNAM’, THEN THE
CUSTOMER DEFINED TERMINAL NAME MUST BE
DASHED.
CT-50
DUPLICATE TTY
NO. AND
FUNCTION
CODE NOT
ALLOWED
TERMINAL TYPE NUMBER - FUNCTION CODE
THE TERMINAL TYPE NUMBER AND FUNCTION CODE
COMBINATION CANNOT BE DUPLICATED.
CT-51
FCN CODES OF
CLSC , ABCC,
EEOL, AND
EEOP
REQUIRED
FUNCTION CODE
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTION CODES ARE REQUIRED
FOR COMPLETENESS OF A CUSTOMER-DEFINED
TERMINAL: ‘CLSC’, ‘ABCC’, ‘EEOL’, AND
‘EEOP’.(ENDCHK)
DA-01
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
FIRST DIGIT ACTIONS - SECOND PLUS DIGITS
THERE MUST BE AT LEAST ONE ‘C’ ACROSS BOTH OF
THESE FIELDS.
DA-02
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
FIRST DIGIT ACTIONS - SECOND PLUS DIGITS
IF THERE IS AN ‘A’ ANYWHERE IN THE FIRST DIGIT
ACTIONS,
THERE MUST BE AT LEAST ONE ‘C’ IN THE SECOND
PLUS DIGITS.
DA-03
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
FIRST DIGIT ACTIONS CANNOT BE ALL ‘R’.
D-448
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
..
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
DA-51
TRUNK GROUP
NOT FOUND
DA-52 ‘;I
DUPLICATE
THIS NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS ALL DA
TRUNK GROUP RECORDS.
NUMBER
y-51
DUPLICATE
DISPMYABLE
CLASS OF
SERVICE DATA
THE TRUNK GROUP SPECIFIED MUST HAVE A
CORRESPONDING Tl RECORD.
DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE NUMBER MUST BE
UNIQUE ACROSS THE DC RECORDS.
DC-53
TRUNKGROUP ATRUNKGROUPREFERENCEDONADCRECORD
NOT FOUND
WAS NEVER INPUT ON A Tl RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
DD-02
CLASS OF
SERVICE
FEATURES
CONFLICT
DD-51
DUPLICATE
DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE NUMBER MUST BE
DISP. CLASS OF UNIQUE ACROSS THE DD RECORDS.
SERVICE DATA (ENDCHK)
DD-52
CONFERENCE
ClRCUlTS NOT
DEFINED
SVR 5210
SWITCHED DIRECT LINE - CO LINE CONFLICT
IF CO LINE INDICATED (‘CL’),
THEN SWITCHED DIRECT LINE (‘SL’) SHOULD ALSO BE
INDICATED.
8187
MEET ME CONFERENCE OR PROGRESSIVE
CONFERENCE,
IF INDICATED, NEEDS ONE OF THE CONFERENCE
CIRCUITS ON THE FR RECORD SPECIFIED.
D-449
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
C
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
I
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
DD-53
TOLL ACCESS
-TRUNK
GROUP ACCESS
CONFLICT
IF TOLL ACCESS IS INDICATED (‘TA’) THEN AT LEAST
ONE TRUNK GROUP IN THE TRUNK GROUP ACCESS
FIELD ON RECORD DC SHOULD BE ‘Y’.
DD-54
CLASS OF
SERVICE NOT
DEFINED _
A DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE REFERENCED ON
THE DD RECORD MUST BE DEFINED ON A DC
RECORD.
DK-53
DUPLICATE
AGENT GROUP/
REPERTORY
DIAL KEY
NUMBER
EACH COMBINATION OF AGENT GROUP AND
REPERTORY DIAL KEY NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE.
DT-01
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
DT-01
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
D-450
8187
DTMF RECEIVER NUMBER - PEC REQUIREMENTS
VALUE OF
DTMF RECEIVER
VALUE OF
PEC
o-7
8 -15
16-23
24-31
32-39
40-47
48-55
56-63
0
1
2
3
4
( S V R 8.2.X.X. ONLY)
5
( S V R 8.2.X.X. ONLY)
( S V R 8.2.X.X. ONLY)
6
7
( S V R 8.2.X.X. ONLY)
RECEIVER NUMBER - PEC
REQUIREMENTS
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
DT-51
Y-
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
DT-51
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
DT-51
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
A DTMF RECEIVER CIRCUIT MUST APPEAR ON A
DTMF CARD.
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED IS
NOT VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE. (PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”, THAT
INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS LOCATION
IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO THIS
PYHSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
DT-51
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
DEFINED ON
RECORD CODE
FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP AND SLOT SPECIFIED WAS NOT
DEFINED ON FR.
(PHYLOC)
DT-51
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
THE DTMF RECEIVER CIRCUIT MUST BE UNIQUE.
(PHYLOC)
DT-51
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO A
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED SLOT
THIS CARD IS AN OVERSIZED CARD AND IS TRYING
TO FILL TWO SLOTS. OF THE TWO SLOTS IT FILLS,
THE RIGHT HAND ONE HAS ALREADY BEEN FILLED.
DT-51
DUPLICATE
DTMF
RECEIVER
NUMBER
THE DTMF RECEIVER NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE
ACROSS ALL DT RECORDS.
SVR 5210
8187
D-451
r
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
DT-57
DUPLICATE
DTMF
RECEIVER
NUMBER
THE DTMF RECEIVER NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE
ACROSS ALL DT RECORDS.
DT-58
PEC NUMBER
NOT EQUIPPED
THE PEC NUMBER SPECIFIED MUST BE MARKED
EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD.
EC-01
S E C O N D ‘ELEMENT
EQUALS FIRST
ELEMENT
(NPA CODES)
NPA CODES MUST BE UNIQUE ON A PER TABLE
(ONE EC RECORD) BASIS
EC-03
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
EC-03
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
EC-03
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
1 + RESTRICTION TABLE - RESTRICTION CODE TABLE
ONLY ONE OR THE OTHER OF THESE MAY BE
SPECIFIED FOR EACH NPA CODE ENTERED.
BOTH CANNOT BE SPECIFIED.
HOWEVER, BOTH MAY BE DASHED IF DESIRED
EC-51
DUPLICATE
CODE CHECK
TABLE NUMBE
THE TABLE NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS THE
EC RECORDS.
EC-53
CODE
RESTRICTION
TABLE NOT
FOUND
THESE TABLE NUMBERS MUST BE DEFINED ON A CR
RECORD.
ED-01
VALUES TO BE
FILLED LEFT TO
RIGHT
PICKUP GROUP NUMBERS SHOULD BE FILLED IN
FROM LEFT TO RIGHT.
ED-51
DUPLICATE
THIS NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS THE ED
EXTENDED DIAL RECORDS.
CALL PICKUP
TABLE
D-452
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
EXTENDED
PICKUP GROUP
NOT
REFERENCED
ON LD FORM
EXTENDED DIAL CALL PICKUP TABLE
EACH TABLE NUMBER SHOULD APPEAR ON AN LD
RECORD IN THE EXTENDED DIAL CALL PICKUP TABLE
FIELD.
(ENDCHK)
DUPLICATE
AUTHORIZATIO
N CODE
NUMBER
FRL AUTHORIZATION CODE DUPLICATE
FRL AUTHORIZATION CODES ARE NOT ALLOWED.
FA-51
FRL
AUTHORIZATIO
N CODE OUT OF
RANGE
FRL AUTHORIZATION CODE
THE NUMBER OF FRL AUTHORIZATION CODE DIGITS
ON FA RECORD MUST BE THE SAME,
AS THE NUMBER OF FRL AUTHORIZATION CODE
DIGITS SPECIFIED ON OF RECORD (FOUR TO SEVEN
DIGITS).
FA-51
THREE HASH
FRL AUTHORIZATION CODE
BUCKET
THE ALGORITHM USED TO GENERATE THE FRL
ENTRIES FILLED AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE ENTRIES HAS
DETECTED THE OCCURRENCE OF A FOURTH (OR
FIFTH, SIXTH, SEVENTH, EIGHTH) CODE WITH THE
SAME HASH VALUE.
FOR INITIAL ENGINEERING THIS IS IN VIOLATION OF
ADVERTISED FRL AUTHORIZATION CODE
GENERATION REQUIREMENTS.
FOR RE-ENGINEERING, THIS IS A POSSIBLE
CONDITION.
THE OCCURRENCE OF A FIFTH CODE WITH THE SAVE
HASH VALUE WILL CAUSE AN ADDITION DISK ACCESS
BY CALL PROCESSING.
(FRLGEN)
FA-51
REACHED
FRL AUTHORIZATION CODE
MAXIMUM
THE ALGORITHM USED TO GENERATE THE FRL
BUCKET ENTRY, AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE ENTRIES HAS
RECORD
DETECTED THE OCCURRENCE OF A NINTH (OR
REJECTED
MORE) CODE WITH THE SAME HASH VALUE. (FRLGEN)
FA-52
INVALID
RECORD CODE
FR-01
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
ED-52
s-..
-FA-50
SVR 5210
8187
FA RECORDS WERE CODED FOR A SITE WITHOUT
THE TRAVELING CLASS MARK (TCM) FEATURE,
I.E. THE TRAVELING CLASS MARK FIELD ON THE OF
RECORD WAS DASHED OUT.
D-453
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
FR-01
..
FR-Oi
FR-02
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
CARD TYPE - PRIMARY, SECONDARY, TERTIARY
IDENTIFIERS CONSULT THE CARD TYPES VS.
IDENTIFIERS,
AND STATUS CHART TO DETERMINE APPROPRIATE
VALUES TO SPECIFY FOR EACH PARTICULAR CARD
TYPE.
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
CARD TYPE - PHYSICAL LOCATION
IF THE CARD TYPE IS DTRK, THEN THE GROUP FIELD
MUST BE ‘C’, SINCE Tl SPANS CAN ONLY BE
INSTALLED IN THAT GROUP.
SPECIFIC CARD PLACEMENT RESTRICTIONS ARE IN
EFFECT FOR THE CARD TYPES OF BT, DCPB, PBE, PR
AND RPTR.
THESE CARDS MAY ONLY BE PLACED IN THE
FOLLOWING GROUP/SLOTS:
AOO, A02, AlO, BOO, B02, B09,
C06, Cl 0, CO9, DOO, DO1 , Dl 0.
FR-03
VALUE dF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
FR-03
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
CARD TYPE-PEC
THE FOLLOWING CARD TYPE CAN APPEAR ONLY IN
PECS O-3: AGNT, AIOD, ART, ATTN, CONF, ERLT,
KEDU, AND RLT.
THE FOLLOWING CARD TYPE SPECIFIES THE VALID
RANGE OF THE THREE IDENTIFIERS AND STATUS
GIVEN A PARTICULAR CARD.
CARD TYPES VS. IDENTIFIERS AND STATUS CHART
VALUE ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED STATUS
OF
CARD PRIMARY SECONDARY TERITIARY FIELD
TYPE
ID RANGE ID RANGE
ID RANGE
ADMP
AGNT
D-454
8187
0000-0001
----
0000-0001
----
-------
---
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
FR-03
(cont’d)
->-
FR-50
SVR 5210
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT T O O
SMALL
FIELD DOESN’T
HAVE
REQUIRED
VALUE
8187
-------
-------
IS,OS
IS,OS
ATTN
---0009,0010,
0011
----
----
----
--
EL
CONF
COT
DCP
DCPB
DTMF
DTMl
DTRK
DVC
EMT
EMT4
ERLT
FP
FPOP
ILT
KEDU
NIC
OFFP
OPI
PBE
PDIC
POTS
PR
RLT
RPTR
SM
TDET
VCIP
VPLO
VPLl
VP20
0000-0001 0000-0015
0000-0001
---0000-0003
0000-0003
---------0000-0031
---------0000-0031
0000-0031
------0000-0003
0000-0031
---0000-0001
---0000-0031
0000-0001
---0000-0001
0000-0007
---0000-0031
0000-0031
0000-0031
0000-0031
0000-0031
---- ------------0000-0007
------------------------------_-------------------------------------------_0000-0001
OR ____
----
-- -IS,OS
- --------_
----_
----_--------_---
VP21
0000-0007 ------------0000-0001
---------0000-0015
---------------------------------------------0000-0007
------0000-0015
------0000-0015
(-JR ____
----
AIOD
ART
--
CARD TYPE - PRIMARY, SECONDARY, TERTIARY
IDENTIFIERS FOR CARD TYPE VP20 THE TERTIARY
IDENTIFIER MUST BE DASHES IF THE SECONDARY
IDENTIFIER IS DASHES.
THE TERTIARY IDENTIFIER MUST NOT BE DASHES IF
THE SECONDARY IDENTIFIER IS NOT DASHES.
(FRCHKS)
D-455
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
I
FR-50
....
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CARD TYPE PEC &
IDENTIFIERS
CONFLICT
CARD TYPE - PEC - PRIMARY, SECONDARY,
TERTIARY IDENTIFIERS.
CONSULT THE CARD TYPES VS. IDENTIFIERS CHECKS
CHART TO DETERMINE APPROPRIATE VALUES TO
SPECIFY FOR EACH PARTICULAR CARD TYPE.
THE CHART STATES THE MEANING OF THE PRIMARY,
SECONDARY AND TERTIARY IDENTIFIERS ON THE FR
RECORD AND THE CHECKS FOR EACH SET OF CARD
TYPES.
,
CHECK 1: FOR CARD TYPE ADMP -THE ADMP
NUMBER AND THE ADMP CARD NUMBER
COMBINATION CANNOT BE DUPLICATED.
CHECK 2: FOR CARD TYPE ART - THE ART CARD
NUMBER CANNOT BE DUPLICATED.
CHECK 3: FOR CARD TYPES CONTAINING PACKET
ROUTER NUMBER AND LOCAL PACKET BUS NUMBER
INFORMATION (BT, DCPB AND RPTR) - THE PEC, THE
PACKET ROUTER NUMBER AND THE LOCAL PACKET
BUS NUMBER COMBINATION CANNOT BE
DUPLICATED ACROSS ANY OF THE CARD TYPES.
FOR THE REVISED CONFIGURATION, THE PACKET
ROUTER NUMBER AND BUS SEGMENT COMBINATION
CANNOT BE DUPLICATED ACROSS ANY OF THE CARD
TYPES.
CHECK 4: FOR CARD TYPES CONTAINING RELATIVE
CONTROLLER CARD NUMBER INFORMATION (CIP,
DVC, VCIP, AND VP20)
THE PEC AND RELATIVE CONTROLLER CARD
NUMBER COMBINATION CANNOT BE DUPLICATED
ACROSS ANY OF THE CARD TYPES.
CHECK 5: FOR CARD TYPE CONF -THE
CONFERENCE CIRCUIT NUMBER CANNOT BE
DUPLICATED.
CHECK 6: FOR CARD TYPES CONTAINING DCP
NUMBER INFORMATION (DCP AND DCPB)
THE DCP CANNOT BE DUPLICATED ACROSS EITHER
OF THE CARD TYPES.
CHECK 7: FOR CARD TYPES CONTAINING RELATIVE
LINE CARD NUMBER INFORMATION (DVC, FP, FPOP,
OFFP, POTS, VCIP, VPLO, VPLl, VP20 AND VP21)
THE PEC AND RELATIVE LINE CARD NUMBER CANNOT
BE DUPLICATED ACROSS ANY OF THE CARD TYPES.
D-456
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
FR-50
(Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CHECK 8: FOR CARD TYPE PBE THE PEC AND THE
PACKET ROUTER NUMBER COMBINATION CANNOT BE
DUPLICATED. FOR THE REVISED CONFIGURATION,
THE PACKET ROUTER NUMBER CANNOT BE
DUPLICATED.
.~_
..
,.
CHECK 9: FOR CARD TYPE PR THE PEC AND THE
PACKET ROUTER NUMBER COMBINATION CANNOT BE
DUPLICATED. FOR THE REVISED CONFIGURATION,
THE PACKET ROUTER NUMBER CANNOT BE
DUPLICATED.
CHECK 10: FOR CARD TYPE SM THE SILENT MONITOR
CARD NUMBER CANNOT BE DUPLICATED.
CHECK 11: FOR CARD TYPE NIC AND ADMP THE
CONTROLLING DCP MUST APPEAR AS THE DCP
NUMBER FOR CARD TYPE DCP OR DCPB.
CHECK 12: FOR CARD TYPE AIOD AND OPI ONLY ONE
CARD OF THIS TYPE IS ALLOWED.
CARD TYPES VS. IDENTIFIERS CHECKS CHART
CARD
TYPE
PRIMARY
IDENTIFIER
SECONDARY
IDENTIFIER
TERTIARY
IDENTIFIER
CHECKS
APPLICABLE
CARD NUMBER
SVR 5210
8187
D-457
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
I
CARD TYPES VS. IDENTIFIERS CHECKS CHART
FR-50
(Continued)
CARD
TYPE
PRIMARY
IDENTIFIER
SECONDARY
IDENTIFIER
TERTIARY
IDENTIFIER
CHECKS
APPLICABLE
OPI
N/A
N/A
N/A
CHECK 12
PBE
PACKET ROUTER
NUMBER
N/A
N/A
CHECK 8
RELATIVE LINE
CARDNUMBER
N/A
NIAI
PACKET ROUTER
NUMBER
N/A
.r
...
!
I
I
I
POTS
PR
.
RPTR
I
I
1
St.4
I
D-458
PACKET ROUTER
NUMBER
CHECK 7
I
N/A
N/A
BUS?X;A;NT
I
CHECK 9
CHECK 3
I
I
SILENT MONITOR
CARD NUMBER
N/A
N/A
CHECK 10
RELATIVE LINE
CARD NUMBER
REL. CONTROLLER
CARD NUMBER
N/A
CHECKS 4 & 7
VPLO
RELATIVE LINE
CARD NUMBER
N/A
N/A
CHECK 7
VPLl
RELATIVE LINE
CARDNUMBER
NIA
N/A
CHECK 7
VP20
RELATIVE LINE
CARD NUMBER
REL. CONTROLLER
CARD NUM OR NIA
VP21
RELATIVE LINE
CARD NUMBER
N/A
VCIP
8187
I
0000,0001
OR N/A
N/A
CHECKS 4 & 7
CHECK 7
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
FR-51
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, AND SLOT SPECIFIED FOR THIS
CARD MUST BE UNIQUE
Tl TRUNK
SLOTS NOT
FILLEP IN
CORRECT
ORDER
CARD TYPE - PHYSICAL LOCATION
DTRK CARDS BLOCK THE INDICATED SLOTS FROM
THE LOWEST TO HIGHEST SLOT NUMBER WITHOUT
ANY OTHER TYPE OF CARD ALLOWED RESIDING IN
DTRK BLOCKED SLOTS. (FRCHKS)
FR-51
SLOT
UNUSABLE BY
Tl EQUIPMENT
CARD TYPE - PHYSICAL LOCATION
NO OTHER TYPE OF CARD CAN RESIDE IN ONE OF
THE SLOTS BLOCKED BY THE Tl SPAN WHICH IS
IMPLIED BY THE INPUT OF A DTRK CARD. (FRCHKS)
FR-51
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, AND SLOT SPECIFIED MUST BE
VALID FOR THE PEC TYPE. (FRCHKS)
FR-51
PREVIOUS
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO THIS SLOT
PHYSICAL LOCATION
A PREVIOUS FR RECORD CANNOT DEFINE A WIDE
CARD WHICH OVERHANGS INTO A SPECIFIED SLOT.
(FRCHKS)
FR-51
INVALID CARD
TYPE FOR THIS
PEC TYPE
CARD TYPE - PEC
THE CARD TYPE MUST BE ALLOWABLE FOR THE PEC
TYPE (‘Sl’) SPECIFIED ON THE OE RECORD.
(FRCHKS)
FR-51
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
INVALID FOR
SPECIFIED
CARD TYPE
CARD TYPE - PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE CARD TYPE SPECIFIED HAS BEEN ASSIGNED TO
A PHYSICAL LOCATION TO WHICH IT IS NOT
ALLOWED.
(FRCHKS)
FR-51
MAX NUMBER
OF CARDS OF
THIS TYPE
EXCEEDED
THE CARD TYPE LIMIT HAS BEEN EXCEEDED.
(FRCHKS)
FR-51
SLOT BLOCKED
BY DTRK CARD.
NO CARD
PLACED IN THIS
SLOT
INFORMATIONAL MESSAGE WHICH SHOWS THAT
DTRK CARDS ARE NOT PHYSICALLY PLACED IN
UNIVERSAL SLOTS, BUT RENDER THE SLOTS
UNUSABLE BY OTHER CARD TYPES.
(FRCHKS)
SVR 5210
8187
.~_
FR-51
_
D-459
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
I
FR-52
DES@RIPTION OF MESSAGES
XJPLICATE
‘HYSICAL
-0CATION
.. -
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP AND SLOT SPECIFIED FOR A CARD
MUST BE UNIQUE.
CARD TYPES VS. CARD SLOT RESTRICTION CHART - PART 1
.. I
CARD
TYPE
~ADMP
I
VALID GTDlOOO VALID OMNI-SII
GROUP/SLOTS
GROUP/SLOTS
1
NONE
I
GROUP/SLOTS
NONE
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO & DO0
AIOD
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO & DO0
ONLY A01 & CO1
ART
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
Al0 & Cl0
j
L
ATTN
IALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO & DO0
BT
NONE
NONE
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
CONF
ALL
ALL
COT
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
DCP
NONE
NONE
DCPB
NONE
NONE
CIP
B O O , B 0 2 , BO9,
C 0 6 , ClO,
D O O , DOl, D10
DTMF
ALL
ALL
DTMl
ALL
ALL
lDTRK /
DVC
D-460
8l87
A01 THRU 106
BOl THRU B06
NONE
NONE
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
CARD TYPES VS. CARD SLOT RESTRICTION CHART - PART 2
FR-52
(Continued)
.F
...
CARD
TYPE
VALID OMNI-SI
GROUP/SLOTS
EMT
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
EMT4
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
ERLT
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
FP
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
FPOP
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
ILT
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
KEDU
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, C07,
C08, CO9, DOO,
D07, D08, DO9
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
NONE
NONE
ALL EXCEPT A00
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
OPI
NONE
NONE
ALL EXCEPT A00
PBE
NONE
NONE
AOO,
BOO,
C06,
DOO,
PDIC
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
POTS
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
ALL EXCEPT A00
PR
NONE
NONE
RLT
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
NONE
NONE
ALL EXCEPT AOO,
BOO, COO, & DO0
ALL EXCEPT
A10 & Cl0
NC
OFFP
RPTR
SM
SVR 5210
VALID GTDlOOO VALID OMNI-SII
GROUP/SLOTS
GROUP/SLOTS
a/t37
AOO,
BOO,
C06,
DOO,
AOZ, AlO,
B02, BO9,
ClO,
DOl, D10
A02, Al 0,
802, B09,
ClO,
DOl, DlO
ALL EXCEPT A00
AOO,
BOO,
C06,
DOO,
A02, AlO,
802, BO9,
ClO,
DOl, DlO
ALL EXCEPT A00
D-461
-
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
CARD TYPES VS. CARD SLOT RESTRICTION CHART - PART 2
FR-52
(Continued)
VALID GTDl 000
GROUP/SLOTS
VALID OMNI-SII
GROUP/SLOTS
VALID OMNI-SI
GROUP/SLOTS
TDET
NONE
NONE
ALL EXCEPT A00
VCIP
NONE
NONE
ALL EXCEPT A00
VPLO
NONE
NONE
ALL EXCEPT A00
VPLl
NONE
NONE
ALL EXCEPT A00
VP20
NONE
NONE
ALL EXCEPT A00
NONE
1ALL EXCEPT A00 1
CARD
TYPE
...
,_
I VP21
D-462
m7
I
NONE
I
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FR-53
DEFINING A
DATA CARD
REQUIRES
SPECIFICATION
OF S3D OPT ON
OE
CARD TYPE
THE DATA SYSTEM CARD TYPES (ADMP, BT, DCP,
DCPB, NIC, PR, PBT, RPTR, VP20
(DATA ONLY AND VOICE AND DATA).
.FR-54
PEC NUMBER IS
NOT EQUIPPED
PEC
THE PEC NUMBER SPECIFIED MUST BE MARKED
EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD.
FR-56
THE LOCAL
PACKET BUS IS
NOT COMPLETE
A LOCAL PACKET BUS IS COMPLETELY DEFINED BY A
PACKET ROUTER (CARD TYPE, PR) AND A BUS
TERMINATOR (CARD TYPES BT, DCPB); OR A PAIR OF
LOCAL PACKET BUSES CAN BE DEFINED BY A
PACKET ROUTER,
TWO BUS TERMINATORS, AND A PACKET BUS
EXTENDER (CARD TYPE, PBE). (ENDCHK)
FR-56
THE LOCAL
PACKET BUS IS
INVALID
TEXT IDENTIFYING THE CAUSE OF THE ERROR
MESSAGE IS ALSO PRINTED.
THIS CHECK VERIFIES THE CONFIGURATION OF
PR/PBE, BT, DCPB, AND RPTR CARDS FOR ALL BUS
SEGMENTS ENGINEERED. IT ALSO VERIFIES THE
COMBINATIONS OF PECS AND GROUPS. (FRCHKS)
FR-57
A‘DATA CARD IS
NOT ON A
LOCAL PACKET
BUS
CARD TYPE - PHYSICAL LOCATION
ALL DATA CARDS MUST BE PLACED ON A LOCAL
PACKET BUS. THE ENDS OF A LOCAL PACKET BUS
ARE DEFINED BY THE PLACEMENT OF PR, PBE, BUS
TERMINATOR AND RPTR CARDS. DATA CARDS MUST
BE PLACED BETWEEN A PR OR PBE AND A BUS
TERMINATOR OR RPTR. (ENDCHK OR FRCHKS)
FR-58
THE NUMBER
OF DATA CKTS
ON A BUS
SEGMENT
CANNOT
EXCEED 64
CARD TYPE
THE NUMBER OF DATA CIRCUITS ON A LOCAL
PACKET BUS SEGMENT CANNOT EXCEED 64.
CIRCUITS ARE COUNTED AS FOLLOWS:
1 CIRCUIT.
ADMP CARDS:
DCP
CARDS:
1 CIRCUIT.
1 CIRCUIT.
NIC
CARDS:
VPLO CARDS:
8 CIRCUITS.
VPLl C A R D S :
2 CIRCUITS.
VP20 CARDS:
8 CIRCUITS (VOICE AND
DATA,DATA ONLY).
VP21 CARDS:
2 CIRCUITS.
(FRCHKS)
SVR 5210
8187
D-463
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CKET BUS CANNOT EXCEED 64.
IS LIMIT IS IMPOSED BY THE DATA SYSTEM
FTWARE DEFINITION OF THE PLA (PACKET LINE
DRESS). VPLO CARDS HAVE 8 CIRCUITS; VPLl
HAVE 2 CIRCUITS; ADMP AND DCP HAVE ONE
IF THE DATA OPTION IS SPECIFIED ON THE OE
RECORD, THEN AT LEAST ONE EACH OF THE
FOLLOWING CARDS MUST BE DEFINED: ADMP, PR,
PRIMAR; INDEX FOR SILENT MONITOR (SM)
CARDS MUST BE CONTINUOUS (I.E., THE SILENT
MONITOR CARD NUMBERS MUST BE ASSIGNED FROM
0 TO 7 CORRESPONDING TO THE NUMBER OF SM
CARDS 1 TO 8.
CONTINUOUS
CP NUMBER IS USED AS THE
PRIMARY IDENTIFIER FOR A NIC CARD OR THE
TERTIARY IDENTIFIER FOR AN ADMP CARD,
THE SAME CONTROLLING DCP NUMBER MUST BE
USED AS THE PRIMARY IDENTIFIER ON A DCP OR
DCPB CARD.
FR-62
EXPAN. FILE
EXPANSION FILE STATUS
UNEQUIPPED
IF GROUP C OR D ARE SPECIFIED THEN THE
ON OE FOR GRP EXPANSION FILE STATUS OF RECORD CODE OE MUST
C/D
BE EQUIPPED.
FR-63
THE ADMP IS
PRIMARY IDENTIFIER
NOT COMPLETE THE ADMP IS MADE UP OF MORE THAN ONE CARD
AND ALL CARDS NEEDED TO MAKE IT UP MUST BE
SPECIFIED.
FR-64
CONTROLLING
DCPS ON AN
ADMP CARD
SET MUST BE
EQUAL
D-464
8187
PRIMARY IDENTIFIER/TERTIARY IDENTIFIER
THE ADMP IS MADE UP OF MORE THAN ONE CARD
AND ALL CARDS OF THE SET MUST SPECIFY THE
SAME CONTROLLING DCP.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FR-65
ADMPIDCP
CARDS MUST
BE ON PRIMARY
BUS SEGMENT
ADMP AND DCP CARDS MUST BE ON A PRIMARY BUS
SEGMENT.
(A PRIMARY BUS SEGMENT CONTAINS A PACKET
ROUTER OR A PACKET BUS EXTENDER).
G&l
DUPLICATE
THE SPEED CALLING ACCESS CLASS MUST BE
SPEED CALLING UNIQUE ACROSS THE GC RECORDS.
ACCESS GROUP
GC-52
RANGE OF SP.
LIST NOS. OUT
OF ORDER.
NEAREST
MULTIPLE OF 4
ALLOTTED
GC-53
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
THE LAST ENTRY NUMBER CANNOT BE LESS THAN
THE FIRST ENTRY NUMBER.
(GCGEN)
GS-01
VALUES TO BE
FILLED LEFT TO
RIGHT
SPEED CALLING NUMBER DIGITS
DIGITS SHOULD BE FILLED IN FROM LEFT TO RIGHT
WITH NO IMBEDDED DASHES.
GS-51
DUPLICATE
THE SPEED CALLING LIST NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE
SPEED CALLING ACROSS THE GS RECORDS.
LIST NUMBER
HD-01
MAXIMUM
NUMBER OF
HUNDREDS
GROUPS
EXCEEDED
SVR 5210
THE SPEED CALLING LIST NUMBERS MUST BE
SPECIFIED IN SETS OF FOUR STARTING WITH 0. IF
THEY ARE NOT SPECIFIED IN THE SAID ORDER, THE
FIRST ENTRY NUMBER AND LAST ENTRY NUMBER
WILL BE ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY (PLUS OR MINUS)
TO THE NEAREST MULTIPLE OF FOUR. FOR
EXAMPLE, USER SPECIFIES AS FOLLOWS:
FIRST ENTRY NUMBER IS 2, LAST ENTRY NUMBER IS
6
FIRST ENTRY NUMBER IS 20, LAST ENTRY NUMBER IS
50
THE ENTRY NUMBERS ACTUALLY SHOULD HAVE
BEEN:
FIRST ENTRY NUMBER IS 0, LAST ENTRY NUMBER IS
7
FIRST ENTRY NUMBER IS 20, LAST ENTRY NUMBER IS
51
THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HUNDREDS GROUPS
SUPPORTEDBYTHESVRHASBEENEXCEEDED.
(GENLIN)
8187
D-465
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRlPTlQl’l OF MESSAGES
(TABGEN/GENLIN)
ENGINEERED ON A PREVIOUS HD RECORD.
DESTINATION TYPE
ALLOWABLE VALUES OF
INTERCEPT DESTINATION
LN
AT
0000-9999 (A ROOM NUMBER)
0001-0255 (ANY COMBINATION OF
THE EIGHT ATTENDANTS)
RA 0000-0127
PEC AND TRUNK NUMBER,
XYW, WHERE X IS PEC AND
WY IS TRUNK NUMBER
RL 0000-0000
(RLT NUMBER)
TI
0000-0031 OR 0063 (TIE TRUNK GROUP
NUMBER
m-51
DUPLICATE
INTERCEPT
ROUTING
NUMBER
IR-53
REQUIRED
VALUE NOT
FOUND ON
LISTED FORM
m-53
ATTENDANT
NOT FOUND
IR-53
RLT NUMBER
NOT FOUND
D-466
INTERCEPT ROUTING NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE
ACROSS THE IR RECORDS.
8l87
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
TRUNK GROUP
A. IF THE DESTINATION TYPE IS
DESTINATION MUST BE A VALID
ON AN AT RECORD.
B. IF THE DESTINATION TYPE IS
DESTINATION MUST BE A VALID
ANNOUNCERONATCRECORD
C. IF THE DESTINATION TYPE IS
DESTINATION MUST BE A VALID
NUMBER ON AN LD RECORD.
D. IF THE DESTINATION TYPE IS
DESTINATION MUST BE A VALID
ANNOUNCER
‘AT’, THE
ATTENDANT CIRCUIT
‘RA’, THE
RECORDER
‘LN’, THE
LINE STATION
‘TI’, THE
TRUNK GROUP
CAN BE PLACED IN THE SAME CARD’SLOT.
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
CARD
KD-52
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
KD-52
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
SVR 5210
8h37
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED MUST BE VALID FOR THE CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
KEDU CIRCUIT MUST APPEAR ON A KEDU CARD.
(PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”,
THAT INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS
LOCATION IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO
THIS PYHSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
D-467
r
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
BE VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
T BE UNIQUE.
THIS CARD IS AN OVERSIZED CARD AND IS TRYING
TO FILL TWO SLOTS. OF THE TWO SLOTS IT FILLS,
THE RIGHT HAND ONE HAS ALREADY BEEN FILLED.
OVERHANGS
PREVIOUSLY
KD-54
PEC NUMBER IS THE PEC NUMBER SPECIFIED MUST BE MARKED
NOT EQUIPPED
EQUIPPED ON THE OE OR OF RECORD.
KD-55
OPI CARD NOT
EQUIPPED
THE PMS EQUIPPED FIELD IS SPECIFIED FOR THE
KEDU, BUT THE OPI CARD IS NOT EQUIPPED OF FR.
KD-56
ONLY ONE
KEDU MAY
HAVE PMS
THE PMS EQUIPPED FIELD IS SPECIFIED FOR THE
MORE THAN ONE KEDU.
KD-57
OPI CARD ON
FR REQUIRES
KEDU WITH
PMS
FOR THE PMS FEATURE TO WORK PROPERLY, BOTH
AN OPI CARD AND A KEDU WITH PMS ARE REQUIRED.
(ENDCHK)
KD-58
PMS KEDU
REQUIRES
PRINTER ON
THE SAME
CARD
FOR THE PMS FEATURE TO WORK PROPERLY, A
PRINTER MUST BE ENGINEERED WITH THE PMS
KEDU.
(ENDCHK)
D-468
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
ALLOWABLE VALUES OF
FUNCTION ACCESS DIGIT 2
IF AN ACCESS DIGIT IS INDICATED FOR A SPECIFIC
FUNCTION CODE,
ASSIGNMENT
ON AL FORM
THAT FUNCTION ON THE AL RECORD ASSOCIATED
WITH THE KEDU NUMBER.
MESSAGE
METER
ROOM
STATUS
KEDU STATUS PRINTER STATUS PRINTER
ID
ID
CODE NO
--AL
0
AL
01
DIGITS ALLOWED
REC
KEDU FUNCTION
CODE NO
CODE 01 234567
KS
0
MM
0 1 - - - - - -ALLOWED
0 1 - - - I - - INCORRECT
KS
0
RS
LA-51
LINE APP MUST
BE ON
MULTILINE
FEATUREPHONE
LA-51
LINE APP MUST THE DIRECTORY NUMBER SPECIFIED AS THE
BE ON
FEATUREPHONE IS NOT A FEATUREPHONE PRIME
FEATUREPHON CONTROL LINE.
E PRIME
(GENLIN)
CONTROL LINE
SVR 5210
THE LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER SPECIFIED AS THE
FEATUREPHONE WAS NOT SPECIFIED AS A
MULTILINE FEATUREPHONE ON AN LD RECORD.
(GENLIN)
8187
D-469
r
TL-130400-I 001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTIQN OF MESSAGES
RECORD OR A POTS LINE WAS SPECIFIED.
NUMBER OF
MORE TIMES THAN THE SYSTEM SVR ALLOWS.
APPREARANCE
APPEARANCE WAS SPECIFIED AS AN IDENTICAL
CE ON THE FEATUREPHONE ON A
THIS IS A WARNING MESSAGE SINCE SOME TYPES OF
LINE APPEARANCES ARE ENGINEERED ON LD
RECORDS AND AN LA RECORD IS A DUPLICATE
ENTRY FOR DOCUMENTATION PURPOSES.
CARD WERE EXCEEDED.
E CONFLICTS
D-470
8187
EN THE MULTILINk
FEATUREPHONE
FIELD ON LM
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
l-A-60
SINGLE LINE
FEATUREPHON
E CANNOT BE A
‘: L I N E
APPEARANCE
IF THE MULTILINE FEATUREPHONE FIELD ON LM IS
DASHED ’
(THE FEATUREPHONE IS A SINGLE LINE SET),
THEN IT CANNOT BE A LINE APPEARANCE.
(GENLIN)
LA-61
A VISUAL CALL
PARK LINE
-CANNOT BE A
LINE
APPEARANCE
A VISUAL CALL PARK LINE (SPECIFIED ON RECORD
CODE LD AS LINE TYPE, ‘VP’, CANNOT BE A LINE
APPEARANCE SINCE IT IS A SINGLE LINE).
(GENLIN)
LA-70
FEATUREPHON
E LINE NOT
FOUND
THE LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER SPECIFIED AS THE
FEATUREPHONE WAS NOT SPECIFIED ON AN LD
RECORD.
(GENLIN)
LA-99
SITE HAS
INCONSISTENT
DATA BASE
T7050 ENTRY FOR LINE SOFTWARE ID
AN ENTRY IN T7050, LINE APPEARANCE TABLE, FOR
THE INDICATED LINE SOFTWARE ID REPRESENTS AN
INVALID LINE APPEARANCE.
CPG CROSS-CHECKS INSTRUMENT TYPE, LINE TYPE
AND MULTIPLE APPEARANCE BIT IN OTHER TABLES
TO DETERMINE VALID ENTRIES.
WHILE THIS MESSAGE WILL DETECT ISOLATED DATA
BASE ERRORS,
MULTIPLE MESSAGES CAN INDICATE A BAD DUMP
FROM THE SITE FOR PEC RESIDENT MEMORY FILES.
(REVLA)
LD-02
SECOND FIELD
MUST BE A
DASH
PICKUP GROUP NUMBER - PICKUP GROUP TYPE
IF THE PICKUP GROUP NUMBER IS DASHED,
THEN THE PICKUP GROUP TYPE MUST BE DASHED.
LD-03
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
LD-03
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
..^
SVR 5210
8187
D-471
.
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
2ND FEATURE
IS
MEANINGLESS
SP>l$ClFlCATlON
LD-04
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
LD-04
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
LD-04
2ND FEATURE
IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
LD-04
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
LD-04
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
D-472
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
8187
DIVERT CONDITION - DIVERT DESTINATION
VALUE OF
DIVERT CONDITION
ALLOWABLE VALUE OF
DIVERT DESTINATION
ND
BY,NA,BN, OR DA
--,TO,LN,AT,RA/TR,RM,PN
TO,LN,AT,RA/TR,RM,PN
SVR 5210
TL-l30400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
ELEMENT TOO
ALLOWABLE VALUES OF
DIVERT DESTINATION
IDENTIFIER
-_-0000
0000-9999 (A STATION
NUMBER)
0001-0255 (ANY
COMBINATION OF THE8
ATTENDANTS)
XYYY
(PEC NO. AND
TRUNK NO.) WHERE:X =
PEC NUMBER YYY =
TRUNK NUMBER
XYYY
(PEC NO. AND
TRUNK NO.) WHERE: X =
PEC NUMBER YYY =
TRUNK NUMBER
0000-9999 (HUNT GROUP
PILOT NUMBER)
0001-0008 (SPEED
CALLING LIST ENTRY
NUMBER)
--_THE DIVERT DESTINATION IS CODED ON THE LM
RECORD, WHILE THE DIVERT DESTINATION
IDENTIFIER I
EQUALS FIRST
ELEMENT
LD-12
THE TWO
ELEMENTS
MUST HAVE
THE SAME
VALUE
LINE LOCATION PEC - DATA LINK LOCATION PEC
THE PEC NUMBER OF THE DATA LINK AND THE PEC
NUMBER OF THE LINE’S PHYSICAL LOCATION MUST
MATCH.
THE DATA LINK PEC IS CODED ON THE LM RECORD
FOR AN ANALOG FEATUREPHONE AND ON THE AD
RECORD FOR AN AGENT PACET INSTRUMENT,
WHILE THE LINE LOCATION PEC IS STILL CODED ON
THE LD RECORD.
LD-13
ILLEGAL CARD
SLOT
FEATUREPHONE DATA LINK CARDS MAY NOT BE
PLACED IN UNIVERSAL SLOT 04 OF FILES C AND D.
SVR 5210
8187
D-473
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
LD-14
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN--FIELD
LD-15
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
,e
LD-15
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
AGENT POSITION NUMBER - INSTRUMENT TYPE
IF THE AGENT POSITION NUMBER IS DASHES THEN
THE INSTRUMENT TYPE CANNOT BE ‘PACT’;
IF THE AGENT POSITION NUMBER IS NOT DASHES
THEN THE INSTRUMENT TYPE MUST BE ‘POTS’ OR
‘PACT’.
LD-16
INSTRUMENT
TYPE - OTHER
FIELDS (ON
RECORD CODES
LD AND LM)
- INSTRUMENT TYPE = ‘POTS’:
1) THE LINE TYPE MUST BE ‘Ll’ OR ‘--I.
2) THE CARD LOCATION AND CIRCUIT MUST NOT BE
DASHED.
3) THE CLASS OF SERVICE FIELDS MUST NOT BE
DASHED.
4) THE MDR WORK GROUP FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
5) THE CONTROLLING DCP FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
6) THE SIGNALLING MODE MUST NOT BE ‘FP’ (LM LD CHECK).
7) THE DATA LINK MUST BE DASHED (LM - LD
CHACK)
8) THE CONTROLLING FEATUREPHONE FIELD MUST
BE DASHED (LM - LD CHECK)
9) THE MULTILINE FEATUREPHONE FIELD MUST BE
DASHED (LM - LD CHECK).
D-474
8187
DESCRIPTION OF DATA LINK AND LINE LOCATION
THE DATA LINK AND LINE LOCATION FIELDS MUST BE
ALL DASHES OR ALL FIELDS MUST BE SPECIFIED.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRlPTlON OF MESSAGES
INSTRUMENT
TYPE -OTHER
- INSTRUMENT TYPE = ‘PACT’:
1) THE LINE TYPE MUST BE ‘Ll’ OR ‘--‘.
4) THE MDR WORK GROUP FIELD MUST NOT BE
5) THE CONTROLLING DCP FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
- INSTRUMENT TYPE = ‘AIFP’:
- INSTRUMENT TYPE = ‘DIFP’:
1) THE LINE TYPE MUST BE ‘CO’, ‘DA’, ‘NP’, ‘VP’ OR
2) THE CARD LOCATION AND CIRCUIT MUST NOT BE
3) THE CLASS OF SERVICE FIELDS MUST NOT BE
5) THE CONTROLLING DCP FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
6) THE SIGLALLING MODE MUST BE ‘FP’ (LM - LD
SVR 5210
8187
D-475
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INSTRUMENT
TYPE - OTHER
FIELDS (ON
RECORD CODES
LDAND LM)
(cont’d)
- INSTRUMENT TYPE = ‘DFPA’:
1) THE LINE TYPE MUST BE ‘CO’, ‘NP’, ‘VP’ OR ‘PC’.
2) THE CARD LOCATION AND CIRCUIT MUST NOT BE
DASHED.
3) THE CLASS OF SERVICE FIELDS MUST NOT BE
DASHED.
4) THE MDR WORK GROUP FIELD MUST NOT BE
DASHED.
5) THE CONTROLLING DCP FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
6) THE SIGLALLING MODE MUST BE ‘FP’ (LM - LD
CHECK).
- INSTRUMENT TYPE = ‘APM’:
1) THE LINE TYPE MUST BE ‘DA’.
2) THE DIRECTORY NUMBER MUST BE DASHED.
3) THE CARD LOCATION AND CIRCUIT MUST NOT BE
DASHED.
4) THE CLASS OF SERVICE FIELDS MUST BE DASHED.
5) THE MDR WORK GROUP FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
6) THE DIVERT DESTINATION IDENTIFIER MUST BE
DASHED.
7) THE FRL MUST BE DASHED.
8) THE GROUP AND INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING
FIELDS MUST BE DAZSHED.
9) THE REMOTE ACCESS AND AUTHORIZATION CODE
FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
10) THE CONTROLLING DCP FIELD MUST NOT BE
DASHED.
- INSTRUMENT TYPE = ‘SPM’:
1) THE LINE TYPE MUST BE ‘DA’.
2) THE DIRECTORY NUMBER MUST BE DASHED.
3) THE CARD LOCATION AND CIRCUIT MUST NOT BE
DASHED.
4) THE CLASS OF SERVICE FIELDS MUST BE DASHED.
5) THE MDR WORK GROUP FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
6) THE DIVERT DESTINATION IDENTIFIER MUST BE
DASHED.
7) THE FRL MUST BE DASHED.
8) THE GROUP AND INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING
FIELDS MUST BE DAZSHED.
9) THE REMOTE ACCESS AND AUTHORIZATION CODE
FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
10) THE CONTROLLING DCP FIELD MUST NOT BE
DASHED.
D-476
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
LD-16
(cont’d)
....
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INSTRUMENT
INSTRUMENT TYPE = ‘----I:
TYPE - OTHER
1) THE LINE TYPE MUST BE ‘NW’.
FIELDS (ON
2) THE CARD LOCATION AND CIRCUIT MUST NOT BE
_ RECORD CODES DASHED.
LD AND LM)
3) THE CLASS OF SERVICE FIELDS MUST BE DASHED.
(cont’d)
4) THE MDR WORK GROUP FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
5) THE DIVERT DESTINATION IDENTIFIER MUST BE
EITHER ‘0003’ OR ‘0011’.
..
6) THE FRL MUST BE DASHED.
7) THE GROUP AND INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING
FIELDS MUST BE DAZSHED.
8) THE REMOTE ACCESS AND AUTHORIZATION CODE
FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
LINE TYPE OTHER FIELDS
(ON RECORD
CODES LD AND
LW
SVR 5210
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
8187
- LINE TYPE = ‘CO’:
1) THE INTERCOM GROUP MUST BE DASHED.
2) THE DIVERT DESTINATION
- LINE TYPE = ‘DA’:
1) THE INTERCOM GROUP MUST BE DASHED.
2) THE PICKUP GROUP AND EXTENDED FIELDS MUST
BE DASHED.
3) THE DIVERT DESTINATION IDENTIFIER MUST BE
DASHED.
4) THE GROUP AND INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING
FIELDS MUST BE A DASH.
- LINE TYPE = ‘Ll’:
1) THE INTERCOM GROUP MUST BE DASHED.
2) THE PICKUP GROUP AND EXTENDED FIELDS MUST
BE DASHED.
3) THE DIVERT DESTINATION IDENTIFIER MUST BE
DASHED.
- LINE TYPE = ‘NW’:
1) THE INTERCOM GROUP MUST BE DASHED.
2) THE PICKUP GROUP AND EXTENDED FIELDS MUST
BE DASHED.
3) THE DIVERT DESTINATION IDENTIFIER MUST NOT
BE DASHED.
- LINE TYPE = ‘VP’:
1) THE INTERCOM GROUP MUST BE DASHED.
2) THE PICKUP GROUP AND EXTENDED FIELDS MUST
BE DASHED.
3) THE DIVERT DESTINATION IDENTIFIER MUST BE
DASHED.
4) THE MULTILINE FEATUREPHONE FIELD MUST BE
DASHED.
- LINE TYPE = I--‘:
1) THE INTERCOM GROUP MUST BE DASHED.
D-477
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PICKUP GROUP
INCOMPATIBLE
INSTRUMENT TYPE MUST BE EITHER ‘APM’ OR ‘SPM’.
AN AGENT POSITION,
S MUST BE CODED FOR DIAL CALL PICKUP
WHILE THE DIVERT DESTINATION IDENTIFIER IS STILL
D-478
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
LD-23
ELEMENT 2 IS A DATA LINK LOCATION - AGENT POSITION NUMBER.
IF THE AGENT POSITION IS SPECIFIED, THEN THE
MEANINGLESS
DATA LINK PEC MUST BE IN THE RANGE 0 TO 3.
SPECIFICA‘: TION
-LD-26
INDIVIDUAL
DIVERT DESTINATION - INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING
SPEED CALLING LIST.
LIST MUST BE
SPECIFIED
IF THE DIVERT DESTINATION IS ‘SC’, THEN THE
INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING LIST MUST NOT CONTAIN
DASHES.
THE DIVERT DESTINATION IS CODED ON THE LM
RECORD, WHILE THE INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING
LIST IS STILL CODED ON THE LD RECORD.
LD-51
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
LD-51
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
SVR 5210
8h37
D-479
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FUNCTION OF
LINE LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘DIFP’ MUST APPEAR
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘DATD’ MUST
APPEAR ON A DVC LINE CARD.
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘DIFP’ AND LINE
TYPE OF ‘DA’ MUST APPEAR ON A DVC LINE CARD.
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘AIFP’ MUST APPEAR
ON A FP OR FPOP LINE CARD.
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘PACT’ OR ‘POTS’
MUST APPEAR ON A POTS OR OFFP LINE CARD.
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘APM’ OR ‘SPM’
MUST APPEAR ON A VPLO, VPLl, VP20 (VOICE AND
DATA OR DATA), OR VP21 LINE CARD.
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘DFPA’ MUST
APPEAR ON A VP20 (VOICE AND DATA) LINE CARD.
LOCATION IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO
THIS PHYSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
LINE LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘DATD’ MUST
APPEAR ON A DVC LINE CARD.
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘POTS’ MUST
APPEAR ON A POTS OR OFFP LINE CARD.
LD-51
D-480
INEFFICIENT
USE OF VPLl
CARD FOR
INSTRUMENT
TYPE SPECIFIED
8187
LINE LOCATION
INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘APM’ IS PERMITTED ON A VPLl
LINE CARD,
HOWEVER IT IS A SLOW SPEED DEVICE WHICH
NORMALLY IS ASSIGNED TO A VPLO LINE CARD.
(PHYLOC)
SVR 5210
TL-130400-I 001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
DVCIP CARD
IF THE INSTRUMENT TYPE IS DATD, ON THE DVCIP
CARD, THEN THE CIRCUIT NUMBER MUST BE EITHER
P, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
E VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
UP, AND SLOT SPECIFIED MUST BE
N FR RECORD.
E PEC GROUP SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
HIGH MUST SPECIFY THE SAME
‘IT FILLS, THE RIGHT HAND ONE
OVERHANGS
INTO THIS SLOT
OVERSIZED CARD.
THE RIGHT HALF OF THAT CARD FILLS THIS SLOT.
LD-51
LINE TYPE DA
MUST BE ON
DVC CARD FOR
DIFP
IF THE INSTRUMENT TYPE IS ‘DIFP’ AND THE LINE
TYPE IS ‘DA’, THEN THE CARD TYPE FOR THAT
LOCATION MUST BE DVC.
(PHYLOC)
LD-51
CIRCUIT
NUMBER TOO
LARGE FOR
CARD TYPE
THE CIRCUIT NUMBER SPECIFIED DOES NOT MATCH
THE LIMITS OF THE CARD TYPE AT THE SPECIFIED
PHYSICAL LOCATION.
(PHYLOC)
LD-52
CLASS OF
SERVICE NOT
ALLOWED
SIGNAL MODE - CLASS OF SERVICE
IF SIGNAL MODE IS ‘NO’, THEN THE FOLLOWING
DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE FEATURES WILL
NOT WORK:
1. TOLL ACCESS
5. PAGING ACCESS
2. MEET-ME CONFERENCE
6. MAINTENANCE
ACCESS
3. PROGRESSIVE CONF.
7. MODEM ACCESS
4. DICTATION EQUIPMENT 8. MERS ON-NET
SVR 5210
8187
D-481
-.
-
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
1. EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE 5. DIAL CALL PICKUP
2. ORIG. CALL WAITING
6. CALL FORWARDINGVAR
3. CAMP-ON/AUTO RECALL 7. SPEED CALLING
8. UNIVERSAL NITE ANS.
4. ATT. INFO CALLS
IF THE SIGNAL MODE IS SOMETHING OTHER THAN
‘FP’ THEN THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF
SERVICE FEATURE WILL NOT WORK:
IONS AND REQUIREMENTS
AND N-DISPLAYABLE
LASSES OF SERVICE MUST
APPEAR ON DD RECORDS.
SES OF SERVICE MUST
FEATURE, THE DIVERT CONDITIONS ‘BY’, ‘NA’, ‘BN’,
AND ‘DA’ WILL BE MEANINGLESS.
LD-57
CLASS OF SERVICE - DIVERT INFORMATION
FOR LINES WHICH DO NOT DIVERT (BUT WHICH ARE
IN A HUNT GROUP) THE DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF
SERVICE MUST NOT INCLUDE SWITCH DIRECT LINE
(‘SL’) OR CO LINE (‘CL’).
::%:F
CONFLICT IF
HUNT GROUP
D-482
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CLASS OF SERVICE - DIVERT INFORMATION
FOR LINES WHOSE DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE
INCLUDES SWITCHED DIRECT LINE (‘SL’),
THE DIVERT DESTINATION SPECIFIED MUST BE A
LINE (‘LN’), AN ATTENDANT (‘AT’), A RECORDED
ANNOUNCEMENT (‘TR’), OR A TONE (‘TO’). A HUNT
GROUP PILOT NUMBER (‘PN’) IS PERMISSIBLE ONLY
IF THE HUNT GROUP SPECIFIED DOES NOT HAVE
CAMP-ON. IF A LINE’S DIVERT CONDITION IS ‘LN’
THEN THAT LINE’S DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE
MUST HAVE STATION ACCESS (ISA’) SPECIFIED.
IF A LINE’S DIVERT CONDITION IS ‘AT’ THEN THAT
-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE MUST
TENDANT INFORMATION (‘Al’) SPECIFIED.
KUP TABLE SPECIFIED
ORRESPONDING ED
A. IF DESTINATION TYPE IS ‘LN’,
THE DESTINATION ID MUST BE A VALID STATION
NUMBER OR AN LD RECORD.
AN HG RECORD.
RECORDCODE
UST BE MARKED
ID MUST B E A VALID TRUNK
SVR 5210
8h37
D-483
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
ATTENDANT
DIVERT INFORMATION
INATION TYPE IS ‘AT’,
ESTINATION ID MUST BE A VALID
OR ATTENDANTS ON AT RECORDS.
ISPLAYABLE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
DEFINED ON F R
ONTROLLING
FEATUREPHONE MUST BE ENGINEERED AS A LINE
ON AN LD RECORD.
(TABGEN)
LD-71
LINE CARD NOT LINE LOCATION
FOUND
THE LINE CARD BEING ASSIGNED MUST BE
SPECIFIED ON AN FR OR LR REC??D
(DEPENDENT ON THE SVR).
(GENLIN)
LD-72
CANNOT
ASSIGN LINE ID
INSTRUMENT TYPE / LINE TYPE
THERE MUST BE SPACE AVAILABLE IN THE SYSTEM
TABLES TO ASSIGN A LINE SOFTWARE ID IN THE
GIVEN PEC FOR ANY ‘BDML’, ‘DDML’, ‘DTML’, OR
‘FPML’ LINE CONTROLLED BY ANOTHER DIGITAL
PHONE OR FEATUREPHONE OR ANY LINES WITH A
LINE TYPE OF ‘NP’ OR ‘CO’.
A MAXIMUM OF 256 LINES OF ALL KINDS IS ALLOWED
PER PEC.
(GENLIN)
D-484
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRlPTlON OF MESSAGES
UST HAVE HOOKSWITCH FLASH IN
LE CLASS OF SERVICE.
SERVICE WITH SWITCHED DIRECT LINE AND CO LINE.
AGENT POSITION NUMBER - LINE CIRCUIT PHYSICAL
LOCATION INSTRUMENT TYPE (‘PACT’) - LINE
POSITIONS OR AGENT PACETS P E R PEC MUST NOT
ITION NUMBER
CANNOT
THE PHYSICAL LOCATION FIELDS (BOTH LINE CIRCUIT
AND DATA LINK) FOR A FEATUREPHONE NON-PRIME
CONTROL LINE MUST MATCH THE PHYSICAL
LOCATION FIELDS OF THE CONTROLLING
FEATUREPHONE.
(FPCHKS)
CONTROLLING
FEATUREPHONE MUST
BE MULTILINE
CONTROLLING FEATUREPHONE
A LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER USED IN A
CONTROLLING FEATUREPHONE FIELD MUST BE
ENGINEERED AS A MULTILINE FEATUREPHONE OR
DIGITAL PHONE ON AN LD RECORD.
(TABGEN)
INVALID
FEATUREPHONE
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
LINE LOCATION
A FEATUREPHONE OR DIGITAL PHONE MAY NOT BE
ASSIGNED TO CIRCUIT 7 OF A LINE CARD
ENGINEERED AS RELATIVE LINE CARD NUMBER 31 IN
A PEC ON AN FR RECORD.
REARRANGE CARD ASSIGNMENTS TO PLACE OTHER
TYPES OF LINES IN THIS LOCATION.
(GENLIN)
SVR 5210
8187
D-485
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
DEFINED ON LD
IS MISSING ON
NAMED
RECORD CODE
INSTRUMENT TYPE
IF THE INSTRUMENT TYPE ON AN LD RECORD IS A
DATA DEVICE (‘ARM’, ‘SPM’, OR ‘DFPA’), THE
APPROPRIATE CP AND AP, AQ OR XP RECORDS MUST
BE INPUT FOR THE SAME PORT.
(ENDCHK)
LD-83 -
CLASS OF
SERVICE NOT
A L L O W E D ‘-
A FEATUREPHONE NON-PRIME CONTROL LINE MAY
NOT HAVE STATION SILENT MONITOR ACCESS.
LD-84
TRUNKS
DIVERTED TO
BY CO LINE
MUST HAVE
SUPY OTG =
so
A TC RECORD MUST SPECIFY SUPERVISORY
OUTGOING SIGNAL OF ‘SO’ FOR A TRUNK DIVERTED
TO BY A CO LINE.
(DIVERT)
A LINE CANNOT
DIVERT TO
ITSELF
THE DIVERT DESTINATION OF A LINE CANNOT BE
ITSELF.
(DIVERT)
CONTROLLING
DCP NUMBER
NOT DEFINED
ON RECORD
CODE FR
DCP NUMBER
THE DCP NUMBER REFERENCED IN THE LD RECORD
MUST BE DEFINED ON AN FR RECORD.
LD-87
PC LINE TYPE
MISSING OR
EXTRA FOR
FEATUREPHONE
EVERY FEATUREPHONE MUST HAVE ONE AND ONLY
ONE PRIME CONTROL LINE.
(FPCHKS)
LD-88
FEATUREPHONE
ENGINEERING
LIMITS
EXCEEDED
THE LIMITS PER CARD OR PER PEC HAVE BEEN
EXCEEDED.
(FPCHKS)
LD-89
FRL MUST BE
SPECIFIED
FRLS HAVE BEEN EQUIPPED FOR THIS SYSTEM ON
RECORD CODE OF AND MUST THEREFORE BE
SPECIFIED FOR EVERY LINE ON RECORD CODE LD.
LD-89
INCONSISTENT
ENGINEERING
OF FRLS
FRLS HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED FOR SOME PARTS OF
THE SYSTEM AND NOT OTHERS.
ENSURE THAT ALL ATTENDANTS, LINES, TRUNK
GROUPS, MERS ROUTES, ETC. HAVE FRLS ENTIRELY
ENABLED OR DISABLED.
LD-82
...
D-486
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
LD-91
..”
LD.-92
LD-93
LD-93
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
NO ACCESS TO
VMS IN
CLASS OF SERVICE - DIVERT INFORMATION
THE VMS ACCESS FIELD, ‘VM’, SHOULD BE SPECIFIED
.i_
ON NC RECORD IF A LINE HAS A DIVERT
I&PLAYABLE
DESTINATION ‘VM’.
;;zTW;;H DIVT. (DIVERT)
_
DATD .
REQUIRES
STATION
ACCESS IN
DISPLAYABLE
cos
INSTRUMENT TYPE - CLASS OF SERVICE
INSTRUMENT TYPE DATD REQUIRES THAT THE
DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE SPECIFIES STATION
ACCESS AS YES.
DATD
REQUIRES DATA
LINE SECURITY
IN NDISPLAYABLE
CLASS OF
SERVICE
INSTRUMENT TYPE - CLASS OF SERVICE
FIELD DOESN’T
HAVE
REQUIRED
VALUE
LINE TYPE - CLASS OF SERVICE
INSTRUMENT TYPE DATD REQUIRES THAT THE
N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE SPECIFIES DATA
LINE SECURITY AS YES.
LINE TYPE DA WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE DIFP
REQUIRES THAT THE N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF
SERVICE SPECIFIES DATA LINE SECURITY AS YES.
LINE TYPE ‘Ll’ REQUIRES THAT THE N-DISPLAYABLE
CLASS OF SERVICE SPECIFIES HOOKSWITCH FLASH
AS YES.
LINE TYPE ‘VP’ REQUIRES THAT THE N-DISPLAYABLE
CLASS OF SERVICE SPECIFIES ORIGINATING ONLY,
TERMINATING ONLY AND CALL PARK.
LD-94
NO. OF PORTS
EXCEEDED FOR
THIS DCP
NUMBER OF PORTS PER CONTROLLING DCP ARE
LIMITED TO 240. ANY CONTROLLING DCP CAN
HANDLE UP TO 240 ENTRIES OF LD RECORDS.
(ADMPCK)
LI-52
DUPLICATE
LOGICAL LINE
DIRECTORY
NUMBER
THE LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE
ACROSS ALL LI RECORDS.
LI-54
DUPLICATE
LOGICAL LINE
SOFTWARE ID
THE SOFTWARE ID CANNOT BE DUPLICATED ACROSS
THE LI RECORDS.
SVR 5210
8187
D-487
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
SAID PHt!!CAL LOCATION THE LOGICAL LINE
SOFTWARE ID CANNOT Bi PRESERVED.
(NOTE: THE SOFTWARE ID OF A LINE NUMBER ON
LD RECORD CODE WHICH IS NOT A LOGICAL LINE, IS
THE SAME AS THAT GIVEN TO A LOGICAL LINE ON Ll
RECORD. CHECK LINE CARD ADDRESS TABLE (T2541)
FIELDS MUST BE SPECIFIED.
CONSISTENTLY
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
LM-51
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
LM-51
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
D-488
8187
VALUE OF
DIVERT CONDITION
ALLOWABLE VALUE O F
DIVERT DESTINATION
ND
BY, NA, BN, OR DA
--, TO, LN, AT, RA/TR, RM, PN
TO, LN, AT, RA/TR, RM, PN
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
LM-51
....
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CAiiD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
DATA LINK LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED IS INVALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED
ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘AIFP’ MUST APPEAR
ON A CIP DATA LINK CARD.
A LINE WITH INSTRUMENT TYPE ‘DIFP’ MUST APPEAR
ON A VLPO OR VPLl DATA LINK CARD.
(PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”, THAT
INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS LOCATION
IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO THIS
PYHSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
..
LM-51
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
LM-51
PHYSICAL
DATA LINK LOCATION
LOCATION NOT THE PEC, GROUP, AND SLOT MUST BE DEFINED ON
DEFINED ON
RECORD CODE ;YLOC)
FR
LM-51
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
DATA LINK LOCATION
THE DATA LINK LOCATION MUST BE UNIQUE.
(PHYLOC)
LM-51
CIRCUIT
NUMBER TOO
LARGE FOR
CARD TYPE
THE SPECIFIED CIRCUIT NUMBER IS NOT VALID FOR
THE TYPE OF CARD IN THE GIVEN PHYSICAL
LOCATION.
(PHYLOC)
LM-52
PEC NUMBER IS DATA LINK LOCATION
NOT EQUIPPED THE PEC NUMBER INDICATED MUST BE MARKED AS
EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD.
LM-53
MAX
PRECEDENCE
LEVEL APPLIES
TO AUTOVON
ONLY
THE MAX PRECEDENCE LEVEL FIELD MAY CONTAIN
VALUES OTHER THAN DASH ONLY IF AUTOVON IS
SPECIFED ON THE OF RECORD.
LM-54
INVALID
RECORD CODE
LM RECORDS ARE NOT VALID FOR INSTRUMENT
TYPES ‘----‘,I APM’, AND ‘SPM’ AND THE LINE
TYPES ‘Ll’ AND ‘DA’.
(SPECIFIED ON AN LD RECORD)
SVR 5210
DATA LINK LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED MUST BE VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
(PHYLOC)
8187
D-489
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PHYSICAL LOCATIONS AS THE DIRECTORY
ON THE LM RECORD BEING CONTROLLED.
OR CO LINES ON RECORD CODE LD, THE MULTILINE
FEATUREPHONE FIELD ON RECORD CODE LM MUST
BE ‘Y’ IF AN LM RECORD IS PROVIDED FOR THE
FEATUREPHONE PRIME CONTROL LINE.
MUST BE ND
L M MUST BE ENTERED AS AN ‘ND’ (NO DIVERT)
EXCEPT WHEN THE LINE TYPE IS ‘CO’ (ON LD) OR
THE FEATUREPHONE IS A MEMBER OF A HUNT
Lrvl-59
DATA LINK OF
127 NOT
ALLOWED
A FEATUREPHONE’S OR DIGITAL FEATUREPHONE’S
CONTROLLER MAY NOT BE ASSIGNED TO CIRCUIT 7
OF A CONTROLLING CARD (CIP) ENGINEERED AS
RELATIVE CONTROLLING CARD NUMBER 15 ON AN FR
RECORD, SINCE THIS WILL RESULT IN A DATA LINK
NUMBER OF 127.
THE VALID RANGE FOR DATA LINK NUMBERS IS 0 TO
126.
MD-01
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
MD-01
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
D-490
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
..
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
MD-01
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
MDR PORT 1
THE TERMINAL AND MDR PORT 1 FIELDS CANNOT
BOTH BE ‘Y’.
MH-51
INVALID PILOT
-NUMBER
SPECIFICATION
THE HUNT GROUP PILOT NUMBER MUST HAVE BEEN
DEFINED ON AN HG RECORD.
(GENLIN)
MH-52
INVALID
SEQUENCE
NUMBER
THE SEQUENCE NUMBERS WITHIN A HUNT GROUP
MUST START WITH ZERO AND BE IN ASCENDING
ORDER WITH NO GAPS.
(GENLIN)
MH-53
DIRECTORY
NUMBER
ERROR
THE DIRECTORY NUMBER MUST BE A VALID LINE
NUMBER.
(GENLIN)
MH-54
MEMBER
ALREADY IN
ANOTHER HUNT
GROUP
A DIRECTORY NUMBER MAY BE IN ONLY ONE HUNT
GROUP.
(GENLIN)
MH-55
AGENT POS.
NOT ALLOWED
IN HUNT GROUP
A HUNT GROUP MEMBER MUST NOT BE AN AGENT
POSITION.
(GENLIN)
MH-56
PhEVlOUS
DIVERT DATA
IGNORED
DIVERT DATA PREVIOUSLY SPECIFIED FOR THIS LINE
HAS BEEN OVERRIDDEN AND REPLACED BY A DIVERT
TO THE NEXT HUNT GROUP MEMBER.
(GENLIN)
MH-57
CLASS OF
SERVICE NOT
ALLOWED
LINES MARKED WITH SWITCH DIRECT LINE OR
ORIGINATING ONLY SHOULD NOT BE A MEMBER OF A
HUNT GROUP:
(GENLIN)
MH-59
FIXED CALL
FORWARDING
- FEATUREPHONES HUNT GROUPS
A FEATUREPHONE EQUIPPED WITH FIXED CALL
FORWARDING ON A LINE SHOULD BE THE LAST
MEMBER OF A TERMINAL HUNT GROUP.
(FPCHKS)
>...
SVR 5210
8h37
D-491
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INVALID
MONITOR MODE
COMMAND
AN iNVALID MONITOR MODE COMMAND HAS BEEN
SPECIFIED.
ONLY THE FOLLOWING MONITOR COMMANDS ARE
AVAILABLE:
OPTIONS
RUN
SAVE
PRINT
END
MI-01
END OF FILE
DETECTED
CPG WILL PRODUCE THIS ERROR MESSAGE IF NO
‘END’ MONITOR COMMAND IS ENTERED.
MI-02
INVALID OPTION
COMMAND
AN INVALID OPTION COMMAND HAS BEEN SPECIFIED.
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE
(DEPENDING UPON SVR):
BATCH/TSO - MODE TO BE RUN UNDER.
TABLES/NOTABLES - SPECIFIES WHETHER THE
TABLE LISTING SHOULD BE PRINTED.
SORT/NOSORT - SORT THE INPUT FILE ON
RETRIEVAL FROM PANVALET.
HALTINOHALT - CONTROLS USER INTERACTION
DURING A FORWARD PROCESS.
INREC = - SPECIFIES THE PANVALET SOURCE FOR
THE INPUT RECORD FILE.
TITLE = - SPECIFIES THE TITLE FOR THE OFFICE
RECORD LISTINGS.
SITENO = - SPECIFIES THE SITE DRAWING NUMBER
FOR THE
OFFICE RECORD LISTINGS.
ALTINOALT - CONTROLS GENERATION OF ALL
ALTERNATE SORT LISTING.
CART/NOCART - CONTROLS WHETHER INPUT
RECORDS OR A DATA BASE ARE INPUT TO THE CPG.
L
D-492
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
MI-02
(cont’d)
...
MI-03
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INVALID OPTION TABONLY/NOTABONLY - CONTROLS WHETHER OR
COMMAND
NOT BLANK TABLES SHOULD BE PRINTED.
ERRIN/NOERRIN - CONTROLS PLACEMENT OF
%ERROR MESSAGES IN THE MIRROR REPORT LISTING.
FULLTAB/NOFULLTAB - PRODUCES PARTIAL TABLE
OUTPUT FOR IMPLEMENTED PECS AND LINES ONLY.
PROTO/NOPROTO - PRODUCES ODDB LOAD MODULE
..
IN FORMAT SUITABLE FOR DOWNLOADING TO THE
DECPROTOTYPE
UTILITY SYSTEM OR THE IBM-PC.
THE DEFAULT MODE IS BATCH.
THE DEFAULT BATCH OPTIONS ARE:
TABLES,NOHALT,SORT,ALT,NOCART,NOTABONLY,ERR
IN, NOFULLTAB,NOPROTO
THE DEFAULT TSO OPTIONS ARE:
NOTABLES,HALT,SORT,NOALT,NOCART,NOTABONLY,E
RRIN,
NOFULLTAB,NOPROTO
RESTRICTIONS :
- PANVALET FILE NAMES MUST FOLLOW ALL
PANVALET NAMING CONVENTIONS.
- THE HALT OPTION CANNOT BE SPECIFIED IN
BATCH MODE.
THE TITLE CANNOT EXCEED 50 ALPHANUMERIC
CHA RA CTERS.
THE SITENO CANNOT EXCEED 6 NUMERIC
C H A R A C TER S .
- THE CART OPTION CANNOT BE SPECIFIED WITH
ANY OTHER OPTIONS.
- THE TABONLY OPTION CANNOT BE SPECIFIED
WITH ANY OTHER OPTIONS.
INVALID RUN
COMMAND
SVR 5210
AN INVALID RUN COMMAND HAS BEEN SPECIFIED.
THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS ARE AVAILABLE:
RUN - RUN A FORWARD PROCESS ON THE ENTIRE
INPUT RECORD FILE.
RUN RC (,RC) - RUN A FORWARD PROCESS ON THE
SELECTED RECORD CODES WHERE ‘RC’ IS THE
RECORD CODE MNEMONIC.
RUN (SYNTAX ] INTRA ] INTER) RC (,RC)
RESTRICTIONS:
- ALL RECORD CODES SPECIFIED MUST CONTAIN AT
LEAST ONE RECORD.
INTER CHECKS MUST BE SPECIFIED IF TABLES ARE
G EN E R A T E D .
- INTER CHECKS MUST BE SPECIFIED IF ALTERNATE
SORTS ARE GENERATED.
8187
D-493
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INVALID SAVE
AN INVALID SAVE COMMAND HAS BEEN SPECIFIED.
THE FOLLOWING COMMAND FORMATS ARE
THE OPTION ‘INREC = ‘.
PUT RECORD FILE IN
SPECIFIED. THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS ARE
REVERSE - REVERSE THE ENTIRE INPUT DATA BASE
REVERSE RC (RC) - REVERSE ONLY THE SELECTED
RECORD CODES WHERE ‘RC’ IS THE RECORD CODE
- TABLE NOT
FOUND IN THE C P G LIST OF VALID TABLES FOR THE
THE PRINT REQUEST FOR THE TABLE WAS IGNORED.
PARAMETER
ABOVE RECORD IS DIFFERENT THAN THE JOB
JOB ID. IT HAS
BEEN DELETED
Ml-l 1
ERROR IN SORT
OF INPUT
RECORD FILE
A SYSTEM ERROR OCCURRED WHEN TRYING TO
SORT THE INPUT RECORD FILE.
CHECK LISTING FOR ANY JCL ERRORS.
BRING LISTING TO CPG SUPPORT GROUP.
Ml-l 2
DATA NOT
SORTED, INTER
CHECKS AND
TABLE
GENERATION
NOT COMPLETE
TO PERFORM ALL INTER CHECKS AND TO GENERATE
TABLES, THE INPUT RECORDS MUST BE IN
ASCENDING ORDER.
IF TABLES ARE TO BE GENERATED, CODE THE SORT
OPTION ON THE OPTIONS COMMAND.
D-494
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CHECK TO MAKE SURE TWO JOBS WITH THE SAME
HAS INVALID
RECORDCODE
IT WILL NOT BE CHECKED FOR ERRORS.
CORRESPOND TO THE FORM SEQUENCE NUMBER.
NUMBER - IT
CHECK THE INREC NAME FOR CORRECTNESS.
CHECK THE LIB PARAMETER IN THE JCL TO MAKE
SURE THE CORRECT PANVALET LIBRARY IS BEING
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
DASHES MUST BE CONSISTENT FOR EACH FUNCTION
SECURITY CODE.
MK-51
MASTER KEDU
NUMBER NOT
FOUND
THE MASTER KEDU NUMBER SPECIFIED MUST BE A
VALID KEDU NUMBER DEFINED ON A KD RECORD.
MO-01
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
MO-01
SECOND FIELD
MUST BE --IF FIRST FIELD
IS -
SVR 5210
8/87
USAGE FIELDS - INSTRUCTION/INDEX FIELDS
IF A PARTICULAR USAGE FIELD IS DASHED, THEN THE
CORRESPONDING INSTRUCTION/INDEX FIELD MUST
BE DASHED.
D-495
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PREFIX INDEX
NOT FOUND ON
PREFIX INDEX
REFIX INDEX IS SPECIFIED ON AN MO RECORD,
IT SHOULD BE SPECIFIED ON A PC RECORD
ELEMENT TOO
ON-NET MERS CODES MUST BE NUMBERED FROM
CHARACTER
ALLOWABLE VALUES FOR AN ON-NET CODE ARE
ALL MR RECORDS.
CONSOLIDATE THE NPAS USING THE LIKE NPA.
ROUTING. ONE OF THESE TABLES IS USED FOR 3DIGIT NPA TRANSLATION, SO THE REMAINING THREE
TABLES MAY BE USED FOR 6-DIGIT TRANSLATION
CONTAINING CONFLICT CODES.
DATE THE NPAS USING THE LIKE NPA.
D-496
8h37
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
-:
CPG ERRQR
MESSAGES
TITLE
MR-53
MR-55
IUPLICATE
ZODE
....
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
NPA
blERS NPA NOT
PREVIOUSLY
DEFINED
.
THE MERS NPA NUMBER OCCURRED ON A PREVIOUS
MR RECORD.
THE LIKE NPA CODE HAS NOT BEEN SPECIFIED AS A
MERS NPA CODE ON A PREVIOUS MR RECORD.
THIS CHECK DOES NOT INVOLVE MERS NPAS ON THE
MR, NT, OR TD RECORDS.
(GENDIG)
MR-56
VALUES MUST
BE
CONTINUOUS
MERS NPA INDEX
GAPS ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE MERS NPA
NUMBER.
(ENDCHK)
MR-57
FIELD DOES
NOT HAVE
REQUIRED
VALUE
IF AN MR RECORD INDICATES CONFLICT CODES,
THEN MERS 1 + DIALING MUST BE ‘Y’ ON THE OF
RECORD.
MS-01
VALUES TO BE
FILLED LEFT TO
RIGHT
AUTHORIZATION CODE DIGITS
IF THE AUTHORIZATION CODE IS LESS THAN TEN
DIGITS,
THEN THE DIGITS MUST BE PACKED TO THE LEFT
WITH THE REMAINING FIELDS DASHED.
MS-50
MDR WORK
GROUP & SCC
ID NUMBER
DUPLICATED
MDR WORK GROUP - SCC ID NUMBER
DUPLICATE MDR WORK GROUP AND SCC ID NUMBER
COMBINATION IS NOT ALLOWED.
MS-51
MAXIMUM
NUMBER OF
UNIQUE
AUTHORIZATIO
N CODES
EXCEEDED
THE TOTAL NUMBER OF SCC AUTHORIZATION CODES
MUST NOT BE GREATER THAN THE SYSTEM LIMIT OF
255.
(TABGEN/GENDIG)
MS-51
MDR WORK
GROUP NO NOT
FOUND ON LD
FORM
MDR WORK GROUP NUMBER
IF A MDR WORK GROUP IS REFERENCED ON AN MS
RECORD, THEN THAT MDR WORK GROUP SHOULD BE
DEFINED ON AN LD RECORD.
NA-53
TRUNK GROUP
- HAS INVALID
N-DISP CLASS
OF SERVICE
MARK
THE TRUNK GROUP SPECIFIED ON RECORD NA
(FROM/TO) MUST CORRESPOND TO A TRUNK GROUP
ON RECORD Tl, HAVING AN N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS
OF SERVICE WHICH INDICATES DATA LINE SECURITY.
NA-54
DUPLICATE
TRUNK
NUMBER
THE TO OR FROM TRUNK WAS SPECIFIED ON A
PREVIOUS NA RECORD.
SVR 5210
8187
D-497
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
IN SPECIFIED
THE TRUNK GROUP ON A TC RECORD.
LISTED FORM
NC-01
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
NC-51
DUPLICATE NDISPLAYABLE
CLASS OF
SERVICE DATA
D-498
8187
ST APPEAR IN A NAILED
N AN NA RECORD.
UNK NUMBER
N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE NUMBER MUST
BE UNIQUE ACROSS THE NC RECORDS. FOR
VIOLATION AND RESTRICTION PATTERNS BETWEEN
DISPLAYABLE AND N-DISPLAYABLE CLASSES OF
SERVICE, SEE APPENDIX 1.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
.
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
THE STATION SILENT MONITOR ACCESS FIELD
ND RESTRICTION PATTERNS
THAN FIRST
EQUAL FIRST
NR-02
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
IN TIME PERIODS 1 TO 3, THE SENDING INSTRUCTION
LIST NUMBER AND THE ROUTING LIST NUMBER MUST
BOTH BE DASHES OR BOTH CONTAIN VALID VALUES.
NR-51
CODE RANGE
INCLUDES
INVALID NPA
THE NPA CODE RANGE FIELDS CONTAIN A THREE
DIGIT CODE THAT IS NOT AN NPA CODE.
SPLIT THE NPA DATA INTO MULTIPLE NR RECORDS
TO AVOID THE INVALID NPA.
(GENDIG)
NR-52
SENDING
INSTRUCTION
NOT DEFINED
A SENDING INSTRUCTION LIST NUMBER USED ON AN
NR RECORD WAS NOT DEFINED ON AN SI RECORD.
NR-53
ROUTING LIST
NOT DEFINED
A ROUTING LIST NUMBER USED ON AN NR RECORD
WAS NOT DEFINED ON AN RP RECORD.
NR-54
DUPLICATE NPA AN NPA CODE SPECIFIED ON THE NR RECORD WAS
ENTRY
ALREADY SPECIFIED.
(GENDIG
NR-55
NPA CODE
SPECIFIED ON
MR FORM
SVR 5210
$187
AN NPA CODE ON THE NR RECORD WAS ALREADY
SPECIFIED AS A 6-DIGIT TRANSLATED NPA CODE ON
AN MR RECORD.
(GENDIG)
D-499
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
TED TIME PERIOD
ALL RECORDS
V E IDENTICAL VALUES FOR TIME
SELECT ORDER.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO HAVE ERRONEOUS VALUES IN THE
ROUTING LIST OR SENDING INSTRUCTIONS IF THEY
D O NOT HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF SELECT
NUMBER OF
(RECORD CODES RP AND Tl) WITH AN OUTGOING
INDEX (RECORD CODES St, LP AND/ OR PC) THAT
SPECIFIES THE OUTPULSING OF DlGlTS ’ # ’ AND/OR
D-500
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
...
>PG ERROR
MESSAGES
NT-01
...
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
TITLE
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
Sf%ClFlED
TRANSLATION TYPE
GIVEN A CERTAIN TRANSLATION TYPE, THE SELECT
TRUNK GROUP, THE NUMBER OF DIGI TS
OUTPULSED, SENDING INSTRUCTION, AND ROUTING
LIST FIELDS MUST BE AS FOLLOWS:
TRANSLATION
TYPE
SELECT NO. OF
SENDING
TRUNK DIGITS
INSTR
OUTPULSED
LOC
MRS
TGS
DGT
ABC
TGO
MRN
MER
--00-63
--00-63
---
1-15
-
--_----01-31
ROUTING
LIST
o-7
NT-02
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
NT-02
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
NT-02
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
MERS ON-NET LIKE NPA
FOR ALL TRANSLATION TYPES EXCEPT MRN, THE
MERS LIKE NPA FIELD MUST BE DASHES.
THE LIKE NPA FIELD MUST BE SPECIFIED FOR
TRANSLATION TYPE MRN.
NT-04
SECOND
ELEMENT LESS
THAN FIRST
ELEMENT.
SECOND
ELEMENT
EQUALS FIRST
ELEMENT.
IN THE CODE RANGE FIELDS THE SECOND CODE IS
LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO THE FIRST CODE.
NT-51
THE TRANSLATION ENTRY NUMBER MUST BE
DUPLICATE
TRANSLATION
UNIQUE.
ENTRY NUMBER
SVR 5210
8187
D-501
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
I
NT-52
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FIELD
CONFLICTS
WITH TRUNK
APPLICATION
THE TRUNK APPLICATION CANNOT BE DIC, PAG, REC
OR NIC.
TRUNK GROUP
NOT FOUND
THE SELECT TRUNK GROUP MUST BE FOUND ON THE
Tl RECORD.
NT-54
DUPLICATE ABC
ENTRY
THE CODE RANGES SPECIFIED MUST BE UNIQUE
ACROSS ALL NT RECORDS.
(GENDIG)
NT-54
DUPLICATE
NPA/OFFICE/SE
RVICE CODE
THE NPA OR OFFICE CODE MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS
ALL NT RECORDS.
NT-55
MERS NPA OR
3N-NET CODE
NOT ON MR
FORM
THE NPA SPECIFIED IN THE LIKE NPA MUST BE
FOUND ON THE MR RECORD.
(GENDIG)
NT-56
TIME PERIOD
DATA
REQUIRED
THE TIME PERIOD WAS SPECIFIED ON A TP RECORD.
THEREFORE DATA FOR THE INDICATED TIME PERIOD
IS REQUIRED ON THE NT RECORD.
NT-57
TIME PERIOD
NOT FOUND
THE NT RECORD SPECIFIED VALUES FOR A TIME
PERIOD WHICH WAS NOT SPECIFIED ON A TP
RECORD.
NT-58
TIME PERIOD
VALUES MUST
MATCH ACROSS
ALL RECORDS
IF SEVERAL NT, NR, AND TR RECORDS HAVE THE
SAME SENDING INSTRUCTION LIST NUMBER AND
ROUTING LIST NUMBER FOR TIME PERIOD 0,
THEY MUST ALSO HAVE IDENTICAL VALUES FOR TIME
PERIODS 1, 2, AND 3.
NT-59
ROUTE
LIST/SEND
INSTR DO NOT
HAVE SAME
NUMBER OF
SELECT
ORDERS
A ROUTING LIST SENDING INSTRUCTION
COMBINATION DOES NOT MATCH IN THE NUMBER OF
SELECT ORDER.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO HAVE ERRONEOUS VALUES IN THE
ROUTING LIST OR SENDING INSTRUCTIONS IF THEY
DO NOT HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF SELECT
ORDERS.
NT-61
ONLY 4 UNIQUE
NPAS ALLOWED
ONLY FOUR UNIQUE NPAS ARE ALLOWED BETWEEN
MR, NT, AND TD RECORDS.
(GENDIG)
NT-62
SENDING
INSTRUCTION
LIST NOT
FOUND
THE SENDING INSTRUCTION LIST MUST BE
ENGINEERED ON RECORD CODES.
...
NT-53
D-502
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1004
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
(RECORD CODES SI, LP AND/ OR PC) THAT
FIES THE OUTPULSING OF DIGITS ‘ # ’ AND/OR
SLOT, AND EQUIPMENT STATUS) FOR MUSIC-ON-
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
oc-54
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED MUST BE VALID FOR THE CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
THE MUSIC ON HOLD CIRCUIT MUST APPEAR ON A
POTS OR OFFP LINE CARD.
(PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”, THAT
INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS LOCATION
IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO THIS
PYHSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
oc-54
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
(PHYLOC)
SVR 5210
8187
D-503
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PHYSICAL LOCATION
UP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
C ON HOLD CIRCUIT MUST BE UNIQUE.
T S . OF THE TWO SLOTS IT FILLS,
THE RIGHT HAND ONE HAS ALREADY BEEN FILLED.
OVERSIZED CARD. THE RIGHT HALF OF THAT CARD
FILLS THIS SLOT.
INTO THIS SLOT
ARD FOR THE MU&C ON HOLD CIRCUIT WAS
NOT SPECIFIED ON AN FR RECORD
(PHYLOC)
OD-01
D-504
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
OD-01
...
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
(INVALID
NUMBER OF
DIGITS TO
OUTPULSE) ,_
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
TYPE - IDENTIFIER
FOR EACH TYPE, THE IDENTIFIER MUST BE IN THE
APPROPRIATE RANGE AS THE FOLLOWING CHART
INDICATES.
TYPE
_----RMA
VMS
SPD
MDU
TGS
TGO
IDENTIFIER RANGE
---------0000
0000-0063 TRUNK GROUP
0001-0008 SPEED CALL LIST
ENTRY
0000-0063 TRUNK GROUP
0000-0063 TRUNK GROUP
XXW WHERE XX = 00-15
NUMBER OF DIGITS OUTPULSED,
YY = 00-63 TRUNK GROUP
OD-50
CLASS OF
SERVICE NOT
SPECIFIED ON
OF FOR
REMOTE
ACCESS
CLASS OF SERVICE
EITHER THE N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE OR
THE DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE (OR BOTH)
SHOULD BE SPECIFIED ON THE RECORD OF WHEN A
REMOTE ACCESS DIRECTORY NUMBER IS SPECIFIED
ON AN OD RECORD.
OD-51
ONLY ONE
TRUNK GRP
PER SYSTEM IS
ALLOWED FOR
THE VMS/MDU
FEATURE
TYPE - IDENTIFIER
TYPES ‘VMS’ AND ‘MDU’ MUST HAVE THE SAME
IDENTIFIER (TRUNK GROUP NUMBER).
00-52
AN N-DISP.
COS OF VM
SPECIFIED ON
NC REQUIRES A
VMS DIR.
NUMBER
N-DISPLAYABLE COS - TYPE
IF ANY NC RECORD SPECIFIES A CLASS OF SERVICE
OF VM,
THEN A VMS DIRECTORY NUMBER MUST BE DEFINED
ON AN RECORD OD.
(ENDCHK)
OD-53
A DIV. DEST. OF
VM SPECIFIED
ON LD
REQUIRES A
VMS DIR. NO.
ON OD
DIVERT DESTINATION - TYPE
IF ANY LD RECORD SPECIFIES A DIVERT
DESTINATION OF ‘VM’,
THEN A VMS DIRECTORY NUMBER MUST BE DEFINED
ON AN OD RECORD. (ENDCHK)
OE-02
REQUIRED
VALUE NOT
FOUND ON
LISTED FORM
PEC FIELDS
AT LEAST ONE PEC MUST BE MARKED AS EQUIPPED.
(ENDCHK)
SVR 5210
8187
D-505
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
OE-51
...
OE-5-l _
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
IF ESP IS
EQUIPPED ON
OE, PORT 1 ON
MTyMUST BE
PRESENT
REQUIRED
DATA NOT
FOUND
.
IF THE ESP IS EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD, THEN
AN MT RECORD WITH PORT 1 MUST BE PRESENT.
(ENDCHK)
OE-52
IF ESP IS
EQUIPPED ON
OE, TRANS.
RATE ON MT
MUST BE 2400
OE-52
FIELD DOESN’T
HAVE
REQUIRED
VALUE
OE-53
IF ESP IS
EQUIPPED ON
OE, MDR PORT
1 ON MD MUST
BE SPECIFIED
OE-53
FIELD DOESN’T
HAVE
REQUIRED
VALUE
IF THE ESP IS EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD, THEN
THE MDR PORT 1 ON MD MUST BE SPECIFIED ON THE
MD RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
OF-09
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
CAMP-ON/CALL WAITING TONE - CAMP-ON TONE
TYPE
IF CAMP-ON/CALL WAITING TONE IS DASHED,
THEN THE CAMP-ON TONE TYPE MUST BE DASHES.
OF-l 0
REQUIRED
VALUE NOT
FOUND ON
LISTED FORM
AT LEAST ONE PEC MUST BE MARKED AS EQUIPPED.
(ENDCHK)
OF-l 1
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
TRAVELING CLASS MARK - FRL AUTHORIZATION
CODE NUMBER OF DIGITS.
IF THE TRAVELING CLASS MARK FIELD IS DASHED,
THEN THE FRL AUTHORIZATION CODE NUMBER OF
DIGITS MUST BE DASHED.
D-506
8187
IF THE ESP IS EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD, THEN
THE TRANSMISSION RATE FOR PORT 1 ON THE MT
RECORD MUST BE 2400 BAUD.
(ENDCHK)
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INVALID VALUE
IF THE TRAVELING CLASS MARK FIELD IS DASHED,
THEN THE DEFAULT FRL ON MERS QUEUE TIMEOUT
VALUES MUST BE DASHED.
0 THE MINIMUM
TIMING VALUE.
WHEN THE NCC OUTPUT SCAN TIME INTERVAL IS
SPECIFIED ON
THEN THE NCC PORT USAGE SHOULD BE SPECIFIED
ON THE OE RECORD.
OUTPUT SCAN
NOT SPECIFIED
THEN THE NCC OUTPUT SCAN TIME INTERVAL
SHOULD BE SPECIFIED ON THE OV RECORD.
PC-01
VALUES TO BE
FILLED LEFT TO
RIGHT
PREFIX DIGITS
IF THERE ARE LESS THAN THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED
PREFIX DIGITS,
THEN THE DIGITS MUST PACKED TO THE LEFT WITH
THE REMAINING FIELDS DASHED.
PC-02
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
PREFIX DIGITS
IF ANY PREFIX DIGIT IS AN ‘E’, THEN THE NEXT
PREFIX DIGIT MUST BE ‘0’ OR ‘1’.
PC-03
A CHAR D MUST
BE FOLLOWED
BY TWO DIGITS
IN THE RANGE
00 TO 99
PREFIX DIGITS
IF ANY PREFIX DIGIT IS A ‘D’,
THEN THE NEXT TWO PREFIX DIGITS MUST BE IN THE
RANGE 00 TO 99.
SVR 5210
8187
TL-130400-I 001
Table 21.1 CPG Error Messages (Continued)
CPG ERROR
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
REQUIRED IF
IF AT LEAST ONE PREFIX DIGIT IS AN ‘A’, ‘D’, OR ‘E’,
THEN RESTRICTION INDICATOR CANNOT BE DASHED.
iJ CIRCUIT HAS BEEN PLACED IN THE
SAME CARD SLOT, THEN ONLY ONE PRINTER CIRCUIT
MAY BE PLACED IN THAT CARD SLOT.
(TABGENiGENMIS)
ADDRESSES
MUST HAVE A BAUD RATE OF 1200, NO PARITY, AND 2
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
PD-52
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FUNCTION OF
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED MUST BE VALID FOR THE CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE). PRINTER
CIRCUIT MUST APPEAR ON A KEDU CARD.
(PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”, THAT
INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS LOCATION
IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO THIS
PYHSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
PD-52
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
(PYHLOC)
PD-52
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
DEFINED ON
RECORDCODE
FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC,GROUP AND SLOT SPECIFIED MUST BE
DEFINED ON FR.
(PHYLOC)
PD-52
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
THE PRINTER CIRCUIT MUST BE UNIQUE.
(PHYLOC)
PD-52
C A R D
OVERHANGS
INTO A
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED SLOT
THIS CARD IS AN OVERSIZED CARD AND IS TRYING
TO FILL TWO SLOTS.
OF THE TWO SLOTS IT FILLS,
THE RIGHT-HAND ONE HAS ALREADY BEEN FILLED.
PD-52
PREVIOUS
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO THIS SLOT
THE CARD TO THE LEFT OF THIS SLOT IS AN
OVERSIZED CARD.
THE RIGHT HALF OF THAT CARD FILLS THIS SLOT.
PD-53
DUPLICATE
PRINTER
NUMBER
PRINTER NUMBER
THE PRINTER NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS
ALL PD RECORDS.
PD-54
PEC NUMBER IS
NOT EQUIPPED
PEC NUMBER
THE PEC NUMBER SPECIFIED MUST BE MARKED
EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD.
...
SVR 5210
8187
D-509
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
I
PN-53
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PNA PILOT
NUMBER NOT
PREVIOUSLY
ENTERED
THE PNA PILOT NUMBER MUST BE DEFINED AS ONE
OF THE FOLLOWING:
1. A VALID LINE (ROOM) NUMBER ON AN LD RECORD.
2. A VALID REMOTE ACCESS DIRECTORY NUMBER ON
AN OD OR OF RECORD.
3. A VALID RLT DIRECTORY NUMBER ON AN RC
RECORD.
4. A VALID PILOT NUMBER ON AN HG RECORD.
5. A VALID MESSAGE DESK UNATTENDED DIRECTORY
NUMBER ON AN OD RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
PN-54
DUPLICATE PNA
DESTINATION
NUMBER
THE PNA DESTINATION NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE
ACROSS ALL PN RECORDS.
PN-55
AN MDU DIR.
NO. ON OD
MUST APPEAR
ON RECORD
CODE PN
PILOT NUMBER
THE MDU DIRECTORY NUMBER ON AN OD RECORD IS
A SPECIAL APPLICATION OF A PREDETERMINED
NIGHT ANSWER PILOT NUMBER AND THEREFORE
MUST BE DEFINED ON A PN RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
PZ-52
FIELD
CONFLICTS
WITH LISTED
FIELD
IF THE ATTENDANT PAGING AREA FIELDS ARE NOT
DASHED, THEN ATTENDANT PAGING FIELD ON THE
CA RECORD MUST BE ‘Y’.
Pl-51
IF ADMP PORT
TIMEOUT IS
SPECIFIED, AN
ADMP PORT
MUST BE
DEFINED ON CP
USER INTERFACE PACKAGE TIMEOUT IS SPECIFIED
ON Pl, AN ADMP PORT MUST BE DEFINED ON CP.
(ENDCHK)
P2-51
DUPLICATE
ADMP DUMP
TYPE
ADMP DUMP TYPE
THE ADMP DUMP TYPE MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS
ALL P2 RECORDS.
RA-01
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
RA-01
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
...
D-51 0
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
.--
ANNOUNCER (RA #1 - RA #3) OR ALTERNATE
RECORDER ANNOUNCER (ALT RA #l - ALT RA #3),
THE TRUNK NUMBER SHOULD ALSO BE SPECIFIED. IF
RECORD MUST APPEAR ON A TC RECORD WITH AN
APPLICATION OF ‘REC’ ON A Tl RECORD.
LISTED FORM
ANNOUNCER
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
THE CARD SLOT WAS ASSIGNED TO A NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL LOCATION.
RC-52
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO A
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED SLOT
THIS CARD IS AN OVERSIZED CARD AND IS TRYING
TO FILL TWO SLOTS.
OF THE TWO SLOTS IT FILLS, THE RIGHT HAND ONE
HAS ALREADY BEEN FILLED.
RC-52
PREVIOUS
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO THIS SLOT
THE CARD TO THE LEFT OF THIS SLOT IS AN
OVERSIZED CARD.
THE RIGHT HALF OF THAT CARD FILLS THIS SLOT.
RC-54
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
SVR 5210
m37
D-51 1
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
RC-54
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITN INCOMING
CARD TYPE
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED MUST BE VALID FOR THE CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
AN RLT CIRCUIT MUST APPEAR ON AN RLT OR ERLT
CARD.
(PHYLOC)
RC-54
FUNCTION OF’
CARD NOT
ALLOWED FOR
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON
FORM FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE VALID FOR THE CARD TYPE DEFINED ON FR
(FOR THIS PEC TYPE). AN RLT CIRCUIT MUST APPEAR
ON AN RLT, ERLT, DTRK OR TlIN CARD.
(PHYLOC)
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”, THAT
INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS LOCATION
IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO THIS
PHYSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
RC-54
NONEXISTENT
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
(PHYLOC)
RC-54
PHYSICAL
PHYSICAL LOCATION
LOCATION NOT THE PEC, GROUP, AND SLOT SPECIFIED MUST BE
DEFINEP ON
DEFINED ON AN FR RECORD.
RECORD CODE (PHYLOC)
FR
RC-54
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
THE RLT CIRCUIT MUST BE UNIQUE.
(PHYLOC)
RC-54
PEC NUM’BER IS
NOT EQUIPPED
ON THE OE
FORM
THE PEC NUMBER SPECIFIED MUST BE MARKED
EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD.
RC-55
PEC NUMBER IS
NOT EQUIPPED
THE PEC NUMBER SPECIFIED MUST BE MARKED
EQUIPPED ON THE OE RECORD.
RN-01
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
....
D-51 2
8A37
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
I
Table 21.1
SPG ERROR
MESSAGES
RN-01
....
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
CODE TYPE - CODE TYPE IDENTIFIER
FOR EACH VALUE OF CODE TYPE, REQUIRED VALUES
OR VALUE RANGES ARE INDICATED AS FOLLOWS:
CODE
TYPE
---INT
3DG
4DG
..
CODE TYPE
IDENTIFIER
---------o-1 5
o-9, 12
15
RN-51
DUPLICATE
LINE(ROOM)
NUMBER 1ST
DIGIT
THE ROOM NUMBER 1ST DIGIT MUST BE UNIQUE
ACROSS ALL RN RECORDS.
RN-52
INTERCEPT
ROUTING CODE
NOT FOUND
IF THE CODE TYPE IS ‘INT’,
THEN THE CODE TYPE IDENTIFIER MUST BE A VALID
INTERCEPT ROUTING NUMBER ON AN IR RECORD.
RP-01
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
RP-01
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES’
RP-01
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
RP-01
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
RP-01
RP-01 VALUE
OF SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
VALUE OF TRUNK
GROUP TYPE OR
INTERCEPT
VALUE OF TRUNK
GROUP NUMBER OR
INTERCEPT ROUTING
NUMBER
INT
COT,FXT,TIE,WTS,SCC
00-l 5
00-31 OR 00-63 DEPENDS
ON SVR
LOC, DGT --
SVR 5210
8h37
D-51 3
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
RP-03
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
R6-03
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
DESTlNATlOlj TYPE - MERS SCC ID
IF THE DESTINATION TYPE IS ‘SCC’, THEN THE MERS
SCC ID FIELD CANNOT BE DASHED.
SIMILARILY, IF THE DESTINATION TYPE IS NOT ‘SCC’,
THEN THE MERS SCC ID FIELD MUST BE DASHED.
RP-51
ROUTING LIST
NOT USED
ROUTING LIST NUMBER
THE ROUTING LIST NUMBER DEFINED ON AN RP
RECORD SHOULD BE REFERENCED ON AN NR, NT, ST
OR TR RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
RP-52
DUPLICATE
ROUTING
LIST/SELECT
ORDER
ROUTING LIST - SELECT ORDER
THE ROUTING LIST/SELECT ORDER COMBINATION
MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS ALL RP RECORDS.
RP-53
INTERCEPT
ROUTING CODE
NOT FOUND
RP-53
TRUNK GROUP
NOT FOUND
RP-55
DESTINATION IDENTIFIER
ALL TRUNK GROUP NUMBERS MUST APPEAR Oiu A Tl
RECORD. ALL INTERCEPT ROUTING NUMBERS MUST
APPEAR ON AN IR RECORD.
SELECT ORDER
SELECT ORDERS MUST BE CONTINUOUS WITH NO
GAPS FOR EACH ROUTING LIST.
(ENDCHK)
RP-60
SCC NUMBER
MUST BE
ENGINEERED
ON MS RECORD
MERS SCC ID NUMBER
THE MERS SCC ID NUMBER MUST BE DEFINED ON AN
MS RECORD.
RP-61
FOR GIVEN
DEST. TYPE,
MERS FIELDS
ON T2 CANNOT
BE DASHED
DESTINATION TYPE - DESTINATION IDENTIFIER
FOR DESTINATION TYPES ‘COT’, ‘FXT’, ‘TIE’, ‘WTS’,
AND ‘SCC’, THE FOLLOWING MERS FIELDS ON A T2
RECORDCANNOTBEDASHED:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
D-51 4
8187
MERS PAUSE VALUE - ESCAPE
MERS PAUSE VALUE - TOLL BARRIER CODE
MERS PAUSE VALUE - SEIZURE
MERS QUEUE ALLOWED
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
FOR DESTINATION TYPE ‘SCC’, THE DESTINATION
TYPE IDENTIFIER MUST BE A VALID TRUNK GROUP
WITH AN APPLICATION TYPE OF ‘COT’, ‘FXT’, ‘TIE’, OR
INCOMPATIBLE
FIELD IS IN A RANGE OF ‘00’ TO ‘03’,
MARY DESTINATION FIELDS CANNOT
FIELD IS IN A RANGE OF ‘04’ TO ‘07’,
MARY DESTINATION FIELDS MUST BE
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
RT-02
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
RT-02
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
USAGE FIELD - SECONDARY X.25 ROUTE
DESTINATION
IF THE USAGE FIELD IS ‘01’ OR ‘02’, THEN THE
SECONDARY DESTINATION FIELDS CANNOT BE
DASHED.
IF THE USAGE FIELD IS NOT ‘01’ OR ‘02’,
THEN THE SECONDARY DESTINATION FIELDS MUST
BE DASHED.
RT-03
INVALID
CHARACTER
STRING
X.1 21 ADDRESS
IF THE X.121 ADDRESS IS LESS THAN 14 DIGITS, THEN
THE DIGITS MUST BE PACKED TO THE LEFT WITH THE
REMAINING FIELDS DASHED.
SVR 5210
8/87
D-51 5
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CHARACTER
SECONDARY X.25 ROUT
DASHES MUST BE USED
THE ENTIRE PHYSICAL L
(PEC, GROUP, CARD SLOT, AND CIRCUIT).
IF ANY OF THE FIELDS ARE DASHED,
THEN ALL MUST BE DASHED.
INCOMPATIBLE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
T B E VALID FOR THE CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
(FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
FOR USAGE 00 AND 01,
THE PRIMARY X.25 ROUTE DESTINATION MUST
APPEAR ON A VPLO, VPLl, VP20 (VOICE AND DATA OR
DATA), VP21 OR NIC CARD.
FOR USAGE 02,
THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY X.25 ROUTE
DESTINATION MUST APPEAR ON A VPLO, VPLl, VP20
(VOICE AND DATA OR DATA), VP21 OR NIC CARD.
FOR USAGE 03,
THE PRIMARY X.25 ROUTE DESTINATION MUST
THAT INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS
LOCATION IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO
HIS PHYSICAL LOCATI
D-51 6
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
THE PEC GROUP SLOT AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
DEFINED ON AN F R RECORD.
F
R
ADDR MAY BE
X.1 21 ADDRESS
THE X.121 ADDRESS FOR THE ADMP MUST BE
LIMITED TO ONE. ADMP CAN ONLY HAVE ONE
MUST BE
DEFINED ON
RECORDCODE
FR
IF ADMP IS SPECIFIED FOR THE USAGE FIELD OF
DATA SYSTEM ROUTING DATA, THEN AN ADMP CARD
MUST BE DEFINED ON FR.
(ADMPCK)
RT-64
ADMP NOT
SPECIFIED ON
RT
USAGE FIELD-CARD TYPE
IF THE CARD TYPE ADMP IS DEFINED ON RECORD
CODE FR THEN AN ADMP MUST BE SPECIFIED ON
RT.
SA-5 1
DTMF
SELF-EXPLANATORY
RECEIVERS NOT
EQUIPPED ON
RECORD CODE
FR
SA-51
DUPLICATE SCC
NUMBER
THE SCC NUMBER WAS SPECIFIED ON A PREVIOUS
SA RECORD.
SD-01
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
SECONDARY DIRECTORY NUMBERS
THESE FIELDS MUST BE FILLED FROM LEFT TO
RIGHT, WITH DASHES BEING CONSISTENT.
SVR 5210
Em?
D-5? 7
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
SD-51
TITLE
CLASS OF
SERVICE NOT
DEFINED
.=.
PRIMARY DIRECTORY NUMBER THE PRIMARY DIRECTORY NUMBER MUST HAVE AN
N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE WITH ‘SD’ (CAS
SECONDARY NUMBER) SPECIFIED.
(GENLIN)
SD-51 _
DIRECTORY
NUMBER NO?
FOUND
PRIMARY DIRECTORY NUMBER
THIS NUMBER MUST BE A VALID DIRECTORY
NUMBER APPEARING ON AN LD RECORD. (GENLIN)
SD-54
REQUIRED
DATA NOT
FOUND
A LINE NUMBER WAS FOUND ON AN LD RECORD
WITH A CLASS OF SERVICE SPECIFYING SECONDARY
DIRECTORY NUMBER,
BUT THE LINE NUMBER DID NOT APPEAR AS THE
PRIMARY DIRECTORY NUMBER ON AN SD RECORD.
(GENLIN)
a-01
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
SKIP - OTHER FIELDS
IF THE VALUE ‘SK’ IS SPECIFIED FOR THE SKIP FIELD
THEN ALL FIELDS TO THE RIGHT OF THE SKIP FIELD
MUST CONTAIN DASHES.
s-51
DUPLICATE
SENDING
INST./SELECT
ORDER
1 ;IllNG/T - SELECT ORDER
THE SENDING INSTRUCTION/SELECT ORDER
COMBINATION MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS ALL Sl
SI-52
SENDING INST
NOT USED ON
TR, NR, OR ST
FORM
9-52
SENDING INST.
NOT USED
SENDING INSTRUCTION
A SENDING INSTRUCTION LIST NUMBER WHICH IS
SPECIFIED ON AN SI RECORD SHOULD BE
REFERENCED ON A NR, NT, ST OR TR RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
w-53
VALUES MUST
SELECT ORDER
SELECT ORDERS MUST BE CONTINUOUS WITH NO
GAPS FOR EACH SENDING INSTRUCTION LIST.
(ENDCHK)
E~NTINU~US
i
.
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
...
r
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
SI-60
PREFIX INDEX
NOT FOUND
THE PREFIX INDEX REFERENCED ON THE SI RECORD
MUST BE DEFINED ON A PC RECORD.
SI-61
PREFIX INDEX
NOT FOUND
THE LDN PREFIX INDEX REFERENCED ON THE SI
RECORD MUST BE DEFINED ON AN LP RECORD.
D-51 8
8187
1
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
CODE OF AND MUST THEREFORE BE
D FOR EVERY MERS ROUTE ON RECORD
THE SYSTEM AND NOT OTHERS.
ENSURE THAT ALL ATTENDANTS, LINES, TRUNK
GROUPS, MERS ROUTES, ETC. HAVE FRLS ENTIRELY
ENABLED OR DISABLED.
BER MUST BE UNIQUE
THE DATA SYSTEM USER SECURITY LEVEL MUST BE
UNIQUE ACROSS ALL SL RECORDS.
VEL CAN ONLY
S DEFINED BY THE
SM-52
REQUIRED
VALUE NOT
FOUND ON
LISTED FORM
SOURCE GROUP
FOR EACH SOURCE GROUP APPEARING ON A TC
RECORD THERE SHOULD BE A CORRESPONDING
SOURCE GROUP MESSAGE ON A SM RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
SP-51
DUPLICATE
MESSAGE
NUMBER
THE MESSAGE NUMBER APPEARED ON A PREVIOUS
SP RECORD. ’
SP-52
REQUIRED
VALUE NOT
FOUND ON
LISTED FORM
SOURCE GROUP NUMBER
A SOURCE GROUP NUMBER USED ON A TC RECORD
WAS NOT DEFINED ON AN SP RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
SVR 5210
8187
D-519
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
SR-01
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INVALID
CHARACTER
STRING
.i_
SYMBOLIC REPLACEMENT WORD STRING
CHARACTERS
THE SYMBOLIC REPLACEMENT WORD/STRING
CHARACTER FIELDS ARE COMPOSED OF SYMBOLIC
REPLACEMENT WORD PLUS THE SYMBOLIC
REPLACEMENT STRING.
THE FIRST ‘N’ ASCII CHARACTERS BEFORE THE FIRST
BLANK CHARACTER WILL BE THE SR WORD. THE
NEXT ‘M’ ASCII CHARACTERS FOLLOWING THE FIRST
BLANK CHARACTER WILL BE THE SR STRING. ‘N’ +
‘M’ HAVE TO BE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO THE TOTAL
OF 63 SYMBOLIC REPLACEMENT
WORDiSTRINGCHARACTERS.
...
SR-51
DUPLICATE
SYMBOLIC REPLACEMENi
ENTRY NUMBER
SYMBOLIC
THE SYMBOLIC REPLACEMENT ENTRY NUMBER
REPLACEMENT
MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS ALL SR RECORDS.
ENTRY NUMBER
ST-01
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
ST-01
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
ST-01
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
ST-01
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
ST-01
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
ST-01
INVALID
SYNTAX
D-520
INVALID SERVICE CODE
THE SERVICE CODE MUST BE OF THE FORM ‘llN’,
‘Nil’, ‘555’, ‘00-l OR ‘OOO’, WHERE ‘N’ IS A NUMBER
BETWEEN 2 AND 9.
6l87
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
IST NUMBER AND THE ROUTING LIST
BOTH BE DASHED OR BOTH CONTAIN
NPA/OFFICE/SE
NOT DEFINED
BERS MUST BE
CONTINUOUS
TIME PERIOD
VALUES MUST
TIVE WITH NO GAPS.
SAME SENDING INSTRUCTION LIST NUMBER AND
NUMBER OF
NUMBER OF
SVR 5210
IT IS POSSIBLE i0 HAVE ERRONEOUS VALUES IN THE
ROUTING LIST OR SENDING INSTRUCTIONS IF THEY
DO NOT HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF SELECT
8187
D-521
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
SPG ERROR
MESSAGES
ST-60
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
#OR * BEING
OUTPULSED ON
NON-DTMF
TRUNK GROUP
A ROUTING LIST SENDING INSTRUCTION
COMBINATION ASSOCIATES A TRUNK GROUP
(RECORD CODES RP AND Tl) WITH AN OUTGOING
SIGNALING MODE OF ‘DP’ OR ‘--I WITH A PREFIX
INDEX (RECORD CODES SI, LP AND/ OR PC) THAT
SPECIFIES THE OUTPULSING OF DIGITS ‘ # ’ AND/OR
c*r
SY-01
BLANKSON .
INPUT RECORD
BLANKS WERE FOUND IN SOME FIELD (OTHER THAN
THE COMMENTS FIELD) ON THE INPUT RECORD.
SY-02
INVALID
CHARACTER
STRING
THE FIELD BEGINNING IN THE LISTED COLUMN
CONTAINS AN INVALID STRING.
SY-03
NUMERIC FIELD
CONTAINS
NON-NUMERIC
DATA
THE FIELD BEGINNING IN THE LISTED COLUMN IS TO
CONTAIN NUMERIC DATA (DIGITS O-9) ONLY.
NON-NUMERIC DATA WAS FOUND.
...
SY-04
A NUMERIC FIELD CONTAINS A VALUE THAT IS NOT IN
THE ALLOWABLE RANGE OF VALUES FOR THAT
FIELD.
SY-05
INVALID
CHARACTER
STRING OR
NUMERIC
VALUE
THE FIELD BEGINNING IN THE LISTED COLUMN
CONTAINS AN INVALID VALUE. THE FIELD CAN
CONTAIN EITHER A NUMERIC VALUE OR SOME
CHARACTER STRING (USUALLY L - ‘).
SY-06
INVALID
CHARACTER
THE COLUMN LISTED IS TO CONTAIN A CHARACTER
(A-Z), A DIGIT (O-9), OR A DASH. AN INVALID
CHARACTER WAS FOUND IN THE COLUMN.
Sl-51
DUPLICATE
SCREENING
TABLES
SCREENING TABLE - MDR WORK GROUP NUMBER
THE COMBINATION OF SCREENING TABLE AND MDR
WORK GROUP NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS
ALL Sl RECORDS.
Sl-52
MDR WORK
GROUP
NUMBER NOT
FOUND ON LD
FORM
THE MDR WORK GROUP NUMBER MUST BE
SPECIFIED ON AT LEAST ONE LD RECORD.
Sl-53
MDR DEVICE
NOT ON MD
FORM
THE MDR DEVICE SPECIFIED ON AN Sl RECORD
MUST BE A DEVICE ENGINEERED ON AN MD RECORD.
D-522
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INATION OF MDR DEVICE AND TRUNK
MBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS ALL S2
A Tl RECORD.
R MAY BE ‘Y’
MING OR TWO-WAY TRUNK
THE OtiTGOiNG SCREENING THE OUTGOING
ELEMENT IS
BER MUST BE IN THE
ELEMENT IS
RANGE 000 TO 103 ONLY.
TC-51
TRUNK GROUP
NOT FOUND
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
THIS NUMBER MUST BE A TRUNK GROUP DEFINED
ON A Tl RECORD.
TC-52
TRUNK GROUP
DOES NOT
HAVE ANY
TRUNK
CIRCUITS
THERE SHOULD BE AT LEAST ONE TRUNK CIRCUIT
ON A TC RECORD FOR EACH TRUNK GROUP.
(GENTRK)
TC-55
FIELD
CONFLICTS
WITH TRUNK
DIRECTION
SUPERVISORY INCOMING SIGNAL
TRUNKS MARKED FOR FAST ACCESS (‘FA’) IN THE
SUPERVISORY INCOMING SIGNAL MUST HAVE A
DIRECTION OF INCOMING ONLY (‘IN’) ON THE Tl
RECORD FOR THE SPECIFIED TRUNK GROUP.
TC-56
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
SVR 5210
8187
D-523
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
z
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
OT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
VALID FOR THE CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
PHYSICAL TRUNK TYPE OF ‘EM’ MUST APPEAR ON AN
‘EMT OR ‘EMT4 TRUNK CARD.
PHYSICAL TRUNK TYPE OF ‘GS’, ‘LP’, AND ‘LD’
(OUTGOING) MUST APPEAR ON A COT TRUNK CARD.
PHYSICAL TRUNK TYPE OF ‘LD’ (INCOMING) MUST
APPEAR ON AN ILT TRUNK CARD.
PAGING/DICTATION CIRCUITS (TRUNK APPLICATION
‘DIC’ OR ‘PAG’ MUST APPEAR ON A PDIC CARD.
TRUNKS WITH TRUNK APPLICATION ‘NIC’ MUST
APPEAR ON A NIC CARD.
IF THE CARD TYPE IN THE MESSAGE IS “OVER”,
THAT INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS
T OVERHANGS INTO
OT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
DEFINED ON
RECORDCODE
FR
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, AND SLOT SPECIFIED MUST BE
DEFINED ON AN FR RECORD.
TC-56
PHYSICAL
LOCATION
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
THE TRUNK CIRCUIT MUST BE UNIQUE.
(PHYLOC)
TC-56
CARD
OVERHANGS
INTO A
PREVIOUSLY
FILLED SLOT
THIS CARD IS AN OVERSIZED CARD AND IS TRYING
TO FILL TWO SLOTS.
OF THE TWO SLOTS IT FILLS, THE RIGHT HAND ONE
HAS ALREADY BEEN FILLED.
D-524
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
THE CARD TO THE LEFT OF THIS SLOT IS AN
OVERSIZED CARD.
THE RIGHT HALF OF THAT CARD FILLS THIS SLOT.
REQUIRED VALUES FOR THE
ECORD DEPENDING ON THE
TRUNK APPLICATION ON THE Tl RECORD:
(Tl RECORD)
DIC
TC-66
ILLEGAL VALUE
FOR DIC, PAG,
OR REC APPL
TC-66
ILLEGAL VALUE
FOR TRUNK
APPLICATION
PHYSICAL TRUNK TYPE
THERE ARE CERTAIN REQUIRED VALUES FOR THE
PHYSICAL TRUNK TYPE FIELD ON A TC RECORD
DEPENDING ON THE TRUNK APPLICATION INDICATED
ON THE Tl RECORD:
TRUNK
APPLICATION
Tl RECORD)
DIC
PAG
REC
NIC
SVR 5210
8l87
PHYSICAL
TRUNK
TYPE
LP
LP
EM
EM OR LP
D-525
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TC-67
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
ILLEGAL VALUE
FOR DIC, PAG
OR REC APPL
ILiEGAL VALUE
FOR TRUNK
APPLICATION
SUPERVISORY INCOMING SIGNAL - SUPERVISORY
OUTGOING SIGNAL
THERE ARE CERTAIN REQUIRED VALUES FOR THE
SUPERVISORY INCOMING SIGNAL AND THE
SUPERVISORY OUTGOING SIGNAL DEPENDING ON
THE TRUNK APPLICATION INDICATED ON THE Tl
RECORD (DEPENDING ON SVR).
TRUNK
SUPERVISORY
APPLICATION INCOMING
(Tl RECORD) SIGNAL
DIC
PAG
REC
NIC
TC-68
ILLEGAL VALUE
FOR DIC, PAG
OR REC APPL
-----
DIC
PAG
REC
ILLEGAL VALUE
FOR DIC, PAG
OR REC APP
TC-69
ILLEGAL VALUE
FOR TRUNK
APPLICATION
TC-71
ILLEGAL VALUE
FOR DIC, PAG
OR REC APPL
D-526
8187
ID
ID
ID
ID
OR -OR -OR -OR --
TRUNK CARRIER
THERE ARE CERTAIN REQUIRED VALUES FOR THE
TRUNK CARRIER ON A TC RECORD DEPENDING ON
THE TRUNK APPLICATION INDICATED ON THE Tl
RECORD (DEPENDING ON SVR):
TRUNK
APPLICATION
(Tl RECORD)
TC-69
SUPERVISORY
OUTGOING
SIGNAL
TRUNK
CARRIER
AT OR -AT OR -AT OR --
CO TRUNK NUMBER
IF THE TRUNK APPLICATION ON A Tl RECORD IS
‘DIC’, ‘PAG’, ‘REC’ OR ‘NIC’
THEN THE CO TRUNK NUMBER MUST BE DASHED.
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
EQUIRED VALUES FOR THE
ON A TC RECORD DEPENDING
ON THE TRUNK APPLICATION INDICATED ON THE Tl
RECORD (DEPENDING ON SVR):
APPLICATION
GUARANTEED
ACCESS
SPECIFIED MUST BE
DASHES FOR
‘, ‘DIG’, ‘PAG’, ‘REC’
SIGNAL FOR
FAST ACCESS
RECORD IS ‘FA’ (FAST ACCESS TRUNK),
THEN THE TRUNK INCOMING SIGNAL FOR ITS TRUNK
GROUP ON THE Tl RECORD MUST BE ALL DASHED
A TRUNK APPLICATION
ID SOURCE GROUP
Y OUTGOING
SIGNAL OF ‘ID’, OR ‘SO’ MUST HAVE DIAL TONE
RETURNED AS ‘Y’ ON RECORD Tl
SVR 5210
8187
D-527
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PNA MUST HAVE A CLASS OF
ES STATION ACCESS ON
D TC FOR THE SAME LINE DIRECTORY
HAVING A DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE WITH
’ (CO LINE) SHOULD BE SPECIFIED ON TC AS A CO
E DIRECTORY NUMBER.
BUT THE TRUNK
D Tl WAS NOT ‘COT’
BE CONTINOUS
MUST BE NUMBERED IN SEQUENTIAL ORDER
BEGINNING WITH MEMBER ZERO WITH NO GAPS OR
DUPLICATES ALLOWED.
TC-87
IF ONE TRK HAS SUPERVISORY OUTGOING SIGNAL ‘SO’ MUST BE
USED FOR ALL MEMBERS OF A TRUNK GROUP IF
SUPY
OUTGOING
REQUIRED FOR ONE MEMBER.
SIGNAL SO
THEN ALL TRKS
IN GRP MUST
TC-99
SITE HAS
INCONSISTENT
DATA BASE
TD-01
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
D-528
8187
THECPGREVERSEPROCESSHASDETECTEDA
PROBLEM IN THE CUSTOMER’S DATA BASE IN THE
TABLE INDICATED IN THE ERROR MESSAGE.
(TGLINK)
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
2ND FEATURE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TRANSLATION TYPE
GIVEN THE TRANSLATION TYPE, THE SELECT GROUP
AND THE NUMBER OF DIGITS OUTPULSED MUST BE
ENTERED AS THE FOLLOWING:
TRANSLATION
LOC
MRS
MRN
SELECT NO. OF
DIGITS
TRUNK
OUTPULSED
GROUP
--00-63
-
--
FOR ALL TRANSLATION TYPES EXCEPT ‘MRN’,
THE MERS ON-NET NPA-CODE FIELD MUST BE
THE ON-NET NPA-CODE FIELD MUST BE SPECIFIED
THE Tl RECORD FOR
HAVE VALUES OF ‘DIC’,
GROUP MUST BE DEFINED ON A
SVR 5210
8187
D-529
TL-130400-1001
Table 21 .l
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TD-56
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
HUNDREDS
GROUP
CONFLICT
IF THE FIRST TWO DIGITS HAVE THE FORM ‘OX’, THEN
BOTH
‘OX’ AND ‘X’ HUNDREDS GROUPS MUST NOT BE
SPECIFIED ON HD RECORDS. IF PRESENT,
THE SYSTEM WILL PROCESS BOTH HUNDREDS
GROUPS WITH FIRST TWO DIGITS OF ‘OX’ FOR THIS
APPLICATION.
TD-57
HUNDREDS .
GROUP NOT
FOUND
FIRST TWO DIGITS OF TERMINAL DIGITS
THE FIRST TWO DIGITS MUST CORRESPOND TO A
HUNDREDS GROUP ENGINEERED ON AN HD RECORD.
TD-60
POSSIBLE
CONFLICT WITH 3-DIGIT TRANSLATED NPA’S
CONFLICT WITH WARNING MESSAGE.
MERS 3-DIGIT
PRIVATE NETWORK DIGIT ANALYSIS WAS COMBINED
TRANSLATION
WITH 3-DIGIT
TRANSLATION (RECORD CODE NR) IN THE SAME
DATA BASE TABLE. POSSIBLE PROBLEM IF PRIVATE
NETWORK DIGITS CONTAIN CONFLICT CODES.
(GENDIG)
TD-61
ONLY 4 UNIQUE
NPAS ALLOWED
ONLY FOUR UNIQUE NPAS ARE ALLOWED BETWEEN
MR, NT, AND TD RECORDS.
(GENDIG)
TF-01
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
DATA DUMP HEADER SITE ID
IF ONE CHARACTER IS DASHED IN THE DATA DUMP
HEADER SITE ID,
THEN ALL CHARACTERS MUST BE DASHED
TL-01
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
TL-01
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
TL-01
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
...
D-530
8187
PRINT STATUS - PRINTER ID
THE PRINTER STATUS AND PRINTER NUMBER FIELDS
MUST BOTH BE DASHED OR NONDASHED.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TL-51
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
PRINTER
NUMBER NOT
FOUND
>-
....
THE PRINTER ID IDENTIFIES A SPECIFIC PRINTER
NUMBER OR SEVERAL PRINTER NUMBERS
DEPENDING ON THE VALUE RANGE ENTERED.
ALL PRINTER NUMBERS INDICATED BY THE PRINTER
ID MUST BE VALID PRINTER NUMBERS ON A PD
RECORD.
PRINTER
ID
..
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PRINTER
NUMBER(S)
NONE
0
1
0,1
2
02
12
0912
3
093
I,3
0,1,3
23
023
1,2,3
0,1,2,3
TL-52
OPI CARD NOT
EQUIPPED ON
RECORDCODE
FR
TN-51
PEC NUMBER IS PEC NUMBER
NOT EQUIPPED THE PEC NUMBER MUST BE MARKED AS EQUIPPED
ON THE OE RECORD.
TN-52
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
TN-52
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH INCOMING
CARD TYPE
SVR 5210
PMS FIELDS ON TL REQUIRE AN OPI CARD TO BE
EQUIPPED ON AN FR RECORD.
8187
D-531
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Contjnued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
ALLOWED FOR
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED MUST BE VALID FOR THE CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
TONE DETECTOR CIRCUIT MUST APPEAR ON A TDET 1
THAT INDICATES THAT A CARD IN THE PREVIOUS
LOCATION IS A WIDE CARD AND IT OVERHANGS INTO
THIS PHYSICAL LOCATION ON FR.
THE PEC GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
PHYSICAL LOCATION
P, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED FOR
CTOR CIRCUIT MUST BE UNIQUE.
TIME PERIOD
NUMBER
PREVIOUS TP RECORD.
TP-52
TIME PERIOD
OVERLAP
THE TIME OF DAY SPECIFIED ON THE CURRENT TP
RECORD OVERLAPS WITH THE TIME OF DAY ON A
PREVIOUS TP RECORD.
TR-01
SECOND
ELEMENT
EQUALS FIRST
ELEMENT
TR-01
SECOND
ELEMENT LESS
THAN FIRST
ELEMENT
D-532
8187
NPA/ABC CODE RANGE
IN THE ABC CODE RANGE FIELD THE SECOND ABC
CODE MUST BE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO THE FIRST
ABC CODE.
IF ONLY ONE NUMBER IS TO BE REPRESENTED THE
SECOND ABC CODE FIELD SHOULD BE DASHED.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TR-02
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
TIME PERIODS 1 TO 3
IN TIME PERIODS 1 TO 3 THE SENDING INSTRUCTION
LIST NUMBER AND THE ROUTING LIST NUMBER MUST
BOTH BE DASHED OR BOTH CONTAIN VALID VALUES.
TR-51
MERS NPA NOT
ON MR, NT, OR
TD FORM
THE NPA CODE ON THE TR RECORD MUST BE
SPECIFIED AS A 6-DIGIT TRANSLATED NPA ON AN
MR RECORD OR AS AN ON-NET CODE ON EITHER AN
NT OR TD RECORD.
(GENDIG)
TR-52
SENDING INST.
NOT DEFINED
SENDING INSTRUCTION LIST NUMBER
A SENDING INSTRUCTION LIST NUMBER USED ON A
TR RECORD MUST BE DEFINED ON AN SI RECORD.
>....
I
TR-53
ROUTING LIST
NOT DEFINED
ROUTING LIST NUMBER A ROUTING LIST NUMBER
USED ON A TR RECORD MUST BE DEFINED ON AN RP
RECORD.
1
TR-54
MERS NPA NOT
PREVIOUSLY
DEFINED
TR RECORDS MUST BE PROVIDED FOR AN NPA CODE
SPECIFIED AS BEING 6-DIGIT TRANSLATED ON AN
MR RECORD, AND AN ON-NET CODE SPECIFIED ON
AN NT OR TD RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
TR-55
DUPLICATE ABC
ENTRY
AN ABC CODE SPECIFIED ON THE TR RECORD WAS
ALREADY SPECIFIED.
(GENDIG)
TR-56
TIME PERIOD
DATA
REQUIRED
THE TIME PERIOD WAS SPECIFIED ON A TP RECORD.
THEREFORE DATA FOR THE INDICATED TIME PERIOD
IS REQUIRED ON THE TR RECORD.
TR-57
TIME PERIOD
NOT FOUND
THE TR RECORD SPECIFIED VALUES FOR A TIME
PERIOD WHICH WAS NOT SPECIFIED ON A TP
RECORD.
TR-58
TIME PERIOD
IF SEVERAL NR, NT, ST, AND TR RECORDS HAVE THE
VALUES MUST
SAME SENDING INSTRUCTION LIST NUMBER AND
MATCH ACROSS ROUTING LIST NUMBER FOR TIME PERIOD 0
ALL RECORDS
THEY MUST ALSO HAVE IDENTICAL VALUES FOR TIME
PERIODS 1, 2, AND 3.
TR-59
ROUTE
LIST/SEND
INSTR DO NOT
HAVE SAME NO.
OF SELECT
ORDERS
1
~
SVR 5210
8187
A ROUTING LIST/SENDING INSTRUCTION
COMBINATION DOES NOT MATCH IN THE NUMBER OF
SELECT ORDER.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO HAVE ERRONEOUS VALUES IN THE
ROUTING LIST OR SENDING INSTRUCTION
IF THEY DO NOT HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF
SELECT ORDERS.
D-533
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TR-60
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
ABC CODE
CONFLICTS
WITH NPA,BUT
CONFLICT
CODE IS NOT Y
ON MR
# OR * BEING
OUTPULSED ‘ON
NON-DTMF
TRUNK GROUP
TT-03
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
TT-05
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPEClFlCATlON
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
TT-51
TV-60
TT-61
D-534
RANGE SPECIFIED IS ZERO OR ONE,
THEN THE CONFLICT CODE ON THE MR RECORD
SHOULD BE ‘Y’.
(RECORD CODES RP AND Tl) WITH AN OUTGOING
SIGNALING MODE OF ‘DP’ OR ‘--’ WITH A PREFIX
INDEX (RECORD CODES SI, LP AND/ OR PC) THAT
SPECIFIES THE OUTPULSING OF DIGITS ‘ # ’ AND/OR
1x7
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
TT-04
TT-06
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
DUPLICATE TTY
NUMBER
ESP NOT
EQUIPPED ON
OE
FADS AUTO
DUMP CAN BE
‘Y’ FOR ONLY
ONE PORT
$I87
ON THE PORT,
PE MUST BE ‘ADDS’.
ESP - ECHO
IF THE ESP IS ALLOWED ON THE PORT, THEN THE
ECHO FIELD MUST BE ‘N’.
TERMINAL TYPE - PRINTER
IF THE TERMINAL TYPE IS ‘TTY’,
THEN THE PRINTER FIELD MUST BE ‘N’.
IF THE ESP IS ALLOWED ON THE PORT, THEN THE
PRINTER FIELD MUST BE ‘N’.
NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS
IF ESP IS EQUIPPED ON A TT RECORD IT SHOULD
AN BE DESIGNATED AS TH
AUTO DUMP PORT.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TT-62
l-l -01
...
TITLE
ESP CAN BE ‘Y’
FOR ONLY ONE
PORT
.~.
SECOND
ELEMENT LESS
l-HEN FIRST
ELEMENT
Tl-02
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-02
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
Tl-02
ELEMENT HAVE
NCOMPATIBLE
dALUES
Tl-03
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-03
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
Tl-03
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
Tl -04
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-04
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
SVR 5210
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
ESP
ONLY ONE PORT CAN BE DESIGNATED AS THE ESP
PORT.
TRUNK GROUP -ALTERNATE TRUNK GROUP
THESE TRUNK GROUP NUMBERS CANNOT BE EQUAL.
TRUNK APPLICATION - DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF
SERVICE, N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE
A CLASS OF SERVICE IS MEANINGFUL ONLY WHEN
THE TRUNK APPLICATION IS ‘TIE’, ‘COT’, ‘FXT’, OR
‘WTS’, AND THE TRUNK DIRECTION IS ‘IN’ (INCOMING)
OR ‘TW’ (TWO-WAY).
THE CLASS OR SERVICE FIELDS FOR THESE TRUNK
APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER, CAN BE DASHED.
TRUNK APPLICATION ‘NIC’ MUST HAVE CLASS OF
SERVICE DATA.
TRUNK APPLICATION - TIE TRUNK CALLING NUMBER
A TIE TRUNK CALLING NUMBER IS MEANINGFUL ONLY
WHEN THE TRUNK APPLICATION IS ‘TIE’.
THE TIE TRUNK CALLING NUMBER, HOWEVER, CAN
BE DASHED.
8187
D-535
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
Tl-04
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
...
TRUNK APPLICATION - TRUNK DIRECTION - ACD
TRUNK PILOT NUMBER
ACD TRUNK PILOT NUMBER CAN BE USED WITH ANY
TRUNK APPLICATION IF THE TRUNK DIRECTION IS
INCOMING OR TWO-WAY.
THE FOLLOWING IS A LIST OF REQUIREMENTS:
TRUNK ACD
APPLICATION
TRUNK
DIRECTION PILOT NUMBER
CAS,CLR,COT,FXT, IN,TW
TIE OR WTS
DIC,PAG,REC,NIC - OG,TW
CAS,CLR,COT,
FXT,TIE,OR VVTS
0000-9999
::::
Tl-05
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-05
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
Tl-05
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
ACD TRUNK PILOT NUMBER - TRUNK INCOMING
SIGNAL
AN ACD TRUNK PILOT NUMBER CAN BE SPECIFIED
ONLY IF THE INCOMING SIGNALING FIELDS ARE
DASHED.
Tl-06
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
TRUNK INCOMING SIGNAL
(RETURN DIAL TONE - RETURN DISTINCTIVE DIAL
TONE)
ONE OR THE OTHER OF THESE FIELDS CAN BE
SPECIFIED (‘Y’), BUT NOT BOTH.
Tl-08
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
Tl-08
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
D-536
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
PG ERROR
IESSAGES
Tl-08
-..
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
‘- F I R S T
SPECIFIED
,.
Tl-09
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
Tl-09
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-09
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
Tl-10
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-10
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
Tl-10
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
BILLING MODE - TRUNK OUTGOING SIGNAL (MF)
MF SIGNALING APPLIES ONLY TO CAMA BILLING
MODE.
THUS, IF THE BILLING MODE IS SPECIFIED AS ‘CM’,
THEN THE MF OUTGOING SIGNAL FIELD MUST BE ‘Y’.
THE MF OUTGOING SIGNAL FIELD FOR ALL OTHER
BILLING MODE SPECIFICATIONS MUST BE DASHED.
BILLING MODE - TRUNK DIRECTION
WHEN THE BILLING MODE IS ‘CM’ (CAMA), THE TRUNK
DIRECTION MUST BE ‘OG’ (OUTGOING ONLY).
BILLING MODE - AIOD CHANNEL
VALUE OF
BILLING MODE
CM OR -Al
Tl-11
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-11
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
SVR 5210
8187
ALLOWABLE VALUE OF
AIOD CHANNEL
1,2,3,4
D-537
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
Tl-11
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
...
TRUNK DIRECTION DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE,
N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE
CLASS OF SERVICE MUST BE DASHES FOR TRUNK
DIRECTION OF ‘OG’.
Tl-12 _
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-12
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
Tl-12
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
TRUNK DIRECTION-TRUNK INCOMING SIGNALTRUNK OUTGOING SIGNAL
IF THE TRUNK DIRECTION IS ‘OG’ (OUTGOING ONLY),
THEN THE TRUNK OUTGOING SIGNALING FIELDS
MUST BE NONDASHED,
AND THE TRUNK INCOMING SIGNALING FIELDS MUST
BE DASHED.
IF THE TRUNK DIRECTION IS ‘IN’ (INCOMING ONLY),
THEN THE TRUNK INCOMING SIGNALING FIELDS
MUST BE NONDASHED,
AND THE TRUNK OUTGOING SIGNALING FIELDS MUST
BE DASHED.
IF THE TRUNK DIRECTION IS ‘TW’ (TWO WAY),
THEN THE TRUNK INCOMING SIGNALING FIELDS
MUST BE NONDASHED,
AND THE OUTGOING SIGNALING FIELDS MUST BE
NONDASHED.
Tl-13
INVALID
CHARACTER
PATTERN IN
2ND FIELD
MISSING DID DIGITS
IF DIGIT 1 IS DASHED, THEN DIGIT 2 MUST BE
DASHED.
Tl-14
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-14
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
D-538
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
Tl-14
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
TITLE
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
F.!!RST
SPEC IFIED
TRUNK APPLICATION - DISCONNECT SUPERVISION
IF THE TRUNK APPLICATION IS ‘TIE’,
THEN DISCONNECT SUPERVISION MUST BE ‘BT’.
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN F IELD
TIE TRUNK CALLING NUMBER
DASHES MUST BE USED CONSISTENTLY.
Tl-17
DASHES MUST
BE USED
CONSISTENTLY
IN FIELD
ACD PILOT NUMBER
DASHES MUST BE USED CONSISTENTLY.
Tl-20
ILLEGAL VALUE
FOR TRUNK
APPLICATION
TRUNK APPLICATION
THE FOLLOWING FIELDS MUST HAVE CERTAIN
REQUIRED VALUES IF TRUNK APPLICATION IS ‘DIG’,
‘PAG’, ‘REC’ OR ‘NIC’:
...
Tl-16
Tl-21
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUE
Tl-21
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
SVR 5210
FIELD NAME
REQUIRED
VALUE
TRUNK DIRECTION
TRUNK INCOMING SIGNAL
TRUNK OUTGOING SIGNAL
TRUNK DISCONNECT SUPERVISION
BILLING MODE
ALTERNATE TRUNK GROUP
TRUNK TRANSFER ALLOWED
TIE TRUNK CALLING NUMBER
AIOD CHANNEL
MISSING DID DIGITS 1 & 2
ACD TRUNK PILOT NUMBER
ACD TRANSLATION INDICATOR
ROUTE TO RLT
ANSWER BACK R/A
ACA
OUTGOING TRUNK
GROUP FRL TO ACCESS
--------------
8187
------
D-539
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
Tl-21
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
Tl-21
RECORDER
ANNOUNCER
NOT ALLOWED
FOR TRUNK
APPLICATION
TRUNK APPLICATION - R/A RETURN ANSWER BACK
THE R/A RETURN ANSWER BACK FIELD CAN BE
SPECIFIED (‘Y’) ONLY IF THE TRUNK APPLICATION IS
‘REC.
Tl-22
MF CAMA ONLY
IS NOT
ALLOWED FOR
TRK APPL CAS
CAS TRUNK APPLICATION - TRUNK OUTGOING
SIGNAL
FOR TRUNK APPLICATION, ‘CAS’, OUTGOING SIGNAL
MF (CAMA ONLY) IS NOT ALLOWED.
Tl-23
AGENT GROUP
# MUST BE
SPECIFIED FOR
TRUNK
APPLICATION
CAS
TRUNK APPLICATION - AGENT GROUP NUMBER
FOR TRUNK APPLICATION, ‘CAS’, AN AGENT GROUP
NUMBER MUST BE SPECIFIED.
Tl-24
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE
TRUNK DIRECTION - TRUNK HOMING SELECTION
IF TRUNK HOMING SELECTION IS SPECIFIED,
THE TRUNK DIRECTION MUST BE ‘OG’ OR ‘TW’.
Tl-25
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
Tl-25
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
Tl-26
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
Tl-26
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
D-540
8l87
ACA - ACA TOLERANCES
IF THE ACA FIELD IS ‘Y’, THEN THE ACA TOLERANCE
FIELDS (ACA SHORT CALL THRESHOLD, INTERVAL,
AND THE LONG CALL INTERVAL) MUST BE NOT BE
DASHED.
OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP FRL OUTPULSED - TRUNK
DIRECTION
IF THE OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP FRL OUTPULSED IS
‘Y’, THEN THE TRUNK DIRECTION MUST BE ‘OG’ OR
‘TW’.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
INCOMPATIBLE
THEN THE TRUNK DIRECTION MUST BE
MEANINGLESS
OING TRUNK GROUP FRL TO ACCESS IS
HEN THE TRUNK DIRECTION MUST BE
MEANINGLESS
INCOMPATIBLE
BER MUST BE UNIQUE
LASSES OF SERVICE SELECTED
ROUP MUST BE INITIALIZED BY A
DD RECORD.
THE N-DISPLAYABLE CLASSES OF SERVICE
SELECTED FOR EACH TRUNK GROUP MUST BE
INITIALIZED BY AN NC RECORD.
REQUIREMENT PATTERNS OF
-DISPLAYABLE CLASSES OF
SERVICE FEATURES SEE APPENDIX 1.
UIT SHOULD BE DEFINED ON THE FR
SVR 5210
8187
D-541
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
Tl-57
INVALID
ALTERNATE
TRUNK GROUP
i
ALTERNATE TRUNK GROUP
THE ALTERNATE TRUNK GROUP MUST BE DEFINED
AS A TRUNK GROUP ON A Tl AND T2 RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
Tl-59
PILOT NO.
BELONGS TO
TERMINAL
HUNT GRP ‘o
IN ORDER FOR THE ACD FEATURE TO WORK
PROPERLY, IT IS MORE DESIRABLE TO USE A PILOT
NUMBER FROM A CIRCULAR HUNT GROUP.
(GENTRK)
Tl-60
INVALID PILOT
NUMBER
THE ACD PILOT NUMBER SHOULD BE A VALID PILOT
NUMBER ON AN HG RECORD, AN ATTENDANT
CALLING NUMBER ON AN AT OR CN RECORD, OR A
STATION NUMBER ON AN LD RECORD.
(GENTRK)
Tl-61
TRUNK GROUP
ACCESS ERROR
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
EACH TRUNK GROUP SHOULD BE MARKED FOR
TRUNK GROUP ACCESS ON A DC RECORD IF THE
TRUNK GROUP DIRECTION IS OUTGOING OR TWOWAY.
(ENDCHK)
Tl-62
CLASS OF
SERVICE NOT
ALLOWED
TRUNK GROUP - DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF SERVICE
CONFLICTS
AN INCOMING TRUNK GROUP IS RESTRICTED FROM
HAVING CERTAIN FEATURES. THE FOLLOWING ARE
THE ONLY FEATURES ALLOWED FOR TRUNK GROUPS
WITH AN APPLICATION TYPE OF ‘COT’, ‘FXT’, OR
‘WTS’:
1. TRUNK GROUP ACCESS
2. DICTATION EQUIPMENT ACCESS (‘DA’)
3. STATION ACCESS (‘SA’)
4. RLT ACCESS (‘RL’)
THE FOLLOWING ARE THE ONLY FEATURES
RESTRICTED FROM ‘TIE’ TRUNK APPLICATION TRUNK
GROUPS:
1. SWITCHED DIRECT LINE (‘SL’)
2. PROGRESSIVE CONFERENCE (‘PC’)
D-542
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
SERVICE NOT
AN INCOMING TRUNK GROUP IS RESTRICTED FROM
HAVING CERTAIN FEATURES.
THE FOLLOWING ARE THE ONLY FEATURES ALLOWED
FOR TRUNK GROUPS WITH AN APPLICATION TYPE OF
‘COT’ OR ‘FXT’:
1. ATTENDANT INFORMATION (‘Al’)
2. DATA LINE SECURITY (‘OS’)
3. UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER (‘UN’)
4. COMPUTER ACCESS (‘CA’)
THE FOLLOWING ARE THE ONLY FEATURES ALLOWED
FOR ‘WTS’ TRUNK APPLICATION TRUNK GROUPS:
1. DATA LINE SECURITY (IDS’)
ALLOWED FOR ‘TIE’ TRUNK APPLICATION TRUNK
1.
2.
3.
4.
ATTENDANT INFORMATION (‘Al’)
DATA LINE SECURITY (‘DS’)
UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER (‘UN’)
COMPUTER ACCESS (‘CA’)
FOR TRUNK APPLICATION, ‘CAS’, STATION ACCESS IS
REQUIRED IN THE TRUNK GROUP’S DISPLAYABLE
CLASS OF SERVICE.
THE FOLLOWING FEATURES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN
THE TRUNK GROUP’S DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF
SERVICE:
1. SWITCHED DIRECT LINE (‘SL’)
2. MODEM ACCESS (‘MD’)
SVR 5210
$I87
D-543
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
THEN THE ASSOCIATED N-DISPLAYABLE CLASS OF
SERVICE MUST NOT BE MARKED FOR SPEED
FOUND ON A Tl RECORD.
THE TRU’NK GROUP SPECIFIED AS THE IDENTIFIER
MUST BE DEFINED ON A Tl RECORD.
BE ‘DIC’, ‘PAG’, ‘REC, OR ‘NIC’ FOR THE TRUNK
GROUP SPECIFIED FOR VMS AND MDU DIRECTORY
ON RECORD
FRL TO ACCESS MUST THEREFORE BE SPECIFIED
FOR EVERY OUTGOING OR TWO-WAY TRUNK GROUP
ON RECORD CODE Tl.
Tl-72
D-544
INCONSISTENT
ENGINEERING
OF FRLS
8187
FRLS HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED FOR SOME PARTS OF
THE SYSTEM AND NOT OTHERS.
ENSURE THAT ALL ATTENDANTS, LINES, TRUNK
GROUPS, MERS ROUTES, ETC. HAVE FRLS ENTIRELY
ENABLED OR DISABLED.
IN THE CASE OF TRUNK GROUPS, ALL OUTGOING OR
TWO-WAY TRUNK GROUPS REQUIRE OUTGOING FRL
TO ACCESS TO BE CONSISTENTLY ENGINEERED.
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
TWO-WAY TRUNK G R
ED ON AN OD RECORD IN
TH A CODE TYPE OF ‘TGO’
OR ‘TGS’ MUST HAV
RUNK DIRECTION OF ‘OG’
PECIFIED ON THE Tl RECORD.
MEANINGLESS
EXPANDED OR CONFLICTING CODE CHECK TABLE
MUST BE SPECIFIED.
IF THE TOLL RESTRICTION IS ‘TL’ OR ‘--I, THEN AN
NFLICTING CODE CHECK TABLE
T2-02
ELEMENTS
HAVE
INCOMPATIBLE
VALUES
T2-02
ELEMENT 2 IS
MEANINGLESS
SPECIFICATION
T2-02
2ND FEATURE
REQUIRED IF
FIRST
SPECIFIED
2ND FEATURE REQUIRED IF FIRST SPECIFIED.
TOLL ACCESS CODE INDICATOR - TOLL ACCESS
CODE
ALLOWABLE VALUES OF
VALUE OF
ACCESS CODE
TOLL ACCESS CODE
DIGITS
INDICATOR
NM, OP, NR, OR
_-
8187
0-- TO 999
---
D-545
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
ZPG ERROR
MESSAGES
T2-04
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
VALUES TO BE
FILLED LEFT TO
RIGHT
.~_
TOLL ACCESS CODE - SECOND TOLL ACCESS CODE
IF DIGIT 1 IS DASHED,
THEN DIGITS 2 AND 3 MUST BE DASHED.
IF DIGIT 2 IS DASHED,
THEN DIGIT 3 MUST BE DASHED.
T2-05 -
SECOND
ELEMENT
EQUALS FIRST
ELEMENT
TOLL ACCESS CODE - SECOND TOLL ACCESS CODE
THESE FIELDS CANNOT BE THE SAME.
T2-51
DUPLICATE
TRUNK GROUP
NUMBER
T2-51
TRUNK GROUP
NOT FOUND
...
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
A. TRUNK GROUP NUMBER MUST BE UNIQUE ACROSS
T2 RECORDS.
B. EACH TRUNK GROUP NUMBER APPEARING ON A T2
RECORD MUST ALSO APPEAR ON A Tl RECORD
C. EACH TRUNK GROUP NUMBER APPEARING ON A
Tl RECORD MUST APPEAR ON A T2 RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
T2-52
CODE CHECK
TABLE NOT
FOUND
EXPANDED OR CONFLICTING CODE TABLE
THE EXPANDED OR CONFLICTING TABLE SELECTED
MUST HAVE A CORRESPONDING EC RECORD TO
INITIALIZE THE TABLE.
T2-53
CODE
RESTRICTION
TABLE NOT
FOUND
CODE RESTRICTION TABLE - 1+ RESTRICTION
TABLE NOT FOUND
RESTRICTION TABLE NUMBERS MUST APPEAR ON A
CR RECORD.
T2-54
ILLEGAL VALUE
FOR DIC, PAG
OR REC APPL
D-546
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
APPLICATION
‘REC’ OR ‘NIC’:
FIELD NAME
REQUIRED
VALUE
TRUNK TOLL RESTRICTION
TOLL ACCESS CODE
SECOND TOLL ACCESS CODE
CODE RESTRICTION TABLE
EXPANDED OR CONFLICTING TABLE
1 + RESTRICTION TABLE
2-WAY PAD CLASS
__--__
____(DIC,PAG,
NIC ONLY)
3-WAY PAD CLASS
DTMF BLOCK TRANSMISSION
REVERSE BATTERY CHECK
MESSAGE METER PEG
TRUNK CALL QUEUEING
REMOTE-ACCESS AUTHORIZATION CODE
---N
-N
--
QUEUE DOES
BERS MUST BE UNIQUE
SVR 5210
8h37
D-547
T-L-1 30400-l 001
Table 21.1
CPG ERROR
MESSAGES
TITLE
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
XP-01
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
LARGE
XP-o-1
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
.
EXTENDED ADDRESSING - FRAME WINDOW SIZE
IF THE FRAME LEVEL SUPPORTS EXTENDED
ADDRESSING FIELD IS ‘N’,
THEN THE FRAME WINDOW SIZE FIELD MUST BE IN
THE RANGE 1 TO 7.
XP-02
SECOND
ELEMENT
EQUALS FIRST
ELEMENT
X.25 DEVICE DIRECTLY CONNECTED - EXTERNAL.
CLOCKING
THE FIELD, IS X.25 DEVICE DIRECTLY CONNECTED,
CANNOT CONTAIN THE SAME VALUE AS THE
EXTERNAL CLOCKING FIELD.
ONE OR THE OTHER OF THESE FIELDS CAN BE
SPECIFIED (‘Y’), BUT NOT BOTH.
XP-03
INVALID
CHARACTER
STRING
LOGICAL CHANNEL NUMBER ASSIGNMENTS (LCNS)
ALL SIX LCN ASSIGNMENT FIELDS MUST NOT
CONTAIN ZEROS.
XP-03
SECOND
ELEMENT
CONTAINS
INVALID VALUE.
LOW LCN - HIGH LCN
IF ANY OF THE LOW LCN STARTS WITH ‘OOOO’,
THEN THE MATCHING SET HIGN LCN SHOULD BE
‘0000’.
XP-04
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
HIGH LOGICAL CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT FIELDS
THE HIGH LCN MUST BE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
THE LOW LOCN ON INCOMING,
BI-DIRECTIONAL AND OUTGOING CHANNELS.
XP-05
VALUE OF
SECOND
ELEMENT TOO
SMALL
LOGICAL CHANNEL NUMBER ASSIGNMENTS
THE BI-DIRECTIONAL FIELDS’ VALUES MUST
CONTAIN LARGER NUMBER VALUES THAN THE
INCOMING FIELDS’.
THE OUTGOING FIELDS’ VALUES MUST CONTAIN
LARGER NUMBER VALUES
THAN THE BI-DIRECTIONAL FIELDS’ VALUES.
XP-52
CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR
INCOMPATIBLE
WITH FCN OF
INCOMING
CARD
D-548
8187
SVR 5210
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
DEFINED ON F R
INCOMPATIBLE
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SPECIFIED MUST BE VALID FOR THE CARD TYPE
DEFINED ON FR (FOR THIS PEC TYPE).
A SYNCHRONOUS DATA PORT MUST APPEAR ON AN
ADMP OR NIC CARD OR A VPLO, VPLl, VP20 (VOICE
AND DATA OR DATA) OR VP21 LINE CARD.
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE VALID FOR THIS PEC TYPE.
PHYSICAL LOCATION
DEFINED ON
DEFINED ON
RECORD CODE
LD/CP
OT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE DEFINED ON AN LD RECORD
(EXCEPT FOR THE PX25 PORT WHICH MUST BE
DEFINED ON A CP RECORD).
XP-53
USE OF
PHYSICAL LOCATION
PHYSICAL LOC
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
CONFLICTS
MUST BE DEFINED ON AN LD RECORD WITH AN
WITH INSTR.
INSTRUMENT TYPE OF ‘SPM’.
TYPE SPECIFIED (EXCEPT FOR THE PX25 PORT).
ON LD
XP-53
PHYSICAL
LOCATION NOT
DEFINED ON
RECORD CODE
CP
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE DEFINED ON A CP RECORD.
(SVR 8220 AND BEYOND)
XP-53
XP RECORD
APPLIES ONLY
TO SYNCH
DEVICE TYPES
ON CP
PHYSICAL LOCATION
THE PEC, GROUP, SLOT, AND CIRCUIT SPECIFIED
MUST BE DEFINED ON A CP RECORD WITH A DEVICE
TYPE OF ‘X25’, ‘PX25’ OR ‘NIC ‘.
SVR 5210
8187
D-549
TL-130400-1001
Table 21.1
CPG Error Messages (Continued)
DESCRIPTION OF MESSAGES
AL LOCATION
MUST HAVE A
RATE OF 9600 OR LESS IF IT CONNECTS TO A VPLO
9600 OR LESS
A SYNCHRONOUS DATA PORT MUST SPECIFY A BAUD
RATE OF 9600 OR LESS IF IT CONNECTS TO A VPLO
OR VP20 LINE CARD.
COMBINATION
BE ‘Y’ FOR DEVICE TYPE
RD CODE CP.
R DEVICE TYPES, ONE OF THE FIELDS
NIC REQUIRES
FIELD TO BE N
THE ABOVE FIELDS MUST BE ‘N’ FOR DEVICE TYPE
‘NIC’ ON RECORD CODE CP.
XP-58
DEVICE TYPE
NIC REQUIRES
X.25 SPEED TO
BE 5 TO 8
X.25 SPEED SELF-EXPLANATORY
XP-82
PHYSICAL
LOCATION IS
MISSING ON
NAMED
RECORD CODE
PHYSICAL LOCATION
EVERY SYNCHRONOUS DATA PORT APPEARING ON
AN LD AND CP RECORD MUST APPEAR ON AN XP
RECORD.
EVERY NIC APPEARING ON A TC AND CP RECORD
MUST APPEAR ON AN XP RECORD.
(ENDCHK)
D-550
8187
SVR 5210
TL-I
30400-l 001
ALPHABETICAL INDEX OF RECORD CODES
AC:
AD:
AF:
AG:
AL:
AP:
AQ:
AS:
AT;AU:
BD:
BK:
Cl:
c2:
CA:
CB:
CD:
CF:
CH:
CL:
CN:
CP:
CR:
CT:
DA:
DC:
DD:
DF:
DK:
DT:
EC:
ED:
FA:
FR:
GC:
GS:
HD:
HG:
HM:
II:
IR:
KD:
KS:
LA:
LD:
LI:
LM:
LP:
F=TL-130000-1001
FeatWe
Access Code Translation, D-80
Agent Position, D-306
Limited Automatic Call Distribution Feature, D-308
Agent Group, D-310
Audit Record Control, D-296
Data System Asynchronous Port, D-340
Data System Asynchronous Port Set/Read List, D-359
Allowable Service Codes, D-208
Attendant Console, D-1 62
Remote Access Authorization Code, D-75
BLDU, D-l 66
Busy Lamp Key, D-168
Data System Call Processing - Part 1, D-379
Data System Call Processing - Part 2, D-383
Common Attendant, D-l 69
Code Blocked Numbers, D-74
Code Call, D-72
CAS Branch Features, D-304
Change Feature by Access Code, D-140
Class of Call-Controlled Routing, D-288
Common Attendant Directory Numbers, D-l 74
Data System Common Port, D-334
Code Restriction Numbers, D-203
Customer Defined Terminal, D-268
Trunk Group Digit Absorption, D-217
Displayable Class of Service, D-l 14
Displayable Class of Service, D-l 16
CPG Default, D-142
Repertory Dial Key Code, D-315
DTMF Receiver, D-42
Expanded or Conflicting Code Check Tables, D-206
Extended Dial-Call Pick up Numbers, D-138
FRL Auorization Code, D-77
Frame Image Card, D-25
Group Speed Calling, D-134
Group Speed Calling List Numbers, D-136
Hundreds Groups, D-l 04
Hunt Group, D-130
Health Care/Motel Miscellaneous, D-274
International Country Code, D-l 12
Intercept Routing Numbers, D-106
KEDU Assignment, D-277
KEDU Special Function Access, D-279
Line Appearances, D-l 58
Line Data, D-144
Line Identities, D-l 60
Line Miscellaneous, D-l 53
Prefix Code Digits for Listed Directory Numbers and Other Applications, D-249
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
MD:
MH:
MK:
MO:
MR:
MS:
MT:
NA:
NC:
NR:
g.
OD;
OE:
OF:
OT:
ov:
Pl:
P2:
PC:
PD:
PN:
PZ:
RA:
F-c:
RN:
RP:
RT:
Sl:
s2:
SA:
SD:
SI:
SL:
$’
SR:
ST:
Tl:
T2:
TC:
TD:
TF:
TL:
TM:
TN:
TP:
TR:
TT:
WT:
XP:
F=TL-130000-1001
FeattIreS
MDR, D-260
Hunt Group Members, D-l 32
Master KEDU, D-281
MERS On-Net Station Numbers and Sending Instruction Values, D-250
MERS Six-Digit Translated NPA, D-220
SCC Authorization Codes, D-248
MDR Port, D-262
Nailed Trunk Connection, D-21 5
N-Displayable COS, D-l 20
MERS Three-Digit Translated NPA, D-239
Private Network Translation, D-254
Office Features Circuits, D-43
Other Directory Numbers, D-63
Office Equipment, D-44
Office Features, D-48
Office Timeout Values, D-55
Office Timing Values, D-60
Data System Global Parameter - Part 1, D-372
Data System Global Parameter - Part 2, D-375
Prefix Code Digits, D-245
Printer Assignment, D-284
PNA Pilot Numbers, D-65
Paging Zones, D-66
Recorder Announcer, D-323
Release Link Trunk Circuit, D-317
Room Number First Digit Translation, D-286
MERS Routing List, D-227
Data System Routing, D-330
MDR Screening Option 1, D-263
MDR Screening Option 2, D-264
Specialized Common Carrier, D-l 09
CAS Secondary Directory Numbers, D-326
MERS Sending Instruction, D-231
User Security Level Password, D-68
Source Messages, D-31 9
Special Messages, D-320
Data System Symbolic Replacement Word/String, D-385
Service Code MERS Translation, D-243
Trunk Group Part 1, D-176
Trunk Group Part 2, D-186
Trunk Circuit, D-21 0
Private Network Dl/D2, D-256
Traffic Data Facilities, D-70
Translation Record Control, D-290
Supervisor Talk/Monitor Repertory Dial Key Code, D-321
Tone Detector, D-247
MERS Time Period, D-242
MERS Numbering Plan Area/ABC Translation, D-234
Serial Device, D-271
Ward Control, D-301
Data System X.25 Port, D-366
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M
=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
‘,
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
A
ABC Code Range, D-236
Access Code---Digits
l-3, D-81
Agent Call Hoid Timeout, D-62
Agent Call Park Timeout, D-62
Agent Group, D-302
_
Agent Group Number (Record Code AG), D-311
Agent Group Number (Record Code Tl), D-183
Agent Hands-Free Operation, D-314
Agent Position Number, D-302
Agent Transfer, D-31 4
AIOD Channel, D-181
Alert Tone, D-314
Allow Agent to Originate Calls on Line 1, D-307
Allowable Three-Digit Numbering Plan Area/ABC Code Numbers, D-205
Alternate Divert Destination, D-31 2
Alternate Divert Destination Identifier, D-31 2
Alternate Divert Destination Timing, D-31 2
Alternate Recorder Announcer #l , D-324
Alternate Recorder Announcer #2, D-324
Alternate Trunk Group, D-181
Answer Back Recorder Announcer, D-183
Appearance Type, D-l 59
Attendant Assignment for Room-to-Room Blocking Function, D-l 71
Attendant Break-In, D-171
Attendant Call Waiting Lamp Light and Flash, D-170
Attendant Call Waiting Queue, D-57
Attendant Camp-on, D-171
Attendant Console Number, D-l 74
Attendant Directory Number, D-l 74
Attendant Do Not Disturb Key, D-173
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
SyStem
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
Attendant Message Waiting Key, D-173
Attendant No Answer Time, D-58
Attendant Paging, D-171
Attendant Paging Areas, D-67
Attendant-Paging Queue, D-l 71
Attendant-Recall After No Answer Timeout, D-l 93
Attendant Room Blocking Key, D-173
Attendant Three-Way SplitiThree-Way Connection, D-172
Authorization Code Digits, D-78
Authorization Code Digits 1-4, D-76
Authorization Code Number, D-76
Authorization Number, D-l 10
Authorization Prefix Digits, D-52
Automatic Call Distribution Pilot Numbers 1-4, D-309
Automatic Call Distribution/Direct In Line (ACD/DIL) Trunk Pilot Number, D-183
Automatic Circuit Assurance, D-184
Automatic Output Indicator, D-71
Automatic Recall on Hold, D-171
Baud Rate, D-285
Begin Time (Record Code TP), D-242
Begin Time (Record Code WT), D-302
Billing Mode, D-181
Billing Number, D-165
Block Transmission, D-l 92
BLDU Data Link Llnes, D-167
BLDU Key Identities, D-168
Busy Lamp Display Unit Number, D-164
Busy Lamp Display Units, D-172
Bypass Toll Restriction Checks on Final Directory Number, D-111
F =TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I =TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500-1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
C
Call Answer Time (Seconds), D-260
Call Diverts, D-155
Call Hold, D-57
Calf..Park,
D-57
Calf Waiting Level #1, D-31 3
Call Waiting Level #2, D-313
Call Waiting Level #3, D-313
Call Waiting Queue Timeout Control, D-171
Call Waiting Tone Duration (Camp-on), D-59
Calling Number Display, D-295
Calls Waiting 120-IPM Flash Rate, D-309
Calls Waiting 30-IPM Flash Rate, D-309
Camp-on Call Waiting Tone-l, D-50
Camp-on Recorder Announcer, D-305
Camp-on Still Busy, D-56
Camp-on Tone Type, D-50
Card FB-Number, D-28
Card Location and ,Circuit (Record Code LD), D-l 46
Card Location and Circuit (Record Code TC), D-211
Card Slot, D-27
Card Slot Position, D-278
Card Type, D-27
CAS Local Flash, D-314
CAS Secondary Directory Numbers, D-327
Circuit, D-278
Class of Service (Record Code AT), D-163
Class of Service (Record Code LD), D-148
Class of Service (Record Code Tl), D-178
Code Blocked Number Digits 1 to 10, D-75
Code Call Access, D-l 18
Code Call Tone, D-73
F=TL-I~OOOO-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
Code Range, D-254
Code Restriction Table, D-205
Code Restriction Table Number, D-190
Code Type, D-287
Code Type-.. Identifier-(Record Code OD), D-64
Code Type Identifier (Record Code RN), D-287
Code Type identifier Number, D-81
Code Type Number,.D-81
‘-
Coding Conventions, D-21
Combined Line and Recording Trunk Hookswitch Flash Timing, D-275
Conflict Code, D-221
Console Auxiliary Key Application, D-l 73
Controlling Data Control Processor Software, D-l 52
Controlling Integrated Featurephone, D-l 55
CO Line, D-l 19
CO Trunk Group and Member Number, D-213
Customer-Defined Terminal Name, D-270
Customer-Defined Terminal Type Number, D-269
Custom Engineered Data Base, D-19
Data Dump Header Site Identification Characters 1-4, D-71
Data Link Card Location and Circuit (Record Code AT), D-163
Data Link Card Location and Circuit (Record Code LM), D-154
Data Sheet Design, D-21
Data Sheet Preparation, D-21
Data System Security Level, D-69
DDD Burst Tone, D-46
Default Facility Restriction Level on MERS Queue Timeout, D-49
Delay Between Incoming Seizure and Divert to Recorder Announcer, D-309
Delete, D-233
Delete DID Digits, D-183
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S =TL-130500-1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
Delete/Number of Digits to Delete, D-251
Destination Identifier (Record Code CL), D-289
Destination Identifier (Record Code RP), D-229
Destination Type (Record Code CL), D-289
Destination Type (Record Code IR), D-107
...
Destination Type (Record Code RP), D-229
-Device Types, D-260
Dial Call Pickup, D-149 ‘Dial Key Code, D-316
Dictation Access, D-l 18
Directory Number (Record Code AT), D-163
Directory Number (Record Code LM), D-154
Directory Number (Record Code OD), D-64
Directory Number Restriction Bypass Indicator, D-l 10
Disable Facility Restriction Level Authorization Code Report, D-54
Displayable Class of Service (Record Code AU), D-76
Displayable Class of Service (Record Code DC), D-l 15
Displayable Class of Service (Record Code DD), D-117
Divert Destination Identifier, D-150
Divert No Answer Time, D-56
Divert to Same Attendant, D-172
Do Not Disturb (Record Code AL), D-298
Do Not Disturb (Record Code TL), D-293
Double Marking Switch, D-217
Do Not Disturb Remove, D-275
DTMF Receiver Number, D-42
E
Early Unstaff, D-314
Echo, D-272
Electronic Services Processor, D-46
End Time (Record Code TP), D-242
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
o=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500-1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
End Time (Record Code WT), D-302
Enhanced Console, D-l 73
Enhanced Services Processor, D-272
Equipped Status (Record Code DT), D-42
Equipped Status (Record Code MT), D-262
Equipped -Status (Record Code RC), D-31 8
Equipped Sfatus (Record Code TN), D-247
Equipped Status for Common equipment Complex, D-46
Equipped Status for Message Detail Recorder, D-46
Equipped Status for Peripheral Equipment Complex, D-46
Expanded or Conflicting Code Numbers, D-207
Expanded or Conflicting Table Number, D-190
Expensive Route, D-230
Extended Dial Call Pickup Table Numbers, D-139
Facility Restriction Level (Record Code AT), D-164
Facility Restriction Level (Record Code FA), D-78
Facility Restriction Level (Record Code LD), D-149
Facility Restriction Level (Record Code SI), D-233
Facility Restriction Level Authorization Code Number of Digits, D-53
Facility Restriction Level Authorization Code Request When Traveling Class Mark Has Been
Received, D-l 94
Facility Restriction Level Equipped, D-54
FeatureComm III/IV Key Plan, D-390
Features Available, D-l 21
First Digit Time, D-56
First Digit Actions Digit Value: l-0, D-21 8
First Two Digits of Room or Line Directory Number, D-289
First Two Digits of Terminal Digits, D-257
Five-Digit Network Dialing Plan, D-53
Force Administration Data System Auto Dump Port, D-272
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
ODeration
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System Contiguration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMPUsers
Guide
TL-130400-1001
Force Administration Data System Call Delay Time, D-314
From PEC, D-218
Function (CAWACD), D-31 1
Function Access Digits Allowed, D-280
Function Code (Record Code CT), D-269
...
Function Code (Record Code KS), D-279
Functions Allowed (Record Code KD), D-278
Functions Allowed (Record Code MK), D-282
Gateway Number/Access Code, D-l 10
Gateway Number/Directory Number, D-l 10
General, D-l 9
Group (Record Code FR), D-25
Group (Record Code KD), D-278
Group Number, D-135
Group Speed Calling Entry Number, D-137
Group Speed Calling List Entries, D-135
Group Speed Calling Number (Digits), D-137
Guaranteed Access (Record Code RC), D-318
Guaranteed Access (Record Code TC), D-214
Hexadecimal Equivalent of the Bit Strings for the Function (Bytes l-8), D-269
Hundreds Group, D-105
Hunt Group Camp-on Rescan Rate, D-57
Hunt Group Pilot Number (Record Code HG), D-131
Hunt Group Pilot Number (Record Code MH), D-133
Hunt Group Type, D-131
Hunt Sequence Number, D-133
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
A=TL-100000-1001
Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
Ignore Reverse Battery Check, D-192
Incoming Signal, D-212
Incoming Trunk Group Default Facility Restriction Level, D-185
__
Incoming . Trunk
Group Screening Indicator, D-265
.
Index, D-250
Index (Attendant Console Number), D-l 63
Index/Tone Detector Number, D-247
Information Tone Delay, D-58
Input Timeout (Record Code MT), D-262
Input Timeout (Record Code TT), D-272
Instructions (FeatureComm, Key Plan), D-389
Instructions (Multi-Line FeatureComm Feature Button Assignments), D-392
Instructions (Single Line FeatureComm Feature Button Assignments), D-396
Instrument/Line Type, D-l 45
Integrated Featurephone Usage Forms, D-389
Integrating Voice Messaging System Waiting Tone Duration, D-62
Integrating Voice Messaging System Trunk Identifier, D-185
Intercept Destination, D-197
Intercept Routing Number, D-107
intercom Group, D-l 48
Interdigital Time, D-56
International Direct Distant Dialing Access, D-l 19
KEDU Number (Record Code AL), D-297
KEDU Number (Record Code KD), D-278
KEDU Number (Record Code KS), D-279
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I-TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
L
Length of Study Interval, D-71
Like Numbering Plan Area Code, D-62
Limited ACD Recorder-Announcer Playback Timing Value, D-62
Line Card Location and Circuit, D-145
....
Line Directory Number, D-145
Line Divert Condition, D-l 42
Line Number, -D&306
‘-
Line Number of Appearance, D-159
Line Number of Integrated Featurephone, D-159
Line Status, D-146
Line Type, D-147
Link Card Location, D-306
Listed Directory Number Prefix Index, D-233
Long Call Interval, D-185
Maid Status, D-294
Maintenance Access, D-l 18
Master KEDU Number, D-282
Master KEDU Security Codes Clear Memory, D-282
Maximum Camp-on Call Waiting, D-50
Maximum Hookswitch Flash, D-59
Meet-Me Conference, D-l 18
Member Directory Number, D-l 33
Member Number, D-21 1
MERS 0 + or - Toll Restriction, D-19
MERS Executive Bypass, D-l 19
MERS List Queue Off-Hook Timeout, D-61
MERS List Queue On-Hook Timeout, D-61
MERS Off Network, D-l 18
MERS On Network, D-l 19
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
II =TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500.1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
MERS Queue Allow, D-194
MERS Routing List Number, D-228
MERS Second Dial Tone, D-53
MERS Specialized Common Carrier Identification Number, D-248
Message., (Record Code SM), D-31 9
Message (Record Code SP), D-320
Message Detail Recorder Device (Record Code Sl), D-263
Message Detail Recorder Device (Record Code S2), D-265
Message Detail Recorder Work Group (Record Code MS), D-248
Message Detail Recorder Work Group Numbers (Record Code LD), D-151
Message Detail Recorder Work Group Number (Record Code Sl), D-263
Message Meter (Record Code AL), D-297
Message Meter (Record Code TL), D-292
Message Meter Peg Timing Interval, D-275
Message Meter Pegs Indicator, D-192
Message Meter Pegs on Answer, D-193
Message Meter Unit, D-295
Message Number, D-320
Message Waiting (Record Code AL), D-299
Message Waiting (Record Code TL), D-293
Minimum Call Duration, D-261
Minimum Hookswitch Flash, D-59
Missing DID Digits, D-182
Monitor Warning Tone, D-311
Most Economical Route Selection (MERS), D-191
Most Economical Route Selection 1 + Dialing, D-50
Most Economical Route Selection Numbering Plan Area Number, D-221
Most Economical Route Selection Specialized Common Carrier Identification Number, D-230
Most Economical Route Selection Time Change, D-164
Multi-Line FeatureComm III/IV Feature Button Assignments, D-394
Music or Tone, D-31 1
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D-TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500-1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
Music-on-Hold Circuit, D-43
Mutual Hold Enable, D-54
Nailed Connection Identification Number, D-21 6
....
Network Control Center Output Scan Time Interval, D-62
Network Control Center Port Usage, D-47
New Code Type; D-289 .
New Code Type Identifier, D-289
New Station Number, D-289
Night Answer 1 (Record Code CA), D-170
Night Answer 1 (Record Code TC), D-214
Night Answer 2 (Record Code CA), D-170
Night Answer 2 (Record Code TC), D-214
Night Answer Control, D-170
Night Divert Destination Identifier, D-31 1
Night Divert Destination Type, D-311
Night/Day Mode, D-31 1
No Dial Alarm, D-276
Number of Active Attendant Loops, D-52
Number of Code Call Digits, D-73
Number of Digits Outpulsed (Record Code NT), D-255
Number of Digits Outpulsed (Record Code TD), D-257
Number of Directory Numbers per Hundreds Group, D-105
Number of Message Pegs on Trunk Answer, D-276
Number Plan Area Code Range, D-240
Numbering Ptan Area, D-221
N-Displayable Class of Service, D-121
0
Office Code Number, D-45
Office Identification Digits, D-261
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500-1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
Office Type Digits, D-261
Old Access Code, D-141
Old Station Number, D-141
On-NeffNPA Code (Record Code TD), D-258
On-Net/NPA Code (Record Code TR), D-236
Outgoing Signal, D-21 3
Outgoing Trunk Group Facility Restriction Level Outpulsed, D-185
Outgoing Trunk Group Facility Restriction Level to Access, D-185
Outgoing Trunk Group Screening Indicator, D-265
Outpulse Interdigital Time Factor, D-57
Outpulsing Delay, D-l 93
Output Format, D-261
Output the Second Line of the Call Record to MDR Port 0, D-261
Overflow to Universal Night Answer, D-171
P
PAD Class, D-190
Paging Access, D-l 18
Paper Form, D-285
Parity, D-285
Parity Inhibit, D-285
Pause (Record Code MO), D-250
Pause (Record Code SI), D-232
Pickup Group Numbers, D-139
Pilot Number of Agent Group, D-313
Play Recorder Announcer #l Before Routing to Agent Group, D-312
Polling Command Site Identification, D-71
Port Number, D-262
Prefix (Record Code MO), D-251
Prefix (Record Code SI), D-232
Prefix Digits (Dl -DlO), D-249
Prefix Digits (Dl -D30), D-246
F=TL-130000-1001
FeatWeS
O=TL-130100-1001
operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
DataBase
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
Prefix Index (Record Code LP), D-249
Prefix Index (Record Code MO), D-251
Prefix Index (Record Code PC), D-246
Prefix Index (Record Code SI), D-233
Pre-Engineered Data Base, D-20
....
Primary Directory Numbers, D-327
Primary Identifier, D-27
Print on Do Not-Disturb, ‘D-275
Print on Wake Up, D-275
Print on Ward Control by Attendant of DND, D-275
Print on Ward Control by System on DND, D-276
Printer, D-272
Printer Numbers, D-285
Private Network/N PA Code, D-255
Progressive Conferences, D-l 18
Property Management System, D-278
Recall on Hold, D-57
Receive Property Management System Messages, D-l 64
Recent Change Save Data Base Security Level, D-53
Record Code AC: Access Code Translation, D-80
Record Code AD: Agent Position, D-306
Record Code AF: Limited Automatic Call Distribution Feature, D-308
Record Code AG: Agent Group, D-310
Record Code AL: Audit Record Control, D-296
Record Code AP: Data System Asynchronous Port, D-340
Record Code AQ: Data System Asynchronous Port Set/Read List, D-359
Record Code AS: Allowable Service Codes, D-208
Record Code AT: Attendant Console, D-162
Record Code AU: Remote Access Authorization Code, D-75
Record Code BD: Busy Lamp Display Unit, D-166
F=TL-130000-1001
FeatIlK
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500-1001
Systetn
A=TL-100000-1001
Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
Record Code BK: Busy Lamp Key, D-168
Record Code Cl : Data System Call Processing - Part 1, D-379
Record Code C2: Data System Call Processing - Part 2, D-383
Record Code CA: Common Attendant, D-169
RecordCode CB: Code Blocked Numbers, D-74
....
Record Code CD: Code Call, D-72
Record Code CF: CAS Branch Features, D-304
Record Code CH: Change Feature by Access Code, D-140
Record Code CL: Class of Call-Controlled Routing, D-288
Record Code CN: Common Attendant Directory Numbers, D-174
Record Code CP: Data System Common Port, D-334
Record Code CR: Code Restriction Numbers, D-203
Record Code CT: Customer-Defined Terminal, D-268
Record Code DA:- Trunk Group Digit Absorption, D-217
Record Code DC: Displayable Class of Service, D-l 14
Record Code DD: Displayable Class of Service, D-l 16
Record Code DF: CPG Default, D-142
Record Code DK: Repertory Dial Key Code, D-315
Record Code DT: DTMF,Receiver, D-42
Record Code EC: Expanded or Conflicting Code Check Tables, D-206
Record Code ED: Extended Dial Call Pickup Numbers, D-138
Record Code FA: Facility Restriction Level Authorization Code, D-77
Record Code FR: Frame Image Card, D-25
Record Code GC: Group Speed Calling, D-134
Record Code GS: Group Speed Calling List Numbers, D-136
Record Code HD: Hundreds Groups, D-104
Record Code HG: Hunt Group, D-130
Record Code HM: Health Care/Motel Miscellaneous, D-274
Record Code I1 : International Country Code, D-l 12
Record Code IR: Intercept Routing Numbers, D-106
Record Code KD: Key Entry Display Unit Assignment, D-277
Record Code KS: Key Entry Display Unit Special Function Access, D-279
F=TL-1300001001
FeatWeS
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
lnstallatlon
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S-TL-130500-1001
System Configuration
A-TL-100000-1001
ADMP
UsersGuide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
Record Code LA: Line Appearances, D-158
Record Code LD: Line Data, D-144
Record Code LI: Line Identities, D-160
Record Code LM: Line Miscelianeous, D-153
Record Code*.LP:
Prefix Code Digits for Listed Directory Numbers and Other
Applications, D-250
Record Code MD: Message Detail Recorder, D-260
Record C0de.M.H: Hunt.Group Members, D-132
Record Code MK: Master Key Entry Display Unit, D-281
Record Code MO: MERS On-Net Station Numbers and Sending Instruction Values, D-250
Record Code MR: Most Economical Route Selection Six-Digit Translated NPA and On-Net
Code, D-220
Record Code MS: Specialized Common Carrier Authorization Codes, D-248
Record Code MT: Message Detail Recorder Port, D-266
Record Code NA: Nailed Trunk Connection, D-215
Record Code NC: N-Displayable Class of Service, D-120
Record Code NR: Most Economical Route Selection Three-Digit Translated
NPA, D-240
Record Code NT: Private Network Translation, D-254
Record Code OC: Office Features Circuits, D-43
Record Code OD: Other Directory Numbers, D-63
Record Code OE: Office Equipment, D-44
Record Code OF: Office Features, D-48
Record Code OT: Office Timeout Values, D-55
Record Code OV: Office Timing Values, D-60
Record Code Pl: Data System Global Parameter - Part 1, D-372
Record Code P2: Data System Global Parameter - Part 2, D-375
Record Code PC: Prefix Code Digits, D-245
Record Code PD: Printer Assignment, D-284
Record Code PN: Predetermined Night Answer Pilot Numbers, D-65
Record Code PZ: Paging Zones, D-66
Record Code RA: Recorder Announcer, D-323
Record Code RC: Release Link Trunk Circuit, D-317
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
M =TL-130200-1001
Operation
Maintenance
I
=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
Record Code RN: Room Number First Digit Translation, D-286
Record Code RP: Most Economical Route Selection Routing List, D-227
Record Code RT: Data System Routing, D-330
Record Code Sl: Message Detail Recorder Screening Option 1, D-263
Record-Code S2: Message Detail Recorder Screening Option 2, D-264
Record Code SA: Specialized Common Carrier, D-109
Record Code SD: CAS Secondary Directory Numbers, D-326
Record Code SI: Most Economical Route Selection Sending Instruction, D-231
Record Code SL: User Security Level Password (ASCII), D-68
Record Code SM: Source Messages, D-319
Record Code SP: Special Messages, D-320
Record Code SR: Data System Symbolic Replacement Word/String, D-385
Record Code ST: Service Code MERS Translation , D-243
Record Code Tl : Trunk Group Part 1, D-176
Record Code T2: Trunk Group Part 2, D-187
Record Code TC: Trunk Circuit, D-210
Record Code TD: Private Network Dl/D2, D-256
Record Code TF: Traffic Data Facilities, D-70
Record Code TL: Transaction Record Control, D-290
Record Code TM: Supervisor Talk/Monitor Repertory Dial Key Code, D-321
Record Code TN: Tone Detector, D-247
Record Code TP: Most Economical Route Selection Time Period, D-242
Record Code TR: Most Economical Route Selection Numbering Plan Area/ABC
Translation, D-235
Record Code TT: Serial Device, D-271
Record Code WT: Ward Control, D-301
Record Code XP: Data System X.25 Port, D-366
Recorded Announcement, D-56
Recorder Announcer #l (Record Code AG), D-312
Recorder Announcer #l (Record Code RA), D-324
Recorder Announcer #2 (Record Code AG), D-313
Recorder Announcer #2 (Record Code RA), D-324
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S =TL-130500-1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
Recorder Announcer #3 (Record Code AG), D-313
Recorder Announcer #3 (Record Code RA), D-325
Recorder Announcer Return Answer Back, D-183
References, D-401
Release Link-Trunk Automatic Night Answer, D-172
Release Link Trunk Busy Guard, D-58
Release Link Trunk Directory Test Number, D-318
Release Link Trunk Displayable Class of Service, D-305
Release Link Trunk Number, D-318
Release Link Trunk N-Displayable Class of Service, D-305
Release Link Trunk Recall Camp-on, D-58
Release Link Trunk Recall on No Answer, D-58
Release Link Trunk Recall Silent Hold, D-58
Release Link Trunk Type, D-31 8
Release Link Trunks Access, D-l 19
Release Link Trunks Busy, Divert to Recorder Announcer, D-305
Remote Access and Authorization Code (Record Code LD), D-151
Remote Access and Authorization Code (Record Code T2), D-193
Remote Access Directory Number Class-of-Service Authorization Code, D-51
Remove Home Numbering Plan Area From Ten-Digit Call Within Home Numbering
Plan Area, D-53
Repeat Code Call, D-73
Repeat Dial Set Number, D-316
Repeat Recorder Announcer #2, D-313
Repertory Dial Pause Time, D-313
Repertory Dial Set, D-313
Reserved (Record Code LM), D-157
Reserved (Record Code MD), D-261
Reserved (Record Code OF), D-52
Reserved (Record Code Tl), D-186
Restriction and Bypass Indicator Checks, D-137
Restriction Indicator, D-246
F =TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
operation
M
=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S=TL-130500-1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
Return Answer on Alternate Recorder Announcer #1 , D-325
Return Answer on Alternate Recorder Announcer #2, D-325
Return Answer on Recorder Announcer #l, D-325
Return Answer on Recorder Announcer #2, D-325
Return Answer on Recorder Announcer #3, D-325
Ringing Rate, D-45
Room Number First Digit, D-287
Room Restriction (Record Code AL), D-299
Room Restriction (Record Code TL), D-293
Room Restriction on Occupancy Status Change, D-276
Room Status (Record Code AL), D-298
Room Status (Record Code TL), D-292
Route to Release Link Trunk, D-183
Routing List Number (Record Code NT), D-255
Routing List Number (Record Code ST), D-244
S3D Option, D-46
SCC Number, D-l 10
Screening Indicator, D-263
Second Chime, D-173
Second Plus Digits Actions Digit Value: l-0, D-218
Second Toll Access, D-189
Secondary Identifier, D-27
Security Lock/Security Lock Timeout (Record Code MT), D-262
Security Lock Timeout (Record Code TT), D-272
Select Order (Record Code RP), D-228
Select Order (Record Code SI), D-232
Select Trunk Group (Record Code NT), D-255
Select Trunk Group (Record Code TD), D-257
Selected Audit Condition, D-l 05
Sender Timeout Value, D-62
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
l=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
s=n-130500~1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
Sending instruction List Number (Record Code NT), D-255
Sending Instruction List Number (Record Code SI), D-232
Sending Instruction List Number (Record Code ST), D-244
Sending Instruction Usage, D-251
Serial Device, D-277
...
Service Code, D-244
Service Code Prefixing, D-209
Set Number, D-316
‘-
Seven- and Ten-Digit Check for Code Blocking, D-54
Short Cable, D-46
Short Call Interval, D-184
Short Call Reset Interval, D-184
Short Call Threshold, D-l 84
Signal Mode, D-154
Single Line FeatureComm III/IV Feature Button Assignments, D-298
Single Marking Switch, D-218
Skip/Route Usage Allowed, D-232
Source Group, D-214
Source Group Number, D-319
Specialized Common Carrier Authorization Code, D-248
Special Message Number to Display on Agent Position Ll Display When PABX Line
Accesses the Agent Group, D-52
Speed Call Outpulsing Delay, D-61
Speed Calling, D-149
Speed Calling Delay Long, D-61
Speed Calling Delay Short, D-61
Station Access, D-l 18
Station Code, D-250
Status (Record Code AT), D-163
Status (Record Code FR), D-29
Stop Bits, D-285
Suggested Preparation Order, D-23
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
M =TL-130200-1001
Operation
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
Supervisor Number, D-307
Supervisor Silent Monitor, D-307
Supervisor’s Dial Key Code, D-322
Supervisor’s Silent Monitor Dial Key Code, D-322
Supervisory Position, D-306
Switch Dire& Line, D-117
System Configuration, -D-45
.
System’s System Version Release, D-47
System Time Change, D-164
T
Table Number, D-207
Terminal Mode, D-272
Terminal Type, D-272
Terminate to Agent, D-314
Tertiary Identifier, D-27
Three-Way Conference or One-Way Consultation, D-45
Tick Tone Provided, D-45
Tie Trunk Calling Number, D-182
Time Between Access and Authorization Number, D-l 10
Time Between Authorization Number and Digits, D-l 11
Time Between Cycles, D-73
Time Between Digits, D-73
Time Between Recorder Announcer #l and Recorder Announcer #2, D-313
Time Between Repeats of Recorder Announcer #2, D-313
Time Between Tones, D-73
Time Between Usage Scans, D-71
Time Display, D-52
Time in Work State, D-314
Time on Tone. D-73
F=TL-130000-1001
FeatlltIX
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
h4=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I-TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
Time Period 0 (Record Code NR), D-240
Time Period 0 (Record Code TR), D-237
Time Period 1 (Record Code NR), D-240
Time Period 1 (Record Code TR), D-237
Time
-.. Period 2 (Record Code NR), D-241
Time Period 2 (Record Code TR), D-238
Time-Period 3 (Record Code NR), D-241
Time Period 3 (Record Code TR), D-238
Time Period Number (Record Code TP), D-242
Time Period Number (Record Code WT), D-302
Toll Access, D-l 17
Toll Access Code Digits, D-189
Tone Type After Recorder Announcer, D-309
Transfer Divert Back Method on Busy or No Answer, D-45
Translation Entry Number, D-244
Translation Type (Record Code NT), D-254
Translation Type (Record Code TD), D-257
Transmission Plan, D-45
Transmission Rate (Record Code MT), D-262
Transmission Rate (Record Code TT), D-272
Traveling Class Mark Provided, D-49
Trunk Application, D-l 76
Trunk Call Queuing (Record Code OF), D-51
Trunk Call Queuing (Record Code T2), D-193
Trunk Call Queuing Time Before Retry, D-59
Trunk Direction, D-179
Trunk Disconnect Supervision, D-l 81
Trunk Group, D-218
Trunk Group Access, D-l 15
Trunk Group Number (Record Code AS), D-209
Trunk Group Number (Record Code S2), D-265
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
M =TL-130200-1001
Operation
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
Trunk Group Number (Record Code Tl), D-177
Trunk Group Number (Record Code T2), D-188
Trunk Group Number (Record Code TC), D-211
Trunk Homing Selection, D-184
Trunk Incoming Signal, D-l 83
Trunk Momentarily Open Incoming, D-l 93
Trunk Momentarily Open Outgoing,
D-193
..
Trunk Number, D-21i
Trunk Outgoing Signal, D-180
Trunk State, D-212
Trunk Toll Restriction, D-188
Trunk Transfer Allowed, D-l 81
Trunk Type, D-212
Type, D-64
User Security Password Characters: 1-4, D-69
Valid IDDD Country Code Digits l-3, D-l 12
Valid Service Code Values of N Allowable, D-209
Voice Security Level Number, D-69
W
Wake Up (Record Code AL), D-300
Wake Up (Record Code TL), D-294
Wake-Up Interval, D-276
Ward Control, D-164
Ward Number (Record Code LM), D-157
Ward Number (Record Code WT), D-302
Ward Time Period Control, D-164
Word Length in Bits, D-285
F=TL-130000-1001
FeattIreS
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
DataBase
S=TL-130500-1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130400-1001
INDEX
X
X.1 21 Address(ing), D-332
Z
__
Z&e 0 Paging Areas: 3-0, D-67
Zone _1, D-67
Zone 2, D-67
..
Zone 3, D-67
Zone 4, D-67
Zone 5, D-67
Zone 6, D-67
Zone 7, D-67
Zone 8, D-67
Zone 9, D-67
Zone Digit, D-67
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
operation
M =TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I =TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S-TL-130500-1001
A=TL-100000-1001
System Configuration ADMP Users Guide
TL-130200-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAPAGE
GRAPH TOPIC
M-13
M-13
M-lj
M-13
M-14
M-14
M-14
M-15
M-15
M-15
M-15
M-17
M-20
M-20
M-20
1.0 _
1.1
1 .l.l
1 .1.2
1.1.3
M-23
M-23
M-23
M-24
M-28
M-36
M-43
M-44
M-45
M-50
M-55
M-57
M-57
M-59
2.0
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.4
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.1 .l
2.2.1.2
5210
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
GENERAL
System Software and Maintenance Applications
Maintenance Terminals
Security Levels
Security Codes
System Diagnostics
Self-Testing Diagnostics
Manual Hardware Testing
Reference Documents
System Configuration
Frame image
Card List
Power Restrictions
Handling Cards
Card Removal and Replacement
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS AND DISPLAYS
Maintenance Displays
System Status
Fault Log Request Commands
Software Identity Calculations (Lines)
TTY Response Log Display
Automatic Circuit Assurance Log Request Commands
Traffic Data Polling Command
Time of Day/Traffic Study Command
Display Command
Maintenance Command
Force In Service Out of Service Command
Featurephones
Line Cards with Featurephones
8187
M-l
TL-130200-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAPAGE
GRAPH TOPIC
M-59
2.2.1.3 Trunks
M-60
2.2.1.4
Attendant and Busy Lamp Display Unit
M-60
2.2. t.5
Agent Instruments
M-61
2.2.1.6
Force
M-63
2.2.1.7
Downloading
M-65
2.2.1.8
Downloading VCIP, DVCIP, and VPLC Cards
M-66
2.2.1.9
Downloading, ADMP, UCB (DCP), and NIC Card
M-66
2.2.1.10 Bulk Downloading Commands
M-68
2.2.2
Memory Watch Command
M-69
2.2.3
PUT Command Entry
M-72
2.2.4
Test Command (Featurephone)
M-73
2.2.5
Unlock Command
M-73
2.3
Memory Access Commands
M-73
2.3.1
General Read and Data General Read Commands
M-77
2.3.2
General Write Command
M-78
2.3.3
Bulk Input Command
M-79
2.3.4
Hardware Write Command
M-79
2.4
Maintenance Request Command
M-80
2.4.1
Alarm Command Codes
M-81
2.4.2
MR Data Base for Peripheral Circuits
M-83
2.4.3
Disk Backup of Room Status
M-85
3.0
ON-LINE
M-85
3.1
Access On-Line Maintenance
M-87
3.2
Maintenance Options
M-88
3.2.1
System Status Display
M-89
3.2.2
Touch Call Receiver Test
M-90
3.2.3
Network Test
M-91
3.2.4
Traffic Data Menu Options Menu
M-91
3.2.4.1
Current Collection Parameter Settings
M-2
.
Download
Featurephones
MAINTENANCE
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA-
-.
PAGE
GRAPH TOPIC
M-92
3.2.4.2
Traffic Meters Menu
M-96
3.2.4.3
Return to Maintenance Options
M-97-
3.2.5
Memory Test Results
M-98
3.2.6
Trunk Sequence State Display
M-98
3.2.7
Touch Call Receiver Status
M-99
3.2.8
Data Switch Device Status Display
M-99
3.2.8.1
Packet Line Cards Status
M-l 00
3.2.8.2
Remote Processors Status
M-l 90
3.2.9
Mass Storage Utility Menu
M-l 01
3.2.9.1
Disk Backup Option
M-l 02
3.2.9.2
Device Catalog Display Option
M-l 07
4.0
SYSTEM
M-l 07
4.1
Preventive
M-l 07
4.2
System Voltage Checks
M-l 07
4.3
System Operation Checks
M-l 07
4.4
Spare Cards
M-l 07
4.5
Quick Reference Chart
M-l 08
4.6
Attendant Console Code Display Fault
M-l 55
5.0
TROUBLESHOOTING
M-l 55
5.1
Fault Isolation
M-155
5.2
Fault Code Procedures and Flowcharts
M-l 55
5.2.1
Attendant Console
M-l 60
5.2.2
BLDU Unit Troubleshooting Procedure
M-l 62
5.3
Featurephone Self-Test Diagnostics
M-l 76
5.4
Tl -Type Trunk Maintenance
M-l 77
5.5
Channel Unit Removal
M-l 78
5.6
Alarms
M-l 79
5.7
Testing
5210
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL
PRINCIPLES
Maintenance
8/87
M-3
TL-130200-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAT
PAGE O GRAPH
P
I
C
M-180 5.8
71.Trunk Trouble
M-21 1
6.0-
CALL TRACING
M-216
6 . 1
Memory Dumps
M-216
6.2
Memory Dump Contents
M-217
6.3
Call Tracing Examples
M-21 7
6.3.1
Two-Party Connection
M-21 7
6.3.2
Three-Party Connection
M-21 8
6.3.3
Connection to a TCR
M-21 8
M-21 9
M-230
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.4
Dedicated Time Slot
Connection Between Files
Digit Store
M-236
6.5
Call Store
M-247
7.0
PD-200
M-248
7.1
Data System Administrative and Maintenance Features
M-248
7.2
Accounting
M-249
7.3
Event Reports
M-249
7.4
Maintenance Commands and Displays
M-250
7.5
Data System Troubleshooting
M-253
7.6
PD-200 Data System Devices
M-254
7.7
Display Software Version Command
M-255
7.8
Force In Service/Out of Service Command
M-255
7.8.1
Featurephones
M-256
7.8.2
Line Cards with Featurephones
M-256
7.8.3
Trunks
M-258
7.9
Load Commands
M-261
7.9.1
Load Command Responses
M-263
7.10
PD-200 Maintenance Tools and Fault Isolation
M-263
7.10.1
Maintenance Tools
M-4
MAINTENANCE
Reports
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAPAGE
GRAPH TOPIC
M-277
7.10,2
Fault Resolution
M-281
8.0
RECENT
M-281
8.1 L
Access Recent Change
M-282
8.2
CAS Main/ACD Supervisor Options
M-284
8.2.1
CAS Main/ACD Help
M-285
8.2.2
FADS, CAS MainlACD Transactions
M-287
8.3
FADS Recent Change
M-287
8.4
FADS Display Options Menu
M-288
8.5
FADS Display Transactions
M-288
8.51
Real-Time Agent Status Display
M-289
8.5.2
Real-Time System Status Display
M-289
8.5.3
System Status Report
M-291
8.5.4
CASACD
M-293
8.5.5
Agent Status Report
M-294
8.5.6
Trend Report
M-295
8.5.7
CAS MAINIACD
M-295
8.5.8
FADS Control Data Menu
M-296
8.6
FADS Control Transactions
M-296
8.6.1
Display All FADS Options
M-296
8.6.2
Change FADS Periodic Data Collection Period
M-297
8.6.3
Change FADS Automatic Dump Period
M-297
8.6.4
Change the FADS Automatic Dump Selections
M-298
8.6.5
Change FADS Data Collection Start Time
M-298
8.6.6
Initiate a Trend Report
M-299
8.6.7
Cancel a Trend Report
M-299
8.6.8
CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent Change
M-300
8.7
Agent Data Displays and Changes
M-300
8.7.1
Agent Position Status Display
M-302
8.7.2
Agent Group Status Display
. .
5210
CHANGE
Source Group Report
8187
Source
M-5
TL-130200-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
M-303
M-304
M-304
M-305
M-305
M-306
M-306
M-306
M-307
M-307
M-308
M-309
M-309
M-31 0
M-31 0
M-311
M-31 1
M-31 2
M-313
M-313
M-31 3
M-314
M-315
M-31 5
M-31 6
M-31 6
M-317
M-31 7
M-31 8
M-318
M-6
PARAGRAPH TOPIC
8.7.3
Night Destination of All Agent Groups
3.7.4
Change the Group/Supervisor of an Agent Position
8.7.5
Change the State of an Agent Position
8.7.6
Change Night Destination of an Agent Group
8.7.7
Add a CAS Main/ACD Agent Group
8.7.8
Delete a CAS Main/ACD
8.7.9
Display/change FADS Delay Timing
8.7.10
CAS Main/ACD Trunk Data Menu
8.8
CAS Main/ACD Trunk Data Transactions
8.8.1
Display Trunks by Trunk Number
8.8.2
Display CAS Main/ACD Trunks by Agent Group Number
8.8.3
Display Trunks with a Specific Source Group
8.8.4
Change the State of a CAS Main/ACD Trunk
8.8.5
Change the Source Group of a Trunk
8.8.6
Change the Primary Destination of a Trunk Group
8.9
Source Message Data Menu
8.9.1
Source Message Display
8.9.2
Change a Source Message
8.10
Call Waiting Data Menu Access
_ 8.10.1 Call Waiting Data Menu
8.10.2
Display R/A Trunk Number and State
8.10.3 Agent Group Delay Routing Display
8.10.4 Agent Group Call Waiting Levels
8.10.5 Change Delay Routing of an Agent Group
8.10.6 Change First Recorded Announcement
8.10.7 Change Second Recorded Announcement
8.10.8
Change Recorded Announcement Delay or Repetition Timing
8.10.9 Change Alternate Destination of an Agent Group
8.10.10 Change Call Waiting Indicator Levels
8.11
CAS Main/ACD Data Menu Instrument Control
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAPAGE
GRAPH TOPIC
M-31 9
8.11.1.
Display a Repertory Dial key Set
M-31-9
8.11.2
Change a Repertory Dial Key Set
M-320
8.12
Day/Night Mode Data Menu
M-321
8.12.1.
Display-Day/Night Mode (86)
M-321
8.12.2
Change Day/Night Mode (87)
M-321
8.13
Supervisor Message Handler
M-322
48.13.1
Supervisor Message Options Menu (85)
M-322
8.13.2
Send a Special Message (49)
M-323
8.13.3
Send a Unique Message (97)
M-323
8.13.4
Special Message Display (84)
M-324
8.13.5
Change Special Message (88)
M-324
8.14
Manual Changes and Recent Change Summary (Voice Configuration)
M-333
8.15
Typical Recent Change Sequences
M-337
9.0
OFF-LINE
M-337
9.1
Physical Locations
M-337
9.2
Test Options Menu
M-338
9.3
Loading the Program
M-339
9.4
Manual Testing
M-340
9.5
Automatic Testing
M-341
9.6
Fast Test Option
M-341
9.7
Retest Option
M-341
9.8
System Memory Test
M-343
9.8.1
System Memory Testing Procedures
M-344
9.8.2
Test Results
M-345
9.9
Channel Memory Test
M-345
9.9.1
Channel Memory Testing Procedures
M-346
9.9.2
Test Results
M-346
9.10
Paging Card Test
M-346
9.10.1
Paging Card Testing Procedures
5210
DIAGNOSTICS
8187
M-7
TL-130200-1001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAPAGE
GRAPH TOPIC
M-347
9.10.2
M-347
9.11
Test
_ _ Results
Network Test
M-347
9.i 1 .l
Network Testing Procedures
M-347
9.1 l-.2
Test Results ._
M-349
9.11.3
M-349
9.12
Disk Device Tests
M-349
9.12.1
Disk Device Testing Procedures
M-350
9.12.2
Repeat FMS Test
M-351
9.12.3
Test Device #O
M-353
9.12.4
Test Device #2
M-354
9.12.5
Return to Main Menu
M-354
9.13
Serial Device Controller Test
M-355
9.13.1
Serial Device Controller Testing Procedures
M-355
9.13.2
Fault Correction
M-355
9.14
Tone Test
M-356
9.14.1
Tone Test Testing Procedures
M-356
9.14.2
Test Results
M-359
9.14.3
Fault Correction
M-359
9.15
Attendant Interface Card
M-360
9.15.1
Attendant Interface Card Test Testing Procedures
M-360
9.15.2
Test Results
M-361
9.15.3
Fault Correction
M-361
9.16
Line/Trunk Test
M-362
9.16.1
Line/Trunk Test Testing Procedures
M-363
9.16.2
Test Results
M-364
9.16.3
Fault Correction
M-365
9.17
Touch Calling Receiver Test
M-365
9.17.1
Automatic Testing Procedures
M-365
9.17.2
Automatic Test Results
M-366
9.17.3
Manual Testing Procedures
M-8
Fault correction
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
LIST OF FIG
FIGURE
PAGE
M-16
..
NUMBER
1.1
M-25 - 2.1
‘:
TOPIC
Frame Image Card Locations for a Fully Configured System
Fault Reporting Format on TTY
Fault Code Quick Reference Guide
Response Reporting Format on TTY
M-27
M-36
2.2
2.3
M-37
M-46
2.4
2.5
Response Code Quick Reference Guide
Traffic Register Layout
M-156
5.1
M-157
M-159
5.2
5.3
5.4
Attendant Console and Indicator Troubleshooting Flowchart
Attendant Console Troubleshooting Flowchart
M-165
M-168
M-169
M-171
M-174
M-175
M-181
M-188
M-194
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
M-204
M-206
5.13
5.14
M-21 1
M-215
M-228
M-230
M-237
M-240
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
M-263 7.1
M-264 7.2
M-265 7.3
SVR 5210
Attendant Console Operation Troubleshooting Flowchart
Featurephone Troubleshooting Flowchart
Featurephone Control and Indicator Troubleshooting Flowchart
Station DTMF Troubleshooting Flowchart
Ringing Operation Troubleshooting Flowchart
Analog Line Operation Troubleshooting Flowchart
Trunk Operation Troubleshooting Flowchart
Tl -Type Trunk Loss of Supe’rvision Troubleshooting Flowchart
Tl -Type Trunk Loss of Transmission Troubleshooting Flowchart
Tl -Type Trunk Loss of Frame Synchronization Troubleshooting Flowchart
Tl -Type Trunk Loss of Network Synchronization Troubleshooting Flowchart
System Loading Troubleshooting Flowchart
Time Switch Network Memories
Time-Switch Memory Setup (Channel 16)
Call State Definitions
Digit Store Layout
Call Store Layout
Sense and Control Address Words
Visual Fault Indicator - VPLC (INS/OOS LED)
Visual Fault Indicator - ADMP-A (lNS/OOS LED and RESET BUTTON)
Visual Fault Indicator - UCB (DCP) (lNS/OOS LED and RESET BUTTON)
7187
M-9
TL-130200-1001
M-266 7.4
M-267 7.5
M-10
Visual Lamp Indicators and Switches - Asynchronous Packet Manager
Visual Lamp Indicators and Switches - Synchronous Packet Manager
7187
SVR 5210
TL-130200-1001
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE
PAGE
M-17
...
M-21.
NUMBER
1.1
=:
TOPIC
OMNI SI C a r d s
1.2
Power Restriction Status
M-26
2.1
Attendant Console Fault Log Decoding Summary
M-48
2.2
Traffic Data Commands Input and Output Formats
M-51
2.3
Display Command Input and Output Format
M-53
2.4
CEC Line State Codes
M-54
2.5
CEC Trunk State Codes
M-63
2.6
Download Commands for Featurephones
M-76
2.7
Status of the GR or DGR Command
M-81
2.8
Circuit-Type Codes for Maintenance Busy Functions
FMS Status Code and Explanation
M-105
3.1
M-160
5.1
BLDU Station 100’s Group Key Test
M-160
5.2
BLDU LCDs and LEDs Test
M-160
5.3
BLDU
M-162
5.4
Featurephone Self Test Diagnostics
M-176
5.5
Sense and Control Words for Digital Trunks
M-177
5.6
Trunk to Digital Span: Channel Correlation
M-212
6.1
Self-Diagnostics
Memory Cross Reference Fujitsu GTE OMNI SI: Get Started File Channel
M-216 6.2
Memory Dump General Read Commands
M-220 6.3
Channel Memory Get Started File
M-220 6.4
Channel Memory Expansion File
M-221 6.5
Control Memory A
M-222 6.6
Control Memory B
M-223 6.7
Pad Memory
SVR 5210
7187
M-l 1
TL-130200-1001
M-226
6.8
M-227
6.9
M-244 ‘6.10
Get Started File
Expansion File
Call-Type Codes
Port-Type Codes
CEC Trunk State Codes
CEC Line State Codes
Call-State Codes
M-244
6.11
M-245
6.12
M-246
6.13
M-246
6.14
-.
M-253
7.1
M-260
7.2
M-261
7.3
M-271
7.4
Responses
Responses
Responses
Fault Code
M-334
8.1
Recent Change Sequences
M-338
9.1
M-342
9.2
M-345
9.3
M-357
9.4
M-362
9.5
M-362
9.6
Menu of Test Options
System Memory Test Card and Address Range Correlation
Channel Memory Test-Card and Address Range Correlation
Tone Test Outputs
Line/Trunk Pair to Point Conversion
Line/Trunk Pair to CDF Point Conversion
M-12
for Force Commands at Terminal
for Load Data Commands at Terminal
for Load Commands at Terminal
Listings
7187
SVR 5210
TL-130200-1001
GENERAL
1 .Q This technical practice document provides maintenance
procedures for the Fujitsu GTE Business Systems’ OMNI SI
Digital PABX (Private Automatic Branch Exchange), System
Version Release 52.1 .X. This document contains basic
information and step by step procedures for:
0 Locating and correcting system failures caused by problems
with system power, hardware, software, or peripheral
equipment.
..
System Software
Maintenance and
Applications
l
Making modifications or changes to system hardware,
software, and peripheral equipment.
l
Monitoring the status of system hardware, software, and
peripheral equipment by using self-testing diagnostics.
1.1 The following system maintenance software features and
their applications are covered:
-
Maintenance
Commands
- On-Line maintenance
- System Maintenance General Principles
-
Troubleshooting
- Call Tracing
- PD-200 Maintenance
- Recent Change
- Off-Line Diagnostics
Maintenance
Terminals
Security Levels
1.1.1 A maintenance terminal interacts with system
maintenance features. As the system responds to user keyboard
commands to provide information or perform certain functions,
information is printed on the terminal display screen. The system
will support a printer connected to a maintenance terminal. The
printer provides a permanent record of maintenance operations.
1.1.2 The use of system maintenance software requires the
technician to directly access the system data base. The level of
data base access is determined by the maintenance feature
used and the task. The following security levels apply:
0 Security Level 0: lock not open
8 Security Level 1: display capability traffic studies and system
status
5210
8187
M-13
TL-130200-1001
l
Security Level 2: line changes and other rearrangements of
existing facilities
l
Security Level 3: feature changes not requiring hardware
changes
0 Security Level 4: complete Recent Change capabilities
__
0 Security Level 5:
Requests.
~Iata Base changes and Maintenance
0 security Level 6: generic changes
0 Security Level 7: spare
l
Security Codes
. Security Level 8: spare
1.1.3 Security codes prevent unauthorized access to the data
base. Security codes are four-character passwords made up
of letters, numbers, or a combination of both. They are used to
unlock the data base security lock. The security code which
opens the lock at one security level will allow access at that level
or to those below it.
The use of an incorrect security code, or the incorrect level of
security code, will result in the following on-screen message:
INVALID SECURITY ACCESS
If this prompt appears, check the security code as well as the
nature of the task being done. This prompt will also appear if an
attempt is made to work at a Security Level higher than the one
authorized.
The following procedure unlocks the security lock:
1. Type SL OL
The system responds:
SECURITY CODE >
2. Type four-character security code
The System responds:
OPEN AT LEVEL X
where X is the security level open
System Diagnostics
1.2 Self-testing diagnostics and manual hardware testing
determine system fault conditions.
Self-Testing
Diagnostics
M-14
1.2.1 As part of normal operations, the system automatically
conducts diagnostic self-tests on a periodic basis. Failures
detected by the system are recorded as Fault Codes listed in the
Fault Log. The Fault Log is accessed using the maintenance
terminal as part of the routine troubleshooting process (see
Section 5.0 Troubleshooting).
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
The Smart Loader program occurs at the beginning of the
generic diskette. After loading this program the system conducts
memory tests and self-testing diagnostics for about 20 seconds.
Diagnostic self-tests are performed on Attendant Consoles,
agent instruments, and Featurephones. These self-tests are
conducted at each instrument in order to check equipment
performance without affecting system operations.
Manual
.=_ Hardware
Testing
1.22 Maintenance commands place system
hardware in an out-of-service condition for maintenance
purposes. The “maintenance busy” status tells system software
that this particular piece of hardware is not available for service
(see Section 2 0 Maintenance Commands).
The system conducts tests while the hardware is in the out-ofservice condition. Response Codes show whether or not the
equipment passed system tests and was allowed to be placed in
service, or failed system tests and was not placed in service (see
Section 5.0 Troubleshooting).
Reference Documents
1.3 Maintenance personnel should become familiar with OMNI
SI information contained in the following Technical Practices
before performing maintenance tasks:
l
TL-130000-1001 System Description/Features
o TL-130100-1001 Operation
o TL-130300-1001 Installation- Appendix 1 Printed Circuit
Board Strapping Options
o TL-130400-1001 Data Base Programming
o PD-200 Packet Data System 278-922-180 - Appendix 1
PD-200 Packet Data System, Administration and Maintenance
5210
System Configuration
1.4 The following paragraphs contain the frame image listing, the
power restriction categories for removal and replacement of
cards, and the procedure for handling the cards.
Frame Image
1.4.1 The frame image card locations for a fully configured
OMNI SI system appear in Figure 1 .l. The frame image includes
the Expansion File, the Get Started File, and the Power File. The
location of Groups A, 8, C and D are shown as well as the
location of Tl-Span cards.
8187
M-15
TL-130200-1001
Hgure i .i
M-16
8l87
Frame Image Card Locations for a Fully Configured System
n
5210
TL-130200-1001
Card List
1.4.2 A complete list of OMNI SI cards according to card
number appears in Table 1 .l. Cards used for the PD-200
Option are also included in the list. Information about removal
and replacement is noted with the card and explained at the end
of the table.
Table 1.1
CARD.~_ NO.
5210
OMNI SI Cards
MNEMONIC
DESCRIPTION
FB-15277-A
SIL
Span Interface and Output Format for Tl
FB-15277-l A
SIL
Span Interface and Output format for Tl
FB-15278-A
FDC
Frame Detector Circuit for Tl
FB-15280-A
LCM
Line Compensator for Tl
FB-17288-A
CP85E
Central Processor Unit Enhanced (8085) (Note 1)
FB-17187-A
PCMI
PCM Interface
FB-17188-A
TP12
Test Panel Interface Version 2 (Notes 1, 3)
FB-17189-A
PCMFS
PCM Frame Synchronization
FB-17189BOA
PCMFS
PCM Frame Synchronization
FB-17192-A
Tl B2
Tl Buffer Circuit 2
FB-17197-A
PSUPY
Power Supervisory (Note 1)
FB-17201 -A
PEMT
PCM Two-Wire E&M Trunk (Note 2)
FB-17202-A
PCOT
PCM Central Office Trunk (Note 2)
FB-17202BOA
PCOT
PCM Central Office Trunk (Note 2)
FB-17203-A
PDTMF
PCM Dual Tone Multi-frequency
FB-17204-A
BCSR
Battery Charger 5 volt Regulator (Note 1)
FB-17208-A
ATT12
Attendant Interface, Number 2 (Note 2)
FB-17209-A
SIDML
SI Dual Modem and Current Loop (Note 2)
8187
M-17
TL-130200-1001
Table 1.1
CARD
I
NO.
MNEMONIC
OMNI Sl Cards (Continued)
DESCRIPTION
I
) FB-17213-BOA
r
I Public Address and Dictation
Memory Paging 16 Page (Note 1)
T-
1FB-17215-A
I MPB85
I Multiprocessor Buffer 8085 (Notes 1, 3)
1FB-1721 O-A
MPG16
FBI.721 7-A
EPCMN
Expandable PCM Network (Notes 1, 3)
FB-17218-A
CHM85
Channel Memory 8085 (Notes 1, 3)
1 FB-17220-BOA
I FMSD
IFCC
Inter-file Connector Card
FB-17225-A
CIP
Control Interface to Periphery (Note 2)
FB-17226-A
VPLC
Voice Packet Line Card (Type VPLO and VPLl)
FB-17226-l A
VPLCD
Voice Packet Line Card Derived
I PBE/T
I
I
I
1 Packet Bus Extender/Terminator (Note 3)
FB-17228-BOA
PRE
Packet Router Extender (Note 3)
FB-17229-A
ADM P-A
Administrative Maintenance Processor A (Note 3)
I ADMP-C
1 Administrative Maintenance Processor C (Note 3
( FB-17230-BOA
I
I File Management System Card (Notes 1, 2, 3)
FB-17224-A
1FB-17227-A
I
1
1FB-17231 -A
UCB
Universal Controller Board
( FB-17235-A
VCIP
Voice Control Interface Processor
1FB-17236-A
DVCIP
Data Voice Control Interface Process. (Notes 1, 2)
( FB-17242-A
NIC
Network Interface Card
1FB-17246-A
I Voice Packet Line Card 2 (Type VP20 and ~~21)
FB-17250-A
POPS
PCM Off-Premises Station Line Card (Note 2)
FB-17251 -A
PRLT
PCM Release Link Trunk (Note 2)
I PCM Line Circuit Card (Note 2)
1FB-17254-A
1 FB-17254-1A
TLCC
1FB-17265-A
I
M-l 8
I
r ~~~~__
PCM Line Circuit Card (Note 2)
~1
Outrigger Cable Adapter
FB-17276-A
OAIOD
OMNI Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing
FB-17280-A
PPTR
PCM Progress Tone Repeater
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Table 1.1
CARD NO.
...
-
OMNI Sl Cards (Continued)
MNEMONIC
DESCRIPTION
FB-17312-A
RPTR
Repeater Card (Note 3)
FB-17314-1A
MlMB
Memory 1 Megabyte (Note 1)
FB-20718-1A
TlS
Supervisory Alarm Circuit for Tl
FB-20771-l A
INCK
Intermediate Network Clock (Note 1)
FB-20922-A
INCKS
Synchronized Intermediate Network Clock (Note
1)
FB-20974-A
PCMTS
PCM Tone Source Card (Note 1)
FB-20992-A
NSDC
Narrow Serial Device Controller (Notes 1, 3)
FB-20996-A
RABR
Recorder Announcer Buildout Resistor
FB-51051 -A
PFT
Power Fail Transfer
FB-51267-A
PFWTA
PCM Four-Wire E&M Trunk (Note 2)
FB-51279-A
PCONF
PCM Conference Card
1FB-51280-A
I PILT
1 PCM Incoming Loop Trunk DID (Note 2)
FB-51280BOA
PILT
PCM Incoming Loop Trunk DID (Note 2)
FB-100119-l
PMI
Property Management System Interface (Note 1)
NOTES:
1. Power to cabinet must be turned OFF before card can be
removed or replaced
2. Card position must be placed in MAINTENANCE BUSY state
before card can be removed
3. Cables must be disconnected from the front of the card before
removing from the cabinet.
5210
8187
M-19
TL-130200-1001
Power Restrictions
1.4.3 There are three power restriction categories for the
removal and replacement of OMNI SI printed circuit boards.
PABX service may be affected as follows:
l
l
l
AC power ON - No interruption to PABX service
AC power OFF - Warm start required (about a 15 second
system outage)
AC power off and battery pack fuse removed - Cold start
required (about a ten minute system outage)
Cards with peripheral service circuits (lines and trunks) may be
removed and replaced while the PABX is operating. The removal
and replacement of common control cards may require AC
power down or AC power down with the battery pack fuse
removed. Table 1.2 provides a reference between cards and the
power restrictions for removal and replacement.
Handling Cards
1.4.4 (PCBs) Printed circuit boards require special handling
during removal and storage because of their sensitivity to static
electrical charges. A static discharge as low as 40 volts can
damage the PCB metal-oxide semiconductor integrated and
hybrid circuitry. The following procedures are used when
handling a PCB:
1. A wrist strap must be worn, and it must be connected to a bare
metal or plated part of the frame (screw, card guide support,
etc.) when performing the following procedures:
l
Removing the static-sensitive PCB from the SI frame and
placing it in an anti-static plastic bag.
l
Removing a static sensitive PCB from an anti-static plastic
bag and inserting it into the frame.
l
Repairing static sensitive cards or handling static sensitive
components. Because the human body can hold static
electricity, cards should never come in contact with skin or
clothing.
2. Remove static sensitive cards from anti-static packaging
immediately before placing into the OMNI SI frame.
3. Static sensitive cards are stored in anti-static packaging.
Card Removal and
Replacement
M-20
1.4.5 OMNI SI PCBs fall into the three power restrictions
shown in paragraph 1.9. When removal or replacement are
required, refer to Table 1.2.
8l87
5210
TL-130200-1001
Table 1.2
Card No.
..
AC ON
AC OFF
FB-15277-l A
SIL
X
FB-15278-A
FDC
X
FB-15280-A
LCM
X
FB-17187-A
PCMI
X
FB-17188-A
TPl2
X
1FMSD
X
FB-17224-A
IFCC
X
FB-17225-A
CIP
1FB-17220-BOA
5210
Mnemonic
Power Restriction Status
8187
Remove
Battery Fuse
X
M-21
TL-130200-1001
Table 1.2
Card No.
Power Restriction Status (Continued)
1Mnemonic / AC ON 1AC OFF / BgyT&e 1
FB-17226-A
VPLC
X
FB-17227-A
PBEiT
X
FB-17228~BOA
PRE
X
-FB-17229-A
ADMP-A
X
FB-17230-BOA
ADMP-C
FB-17231 iA-
UCB
FB-17235-A
VCIP
X
FB-17236-A
DVCIP
X
FB-17242-A
NIC
X
FB-17246-A
VPLC 2
X
FB-17250-A
POPS
X
FB-17251 -A
PRLT
X
FB-17254-A
PLCC
X
FB-17265-A
OCA
X
FB-17276-A
OAIOD
X
FB-17288-A
CP85E
X
FB-17314-l A
MlMB
X
FB-20718-l A
TlS
FB-20771-1 A
INCK
X
FB-20922-A
INCKS
X
FB-20974-A
PCMTS
X
FB-20992-A
NSDC
X
FB-51051 -A
PFT
X
FB-51267-A
PFWTA
X
FB-51279-A
PCONF
X
FB-51280-A
PILT
X
8187
-
X
X
- /
X
X
5210
MAINTENANCE
COMMANDS
AND DISPLAYS
-- Maintenhce Displays
2.0 The OMNI SI system provides software support and
status display programs that aid in system maintenance
and fault isolation. The system provides maintenance displays,
maintenance commands and maintenance request commands .
Maintenance displays provide records of system operations and
records of automatic fault detection. Maintenance commands,
memory access commands, and maintenance requests permit
testing of devices and/or circuits and the removal of defective
devices and/or circuits from operation without affecting the
operation of the system.
2.1 Maintenance displays provide both general and specific
information on system operations. The displays are:
System Status
Fault Log
l Response Codes
l ACA (Automatic Circuit Assurance Requests Log)
l Traffic Study
0 Display Condition
l
.
l
System Status
2.1.1 System status can be displayed on the system
maintenance terminal by entering the status command. The
STATUS (or “ST.“) command is used. The system will respond
by causing the maintenance terminal to print out the following:
--------------------------------------------------------------,
II
[STATUS
I
! 07104 1236
) CECO PECOPECl PEC2PEC3PEC4PEC5PECGPEC7MDR
ESPADMP i
i INS
;
INS UNE UNE UNE UNE UNE UNE UNE INS INS INS
II
;OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
I
I
I
iN0
ALARMS PRESENT
----_--__-_-________-----------------------------------------:
With an ADMP out of service:
r------------------------------------------------
II
1STATUS.
; 09/19 16:18
;CECO PECOPEClPEC2PEC3PEClPEC5PECGPEC7MDRESPADMP
;
; INS
INS UNE UNE UNE UNE UNE UNE UNE INS UNE 00s ;
II
;OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
II
I
I
i ALARMS PRESENT
L--------------------------------------------------------------,I
5210
8187
M-23
Tb-130200-1001
Fault Log
Request Commands
2.1.2 The status printout wilt show NO ALARMS PRESENT when
there are no faults in the system. If the printout shows that
alarms are present, a printout of the fault log should be requested
by executing the appropriate fault log command. The fault log is
a record of the last 32 faults that were detected by the CEC. A
printout of these faults is arranged in the same order that the
faults occurred (earliest is first entry on the list; most recent is
the last entry on the list). The commands for ,executing a fault log
report are as follows:
(a)
To dump a fault iog, enter the following:
r---m
-----------------------------------------
I
I
I
I
II
FLOG INS DUMP. or
I
FL INS. or
I
I
FL INS DU.
IL-------------------------------------------------~
I
(b)
To clear a fault log, enter the following:
r------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
FLOG INS CLEAR. or
FL INS CLEAR.or
FL INS CL. or
I
I
I
I
I
I
iL-------------------------------------------------~
(c)
To dump and clear a fault log, enter the
following:
r---------------------------------------------
I
I
I
I
I
FL INS DUMP CLEAR. or
I
I
I
FL INS DU CL.
I_---____________---_------------------------------~
Fault Log Display
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
When a system fault occurs, a message is printed on the
maintenance terminal connected to the CEC. The fault is also
logged in memory so that maintenance personnel can later
retrieve a recent, operational history of the system. This fault log
may be displayed and/or cleared at any time via maintenance
commands.
The format of a fault message as printed on the terminal is
shown in Figure 2.1. A key item in the fault message is the twodigit fault code. Table 2.1 lists the fault codes and their functions.
M-24
a/a7
5210
Fault codes and their associated fault message printouts form
the basis for system troubleshooting as described in section 5.0
of this practice. A fault code quick reference chart is given in
Figure 2.3. For each code, the fault title and the meaning of data
stored in the CEC CPU registers are given.
.~_
MONTH/DAY
HOUR/MINUTE
.
ON-LINE CEC (0)
(CONTROLS ON-LINE l-l-Y)
CEC REPORTING
FAULT (0) (REPORTS
FAULT)
FAULT CODE
di-d?
C E C X
&i--6b
B
C
D
E
H
L
xx xx xx xxxx xx
I
c
XX = TWO HEXAIDECIMAL DIGITS
NN = TWO-DIGIT FAULT CODE
Figure 2.1
5210
8f87
REGISTER STORED
--I
DATA VALUE AT TIME
OF FAULT
Fault Reporting Format on TTY
M-25
I L-l 3uzuu- I vu I
Table 2.1
Fault Codes and Functions
CODE
...
-
00
BLOCK PARITY FAILURE
01
DYNAMIC RAM MEMORY FAILURE
02
CONTROL MEMORY READ-AFTER-WRITE FAILURE
06
=- SYSTEM NETWORK TEST FAILURE
08
NETWORK TEST MALFUNCTION
09
DIRECTIVE TEST MALFUNCTION
1
I
I
M-26
FUNCTION
0 .DlRECTlVE
HOPPER FULL MALFUNCTION
11
ILLEGAL EVENT ERROR MALFUNCTION
12
READ-AFTER-WRITE FAILURE IN CHANNEL MEMORY
15
Tl ALARM
16
10 MS STOPPED
17
ALARM FAULT
19
PRE-LOADING MEMORY TEST FAILURE
20
EVENTHOPPERERROR
21
DIRECTIVE HOPPER ERROR
22
MDR SDC FAULT
25
REAL TIME CLOCK FAILURE
27
1 HOTEL /HEALTH CARE DISK BACKUP FAILURE
28
1CAS MAIN/ACD
AGENT DATA LINK ERROR
29
CAS MAIN/ACD
MESSAGE QUEUE ERROR
30
ATTENDANT CONSOLE DATA CHECK ERROR
32
CIP/VCIP/DVCIP
CARD FAILURE
33
CIP/VCIP/DVCIP
PORT FAILURE
36
CHANGE MDR SYSTEM CLOCK FAILURE
37
SYSTEM WARM START
39
ADMP INITIALIZATION AND ASSOCIATED ERRORS
40
DISK FILES GV TX009/GVTXOlO (TCM/FRL) AND I/O ERRORS
41
FMS DISK ERROR
42
TIME SLOT LOCKUP
8187
5210
.-
I
I
I
I
.-..---
I
I
I
I
I
REGISTER STORED DATA VALUE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
! 00-CEC
I Block Parity
I Failure
I I
B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
1 I
I I
...
t
.;.
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I- I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
:
t
;
,
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
; 03 -CEUPEC
; CommonMemory
I Read-After1 Write Failure
f
I
I
;
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
02- CEC
Control Memory
Read-AfterWrite Failure
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I I
I I
I I PEC No.
I
.
I I
I I
!
And
I
I
; OS-CEC
Single
I Channel
I Communication
; Failure
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i 00 = Cannot
i Allocate
; Message
, Buffer
I
I
101 =Test
I Message
; Timeout
I I
i I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
f
I
I I
I I
I Data
( Written
I
I
I
I
Data
Read
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Data
I Written
I Data Read
I
I
Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
I
I
Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
I
Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
I
I
I
I
I
04=MPB85
I Timeout
; (Single Byte)
;
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 03=Check
I Allocate
1 Message
I Buffer
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
;
’
I
I
I
02=MPB85
;
! Timeout
,
I
I (While
; Un-Loading) 1
Figure 2.2
5210
&l)OA==D4
,I 03=DlOB=D5
=
I6
i
I 05 =I3 OD:l7
1 06=DZOE=D6
, 07=D3OF=D7
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
: I
OCCEC
I I Channel No.
Total
I I that failed
Communication I l
Failure
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
;
I
L
I
I
I
I
Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
I
I
I I
I Pageonwhich I
I failureoccurred I
00 IO 08= I4
I
; o,:,,
09=15 ;
1 02=DOOA=D4
;
I
03=DlOB=D5
I
; 04=12 OC=l6 ;
; 05=13 OD=17
;
I
06= DZOE = D6 I
; 07=D3OF=D7
;
I
I
, Pageonwhich
;
I failureoccurred ,
I
I I 00=1008=14
;
1 01 I1 09 I5
,
I
I
I
H
I
I
,
I
102 = Test
Failure
I
I
I
I
E3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
f 02 = Test
Failure
I
I
I
I I
D2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I Ol-CEC
I Dynamic
I Memory
I Failure
C’
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I FAULT CODE
I
.--.
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
Fault Code Quick Reference Guide
a/a7
M-27
.-
.-----
.W”.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
REGISTER STORED DATA VALUE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FAULT CODE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
’
I
I
I
I
‘I-
I
I
I
I
;
r
!
i
I
I I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
i i PEC No.
I I
) Channel No.
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
r IO-PEC
I Directive
I Hopper Full
I
I
11 PEC
i Illegal Event
I Error
I
I
I PEC
I I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i Parameter 1
I
I
I
Figure 2.2
I
I
I
I
I 0 2 =Test
I Failure
f
I
I
;
OO=PEC(s)
r did not
i respond
;
I
i 02=Test
I Failure
I
I
I
I
I
I
OO=PEC(s)did
not respond
i 02 = Test
I Failure
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Parameter 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f Parameter 3
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
Event
No.
i
I
I
I
I
I
Fault Code Quick Reference Guide (Continued)
8187
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Timeslot
in
; PEC Y
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i 03=Network
I
f Detected Off- i
i line
I
I
I
I
No.
I
I
I
I
I 01 = Only one
! PEC No. not
i PECresponded ) r e s p o n d i n g
:
I I
i
I
I Channel No.
; ; PEC No.
I
;
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; PEC Y
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
;
I
I I
I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 OO=PEC(s)did
; not respond
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, , PEC No.
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
1
I
1
I
I
; 09-PEC
r Directive
t Test Failure
:
I
I
i
i Timeslot in
; PEC X
;
;
I
I
L
I
I
I
I
I
i 1 PEC X
I I
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
f 06-CEC
I System Network
I Test Failure
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
] Data Read
I 07 = Cannot
i Bring Up
I Channel on
i Startup
I
I
I
I
I
I
H
’ Data
f Written
I
I
08= First
i Faulty Byte
I in Message
f
I
I
I
I
Es
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
D2
I
;
I ObPEC
1 Network
I Test Failure
M-28
06= MPB85
Timeout
(While
Loading)
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
-I
I
’ 05=Read
i After Write
i
ErrorinCEC
; Memory
I
I
I
I
=-. I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C’
I I
I I
I I
i
I
8
I
5210
TL-130200-l uu
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
REGISTER STORED DATA VALUE
I
,
i
I
I
I
FAULTCODE
i
I
B
I I
; 12-PEC
; : PEC No.
I I
I Read After
I I
I
WriteChannel
I
I
I M e m o r y F a i l u r e \ %L
I
i
I I
13-PEC
! Self Test
I
Error
i ; PEC No.
-
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
Il.
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
, I
I I
II
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I 14-PEC
i 10 MS Error
f
1 15 Tl
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Alarm
I 16CEC
) 10 MS Stopped
I
;
I
I
I
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
!
; PEC No.
I
I
I
; PEC No.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
Figure 2.2
5210
C’
I
I
Channel No.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Data
I Written
I
I
I
;
I
I
;
02
I
I
I
00 = PEC-CEC
Common
Memory
Read-andl Write
1Data
; Written
!
OI=PEC
\ Block Parity
!
I
1
; 02=PEC
I Dynamic
; Memory
I
t
I
I
I
Data Read
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
i Data Read
I
II 04zMPB85
; Timeout
I
I
I
I
I
f 06 = Invalid
I Test No.
I
! Test No.
;07=MDR
I Checksum on
; Call Info
I Buffer
I
i
! OS=PEC
: Illegal PEC
I Directive
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; OO=TlA
I
I
i Directive No.
I
:
Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
I
Address of Faulty Byte
I
rI
Address
of
Faulty
Byte
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Parameter 1
,
.t Parameter 2
I
I
!
1 Parameter3 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Addressof Attempted Write I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 02 =Cutoff
\ Alarm
I
I 03=Local
r Alarm
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 02=Test
\ Failure
I
1
!
OO=System
; Alarm
I
101 = Remote
I Alarm
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Counter
Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
i
I
I
H
I
I
I
i Directive NO.
; Ol=TlB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
; 03=PEC
i Illegal
I Directive
I
E3
I
I
I
r Parameter 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i Parameter 2 t Parameter 3
!
I
I
I
I
I
I PECCount
; CECCount
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I!
I
!
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
f
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
Fault Code Quick Reference Guide (Continued)
8/87
M-29
TL-130200-1001
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FAULT CODE
1 17-CEC
I Alarm Fault
I
!
I
I
...
I
I
i
18-Common
i Memory Block
I Parity Error
I IQCEC
; Preloading
, Memory Test
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
I
i I Attendant
I I Console No.
I
I
I
I
I Ol-lO=Tl Line
i Numberl-16
I
I
I
I
i 11-tB=Attend: ant
r 00-07 = Transi mission Fault
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Page0
I I
I I
03=Data
; 1 Page 1
I
I
I
D2
I
E3
H
i
i
I
;
I
i
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Address of Block That
Failed
I
I
i
Address of Block That
1 Failed
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
4
I
I
Fault Code Quick Reference Guide .(Continued)
8l87
I
I
I
I
End Address of Block
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
r r OO= I n s t r u c t i o n i
1 1 Page0
I
I I
i : 0 1 =Instruction i
I I Page 1
I
I I
; ; 02=Data
I
Figure 2.2
M-30
I
i-1 P E C N o . .
i ;
I
C’
;
OO=ArtCard
, Alarm
I I
I I
I I
.~_
I
I
B
I I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
REGISTER STORED DATA VALUE
i
5210
FUJITSU GTE
BUSINESS SYSTEMS, INC.
SECTION TL-130200-1001 ISSUE 1
AUGUST 1987
MAINTENANCE
OMNI SI@’
TECHNICAL PRACTICES
5.2.1.0
Purpose
This Technical Practice has been prepared for FGBS Employees
who operate and maintain the equipment manufactured and sold
by Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc. The information in this
practice is subject to change and may not be suitable in all
situations. Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc. acknowledges
that a customer’s special requirements or practices may take
precedence over those supplied in this practice if a conflict
develops during installation or ongoing operation. Fujitsu GTE
Business Systems, Inc. hereby disclaims any responsibility or
.-liability for any consequential or inconsequential damages that
may result from the use of this practice.
This document is provided with the understanding that it shall not
be copied or reproduced in whole or in part or disclosed to
-others with-out the prior written permission of Fujitsu GTE
Business Systems, Inc.
Copyright a1987
by FGBS, Inc.
OMNI SI@ is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc.
Comm I’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems, Inc.
FlashComm Plus’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm I’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm II’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm Ill’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm IV’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm V’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
FeatureComm VI’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
AnswerComm IT, is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
AnswerComm II’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business
Systems, Inc.
OMNI IVMS’” is a trademark of Fujitsu GTE Business Systems,
Inc.
I
I
I
I
I
REGISTER
FAULT CODE
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
‘1”
I
r FF=PEDTest
I Failed
Dz
I
i
;
1
I
I
I
I
.I
f
I
I
I
I
i 28-CAS Main/
; ACDAgent
Data Link
i Error
i ! PEC No.
I I
( Data Link No.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I I
I I
; ; PEC No.
i Data Link No.
I
I
I
; ; PEC No.
r r Buffer
f ) Destination
I
; ; PEC No.
I I
I
I I
I I
I
f
I
I i No.of T i m e s
I I That No
i i Message
r r BuffersWere
i i Available
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
i 30-Attendant
[ Console
I Data
i Check
I Error
I
i 31PEC ODDB
ti BackupFailure
f
I 1
I I
I
I
1
Console No.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; ;
I
PEC No.
l
Figure 2.2
5210
I 00 = Message
I Buffer Queue
i Not Cleared
i FF=Message
i Buffer Queue
I Cleared
I
i Console No.
I
I I
I I
I I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A=Time-out
i Agent I.D.
I
i
I
I
I
i
8=DataNot
r Expected
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
,
I
1 C=No
1 Message
r Buffers Were
1 Available
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;9=2ndNack
; All PEC
I
I Queue Were i
I Cleared
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
r B = Failure
I Whena PEC’s
I QueueCleared
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
1
; C=NoPEC
I Message Buffer I
I
I Available
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
,
I
i No Meaning
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1FF = Request
i Agent I.D.
I for
I
1 Initialization II
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
! 29-CAS Main/
i ACD Message
I Queue Error
I
L
I
:
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
i Failure Mode I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I i DiskOperation
r r Failure
I
I
I
I
Es
I
I
I
I I
c II I
I
I
I
I
DATAVALUE
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I 27 H/M Data not
r Backed up
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; 80 = Illegal Dii rectiveNo.lnto
I Target Routine
I I
22-24Spare
I 25 Real Time
1 Clock Failure
I
C’
I I
I I
I I
I
I
i
B
STORED
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NoMeaning
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NO Meaning
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NO Meaning
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
NO Meaning
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i Typeof E r r o r i
I
8=Checksum I
i
9=DataLink
i
I
A=Time-out I
I
1 Occurred
I
I
I FF=Data Link ;
1Check Failure I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
i
Fault Code Quick Reference Guide (Continued)
8187
M-31
;
I
I
I
I
I
REGISTER
I
I
DATAVALUE
I
FAULT CODE
I
B
I I
I
1 32- CIP Card
I Failure
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
i 00 = CLP Card
f Test Failure
;
I
I I
I I
...
-
I I
I I
I I
I I
i
I 33-CIP Port
] Failure
I
I
I
I
.;
I
I
I
; i PEC No.
I I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
3CRemote
FADS
Transmission
Error
i
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
,
I
I
) 35-Remote FADS
1 Reporting Error
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i Port No.
I
I
,t
I
I 03 = Port Initial- ,
1 ization Error i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i 04=TestComi
I mand Failure I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
02=Remote
I I FADS must be
I
I started(FADS
I
(
periodicdata
I I collection ini i terval error)
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
f
I Total #of Soft I
I
, Protocol
I
I 06 = Down
, Load Failure
; SID
,
I Block Number
I
I
*See
Below
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
i
I
I
I
I
i DN = Directory Number
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
No Meaning
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i New ESP State 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
No Meaning
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 Real-Time
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 Data T i m e r
I
I
I
I
No Meaning
Fault Code Quick Reference Guide (Continued)
8187
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
! Total #of Sync I
I
I Change
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; 05=PCRTSoft
; Protocol
, Previous ESP
( State
I
I
I
1
I
I I
; ; 01 = Real-Time i Real-Time
, I Packet Lost Sync I Packet Count
I I
I
Figure 2.2
I
I
I
I
’ ’ BO=MDR-ESP
1 Number of
I Current Status I
I
I ! Communications, Communications ; Ol=OK
I
i ( Status Change
t Status Change
I
OO=BAD
I
I
I
_1 I 01 = M D R M e m - ’ Number of
I
I
I
1 1 ory Allocation
I
1 Figures
I
I
I
’I ,I Failure
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I 02=CIPPort
I Sync Error
I I
I I
I I
I
I
Es
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
i
; Ol=PortLBP
t
; Protocol Error I
I I
I I
I
I
04=CIPCard
,
Initialization I
I
Error
I 00= Data Link
; Test Failure
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I I
I I
I I
I
[
i 03=CIPCard
i
1 Hardware Error I
I I
I
01 =CIPCard
XMlTError
I
02=CILCard
I Watchdog
I Timer Error
I
;
i Card No.
;
I
I
I
Dz
I
I I
I I
I I
.~_
-
C’
I
i ; PEC No.
I
I
I
I
I
M-32
STORED
5210
I L- I3uLuu-
I vu I
I
I
REGISTER STORED DATA VALUE
FAULT CODE
II
I
B
C’
1 02 =Real-Time i Real-Time
r Packet Count
i Packet Count
I Error
I
.:- ,
...
I
I
i
03=15
I Minute Packet
r Count Lost
i Sync
I
i
i 04=15
r Minute Packet
I Count Error
I
I
1 OS=Logon
I IDPacket
I Count Error
I
I
I
I
I 15 Minutes
I
Packet
I
Count
I
I
D*
r
I Real-Time
I Data Timer
I
I
00
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
Es
I
I
H
I
L
I
No Meaning
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
00
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
00
I
I
I
I
I
0 0
t
CEC Reload
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
No Meaning
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
No Meaning
I
I
I
I
I
No Meaning
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
00
I
I
I
No Meaning
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
! Buffer Failure I
I
i Peg Value
I
;
No Meaning
I
I
I
i Logon ID
i
DataTimer
I
I
i
I
I
i 15 Minutes
i
DataTimer
I
r 15 Minutes
I Data Timer
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I 07=Logoff
i i Buffer
( ( Overflow
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I 06=Max#of
; f TimesCannot
I , Finda B u f f e r
37-System Restart I I
I
15Minutes
Packet Count
[ Logon ID
I Packet Count
I
I
I I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
See Table 6-4
See Table 6-5
See Table 6-5, Register E
Fault 34 Reg E = Reason for Change
00 = MDR not in Service
01 = Timeout Waiting for ESP Acknowledgement
02 = Unexpected Input from ESP
06 = Acknowledge from ESP
12 = No-Acknowledge from ESP
Figure 2.2
.
Fault Code Quick Reference Guide (Continued)
.
5210
8187
M-33
REGISTER STORED DATA VALUE
FAULT CODE
B
I I
39-ADMP
Initialization and
Associated
Errors
t I 01 =Can’t
r r Enable ADMP
! i orNoBuffer
f 1 Available
f
i
I
I .*.03 = Duplicate
I initial Request
i
:
i
I
I
I 04=ConfigI urating Data
1 Error
i DevTyp
:
I I
I
I I
; PARM 1
I 06=Spare
I i 07=Undefined
i I Status
!
f
j Status
j PARM 1
: = DevTyp
! 08=Spare
I
1 i 09=Dev
) i Type Not
f 1 Implemented
I I
: : OO=GVTX009
I
I
I I 0 1 =GVTXOlO
I I
I I
1I
I
02=RC/OM
I
I I
I I
I I
41-Disk I/O Error
42-Time Slot
UP
Lock-
PEC Number !
Time Slot
Number
I
I
Dev Number 2
i Card Slot
! PARM 1
I
! PARM2
I
i OWNGP
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Dev Number 1
;
PARMZ
I
I
I
I
I
! SeeFMS
i Code for D2
I Register Data
i Values
I
I
.j P A R M 3
; =SID
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DCB Table Index r DCB Sequence
(TCTl X))
I Index(TCSlX)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hardware ID
1
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; PARM3
I
I
I
I
:
; PARMZ
; =PEC
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II II I/O Request Code i Error Code (See
I 1 (See Note 5)
i Note 6)
I
I
I
I
I
i
; OO=FileFailed
i toOpen
. 0 1 = R e a d
i Record Error
: 02=Write
: Record Error
i 03 = File Failed
i to.Close
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
i DevTyp
i
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
i I D5= PRDoes m‘ i P E C #
I I Not Match
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
Es
I
I
I
!
I
I
!
; 0 PECOOS
: IDSOOS
I
I
I
40-Disk Files
GVTX009/
GVTXOI 0
(TCMIFRL)
and
l/O E R R O R S
D2
; ; 02=Host
; ; PEUADMP
I
. .
C’
I
;
,
I
I
I
I
DRB ADDR
Call Store
Number
NOTES:
5.
I/O Request Codes are as follows:
02 = Read PEC 0 Generic and Data Base
03 = Read PEC 1 Generic and Data Base
04 = Read PEC 2 Generic and Data Base
05 = Read PEC 3 Generic and Data Base
06 = Read MDR Generic and Data Base
08 = Read PEC 0 Data Base Only
09 = Read PEC 1 Data BaseOnly
OA = Read PEC 2 Data Base Only
OB = Read PEC 3 Data Base Only
OC = Read MDR Data Base Only
OE = Write all Data Base
13 = Read HC/M Data
14 = Write HUM Data (MR)
15 = Write HC/M Data (Power Fail)
M-34
8187
18 = Read a Recent Change Program
IA = Close Recent Change File
1 D = Read Featurephone Generic
1 E = Load a PEC (Parallel Loading)
1 F = Close Featurephone File
20 = Read PEC 4 Generic and Data Base
21 = Read PEC 5 Generic and Data Base
22 = Read PEC 6 Generic and Data Base
23 = Read PEC 7 Generic and Data Base
24 = Read PEC 4 Data Base
25 = Read PEC 5 Data Base
26 = Read PEC 6 Data Base
27 = Read PEC 7 Data Base
5210
NOTES:
6.
Error Codes are as follows:
81 = Disk Directory Full
82 = Not Enough Spare to Define File
83 = File Size Is Larger then Disk
84 = Filename in Use
85 = Record Size too Large
86 = Device’s not tiqual
87 = Device Invalid
88 = Filename Is Invalid
89 = Security Violation
8A = File Does not Exist
88 = Not Allowed on FMS System File
8C = File Is Already Open
...
8D = Mode Is Invalid
8E = FID(s) not Available
- 8 F = FIDIslnvalid
90 = FID Is not an Active File
91 = FID Specified Is Already in Use
92 = FID in Use by Other Processor
5210
8187
93 = Read Past Logical EOF Attempted
94 = File Is not Open for Input
95 = File Is not Open for Output
96 = Write Past Physical EOF Attempted
97 = Seek Past EOF Attempted
98 = Record Sizes not Equal
99 = Files Open on Device
9A = FID not Sized
9B = Access Is Invalid
9E = Device not Ready
9F = Device I/O Error
A0 = Device Write Protected
Al = Device not Mounted
A2 = Request not Allowed on Mounted Disk
A3 = No Device Attached
A4 = Device Is Private
A8 = Invalid Command Number
FF = Timeout
M-35
TTY Response
Log Display
__
2.1.3 A response log is provided within the system memory to
record the responses to tests performed. The system performs
these tests when certain tasks attempted will alter the system
configuration. For example, the system conducts a series of
tests when the PEC is to be placed in service or out of service.
A response message is associated with each task attempted. If
an operating system maintenance terminal is connected to the
in-service CEC, the response messages are printed as they
occur.
For most tasks, the response messages appear only if the task is
successfully completed. This is true even though some failures
occur. Each response message includes information about
those failures. The format for the resoonse messaaes is shown
in Figure 2.3. As a quick reference guide for the response
codes, refer to Figure 2.4.
DATE
HOUR/MINUTE
ON-LINE CEC (0 )
(CONTROLS ON-LINE TTY)
CEC REPORTING
RESPONSE (0)
(REPORTS RESPONSE)
RESPONSE CODE
hdiECX
‘tih
B
C
D
E
H
L
xx xx xx xxxx xx
I
REGISTER STORED DATA
XX = TWO HEXAIDECIMAL
VALUE AT TIME OF
DIGITS
RESPONSE
NN = TWO-DIGIT FAULT CODE
-.
--
Hgure 2.3
M-36
Em7
-
-
Response Reporting Format on TTY
5210
TL-130200-1001
I
I
I
I
I
I
! RESPONSE CODE
I
i 00-Task 1
; PutPEC
I INS
I
;
)
I
:
...
I
I
I
6
..-I
II
I
I
t
I
I
1 Ol=PECHas
i BadRAM
I
I
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I OS=Start
; Unit Failure
i 06=Channel
I Memory
I
Failure on
I Startup
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ; PEC No.
I 02-Task 4
I
I
AllowSBYCEC I I
I
i to Check PEC
I t
I I
I Leads
I
I 03-Task 5
i CheckSBY
I
CEC-PEC
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
; PEC No.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
j
I
1 OO=PECisUp
1 andRunning
I
I
)
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
Address of TCB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Address of KB
Address of TCB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
=CPRST
I
i
I
I
I
02=Request I
03=10MS
!
t
I
I
01
I
;
I
I
[
I
I
1
f
!
( 01 =PEC Has
I Bad RAM
I
I
Figure 2.4
5210
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H
1 A d d r e s s o f F a u l t y Byte
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : PEC No.
Address of TCB
E
I
I
i 04=DiskUnit
t Failure
I 01 -Task 2
; Put PEC 00s
I
\
f
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
VALUE
I
( 02 = Control
I LeadTest
; Failure
I
I
I
DATA
i
i 03=Common
I Memoryisbad I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
STORED
I
i OO=PECisUP I
I andRunning
I
I 1 PECNo.
I
REGISTER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 Address of Faulty Byte
I
;
Response Code/Quick Reference Guide
ah37
M-37
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
i
t
B
I I
I I
I I
I
.--
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;.
I
I
i
I
I
I I
I
I
I Ol=PEC
; BadRAM
I I
I
I
I
I 02 = Control
I Lead Test
I Failure
I I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
rI Address of Faulty Byte
I
;
I
I
I
I
f Ol=CPRST
! 02=Request
f 03=lOMS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
I
I
I
Address of TCB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Address of TCB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Channel
II No.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I
;
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I 09-Power ReI s t o r e d . NoSystem ,: iI
I Shut-down
I I
Figure 2.4
M-38
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 06 = Chanel
I Memory Failure I
I
I onstartup
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i 01 =Make
; 00%SBY
I Transition
I
I
I 04=Disk
i Unit Failure
I OO=Make
; OOS--INS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r 07-Communicar tionschannel is
1Back Ins
I
/ 08-H/HC Tape
I
WriteSuccessful
I
1
I
I
I
I
I I
;
I
i 05=Start
; Up Failure
I 06-Task 15
1 Call Recovery
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Address of TCB
f
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Address of Faulty Byte
I
I
1
I
I 03 = Common
I MemoryisBad I
I
I OS-Task 7
1 I PEC No.
I I
1 Start
I I
I Communication I I
i Between CEC
I I
I
I
I
Has
I
I
I
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i OO=PECisUp
I
andRunning
L
I
I
I
06=Chanel
I
I Memory Failure I
I onStartup
I
: : PEC No.
I i
I I
I
I
I
_
I
I
i
I ,z=Start
i Up Failure
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
! 04-Task 6
i CheckSBY
I CEC-PEC
1 toINS
I
I
i 04= Disk
I Unit Failure
I I
I I
I
i
I
H
I
; 01 =CPRST ;
I 02=Request
I
; 03=10MS
1
;:
I I
I I
I I
E
I
I 03=Common
I
I MemoryisBad I
I
:
D
I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
C
I
I 02 =Control
1 Lead Test
! Failure
:
I
I
I
I
I
REGISTER STORED DATA VALUE
I
1
I
I
1RESPONSE CODE
I
I
1
I
I
Response Code/Quick Reference Guide (Continued)
8187
5210
I
i RESPONSE CODE
t
B
I I
1 lo- Task 29
I Agent Recovery
; Attempt
; ; Agent
,’ ,’ I.D.
: 1 I- CIP Port
I
StatusChange
; ; PEC No.
I
I
f
I
I
I
....
I
I
12-CIPCard
) Status Change
I
I
I
I
: 13-ESP
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
tt
t
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
to
f
01
00s
=CIPCard
t o IS
I
I
; Current ESP
I State
; 02 = m-Service
I
I
I
I
I
i 14-SBY-CEC Dynamic; ; Not Applicable
; Data Updated
I I
Address of TCB
I
I
I
I Card No.
;
No.of
i Recovery
,
Attempts
I
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
,
,
i
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
; Error Type *
I
I
I
I
I
, OF = Data
I Transm. to ESP I
1begins at next
I
I
i qtr. hour
I
, ID=Data
I
I Transm. begins i
, in two qtr. hours I
I
; BLDU No.
I
I
I
I
I
,
;
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i ; PEC No.
Figure 2.4
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
j 15-BLDU
I
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
,. f OO=CIPCard
I I
:
I
I
I
I
;
Ol=CIPPort
to 1s
E
I
I
I
1 1 Previous
, , ESPState
I
t
I
I
I
;
IO2=CIPPort
I
toMOOS
I
1 1 PEC No.
I
; Port No.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; 00 = CIP Port
to 00s
I
I I
I I
D
I
I OO=Rec.OK I
I FF= REC. Fail
I
(
(Agt--00s)
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
REGISTER STORED DATA VALUE
f
t
t
l
00 = Out of synchronization
01 = In synchronization
02 = Negative acknowledge
03 = Invalid kev identitv
04= Invalid BLDU number
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
Response Code/Quick Reference Guide (Continued)
Response Code.
Descriptions
Following are the response code descriptions listed in
numerical order:
Response Code 00
This message is printed in response to an attempt to put the PEC
in service. Before loading or putting a PEC in service, perform
the following tests:
5210
(1)
Test all of the random access memory of the PEC.
(2)
Test the control lead by clearing the response word in
common memory and sending a Central Processor Reset
signal (CPRST). Clear the CPRST signal. Check the
response word in common memory to verify that the reset
has occurred.
(3)
Test the request lead by using the same procedure as
above.
8187
M-39
(4)
Test the 10 ms interrupt line by using the same procedure
as above.
(5) Test the CEC-PEC common memory.
Register Stored Value
l
Register B has the PEC number.
l
Register C has a value of 00 through 06 (see Register C
value summary following Response Code 13). Value 00
indicates that the PEC has been successfully placed in
service and no further action is necessary.
NOTE: Other possible values for register C are explained where
applicable in the following response code?.
Response Code 06
Responds to a call recovery attempt and indicates that it was
completed.
RESPONSE CODE 08
Responds to the successful completion of the station status disk
write operation. It indicates that the station status dynamic data
was backed up on the disk in its entirety; This response is
posted after automatic write-on power failure or on maintenance
request operations. To write station status data on disk, refer to
maintenance request code 2E, Response 08 does not use the
registers to convey information.
Response Code 09
Responds to the restored power after fault code 26 power failure
has occurred and indicates that there is no system outage before
power is restored. The station status memory may or may not be
backed up, depending on the power failure status. If the station
status write operation is in progress at the time of power
restoration, the operation will continue until completed. However,
if the operation has not begun, station status write operation will
not occur. Response registers are not used to convey
information.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Response Code 10
Responds to an Agent Instrument recovery task. See fault code
28 description in the fault tables for conditions under which
recovery will be attempted. If register C indicates that the
recovery has failed, the Agent Instrument will be put out of
service. If the recovery action is successful, the Agent
Instrument will remain in its current state.
Response Code 11
_
Responds to placing an Integrated Featurephone CIP port in or
out of service, or in a (MOOS) Maintenance Out-Of-Service
busy state. When the port has failed for any reason, Fault Code
33 will be printed and the system will attempt a recovery (put
back in service). See Fault Code 33 description for the
conditions under which recovery will be attempted. If the
recovery attempt fails, the port (Integrated Featurephone) will be
put out of service. If the recovery attempt is successful, the port
will remain in its current state. The port is placed in MOOS state
when the Integrated Featurephone is in the process of
downloading.
Response Code 12
Responds to placing an Integrated Featurephone CIP card in or
out of service. See Fault Code 32 description for the conditions
under which the CIP card will change its state.
Response Code 13
This message indicates that the ESP state has been changed to
in service. This implies that MDR-ESP communications has
been established and that remote FADS data is transmitted to the
ESP as soon as the initial data collection period has ended.
Register B indicates the previous ESP state. Register C contains
the value 02 indication that the current ESP state is in service.
Register D indicates when remote FADS data collected for 15
minute periodic intervals begins to be transmitted to the ESP.
The value OF in register D indicates that data transmission
begins at the next quarter hour following the output of response
13. If D = 10, data transmission begins on the following quarter
hour. For example, response code 13 is received at 9:05; if D =
OF, the data transmission begins at 9:15; if D = 10, data
transmission will begin at 9:30.
5210
8187
M-41
Response Code 14
This message indicates that the standby CEC’s dynamic data
has been updated by the in-service CEC. This task is
performed whenever a CEC goes from out of service to standby
and response 14 indicates completion of this task. To ensure
dynamic data integrity between CECs, recent change and CEC
generic writes should not be performed until a response code 14
has been printed after a CEC goes standby.
Response Code 15
This message indicates that the BLDU status has been changed
from out of service to in service or from in service to out of
service. Register B has the PEC number, register C has the
BLDU number, and register D has the error types.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Automatic Circuit
Assurance Log
Request Commands
2.1.4 The Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) log can be
displayed on the system TTY or CRT terminal by entering the
ACA log commands. The ACA log is a record of the last 32
reports that were generated. A printout of these reports is
arranged in the same order that they occurred (earliest, first,
most recent, last). The commands for executing an ACA log
report are as follows:
This command prints ACA reports stored in the ACA log.
r-------------------------------------------------~
I
I
ACA INS. or ACA INS DUMP
I
I
I
I
L-----------------------------_----------~
I
I
This command clears all reports in the ACA log.
r-------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
ACA INS CLEAR
II
IL-------------------------------------------------~
This command prints all ACA reports and then clears the log.
ACA INS DUMP CLEAR
5210
8187
M-43
ACA Log Display
The ACA report is printed on the maintenance terminal in the
following format:
1
/ SITE: AAAA
I
I
MM/DD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
...
Trunk Group
Trunk Number
Short Calls
Minutes
.-
MM/DD
I
I
xx
xxx
xx
xxx
HH:MM
LONG
Trunk Group
Trunk Number
Long Call
Minutes
f
I
I
I
I
=>
ACA CALL REPORT
=>
(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
xx
x
x
x
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- xxx
where
I SITE = Site identification
] MM/DD = Month/day
! HH:MM = Hour/minute
I Short Calls = Number of short trunk seizures
! Long Calls = Long trunk seizure
1 Minutes = How long it took before the trigger threshold was reached
I
Traffic Data
Polling Command
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
ACA CALL REPORT
or
i SITE: AAAA
I
HH:MM
SHORT
21.5 The traffic data polling commands are used to request an
immediate dump of the traffic data registers. Either the active or
passive registers can be polled. The active registers are the
registers used to store the results of the current traffic study
period and the passive registers store the data of the previous
traffic study period. Input format for the traffic polling commands
is shown below. The traffic data will be transferred without
header.
To poll the active registers, enter:
r-------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
[CNTL] As # [CNTL] B.
I
L-------------------------------------------------~
“s” is defined as the ASCII representation of the hexadecimal
site identity (site ID) defined in the data base (Table T6041).
M-44
6187
5210
I L-l 30200-l 001
To poll the passive registers, enter:
r-------------------------------------------------~
[CNTL] As ! [CNTL] 6.
L-------------------------_----____---------------------~
I
I
I
I
NOTE: Depress and hold the CNTL control key while entering A
and B in the traffic data polling command. Do not depress the
CNTL key when entering s, #, or !.
...
Time tif Day/Traffic
Study Command
..
2.16 The Traffic Data (TD) commands provide a means of
displaying and setting the time-of-day clock in the system, and
beginning and ending automatic traffic studies. The traffic data
scan rate, the format of and timing between traffic data reports,
and the site identification printed with each traffic data report are
all controlled by the data base. The format of a traffic data report
is shown in Figure 2.5.
The data base determines how frequently the system will
collect traffic information, and how often a traffic report will be
printed out (refer to data base software Table T6041). Note that
the automatic output indicator (Table T6041) must be set for the
reports to be generated continuously. The reports will continue
until terminated by the appropriate command. The traffic data
command input and output formats are shown in Table 2.2.
NOTE: The status command is used to display the current
reading of the time-of-day clock.
5210
8187
M-45
REG
LINE#
000
CONTENTS (10 COUNTERS PER LINE)
----
TOLL
RESTR
;-E&T.
x/C.
INVAL
NO.
DID
RESTR
0°’ lzD
ET
INV
AN#
KE
%s
---.
TIME
OUTS
002
STILL
BUSY
;lg;
----
!&.
i%EL
ATTENDT
CONSOLE
Oo3
capELDLs
LEVEL
1 WTG
LEVEL
2 WTG
TIME
OUT
----
LOOP
ATTEMPT
0 0 4
____
____
LOOP
USAGE
MISC.
ATTEMPTS
...
005
(2,ONSL.
CON’&
#2
CONSL
#1
FNSL
006 LINE
.....
.....
ACOF
RESTR
CALL
PARK
CALL
HOLD
SIL
HOLD
---.
____
----
.....
....
.,...
CONF CALL
STORE
TONE
DETEC
---.
DIGIT
STORE
----
DTMF
CONF CALL
STORE
TONE
DETEC
---.
DIGIT
STORE
008 - - - -
DTMF
CONF CALL
STORE
TONE
DETEC
----
DIGIT
STORE
007
-.
009
PECO
____
____
----
----
----
RING
USAGE
0’0
PECO
----
___-
_-__
____
____
RING
OVERFLOW
011
sILTAABR
OEY)
012 Kii
NCS
CSAT
CSN
OOR
013
INV
PORT
ALR
QUED
014
----
0 1 5
AIOD
BLOCKED
LLsAEB
ONLY)
MISC
INC TRK
CALLS
PECO
___-
____
____
____
____
---_
%ssNN
%SN
%ED
INV
INV
NETW STATE
INV
PORT
BAD
LINK
INV
AI-l-
-___
____
____
_----
-___
-_-_
i&Y
D M
HGC
:!NW
CL
____
INT
LEVEL 3
016 TGOO
TGOl
TG02
TG03
TG04
0 1 7
TGlO
TGll
TG12
TG13
0 1 8
TG20
TG21
TG22
TG23
0 1 9
TG30
TG31
TG32
TG33
0 2 0
TG40
TG41
TG42
TG43
0 2 1
TG50
INV
STATE
NOT
QUED
INV
OFST
TS
LOCK
INV
TS
____
TG05
TG06
TG07
TGO6
TGO9
TG14
TG15
TG16
TG17
TG16
TGl9
TG24
TG25
TG26
TG27
TG26
TG29
TG34
TG35
TG36
TG37
TG36
TG39
TG44
TG45
TG46
TG47
TG48
TG49
TG57
TG58
TG59
TG51
TG52
TG53
TG54
TG55
TG56
022 TG60
TG61
TG62
TG63
......
......
.. . . . .
023 TGOO
TGOl
TG02
TG03
TG04
TG05
TG06
TG07
TG08
TG09
0 2 4
TGlO
TGll
TG12
TG13
TG14
TG15
TG16
TG17
TGl8
TGl9
0 2 5
TG20
TG21
TG22
TG23
TG24
TG25
TG26
TG27
TG28
TG29
TG31
TG32
TG33
TG34
TG35
TG36
TG37
TG36
TG39
027 TG40
TG41
TG42
TG43
TG44
TG45
TG46
TG47
TG46
TG49
028 TG50
TG51
TG52
TG53
TG54
TG55
TG56
TG57
TG56
TG62
-,-G63
-__-
----
----
TG59
----
026 TG30
029 TG60
TG61
Figure 2.5
M-46
____
____
RING
ATTEMPTS
ILsAEB
ONLY)
DIGIT
T/OUT
____
DTMF
‘%E
MISC.
USAGE
_-__
CONF.
RESTR
8187
____
____
.. . . . .
Traffic Register Layout
5210
REG
LINE#
~~~L~RK
...
EGTERK
INC/OTG
ATB
8$@
TRK
ZAGE
CONTENTS (10 COUNTERS PER LINE)
030 TGOO
TGOl
TG02
TG03
TG04
TG05
TG06
TG07
TG08
TG09
0 3 1
TGll
TG12
TG13
TG14
TG15
TG16
TG17
TG18
TG19
032 TG20
TG21
TG22
TG23
TG24
TG25
TG26
TG27
TG28
TG29
033 TG30
TG31
TG32
TG33
TG34
TG35
TG36
TG37
TG38
TG39
034 TG40
TG41
TG42
TG43
TG44
TG45
TG46
TG47
TG48
TG49
0 3.~_5 T G 5 0
TG51
TG52
TG53
TG54
TG55
TG56
TG57
TG58
TG59
__-_
TG04
TGlO
036 TG60
TG61
TG62
-i-G63
037 TGOO
TGOl
TG02
TG03
0 3 8
TGlO
039
TG20
TGll
.TG21
TG05
TG06
____
TG07
____
TG08
RLT
TG09
TG12
TG13
TG14
TGl5
TG16
TG17
TG18
TG19
TG22
TG23
TG24
TG25
TG26
TG27
TG28
TG29
TG31
TG32
TG33
TG34
TG35
TG36
TG37
TG38
TG39
041 TG40
TG41
TG42
TG43
TG44
TG45
TG46
TG47
TG48
TG49
042 TG50
TG51
TG52
TG53
TG58
TG59
043 TG60
TG61
TG62
TG63
044 TGOO
TGOl
TG02
TG03
TG04
TG05
TG06
TG07
TG08
TG09
0 4 5
TGll
TG12
TG13
TG14
TG15
TG16
TG17
TG18
TG19
046 TG20
TG21
TG22
TG23
TG24
TG25
TG26
TG27
TG28
TG29
047 TG30
TG31
TG32
TG33
TG34
TG35
TG36
TG37
TG38
TG39
048 TG40
TG41
TG42
TG43
TG44
TG45
TG46
TG47
TG48
TG49
0 4 9
TG51
TG52
TG53
TG54
TG55
TG56
TG57
TG58
TG59
TGlO
TG50
TG54
____
050 TG60
TG61
TG62
TG63
051 TGOO
TGOl
TG02
TG03
0 5 2
TGll
TGl2
TG13
TG14
053 TG20
TG21
TG22
TG23
TG24
054 TG30
TG31
TG32
TG33
TG34
055 TG40
TG41
TG42
TG43
TG44
056 TG50
TG51
TG52
TG53
057 TG60
TG61
TG62
TG63
0 5 8
BUS1
----
____
____
____
TGlO
BUS0
(GET STARTED FILE)
____
TG04
TG54
____
BUS4
TG55
____
____
TG56
____
____
TG57
____
____
____
____
---_
RLT
TG06
TG07
TG15
TG16
TG17
TG18
TGl9
TG25
TG26
TG27
TG28
TG29
TG35
TG36
TG37
TG38
TG39
TG45
TG46
TG47
TG48
TG49
TG58
TG59
TG05
TG55
____
TG56
____
TG57
____
TG08
____
TG09
RLT
BUS6
BUS7
----
____
_-__
____
____
-.__
____
____
BUS5
(EXPANSION FILE)
----
____
060
----
____
____
____
_--_
____
____
-___
.___
061
----
____
____
____
____
____
.___
____
--__
____
0 6 2
BUS0
BUS1
(GET STARTED FILE) ----
BUS4
BUS5
(EXPASION FILE)
BUS6
BUS7
----
____
----
063
----
____
__._
.___
____
____
____
__..
____
____
____
_.__
____
____
____
____
__._
064
----
065
----
____
____
_-__
____
-___
-___
____
____
Figure 2.5
5210
____
040 TG30
059
ZF
____
8187
_-__
_.-_
Traffic Register Layout (Continued)
M-47
Table 2.2
Traffic Data Commands Input and Output Formats
INPUT FORMAT
M-48
OUTPUT FORMAT
TD DT.- to display the date and time of
day
xxIyy/zz nn : nn
TD DT xx/yy/zz nn:nn - to change the
time-of-day clock.
DT xx/yy/zz nn : nn ? EXECUTED
TD BS. - to-begin a traffic study
--
BS site xx/yy/zz nn/nn aa bbb
cccc dddd/eeee/: Y. EXECUTED
TD ES.- to end a traffic study
ES site xxlyylzz nn:nn aa bbb cccc
dddd/eeee/:? Y.EXECUTED
where
where
xx = the month
Y Y = the day of the month
zz = the last two digits of the year
nn:nn = the time of day in hours and
minutes in 24-hour format
site = the data-base controlled ID
xxlyylzz = the month, day, and
year request is made
aa = the number of minutes between automatic traffic data
dumps
bbb = the number of seconds
between each traffic scan
cccc = the number of scans
between traffic data dumps
dddd/eeee = the first and last
addresses of the traffic registers
Y. is entered by the user.
8187
5210
FTM 0184
The following information is being supplied to clarify the operation
of the traffic data facilities on the OMNI SI in areas of:
l
l
l
All trunks busy
Overflow
Usage
ATB (lines 41-47 in traffic layout) - Pegging occurs each time
the last available trunk (defined as the last trunk in the idle trunk
state) is changed from idle to any other trunk state. It is valid to
have ATB pegged for an incoming only trunk group, an outgoing
only trunk group,. or for a 2-way trunk group.
OVF (lines 48-54 in traffic layout) - Pegging occurs when the
system tries to use a trunk group which has all trunks busy. It is
valid for a 2-way trunk group or an outgoing only trunk group to
peg this count. It is invalid to have an incoming only trunk group
peg this counter. It is pegged when the system tries to use a
trunk in the trunk group which has all trunks busy.
Usage will be shown if:
1. The call was properly pegged for the number of calls, but this
was during a previous scan period, and the call stayed up
throughout successive scans. This would give usage with no
calls to the trunk group.
2. The trunk is implemented in data base and exists physically,
but is not connected to a CO trunk. This is primarily a problem
with Ground Start trunks going to the “incoming preseized”
trunk state. The usage scan sees the trunk as not idle, or
maintenance busy.
3. Trunks are in the “system out of service” state (trunk state 13).
This will show up as usage with no calls to that trunk group.
This applies to the following cases:
a. The trunk and trunk group exists in data base, but the
trunk(s) are marked as unequipped in T5551 when the
system comes up.
b. Whenever the PEC goes out of service, all the trunks in it will
will placed in a system out-of-service state.
c. If a Tl alarm occurs, all trunks in that Tl span will be placed
in a system out-of-service state.
NOTES:
1. Maintenance busy trunks are not counted in the usage
counts.
2. If the data base is set up correctly, it is possible to have
usage counters pegged up even though no calls have been
made.
5210
8187
M-49
TL-1 3Uzuu-I
UUI
Display Command
2.1.7 The display command (Line, Trunk, Call State) is used to
list the addresses and data of the tables listed below:
T4170
. T4160
. T8941
. T8944
. T1390
l
Line State Table
Line Call Store Link Table
Trunk State Table
Trunk Call Store Link Table
Call Store Table
This information is used in call tracing and is shown in section
6.0.
The formats of the display commands are shown in Table 2.3.
M-50
8187
5210
Table 2.3
Display Command Input and Output Formats
Iisplay Line State:
Input
DISPLAY LINE DN STATE
._.
output
PAGE
_--__-_ .2xx
tvherer
ADDRESS
-_----_-_____
YYYY
DATA
- - _ - - -- - zz
XX = page ID (DO, D2, D3, D4, D5,06, D7)
._ YYYY = address of line state
ZZ = present state (see Table 2.4 for CEC Line State Codes)
display Line Call Store Link:
Input
DISPLAY LINE DN CSLINK
OutPut
PAGE
---m--v
xx
Nhere:
ADDRESS
-m------m-__YYYY
CS#
--zz
PAGE
--------AA
CS ADDR RANGE
__--_---_--____---_______
BBBB-CCCC
XX = page of line call store link
YYYY = first of two addresses of line call store link
ZZ = call store number in decimal
BBBB = start address of call store
CCCC = end address of call store
Output
Nhere:
5210
PAGE
------
ADDRESS
-------------
xx
YYYY
CS#
---
PAGE
-- - -- - -
CS ADDR RANGE
---------------
IDLE-NOT LINKED
XX and YYYY are as above
idle-not linked means the line is not presently linked to a
cal I store.
8187
M-51
Table 2.3 Display Command Input and Output Formats (Continued)
Display Trunk State:
Input
DISPLAY TRUNK STATE
where:
.= system trunk number in decimal (O-63).
=-Output
PAGE
------xx
-
where:
ADDRESS
------------YYYY
DATA
---_----22
XX = page ID (DO, D2,03, D4, D5,06, D7)
YYYY = address of trunk state
ZZ = present trunk state (see Table 2.5 for CEC Trunk State Codes)
Display Trunk Call Store Link:
Input
DISPLAY TRUNK CSLINK
Output
PAGE
-- - - - -xx
where:
ADDRESS
---------_-_YYYY
CS#
--zz
PAGE
_-------AA
CSADDR RANGE
------------_-----------BBBB-CCCC
XX = page of trunk call store link
YYYY = first o two addresses of trunk call store link
ZZ = call store number in decimal
AA = page of call store (DO, D2, D3, D4, 05, D6, D7)
BBBB = start address of call store
CCCC = end address of call store,
or
where:
M-52
output
PAGE
------
ADDRESS
---_________-
xx
YYYY
CS#
---
PAGE
-- - - - - -
CS ADDR RANGE
____----_-_____
IDLE-NOT LINKED
XX and YYYY are as above
idle-not linked means the line is not presently linked to a
call store.
8187
5210
.b
Table 2.3
I”“-“”
.““.
Display Format (Continued)
Display Call Store Address:
,lnput
DISPLAY CSADDRESS
where:
= call store number in decimal
output-
-..
PAGE
CS ADDR RANGE
..------ xx
----------_-------------BBBB-CCCC
where:
XX = page lD(D0, Dl, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7)
BBBB = start address of call store
CCCC = end address of call store
Table 2.4
CEC Line State Codes
LINE STATE
CODE
I Line idle
1Line ringing
02
Line busy
03
Line digit collection
04
Call-back in progress
05
Call-back ringing
06
Line locked out
07
Line maintenance busy
08
Staff for call-store assignment
09
Line stall (idle)
1Line stall (off-hook)
I
5210
1 Line off-hook recovery
06
8187
I
M-53
:
Table 2.5
CEC Trunk State Codes
CODE
I
TRUNK STATE
01
Incoming pre-seized trunk
02
Incoming mishandled trunk
03
Incoming FX trunk wait for resources
04
Incoming not answered (idle)
05
incoming loop not answered (idle)
06
Incoming busy (idle)
97.
Incoming signaling A
08
Incoming signaling 8
09
) Incoming dialing (idle)
OA
Incoming delay dial wait
08
Outgoing start dial wait
oc
I Outgoing wink start wait
OD
Outgoing busy (idle)
OE
Outgoing guard after release
OF
Outgoing immediate dial
10
Outgoing glare check
1
Recorder Announcer message interval
12
Incoming seizure stall
13
System out of service (PEC out of service)
Outgoing wait for disconnect, PBX release first
M-54
15
Retry, put in service
16
Outgoing pre-seized
17
Spare
18
Outgoing dialing
19
Outgoing busy (busy)
1A
Outgoing not answered
18
Outgoing wink start time
1c
Panel Maintenance busy
1D
Not busy
8187
5210
.- .----- .--.
Table 2.5
CEC Trunk State Codes (Continued)
CODE
TRUNK STATE
I
1E
1F
System busy
20
Incoming not answered (busy)
21
_.
....
1 Incoming loop not answered (busy)
22
Incoming busy (busy)
23
incoming dialing
24
I
1 Maintenance busy
.*
Incoming dialing (busy)
25
Recorder Announcer start
26
Recorder Announcer message cycle
27
Call recovery trunk off-hook
28
CAS Main ACD recorded announcement start
29
2A
Maintenance Commands
I
1 CAS Main ACD recorded message cycle
Nailed
I
connection
2.2 Maintenance commands are used to take suspected
defective lines, trunks, stations, or cards out of service. An
individual defective line, trunk, etc. can be taken out of service
without affecting the operation of the system. The defective unit
can be placed back in service after maintenance. The following
are the maintenance commands available in the system:
* Force commands
l
Memory watch command
l
Put commands
* Test commands
0 Trace commands
0 Unlock commands
Software Identity
Method
5210
The Software Identity (SID) for a line or trunk must be determined
before using the PUT or FORCE SID method of maintenance
command entry; however some commands such as FORCE
DN...OS. or FORCE TR CI...OS. do not require SID.
8187
M-55
Software Identity
Calculations
For initial installations, the SID number for lines or trunks can be
found in the Cable Pair Listing - Table in TL-130400-1001
Use the decimal listing under each line or trunk number.
1. To calculate the SID for lines use R C Table 221 and the
following calculation:
SID = RC Table 221 primary identifier x 8 + circuit number; or
__
SID = Line card’s position number in the Line Card Address
Table T2541 x 8 + the circuit number; where:
VCIP, DVCIP, VPLC (types VPLO and VPLl), and VPLC2 (type
VP20 and VP21) cards are treated as voice cards
2: To calculate the SID for ports, use RC Table 22 and:
SID = RC Table 221 secondary identifier x 8 + circuit
number,where VCIP, DVCIP, VPLC (type VPLO and VPLl), and
VPLC2 (type VP20 and VP21) cards are treated as data cards
To calculate the SID for the CIP, use the following calculation:
SID = RC Table 221 primary identifier x 8 + circuit number
3. To calculate SID for trunks, use the following calculation:
SID = Trunk circuit’s position number in the Trunk Card
Address Table T2581
4. To calculate the SID for DTMF receivers:
SID = DTMF receiver’s position number in the DTMF
Receiver Address Table T2661.
5. To calculate the SID for conference cards:
SID = 0 if conference card is in Conference Card 0 Address
Table T2741
SID = 1 if conference card is in Conference Card 1 Address
Table T2742.
NOTE: All SID calculations and entries must be in decimal.
Fault Code responses given by the system are in hexadecimal
and must be converted to decimal prior to the SID calculation or
entry.
M-56
8187
5210
- .----- .--.
Force In Service
Out of Service
Command
Featurephones
2.2.1 The FORCE command can be used to force
devices and/or circuits into the maintenance busy state
when not idle. Removing a device from service using the
FORCE command takes the device down unconditionally.
2.2.1.1 To force an Analog or Digital Featurephone connected to
a CIP, DCIP, or DVCIP port in service .or out of service, enter the
following:
-------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IS.
FORCE CIP DN
OS.
or
IS.
FORCE CIP PORT < pet > < port>
I
I
I
I
OS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
/ where
I C directory-no. > = three- or four-digit directory number
I
of a Featurephone
I
I Cpec> = 0
I = oto127
I
I
I
I
I
t------_-_----------------------------------------------,
NOTES:
1 Port number is derived by relative CIP card number x 8 +
circuit number on card. The relative CIP card number is
determined by the card’s position in the Featurephone Data
Link Information Table T7053-0.
2. For the DVCIP card, circuit numbers are defined:
Voice
0
2
5210
8187
M-57
.- .__--- .--
To force a Digital Featurephone, with voice application only,
connected to a VPLC2 (type VP20) port out of service, enter the
command given below:
~-------------------------------------------------------.
I
I
IS.
;
I
I
I
I
FORCE DN C directory-no, >
OS. i
or
I
I
I
II
I
F O R C E DIFP
OS. ;
I
I
I
I
-I I where
I
I
I
I
I
/ < directory-no, > = three- or four-digit directory number
I
of a Featurephone
I = 0
I = AtoD
i = oto11
:I = oto7
L-------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
To force a Digital Featurephone with the data option connected to
a VPLC2 (type VP20) voice and data combination port out of
service, enter the command given below:
r----------------------------------------------/
IS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
FORCE DN
OS. ;
or
I
IS.
FORCE DFPAPM
:
I
OS. ;
,
I where
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/ = three- or four-digit directory number
I
of a Featurephone
I = 0
I Cgrp> = AtoD
I < s l o t > = oto11
/ = oto7
L------_----------_-------------------------------------~
M-58
8187
5210
.-
Line Cards with
Featurephones
.-“-WV
.--.
2.2.1.2 To force a CIP, VCIP, or DVCIP interface card in
service, enter the following:
I -------em
-------------------------------------------
IS.
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
; where
.-
II
I
FORCE CIP CARD < pet >
I
I
II
I
OS.
I
I
I
I
,
I
; = 0
; = 0 to 15
To force the VPLC2 (type VP20 or VP21) card out of service,
enter the command given below. This command causes all
ports on the card to be placed out of service regardless of port
type (voice, data, or voice and data). for VPLC2 cards with data
ports, a maintenance request is sent to the ADMP. The
command input is as follows:
r------------------------------------------------
IS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FORCE VPLC < pet > < grp > C slot >
OS.
I
I where
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 = 0
= AtoD
I
I < s l o t > = oto11
I
L---------------------------------------------------------------,
Trunks
2.2.1.3 To force a trunk circuit from active to maintenance busy
using the physical location, enter the following:
I---------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 FOWXTRUNK CIRCUIT < pet > < grp > OS.
I
I
; where
f Cpec> = 0
I = oto11
f -= 0 to 3
l--------------------------------------_------------------------~
5210
8187
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
M-59
To force a trunk circuit from active to maintenance busy suing
the SID, enter the following:
I-----‘----‘--------‘-------------’---------------------------------,
II
i FORCE TRUNK SID
OS.
II
II
I
; where
II
; = 0
II
; = Trunk circuit SID relative to the PEC: 0 to 63
I
I
_ _ r-----,----,-------_,-___L-__,-___,____-------------------------J
I
I
Attehdant and Busy
Lamp Display Unit
2.2.1.4 To force an Attendant Console in service or out of
service, enter the following:
I-----‘-------I-------------------------------------------------,
I
IS.
I
1FORCE CONSOLE < attendant console >
II
I
I
f where
I
i = oto1
OS.
I
I
II
II
II
I
II
I
I
L----------,-------__--__---__-----------------------------------------,
To force Busy Lamp Display Unit (BLDU) in service or out of
service, enter the following:
,---------------------------------------------------------------.
IS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
FORCE BLDU
I
I
I
OS.
I
II
j where
II
I = 0 (only)
I = 1,2
L---------------------------------------------------------------,
Agent Instruments
2.2.1.5 To force an Agent Instrument in service or out of service,
enter the following:
r----- ----------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
IS.
I
II
i where
FORCE AGENT
OS.
I
I
8187
II
II
II
II
II
I
I
I
IL-----_------------______--___------------------------------------------,
= 0 to 191
M-60
I
5210
Force Download and
Load Commands
2.2.1.6 Certain devices in the system require downloading
software from the disk into remote processors. These devices
are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Digital Integrated Featurephone (DIFP)
Digital Integrated Featurephone with Data Option (DFPAPM)
VCIP and DVCIP cards
Asynchronous Packet Manager (APM)
Synchronous Packet Manager (SPM)
VPLC2 card (type VP20 or VP21)
Universal Controller Board (UCB) DCP and NIC cards
ADMP card
The force download command is used to load Featurephone
control software into 2 and 3 above. The load command is used
to load Featurephone control software into 1 and 6. It can also
be used to load data call control software into 2, 4, 5, and 7, and
administrative software into 8.
Download to any of the card types involves a complete reload of
the device. Download to a Digital Featurephone involves sending
only data unique to the featurephone (i.e., directory number, etc.).
5210
8187
The format of the force download command is as follows:
r--------------------------------------------------I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
j FORCE DOWNLOAD C pet > < sid > .
I
or
I
I FORCE DOWNLOAD DN C directory-number >
I
I
; where
I
I
I Cpec> = 0
I = Software ID (SID) of a featurephone to
I
download (0 to 225).
I
I < directory-number > = three-or four-digit directory
I
number of the featurephon to be downloaded.
I
I
/ FORCE DOWNLOAD
I
I
I where
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INTERFACE
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Cpec> = 0
I = Software ID of a Digital Featurephone
I
I
plugged into the card (o to 225).
I
I
I
I
I
I
L----------__-----__--------------------------------,
The format of the load command is as follows:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LOAD C pet > OP.
where
< device > = ADMP, DCP, VPLC, NIC
or
L O A D Cpec> Cgrp> < s l o t > O P .
where
I
I
= SPM, APM, DIFP, DFPAPM
/
I
or
/ LOAD DN
I
I
I
I
where
= three- or four digit directory
number of a Digital Featurephone connected to a
VPLC2 circuit.
= = 0
Cgrp> = A to D
= oto11
I
= oto7
L--___-_________________________________------------~
M-62
8f87
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5210
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTES:
1. When a download to a card is completed, each of the
individual Digital Featurephones plugged into the card is
downloaded with data unique to the Digital Featurephone.
2. Download to a VCIP or DVCIP card puts all ports on the card
out of service until the download is complete.
3. For LOAD DIFP ALL command, the PEC number is appended
to the response message.
The following paragraphs provide guidelines and sample sue of
these commands.
.=_
...
Downloading
Featurephones
2.2.1.7 Several versions of the force download and load
commands have been provided for downloading Featurephones,
depending on type and application. Usage guidlines are
contained in Table 2.6.
Table 2.6 Download Con nn nands for Featurephones
Featurephone
Type/Application
Command
Version
Digital (without Data Option
System Voice
FORCE DOWNLOAD...
PD-200
LOAD DN...
Digital (with Data Option)
Voice Reload Only
System Voice
PD-200
(No separate command)
FORCE DOWNLOAD...
Data Reload Only
CD-1 00
(No separate command)
PD-200
LOAD DFP/APM...
Voice and Data Reload
CD-l 00
FORCE DOWNLOAD...
PD-200
LOAD DN...
LOAD DFP/APM...
NOTE; LOAD DN works with VPLC2 connected phones only
5210
8187
M-63
- .--- -- .--.
----------------------------------------------------,
LOAD DN < directory number >
M-64
8187
I
I
.
I
I
5210
I I-- IduLuu-
Downloading VCIP,
DVCIP, and VPLC Cards
I vu I
2.2.1.8 To download software into the VCIP, DVCIP, or VPLC
card, use the following command:
r--‘-------------------------------------------------,
I
I
j FORCE DOWNLOAD < pet > < sid > INTERFACE
I
I
; where
; Cpec> = 0
; = Software ID of a Digital Featurephone plugged
1 _ i_nto the card (0 to 225).
- - ------____--------------------------------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
:
To download software into the VPLC2 (type VP20 or VP21) card,
use the following command:
r------------------------------------------------------------------
I
I
I
i LOAD VPLC OP>
I
I
I where
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
I
, = 0
or
I = AtoD
FORCE DOWNLOAD < pet > > sid > IN >
IL-------------------______-____---------------------------------------------~
= oto11
I
I
I
I
NOTES:
1. When a download to a card is completed, eacx of the
individual Digital Featurephones plugged into the card is
downloaded with data unique to the Digital Featurephone.
2. Download to a VCIP, DVCIP, or VPLC card puts all ports on the
card out of service until the download is complete.
3. Load VPLC will be denied if there are no voice devices
connected to the card.
5210
8187
M-65
.-
.----v
.w...
Downloading ADMP,
UCB (DCP),and
NIC Card
2.2.1.9 To download the ADMP, UCB.(DCP), and NIC card, use
the following command:
r---------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I LOAD OP>
I
I
II where
I
I
I = ADMP, DCP, NIC
I = 0
1 = AtoD
I < s l o t > = oto11
-----_--------------________--------------------------------~
...
..
Bulk Downloading
Commands
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2.1.10 Several bulk downloading commands have been
provided for situations in which all circuits and/or cards need to
be downloaded.
Force Download All. To force download all Integrated
Featurephones, VCIP, DVCIP, and VPLC2 cards in one PEC, use
the following command:
I
I
I
) FORCE DOWNLOAD < pet > ALL.
I
I
I where
I
I
) Cpec> = 0
L----__--______--____---------------------------------~
After the last equipped and in-service port on the last equipped
and in-service card receives the download command from the
pet, a download complete message will appear on the
maintenance TTY.
Example: 08.25 08: 35 DOWNLOAD COMPLETED BY PEC7
NOTE: Response 11’s in-service and maintenance out-ofservice can appear on the terminal after the download complete
message. This can happen if a phone received the download
command, but an oup-of-sync or some other problem
temporarily put the port out of service. Also, the message can be
put on the printer queue before the last card’s response 11 s.
8187
5210
I
I
I
f
II
I
I
Force Download Stop. To stop the force download all process,
the following command is used:
r ------_---_----------------------------------------1
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
FORCE DOWNLOAD 5 pet > STOP.
[ where
I
I
; = 0
L----- ___________---__-___---------------------------
:
Load DIFP All. To perform a load DIFP for all applicable
Featurephones in all PECs, the ALL form of the following
command may be used:
r----------------‘-----------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ALL.
I
I
LOAD DIFP
II
,I
STOP.
IL_--_--__-____--_,__---------------------------------~I
If LOAD DIFP ALL is typed, a request is sent to download all
Featurephones in each PEC. No request is sent to the data
switch. Messages are printed for each PEC download response,
e.g., IN PROGRESS PO, PEC NOT EQUIPT Pl, and IN
PROGRESS P2. As each voice circuit is downloaded, a
message, RESPONSE 11, is printed which indicates successful
completion.
If LOAD DIFP STOP is typed, a request is sent to stop download
of all Featurephones in each PEC. No request is sent to the data
switch. Messages are printed for each PEC STOP response,
e.g., IN PROGRESS PO, PEC NOT EQUIPT Pl, and IN
PROGRESS P2. Each PEC stops the downloading of
Featurephones.
Other ALL Commands. Other load command versions may be
used in bulk form in a similar manner to that of the LOAD DtFP
ALL command.
5210
8187
M-67
Memory Watch
Command
2.2.2 The Memory Watch (MW) command is used to display
data changes to an address on one of the CEC memory
pages. Memory watch can be initiated by either of the TTY
ports, but only one at a time. If the watch is in progress,
another watch cannot be initiated until the first memory watch
is turned off. Either TTY port can cancel the watch. Any one
of the CEC memory pages can be watched. The input/output
format for memory watch is shown in Table 2.7.
I
‘-..
/ INPUT
OUTPUT
j 1. Initiate MEMORY WATCH
II
MW ON C Page > C Address >
Watching
Present Data < Data >
/where
II = DO, Dl, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7,
I
IO, II,12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
I = Address to be watched
/ = Initial data at theat address
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MW < NDATA>
MW C NDATAB
II
I
I
I
I
I
1I
II
I
MW C NDATA>
= New Data
M-68
i 2. Initiate memory watch if already
II
on MW ON
Turn watch off first
/ 3. Cancel memory watch
II
MW OFF
Watch turned off
8187
5210
I
PUT Command
Entry
I--
l
e”L”“-I
“” I
2.2.3 Four methods are used to enter maintenance
commands into the system:
l
l
l
l
Physical location
Software identification
Directory number
Equipment number
The following are examples of each type of maintenance
command entry method:
....
Phy&al Location
Method
Enter the following information into the system:
NOTE: These forms of the PUT command cannot be used for
Integrated Featurephone lines.
I
I
I
I
I
I
PUT
LINE
T R U N K C A R D < s l o t >
DTMF
IS
OS.
or
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
PUT
LINE
T R U N K CERCUIT
DTMF
IS
cpec>
< c i r c u i t >
OS.
/ where
I = 0
I = oto11
1 = A to D
II = 0 to 7 for line circuits, 0 to 3 for trunk circuits, 0 to 3 for DTMF
IL-----------------------------------------------------------------------~
receivers.
For example:
r----------I
,
--------------------------------,
PUT LINE CIRCUIT 0 6 9 4 OS.
II
I
put tr ci 0 c 2 03ros.
IL---------------__--------------------------,
5210
8187
M-69
I I-- I3ULUU- I vu I
Software Identity
Method
Enter the following information:
r-----------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
1
I
I
I
. .
,
PUT
PUT
I
LINE
T R U N K S I D
DTMF
^ 1
I
./ where.
T R U N K CERCUIT
DTMF
IS
I
OS.
< g r o u p > < s l o t > < c i r c u i t >
OS.
.
I
/ = 0
I C-sic! > = 0 to 255 for line circuits, 0 to 63 for trunk circuits, 0 to 7 for DTMF
I
receivers
I
II
I
L-----__----_-----------------------------------------------------------,
For example:
I-------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PUT LI SID 0 255 IS.
I
PUT Tl?SlD 0 63 OS.
IL-------------------------------------------,
Directory Number
Mlethod
I
I
I
The directory number method must be used when changing the
state of line circuits associated with Featurephones. Enter the
following information:
r---- -------------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IS.
I
I
I
PUT LINE DN
I
I
I
OS.
I
! where
/
I
I
I
/ = XXXX (three- or four-digit directory number)
I
I
For example:
,------------------------------------------1
I
I
I-----_-------------------------------------~
PUT LINE DN 4112 OS.
M-70
EN37
5210
I
Equipment Number
Method
To change the status of a Release Link Trunk (RLT) using the
equipment number, enter the following information:
1
I
I
r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ‘ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I
I
I
...
IS.
PUT < equipment number >
I
I
I
I
I
I where
II
;__
= RLT
I
I
= 0 to = 15 for RLTs
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
OS.
L ---_-_______----------------------------------------------------------1
For example:
r-----------------------------------------------------1
I
I
I
I
L ------------------------------------------------------J
PUT RLT 15 OS.
System response when PUT command is successfully entered
is:
r------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
L ------------------------------------------------------J
MR 00 EO.
I
System response when PUT command is unsuccessfully entered
is:
r------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
L--------------_---------------------------------------J
MR 00 EO.
Unsuccessful completions result because active circuits (and will
be completed when the circuit becomes idle), or because
circuits are already in the maintenance busy (out of service)
state. If a PUT command is entered to place an entire card in
maintenance and one of the circuits on the card is active, the
system will respond MR 00 EA., and only the idle circuits on the
card will go to the maintenance busy state. When the active
circuit becomes idle, it will change to the maintenance busy state
and the system will respond with MR 00 EO.
5210
8/87
M-71
PUT Cancel
Command
When using a PUT or FORCE command after a prior PUT
command, the following system response may appear:
r-----------------------------------------------------I
MAINTENANCE COMMAND DENIED.
I
1
I
I
i_--------______---_____________________---------------j
This occurs when the prior PUT command has not been
completed because of waiting for circuits to become idle.
To avoid further waiting, cancel the PUT command by entering
the PUT CANCEL command. All circuits which have been put
out of service will remain out of service. Any circuits which were
not put our of service because of heing busy will remain in
service.
The command to cancel a PUT is:
r------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
PUT CANCEL COMPLETE.
L-----------______________-__--------------------------------j
I
If the PUT CANCEL command is successful, the response is:
r------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
II
PUT CANCEL COMPLETE.
If no PUT was in progress, the response is:
r------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
L ------------------------------------------------------J
PUT NOT IN PROGRESS.
Test Command
(Featurephone)
I
I
22.4 The TEST command is used to perform a hardware
diagnostic on an Integrated Featurephone. To perform the test,
enter the following:
r----------__---_--------------------------------/
1
j TEST DN .
I
I
I
/
I
or
I
I
i TEST PHONE < sid >.
I
I
I
where
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
< directory-number > = directory number
assigned to a Featurephone
= 0
= 0 to 255
~~~-_-------_---__-~~~-~-~----~~~~~~~~~~~~~---~~~~
Test failure is indicated by PORT IS OS. or COMMAND
COMPLETED ON maintenance terminal.
8187
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5210
----- ----
Unlock Command
2.2.5 UNLOCK command is used to unlock a Featurephone
which has been locked by the user. To unlock a Featurephone,
enter the following:
r---------------------------------------------------
I
I
i UNLOCK DN < directory-number > .
I where
I
I
I C directory-number > = directory number assigned
I
I
to a Featurephone
I~______________------------------------------------~
Memory Access
Commands
2.3 Mem6ry access commands can be used to control the
system configuration and make changes to the data base. This
paragraph covers the following memory access commands:
l
l
l
l
General Read and
Data General Read
Commands
General read command
General write command
Bulk input command
Hardware write command
2.3.1The General Read (GR) command can be used to read a
single system memory location or a string of consecutive
memory locations. If a string of memory locations is read, the
output pattern will continue until the entire string has been output.
A string is output in groups of 8 hexadecimal numbers: therefore,
only every eighth memory address will be printed on a line. For
example:
xxxx
4FCE
nn
00
nn
OA
nn
1
nn
F
nn
3C
nn
00
nn
12
nn
69
To stop the TTY output before completion of printing, momentarily
depress the escape (ESC) key.
5210
8187
M-73
I L- I3lJLuu-
I vu I
The format for the GR command is shown as follows
r---------------------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I GR < memory> .
I
j where
I
I
C memory > =
I
II
I
I
=
II
__
I
I
I
I
I
I
- I
I
.I
I
I
I
I
I
I
< e n d > =.
..
IO, II, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, DO, Dl, 02, D3,
D4, D5, D6, 07
Address to be read, or the beginning address
of a string of memory locations to be read.
i
I
I
I
I
I
Last address of a string of memory locations
to be read (not needed if reading only one
address).
I
KEY
IO
.
..17 =
CEC instruction memory pages
I
IL-----------------------------------------------------------------------~
DO . ..D7 =
CEC data memory pages
II
1
NOTE: Data pages can be read when security level 2 is used.
To read 10-17, security level 6 must be open.
The Data General Read (DGR) command allows the user to
selectively dump the contents of memory for many of the PD200 Data System processors. The maintenance terminal is
made unavailable for other maintenance functions while the DGR
command is executing. The system allows the user to
discontinue a dump request by using the ESC key. To display
the memory data for the hardware or device at the location
defined, enter the following DGR command:
M-74
8l87
I
I
I
I
5210
A
:DGR .
I
B
jwhere
II
< device > = ADMP, DCP, SPM, APM, DFPAPM, or NIC
II
AIB = refers to the A or B processor of the ADMP, DCP, and SPM
II
devices. (For ADMP, only A is supported.) Omit for other devices.
II
= oto7
II
= oto11
II
= 0 to 7 (Omit for ADMPan DCP.)
II
= starting memory address. Valid values: 000000-FFFFFF
II
= ending memory address. Valid values: 000000-FFFFFF
I
I
I
7
I
I
To dump 10 bytes of ADMP processor A: DGR ADMP A 0 D 02
0005CB.
I
To dump 1 byte of APM processor: DGR APM C 3 2 00043D.
I
I
I
5210
Address must contain all 6 digits including leading zeroes.
II
II
I
I
II
II
II
II
II
I
If only one byte is to be read, the ending address can be omitted.
(Address range may not exceed 100 hexadecimal locations.)
Examples:
8187
M-75
The system prints a message on the maintenance terminal to
indicate the status of the GR or DGR commands as follows in
Table 2.7:
Table 2.7 Status of the GR or DGR Command
r-----------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
i (a) SYNTAX ERROR
The original input command wording
or abbreviations were not correct.
j (b) CABINET NOT IN SERVICE
_
I
The CEC was not in service.
I
1
A command is already in progress from
an input terminal.
The command PEC number input is in
not equipped
i
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
1(e) PEC NOT INS
The command PEC number input is not in
service.
I
I
I
j (f) COMMAND COMPLETED
Request successfully completed.
I(g) IN PROGRESS
The system is executing this request.
When the request is completed, a
message COMMAND COMPLETED
follows.
I
.I / (c) COMMAND IN USE
I
-I
/ (d) PEC NOTEQUiPPED
; (h) COMMAND FAILED
I
1 )i) MR TIMED OUT
M-76
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
The request was not processed successfully.
i
I
I
The response was not received from the
ADMP in a system defined time.
I
I
1 (j) ADDRESS DOES NOT
I
MATCH DEVICE TYPE
The device is not at the given PEC group
I
slot address.
:.--- ________-----_~~_-------~~~~-~------~~~-~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~~~-~---~~~~~
[
6167
5210
I
I
I
:
TL-130200-1001
General Write
Command
2.3.2 The General Write (GW) command is used to change the
contents in memory at up to 16 consecutive memory locations
with the last change data entry followed by a period. The TTY
output will show the existing data in each memory location, the
new data to be entered, and a prompt when all requested
changes are displayed. If the changes are correct, the user
must enter Y followed by a period. If the changes displayed are
not correct, the user must enter N followed by a period to
terminate the input, and reenter the general write request.
Input/output formats for the GW command are as follows:
...
r-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------,
I
I
/ G.W.
,memory > < begin > < data >
I
I
where
I
I
I
I
I
I
=
lo, II, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, DO, DI, 02,
D3, D4, D5, D6, D7
1
I
I
I
< begin >
=
Address to be read, or the beginning
address of a string of memory
locations to be read.
1
I
< data >
=
One hexadecimal byte of data. (This
field can be repeated up to a maximum
of 16 values.
I
I
I
I
II
I
KEY
10 . ..17
DO...D7
1
I
I
I
CEC instruction memory pages
CEC data memory pages
L------------------------------------------------------------------------
The prompts and output from the GW command are as follows:
If new data (nn) is correct, type Y.
If not, type N.
xxxx = an address
aa
= the old data
nn
= the new data
zz
= page identity
NOTES:
1. Up to 16 addresses can be entered.
2. Data base addresses on DO, D2, D3, D4, PO-P7 can be
written when security level 2 is used. All other areas on DO,
Dl, D2, D3, D4, D5, D7, and all addresses on 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16, and 17, can be written when security level 6 is
open.
5210
8187
M-77
TL-130200-1001
Bulk Input
Command
2.3.3 The Bulk Input (BI) command is used to change the data
base data memory at up to 8 memory locations which need not
be consecutive. End each address-entry (excerpt the last) with
a BI GW < memory > . End the last address-data entry with a
period. After the last address-data entry and period are
entered, the TTY prints the existing data and the new data for
each address specified, followed by a prompt. If correct, the
user must enter Y followed by a period. If incorrect as shown,
the user must enter N followed by a period to terminate the input,
and must reenter the command with the correct data.
Format for the BI command is as follows:
r----------------------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
II
I
II BI [GW] < memory > < data > . . . < address < data > .
I
I
I
II
II
II
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I1
II
I
i
W’JI
where
< memory > =
Valid memory pages for the respective
commands (i.e., GW or HW)
=
Address to be written to
=
One hexadecimal byte of data
8187
II
i
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
5210
TL-I 30200-l 001
Hardware Write
Command
2.3.4 The Hardware Write (HW) command is used to write
hardware addresses into the PEC > The list of changes can
include from 1 to 16 data entries. The last data entry must be
followed by a period. The HW command format is as follows:
~-----------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
...
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I l-j.W < m e m o r y > < A D D R E S S > < d a t a >
I
I
I
where
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
< memory > =
PO, PI, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7
=
Address written to or the beginning
address of a string of memory locations to
be written to.
One hexadecimal byte of data. (This field
can be repeated up to a maximum of 16
values.)
=
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
II
i
!
I
I
I
NOTES:
1. A security level of 6 or higher is required.
2. The valid address ranges are:
PEC Hardware; 500-5FF
Channel Memory 0: 400-47F
Channel Memory 1: 800-87F
Maintenance Request
Commands
2.4 The Maintenance Request(MR) command is used to initiate
the maintenance functions. MR codes are entered into the
system using a maintenance terminal. MR codes are used as
part of the MR command system. The MR command input
format is:
r------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
MR xx.
L------------------------------------------------------J
The output format (prompt) to a maintenance request code (xx,
above) asks the user for verification that he desires to execute
the command requested.
5210
8187
M-79
TL-130200-1001
r--------‘-------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
__
...
MRxxnn
I
I
I xx aa (Y/N) > Y.Executed nn
I
I
I where
II
Ixx = the request code.
Inn = a response code.
laa = a status command code.
I Y. is entered by the user.
L-------------------------------------------’---------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Maintenance Request
Codes
CODE
PROGRAM
09
Write system data base and PEC data base
Force the peripheral circuit to maintenance
busy
set the peripheral circuit to maintenance busy
when idle
Release the peripheral circuit from
maintenance busy
Disable the alarm
turn off present alarms
Enable the alarms
Restart system diagnostics on in-service
CEC
OE
OF
10
11
12
13
26
Alarm Command Codes
M-80
2.4.1 The alarm codes and their functions are as follows:
l
Code 11 disables the alarm reporting circuits for alarms
indicated by steady lighting of the ALARM LED on the
Attendant Console. and any audible indication from devices
connected to relay 5 of the Attendant Interface (ATT12) card in
the PEG. Alarm reporting by the system remains disabled until
enabled by entering the proper code. Alarms will still be
recorded even while the alarm circuits are disabled. The fault
reporting system is not affected by the alarm codes. The
ALARM LED on the ESSD card will flash when a fault occurs.
l
Code 12 turns off any existing alarm indications (indicated by
steady lighting of the ALARM LED) and any device connected
to relay 5 of the ATT12 card). However, if the cause of the
alarm has not been corrected before executing this code, the
alarm indications will be repeated immediately afterwards.
l
Code 13 resets the alarm reporting system and enables the
reporting of any recent or future alarms. This code is used to
enable the alarm reporting circuit after it has been disabled
(inhibited) by a Code 11.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
MR Data Base
for Peripheral Circuits
2.4.2 When executed, maintenance busy codes remove
individual circuits from service so that maintenance can be
performed. the system data base is used to identify system
hardware and to designate its status. the characteristics of a
particular system are documented on a hard copy of the system
data base. the identity information needed by the system for a
maintenance busy code is:
@ PEC number (always 0)
0 Circuit type (Table 2.9)
Q Software Code ID Number per circuit
..
Table 2.8
Circuit-Type Codes for Maintenance Busy Functions
CIRCUIT TYPE
SOFTWARE
IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
CODE
Line
0
0
Trunk
1
00-3F
DTMF Receiver
1 Conference Bridge
0
F
F
I
2
I
00-07
I
I
3
I
00-01
I
Console Interface
4
00-01
Release Link Trunk (RLT)
5
00-OF
KEDU
6
00-01
7
Printer
-
I
00-01
I
F
Unequipped
Software codes (circuit ID numbers) are stored in CEC memory
on data page 0, designated as Table T2241 (Table 2.10).
Circuit identity information is written into specific memory
locations via the CPG program prior to system installation, or via
general writes or Recent Change afterwards. When a
maintenance busy code is executed, the system automatically
accesses the addresses listed in T2241 (Table 2.10). Therefore,
the circuit information must be entered into Table T2241 before
MR code is executed. Two bytes of data must be entered for
each circuit (1 through 8, Table 2.10). The first half of the first
byte identifies the PEC number and the second half identifies the
type of circuit. The second byte must have the software
identification number, which is a piece of software information
which represents a specific, individual circuit. (Refer to the hard
copy of the local data base.)
5210
8187
M-81
TL-130200-1001
,
Table 2241 )Table 2.10) has been filled in; the appropriate
maintenance busy code can be executed. the maintenance busy
codes and their functions are as follows:
-..
BIT POSITIONS
BYTE 1
ADDRESS
6322
l
Code E - Forces a peripheral circuit to maintenance busy. If
a call using the specified circuit is in progress at the time the
maintenance request is made, the call is dropped.
l
Code F - Sets a peripheral circuit to maintenance busy as
soon as any calls using the circuit are completed.
l
Code 10 - Sets a circuit which is maintenance busy to the
in-service status.
7
6
PEC 0
5
4
3
2
1
0
CIRCUIT
DATA
CIRCUIT TYPE
1
BYTE 2
6323
SOFTWARE ID
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6324
PEC 0
CIRCUIT TYPE
2
6325
SOFTWARE ID
6326
PEC 0
CIRCUIT TYPE
3
6327
6328
SOFTWARE ID
PEC 0
CIRCUIT TYPE
4
6329
632A
SOFTWARE ID
PEC 0
CIRCUIT TYPE
5
632B
632C
SOFTWARE ID
PEC 0
CIRCUIT TYPE
6
632D
6323
SOFTWARE ID
PEC 0
CIRCUIT TYPE
7
632F
6323
632F
SOFTWARE ID
PEC 0
CIRCUIT TYPE
8
SOFTWARE ID
5210
a/12-
CIRCUIT TYPE
k d tz...
c3
Trunk
DTMF Receiver
Conference Bridge
Console Interface
Release
Link Trunk (RLT)
KEDU
1
2
3
4
56
00-7F
00-07
00-01
00-o 1
00-o 1
00-04
Printer ’
7
F
00-04
__ Unequipped
L ...
CODE
SOFTWARE
BbD 87YE
lDENTIFICATIONg8bgg 8~g-a
t
RANGE
L
Table 3-3. Layout of Table T2241, Data Page 0.
BIT POSITIONS
BYTE 1
BYTE 2
11
S/%Q
&.&@a
“hu@,
if86 $ /
s-m/
TL-130200-1001
Successfully entered combined commands such as
r---------I
1
----------------------------------,
I
MRE
I
L--------------------------------------------A
will receive response output such as
---e---e,
________-__--m-0-e-m
r---------------
MR OE EO
I
L--------------------------------------------J
I
I
I
In summary:
MR = Maintenance Request Command
OE = “FORCE” the Peripheral Circuit to Maintenance Busy
EO = successful Completion
Disk Backup of
Room Status
2.4.3 The following room status dynamic data is backed onto
disk when the command
MR 2E
is entered from the system maintenance terminal:
Message Waiting
o Do Not Disturb
o Room-to-Room Blocking
l “wake-Up Calls
e Room Restrictions
l
The Room Status data is saved in disk file XVHCM.
After a system cold start, the following are loaded from disk:
Generic Software
Data Base
Saved Room Status
5210
8187
M-83
TL-130200-1001
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
M-84
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
ON-LINE MAINTENANCE
3.0 The on-line Maintenance software is a part of the primary
system software. It consists of menu-driven programs which
provide maintenance capabilities while the system is on-line
and handling phone calls. When a particular transaction is
selected and executed, those parts of the system handling calls
are bypassed so that service is not interrupted. All test results
are given in plain language rather than codes.
Some of the transactions simply call for displays of system
activities at that particular time. These displays provide
information which aids in maintenance and trouble shooting
decisions. Comparing several displays of a single transaction
can assist in isolating intermittent failures
..
Accessing On-Line .
Maintenance
3.1 In order to access the On-Line Maintenance feature, the
user must first access the System Options Menu. This procedure
is described in the following steps:
1. Type SL OL. (period)
The system responds:
SECURITY CODE >
2. Type four-character security code XXXX. (period)
NOTE: A security level of five or higher must be entered to work
with on-line maintenance.
The system responds:
OPEN AT LEVEL 5
3. Type RC . Recent Change (period)
The system responds:
r-------------------------------------------------,
I
I
0
I
I
SYSTEM OPTIONS MENU
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
1) SYSTEM RECENT CHANGE PRIMARY MENU ;
28) MAINTENANCE
,II
83) CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISOR OPTIONS
I
I
89) SAVE DATA BASE
I
I
X) END RECENT CHANGE
I
I
I
I
) ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER -- >28.
L-------------------------------------------------~
4. Type 28. (period) to select the Maintenance Options Menu.
The system responds:
I
I
I
TL-130200-1001
r--------‘--‘--------------------’------------------,
28
I
I
..
I
; 29
) 30
; 31
; 32
: 34
; 35
: 37
I
I 13
I 14
I 15
I
0
MAINTENANCE OPTIONS MENU
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
TOUCH CALL RECEIVER TEST
NETWORK TEST
TRAFFIC DATA OPTIONS
MEMORY TEST RESULTS
TRUNK SEQUENCE STATE DISPLAY
TOUCH CALL RECEIVER STATUS
DISPLAY
DATA SWITCH DEVICE STATUS DISPLAY
MASS STORAGE UTILITY
TABLE DISPLAY FACILITY
RETURN TO SYSTEM OPTIONS MENU
I
II ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER -- >
:
I
I
II
I
;I
II
II
II
II
I
I
II
I
I
I
II
I
L----------_----____-------__-----------------------~
5. When an item is selected from the Maintenance Options
Menu(a primary menu), the transaction is loaded into system
memory and executed. After that particular test or display is
completed, the system responds:
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (0
- 224)
With this prompt the user can end the exercise (type E period),
repeat the same transaction (type R period), or proceed to
another transaction (type another transaction number from zero
to 224 period).
If the user enters E, the Recent Change Options Menu
appears:
r---------------------------------------------
I
I
I
I
RECENT CHANGE OPTIONS
I
II
A) BEGIN
II
I
B) SAME ONE
I
I
I
C) BACK ONE
I
I
I
I
D) HELP
I
I
I
I
E) ERROR EXPLANATION
I
I
I
I
F) SYSTEM OPTIONS MENU
I
II
X) END RECENT CHANGE
II
I
I
ENTER THE LETTER OF YOUR CHOICE HERE>
i
I
L--------------_-----------------_-----_----------~
TL-130200-1001
The following explanations apply to the Recent Change Options
menu which is displayed after every On-Line Maintenance
Option transaction. This menu allows the user to select the next
transaction to enter.
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
F)
X)
BEGIN - Show the Recent Change System Options Menu
SAME ONE - Show the same menu just displayed
BACK ONE - Show the menu before the one just displayed
HELP - Show the Help Menu
ERROR EXPLANATION - Show the Error Explanation Menu
SYSTEM OPTIONS MENU - Show the Systems Option Menu
END RECENT CHANGE - End On-Line Maintenance
HELP (Option D) and ERROR EXPLANATION (Option E) are
used to assist the user in selecting additional transactions. The
HELP option cannot be used for certain applications, and a NOT
AVAILABLE prompt will appear.
An experienced user can omit the step of selecting transactions
from a menu by simply entering the correct transaction number.
Both the System Options Menu and the Maintenance Options
Menu offer a prompt which allows the user to input transaction
numbers. In this case, the user will see the following prompt:
ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER -- >
Maintenance Options
5210
3.2 The following paragraphs provide descriptions of
Maintenance Options Menu transactions:
TL-130200-1001
System Status Display
-..
3.2.1 System Status Display (transaction 29) shows the number
of currently allocated system resources. For example, if the
Narrow Serial Device Controller (NSDC) port is marked as a TTY
in the data base, The presentation is a snapshot display. To
update this display, the program would have to be repeated. If the
NSDC port is marked as a CRT, the presentation is constantly
being updated until, an EXIT TRANSACTION function
(CONTROL-C) is entered. A sample Real-Time System Status
Display follows:
r--‘-------‘--‘--‘---
I
REAL-TIME SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
I
I
f
II
I
f
I
I
-.
12:02
6/09/87
RESOURCES IN USE:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
----__-----------------------------------------
29
i
II
I
II
I
I
I
I
CALL STORES
0 0 0
DIGIT STORES
000
TOUCH CALL RECEIVERS
0 0 0
BUSY LINES
000
I
BUSY TRUNKS
000
II
II
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
iI
I
I
1
I
II
II
I
II
I
II
I
Ii
fI
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
f
I
TIME SLOTS:
II
I
II
II
PCM BUS 0
00
PCM BUS 1
00
PCM BUS 2
NOT AVAILABLE
PCM BUS 3
NOT AVAILABLE
I
I
PCM BUS 4
00
I
I
I
I
PCM BUS 5
00
I
:I
PCM BUS 6
00
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
PCM BUS 7
00
:I
I
II
DO
YOU
WANT
TO
REPEAT
THIS
FUNCTION
>
N.
I
I
: -------------------------------------------------------------------JI
M-66
6187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Touch Call
Receiver Test
-..
I
TOUCH CALL RECEIVER TEST
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
30
1
13:48 10/01/87
i
ENTER “ALL”, OR SINGLE TCR NUMBER > ALL.
PEC-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2.2 The Touch Call Receiver Test (transaction 30) is used to
test Touch Call Receivers (TCRs) in a system. The test runs on
one or all TCRs by passing DTMF tones through a network
connection and then verifying digit decoding. If a failure occurs,
the physical location is given in the test results. A sample
Touch Call Receiver Test Display appears below:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TOUCH CALL RECEIVER PEC SID
NUM
0
1
2
0
PASS BUSY FAIL
3
4
5
6
7
FAIL
NO ERRORS DETECTED (OR IF CRT)
DO YOU WANT AN ERROR SUMMARY > Y.
(ON SECOND PAGE IF CRT)
SUMMARY OF DETECTED ERRORS:
TCR #2 LOCATED IN PEC 0 GRP D UNIV SLOT 11 CIRCUIT 2
TCR #3 LOCATED IN PEC 0 GRP D UNIV SLOT 11 CIRCUIT 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-----------------------_--------------------------------------------J
DO YOU WANT TO REPEAT THIS FUNCTION (Y/N) > N.
TL-130200-1001
Network Test
3.2.3 The Network Test (transaction 31) checks the network
used to carry DTMF tones to TCRs. The entire network or part of
the network can be tested. A TCR is required in each file for
testing with network connections made through each of the file’s
24 channels (0 - 23) to verify passing of DTMF tones Following
is a sample Network Test Display:
r-------------------------------------------------------I
, .~-
I
I
...
31
NETWORK TEST
12:02 06/11/87
III
i ENTER ALL, OR PCM BUS # > ALL.
I
II
I
I
0
RESULT/CHANNEL 23
%sR pcM
# + ~~~--------~~~~-----
PCM BUS
RESULT
I
I
II ALL +ES-Z~SCHANNELS
FAILED
..........................................................
6
I r&Y
._ . BUS
AVAILABLE
I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I PCM BUS
NOT
AVAILABLE
IBB
B***B
I
FAILURE IN
CHANNEL(S
I..........................................................
t
I %k?C?fT
BUSY
I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I ~~~+;~OT
7
I B
3
4
5
I
PASS
i DO YOU WANT TO REPEAT THIS FUNCTION (Y/N) > N.
I
I
-------------------------------------------------------------------~
TCR I’N BUS
I
I
I
I
I
TL-130200-1001
Traffic Data Menu
Options Menu
3.2.4 The Traffic Data Menu (transaction 32) allows the user to
check traffic activities to determine if delays in system activity are
caused by faulty operation or by temporary peaks in traffic load.
The user selects the number of times that traffic data is collected
(scans) and the length of time that data is collected before
printing out automatically. The menu function may be repeated
manually to access updated traffic information.
The Traffic Data Menu provides the user with the following
options:
r-------------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
TRAFFIC DATA MENU
I
I
32
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A) CHANGE TRAFFIC COLLECTION PARAMETERS
I
I
I
B) DISPLAY TRAFFIC METERS
C) RETURN TO MAINTENANCE OPTIONS
I
I
f ENTER THE LETTER OF YOUR CHOICE HERE -- >
I
I
L------------------_____________________----------------------------,
Current Collection
Parameter Settings
3.2.4.1 Selection of Current Collection Parameter Settings
(transaction A) allows the user to enter or change real-time
system status parameters before displaying intercepts and
timeout calculations. The following real-time parameters are
set for maintenance purposes:
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
CURRENT COLLECTION PARAMETER SETTINGS
12:05 1 O/04/84
36
; AUTOMATIC DUMP: ON
; COLLECTION INTERVAL: 60 MINUTES
; INTERVAL BETWEEN USAGE SCANS: 100 SECONDS
I
i
I
I
;
;
;
I
I
ENTER NEW SETTINGS (PERIOD TO SKIP)
AUTOMATIC DUMP (ON-OFF) > ON.
COLLECTION INTERVAL (15-30-60) > 60.
INTERVAL BETWEEN USAGE SCANS (lo-100 SECONDS) > 100 SECONDS.
; DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (YIN) >
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i-------------------------------------------------------------------,
NOTE: During maintenance, allow 10 seconds between scans
before continuing a function.
TL-130200-1001
Traffic Meters
Menu
3.2.4.2 Selection of Traffic Meters Menu (transaction B) allows
the user to display the following specific traffic registers:
r-----------------------‘---‘--‘--”’----------------------------------------,
I
I
TRAFFIC METERS MENU
I
I
I
I
I
-..
I -=.
I
I
I
:
I
I
33
i
I
II
I
A) INTERCEPTS AND TIMEOUTS
B) DTMF, CONFERENCE, LINE RING, CALL AND DIGIT STORE
C) CONSOLE RELATED
i
I
I
D) TIME SLOT
I
E) TRUNK GROUP, RLT TRAFFIC
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
X) RETURN TO TRAFFIC MENU
I
I
I
I
I
i ENTER THE LETTER OF YOUR CHOICE HERE > A.
I
i ACTIVE OR PASSIVE BUFFER > ACT.
I
I
I
I
L---,,,--,-----_----________,,__________----------------------------J
M-92
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
The following are the contents of displays found in the Traffic
Meters Menu:
l
INTERCEPTS AND TIMEOUTS (Transaction A)
----
r-----------------------------------------------------
....
; PERIOD 11:30/l 2:00 1 O/04/87
I
I
I
INTERCEPTS
-.- I
12:05
:
I
I
I
INTERCEPTS
I
I
AND TIMEOUTS
1 O/04/87
TIMEOUTS
I
f TOLL RESTRICTED
0000
I
j FEATURE RESTRICTED 0000
STILL BUSY
0033
FIRST DIGIT
0027
: VACANT NUMBER
I
0000
NO ANSWER
0002
: INVALID NUMBER
0000
RECALL HOLD
0000
i DID RESTRICTED
0000
CALL PARK
0000
i CONFERENCE
t RESTRICTED
0000
CALL HOLD
0000
: ACOF RESTRICTED
0000
RLT HOLD
0000
! DIGIT TIMEOUT
0031
RLT STILL BUSY 0000
; AIOD BLOCKED
0000
RLT NO ANSWER 0000
I
I
i ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
TL-130200-1001
. DTMF, CONFERENCE LINE RING, CALL AND DIGIT STORE
(Transaction B)
r---------------------‘---‘----------’-------------------
; PERIOD 11:30/l 2:00
I
1 O/04/87
I
I
I
MISCELLANEOUS
12:05 1 O/04/87
I
I
I
. .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, -:.
I
ATTEMPTS USAGE
; LINE TO LINE
00525
I HUNT GROUP BUSY
03525
;DTMF
01625
00081
00000
00000
00000
00000
i CALL STORE
02982
01751
00000
i DIGIT STORE
01673
00110
00000
I
I
; LINE RING PECO
00100
00034
00000
i
I
I
.
C O NFEREN C E
OVERFLOW i
I
I
1
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
: ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
L-------------------------------------------------------------------J
o CONSOLE RELATED METERS (Transaction C)
r-------------------------------------------------------
; PERIOD 11:30/l 2:00
I
1 O/04/87
I
I
I
I
CONSOLE RELATED METERS
12:05 1 O/04/87
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONSOLE
I
I
I
I
ATTEMPTS
LOOP
USAGE
j CONSOLE #0
00000
00000
i CONSOLE #1
00000
00000
j CALLS QUEUED
0 0 0 0 0
i LEVEL #l WAITING
00000
; LEVEL #2 WAITING
0 0 0 0 0
I TIMEOUT
00000
;
I
i
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
; ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
L-------------------------------------------------------------------,
M-94
I
II
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
l
TIME SLOT TRAFFIC (Transaction D)
i PERIOD 11:30/l 2:00
1 O/04/87
i
I
TIME SLOT TRAFFIC
I
I
12:05
f
8125187
I
PCM BUS
USAGE
OVERFLOW ]
0
00000
00000
1
00000
00000
2
NOT AVAILABLE
3
NOT AVAILABLE
4
00000
00000
i
I
I
5
00000
00000
I
I
I
6
00000
00000
;
7
00000
00000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
f ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
5210
8187
M-95
TL-130200-1001
l
TRUNK GROUP , RLT TRAFFIC (Transaction E)
r - - - ‘ - - - “ ^ - - - - ‘ - - - ‘ “ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
; PERIOD 11:30/l 2:00 1 O/04/87
II
TRUNK GROUP TRAFFIC
i
I
I
I
12:05
I
....
1 O/04/87
.~_
: TRUNK
I GROUP
INCOMING
- - - - - - - - - -OUTGOING-
,
----wm-
i NUMBER
II
i
I
02
I
03
II
04
II
05
I
06
I
I
08
I
09
I
I
10
I
RLT
I
I
II
CALLS
USAGE
CALLS
USAGE
ATB
QVJ
00317
00046
00403
00098
00000
00000
00000
00076
00603
00000
00002
00135
00017
00000
00166
00155
00000
00008
00169
00002
00006
00125
00037
00000
00182
00149
00000
00001
00203
00295
00000
00000
00002
00000
00000
00114
00206
00099
00020
00002
00011
00030
00000
00000
00000
00099
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
L--,----------------------------------------------------------------,
RETURN TO TRAFFIC MENU (Transaction X)
Returns user to Traffic Data Menu
Return to
Maintenance Options
M-96
3.2.4.3 Selection of Return to Maintenance Options (Traffic Data
Menu transaction C) returns the user to the Maintenance Options
Menu.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Memory Test
Results
3.2.5 Memory Test Results (transaction 34) provides the user
with a status display of system memory tests. When a memory
failure is detected, the physical location of the faulty card
appears in the error message.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
.=.
I
..
I
II
I
MEMORY TEST RESULTS
17:22
09125187
- i PRE-LOAD MEMORY
TEST:- FAILURE DETECTED sdrk
..
34
i
III
II
II
II
I
i AT CEC INST MEMORY ADDRESS: 72E6, PAGE: 0, FAULT CODE: 19
I
/ CARD FB-17314-A LOCATION: FILE Y , SLOT 1
I
III
I
I STATIC MEMORY TEST:
NO ERRORS DETECTED
I
i DYNAMIC MEMORY TEST: NO ERRORS DETECTED
II
III
I
I
I
I
I
I
i DO YOU WANT TO REPEAT THIS FUNCTION (Y/N) >
I
L -------------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
TL-130200-1001
Trunk Sequence
State Display
3.2.6 Trunk Sequence State Qisplay (transaction 35) provides the
user with a plain language description of trunk sequence states.
A CRT display updates the trunk sequence states until
CONTROL-C is entered. Without a CRT, the display is updated
by repeating the transaction. No display will be shown for a trunk
number not in use.
r--------------------------------------------------------
I
II
I
II
I
...
REAL-TIME TRUNK SEQUENCE STATE DISPLAY
.=.
35
13:46 1 O/04/82
: ENTER STARTING TRUNK NUMBER (8 OPT. RANGE 1-14) > 23 5.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Trunk Number
I23
I 24
! 25
; 27
01
hi
1D
I
I
1
II
II
II
II
I
I
II
I
Sequence State
INCOMING PRE-SEIZED
OUTGOING WINK START TIME
OUTGOING START DIAL WAIT
IDLE
I
II
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO REPEAT THIS FUNCTION (Y/N) >
L-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
Touch Call Receiver
Status Display
3.2.7 Real-Time Touch Call Receiver Status (transaction 37)
provides the user with a status display of all system Touch Call
Receivers (TCRs). A CRT display updates the trunk sequence
states until CONTROL-C is entered. Without a CRT, the display
is updated by repeating the transaction.
r-----------------------------------------------------------------------~
I
!
I
I
II
I
I
’ PEC
; NUM
REAL-TIME TOUCH CALL RECEIVER STATUS
12:02 1 O/04/87
TOUCH CALL RECEIVER PEC SID
0
1
2
IDLE
....
BUSY BUSY
3
4
5
I
I
I
I
37
II
I
I
II
II
II
I
II
I
I
I
6
7
....
FAIL
I
l0
MAIN IDLE
II
I
I
I
II
; DO YOU WANT TO REPEAT THIS FUNCTION (Y/N) >
I
L-----------------------------------------------------------------------~
M-98
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Data Switch Device
Status Display
3.2.8 The Data Switch Device Status Display (transaction 13)
provides the user with in-service/ out-of-service information
for OMNI SI PD-200 Packet Line Cards and Remote
Processors. The user selects transaction A to check the status
of Packet Line Cards, transaction B to check the status of
Remote Processors. or transaction C to exit the menu.
Data Switch Device Status Display
r-------------------------------------------------------------------~
...
13
I
I
I
I
DATA SWITCH DEVICE STATUS DISPLAY
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A) PACKET LINE CARDS STATUS
I
I
B) REMOTE PROCESSORS STATUS
I
I
C) EXIT
I
TYPE THE LETTER OF THE DESIRED TOPIC >
I
IL-------------------------------------------------------------------~
Packet Line
Cards Status
3.2.8.1 Selection of Packet Line Cards Status (transaction A)
allows the user to monitor the in-service/ out-of-service status
of listed PD-200 Packet Line cards.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
PACKET LINE CARDS STATUS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I--m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CARD
TYPE
- - - - -
PEC
ADMP
BT
DCP
PBE
Fl
0
:
0
;:LO
DCPB
VPLl
RPTR
NIC
VP20
VP21
GRP
- - A
D
E
A
:
:
:
ii
0
0
:
D
I
I
UNIV
SLOT
- - -
STATUS
- - - - -
02
08
01
01
01
02
02
01
03
03
03
02
INS 00s
INS
00s
INS
00s
INS
00s
INS
00s
INS
00s
I
- - - -
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
II
I
I
DO YOU WISH TO SEE MORE (Y/N) >
L __---_--____________-----------------------------------------------
5210
I
I
8187
1
M-99
TL-130200-1001
Remote Processors
Status
3.2.8.2 Selection of Remote Processors Status (transaction B)
allows the user to monitor the in-service/out-of-service
status of listed PD-200 Remote Processor cards.
c-------------------------------------------------------------------.
I
-.
ff
t
TYE
II - - ‘ - -mm--m
-II =- DIFP
I
DFPAPM
I
SPM
t
APM
I
REMOTE PROCESSORS STATUS
UNIV
PEC
GRP
SLOT
CKT
_-_ -_
- -- -iti
:
A
E
D
;:
01
01
i
i
STATUS
---INS
INS
00s
INS
I
I
I
I
II
-DO YOU WSH TO SEE MORE (Y/N) >
I
L--------------------------------------------------------------------
Exit
Mass Storage
Utility Menu
II
I
i
II
III
I
II
I
3.2.8.3Selection Exit of (transaction C) of the Data Switch Device
Status menu allows the user to exit the menu.
3.2.9 The Mass Storage Utility Menu (transaction 14) allows the
user to control maintenance functions of the File Management
System (FMS). One function is to move files from the hard disk
to floppy disk, or from the floppy disk to hard disk. A second
function displays or changes FMS contents.
Security level 6 is required when working with FMS utilities .
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
14
I
II
II
:
!
II
I
I
I
II
I
II
I
I
I
II
MASS STORAGE UTILITY MENU
CURRENT DEVICE ASSIGNMENTS
;
II
II
I
I
0-10MBYTEDlSK
1 -NO DEVICE
2 - 800 K BYTE FLOPPY DISK
3 - NO DEVICE
4 - NO DEVICE
5 - NO DEVICE
6 - NO DEVICE
7 - NO DEVICE
TYPE THE LETTER OF THE DESIRED TOPIC > B.
A) DISK BACKUP
B) DISPLAY DEVICE CATALOG
C) EXIT
I
L-------------------------------------------------------------------,
;
i
:
i
I1
II
I
I
I
I
II
III
I
TL-130200-1001
Disk Backup
Option
3.2.9.1 Selection of the Disk Backup Option (transaction 14)
allows the user to transfer files from the hard disk to the floppy
disk, or from the floppy disk to the hard disk. The system
responds with the following menu:
..
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
DISK BACKUP
II
CURRENT DEVICE ASSIGNMENTS
I
I
I
I
0-10MBYTEDlSK
I
1 - NO DEVICE
I
I
2 - 800 K BYTE FLOPPY DISK
I
3 - NO DEVICE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4 - NO DEVICE
5 - NO DEVICE
’
I
I
6 - NO DEVICE
7 - NO DEVICE
;
TYPE SOURCE DEVICE (O-7) >O.
TYPE DESTINATION DEVICE (O-7) >2.
ENTER FILE NAME MASK (* : STRING /CHAR) >*.
REFORMAT DESTINATION DEVICE (Y/N) >Y.
TYPE LABEL FOR DESTINATION DEVICE (SCHARS) >Y.
I
1 DO YOU WISH TO EXECUTE THIS COMMAND >Y.
L---------
----------------------------------------------------------J
Current Device Assignments lists the hardware found in the FMS.
A lo-megabyte hard disk and an 800-kilobyte floppy disk drive
are listed here.
l
I
II
I
I
I
;
When working with the Disk Backup Option, the user answers
the following prompts:
1. SOURCE DEVICE - hard disk, enter 0; floppy disk enter 2
2. DESTINATION DEVICE - hard disk, enter 0; floppy disk
enter 2
3. FILE NAME MASK - single or multiple files to be
transferred
- the (*) wild card matches any string
- the (%) wild card matches any character
Example:
* = All files
“sv999 = All files ending with sv999
C% % % = All files four characters long and start with
letter C
G*= All files starting with letter G (all data base files)
4. REFORMAT DESTINATION DEVICE - Yes or No
- Yes reply destroys all data on destination device
- If reformatting, prompt for LABEL FOR DESTINATION
DEVICE will appear. This prompt will not appear if
reformatting is not entered.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TL-130200-1001
--
Label is used to identify disk if more than one copy
exists
-- Label limited to nine characters
l
If a backup floppy disk is wanted type “Y “, if not type “N “. A
new disk should be formatted and used for each backup
floppy disk. Use of old disks can affect usable space, and
cause security problems.
- If space runs out on a backup floppy disk, the following
prompt will appear:
FMS ERROR: NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK
- To override this prompt, type a period. The system will
respond:
MOUNT A FLOPPY - HIT. (PERIOD) WHEN READY
- System will display prompt for reformatting. Follow
instructions , and disk backup will continue. The system
will respond:
BACKUP COMPLETED, if the backup was successful, or
BACKUP FAILED, if backup was unsuccessful.
Device Catalog
Display Option
3.2.9.2 The Device Catalog Display Option (transaction 16)
allows the user to display selected directory or file contents of
FMS hardware devices. The system responds with the following
menu:
r---------------------------------------------------------
16
I
DEVICE CATALOG DISPLAY
CURRENT DEVICE ASSIGNMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
;
I
I
I
I
I
0 - 10 M BYTE DISK
1 - NO DEVICE
;
2 - 800 K BYTE FLOPPY DISK
3 - NO DEVICE
i
4 - NO DEVICE
5 - NO DEVICE
j
6 - NO DEVICE
7 - NO DEVICE
(
I
I
I TYPE THE DEVICE IDENTIFIER (O-7) > 0.
L------,,-----------------------------------------------------------~
l
Current Device Assignments lists the hardware found in the
FMS. A 10 megabyte hard disk, and an 800 kilobyte floppy disk
drive is listed here.
l
When working with the Device Catalog Display Option, the user
answers the following prompt:
I
I
I
I
TL-130200-1001
TYPE THE DEVICE IDENTIFIER (0 - 7) >
- DEVICE IDENTIFIER - hard disk, enter 0; floppy disk, enter
2. The system responds with the following directory:
r----------------------------------------------------------------
I
I
I
1
I
C
USED
R E A T E D
LAST UPDATED RD ;
I
I
;
: FM&LABEL
016
00001
0 0 0 0 1 15.04/86 16:44 15.04186 16:44 0 2 1 5
!
FMS$DIREC
032
00320
00320 15.04186
16:44 15.04/86 16:44 0 2 1 5
!
FMS$BADSP
256
00001
0 0 0 0 1 15.04/86 16:44 15.04/86 16:44 0 2 1 5
;
F.MS$ALMAP
256
00020
00020 15.04186 16:44 15.04/86 16:44 0 2 1 5
!
FMS$GENER
256
00104
00104 02.06/86 16:52 05.06186 15:lO 0 2 1 5
i
XVCECGEN2
XVCECGENl
512
01017
00262 02.06/86
00828
02.06186 16:42
16:44 03.06/86
04.06/86 08:41 0 5 0 6
08:07 0 5 0 6
I
XVPEC
512
00112
00106 02.06/86 16:44 03.06/86 08:07 0 5 0 6
)
XVFEATPH8
512
31/07/85 15:17
15:08 04/06/86 08:41 0 5 0 5
;
XVFEATPHl
512
00043
00045
00043 23/05/86
00045
512
05 05
;
XVFEATPHS
00053
00053 23/05/86 15:20
512
04/06/86 08:41 0 5 0 5
;
XVRCGSVR
00901
00794 02/06/86 16:03 03/06/86
09:lO 0 2 0 2
I
XVMDR
512
00256
00246 02/06/86 16:46 03/06/86 09:lO 0 5 06
i
ZVSBYUPDY
0512
16
01000
00017 02/06/86 17:13
00000
16:46 02/06/86
03/06/86 09:lO 0 2 0 5
;
XVHCM
00025
17:13 0 0 1 5
;
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------~
I CATALOG LISTING OF S3E$CECO
REC FILE
SECURITY
F I L E
SIZE
N A MSIZEE
WR
---
l
DEVICE = 10 MBYTE FIXED DISK
RECS
After writing the device directory, the system will provide the
following prompt:
ENTER COMMAND >
- The user responds to this prompt by entering the following
two-letter, UP, or END instructions:
(CO) - COPY .
= Make a copy of file.
(DE) - DELETE = Delete a file from this device
(DO) - DOWN < nnnnnn > = Display the next set of files
(RE) - RENAME = Rename a file
on this device
(SE) - SELECT = Select a file to display from
this device
UP < nnnnnn > = Display the previous set of files
END = End this program
TL-130200-I
001
For example, if the response SE is selected, the following file
dump occurs:
FILE: XVCECGENI ON 53EBCECO
RECORD SIZE = 512
RECO
-.....
FILESIZE
= 01017
DEVICE = 10 MBYTE FIXED DISK
RECORD USED = 00828
RD #OOOO
0000 40 7A 01 F4 30 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 83 02 D9 B6@ 0
0010 914C 4A 29 91 SF 00 00 03 02 00 00 F2 OC 00 00 LJ)
0020 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SE 06 82 20 00- 00 A
0030 00 00 07 3185 05 06 86 05 06 86 00 00 00 00 00 1
0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 1086lF2035
3E
5>
00502A-2B21 01 3D lD22232425262728293031*+!
= “#$%a’()01
0060 11 32 33 34 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 2E 2D 1 F B8 13 EO 23456789: ; 0070964895989AAO9AA89A2889608A6899 10 H
( ‘h
ENTER COMMAND >
.* After writing the file contents, the system provides the following
prompt:
ENTER COMMAND >
- The user responds to this prompt by entering the following
two-letter, UP, or END instructions:
(CH) - CHECKSUM = Calculate and update data switch
record checksum
(DO) - DOWN < number > = Display the next record, or
current record plus number
(RD) - RDOFFSET = Display this record
starting at offset
(WR) - WROFFSET = Change data
stored in the record
,
UP = Display the previous record or current
record-number
END = End this program
UP and (DO) DOWN scroll records within a file.
TL-130200-1001
File Management
System (FMS) Errors
When loading the FMS files into the system, certain errors may
be received. For example, “FMS error 14” is received. This
means that FILE D is not available for creation, for opening, or for
seizure. Refer to Table 3.1 for status code and explanation.
Table 3.1
FMS StatusCode and Explanation
EXPLANATION
file is not open for output
5210
8187
M-l 05
TL-130200-1001
Table 3.1
FMS StatusCode and Explanation (Continued
FMS STATUS
CODE
. 1
EXPLANATION
22
I write past physical EOF attempted
23
seek past physical EOF attempted
24
record sizes not equal
25
files open on device
26
FID not seized
27
] access is invalid
30
device not ready
31
device I/O error
32
I device
write protected
34
not allowed on mounted disk
35
no device attached
36
device is private
40
invalid commander number
126
command awaiting execution
command
M-l 06
6187
executing
5210
TL-130200-1001
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
GENERAL PRINCIPLES
..
4.0 Maintenance commands are input via the maintenance
terminal to designate particular parts of the system hardware as
“maintenance busy” so that system software will not try to use
that hardware during system operation. Hardware is out of
service when designated as maintenance busy. That piece of
hardware becomes available for maintenance purposes and can
be physically removed from the system and replaced with a
spare card. This will not cause interruption of service.
The maintenance terminal is also used to place parts of the
system back into service. However, the part is tested by the
system before it is placed back into use. When testing is
completed, the system outputs response codes to any attempts
to place equipment into service. A response code is outputted if
the attempt is successful, or if the equipment fails system testing
and is not placed into service. The responses are an aid to
maintenance and troubleshooting.
Preventive Maintenance
4.1 The system does not require regularly scheduled preventive
maintenance. Cabinet cooling is based on natural convection
with no fans or air filters to clean or replace.
System Voltage Checks
4.2 Voltage checks are performed as part of troubleshooting and
are discussed in the TL-130300-1001. Voltage adjustments
are set at the factory and should not be altered as a part of field
maintenance. Battery packs are checked during installation and
are charged by the system.
System Operation
Checks
Spare Cards
Quick Reference Chart
5210
4.3 System operation checks simply use the standard functions
of the system to ensure proper operation. Checks are usually
performed when installation is completed and, selectively, at the
conclusion of a corrective maintenance action. Refer to TL130100-l 001 for detailed operating procedures when attempting
to make particular types of calls and execute particular system
features.
4.4 Spare cards should be tested for correct operation after the
system is completely tested and operational. To test the spare
cards, replace a working card with an identical spare and test the
feature or function associated with it. Once the function of the
spare has been confirmed, remove it and replace the original.
4.5 Table 2.1 is a listing of the fault codes and functions
associated with the system.
M-l 07
TL-130200-1001
Attendant Console
Code Display Fault
4.6 The memory of each CEC provides an area called the fault
log which records system faults. It records the last 32 faults
detected. When a fault is detected, the ALARM LED on each
Attendant Console flashes, indicating that a fault has occurred.
Each console displays all faults reported in the fault log
independently of the other consoles in the system. All of the
faults listed on the fault log are displayed by repeated
depressions of the ALARM pushbutton. If all faults have been
displayed at an Attendant Console, an additional depression of
the ALARM pushbutton causes the station number display to go
off and the ALARM LED to stop flashing, unless a MAJOR alarm
exists which will cause the ALARM LED to light steady. A steady
ALARM LED should cause the Attendant to call for maintenance
assistance.
Depressing the ALARM pushbutton associated with the flashing
LED displays a three- or four-digit number in the station
number display on the Attendant Console. This display is
interpreted as follows:
l
The first two digits indicate the fault type. Refer to Table 4.1
l
The third digit indicates in which equipment complex the fault
occurred. Refer to Table 4.1.
* If provided, the fourth digit gives additional information. Refer
to Table 4.1.
M-l 08
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Table 4.1
Attendant Console Fault Log Decoding Summary
ATENDANT CONSOLE
STATIONS NUMBER DISPLAY
FUNCTION
FAULT TYPE
-..
DIGIT 1
CEC block-parity error
CEC dynamic-memory failure
CEC network read-after-write-error
CEC-PEC common memory read-after-write-error
CEC total communication failure
CEC single communication failure
CEC system network test error
Preloading test failure
Peripheral Equipment Complex (PEC)
Network test error
PEC directive test error
PEC directive hopper full
PEC illegal event error
PEC read-in after-write channel memory
PEC self-test error
PEC lo-ms test error
Tl alarm fault
CEC lo-ms interval timer failure
CEC alarm fault or PEC alarm fault
CEC memory block-parity error
CEC preloading memory failure
Peripheral equipment data hopper failure
Peripheral equipment data directive hopper error
Spare
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
Real-time clock failure
Power failure
Station status disk backup failure
CAS Main/ACD agent data link error
CAS Main/ACD message queue error
Attendant Console recovery data check error
2
2
2
2
2
3
PEC ODDB backup failure
CIp card failure
CIp port failure
Remote FADS data transmission error
Remote FADS reporting error
* Not used
+ Demarcation unit; See CEC Fault Log
3
3
3
3
3
DIGIT 2
SELECTED
OPTIONAL
DIGIT
DIGIT 3 + DIGIT 4
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Channel no.
Channel no.
*
*
*
9
0
1
2
3
4.
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2-4
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
PEC no.
PEC no.
Peripheral
Equipment
*
*
*
*
*
Console no.
*
Card no.
Port no.
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 00
Block Parity Failure
. .
Description:
When a program is loaded into the system, the CPU85 will
generate block parity for each 256 bytes of instruction data and
static data. This is done by an exclusive OR of the data table.
Periodically, the CPU85 will recalculate the block parity and
compare it with the value calculated earlier (detect memory
failures and data mutilation).
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO CECO Fault 00
B
C
Test
Failure
D
E
II
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
H
I
Address of
Faulty Byte
Failing
Software Pace:
= Instruction Page 0
= Instruction Page 1
= Data Page 0
= Data Page 1
= Instruction Page 2
= Instruction Page 3
= Data Page 2
= Data Page 3
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
Remove fuse on battery pack.
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinet.
3. Remove and replace Ml MB in Y/01, FB-17314-1A (check
strapping).
4. Power up and reload system - depress reset on PSUPY
card.
5. Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
6. If fault occurs, power down and reinstall original MlMB card,
and replace the MPG16 card.
7. If fault is still present, read the data for the pre-loading,
memory test (see disk handling and and Fault Code 19) and
replace the Ml MB card.
8. Power up and reload syste.
9. Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
10. Replace fuse in battery pack.
M-110
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 00
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
Ml MB CARD
1
R&R MP85 IN Y/O2
FB-17213
(Check Strapping)
POWER DOWN
SYSTEM
1
1
POWER UP
AND RELOAD
R&R Ml MB IN Y/O1
FB-17314
(Check Strapping)
1
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
POWER UP
AND RELOAD
I
I
YES
f
REPLACE
BATTERY
PACK FUSE
1
5210
8187
M-111
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 01
Dynamic RAM Memory
Description:
The system tests dynamic memory. A block of five bytes is put
into a temporary storage area. A series of test patterns is read
into the area of memory being tested and then verified. The data
is returned to its original location and the test advances to the
next five bytes of dynamic memory (interrupts are disabled during
this test).
. .
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO CECO Fault 01 B C D E
00 00 \02 x x
Test
Failure
H
L
v
Address of
Faulty Byte
Failing
T
1 Software Page:
0 0 = Instruction Page
01 = Instruction Page
0 2 = Data Page 0
0 3 = Data Page 1
0 4 = Instruction Page
0 5 = Instruction Page
0 6 = Data Page 2
0 7 z Data Page 3
1
0
1
2
3
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
Remove fuse on battery pack.
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinet.
3. Remove and replace Ml MB in Y/01, FB-17314-A (check
strapping).
4. Power up and reload system - depress “reset“ on PSUPY
card.
5. Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
6. If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original Ml MB card
and replace the MPG16 card.
7. Remove and replace MP85 in Y/02, FB-17213-A (check
strapping).
8. Power up and reload system.
9. Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
10. Replace fuse in battery pack.
M-112
ai87
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 01
: I
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
Ml MB CARD
REMOVE
BATTERY
PACK FUSE
1
R&R MPG16 IN Y/O2
FB-17213-BOA
(Check Strapping)
c
POWER DOWN
SYSTEM
I
1
I
POWER UP
AND RELOAD
1
R&R Ml MB IN Y/O1
FB-17314
(Check Strapping)
4
1
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
1
POWER UP
AND RELOAD
YES
5210
8l87
M-113
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 02
Control Memory
Read-After-Write
Failure
Description:
When a byte of data is written into the network memory, it is
immediately read back and verified.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO
CECO
Fault
02
6
C
D
E
H
L
...
O0
O0
Y
xx
=-I-Address of
Data
Written i Faulty Byte
Data
Read
J
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
M-114
8187
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinetRemove and replace EPCMN in Y/09, FB-17217-A (check
strapping).
Power up system.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light approximately
15 seconds to warm site.
If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original EPCMN
card.
Remove and replace INCKS in Y/l 1 (check strapping).
Power up system.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original INCKS card.
Remove battery pack fuse.
Remove and replace MPG1 6 in Y/02, FB-17213-BOA
(check strapping).
Power up and reload system - depress reset on PSUPY
card.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
Replace battery pack fuse.
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAIII T cnnr n3
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
EPCMN CARD
.=_
POWER DOWN
SYSTEM
1
R&R INCKS IN Y/i 1
(Check Strapping)
R&R EPCMN
FB-J7217 IN Y/O9
(Check Strapping)
R&R Ml MB IN Y/O2
FB-17213-BOA
(Check Strapping)
POWER UP
SYSTEM
POWER UP
AND RELOAD
1
1
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
I
1
REPLACE
BATTERY PACK
FUSE
NO
5210
8187
M-115
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 07
Disk Error
Description:
Before loading the system memory from the disk, the system
tests its memory (except common memory). The number of
CRC errors is checked before loading.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO CECO Fault 07 B C D E H
00 xx 00 00 00
T
Number
of CRC
errors
L
00
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
Determine number of CRC.errors identified in C register (if
less than 12 errors, disregard fault 07; if more, continue).
Reload system -depress reset on PSUPY in P/01.
:: Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
4 . If fault recurs, power down system - turn off switch at rear
of OMNI SI cabinet.
5. Remove and replace FMS in Y/07, FB-17220-BOA (check
strapping).
6. Power up and reload system.
7. Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
8. If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original FMS card.
9. Remove and replace floppy disk drive.
10. Power up and reload system.
11. Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 07
DETERMINE NUMBER
OF CRC ERRORS
(C Register Value)
c
-
R&R FMSD IN Y/02
FB-I 7220-BOA
(Check Strapping)
1
POWER UP &
RELOAD SYSTEM
RELOAD
SYSTEM
1
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
YES
f
EXCESSIVE CRC
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
FMS CARD
I
1
END
R&R FLOPPY
DISK DRIVE
I
I
5210
8187
M-117
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 08
Network Test Failure
_
Description:
The system tests the PCM network connecting a time slot to
itself; it then sends a test pattern through the network. This fault
code indicates that a failure has occurred in the PCM network.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO
CECO
Fault
08
6
C
D
E
H
L
Time
Slot
#
PEC
Number
(Always 0)
Fault Type Code:
0 0 = PEC(s) did not respond
02 = Test Failure
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinet.
Remove and replace CHM85, FB-17218-A, in X/O1 and /or
Y/l 5:
(check strapping)
- R + R X/O1 if time slot # is odd
- R = R Y/l 5 if time slot # is even
Power up system.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light -approximately
15 seconds to warm start.
If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original CHM85
card.
Remove and replace , FB-17217-A in Y/O9 (check
strapping).
Power up system.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original EPCMN
card.
Remove and replace INCKS in Y/l 1 (check strapping).
Power up system.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
If fault recurs, remove and replace cables between EPCMN
and target CHM85 cards.
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 08
FAULT CODE 08
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
R&R INCKS IN Y/l 1
(Check Strapping)
7
R&R EPCMN
FB-17217 IN Y/O9
(Check Strapping)
FB-17218 IN Y/15
AND/OR X/O1
POWER UP
SYSTEM
1
POWER UP
SYSTEM
1
POWER UP
SYSTEM
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
1
I
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LlG.HT
R&R CABLES
BETWEEN EPCMN &
CHM85 CARDS
NO
I
i
NO
.I
5210
8187
END
l
-
M-119
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 09
Directive Test
Malfunction
Description:
A simulated directive is sent to test the hopper loaders and
unloaders. This fault indicates that the system did not respond
with the correct event.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO
CECO Fault 09
“i”
PEC
Number
(Always 0)
B
O0
C
D
Y
E
H
L
O0
O0
O0
00 = System did not respond
correctly to directive test
03 = System made an invalid
response to the directive
test
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
Remove battery pack fuse.
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinet.
3.
Remove and replace Ml MB, FB-17314-1A in Y/O1 (check
strapping).
4.
Power up and reload system - depress reset on PSUPY
card
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
5.
If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original MlMB card.
6.
7.
Remove and replace CPU85 FB-17288-A in Y/O4 (check
strapping).
a.
Power up and reload system.
9.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
10. If fault recurs, replace battery pack fuse, power down and
reinstall original CPU85E card.
11. Remove and replace MPB85, FB-17215-A in Y/O5 and
X/O4 (check strapping).
12. Monitor PSUPY card in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
ala7
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT Cnl3F Ml
r
REMOVE BATTERY
PACK FUSE
I
POWiR DOWN
SYSTEM
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
CPU85E CARD
(WeCk
I
I
’
i-
I
S
I
c
’
POWER UP 8,
RELOAD SYSTEM
1
R&R Ml MB
FB-17314 IN Y/O1
(Check Strapping)
1
NO
1
1
POWER UP
SYSTEM
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
POWER UP &
RELOAD SYSTEM
R&R MPB85 FB-17215
IN Y/Cl4 & Y/O5
(Check Strapping)
1
4
4
II
1
1
YES
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
v
END
A
REPLACE BATTERY
PACK FUSE
5210
8187
M-121
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 10
Directive Hopper Full
Malfunction
Description:
The hopper is tested to ensure that directives are being
unloaded. This fault indicates that the system is failing to unload
its directive.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECOCECO
Fault10
B
@f
C
00
D
00
E
00
H
00
L
00
PEC
Number
(Always 0)
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
M-l 22
Remove battery pack fuse.
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinet.
Remove and replace MlMB, FB-17314-lA, in Y/O1 (check
strapping).
Power up and reload system - depress reset on PSUPY
card.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for “ASW” LED to light.
If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original Ml MB card.
Remove and replace CPU85 FB-17288-A in Y/O4 (check
strapping).
Power up and reload system.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
If fault recurs, replace battery pack fuse, power down and
reinstall original CPU85E card.
Remove and replace MPB85, FB-17215-A, in Y/O5 and
X/O4 (check strapping).
Power up system.
Monitor PSUPY card in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 10
I
I
c
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
Ml MB CARD
.~.
REMOVE BATTERY
PACK FUSE
R&R CPU85E
FB-17288 IN Y/O4
(Check Strapping)
POWER DOWN
SYSTEM
R&R Ml MB
FB-17314 IN Y/O1
(Check Strapping)
POWER UP &
RELOAD SYSTEM
I
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
REPLACE BATTERY 1
PACK FUSE
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
CPU85E CARD
i
&
POWER UP &
RELOAD SYSTEM
I
4
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
I
POWER UP
SYSTEM
.
TL-130200-I 001
Fault Code 11
illegal Event Error
Malfunction
Description:
This fault is reported when the system receives an illegal value.
This fault indicates that the system has failed to respond
correctly to a directive.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO CECO Fault 11 B
C
D
E
PEC
Event
Event
Event
Number ParameterParameterParameter
(Always 0) 1
2
3
H
L
Event
Number
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
M-l 24
8187
Remove battery pack fuse.
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinet.
Remove and replace Ml MB, FB-17314-IA, in Y/O1 (check
strapping).
Power up and reload system - depress reset on PSUPY
card.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original MlMB card.
Remove and replace CPU85, FB-17288-A in Y/O4 (check
strapping).
Power up and reload system.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
If fault recurs, replace battery pack fuse, power down, and
reinstall original CPU85E card.
Remove and replace MPB85, FB-17215-A, in Y/O5 and
X/O4 (check strapping).
Power up system.
Monitor PSUPY card in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 11
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
Ml MB CARD
PACK FUSE
1
R&R CPU85E
FB-17288 IN Y/O4
(Check Strapping)
POWER UP &
RELOAD SYSTEM
FB-17314 IN Y/O1
1
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
P O W E R UP &
RELOAD SYSTEM
I
REPLACE BATTERY
PACK FUSE
1
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
CPU85E CARD
1
R&R MPB85 FB-17215
IN YlO5 & x/O4
(Check Strapping)
1
POWER UP
SYSTEM
1
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
“ASW” TO LIGHT
REPLACE BATTERY +
PACK FUSE
I
5210
8187
M-125
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 12
Read -After-Write
Failure in
Channel Memory
Description:
When data is written into channel memory, it is immediately read
back and verified. This fault indicates that a failure has occurred
in channel memory.
Register Data as System Prints:
C
CECO CECO Fault 12 B
dlfyp++ik
PEC
Channel
Data
Number Number Written
(Always 0) (00-5F)
Data
Read
J
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
St cabinet.
2.
Remove and replace CHM85, FB-17218-A, in X/O1 and
Y/l 5 (check strapping).
3.
Power up system.
4.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light approximately 15 seconds to warm start.
5.
If fault recurs, power down and reinstall original CHM85
cards.
6.
Remove fuse from battery pack.
7.
Remove and replace Ml MB, FB-17213-BOA, in Y/O2
(check strapping).
8.
Power up and reload system - depress reset on PSUPY
card.
9.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
10. Replace fuse in battery pack.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 12
FAULT CODE 12
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
CHM85 CARD
1
POWER DOWN
SYSTEM
1
REMOVE FUSE
FROM BATTERY PACK
I
1
I
R&R Ml MB
FB-17213-BOA IN Y/O2
(Check Strapping)
POWER UP
SYSTEM
I
1
1
I
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
POWER UP &
RELOAD SYSTEM
I
1
+
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
YES
1
REPLACE FUSE IN
BATTERY PACK
NO
5210
8f87
M-127
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 15
Tl Alarm
Description:
The system monitors the TlS (Tl Supervision Circuit Card) for
hardware alarms. This fault indicates that the data framing of a
span has failed for 36 ms, the power has failed in the local office
terminating equipment, or synchronization has been lost at the
distant office for 1.2 seconds.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECOCECO
Fault15
B
2
Number
(Always 0)
C
00
D
py
E
0;
00
01
02
03
H
00
=
=
=
=
L
00
Alarm Number
System Alarm
Remote Alarm
Cutoff Alarm
Local Alarm
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
3.
Observe Tl -Type Supervisory Card, FB-20718-1, in
X/16.
SYS lamp lit indicates any alarm condition exists.
LOC lamp lit indicates framing synchronization is lost (fault
code D, register value is 03). Complete the following steps:
- Remove and replace FDC, FB-15278-A, in X/l 0 (check
strapping).
- If LOC lamp remains lit, repeat preceding procedure by
replacing sequentially all Tl cards until the fault is cleared
(check strapping):
pcB
TlB2
TlS
SIL
LCM
4.
5.
6.
M-l 28
8187
SLOT
X/18
X/16
X/l 4
X/l 2
REM lamp lit indicates problem exists at remote location
(fault code D, register value is 01). Report condition to
remote end personnel.
RPF lamp lit indicates power has failed at remote location
(fault code D, register value is 01). Report condition to
remote end personnel.
Check with remote end personnel to ensure that Tl alarm is
not a temporary trunk failure condition.
5210
TL-130200-1001
EAI II T
1E
FAULT CODE 15
1
1
OBSERVE FRONT OF
Tl S FB-20718
REMAINS LIT?
REMAIN LIT?
YES
..
SYS LAMP LIT INDICATES
ANY ALARM CONDITION
EXISTS
I
R&R
SEQUENTIALLY ALL Tl
CARDS UNTIL FAULT IS
Cl
FA.RFn
“LL,
I. .LY
I
LOC LAMP
LIT & D REGISTER
I
5210
c
YES
,-
I
I
4 RPF LAMP
I L
8l87
END
&
LIT & D REGISTER
>^
YES
M-129
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 16
10 ms Stopped Failure
Description:
The system performs checks to ensure that the 10 ms interrupt is
operating. A time check is performed to see if the background
scheduler has been interrupted to perform foreground scheduler
tasks. If the average time is too short, it is assumed that the
interrupt is not operating.
i
Register Data as System Prints:
CECOCECO
Fault16
6
C
D
E
00
00 00 00
H
00
L
00
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
M-130
8187
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinet.
Remove and replace CPU85E, FB-17288-A, in Y/O4
(check strapping).
Power up system.
Monitor PSUPY card in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 16
FAULT CODE 16
POWER DOWN
I
R&R CPU85E
FB-17288 IN Y/04
(Check Strapping)
POWER UP
AND RELOAD
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
5210
M-131
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 17
Alarm Fault
Description:
This fault indicates that a fault has been detected in a Tl span or
the alarm relays have been pulled on the ATT12 card.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO
CECO
Fault17
B
xx
“i”
C
00
D
E
00
H
00
L
00
T
Attendant 00 = ATT12 card has failed
Console 01 = Fault on Tl span
Oor
1
09 = Attendant 0 transmission fault
O A = Attendant 1 transmission fault
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
If C register value is 00, 09, or OA, complete the following
steps:
- Identify which ATT12 card has failed (B register value
indicates Attendant Console number). Examine T2621 in
the system data base to isolate PCMUS.
- Force Attendant Console 00s - FORCE CONSOLE X
OS.
- Remove and replace ATTl2, FB-17208-A, in identified
PCMUS slot (check strapping).
- Force Attendant Console in service -FORCE CONSOLE
x IS.
- If fault recurs, replace Attendant Console.
2.
M-l 32
8187
If C register value is 01, go to fault code 15 to begin
trouble- shooting.
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 17
FAULT CODE 17
I
IDENTIFY
CONSOLE/ATT1 2
CARD VIA T2621
I
FORCE
GO TO FIWLT
CODE 1 5
TROUBL .ESHOOTING
--P R C CEDURE
CONSOLE
00s
1
R&R ATT1 2
FB-17208
(Check Strapping)
1
FORCE CONSOLE
IN-SERVICE
.
I
R&R ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
I
I
5210
8l87
END
I
4
I
M-133
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 19
Pre-Loading Memory
Failure Test
Description:
Before the contents of the disk are loaded into the system
memory, all eight pages of the RAM are tested and any error is
detected. This fault indicates that there is a failure in the RAM
memory card.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECOCECO
Fault19
6
C
00
D
00
E
H
L
xx xx
-T-
00
P
Address of
Failing Byte
00 =
01 =
02 =
03 =
04 =
05 =
06 =
07 =
Failing
Software Paae:
instruction Page 0
Instruction Page 1
Data Page 0
Data Page 1
Instruction Page 2
Instruction Page 3
Data Page 2
Data Page 3
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
Remove fuse from battery pack.
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinet.
3.
Remove and replace MlMB, FB-17314-IA, in Y/O1 (check
strapping).
4.
Power up and reload system - depress reset on PSUPY
card.
5.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
6.
If fault recurs, power down system and reinstall original
MIMB card.
7.
Remove and replace MPG16, FB-17213-BOA in Y/O2
(check strapping).
8.
Power up and reload.
9.
Monitor PSUPY card in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
10. Replace fuse in battery pack.
2.
M-l 34
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE 19
(FAULTCODE1S)
T
POWER DOWN &
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
Ml MB CARD
REMOVE FUSE
FROM BATTERY
PACK
L
R&R MPG16 IN Y/O2
FB-1721’3
(Check Strapping)
&
..
*
POWER DOWN
SYSTEM
1
POWER UP
AND RELOAD
R&R Ml MB IN Y/O1
FB-17314
(Check Strapping)
&
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
POWER UP
AND RELOAD
MONITOR
PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
REPLACE FUSE
IN BATTERY
PACK
I
YES
I
5210
NO
a/a7
M-135
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 22
MDR SDC Fault
Description:
An ambiguous MDR port assignment exists.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO
CECO
Fault
22
B
C
D
E
H
FF
00
L
00
PEC
Number
(Always 0)
0 5 = Improper SDC port
assignment
L
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Reload system - depress reset on PSUPY card.
If terminal records output on port 0, mark MDR port 0 in
service in Table T4551; port 1 must be marked out of
service; back up the data base.
If terminal records output on port 1, mark MDR port 1 in
service in Table T4551; port 0 must be marked out of
service; back up the data base.
Connect the output device to the MDR SDC output port (the
port which is not marked as maintenance).
Warm start the system - cycle main circuit breaker at rear
of OMNI SI cabinet.
Place a trunk call which should be recorded by MDR.
If no MDR output, ask for assistance.
NOTE: MDR SDC port transmission data is derived from Table
T6051.
M-l 36
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE - 22
FAULT CODE 22
f
REGISTER C = 05
RELOAD SYSTEM - DEPRESS
“RESET” ON PSUPY IN P/O1
1
MARK MDR PORT 0 IN SERVICE IN
PORT
YES
MARK MDR PORT 1 IN SERVICE IN
NO
CONNECT THE OUTPUT DEVICE
TO THE MDR SCD OUTPUT PORT
(THE PORT WHICH IS NOT
MARKED AS MAINTENANCE)
I
L
I
+
WARM START THE SYSTEM CYCLE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
AT REAR OF St CABINET
IF NO MDR OUTPUT, ASK FOR
ASSISTANCE. NOTE: MDR SDC
PORT TRANSMISSION DATA IS
DERIVED FROM TABLE T6051.
5210
8187
M-137
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 25
Real-Time Clock Failure
.
Description:
This fault indicates a problem with the Real-Time Clock which is
part of the CPU85 card.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO CECO Fault 25 B C D E H L
\xx/ 00 00 00 00 00
I
0 0 = Clock is out of range
Fl = Read-after-write error
F 2 = Real time clock problem
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
8187
Power down - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of OMNI
SI cabinet.
Remove and replace CPU85E, FB-17288-A‘ in Y/O4
(check strapping).
Power up system.
Monitor PSUPY card in P/O1 for ASW LED to light approximately 15 seconds to warm start.
5210
TL-130200-1001
.
..--.
-v-w
--
FAULT CODE 25
+
POWER DOWN SYSTEM
.
R&R CPU85E
FB-I 7288 IN Y/04
(Check Strapping)
POWER UP AND RELOAD
MONITOR PSUPY FOR
“ASW” TO LIGHT
5210
a/a7
M-139
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 27
Disk Backup Failure
Description:
When a power failure occurs, dynamic memory (containing
wake-up, message, etc.) is automatically written to disk to
preserve data. This fault indicates that the Hotel/Health Care
dynamic data was not backed up onto the disk.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO CECO Fault 27 B
\xx/ xx
Y
01 =
02 =
C D E H L
00 00 00 00
Disk operation failed
Disk request failed
0 0 = Disk backup successful
1A = File read failed
1B = File write failed
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
Inform customer that the data has been lost and must be
reentered.
If the problem is hardware related, perform the following
procedures:
- Power down system - turn off main circuit breaker at rear
of OMNI SI cabinet.
- Remove and replace FMSD in Y/07, FB-17220-BOA,
(check strapping).
- Monitor PSUPY for ASW LED to light.
M-l 40
ala7
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE - 27
I
POWER DOWN SYSTEM
I
“ASW” TO LIGHT
5210
a/a7
M-141
TL-130200-1001
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code
Fault
Code 30
Attendant Console
Recovery
Data Check Error
_.
Description:
Common transmission to an Attendant Console has failed.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO CECO Fault 30 B C D E H L
‘X7’ \x7(/ 00 Yxxy 00 00
Console
0 or 1
M-142
8187
08
= Check sum
0 9 = Data link
OA = Timeout occurred
5210
TL-130200-1001
FAULT CODE - 30
I
I
FAULT CODE 30
I
NOTE CONSOLE NUMBER
1
REGISTER E = ?
1
ANGLE
A, 9, OR 8
FAULT
h
A”‘-
1
ACTION,
IGNORE
_
NO
ATTENDANT
NO
lab
1
NO
,]I
REPLACE
ATTENDAN T
CONSOLE
YES
FORCE ATTENDANT CONSOLE OS
AND REMOVE AND REPLACE THE
ATT12 CARD. FORCE CONSOLE
IN SERVICE.
5210
8187
M-143
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 32
CIPNCIPIDVCIP Card
Failure
Description:
This fault indicates a failure in the CIPNCIPIDVCIP or VP20 card.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO
CECO
Fault
32
B
C
D
E
H
L
y 9 lxp xx xx xx
PEC
Card
Number
Number
(Always 0) (O-15)
0 0 = Card
0 1 = Card
02 = Card
03 = Card
04 = Card
Test Failure
XMIT Error
Watch Dog Timer Error
Hardware Error
Initialization Error
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
Identify CIP/VCIP/DVCIP or VP20 relative card number
location by performing a general read of T7053-0, address
OB2F thru OB3E (GR D2 OB2F OB3E).
OB2F = Relative Cl Card No. 0
OB30 = Relative Cl Card No. 1
OB31 = Relative Cl Card No. 2
0832 = Relative Cl Card No. 3
0833 = Relative Cl Card No. 4
OB34 = Relative Cl Card No. 5
0835 = Relative Cl Card No. 6
0836 = Relative Cl Card No. 7
0837 = Relative Cl Card No. 8
0838 = Relative Cl Card No. 9
OB39 = Relative Cl Card No. 10
OB3A = Relative Cl Card No. 11
OB3B = Relative Cl Card No. 12
OB3C = Relative Cl Card No. 13
OB3D = Relative Cl Card No. 14
OB3E = Relative Cl Card No. 15
2. Interpret contents to indicate physical location of card.
M-l 44
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
2.
If C register is 00, 02, 03, 05, 06, or 07, complete the following
steps:
Force CIPNCIPIDVCIP 00s - FORCE CIP CA X YY OS.
x = PEC #3, Always 0 or FORCE VPLC (PEC GRP SLOT)
W= CARD 30 -15
- Remove and replace CIPNCIPIDVCIP, FB -17235
A/17236-A in identified slot (check strapping).
- Force CIPNCIPIDVCIPNP20
INS - FORCE CIP CA X YY IS.
x = PEC#, Always 0 or FORCE VPLC (PEC GRP SLOT)
W= CARD #O -15
3.
If PCB replaced is a VCIP/DVCIP, FB-17235-A/17236-A, force
download the PCB as follows:
Identify data links associated with relative card number of the
VCIP/DVCIP (i.e., VCIP #O/DVCIP #0 = Data Links O-7, VCIP
#DVCIP #l = Data Links 8-15, etc.)
Identify any SID associated with any previously defined data
link by reading Table T7054-0.
Force download of this VCIPIDVCIP using the previously
defined SiD:
Force download X YYY IN.
x = PEC#, Always 0
Y Y Y = SID #O-255
4.
If fault recurs, reinstall original CIPNCIPIDVCIPnIP20
download.
5.
Identify MPB85, FB-17215-A associated with identified
CIPNCIPIDVCIP
card:
.
MPB85
Y/O5
Groups A & B
X/o4
Groups C & D
PCMUS GROUP
6.
Power down system - turnoff main circuit breaker at rear of
OMNI SI cabinet.
7.
Remove and replace MPB85, FB-17215-A previously
identified.
8.
Power up system.
9.
Monitor PSUPY card in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
10.
5210
card and
If C register value is 04, complete the following steps:
-
If a CIPIVCIPIDVCIPNP20
card is supposed to be in an
unequipped slot, install a CIPNCIPIDVCIP card.
-.
If a CIP/VCIP/DVCIP card is correctly installed in the PCMUS,
follow procedures for C register value 00 listed above.
8187
M-145
TL130200-1001
I
FAULT CODE 32
FAULT CODE - 32
I
1
1
NO
NO
x-
YES
IDENTIFY DATA LINKS
ASSOCIATED WITH VCIP/
DVCIP RELATIVE CARD NO.
r
+
POWER DOWN
SYSTEM
FORCE CIP/VCIP/DVCIP
b CARD OS: FORCE CIP CA X
w OS.
$r
FORCE CIPNCIPIDVCIP
CARD.
CIP, FB-17225
VCIP, FB-17235
DVCIP, FB-17236
4
FORCE CIPNCIPIDVCIP
CARD INS:
FORCE CIP CA X YY IS.
I
IDENTIFY MPB85,
FB-17215
ASSOCIATED WITH
PCMUS HOUSING
CIPNCIPIDVCIP
CARD
NO
+
R&R MPB85, FB17215 PREVIOUSLY IDENTIFIED
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
VCIP, FB-I 7235 OR
DVCIP, FB-17236
-A
M-146
ah37
5210
END
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 33
CIPNCIPIDVCIP
Port Failure
Description:
This fault indicates a failure in the Integrated/Digital
Featurephone cabling or CIPNCIPIDVCIP card.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO
CECO
Fault
33
B
C
D
E
H
00
00
L
00
00 = Data Link Error
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
= CIP Port Protocol Error
= Port Sync Error
= Port Enable Error
= CIP Other Port Errors
= Test Failure
= Download Failure
= Port Recovery Errors
Fault Resolution Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Identify and locate Featurephone associated with fault report
(customer complaint) or determine DN by deciphering port
number
Ensure that Featurephone is powered up.
Run self-test - TEST PHONE DN XXXX or TEST DN
XXXX. If test fails, remove and replace Featurephone.
If Featurephone passes self-test, complete the following
steps:
- At system maintenance terminal call up Recent Change
menu 117 to show the PCMUS associated with the
CIP/VCIP/DVCIP. When PCMUS is defined, identify
CIPNCIPIDVCIP relative card number location by
performing a general read of 17053-O address (B2F
through OB3E) as shown below:
GR D2 OB2F OB3E.
OB2F = Relative Cl Card No. 0
OB30 = Relative Cl Card No. 1
OB31 = Relative Cl Card No. 2
OB32 = Relative Cl Card No. 3
OB33 = Relative Cl Card No. 4
OB34 = Relative Cl Card No. 5
0835 = Relative Cl Card No. 6
OB36 = Relative Cl Card No. 7
5210
8167
M-l 47
TL-130200-1001
0637
OB38
0839
063A
OB3B
OB3C
OB3D
OB3E
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
- Using the relative Cl card number, force the
CIP/VCIP/DVCIP 00s.
Force CIPAJCIPIDVCIP
x = PEC#, Always 0
Y Y = CARD #O-l 5
00s - FORCE CIP CA X YY OS.
- Remove and replace CIPNCIPIDVCIP, FB-17235
A/l 7236-A in identified slot (check strapping).
Force CIPNCIPIDVCIP INS - FORCE CIP CA X YY IS.
x = PEC#, Always 0
Y Y = CARD #O-l 5
- If PCB replaced was a VCIPIDVCIP, F&17235A/17236-A, force download PCB as follows:
- Identify data links associated with relative card number of
the VCIPIDVCIP (i.e., VCIP/DVCIP #0 = Data Links O-7,
VCIP/DVCIP #l = Data Links 8-15,etc.).
- Identify any SID associated with any previously defined
data link by reading Table T-7054.
- Force download of this VCIP/DVCIP using the previously
defined SID:
Force download X YYY IN.
X = PEC#, Always 0
YYY= SID #O-255
- If fault recurs, reinstall original CIPIVCIPIDVCIP
card.
- Identify MPB85, FB-17215-A, associated with PCM
group housing identified CIP/VCIP/DVCIP card.
MPB85
Y/O5
x/o4
5.
6.
M-148
Power down system - turn off main circuit breaker at rear of
OMNI Sl cabinet.
Remove and replace MPE385, FB-17215-A, previously
identified.
7.
Power up system.
8.
Monitor PSUPY in P/O1 for ASW LED to light.
8187
PCMUS GROUP
Group A & B
Group C & D
5210
TL-130200-1001
PCMUS ASSOCIATION
VCIP/DVCIP
RELATIVE
CIPNCIPIDVCIP PCB
FEATUREPHONE
RELATIVE CARD NO.
ASSOCIATED WITH
RUN SELF-TEST ON
FEATUREPHONE TEST
PHONE, DN XXXX, OR
TEST DN XXXX.
‘ZIP, FB-17225
VCIP, FB-17235
DVCIP, FB-17236
IDENTIFY MPB85,
FB-17215
ASSOCIATED WITH
PCMUS HOUSING
ClPNClPlDVClP CARD
IDENTIFY ANY SID
ASSOCIATED WITH
PREVIOUSLY DEFINED
DATA LINKS
f
4
FORCE DOWNLOAD
ON VCIP/DVCIP:
FORCE DOWNLOAD
X YYY IN.
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
VCIP, FB-17235, OR
DVCIP, FB-17236
I
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
CIP, FB-17225 CARD
5210
8l87
M-149
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 36
Change MDR System
Clock Failure
Description:
This fault indicates that receiving a CRIB (Call Record
Information Buffer) from the idle crib list failed The indication is
that MDR failed to change its system clock after a request from a
user. If this happens, there were too many calls in progress to
handle the request.
Register Data as System Prints:
CECO CECO Fault 36 B C D E H L
,xx,,xx,,xx,\xx/
? PECSENDDATA
t
I
I
1
DEFINITION
00 - PEC - CIP SEND DATA
* 0 = False (reset)
1 = True (set)
Figure 6.6 Sense and Control Address Words (Sheet 4 of 4)
Tables 6.10 through 6.14 are provided for maintenance personnel
thoroughly trained in system operation, and provides very
specialized troubleshooting data.
5210
8187
M-243
TL-130200-1001
Table 6.10 Call-Type Codes
1CODE
CALL TYPE
Local
Forei n Exchange (FX)
WAT 8
Tie line
Still busy
No answer
Information
Intercept
Long-distance restriction
Transfer
Series
Special
Attendant originating
Table 6.11 Pot-t-Type Codes
CODE
CALL TYPE
Idle
Line
Trunk (C.0)
~~~sd~~e)
Conference
Paging
Page queue
Code call
Recorded announcement
Dictation trunk
Hold queue
RLT
M-244
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Table 6.12 CEC Trunk State Codes.
..
5210
CODE
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OA
08
oc
OD
OE
OF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
16
1c
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
TRUNK STATE
Incoming pre-seized trunk
Incoming mishandled trunk
Incoming FX trunk wait for resources
Incoming, not answered (idle)
Incoming loop, not answered (idle)
Incoming busy (idle)
Incoming signaling A
Incoming signaling B
. Incoming dialing (idle)
Incoming delay dial wait
Outgoing start dial wait
Outgoing wink start wait
Outgoing busy (idle)
Outgoing guard after release
Outgoing immediate dial
Outgoing glare check
Recorder-Announcer message interval
Incoming seizure stall
System out of service (PEF out of service)
Outgoing wait for disconnect, PBX release first
Retry, put in service
Outgoing pre-seized
Spare
Outgoing dialing
Outgoing busy (busy)
Outgoing not answered
Outgoing wink start time
Panel maintenance busy
Not busy (idle)
Maintenance busy
System busy
Incoming, not answered (busy)
Incoming loop, not answered (busy)
Incoming busy (busy)
Incoming dialing
Incoming dialing (busy)
Recorder-Announcer start
Recorder-Announcer message cycle
Call recovery trunk off-hook
CAS Main ACD recorded announcement start
CAS Main ACD recorded message cycle
Nailed connection
8187
M-245
TL-130200-1001
Table 6.13
CEC Line State Codes
CODE
LINE STATE
Line idle
Line ringing
I Line busy
03
Line digit collection
04
Call-back in progress
05
Call-back ringing
.
06
Line locked out
07
Line maintenance busy
08
Staff for call-store assignment
09
Line stall (idle)
OA
Line stall (off-hook)
OB
Line off-hook recovery
Table 6.14
CODE
CALL STATE
Call State Codes
CODE
CALL STATE
00
One-way
09
Two-way busy
01
Two-way terminating
OA
#old one party
02
Two-way
OB
Two-way busy after flash
03
Two-way split
OC
Three-way busy
04
Three-way
OD
Hold two party
05
Three-way split
OE
Three-way busy after include source
06
Three-way
OF
Three-way split term
07
Idle
IO
One-way after ATB
08
Three-way double team
11
One-way after ATB (Flash)
M-246
8187
terminating
5210
TL-I
PD-200
Maintenance
30200-l 001
7.0 This section describes the maintenance and administration
facilities which are available within the OMNI SI PABX for the
PD-200 Data System. Maintenance personnel normally
communicate with the OMNI SI via the system maintenance
terminal. The terminal connects to the CEC card ‘and is used for
entering system commands or receiving system-related reports.
The terminal is the source of input/output interfaces with the
PABX for maintenance and diagnostic initialization. Commands
are entered on the terminal and are analyzed by the CEC to
determine syntax correctness. Syntactically correct messages
are sent directly to the ADMP for processing. They are then
analyzed by the ADMP to determine which function is being
requested. That specific function is executed and the results are
reported back to the the maintenance terminal.
The maintenance terminal provides access to the following
system functions:
Maintenance commands and displays
0 On-line maintenance program
l Recent Change program
l
Before accessing system maintenance, the security lock must be
opened by using the security lock command (SL) and a
password. Once a valid password is entered, the system
responds with the message OPEN AT X, where X is the security
level.
Unauthorized access to the OMNI SI software will result in the
following prompt:
“INVALID
SECURITY
ACCESS”
These programs are operational only when an OMNI system is
operating on system software. To diagnose an off-line system,
independent of system software, an off-line maintenance
program is provided. This program is available on floppy disk.
In a typical, integrated voice/data OMNI SI system, two terminals
are installed for maintenance and administrative functions. They
are:
Q An input’output maintenance terminal (normally used for the
voice only part of the OMNI switch).
o An input/output maintenance terminal for the PD-200 Data
System.
5210
8187
M-247
TL-130200-1001
The data-only maintenance terminal is required for the
integrated voice/data system. The option “s” of connecting a
data-only terminal to the RS-232C port of the ADMP is
available. This enables the user to do administrative functions
for the data switch even if the voice switch becomes disabled.
--
When the PD-200 Data System is administered from the dataonly maintenance terminal, this terminal is referred to as the
ADMP console. Since the ADMP console software provides full
screen editing capabilities, it is required to be a VT-101 console
or its equivalent-type video terminal.
NOTE: A separate data console is recommended.
Data System
Administrative and
Maintenance Features
7~1 Assuming that the proper password is entered, the user may
access one of the following functions which pertain to the data
switch.
l
Table Editor (TED). The data system relies on disk and
memory-resident data tables to perform its functions. The
table-editing (Recent Change) function of the ADMP allows
users to interactively view and alter the tables. All table
accesses are provided by the ADMP table editor. Detailed
TED command information is provided in Section 278-921180, Appendix 1.
0 Maintenance and Interactive Diagnostics (MAID). The ADMP
maintenance functions provide a limited set of maintenance
diagnostic commands via the MAID program menus. The user
interactively monitors and/or changes the status of the entire
data system (while on-line). The MAID allows the user to:
-
Place X.25 calls
Read device data signals
Set device data signals
Check communication between ADMP and device
Restart device
Display device status
Display network status
@ ADMP File Utility (FUTIL). The ADMP disk file maintenance
capability allows the user to create, delete, copy, dump, or
rename files.
Accounting Reports
M-248
7.2 Data and voice call-processing accounting is stored and
forwarded by the ADMP. The ADMP can be configured to report
accounting records to any data device in either ASCII or binary
form. The ADMP either makes a data call to the device or
accepts an incoming data call. A printer, host, or other terminal
can be the recipient of these accounting records.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Event Reports
7.3 An event is an occurrence in the data system which is of
some significance. It is usually a report about an error or
malfunction. Events are stored and forwarded by the ADMP in
much the same manner as accounting records, and they can be
reported to any device by either incoming or outgoing data calls.
Event reports can also be sent to the CEC and/or combined with
accounting reports to the same end-point. This is done by
configuring the ADMP tables (using TED). Thus, a single device
can be the recipient of account reports, event reports, or both.
Maintenance Commands
.
and Displays
7.4 Maintenance support is similar to Recent-Change
support in that any maintenance function resulting in a change to
the data system is reported by the CEC to the ADMP.
Commands such as putting a data device out of service,
reloading a device, or forcing a device in service or out of
service are performed via the maintenance terminal. The CEC
request to the ADMP is acknowledged or rejected, and the
results are sent to the CEC. The following data-related
maintenance functions are performed via the maintenance
terminal:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
5210
Put a data device out of service
Force a data device out of service
Reload a data device
Put a data device in service
Force a data device in service
Display the software version of a device
Read the memory of a device
a/a7
M-249
TL-130200-1001
The system allows loading of specific data components while the
system is operational. The purpose is to permit reloading of
devices which may be malfunctioning but are still in service. A
device must be in service in order to load it with operational
code.
Devices in the data system which are ROM or hardware based,
can only be FORCED out of service. However, loadable devices
can be PUT or FORCED out of service. The DFP/APM is treated
as two devices having the same physical location whether in
service or out of service.
Forcing a device out of service accomplishes taking the device
down unconditionally. Putting the device out of service causes
the system to wait until the device is not active before it is taken
down
Forcing a device in service causes the device to come up.
When this happens, it is loaded, if loadable, or restarted if it is a
ROM-based device.
Backing up and reformatting system disks is accomplished via
the system on-line maintenance facilities. These facilities are
described in TL-130300-1001. Access to on-line
maintenance is via the maintenance terminal.
Data System
Troubleshooting
7.5 The operational status of the data sub-system can be
determined by looking at the Expanded System Status Display
(ESSD) card indicator lamps in the CEC. The ESSD card
provides a DTC lamp which represents the data option of the
OMNI SI system. This lamp indicates whether the ADMP is
communicating with the voice switch (light is on) or not
communicating with the voice switch (light is off). This lamp is
controlled by the CEC.
The status of the lamp is received from event messages
generated by the data switch. Each minute an assurance
request message is sent by the ADMP to the PEC, and the PEC
responds with an assurance response message. If the PEC
does not respond to the ADMP’s message, the data switch
knows that a problem exists with the voice switch. Every 5
minutes, the PEC checks that at least one assurance message
has been received since the last check. If the PEC does not
receive the ADMP message, the PEC sends an event message
to the CEC that is interpreted as a request to set the ADMP out of
service. The data switch may still be working even though the
voice switch and the ADMP are not communicating.
M-250
8187
5210
- -
TL-130200-1001
Additionally, the PEC periodically reads register 3 of all resident
PRs and tests for a non-zero condition which is an error
condition. Should the error be detected, the PEC generates a PR
event message for the ADMP. If the CEC, PEC, and/or disk has
switched over, it will send a switch-over message to- the ADMP.
The status of all line cards in the integrated switch can be
displayed via the on-line Maintenance Option Menu, Program
28. The Recent-Change data link displays will indicate the inservice/out-of-service status of equipped data cards and
remote processors.
The displays will appear in the following formats:
DATA SWITCH DEVICE STATUS DISPLAY
A) PACKET LINE CARDS STATUS
B) REMOTE PROCESSORS STATUS
C) EXIT
TYPE T.HE LETTER OF THE DESIRED TOPIC>
(followed by)
TYPE “S” FOR SYSTEM DISPLAY OR 0 TO 7 FOR PEC # >
5210
8187
M-251
- -
TL-130200-1001
PACKET LINE CARD STATUS
CARD
TYPE
ADMP
DCP
VPLC--.
PR BT
BT
PBE
NIC
PEC
0
.- 0
0
0
0
-0
0
0
.
GRP
UNIV
SLOT
STATUS
A
B
C
A
A
B
B
B
2
2
5
0
10
11
0
5
INS
INS
00s
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
Do you wish to see more (Y/N) >
Do you wish to repeat this function (Y/N) >
REMOTE PROCESSORS STATUS
CARD
TYPE
DFPAPM
APM
SPM
PEC
0
-0
0
GRP
UNIV
SLOT
gcJ
STATUS
C
3
5
5
0
1
6
INS
INS
INS
Do you wish to see more (Y/N) >
Do you wish to repeat this function (Y/N) >
M-252
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
PD-200 Data
System Devices
r’
7.6 To force PD-200 Data System devices in service or out of
service, use the following command:
_.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
1
I
I
FORCE device
OS.
I
.~.
I
I
i where
i device = DCP, PR, VPLC, NIC, SPN, APM, , DFPAPM
I
I
or
I
I
FORCE device Cckt>
I
i
I
I
I
. . II
I
I
I
I
I
I
IS.
IS.
.
I
I
I
i
!where
= ADPM
i device
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-._._.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-,-.
Table 7.1 below shows the responses for the various source
commands at the maintenance terminal.
Table 7.1
Responses for Force Commands at Terminal
INPUT
If device is VPLC2 with both voice
and data circuits equipped,
Frrst response IS for the voice
card/circuit. The second response is
si
5210
If the voice device is already IS/OS,
A message prints: CARD/PORT IS IS/OS
If the PEC is not able to force the
voice device IS/OS,
A message prints: COMMAND FAILED,
indicating unsuccessful completion.
If everything is all right with the
voice device and FORCE INSOOS,
A message prints: IN PROGRESS. When
the request is completed, the following
message is printed: COMMAND
COMPLETED, indicating successful
completion. The voice device will be IS and
ready to test or OS.
If the ADMP is not able to force the
data device IS/OS,
A message is sent from the ADMP which
explains the situation.
8187
M-253
TL-130200-1001
Table 9.1
Responses for Force Commands at Terminal (Continued)
INPUT
RESPONSE
If everything is all right with the
ADMP, but the data device cannot be
accessed,
_.
A message prints: IN PROGRESS.
When the request is completed, the following
message is printed: COMMAND FAILED,
incicating unsuccessful completion. The data
device will be IS or OS.
If everything is all right with the
ADMP, and FORCE IS/OS is
successful,
A message prints: IN PROGRESS.
When the request is completed, the
following message is printed:
COMMAND COMPLETED, indicating
successful completion. The data device
will be IS or OS.
If something is wrong with the
ADMP, or the ADMP takes too long
(more than a predefined time)
to respond,
A message prints: MR TIMED OUT.
If the device is not at the given PEC
group slot circuit address,
A message prints: ADDRESS DOES NOT
MATCH DEVICE TYPE.
Display Software
Version Command
7.7 The Display Software Version (DSPSV) command displays
the software version for the data hardware or data device at the
location defined. The command is as follows:
r-------------------------------------------------------~
I
II
I
I
; DSPSW C grp> .
I
I
; where
I
I
I
j = ADMP, DCP, VPLC, SPM, APM, DFPAPM, or
1NIC
1 = 0
I = AtoD
1
<
s
l
o
t
;
>
= oto11
=Oto7
L----------__-------------------------------------------~
M-254
8187
5210
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
- .-
TL-130200-1001
The system prints the following on the maintenance terminal:
_---em
_____-----__-_--_-__--------------r--------------------- - - -
j SYNTAX ERROR#N = an error was found in the input message
I
j COMMFND FAILED = the request was not processed successfully
- 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i DEVICl%n aa.bb.cc
I
I
1
II
II
1I
II
II
I
I
II
II
II
II
II
where
#n = the following types:
09 = ADMP
. OA = DCP
OE = SPM
OF = APM
12 = DFPAPM
13 = NIC
i
I
I
I
I
:
I
I
and where
aa.bb.cc. = the version of the software loaded in the device
Force
In Service/Out of Service
Command
Featurephones
r-----------‘-
I
I
7.8 The FORCE command can be used to force devices and or
circuits into the maintenance busy state when not idle.
Removing a device from service using the FORCE command
takes the device down unconditionally.
7.8.1 To force an Analog or Digital Featurephone connected to a
CIP, DCIP, or DVCIP port in service or out of service, enter the
following:
----------------------------------------------~---------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I/
FORCE CIP DN
I
I
IS.
OS.
I
I
,
Or
FORCE CIP PORT < pet >
IS.
OS.
I
I
I
/ where
I = three- or four-digit directory number of a
I Featurephone
) = 0
I = 0 to 127
II
II
I
I
I
I
2
L---------^-----------------------------------------------------------
NOTES:
1. Port number is derived by relative CIP card number times 8
plus circuit number on the card. The relative CIP card number
is determined by the card’s position on the Featurephone Data
Link Information Table T7053-0.
5210
I
I
I
I
8187
M-255
-
TL-1~30200-1001
2. For the DVCIP card, circuit numbers are defined:
Voice
0
2
4
6
Line Cards with
Featurephopnes
7.8.2 To force a CIP, VCIP, or DVCIP interface card in service or
out of service, enter the following:
. .
r’-------------‘---------------------------------------------------1
I
I
‘FORCE CIP CARD
IS>
OS>
/
;
I
where
II
I
= 0
I
II
= 0 to 15
‘-----“-----------------------------------------------------------------~
Trunks
7.8.3 To force a trunk circuit from active to maintenance busy
using the physical location, enter the following:
I--------------------------------------------------------------------
1
I
I
II
II
[ FORCE TRUNK &lRCUlT OS.
II
; where
I
I
II
II
I
I
i = 0
f = A to D
1 = oto11
; = 0 to 3
L-----------------
8187
I
I
____-___-________-______________________----------;
5210
TL-130206-1001
To force a Digital Featurephone connected to VPLC2 (type VP20)
voice port out of service, enter the command given below
r---------------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
i FORCE DN < directory-no. >
I
II
I
I
or
I
I
I
lFORCE DIFP
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IS.
OS.
IS.
OS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I where .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I = three- or four-digit directory number of a
I Featurephone
I = 0
I = AtoD
I = oto11
iL------------------------------------------------------------------~
= oto7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
To force a Digital Featurephone with the data option connected to
a VPLC2 (type VP20) voice and data combination port out of
service, enter the command given below:
r---------------------------------------------------------------7
I
I
I
I
/ FORCE DN
I
I
IS.
OS.
or
iFORCE D F P A P M < s l o t >
I
OS.
I
IS.
I where
/ = three- or four-digit directory number of a
I Featurephone
I = 0
I = AtoD
I = oto11
1Cckt> = oto7
,!
.
.
5210
8187
M-257
TL-130200-1001
To force a trunk circuit from active to maintenance busy using
the SID, enter the following:
r-----------------------------------------------I
1
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I FORCE TRUNK SID OS>
I
j where
I
I
I = 0
IL-------------------------------------------------------~
Csid > = Trunk circuit SID relative to the PEC; 0 to 63
Load Commands
I
7.9 LOAD commands are used only in data applications
The purpose of the load commands are to permit reloading of
devices which may be malfunctioning but are still in service. A
device must be in service to load it with operational code.
Load DIFP All. To perform a load DIFP for all applicable
Featurephones in PEC 0, use the ALL form of the following
command:
r-----------------------------------------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-------------------------------------------------------~
ALL
LOAD DIFP
STOP
I
I
If LOAD DIFP ALL is typed, a request is sent to download all
Featurephones in the PEC. No request is sent to the data switch.
Messages are printed for the PEC download response, e.g., IN
PROGRESS PO> As each voice circuit is downloaded, a
message, RESPONSE 11, which indicates successful
completion, is printed.
If LOAD DIFP STOP is typed, a request is sent to stop download
of all Featurephones in the PEC. No request is sent to the data
switch. Messages are printed for each PEC STOP response,
e.g., IN PROGRESS PO. The PEC stops the downloading
Featurephones.
M-258
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
If LOAD DEVICE SPECIFIC is typed, the device indicated is reset
and reloaded. Any call up on the device is lost.
r-------------------‘------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
; LOAD DEVICE- TYPE PEC GROUP SLOT CIRCUIT OP
; or
I LOAD DEVICE- TYPE ALL
I or
) LOAD DATA
I
I
I where
1
/DEVICE TYPE = ADMP, DCP, SPM, APM, OR DATA (Option ADMP
I
_ reloads ADMP only. Option Data reinitializes the entire network.) I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PEC = PECnumber
GROUP = file group
SLOT = physical slot within a group
CIRCUIT = circuit on a given card
OP = load operational load
DATA = reload the data switch
ALL = load all specified device types with operational load
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i--------,---------__----_-----,-----------------------------------------~
Other ALL commands. Other load command versions may be
used in bulk form in a similar manner to that of the LOAD DIFP
ALL command. The general form of this command is as follows:
r--------
_----_-----------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I LOAD ALL.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
) where
I1
DFPAPM
i,-___-______----‘-----‘----‘----l---- = NIC DCP SPM APM DIFP
--‘--_----------_---,
I
I
I
I
Load Data. The following is a bulk load command which can be
used to download all PD-200 cards and devices:
r---~~_--_~---_~_~--~~~~~~
---------------_--------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LOAD DATA.
I
i___L_______________-------------------------------------
5210
8J87
M-259
I
I
TL-130200-1001
Table 7.2 shows the responses for the various load data
commands seen at the maintenance terminal.
Table 7.2
Responses for Load Data Commands at Terminal
INPUT
I
M-260
RESPONSE
Type in LOAD DATA when the
data switch cannot be loaded.
.~.
A message prints:
COMMAND FAILED,
followed by an explanation given by
the ADMP.
Type in LOAD DATA when the
data switch can be loaded.
The data switch will be loaded and
a message will print: IN PROGRESS
When the load is complete, a message
indicating the status of the data switch
is printed.
8h37
5210
TL-l30200-1001
Load Conlmand
Responses
9.9.1 Table 7.3 shows the responses for the various load
commands at the maintenance terminal.
Table 7.3
5210
Responses for Load Commands at Terminal
,f the device input is VPLC2, and the
device is VPLC2 with both voice and
data circuits equipped,
-irst response is for the voice
;ard/circuit. Second response is :or
:he data card/circuit.
If the PEC is not able to do a download
3n the voice device,
4 message prints: COMMAND FAILED
If-everything is all right in the PEC, and
ihe voice circuits start downloading,
4 message prints:
NOT A FEATUREPHONE
If the ADMP is not able to do an
operational load on the data device,
4 messag? prints:COMMAND FAILED,
‘ollowed by an explanation given by the
ADMP.
If everything is all right with the data
device,
The device is loaded with the
operational load and a message prints:
COMMAND COMPLETE
If something is wrong with the ADMP or
the ADMP takes too long (more than a
predefined time) to respond,
A message prints:
MR TIMED OUT
If the device is not at the given PEC
group slot address,
A message prints:
ADDRESS DOES NOT MATCH
DEVICE TYPE
If the device is VPLC and it is a data
only card,
A message prints:
INVALID COMMAND FOR
DATA ONLY CARD
For devices ADMP, DCP, SPM, APM,
DIFP, or DFPAPM,
A load request is sent to the ADMP.
A load request is not sent to the switch.
If the ADMP is not able to do a load for
all devices at this time,
A message prints:
COMMAND FAILED, followed by an
explanation message from the ADMP
If the ADMP is able to load the devices
with operational load,
A message prints:
IN PROGRESS, followed by a
message indicating the success or
failure of operational load for each
device. When all devices are
finished with the load process, a
COMMAND COMPLETE is printed.
a/E!7
M-261
TL-130200-1001
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
5210
278-922-300
PD-200 Maintenance
Tools and Fault Isolation
Maintenance Tools
7.10 This section contains information related to maintenance
tools and fault isolation.
7.10.1 This paragraph covers information on visual fault/lamp
indicators and peripheral devices, maintenance commands, and
on-line diagnostics. Maintenance personnel will be able to do
the following:
l
l
l
..
Figure.7.1
Identify and interpret data terminal tests and parameters
Identify and interpret ADMP terminal commands and menus
Classify fault code responses into functional categories of
maintenance
Visual Fault Indicator - VPLC (INSIOOS LED)
Red indicator
5210
This VPLC is in service.
8187
This VPLC is out of
service.
M-263
2 7 8 - 9 2 2 - 3 0 0
Figure 7.2 Visual Fault Indicator - ADMP-A (INSlOOS LED and RESET BUTTON)
e+
7
*4i-1
- Red indicator lamp
_ Reset button
_ ADMP terminal cable connection
El-
00
00
l e
00
eo
oe
l o
l e
LAMP
Red indicator
50-pin male ribbon connector
3m/part no. 3433
ON STEADY
FLASHING (60 IPM)
This ADMP is in
service.
This ADMP is out of
service while
attempting to load
(requests
loading). Passed ROM
memory self-test.
8187
FLASHING (120 IPM)
Failed ROM
memory self-tests.
5210
Figure 7.3 Visual Fault Indicator - UCB (DCP) (INSIOOS LED and RESET BUTTON)
Red Indicator Lamp
Reset button
Reset Button: Initializes DCP by accessing hard disk files via ADPM for loading DCP memory
ON STEADY
Red indicator
5210
This ADMP is in
service.
8/87
FLASHING (60 IPM)
This ADMP is out of
service while
attempting to load
(requests
loading). Passed ROM
memory self-test.
FLASHING (120 IPM)
Failed ROM
memory self-tests
DCP cannot
communicate with
PR.
M-265
278-922-300
Figure 7.4 Visual Lamp Indicators and Switches - Asynchronous Packet Manager (APM)
K
TEST BUTTON
TEST
LAMP
Link
This APM is in
service (loaded).
LAMP
Call
M-266
ON STEADY
ON STEADY
Terminal busy
(connected to
another terminal).
8187
FLASHING (60 IPM)
LAMP
FLASHING (120
IPM)
This APM is out of
Failed ROM
service while
memory selfattempting to load
tests.
(Requests down loading). APM DTE/DCE
Passed ROM memory
switch is in the
self-test.
wrong position.
OFF
Terminal idle (no
connection).
5210
278-922-300
Figure 7.4 Visual Lamp Indicators and Switches - Asynchronous Packet Manager (APM)
(Continued1
VIEW SHOWING LAMPS
CALL
LINK
LAMP
Red indicator
lit
LAMP
Call
5210
ON STEADY
This APM is in
service (loaded).
ON STEADY
Terminal busy
(connected to
another terminal
8J87
FLASHING (60 IPM)
This APM is out of
service while
attempting to load
(Requests down loading).
Passed ROM memory
self-test.
FLASHING (120 IPM)
Failed ROM
memory self-tests.
APM DTEIDCE
switch is in the
wrong position.
OFF
Terminal idle (no
connection).
M-267
278-922-300
Figure 7.4 Visual Lamp Indicators and Switches - Asynchronous Packet Manaaer
- (APMI
.
(Continued VIEW SHOWING BUTTONS
TEST
_
FRONT
-
-
REAR
LINE
DATA
r
OUT
-
l
RESET
IN
D C E/ D T E
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Test
Causes test message to appear on ADMP terminal
screen - ERMA CH(2).
Reset
Interrupts any data call and resets APM; requests
reload from ADMP.
DTE/DCE
Selects DTE or DCE mode of operation.
$187
5210
278-922-300
Figure 7.5 Visual Lamp indicators and Switches - Synchronous Packet Manager (SPM)
FRONT
..
X.25
SWITCH
X.25
TE S T
REAR
I
LAMP
X.25 Test
Active
I
lx.25
LAMP
Switch Link
5210
LAMP
ON STEADY
I
During a link X.25 test
(X.25 test button
pressed)
OFF
During an idle state
(no link connection)
ON STEADY
I
During a link X.25 host
ON STEADY
During an idle state (no
link connection)
FLASHING (60 IPM)
This SPM is in
service
(loaded).
This SPM is out of service
while attempting
to load (requests downloading).
Passed ROM memory self-test.
8/87
FLASHING
(120 PM)
Failed ROM
memory selftest.
M-269
278-922-300
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Maintenance Terminal
Fault Code Listings
Table 7.4 is a listing of the maintenance terminal fault codes and
their functions.
Table a.4
I-- II
Fault Code Listings
CODE
00
_- 01
,. .
I
FUNCTIONS
CEC BLOCK PARITY
CEC DYNAMIC RAM MEMORY FAILURE
02
CEC-PEC CONTROL MEMORY READ-AFTER-WRITE
FAILURE
0 3
CEC-PEC COMMON MEMORY READ-AFTER-WRITE
FAILURE
04
CEC-TO-CEC TOTAL COMMUNICATION LINK FAILURE
I
05
CEC-CEC SINGLE COMMUNICATION LINK FAILURE
j
06
CEC SYSTEM NETWORK TEST FAILURE
I
I
I
07
CEC LOADING MALFUNCTION
08
PEC NETWORK TEST MALFUNCTION
09
PEC DIRECTIVE TEST MALFUNCTION
I
F
10
PEC DIRECTIVE HOPPER FULL MALFUNCTION
11
PEC ILLEGAL EVENT ERROR MALFUNCTION
12
PEC READ-AFTER-WRITE FAILURE IN CHANNEL
MEMORY
13
PEC SELF-TEST ERRORS MALFUNCTION
I
I
PEC 10 MS MALFUNCTION
Tl SUPERVISOR GENERAL ALARM
CEC 1 MS STOPPED-FAILURE
CEC ALARM
COMMON MEMORY BLOCK PARITY ERROR FAILURE
PRE-LOADING MEMORY TEST FAILURE
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT DATA (PED) EVENT HOPPER
FAILURE
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT DATA (PED) DIRECTIVE
HOPPER FAILURE
5210
8/87
M-271
TL-130200-1001
Table 7.4
Fault Code Listings (Continued)
I
CODE
I
22
1 MDR OUTPUT CONTROL FAULT
I
23
I FUTURE
24
FUNCTIONS
I
FUTURE
_.
25
I
26
REAL- TIME CLOCK FAILURE
I POWER FAILURE
I.27
1 HOTEUHEALTH CARE DISK BACK-UP FAlLURE
.
I
28
1 CAS MAIN/ACD
29
CAS MAIN/ACD
30
ATTENDANT CONSOLE DATA CHECK ERROR
AGENT INSTRUMENT DATA LINK ERROR 1
MESSAGE QUEUE ERROR
I
I
31
1 PEC ODDB BACK-UP FAILURE
32
1 CIPNCIP CARD FAILURE
I
33
1 CIPNCIP PORT FAILURE
I
I
34
REMOTE FADS REPORTING ERROR
35
REMOTE FADS REPORTING ERROR
36
1 SYSTEM RESET
37
FUTURE
38
CEC-PEC COMMON MEMORY READ ERROR
39
40
1 ADMP INITIALIZATION RELATED ERRORS
DISK FILES GVTXOOS AND’ GVTXOlO (TCM/FRL) I/O
ERRORS
) DISK I/O ERRORS
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
ADMP Terminal and
User Prerequisites
l
Terminal Prerequisites
- Must be a DEC VT-l 00, VT-l 01, or equivalent type video
terminal
- Baud rate set to 1200
- Secondary keypad requires key function overlay as shown in
VT-l 01 Secondary Keypad Overlay
NOTE: Must have full cursor flow control.
VT-1 01 Secondary Keypad Overlay
GET
MEM
PUT
MEM
SEARCH
MEM
GET
PROD
PUT
PROD
SEARCH
PROD
GET
OTHER
PUT
OTHER
FIELD
DEFAULT
RECORD
DEFAULT
HELP
EXIT
REFRESH
SCREEN
I
0 User Prerequisites
- Level 0 password required to view most menus
- Level 5 password required to perform all procedures in
ADMP User’s Guide
ADMJ’ Terminal
Special Keys
8 Exit Key: The Exit (EXIT) key on the VT-101 is the dash (-)
key on the numerical keypad. Use this key to exit a menu or
screen. Continue to depress the (EXIT) key until the desired
screen is reached.
l
Numerical Keypad: The numerical keypad on the right side of
the VT-101 keyboard has special functions as defined in the
Data Table Options section. All numbers must be typed using
the keys across the top of the keyboard.
* Caps Lock Key: The UIPKG does not differentiate between
upper- and lower-case letters. Therefore, the (CAPS LOCK)
should generally be left in the up position to facilitate use of the
number keys.
5210
8187
M-273
TL-130200-1001
o Enter Key: The (ENTER) key is the large key at the bottom
right corner of the numerical keypad to the right of the
keyboard.
ADMP Terminal Cursor
Positioning
o During the first screen display, the cursor is positioned at the
first changeable field.
o To move forward to the next field, depress (tab), (return), or
(right arrow) keys.
l
To move backward to the previous field, depress (left arrow)
key
NOTES:
1. Forward means a field to the right or below the current
cursor position.
2. Backward means a field to the left or above the current
cursor position.
l
If the cursor is positioned at the first field and the (left) arrow is
depressed, the cursor will wrap around to the last field of the
screen.
o If the cursor is positioned at the last field and the (right) arrow,
(tab), or (return) key is depressed, the cursor will wrap around
the first field on the screen.
e The (up) and (down) arrows can be used to position to the first
or last input field (respectively) currently on the screen.
For the function keys on the ADMP terminal:
8 MEM refers to the live memory of the system.
8 PROD refers to actual files on hard disk.
* OTHER is not operational at this time.
Function Keys
8) GET command - to produce a record from a MEM or PROD.
8 PUT command - to write/modify a record from MEM or
PROD.
@ SEARCH command - to locate an unknown record by
entering the content of a particular field within that record.
o FIELD DEFAULT - changes the values of a particular field to
the program default values of that field.
o RECORD DEFAULT - changes the values of a complete
record to the program default values of that record.
e REFRESH key - On occasion, because of network or line
problems, a garbled character may appear on the user’s
screen. The (REFRESH) command may be used to clear and
8187
5210
Active DCPs 0600
1 l/21/86 13:32:34
(Uptime 1 21:01:14)
5210
8187
TL-130200-1001
2. ENTER PASSWORD
SYSTEM LEVEL: @
ADMIN OPTIONS
Select the ADMIN option you choose to work
with
1. Data Base Editor
2. Maintenance and Administration
3. Run ADMP A-side test code
4. Reload the ADMP
ENTER the number of your choice: 1
Press RETURN
Enter 1 to 5
NOTES:
1. The system will allow three chances for correct password and
then return to NETPKG.
2. User Guide is written for level 5 passwords.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Fault Resolution
PCB Removal
and Replacement
MNEMONIC
7.10.2 This paragraph focuses on the use of maintenance tools
to resolve faults, and, in addition, on the interpretation and
application of feedback from the ADPM maintenance terminal .
NOTE: The following cards cannot be removed and replaced
without placing them 00s.
FB NUMBER
DESCFWI-ION
.
VPLC
FB-17226-A
Voice Packet Line Card (8 circuits)
PBE/T
FB-17227-A
Packet Bus Extender/Terminator Card (See
Note)
PR
FB-17228-A
Packet Router (See Note)
ADMP-A
FB-17229-A
Administrative Maintenance Processor (See
Note)
ADMP-B
FB-17230-A
Administrative
FB-17231 -A
Universal Control Board (Data Control
Processor)
CB (DCB = P)
Maintenance
Processor
NOTE: Disconnect the cables from the front of these cards
before removing or replacing them.
5210
8187
M-277
TL-I
30200-l 001
Fault Code 39
ADMP Initialization
Related Errors
Description:
This fault indicates errors in the ADMP-PEC interface. The
PEC, which has the ADMP in it, has some problems (e. g., PEC
OOS, PEC has lost communication with the ADMP). This fault
may also indicate inconsistency in data switch related data base.
Register Data As System Prints:
, CECX ,
O CEC
nline
A!gi
7
0
06
=
Noresponseon
contlguratlon data
01
= Undetlned Status
08 = No associated voice
call processing (VW)
09 = Device type
not implemented
status
Pprameter 1 = P rameter 2 = Pa-ameter
PEC 0 SID
d&ice type
Device
=
type’
NOTE; See Fault Log, Section 2.0.
Fault Resolution Steps:
* If B register value is 01 or 02, complete the following steps:
- Ensure host PEC is in service.- MR 50 thru MR 57.
- Ensure ADMP card is seated properly.
- Ensure ADMP is loaded and in service.
o If B register value is 03 thru 09, this indicates an internal data
base problem and the technician should call for assistance.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Fault Code 41
Disk I/O Errors
FAULT CODE - 41
NO
q YESC=FF
POWER DOWN
SYSTEM
PSUPY FOR
NO
+ YES
R&R FLOPPY
DISK DRIVE
5210
-q-e-)
M-279
TL-130200-1001
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
M-280
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
RECENT CHANGE
8.0 The Recent Change feature is part of the primary system
software. Plain language entries are used to display, or change
data base information. The SHOW, LlST, or DISPLAY functions
display data base information, while ADD, CHANGE, or DELETE
functions are used to change data base information.
-..
Access Recent Change
Recent Change allows the user to modify the data base in order
to satisfy voice communications and data processing
requirements. Recent Change is also used to keep up with
hardware changes in the system. As hardware is upgraded,
Recent Change is used to make necessary changes in system
software.
8.1 The correct Security Code must be entered in order to
access Recent Change (see paragraphs 1.2 and 1.3). A Security
Level 4 is required to complete most Recent Change
transactions.
The System Recent Change Primary Options Menu, On-Line
Maintenance, and the CAS Main/ACD Supervisor Options are
found in the Systems Option Menu. Use the following steps to
access the Systems Options Menu:
NOTE: All entries made in recent change transactions end with a
period. Type the (.) Period.
1. Type SL OL. (period)
The system responds:
SECURITY CODE >
2. Type four-character Security Code XXXX. (period)
NOTE: A Security Level of four or higher must be entered to work
with Recent Change.
The system responds:
3. TYPE RC.
OPEN AT LEVEL 4
(Recent Change period)
The system responds:
r-------------------------------------------------~
I
II
0
SYSTEM OPTIONS MENU
I
I
I
I
1) SYSTEM RECENT CHANGE PRIMARY MENU
I
I
28) MAINTENANCE
I
I
83) CAS MAlN/ACD SUPERVISOR OPTIONS
I
I
89) SAVE DATA BASE
II
X) END RECENT CHANGE
I
I
I
I ENTER TRANSACTION iwm3m -- >
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-----____----------------------------------------~ I
5210
8187
M-281
TL-130200-1001
Detailed
Change
Change
includes
descriptions and applications of System Recent
transactions are covered in the OMNI SI Recent
Manual S.V.R. 5.2.1.0. The Recent Change Manual
the following information:
List of Recent Change Transactions
Recent Change Menu Options
Manual Recent Change
Recent Change Transaction Sequences
On-Line Maintenance appears in part three of this section,
while CAS Main/ACD Supervisor Options coverage follows
here in paragraph 4.2
The Recent Change transaction, Save Data Base transaction
number 89, is accessed from the System Options Menu. The
minimum security level required is data base programmable in
data base table T6071, system feature table, byte 7, bits 5-7.
This transaction writes the office dependent base from memory
to the hard disk.
CAS Main/ACD
Supervisor Options
8.2 The CAS Main/ACD Supervisor Options allow the user to
display or change data base information for Centralized Attendant
Service (CAS) Main, or Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) system
operations. This option is accessed in the following manner:
1. From the Systems Options Menu select transaction 83.
The system responds:
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
83
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CAS MAIN/ACD
SUPERVISOR OPTIONS
f
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
90) FADS DISPLAY
38) CAS MAIN/ACD
SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE MENU
85) SUPERVISOR MESSAGE HANDLER
I
I
0) GO TO SYSTEM OPTIONS MENU
I
I
I
I
I
I
; ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER -- >
L-------------------__-_______________---------------------------------------------,
2. When an item is selected from the CAS Main/ACD Supervisor
Menu (a primary menu), the transaction is loaded into system
memory and executed. After that particular change or display
transaction is completed, the system responds:
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (0
- 224) >
I
M-282
8187
;
5210
TL-130200-1001
With this prompt the user ends the exercise (type E period),
repeats the same transaction (type R period), or proceeds to
another transaction (type another transaction number from zero
to 224 period).
If the user enters E, the Recent Change Options Menu appears:
r-------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RECENT CHANGE OPTIONS
A)
6)
C)
D)
E)
F)
X)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BEGIN
SAME ONE
BACK ONE
HELP
ERROR EXPLANATION
SYSTEM OPTIONS MENU
END RECENT CHANGE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L--__---------------------------------------------~
ENTER THE LETTER OF YOUR CHOICE HERE >
The following explanations apply to the Recent Change Options
menu displayed after every CAS Main/ACD Supervisor Option
transaction. This menu allows the user to select the next
transaction.
A)
8)
C)
D)
E)
F)
X)
5210
BEGIN - Show the Recent Change System Options Menu
SAME ONE - Show the same menu just displayed
BACK ONE - Show the menu before the one just displayed
HELP - Show the Help Menu
ERROR EXPLANATION - Show the Error Explanation Menu
SYSTEM OPTIONS MENU - Show the Systems Option Menu
END RECENT CHANGE - End CAS Main/ACD Supervisor
Option
a/a7
M-283
i
TL-130200-1001
CAS Main/ACD Help
8.2.1 HELP (Option D) and ERROR EXPLANATION (Option E)
assist the user in selecting additional transactions.
When working in CAS Main/ACD, or FADS, Help Menus for most
transactions are accessed by entering CONTROL H (press the
CNTRL and H keys at the same time). The System will respond :
r-------------------------------------------------------------------
HOW TO USE THE HELP MENUS
.=.
. _ MOST OF THE SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE AND FAD DISPLAYS
HAVE A HELP MENU ASSOCIATED WITH THEM. EACH HELP MENU GIVES
I
I
-A DESCRIPTION, PURPOSE AND USE OF ITS ASSOCIATED RECENT
iCHANGE OR FAD DISPLAY.THE HELP MENUS CAN BE VIEWED BY ENTERING A
ICNTRL-H WHILE IN THE DISPLAY FOR WHICH THE USER WISHES TO SEE THE HELP
; MENU. ONCE THE USER HAS COMPLETED VIEWING THE HELP MENU, A RESPONSE OF
: N TO THE PROMPT AT THE BOTTOM WILL RETURN THE USER TO THE START OF THE
I
I
DISPLAY
I
IN WHICH A CNTRL - H WAS ENTERED.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L----------------------------------------------------------------------------------~
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (0 - 224) >
i
!
:
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1. If no help menu exists for that transaction, the system
responds:
HELP NOT AVAILABLE > INVALID INPUT
2. Help is provided for a single transaction, or the help
message will affect two or three related transactions.
3. Help consists of a description of the transaction, how the
transaction impacts software, and how the information
displayed is used in CAS Main/ACD, or FADS system
operation.
An experienced user can omit the step of selecting
transactions from a menu by simply typing the correct
transaction number. Both the System Options Menu and the
CAS Main/ACD Supervisor Options Menu offer a prompt
which allows the user to directly input transaction numbers.
In this case, the following prompt will appear:
ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER -- >
M-284
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
FADS, CAS Main/ACD
Transactions
8.2.2 Once the user accesses the CAS Main/A0 Supervisor
Options Menu (transaction 83), additional menus and submenus are available by entering the correct transaction number.
These transactions, along with required Security Level, are listed
below.
FADS, CAS Main/ACB Recent Change Transactions
CATEGORY
.~.
F ADS
S E C U R I T Y TRANSLEVEL
ACTION #
A-C-D-S
-
._
_
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
91
92
95
96
93
98
94
- - -1
-2- --2- __
45 -
77
78
79
72
-2- --
- - -2
_ - -2
74
75
76
- - -1
- - -1
48
41
- _ -1
-2- --
42
43
-2- --2- -
44
45
TRANSACTION
Real-Time Agent Status Display
Real-Time System Status Display
System Status Report
CAS Main/ACD Source Group Report
Agent Status Report
Trend Report
CAS Main/ACD Source Group Calls
Report
Display All FADS Options
Change FADS Collection Period
Change FADS Automatic Dump Period
Change FADS Automatic Dump
Selections
Change FADS Data Collection Start Time
Initiate a Trend Report
Cancel a Trend Report
CAS Main/ACD
Supervisory
Recent Change
2- - - -2-
- - -1
46
47
71
55
- - -1
56
-l- -
5210
8187
Display Status of Agent Positions
Display Status of Agent Positions by Agent
Group
Display Night Destination of Agent Groups
Change the Group/Supervisor of an Agent
Position
Change the State of an Agent Position
Change the Night Destination of an Agent
Group
Add an Agent Group
Delete an Agent Group
Display/Change FADS Delay Timing
Display Breakdown of all CAS Main/ ACD
Trunks by Trunk Numbers
Display Breakdown of all CAS Main/ ACD
Trunks by Agent Group
M-285
-.
.
_:._
TL-130200-1001
FADS, CAS ~ai~/~C~ Recent Change Transactions
(Continued)
S E C U R I T Y TRANSLEVEL
ACTION #
A-C-D-S
CATEGORY
.~.
- - -1
51
Display all CAS MainlACD trunks with a
Specific Source
-2- -
52
-2- _
53
Change IS/OS state of a CAS Main/ACD
Trunk
Change Source Group of a CAS Main/
ACD Trunk
Change Primary Destination for a Trunk
Group
Display Source Messages
Change a Specific Source Message
Display Trunk Number and Status of all
CAS Main/ACD R/A
Display Delay Routing of all Agent Groups
Display Call Waiting Levels of all Agent
Groups
First Recorded ‘Announcement
Second Recorded Announcement
Delay or Repetition Timing
Change Alternate Routing of an Agent
Group
Change Call Waiting Levels for an
Agent Group.
Display a Repertory Dial Key Set
Change a Repertory Dial Key Set
Display Day/Night Mode
Change Day/Night Mode of an Agent
Group
Send Special Message
Send Unique Message
Display Special Message
Change a Special Message
-2-
-
54
- - -1
-2- - - -1
58
59
67
- - -1
- - -1
68
69
-2- -24 -2- _
62
63
64
65
-2- - -2- -2-
66
-1
81
82
86
87
-
-1
-
- - -2
49
97
84
88
- -- 2
- - -1
-2-
M-286
-
8187
5210
-
-
-
-.
TL-130200-1001
FADS Recent Change
8.3 The Force Administration Data System (FADS) collects and
stores information for CAS Main and ACD agents, agent
groupsor the overall CAS Main/ACD system. Information is
stored in the form of reports which can be accessed through
FADS Recent Change transactions
The results of two of these reports - Real Time Agent Status
Display (transaction 91) and Real Time System Status Display
(transaction 92) - occur on a real-time basis. This means that
information displayed exists at the present time and is
continuously updated. Other reports contain information
collected over a specified time period. Periodic intervals are
selected by the user and range from 15, 30, 45, or 60 minutes.
Daily intervals are also selected by the user and range from 1, 4,
8, 12, or, 24 hours. A periodic report and a daily report can run
at the same time.
..
FADS Display Options
Menu
8.4 The FADS Display Options Menu is accessed through the
CAS Main/ACD Supervisor Options Menu. The following steps
are used to access the menu:
1. Select transaction 90 from the CAS Main/ACD Supervisor
Options Menu.
The system responds:
i
I
I
I
I
FADS DISPLAY OPTIONS
91) REAL TIME AGENT STATUS DISPLAY
92) REAL TIME SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
95) SYSTEM STATUS REPORT
96) CAS MAIN/ACD SOURCE GROUP REPORT
93) AGENT STATUS REPORT
98) TREND REPORT
94) CAS MAIN/ACD SOURCE GROUP CALLS
63) GO TO CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISOR OPTIONS MENU
ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER-->
90
I
I
I
II
II
I
I
.I
L-------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Select the correct transaction or sub-menu.
5210
8187
i
I
II
tI
II
M-287
I
-
-
TL-130200-1001
FADS Display
Transactions
Real-Time Agent
Status Display
.~.
8.5 The following paragraphs describe transactions listed in the
FADS Display Options Menu. The transactions listed here are
used to display FADS data for information purposes only.
8.51 Real-Time Agent Status Display (transaction 91) lists
call-handling information for agents in agent groups
at the time of the display. Agents are identified by their agent
position number. The header remains the same while contents is
updated to show the status of each agent during normal
operations. A CRT is required to display this transaction.
r---------------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
II
III
; GRPO
1GRPl
: GRP2
f GRP3
; GRP4
REAL TfME AGENT STATUS
12:02 08129179
POSITIONHSTATE
003/A 004/B 005/B
%2
EE
013/B 014/B
020/A
021/W
015/B
Et
111/P
114/B
121/W
126/O 127lW
I
II
II
91
006/U 007/B 008/A
016/A
017/B
00%
104/B
%r
018/U
105/P
106/P 107/B 108/A
117/B
118/U
:%r
: where
; A Position is available for calls
I B Agent is busy with an incoming call
I 0 Position is out of service
; U Position is un-staffed
; W A ent is in an after call work state
I PA?ET is being initialized
i P Agent is using outgoing PABX service
M-288
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Real-Time System
Status Display
8.5.2 Real-Time System Status Display (transaction 92) lists the
amount of activity in each agent group at the time of the display.
The header remains the same while contents is updated to show
system status during normal operations. A CRT is required to
display this transaction.
_____-_-__----______-----------------------------r----------------------------l
; REAL TIME SYSTEM STATUS
II
12:02
08129179
_
I
II
..
#
#
#
DEL TOTAL MAX DELAY
#AGT
#
WAIT
i GRP
STF BUSY WORK AVL
OTG
#2
10-12
8
4
0
0
2
2
l--O2
;1 7
.
4
0
3
0
0
0
O-00
I
2
7
3
0
3
1
0
0
o--o0
I
3
8
3
3
0
2
4
6
l--l 5
I
4
12
8
4
0
0
2
2
l--O2
;
5
7
4
0
3
0
0
0
o--o0
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
92
MIN--SEC MODE i
I
6
7
3
0
3
1
0
0
o--o0
I
7
6
3
3
0
0
4
6
l--l 5
14
6
4
12
16
;TOTAL
66
32
I
I where
I
! GRP = Agent group number
: # AGT STF = Number of agent positions staffed
; # BUSY = Number of busy agents
;#WORK = Number of agents in work state
I#OTG = Number of agents in outgoing state
!#AVL = Number of available agents
I MAX DELAY = Longest delayed call per agent group
iDEL#2 = Number of calls waiting for or received R/A #2
; TOTAL WAIT = Total number of calls waiting
;MODE = System mode, day or night
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D-
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L----------------------------------------------------------------------------------~
System Status Report
I
I
I
:
:
;
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
8.5.3 System Status Report (transaction 95) lists the amount of
incoming and outgoing calls on all CAS Main and ACD agent
groups over a period of time selected by the user. Before
information is displayed, the user selects Periodic Report with
collection periods of 15, 30, 45, or 60 minutes, or Daily Report
with collection periods of 1, 4, 8, 12, or 24 hours.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
SYSTEM STATUS REPORT
I
I
II
95
A)PERIODIC REPORT
B)DAILY REPORT
;L------------------------------------------------------------------ENTER THE LETTER OF THE DESIRED REPORT >A.
I
I
5210
8187
M-289
i
I
II
I
I
I
I
J
--
-
TL-130200-I 001
See Change FADS Periodic Data Report Collection Period
(transaction 78) to change time of Periodic Report, and Change
FADS Automatic Dump Period (transaction 79) to change time of
Daily Report.
r---------------------------‘-----------------------------------------,
i PERIOD 11:30/l 2:00 1 O/l O/79
I
I
SYSTEM STATUS REPORT
1
I
12:02
1 O/l O/79
I
I
I
AUG
AUG AUG AUG
i G R P POSCA#LLCA#LL
CAL#LSN#D CA#LL CAL#L A U L A N S H N L D S U L
I
OFRD ANSANS DELABAN OUFL TIME TIME TIME
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
0
1
2
3
6
t
/TO;
11
6
5
4
11
4
52
112
86
56
40
112
40
588
111
86
54
39
111
39
580
12
9
8
5
12
5
688
7
4
;
7
3
42
1
0
2
2
1
2
10
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
11
12
19
14
11
14
15
7
6
13
15
7
15
12
15
14
17
15
15
15
15
86
82
67
71
86
71
76
; ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
f
L-------------------------------------------------------------------,
8f87
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
f where
I
I GRP - Agent group numbers
! AUG POS STF - Average positions staffed
f # CALL OFRD - Number of calls offered
I# CALLS ANS = Number of calls answered
: # CALL DEL = Number of calls delayed > ‘IX” seconds
;#2NDDEL = Number of calls receiving second announcement
! # CALL ABAN = Number of calls abandoned
: # CALL OUFL = # of calls overflowed to an alternate group
: AUG AUL TIME = Average time available
! AUG ANS TIME = Average answer time per call
! AUG HNLD TIME = Average handle time per call
jSUL = Service level
M-290
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5210
-- -
TL-130200-1001
CASACD Source
Group Report
8.5.4 The CASACD Source Group Report (transaction 96) lists
the amount of incoming trunk traffic from each source group
servicing agent groups over a period of time selected by the
user. Before information is displayed, the user selects Periodic
Reports with collection periods of 15, 30, 45, or 60 minutes, or
Daily Report with collection periods of I, 4, 8, 12, or 24 hours.
- - - - --.
r-----------------------__-________________-----------------I
*-
96
CAS/ACD SOURCE GROUP REPORT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A) PERIODIC REPORT
B) DAILY REPORT
I
I
I
ENTER THE LETTER OF THE DESIRED REPORT >A.
A
L---_---____---_____------------------------------------------------
--------------------------,
r------------ ^-----__--_______-__-------------------
i
; PERIOD 11:30/l 2:00
PAGE 1
1 O/l O/79
I
I
I
t
I
I
SOURCE GRP
#/
ID
I
I
I
I
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
:
0
01 I
02 I
03 I
I
%TlME
#CALL #CALL #CALL #CALL %TIME
DEL
BUSY ATB
O F R D ABAN
ANS
CHICAGO
115
ELMHURST
82
ELGIN
60
DES PLAINES 3 8
5
1
0
1
110
81
60
37
12
8
4
3
65
58
49
38
f
4
11
I
I
II
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CAS/ACD SOURCE GROUP REPORT
12:02
1 O/l o/79
I
i
I
I
I
t
1
16 .
OAK
PARK
34
1.
4
4d
d
I
I
I
j DO YOU WISH TO CONTINUE THIS DISPLAY > Y.
I
I where
I
I # CALL OFRD = Number of calls offered to the system
; # CALL ABAN = Number of calls abandoned
;# CALL ANS = Number of calls answered
: # CALL DEL = Number of calls delayed
! % TIME BUSY = Percentage that a trunk is busy
; % TIME ATB = Percentage that all trunks are busy
i __-__________-__-___---------------------------------------------------------J
5210
8187
M-291
-
-
TL-130200-1001
r---‘----------‘----------‘---------------------------------------e------q
I
i PERIOD 11:30/l 2:00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SOURCE GRP
#/
I
I
.. II
.
I
I
II
I.
I
ID
i
1 O/l O/79
I
I
I
I
I
II
PAGE 2
CAS/ACD SOURCE GROUP REPORT
12:02
1 O/l o/79
#CALL #CALL
#CALL#CALL %TIME
O F R D ABAN
ANS
DEL
%TIME
BUSY
_.
17
18
19
20
/
/
I
1.
CALUMET
EVANSTON
GARY
HAMMOND
112
86
56
38
2
1
0
1
110
85
56
37
12
8
4
3
65
58
49
38
4
1
1
0
31 / ivlT PROSPECT 34
TOTAL
846
1.
25
.33
821
4
91
4d
51
d
02
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
L---_----_,---------______,_____________----------------------------------,
I
I
I
i ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
M-292
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Agent Status Report
; PERIOD
II
I
8.5.5 The Agent Status Report (transaction 93). lists call handling
information for individual agents in an agent group collected over
a period of time selected by the user.
1 O/l o/79
AGENT STATUS REPORT
12:02
1 O/l o/79
I
AVG BUSY AVG WORK
- I AGENT AGT # CALL AVG HNLD
:%TIME
; GROUP POS
HNLD
TIME
TIME
TIME
.;AVL
I
0
1
2
56
12
8
I
3
4
12
1
I
I
5
4
5
:1:
I
:
4
:
I
I
t:
ii
10
3
0
:
59
11
6
60
10
7
3
G
12
I
9
3:
:
16
1:
11
5
I
1
0
3
4
1
9
I
2
2
1
12
71
9
7
I
I
13
62
I
I
14
63
::
ii
z
;
I
I
1
1
5
4
5
1
5
9
6
I
93
_.
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
1 l/30/1 2:00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AVG OTG
TIME
65
45
56
I
I
I
I
20s
ii;:
47
46
35
47
43
45
56
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6
7
117
23
18
12
6
6
3
118
39
17
13
4
61
12
t
119
8
1
120*
45
14
9
5
5
2
121”
70
10
5
4
122”
14
6
z;
3
123”
12
:
6
1
124*
46
11
5
16
*AGENT(S) NOT STAFFED FOR ENTIRE COLLECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
78
2:
54
63
45
43
57
PERIOD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
i ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
iI where
I AGT POS = Agent position
; # CALL HNLD = Number of calls handled
; AVG HNLD TIME = Average handle time for position
’ AVG BUSY TIME = Average busy time for position
: AVG WORK TIME = Average work time for position
I AVG ox TIME = Average outgoing time for position
i % TIME AVL = Percentage of time position is available
5210
8187
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
M-293
r
- TL-130200-1001
Trend Report
r
I
I
-.
M-294
8.5.6 The Trend Report (transaction 98) lists incoming call
information over a period of time by agent group to identify
possible call-handling trends. Collection periods are limited to
24 hours each, but these may be collected for up to seven days.
-------------------------------------------------------------------,
TREND REPORT
12:02 08129179
III
II
98
END: 07:30 08/29/79
GROUP #l START 08:OO 08/28/79
! TIME AVG POS# CALL #CALL #CALL #CALL MAX DELAYSVL
i PERIOD
OFRD
DEL ABAN
OVFL
MIN--SEC
_STF
/ 08:OO
102
2
1
oo--54
87
23
9
; 08:30
24
89
1
0
00--27
78
6
; 09:oo
78
3
0
0
oo--37
90
26
; 09:30
29
100
5
1
0
00--23
91
) 1o:oo
28
123
8
2
0
01--l 6
89
1
; 10:30
126
5
0
00--24
94
28
; 11:oo
29
131
3
0
0
00--l 0
98
; 11:30
26
142
2
0
0
00-09
98
; 12:oo
27
120
8
1
0
oo--47
92
f 12:30
26
78
2
0
0
oo--07
90
; 13:oo
28
99
1
0
0
oo--04
99
: 13:30
26
107
4
1
0
00--l 4
89
0
) 14:oo
25
110
2
0
00--08
97
0
I14:30
26
105
4
0
00--26
90
0
00--l 1
97
I 1500
25
94
1
0
II
I
iI
.
II
I 07:ob
45
d
d
oo--00
106
lb
d
I 07:30
78
0
0
oo--00
100
2
3
0
I
; ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
I
I where
I
; AVG POS STF = Average positions staffed
; #CALL OFRD = Number of calls received
; # CALL DEL = Number of calls delayed
! # CALL ABAN = Number of calls abandoned
! # CALL OVFL = Number of calls overflowed to an alternate
: MAX DEL = Longest answer time
; SVL = Service level
8187
;
!
;
i
I
I
i
;
;
;
:
:
:
I
I
I
I
!
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;I
I
I
I
5210
I
i
TL-130200-1001
CAS MAINIACDSource
8.5.7 CAS Main/ACD Source Group Calls (transaction 94) lists
the number of incoming calls per trunk in the source group.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
ENTER A SOURCE GROUP # (0-->31)
>lO.
!
L-------------------------------------------------------------------~
_.
..
I
94
I
I
I
I
I
20
23
--->
156
24
I
I
34
--->
144
37
40
--->
>
---
109
125
I
;I
II
198
25
35
--->
--->
167
36
38
--- >
99
39
I
I
I
I
I
--->
--->
201
I
189
I
--->
100
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
; ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
J
L----------------------------------------------------------------------
FADS Control
Data Menu
i
I
I
I
TOTAL
TOTAL TRUNK #
T O T A L TRUNK#
#
--->
175
21
>
69
22 --->
145
---
/TRUNK
I
I
I
1 O/l O/79
SOURCE GROUP # 10 CALLS
12:02
10/10/79
I
I
I
I
I
I
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
i PERIOD 11:30/l 2:00
I
I
8.5.8 The FADS Control Data Menu is accessed through
CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent Change. The following steps
are used to access the menu:
1. Select transaction 70,from CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent
Change .
The system responds:
--------------------------------------------------------,
l------------
I
I
I
I
FADS CONTROL DATA
i
;
;
;
;
;
;
)
77) DISPLAY
78) CHANGE
79) CHANGE
72) CHANGE
74) CHANGE
75) INITIATE
76) CANCEL
39) GO TO
70
ALL FADS OPTIONS
FADS COLLECTION PERIOD
FADS AUTOMATIC DUMP PERIOD
FADS AUTOMATIC DUMP SELECTIONS
FADS DATA COLLECTION START TIME
A TREND REPORT
A TREND REPORT
CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE MENU
I
I
ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER -- >
IL------------------------------------------------------------------2.Select the correct transaction.
5210
8187
M-295
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
AI
-
-
TL-130200-1001
FADS Control
Transactions
Display All FADS Options
8.6 The following paragraphs describe transactions listed in the
FADS Control Data Menu. The transactions listed here are used
to change or initiate FADS Control Data information.
8.6.1 Display All FADS Options (transaction 77) allows the user
to see all FADS options currently in use.
..
-
I----------------------------------------------------------------------,
II
FADS OPTIONS DISPLAY
77
I
PERIODIC DATA COLLECTION PERIOD: 15 MINUTES
It
I
TRENT REPORT DATA COLLECTION PERIOD: 15 MINUTES
I
I
I
TRENT REPORT
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
A GENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GROUP : 0
I
I
AUTOMATIC DUMP PERIOD: 8 HOURS
I
II
I
AUTOMATIC DUMPS IN EFFECT:
SYSTEM STATUS REPORT
SOURCE GROUP REPORT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
I
I
I
I
L------,---------------------------------------------------------------,
Change FADS Periodic
Data Collection Period
i
I
8.6.2 Change FADS Periodic Data Collection Period (transaction
78) allows the user to change the time period for FADS reports.
This time period can range from 15, 30, 45, or 60 minutes.
r----------------------------------------------------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHANGE FADS PERIODIC DATA COLLECTION PERIOD
I
I
I
78
I
I
I
CURRENT FADS COLLECTION PERIOD: 15 MINUTES
I
I
NEW FADS COLLECTION PERIOD:
DISABLE
A)
15 MINUTES
W
30 MINUTES
C)
45 MINUTES
W
60 MINUTES
El
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ENTER THE LETTER OF THE DESIRED PERIOD >C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
I
M-296
8187
I
5210
TL-130200-1001
Change FADS
Automatic Dump
Period
8.6.3 Change FADS Automatic Dump Period (transaction 79)
allows the user to change the timing of automatic dumps. Dump
periods can range from one-half hour, one hour, four hours,
eight hours, twelve hours, or twenty-four hours.
r’-----------------‘-----‘-----------’----------------------------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.=.
I
I
-..
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHANGE FADS AUTOMATIC DUMP PERIOD
79
CURRENT AUTOMATIC DUMP PERIOD: 8 HOURS
I
1
NEW AUTOMATIC DUMP PERIOD:
DISABLE DUMP
A)
‘l/2 HOUR
6)
1 -HOUR
C)
4HOURS
D)
8 HOURS
E)
12 HOURS
F)
24 HOURS
G)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ENTER THE LETTER OF THE DESIRED PERIOD >F.
I
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
L-----------__------------------------------------------------------~
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
Change the FADS
Automatic Dump
Selections
;
I
I
I
i
8.6.4 Change the FADS Automatic Dump Selections (transaction
72) allows the user to select which reports are dumped
automatically by FADS. The System Status Report and the
Source Group Report are affected by this transaction.
l---------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
f
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHANGE THE FADS AUTOMATIC DUMP SELECTIONS
72
I
CURRENT FADS REPORTS AUTOMATICALLY DUMPED:
SYSTEM STATUS REPORT
SOURCE GROUP REPORT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DUMP THE SYSTEM STATUS REPORT AUTOMATICALLY? N.
I
I
I
I
I
DUMP THE SOURCE GROUP REPORT AUTOMATICALLY? Y.
I
DO YOU WISH THE REPORT TO BE DUMPED TO THIS TERMINAL? Y.
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5210
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
i
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
L-----------______--_--________________------------------------------,
8187
;
M-297
TL-130200-1001
Change FADS Data
Collection Start Time
8.6.5 Change FADS Data Collection Start Time (transaction 74)
allows the user to change the start time and start date for FADS
data collection. The time and date entered shows when data will
be collected for daily FADS reports.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
74
CHANGE FADS DATA COLLECTION START TIME
CURRENT FADS DATA COLLECTION START TIME :
~-
12:OO
I
ENTER A NEW FADS DATA COLLECTION START TIME HOURS (00 -->23) >8
MINUTES (OO-->59) >o.
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
START ON CURRENT DATE (Y/N) > N.
I
(1-12)
~ >l.
I’ -ENTER STARTING DATE - MONTH
I
(1-31) >18.
DAY
I
I
(00-99) > 84.
YEAR
I
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
II
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)>
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
]
I
I
I
Initiate a Trend
Report
I
I
8.6.6 Initiate a Trend Report (transaction 75) allows the user
to initiate a trend report starting at a time and date, and lasting for
a specified period of time.
INITIATE A TREND REPORT
75
ENTER AN AGENT GROUP # (0 --- > 7) > 1.
ENTER A STARTING HOUR
(00 - > 23) > 8. MINUTES (00- > 59) > 0.
START ON CURRENT DATE? (Y/N) > N.
ENTER STARTING DATE - MONTH
(l--12) >7.
DAY
(l--31) > 18.
YEAR
(00-99) > 82.
COLLECTION
PERIOD:
15 MINUTES
A)
30 MINUTES
B)
45 MINUTES
Cl
60 MINUTES
D)
ENTER LETTER OF COLLECTION PERIOD >A.
ENTER THE NUMBER OF PERIODS (l--48) >48
A TREND REPORT FOR GROUP # 1 WILL START AT 08:OO on 7/18/82.
IT WILL BE COLLECTED EVERY 15 MINUTES FOR 48 PERIODS.
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)>
M-298
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Cancel a Trend Report
8.6.7 Cancel a Trend Report (transaction 76) allows the user to
cancel a trend report,
r---------------------------------------------------------------I
I
.=_
.-.
CANCEL A TREND REPORT
AGENT GROUP: 1
I
76
1
II
II
II
I
I
I
:
II
III
CURRENT START TIME: 800 ON 7/18/82
I
CANCEL? > Y.
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
IL---------------,---------------------------------------------------,
I
CAS Main/AC33
Supervisory
Recent Change
8.6.8 CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent Change (transaction
38) is a primary menu consisting of a list of sub-menus. Each
transaction listed will lead the user to a subgroup of transactions
whose purpose is to display or change CAS Main/ACD data
information. This process was shown above with FADS Control
Data (transaction 70). The remaining transactions will be
covered here.
i------------I
-------------------------------------------------------,
II
CAS MAINIACD SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE
AGENT DATA
CAS MAIN/ACD TRUNK DATA
57) SOURCE MESSAGES
CALL WAITING DATA
I
60)
FADS CONTROL DATA
CAS MAIN/ACD INSTRUMENT CONTROL DATA
80)
I
DAY/NIGHT MODE DATA’
39)
:
I
GO TO CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISOR OPTIONS MENU
83)
I
i ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER -- >
I
I
i
I
I
;
I
I
38
i
40)
50)
70)
I
I
I
I
I
I
L---------m
---------------------------------------------------------~
5210
8187
M-299
TL-130200-1001
Agent Data Displays
and Changes
8.7 The Agent Data Menu (transaction 40) allows the user to
display or change information related to agents or agent groups.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
II .=I
I
t
I
I
I
I
f
I
AGENT DATA
I
40
48)
DISPLAY STATUS OF AGENT POSITIONS
41) DISPLAY STATUS OF AGENT POSITIONS BY AGENT GROUP
42)
DISPLAY NIGHT DESTINATION OF AGENT GROUPS
43) CHANGE THE GROUP/SUPERVISOR OF AN AGENT POSITION
44) CHANGE THE STATE OF AN AGENT POSITION
4 5 ) CHANGE THE NIGHT DESTINATION OF AN AGENT GROUP
4 6 ) ADD AN AGENT GROUP
47)
DELETE AN AGENT GROUP
71)
DISPLAY/CHANGE FADS DELAY TIMING
38)
GO TO CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE MENU
I
I
ENTER T R A NS A C T I O N
NUMBER
--
>
:
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
L-------------------------------------------------------------------~
Agent Position
Status Display
I
I
I
8.7.1 Agent Position Status Display (transaction 48) shows all
agents in the system, supervisor, agent group, and in-service or
out-of-service state.
NOTE: Only equipped agent groups are displayed.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
AGENT POSITION STATUS
48
;
j POS SUP GRP STATE POS SUP GRP STATE POS SUP GRP STATE i
1000
1003
1
3
3
7
INS
INS
001
004
2
2
0
0
INS
INS
002
005
2
2
0
0
INS
INS
i
I
(006
1009
1012
1014
1017
2
2
1
2
2
0
1
3
0
0
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
007
010
013
015
018
2
1
1
8
2
6
3
3
5
0
‘INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
008
011
014
016
019
2
1
2
8
8
1
3
0
4
4
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
;
1120
1123
1126
1129
1132
1135
7
7
7
7
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
INS
INS
00s
00s
00s
00s
121
124
127
130
133
7
7
7
7
2
2
2
2
2
1
INS
00s
00s
00s
00s
122
125
128
131
134
7
7
7
2
2
2
2
2
0
1
INS
00s
00s
00s
00s
/
I
I
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i ENTER (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
I where
I POS =
lSUP =
~GRP =
; STATE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
191)
Agent position (O--Supervisor (l-- 8)
CAS MAINIACD agent group number (0--- 7)
= In-service/out-of-service state
I
I
I
I
I
L-------------------------------------------------------------------~
M-300
8187
5210
.._
.’
TL-130200-1001
Agent Status
The state of an agent position is described as follows:
l
INS (In Service). Agent has control of the instrument. The agent
can LOG ON or LOG OFF, and accept or extend CAS
Main/ACD calls.
@ 00s (Out-Of-Service). Agent has no control over the
instrument. Initially, instrument was fully loaded and identified,
but in this state system will not direct calls to the instrument, or
recognize any command from it. This status is similar to a
Maintenance Busy State.
Note: The system data base will consider this line to be in
service, but the agent can be initialized to an Out-Of-Service
state by making bit 5, byte zero of the Agent Data Base table
equal to zero.
l
UNE (Unequipped) Agent has no control over the instrument.
The instrument was never loaded since the data base makes
no provisions as to where the position’s line 1 circuit or the
data link circuit are located.
In order to place an unequipped position into service, the
technician must supply (using Recent Change) all data
concerning the physical location of the position’s line 1 circuit
and, if a PACET, the position’s data link circuit. Once the
system has received and verified this information, the
instrument is loaded. When completed successfully, the
instrument is placed into service with control given to the
agent.
5210
8187
M-301
TL-130200-1001
Agent Group
Status Display
8.7.2 Agent Group Status Display (transaction 41) allows the
user to display an organizational summary of each agent group.
This summary includes agent position, and in-service or outof-service state of each position.
NOTE: Only equipped agent groups are displayed.
i
._.
_.
AGENT GROUP STATUS
I
I
POS
STATE POS
STATE POS
STATE POS
I
; GROUP 0 000
001
003
INS
INS
002
INS
II
004
006
015
INS
INS
014
INS
II
016
017
INS
018
019
INS
INS
II
031
050
INS
00s
i GROUP 1 005
007
INS
008
009
INS
INS
032
0
0
s
033
0
0
s
034
0
0
s
035
I
! GROUP 2 120
INS
121
INS
122
INS
123
I
124
00s
125
00s
126
00s
127
I
I
128
00s
129
00s
130
00s
I
I
I GROUP 3 010
INS
011
INS
112
INS
113
i GROUP 4 020
INS
021
INS
022
INS
023
I
I
024
00s
025
00s
026
00s
027
171
; GROUP 5 1 7 0
INS
INS
172
INS
173
174
175
177
I
00s
00s
176
00s
; GROUP 6 0 7 0
071
073
INS
INS
072
INS
I
074
0
0
s
075
00s
0
7
6
0
0
s
077
I
j GROUP 7 080
081
INS
082
083
INS
INS
II
184
00s
185
00s
186
00s
187
i ENTER (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
iI where
(POS = Agent position (O--- 191)
II STATE = In-service/out-of-service state
L--
M-302
41
STATE
INS
INS
INS
INS
00s
INS
00s
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INS
INS
00s
INS
00s
INS
00s
INS
00s
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
>
-----------------------------------------------------------------J
8187
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5210
-
-
TL-130200-1001
Night Destination of
All Agent Groups
8.7.3 ‘Night Destination of All Agent Groups (transaction 42)
allows the user to see night destinations for all agent groups.
Night destinations include the following:
Another agent group
A directory number
@ An attendant
l A trunk group
l Third recorded announcement
* No destination
l
l
..
Night Destination
The night destination of an agent group can be changed to a
trunk group if the following conditions are met:
1. All CAS trunk groups assigned to the agent group whose night
destination is being changed must have disconnect supervisor
in either an incoming or two-way state
2. The trunk group used for the new night destination must have
its trunk direction in either an outgoing or two-way state.
3. The destination trunk group must be one of the following:
- Central Office (CO)
- Foreign Exchange (FX)
- TIE
- WATS
4. If CAS trunk groups assigned to the agent group whose night
destination is being changed does not have disconnect
supervisor in either an incoming or two-way state, this agent’s
group night destination cannot be changed to a trunk group.
5. If the trunk group used for the new night destination does not
have its trunk direction in either an outgoing or two-way state,
or if the destination trunk group is not one of those four listed
above, the trunk group that was to be used for the agent
group’s night destination cannot be used.
5210
8/87
M-303
TL-130200-I 001
Change the
Group/Supervisor
of an Agent Position
8.7.4 Change the Group/Supervisor of an Agent Position
(transaction 43) allows the user to change the agent group and/or
supervisor of a specified agent position.
Change the State
of an Agent Position
87.5 Change the State of an Agent Position (transaction 44)
allows the user to place an agent position in-service, or take a
position out of service. Validity checks only the position number.
If the supervisor attempts to place an in-service position into an
out-of-service state while it is handling a call, the following
events will occur:
1.. The position is removed from the active agent group.
2. The supervisor receives a delayed message when the position
is actually placed out-of-service.
These events cause a warning message if the last in-service
position in an agent group is placed out-of-service, or if the
new state is the same as the existing state. If the new state is the
same as the existing state, the change is not processed. If a
position is placed out-of-service while an agent is still logged
on, a log off function is performed by the agent.
I
I
I
I
I
CHANGE THE GROUP/SUPERVISOR OF AN AGENT POSITION 43
I
AGENT POSITION (0--- > 191)
I
I
CURRENT AGENT GROUP IS 5, CURRENT SUPERVISOR IS 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NEW AGENT GROUP (0--->7)
SUPERVISOR (1--- > 8)
;
I
I
I
I
> 20.
I
I
I
>4.
i
> 8.
I
II
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
L------_----__-----___-_____-___________------------------------------~
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
CHANGE THE STATE OF AN AGENT POSITION
AGENT POSITION (0--- > 191)
> 11.
I
I
AGENT POSITION 01 -I HAS A CURRENT STATUS OF: INS
I
I
I
NEW POSITION STATUS (INSOOS)
I
I
I
I
I
I
44
>OOS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) BY.
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
L-----------__-___--_----___-___________------------------------------
M-304
8187
TL-130200-1001
Change Night
8.7.6 Change Night Destination of an Agent Group (transaction
Destination of an
45) allows the user to change the night destination of any agent
Agent
Group
group.
I---------- -----------------------------------------------------------,
II
I
I
I
CHANGE NIGHT DESTINATION OF AN AGENT GROUP
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..-
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
t
45
AGENT GROUP NUMBER (0--->7) >O.
I
I
I
CURRENT NIGHT DESTINATION: DIRECTORY NUMBER 5678
NEW DESTINATION TYPE:
DIRECTORY NUMBER
A)
ATTENDANT(S)
B)
AGENT GROUP
0)
TRUNK GROUP
D)
THIRD RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
’
El
NONE
F)
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ENTER LETTER OF NEW DESTINATION TYPE >A.
I
I
DIRECTORY NUMBER > 1234.
f
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
.---------------------------------------------------------------,
!
A. DIRECTORY NUMBER
Prompt entries include the following:
B.ATTENDANT - NONE
C.AGENT GROUP - ENTER AGENT GROUP (0-- > 7) >
D.TRUNK GROUP - ENTER TRUNK GROUP (0-->63) >
E.THIRD RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT - NONE
F. NONE - NONE
Add a CAS Main/ACD
Agent Group
8.7.7 Add A CAS Main/ACD Agent Group (transaction 46) allows
the user to add a CAS Main/ACD agent group.
r----------------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ADD A CAS MAIN/ACD
AGENT GROUP NUMBER (0---> 7)
AGENT GROUP
> 0.
AGENT GROUP FUNCTION (CASACD)
>ACD.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MUSIC TO BE PLAYED WHILE ON HOLD (Y/N) >Y.
REPERTORY DIAL KEY SET (0--->3) >3.
I
I
I
FADS CALL DELAY TIME (0--- > 255) SEC > 120.
I
I
I
I
HANDS-FREE OPERATION (Y/N) > Y.
I
MONITOR WARNING TONE (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
I
TIME IN WORK STATE (0--- > 254,i) SEC > 60.
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
46
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ATTENDANT/LINE TO AGENT TRANSFER ALLOWED (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
ENTER END (E],- - -REPEAT
OR TRANSACTION NUMBER p-224)
.---------_------- - - - - - - -(R] L--------------------------- - - - - - ->_ - - a :
5210
8187
M-305
-
-
TL-130200-1001
Delete a CAS Main/ACD
8.7.8 Delete a CAS Main/ACD Agent Group (transaction 47)
allows the user to delete an agent group having no agents.
r--------------------------------------------------------I
I
DELETE A CAS MAINIACD
I
I
I
I
AGENT GROUP
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
I
i
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
;
I
47
AGENT GROUP TO BE DELETED (0--->7) >O.
I
I
I
.~.
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-----~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~------~~~-~-~~~~~~~~~~-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~~
._
-
Display/Change FADS
Delay Timing
I
I
I
I
8.7.9 Display/Change FADS Delay Timing (transaction 71) allows
the user to display or change FADS delay timing. The delay
timing value defines the point at which an incoming CAS
Main/ACD call is considered as delayed. The delay timing value
is applied only if there is no agent available when a call enters
the system.
r--------------------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
II
I
I
I
I
I
DISPLAY/CHANGE FADS DELAY TIMING
AGENTGROUP
DELAY TIME
0
120
1
030
2
060
3
045
4
090
5
150
6
240
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
71
7
180
I
I
I
AGENT GROUP TO CHANGE (0)--- > 7) OR E TO EXIT > 7.
FADS DELAY TIME (0--- > 255) SECONDS > 120.
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
I
I
I
i
I
I
L-----_---------------------------------------------------------------,
CAS Main/ACD Trunk
Data Menu
8.7.10 The CAS Main/ACD Trunk Data Menu is accessed
through CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent Change. The
1. Select transaction 50 from CAS MairVACD Supervisory Recent
Change.
The system responds:
M-306
Em7
5210
TL-130200-1001
l-----------I
I
I
I
f
I
II
I
I
I’
I
I
I
I
55)
56)
51)
52)
-53)
54)
38)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------~
CAS MAINIACD
TRUNK DATA
I
I
50
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
,
DISPLAY BREAKDOWN OF ALL CAS MAIN/ACD TRUNKS BY TRUNK #
DISPLAY BREAKDOWN OF ALL CAS MAIN/ACD TRUNKS BY AGENT GROUP
DISPLAY ALL CAS MAIN/ACD TRUNKS WITH A SPECIFIC SOURCE
CHANGE IN-SERVICE/OUT-OF-SERVICE STATE OF A CAS MAIN/ACD TRUNK
CHANGE SOURCE GROUP OF A CAS MAIN/ACD TRUNK
CHANGE PRIMARY DESTINATION FOR TRUNK GROUP
GO TO CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE MENU
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER-- >
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
2. Select the correct transaction.
CAS Main/ACD Trunk
Data Transactions
Display Trunks by Trunk
Number
8.8 The following paragraphs describe transactions listed in the
CAS Main/ACD Trunk Data Menu. The transactions listed here
are used to display or change trunk data.
8.8.1 Display Trunks by Trunk Number (transaction 55) allows
the user to see all CAS Main/ACD trunks listed according to
system trunk number.
---------------------------------r---------------------------I
I
CAS MAIN/ACD
TRUNK BREAKDOWN BY TRUNK NUMBER
; 55
I
; TRK#
I
I
1
6
I
I
1
9
I
I
3
4
I
I
I
I
38
I
I
40
I
45
I
I
I
47
I
I
I
49
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5 1
53
5 5
57
AGT
GRP STA SOURCE
4 INS PARK FOREST
0 INS PARKFOREST
6 INS PARK FOREST
I
I
I
I
I
AGT
I
TRK# GRP STA SOURCE
I
I
17 1
I N S
HOMEWOOD :
20 2
00s P A R K F O R E S T ;
I
INS CENTRAL
37 3
I
I
OFFICE
39 0
00s F L O S S M O O R i
3 INS “BLANKI
41 0
00s “ B L A N K 0 00s “ B L A N K 46 1
INS WOODFIELD i
1
INS WOODFIELD
48 1
INS WOODFIELD ;
1
INS WOODFIELD
I
50 7
INS CHICAGO
0 INS CHICAGO HEIGHTS
I
I
HEIGHTS
I
52 0
INS DES PLAINES ;
5 I N S DESPLAINES
54 2
I N S
HOMEWOOD ;
6 INS PARK FOREST
56 2
I N S
HOMEWOOD !
2 I N S HOMEWOOD
I
58 2
INS SECURITY
,
3 INS SECURITY
I
I
L-------------------------------------------------------------------~
5210
i
8187
M-307
r
TL-130200-1001
Display CAS Main/ACD
Trunks by Agent
Group Number
I
I
;
I
.=- TRK#
II
- I
~-GROUP #o 16
I
34
I
I
4 0
I
I
49
I
8.8.2 Display CAS Main/ACD Trunks by Agent Group Number
(transaction 56) allows the user to see all CAS Main/ACD trunks
listed by trunk number, in addition to the service state and source
message.
CAS MAINIACD
TRUNKS BY AGENT GROUP NUMBER 56
STA SOURCE
-
TRK# S T A S O U R C E
-
I
I
INS
19
INS
PARK FOREST
INS
39
00s
PARK FOREST
60s “ B L A N K 41
00s
INS CHICAGO HEIGHTS 50
INS
HEIGHTS
HOMEWOOD
FLOSSMOOR
“BLANKCHICAGO
i GROUP #I 17
I
46
I
I
48
I
I
52
I
INS
HOMEWOOD
INS
WOODFIELD
INS WOODFIELD
0 0 s “BLANK”“’
45
47
51
53
INS
WOODFIELD
INS
WOODFIELD
INS OAK FOREST
INS
EVANSTON
j GROUP #2 20
I
55
I
00s PARK FOREST
INS
HOMEWOOD
54
56
INS
INS
i GROUP #3 37
61
I
INS CENTRAL OFFICE
INS SECURITY
38
62
INS
INS
i GROUP #4 21
23
f
00s PARK FOREST
INS
HOMEWOOD
22
24
INS
INS
HOMEWOOD
HOMEWOOD
i GROUP #5 30
I
33
I
00s PARK FOREST
I N S HOMEWOOD
32
35
INS
INS
HOMEWOOD
HOMEWOOD
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HOMEWOOD
HOMEWOOD
“BLANKSECURITY
I
i GROUP #7 15
INS
CENTRAL
OFFICE
19
INS
“BLANKI
5
8
I
N
S
S
E
C
U
R
I
T
Y
5
9
I
N
S
S
ECURITY
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
I
I
I
I
where
TRK# = System trunk number
STA = In-service/out-of-service
SOURCE = Source message
M-306
8187
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
state
5210
TL-130200-1001
Display Trunks with a
Specific Source Group
8.8.3 Display Trunks With a Specific Source Group (transaction
51) allows the user to see trunks in specific source group.
Trunks are displayed by trunk number, service state, trunk group,
and agent group.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
TRUNKS IN A SPECIFIED SOURCE GROUP
I
i SOURCE GROUP NUMBER (0--->31) >8.
...
I
51
I SOURCE MESSAGE: WOODFIELD
I
AGENT GROUP
TRUNK #
STATE
TRUNK GROUP
I
I
I
I
2
7
45
INS
I
I
2
1
46
INS
I
I
1
47
2
INS
I
I
48
31
3
INS
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
I
IL-------------------------------------------------------------------~
Change the State of a
CAS Main/ACD Trunk
i
I
I
II
I
I
j
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
8.8.4 Change the State of a CAS Main/ACD Trunk (transaction
52) allows the user to change the service state of CAS Main/ACD
trunks.
-------------------^------------r-----------------------------I
I
I
CHANGE THE STATE OF A CAS MAIN/ACD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TRUNK NUMBER (0--- > 63) > 20.
I
NEW STATE (INSOOS)
TRUNK
52
I
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
II
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
;
> INS.
I
I
L-------------------------------------------------------------------,
5210
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CURRENT STATE: 00s
I
:
8187
M-309
TL-130200-1001
Change the Source
Group of a Trunk
8.8.5 Change the Source Group of a Trunk (transaction 53)
allows the user to change the source group associated with a
system trunk.
r-------------------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
I
..
.=.
II
I
I
II
I
:
TRUNK NUMBER (O-+63)
CURRENT SOURCE MESSAGE: * BLANK NEW SOURCE GROUP NUMBER (00--->31)
NEW SdURCE
MESSAGE
>13.
I
I
I
I
I
> MELROSE PARK.
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
I
Change the Primary
Destination of a
Trunk Group
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
:
II
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
>38.
CURRENT SOURCE GROUP NUMBER: 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
M-31 0
53
CHANGE SOURCE GROUP OF A TRUNK
I
;
8.8.6 Change the Primary Destination of a Trunk Group
(transaction 54) allows the user to change the primary destination
of a trunk group. This transaction checks the trunk group
application to ensure that only CAS Main/ACD trunk groups are
changed.
CHANGE PRIMARY DESTINATION FOR A TRUNK GROUP
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER (0--->63)
54
>lO.
PRIMARY DESTINATION AGENT GROUP 3
ENTER NEW DESTINATION AGENT GROUP (0--->7)
>O.
j
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
II
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
j
8187
5210
r
TL-130200-1001
Source Message Data
Menu
8.9 Source Message Data Menu (transaction 57) is a submenu of CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent Change.
Transactions in this sub-menu allow the user to select source
message information to be displayed or changed.
r---------------------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SOURCE MESSAGE DATA
57
I
I
I
I
58) DISPLAY SOURCE MESSAGES
I
I
59)
CHANGE A SPECIFIC SOURCE MESSAGE
38)
GO TO CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE MENU i
I
I
ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER-->
I
I
L----------------_--------------------------------------------------~
Source Message Display
8.9.1 Source Message Display (transaction 58) allows the user
to examine source message displays.
r---------------------------------------------------------I
SOURCE MESSAGE DISPLAY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SRC
GRP #
0
2
4
6
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
58
;
I
MESSAGE
PARK FOREST
CHICAGO HEIGHTS
OAK FOREST
“BLANKWOODFIELD
MAYWOOD
EVANSTON
NORTHLAKE
“BLANK“BLANK“BLANK“BLANK“BLANK“BLANKGARY
HAMMOND
SRC
GRP #
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
I
I
I
MESSAGE
FLOSSMOOR
HOMEWOOD
“BLANK“BLANKWHEATON
ELMHURST
MELROSE P A R K
DES PLAINES
“BLANK“BLANKCENTRAL OFFICE
SECURITY
ADVERTISING
-BLANK“BLANK“BLANK-
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
:__-__-______-___--------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
where
SRC GRP# = Source group number
5210
8187
M-31 1
.,.
._
:
..
TL-130200-1001
Change a Source
Message
8.9.2 Change A Source Message (transaction 59) allows the
user to change a specific source’ message. Every agent
instrument is updated when the change is executed. The new
source message is always justified left. No periods may be
entered since the system sees them as “END OF INPUT.“
r-------------------------------------------------------I
i
._.
II
I
III
I
I
II
I
III
III
I
CHANGE A SOURCE MESSAGE
_.
59
i
SOURCE GROUP NUMBER (O--+31)
>31.
CURRENT MESSAGE: “BLANKNEW MESSAGE (16 CHARACTERS MAXIMUM)
ENTER MESSAGE IN DOUBLE QUOTES > “PARK RIDGE”.
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N)
>Y.
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
L-------------------------------------------------------------------~
8187
5210
II
II
,I
II
II
II
II
i
TL-130200-1001
CallWaiting
Data Menu Access
8.10 The Call Waiting Data Menu is accessed through CAS
Main/ACD Supervisory Recent Change. The following steps are
used to access the menu:
1. Select transaction 60 from CAS MainlACD Supervisory Recent
Change.
The system responds:
..-,----------------------------------------------------------------------,
1
I
. .
I
I
; 67)
:68)
: 69)
! 61)
! 65)
! 66)
i 38)
60
CALL WAITING DATA
f
DISPLAY TRUNK NUMBER AND STATUS OF ALL CAS MAIN/ACD R/A
DISPLAY DELAY ROUTING OF ALL AGENT GROUPS
DISPLAY CALL WAITING LEVELS OF ALL AGENT GROUPS
CHANGE DELAY ROUTING OF AN AGENT GROUP
CHANGE ALTERNATE ROUTING OF AN AGENT GROUP
CHANGE CALL WAITING LEVELS FOR AN AGENT GROUP
GO TO CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE MENU
i ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER-- >
IL---------------__-----------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
II
I
I
2. Select the correct transaction.
Call Waiting
Data Menu
Display R/A Trunk
Number and State
8.10.1 The following paragraphs describe transactions listed in
the Call Waiting Data Menu. The transactions listed here are
used to display or change call waiting data.
8.10.2 Display Recorded Announcement Trunk Number and
State (transaction 67) allows the user to display the trunk number
of each CAS MainiACD recorded announcement, and the service
state of each trunk.
I-----------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
DISPLAY RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT TRUNK NUMBER AND STATE i
i 67
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
II
TRUNK NUMBER
R/A
ALT R/A
R/A
ALT R/A
R/A
#l
#1
#2
#2
#3
59
60
61
62
63
STATE
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
is__ JNTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
---------------------------------------------------------------,
where
R/A = Recorded Announcement
ALT = Alternate
5210
8187
M-31 3
i
TL-130200-1001
Agent Group Delay
Routing Display
8.10.3 Agent Group Delay Routing Display (transaction 68)aliows
the user to examine the routing of agent groups. Routing
information includes R/A display options, delay repetition timing,
alternate destinations, and alternate route timing. Delay time is
the time span between the first announcement and the second
announcement. Repetition time is the time span between repeats
of the second announcement.
1
r-------------------------------------------------------------------
AGENT GROUP DELAY ROUTING
68
III
REC ^
REC
REC REPT
REC
ALT
;AGT ANN#l ANN DELAYANN REC REPT ANN ALTERNATE
RTE
; G R P ALWAYS#l -TIME #2- ANN#2 T I M E #3 DESTINATION
TIME
j 0 YES
1 120 2
YES 090 YES DIR NUM 4513
240
_-____
; 1 NO
A 060 2 NO
NO
TRUNK GROUP 12
120
; 2 YES
A 180 A
YES 030 YES AGENTGROUP 7
180
-_____
A
120
2YES060
NO
I
3
R/A - TRUNK 62
200
_----j 4 YES
1 045 A NO
NO
PABX ATTENDANT 220
; 5 YES
; 6 NO
1 030
2
YES 090 NONE
255
--------A _-_-NONE
255
I 7 YES
I
I
II
III
II
II
I
I
I
II
II
I
I
;
I
I
II
II
I
I
I
I
i ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)>
I
I
I
where
REC ANN = Recorded announcement
ALT = Alternate
1st = First recorded announcement
2nd = Second recorded announcement
AGT GRP = Agent group
REPT Time = Reporting time
ALT RTE TIME = Alternate route timing value
M-31 4
8187
5210
-
-
TL-130200-1001
Agent Group Call
Waiting Levels
8.10.4 Agent Group Call Waiting Levels (transaction 69) allows
the user to examine call waiting levels for every agent group.
I
AGENT GROUP CALL WAITING LEVELS
. .
I
I
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AGENT
GROUP
LEVEL 1
001
001
001
001
0
I
I
I
I
69
1
.2
3
4
5
6
7
LEVEL 2
002
002
002
002
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LEVEL 3
003
003
003
003
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
UNE
UNE
UNE
UNE
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
j
I
L ----------------------------------------------------------------------~
where
UNE = Agent group not implemented
Change Delay Routing
of an Agent Group
I
I
I
I
8.10.5 Change Delay Routing of an Agent Group (transaction 61)
allows the user to change the routing data of an agent group.
Displayed information includes recorder announcement options,
and delay or repetition timing.
I
CHANGE DELAY ROUTING OF AN AGENT GROUP
61
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
62) FIRST RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
63) SECOND RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
64)
DELAY OR REPETITION TIMING
60)
GO TO CALL WAITING DATA MENU
I
L--------_-----_----------------------------------------------------,
8187
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
i ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER --> 62.
5210
;
M-31 5
I
I
I
I
TL-130200-I 001
Change First Recorded
Announcement
I
I
I
CHANGE
II
I
FIRST
610.6 Change First Recorded Announcement (transaction 62)
allows the user to change the first recorded announcement for a
specific agent group.
RECORDED
ANNOUNCEMENT
62
AGENT GROUP (0--- > 7) >O.
I
I
I
CURRENTLY RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT # 1 IS PLAYED
DO YOU WANT RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #1 TO PLAY (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CURRENTLY ALTERNATE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #l IS NOT PLAYED
DO YOU WANT ALTERNATE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #l TO PLAY (Y.N
I
I
I
CURRENTLY RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #I IS ALWAYS PLAYED
I
BEFORE ROUTING TO AN AGENT GROUP IS TRUE
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO ALWAYS PLAY RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #l
II
I
BEFORE ROUTING TO AN AGENT GROUP (Y/N) . >Y.
I
; DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y.N) >Y.
I
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE REC-ANN #2 FOR THIS AGENT GROUP (Y/N) >.
Change Second
Recorded
Announcement
I
I
&IO.‘% Change Second Recorded Announcement (transaction
63) allows the user to change the second recorded
announcement for a specific agent group. Enter a period to
retain old value.
r----------------------------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I .
I
I
I
I
I
CHANGESECONDRECORDEDANNOUNCEMENT
63
AGENTGROUP = 1
CURRENTLY RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #2 IS PLAYED
DO YOU WANT RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #2 TO PLAY (Y/N)
I
I
I
>Y.
I
CURRENTLY ALTERNATE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #2 IS PLAYED
DO YOU WANT ALTERNATE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #2 TO PLAY (Y.N) > N
CURRENTLY RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #2 IS REPEATED
DO YOU WANT RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT #2 REPEATED (Y/N) >Y.
I DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (YIN) >Y.
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE DELAY TIMING FOR THIS AGENT GROUP (Y/N) >Y.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-__-_---__----_________________________-------------------------------------------~
8l87
;
1
I
M-31 6
I
I
I
5210
TL-130200-1001
Change Recorded
Announcement Delay
or Repetition Timing
:
8.10.8 Change Recorded Announcement Delay or Repetition
Timing (transaction 64) allows the user to change the recorded
announcement delay, or repetition timing for a specific agent
group.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------------------~
j CHANGE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT DELAY OR REPETITION TIMING
I
II
-II
AGENT~GROUP = 1
, .-.
I - DELAY TIMING
I
OLD VALUE: 030
NEW VALUE (l--->255) >15.
I
_
I
I
REPETI-TION TIMING
I
I
OLD VALUE: 045
NEW VALUE (l--- > 255) > 30.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
64
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y.N) >Y.
I
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
I
I-----_-----__------____________________----------------------------------------~
Change Alternate
Destination of an
Agent Group
I
8.10.9 Change Alternate Destination of an Agent Group
(transaction 65) allows the user to change the alternate routing
destination for a specific agent group.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
i
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHANGE ALTERNATE DESTINATION OF AN AGENT GROUP
65
AGENT GROUP NUMBER (0---> 7) > 1.
CURRENT ALTERNATE DESTINATION: AGENT GROUP 0
CURRENT ALTERNATE ROUTE TIMING: 120 SECONDS
I
NEW DESTINATION TYPE:
A)
8)
C)
D)
E)
F)
I
I
I
II
I
I
DIRECTORY NUMBER
ATTENDANT
AGENT GROUP
TRUNK GROUP
SYSTEM RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
NONE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ENTER LETTER OF NEW DESTINATION > A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIRECTORY NUMBER (000---> 9999) > 4567.
NEW ALTERNATE ROUTE TIMING (O-225) SECONDS > 90.
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) > Y.
8187
I
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R) OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
II
L________-__----_____________________---------------------------------------~
5210
1
II
II
I
I
M-31 7
j
TL-130200-I 001
Change Call Waiting
indicator Levels
8.10.10 Change Call Waiting indicator Levels (transaction 66)
allows the user to change the calf waiting indicator level for a
specific agent group.
r---------------------------------------------------------I
CHANGE CALL WAITING INDICATOR LEVELS
64
1
AGENT GROUP (0--- > 7) > 2.
f
I
I
PiRST CALL WAITING LEVEL
f
I
OLD VALUE: 001
NEW VALUE (0---> 255) > 5.
1
i
SECOND CALL WAITING LEVEL
_ I
I
OLD VALUE: 002
NEW VALUE (0---> 255) > 8.
I
II
I
THIRD CALL WAITING LEVEL
I
I
OLD VALUE: 003
I
NEW VALUE (0---> 255) > 11.
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y.N) >Y.
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224)
I
IL-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
CAS Main/ACD
Data Menu
Instrument Control
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
8.11 The CAS Main/ACD Instrument Control Data Menu is
accessed through CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent Change.
The following steps are used to access the menu:
1. Select transaction 80 from CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent
Change.
The system responds:
r--------------------------------------------------------~
I
CAS MAIN/ACD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
81)
82)
38)
INSTRUMENT CONTROL DATA
80
I
I
DISPLAY A REPERTORY DIAL KEY SET
I
I
CHANGE A REPERTORY DIAL KEY SET
GO TO CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE MENU i
I
I
ENTER TRANSACTION NUMBER ---- >
I
L-------------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
2. Select the correct transaction.
M-31 8
:
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Display a Repertory
Dial Key Set
. .
8.11.1 Display a Repertory Dial Key Set (transaction 81) allows
the user to examine the repertory dial
set along with agent groups using the
seventeen repertory dial keys (0 --- >
has sixteen repertory dial keys (0 --dial number may have a maximum of
numbers in a specific key
key set. A CAS group has
16). An ACD group
> 15). Each repertory
16 characters.
r-------------------------------------------------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DISPLAY A REPERTCRY DIAL KEY SET
I
I
81
I
I
I
II
ENTER .REP DIAL KEY SET (0--- > 3) > 1.
KEY SET 1 IS SHARED BY AGENT GP: l/A 2/A 3/C 4/C
KEY
REP DIAL NUMBER
KEY
REP DIAL NUMBER
01
03
05
07
11
09
13
15
fp205 HARDWARE
fp209 FURNITURE
fp213 LADIES
fp241 HOUSEHOLD
II
I
I
I
I
I
fp244 WILL CALL
I
II
I
I
I
00
02
04
06
10
08
12
14
16
fp200
fp208
fp212
fp240
fp245
fp242
AUTO
TOYS
MENSWEAR
SHOES
CATALOG
MANAGER
bfp9p8972222POLI
I
I
I
bf9p8972288FIRE
I
I
I
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
L------------------------------------------------------------------------,
where
A = ACD group
B = CAS group
f =
P =
a =
b =
r=
Flash
Pause for dial tone
Key will auto-correct on line 1
Key will auto-correct on line 2
Release
c. = Key will function on line 1 only
d. = Key will function on line 2 only
Change a Repertory
Dial Key Set
5210
8.11.2 Change Repertory Dial Key Set (transaction 82) allows the
user to change a repertory dial number in a specific key set.
Changes are applied to all instruments and agent groups using
that key set. In the display, enter new repertory dial numbers
between double quotation marks (“ “).
8187
M-31 9
TL-130200-1001
r----------------------I--------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
CURRENT REP DIAL NUMBER: XXXXXXXXXX.
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
NEW REP DIAL NUMBER(16 CHARACTERS MAX) IN DOUBLE QUOTES
“95551212”.
:
I
i
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) > Y.
.I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
CHANGE A REPERTORY DIAL KEY SET
82
I
ENTER REP DlAL KEY SET (0---> 3) > 1.
KEY SET 1 IS SHARED BY AGENT GP: l/A 2/A 3/C 4/C
ENTER REP DIAL KEY # (0---> 46) > 5.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.I
I
I
I _ ENTER END-(E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTlON NUMBER (O-224) >
- - __--___-_____----___-----------------------------------------------l
where
A = ACD group
B = CAS group
f = Flash
P = Pause for dial tone
a = Key will auto-correct on line 1
b = Key will auto-correct on line 2
r = Release
c. = Key will function on line 1 only
d .= Key will function on line 2 only
2. Select the correct transaction,
NOTE: a, b, c, and d are mutually exclusive, and, if used, must
appear in the first position:
VALID
A 4566
Day/Night Mode
Data Menu
INVALID
4566 or 4567
8.12 Day/Night Mode Data Menu is accessed through CAS
Main/ACD Supervisory Recent Change. The following steps are
used to access the menu:
1 .Select transaction 39 from CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent
Change.
The system responds:
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DAY/NIGHT MODE DATA
86)
87)
38)
i
I
I
DISPLAY DAY/NIGHT MODE
I
I
CHANGE DAY/NIGHT MODE OF AGENT GROUP
GO TO CAS MAINIACD SUPERVISORY RECENT CHANGE MENU i
I
I
:-- - ENTER
TRANSACTION NUMBER-->
- ---------------__--------------------------------------------
M-320
39
8187
I
:
5210
r
-
-
TL-130200-I
Display Day/Night
Mode (86)
001
812.1
This display allows the supervisor to see all agent groups’
day/night mode. An example of this display is as follows:
r---------- ---------------‘-----------------------------------------,
I
I
DISPLAY DAY/NIGHT MODE
86
I
_.
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
I
I
II ~
I
i
I
..
I
I
AGENT GROUP #
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DAY/NIGHT MODE
DAY
NIGHT
NIGHT
DAY
NIGHT
DAY
NIGHT
DAY
I
f ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
L------~~~~-~~~~~--~~---~~~-~~~~-~~~~---~~~~~~~~~~~--~-~~~~~~~~~~~-~J
Change Day/Night
Mode (87)
\
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
8.12.2 This display allows the supervisor to change the agent
groups’ day/night mode.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------,
I
CHANGE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DAY/NIGHT
MODE
87
AGENT GROUP # (0---> 7) > 0.
CURRENT MODE: DAY
NEW MODE (DAY/NIGHT) > NIGHT.
i
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
II
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) > Y.
I
~_E_N_~ER-_E_N_D-[E~ L----w----R E P E A T (~1 L---__--------------------------0~ TRANSACTION N U M B E R (0-224) -------I
>
i
I
Supervisor
Message Handler
8.13 This display allows the supervisor to see all agent groups.
The Supervisor Message Handler allows the supervisor to send
three different types of communication-directed messages to
the agents’ instruments:
* Broadcast Message. A broadcast message is sent to all
equipped agent positions.
e Agent Group Message. This message is sent to all equipped
agent positions in the agent group(s).
o Agent Message. This message is sent to the agent position(s)
specified.
The supervisor may store messages that are frequently sent in
the SPECIAL MESSAGE TABLE. A total of eight stored
messages is allowed. Additional Unique messages are sent by
choosing the appropriate menu.
5210
8187
M-321
TL-130200-1001
Supervisor Message
Options Menu (85)
I
I
I
II
I
f _
I
..^
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MESSAGE
85
OPTIONS
49) SEND SPECIAL MESSAGE
97) SEND UNIQUE MESSAGE
84) DISPLAY SPECIAL MESSAGES
88)
CHANGE A SPECIAL MESSAGE
83)
GO TO CAS MAIN/ACD SUPERVISOR OPTIONS MENU
ENTER
Message (49)
I
supervisor can send or update.
SUPERVISOR
Send a Special
I
I
8.13.1 This menu lists the types of message options the
TRANSACTION
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
II
I
NUMBER-->
I
8.13.2 This menu describes the actions required to send a
special
message.
SEND SPECIAL MESSAGE
I
I
49
I
I
I
SPECIAL MESSAGE NUMBER (0---> 7) > 2.
MESSAGE: CHANGE GROUP
I
I
I
I
I
TYPE OF MESSAGE
A) BROADCAST
B) AGENT GROUP(S)
C) AGENT POSITION(S)
D) NONE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ENTER THE LETTER OF THE DESIRED MESSAGE TYPE > B.
I
I
ENTER AGENT GROUP NUMBER(S) (0---> 7) > 0 6 7.
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
;
I
I
I
I
L----------_--------____________________-------------------------------,
Another possible prompt is as follows:
C) AGENT POSITION(S) - ENTER AGENT POSITIONS
(up to 16) (O--.+63) >
M-322
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Send a Unique
Message (97)
8.13.3 This menu describes the actions required to send a
unique message.
r-------------------------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
; .
I I
II
I
I
SEND UNIQUE MESSAGE
97
ENTER MESSAGE (UP TO 16 CHARACTERS) IN DOUBLE QUOTES > “message”. I
TYPES OF MESSAGE
A) BROADCAST
B) AGENT GROUP(S)
C) AGENT POSITION(S)
D) NONE
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
II
ENTER THE LETTER OF THE DESIRED MESSAGE TYPE > C.
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ENTER AGENT POSITIONS (UP TO 16) (0--- >63) > 5 7 20 63.
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
I
I
L---^___-_---_---_--____________________----------------------------------------~
Special Message
Display (84)
8.13.4 The display allows the supervisor to display all special
messages stored in the agent instruments.
r---------------------------------------------------------------------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SPECIAL MESSAGE DISPLAY
MSG #
0
2
4
6
MESSAGE
84
MSG #
COFFEE BREAK
END OF SHIFT
NEW NUMBER
- BLANK -
1
3
5
7
MESSAGE
LUNCH
CHANGE GROUP
HARDWARE 316
- BLANK -
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
:
L----_------_---------------------------------------------------------
5210
8187
M-323
-.:
_...
._
TL-130200-1001
Change Special
Message (88)
8.13.5 This transaction allows the supervisor to change the
special message of a specific agent group.
r---------------------------------------------------------I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
._
I
I
I
I
- I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHANGE A SPECIAL MESSAGE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
88
SPECIAL MESSAGE NUMBER (0---> 7) > 6.
CURRENT MESSAGE: COFFEE BREAK
I
I
I
NEW MESSAGE (16 CHARACTERS MAXIMUM)
ENTER MESSAGE IN DOUBLE QUOTES > “LUNCH BREAK”
IS THIS THE SPECIAL MESSAGE FOR LINE TO AGENT GROUP CALLS
> Y .
I
I
I
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) > Y.
CHG SETTING AGT GRP LINE TO SPECIAL MSG NOW
I
DO YOU WANT TO EXECUTE THIS CHANGE (Y/N) > Y.
I
i
I
I
I
ENTER END (E), REPEAT (R), OR TRANSACTION NUMBER (O-224) >
I
I
I
I
L---_------________----------------------------------------------------~
Manual Changes and
Recent Change
Summary
(Voice Configuration)
M-324
I
I
I
I
;
8.14 All data base changes should be made using the TTY and
the English language recent change feature. Only if the recent
change feature is not available should manual data base
changes be performed. Following are a list of functions and the
Recent Change transactions required for each function. For
cases where Recent Change cannot provide the entire function,
data base tables which must be manually updated and a brief
description of their contents are listed. If a feature or service is
to be added, changed, or deleted, each associated function must
be reviewed for updating requirements. The data base table
layout and list of possible entries are given in the header of each
table in the hard copy printout of the office-dependent data
base. The manual data base changes are made by using the
General Write (GW) or Bulk Input (BI) commands.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Manual Recent Change (Sheet 1 of 9)
CATEGORY
..
TABLE NO.
NAME
Access Codes
T6241
T6251
Digit analysis for first digit
Digit analysis second digit access
code
ACD- Feature Data
T608D
T6391
Time-out option table 2
ACD features table
^ Agent Groups
Add agent group (46)
Change delay routing (61)
Change alternate routing of an agent
grow (65)
Change call waiting indicator levels
(66)
Change night destination of an agent
group (45)
ADD/DEL/SHOW miscellaneous
directory number (218)
agent supervisor data
Agent Position Data
CHGSHOW
(142)
Attendant Console
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW i n s t r u m e n t
data (directory number) (117)
Add Attendant console (181)
Change attendant calling number for
billing (188)
ADD/CHG/DEL/DIS BLDU (190)
Console MERS time, change
restriction
Console ward time change restriction
T5961
T5962
Attendant Miscellaneous Features
T5931
Miscellaneous attendant
features
Audit Record Control
T6512
Audit record control table
Busy Lamp Display
Data
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW
(189)
Busy Lamp Key Data
ADD/CHG/DEL/DIS
Call Code Data
T6371
system
BLDU circuit
BLDU (190)
Paging and code call
..
5210
8187
M-325
TL-130200-1001
I
Manual Recent Change (Sheet 2 of 9)
CATEGORY
TABLE NO.
CAS Branch Features
T636l
T6381
CAS Branch Secondary
RLT class of service
Camp on recorder-announcer table
ADD/DEL/SHOW miscellaneous
directory number (218)
Change Feature by
Access Code
T639D
Change/restore feature primary/
secondary access code type table
Class of Call Control
Routing Data
T6461
Class of call controlled routing
Code Blocking Numbers
Code Restriction
Numbers
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW
Blocking (199)
T6271
Common Attendant
Data
MERS Code
Digit analysis code restriction
Change common attendant data
(186)
T6521
Common Attendant/
Attendant Line Number
Change night answer for the attendant
(187)
Change attendant features (185)
Attendant assignment for room-toroom blocking
ADD/DEL/SHOW
miscellaneous
directory number (218)
Customer-Defined
Terminal Data
T605F
Customer-defined terminal characteristics
Dl /D2 Translation
Data
T5981
Dl and D2 translation table
Displayable Class of
Service
M-326
NAME
CHGSHOW displayable class of
service 1 (211)
CHGSHOW displayable class of
service 2 (213)
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Manual Recent Change (Sheet 3 of 9)
DTMF Receiver Data
T64 21
..
Expanded or Conflicting Code Check Tables
.=.
FRL Authorization Codes
Digit
analysis
ing code
expanded/conflict-
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW
FRL
authorization/destination code (215)
Frame Image Card
Data
ADD/DEL/SHOW card (221)
Group Speed Calling
ADD/DEL/SHOW group speed
calling group (207)
ADD/ CHG /DEL SHOW /SHOW WHERE line features 1 (113)
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW
group speed
calling list entry (202)
Hotel/Health Care
Miscellaneous Data
T6471
Hotel/Motel miscellaneous data
Change intercept routing destinations (206)
Hotel/Health Care
Printer Assignment
T6501
T3202
T3202
Printer assignment number table
Printer address (PEC 0)
Printer baud rate and parity (PEC 0)
Hundreds Data
T6421
Dl/D2 line (room) number table
Hunt Group Data
Add hunt group pilot numbers (127)
Hunt Group Member
Data
ADD/DEL/SHOW hunt group member (126)
Intercept Routing
Numbers
Change intercept
tions (206)
routing
International Counting
T63Wl
IDDD First Digit Check
Code Data
T63W2
IDDD First Two Digit Check
T63W3
IDDD First Three Digit Check
T6482
T3201
T6551
KEDU assignment
KEDU address (PEC 0)
KEDU function inhibit
KEDU Assignment Data
5210
T6261
ADD/DEL/SHOW cards (221)
DTMF receiver in service/out of
service
Em7
destina-
M-327
TL-130200-1001
Manual Recent Change (Sheet 4 of 9)
CATEGORY
TABLE NO. NAME
KEDU Special Function
Access Data
T5441
Line Appearance
KEDU special function access
ADD/DEL/SHOW lines on a
Featurephone
-..
Line Data
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW instrument
data (agent position) (111)
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW instrument
data (line circuit) (146)
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW/SHOWWHERE line features 1 (directory
number) (113)
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW/SHOWWHERE line features 1 (agent
position) (115)
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW/SHOWWHERE line features 1 (line circuit)
(147)
ADD/CHG/DEUSHOW line features 2
(directory number) (121)
ADD/CHG/DEUSHOW line features 2
(agent position) (122)
ADDICHGIDELSHOW line features 2
(line circuit) (123)
Master KEDU Data
T6481
T6491
T6492
T6552
Master
Master
Master
Master
MDR Port Data
T4451
MDR SDC control options
MDR Screening
Options 1
T4472
MDR terminal billing options table
2
MDR cartridge billing options table 2
T4482
MDR Screening
Options 2
T4473
T4474
T4483
T4484
M-328
8187
KEDU
KEDU
KEDU
KEDU
number
security code table 1
security code table 2
function inhibit table
MDR terminal billing options table
3
MDR terminal billing options table 4
MDR cartridge billing options table 3
MDR cartridge billing options table 4
5210
TL-130200-1001
Manual Recent Change (Sheet 5 of 9)
CATEGORY
TABLE NO.
MERS On-Net station Number
Digit analysis on-net reserved
station number table
MERS NPAABC
Translation Data
Digit analysis MERS NPAIABC translation
MERS time period routing
combination
T6291
T5951
MERS Routing Line
T548-I
T6301
Digit analysis MERS trunk routing bits
Digit analysis MERS routing list
T6311
Digit analysis MERS sending
instruction
T63Yl
MERS FRULDN Indexes
MERS Six-Digit
Translated NPA Data
T6281
Digit analysis MERS NPA index
MERS Three-Digit
Translated NPA Data
T6291
Digit analysis MERS NPAIABC
translation
MERS time period routing
combination
MERS Sending
T5951
5210
NAME
MERS Time Period
Data
i5941
MERS time period data
Message Detail
Recorder Data
T4441
T4461
TLC471
T448 1
T6151
MDR output device type
MDR call answer time-out
MDR terminal billing options table 1
MDR cartridge billing options table 1
Cabinet IS/OS table
Nailed Trunk
Connection
ADDICHGIDELSHOW
connection (166)
N Displayable Class
of Service
CHGSHOW N displayable class of
service 1 (212)
CHGSHOW N displayable class of
service 2 (214)
8167
nailed trunk
M-329
TL-130200-1001
Manual Recent Change (Sheet 6 of 9)
TABLE NO.
CATEGORY
NPA and Office Code
NAME
15971
NPA and office code translation
T6231
T6401
T6071
T6151
T7059
T705B
T4441
T5291
Digit analysis office code for billing
System configuration table
Office features table
Cabinet IS/OS table
PEC number table (PEC 0)
PEC type table (PEC 0)
MDR output device type table
NCC interface table
Translation Data
Office Equipment
. .
Office Features
T5572
T639A
T5311
T6071
T5346
Office Features Circuits
T2541
T6111
T6134
T5401
Office Time-Out
Values
Line Card Address Table (PECO)
Miscellaneous circuits in service/out
of service
Music-on-hold interface
Line signaling mode and in service/
out of service
T639A
CHGSHOW timeout values (201)
Hookswitch flash timing values
T608M
CHGSHOW timeout values (201)
Time-Out option space
Office Timing Values
ADD/DEL/SHOW miscellaneous
directory numbers (218)
Other Directory
Numbers
M-330
CHGSHOW office features (209)
CHGSHOW system FRL data (219)
MERS FRL default table
Hookswitch flash timing table
Digit analysis public network
authorization digit table
System feature table
CAS MainlACD miscellaneous data
Paging Zone
T6061
T6371
Paging and code call zones
Paging and code call
Prefix Code Digits
T5321
System prefix digit table
Prefix Code Digits & LDN
T63Zl
MERS LDN Prefix Digits
8187
5210
-
TL-130200-1001
Manual Recent Change (Sheet 7 of 9)
CATEGORY
. .
TABLE NO.
Predetermined Night
Answer Pilot number
Change predetermined
night answer (203)
Recorder
Change recorder announcer (204)
Announcer
Remote Access
exchange
^ Authorization
T6531
Repertory Dial Key Code
Room Number First
Digit
Remote
access
class
mark
Change repertory dial key code (82)
RLT Circuit Data
T6351
T3121
T3161
T6431
T6441
ADD/DE&HOW cards (221)
RLT equipped status and PEC
RLT card address (PEC 0)
RLT trunk type (PEC 0)
D3iD4 line (room) number
Line (room) number translation
T6451
Room number first digit table
SCC Authorization
Codes
ADD/CHG/DEUSHOW
MERS SCC authorization code (216)
ADD/CHG/DEL/SHOW
MERS SCC
authorization code assignment (217)
Security Lock
Character Data
TX003
T6055
System access password table
Security lock
T6051
CHGSHOW terminal data (221)
Serial device controller option
Service Code MERS
Translation
T5571
Service code for MERS translation
Service Codes
T5661
T5691
T5701
Trunk group restrictions table
Trunk group 11 N service code
Trunk group Nil service code
Serial Device Data
5210
NAME
Source
Message
Change source messages (59)
Special
Messages
Change a special message (88)
8187
M-331
-
TL-130200-1001
Manual Recent Change (Sheet 8 of 9)
CATEGORY
TABLE NO.
Specialized Common
Carrier Data
T6001
T6012
T5080
Supervisor Talk /
Monitor Repertory
Dial Key Code
T5336
T5349
Specialized common carrier digit
sizing length
Specialized common carrier access
digits
Specialized common carrier timing
Supervisor talk/monitor repertory
dial key code
Supervisor silent monitor repertory
dial key code
ADD/DEL/SHOW card (221)
Tone Detector Data
Traffic Data Facilities
T6041
Traffic data option
Transaction Record
Control
T6511
Transaction record control
Trunk Circuit Data
T6321
T6331
T5541
T5471
Trunk Group Data
T5641
T5661
15711
T5721
T5741
T5751
T5771
T5991
T6341
M-332
NAME
8187
Add a trunk (153)
Change trunk characteristics (158)
Change source group of a trunk (53)
Tl trunk in service/out of service table
Tl trunk map
Trunk AIOD trunk number table
Trunk to CO line table
Add a trunk (153)
ADDCHG trunk group characteristics
1 (161)
ADD/CHG/SHOW
trunk group
characteristics 2 (169)
Trunk group direction, disconnect
supervisor application
Trunk group restrictions
Trunk group ACD pilot number
Trunk group calling number for billing
Trunk group missing digits on DID
Trunk group AIOD channel and
reverse battery check
Trunk group 1 + toll restriction index
Trunk group delete digit on DID
Trunk group miscellaneous flags
5210
TL-130200-1001
Manual Recent Change (Sheet 9 of 9)
CATEGORY
TABLE NO.
Trunk Group Data 2
T5661
T5671
15681
T5751
T5761
T5771
T5791
T5801
ADDCHG trunk group characteristics
1 (161)
ADDICHGISHOW trunk group
characteristics 2 (169)
Trunk group restrictions
Trunk group first toll access code
Trunk group second toll access code
T r u n k g r o u p AIOD c h a n n e l a n d
reverse battery check
Trunk group toll restriction index
Trunk group 1 + toll restriction index
T5831
T5841
T6341
T6541
Trunk group MERS escape digit
Trunk group MERS pausing value
after seizure
Trunk group MERS pausing value
after escape digit
Trunk group MERS Pausing after toll
barrier code
Trunk group trunk momentary open
Trunk group outpulsing delay
Trunk group miscellaneous flag
Trunk group message peg indicator
Trunk Group Digit
Absorption Data
T5781
Trunk group digit absorption table
Ward Control Data
T5944
T6195
Ward DND time period data
Ward control activation/deactivation
T5811
T5821
Typical Recent Change
Sequences
5210
NAME
8.15 Typical recent change functions are listed below along
with a sequence of transactions needed to complete the function.
8187
M-333
TL-130200-1001
Table 8.1
Recent Change Sequences
TRANSACTION
NUMBER
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
.
Display several lines
(or all agents).
_.
._^
117 (or 111,146)
113 (or 115,147)
and 121 (or 122,123)
Three transactions are
needed to display all data
items for a line or sequence
of lines.
Add a POTS phone with
default value.
117
Add instrument data
Add Digital Integrated
Featurephone (DIFP).
117,113.118
Same transactions as
for POTS phones. Add
more line appearances if
necessary
Add another line
appearance to an
existing DIFP.
118
The line must already have
been defined CPG or 113.
Add line data.
Delete all data associated
with the line by line circuit.
Delete a DIFP.
(a) 118, 113, 1 1 7 or
(b) 118, 146, 1 4 7 or 1 2 3
Delete a non-primary
control line.
113 or 121
Delete a line
appearance.
118
Remove the appearance.
Add a switch direct line
(hot line).
117 (or 146)
113 (or 147), 211
Add a line which is set to
always divert to another
station. Class of service
must be properly set.
Delete a switch direct
line (hot line).
(a) 113, 117, or 121
Delete all line data by
directory number.
Delete all line data by
line circuit.
(b) 146, 147, or 123
M-334
8187
Delete all data associated
with the line. First, delete all
line appearances. Then,
delete phone as for POTS.
5210
r
TL-130200-1001
Table 8.1
Recent Change Sequences (Continued)
TRANSACTION
NUMBER
FUNCTION
Show CIP card location
and assigned ports.
221,146
Show CIP card location
ShowVCIP or DVCIP
card location and
assigned ports.
221
Show VCIP or DVCIP card
location.
Show lines on a VCIP or
DVCIP card.
Add a CAS Main- or
ACD agent.
111
115
43
142
Add instrument data.
Add line feature data.
Add agent group
Change supervisor
status association.
Delete a CAS Main
or ACD agent.
115 (or 111) _
Delete phone.
Add Asynchronous
Packet Manager (APM)
or Synchronous Packet
Manager (SPM).
146
Add data device.
Delete APM or SPM.
146
Delete data device.
Add a NIC
221, 161
Add a
group
Add a
group
nailed
146
153,168
5210
COMMENTS
8187
trunk to a NIC trunk
trunk to a NIC trunk
and set up a
connection.
M-335
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
-
TL-130200-100-t
OFF-LINE
DIAGNOSTICS
9.0 The off-line maintenance disk contains the software for
conducting off-line diagnostic testing. Diagnostic tests are only
performed on off-line equipment because the generic and data
base software are voided when the maintenance disk is is loaded
into the system.
The following tests are conducted using the Off-Line
Diagnostics Testing Program:
* Line Cards and Direct-Inward-Dialing (DID) Trunk Cards
0 System Memory
o Channel Memory
0 Network
o Disk Drive
l
Page, Tone, and ATT12 Cards
o Touch-Calling Receivers
Physical Locations
1C6 C5C4C3 C2 Cl
9.1 During off-line diagnostic testing, the technician must, at
times, enter physical locations according to file, group and card
slot number. The OMNI SI universal card slots are organized
according to PCMUS Group (letters A, B, C and D) and card slot
number (numbers 0 thru 11). The universal line/trunk slots are
labeled as follows:
C7 C8 C9 Cl0 Cl1
EXPANSION
A0 A2 A4 A7 A8 A9 A10 All
DOD1 D2D3D4D5D6D7D8DgDlODll
FILE
BO 82 B3 B5 B7 88 B9 Bll
GET STARTED FILE
Test Options Menu
5210
9.2 Menu numbers are assigned to each test option. In order to
run a certain test, the technician types in the menu number on
the maintenance terminal and follows the program prompts. The
menu of test options for off-line diagnostic testing appears in
Table 9.1.
8187
M-337
-
TL-130200-1001
Table 9.1
Menu of Test Options
Test Option
Menu No.
0
SYSTEM MEMORY TEST
1
CHANNEL MEMORY TEST
2
PAGING CARD TEST
3
NETWORK TEST
4
DISK DEVICE TEST
5
SERIAL DEVICE CONTROLLER TEST
I TONE
CARD TEST
1ATT12 CARD TEST
I
8
I LINES/TRUNKS
TEST
1 TOUCH CALLING RECEIVER TEST
Loading the Program
9.3 The following steps load the Off-Line Maintenance
Program:
1. Place the program disk into the disk drive.
2. Connect the maintenance terminal to the NSDC card (FB20992-A), port 0.
3. Press the reset button on the PSUPY card (FB-17197-A)
located in slot Pl of the cabinet power file.
- Flashing red LED on the disk drive indicates the program is
loading into the system.
4. Program loads into system memory on instruction page 1.
5. When the program has been loaded, set the baud rate at 300,
or 1200. Press the return key to lock in the baud rate.
6. The terminal display appears:
THE GTE OMNI SI DIAGNOSTIC DISK
DOES THIS SYSTEM HAVE AN EXPANSION FILE?
IF YES, TYPE “Y”, IF NOT TYPE “N”.
M-338
8187
5210
1
:
._
TL-130200-1001
7. Answer the prompt by typing “Y.” or “N. “ The Menu of Test
Options appears on the terminal display screen. Choose the
test and type the menu number.
8. The test selected runs with the results shown on the terminal
screen
NOTES:
1. Type “CONTROL-C “ to abort a test. The Menu of Test
Options appears on the terminal screen.
2. Type “CONTROL-X” to restart a System Memory or Channel
Memory test. This entry also aborts other diagnostic tests.
3. Except for the System Memory test, any test can be
immediately repeated. After completing one test, the user can
select another from the menu list when it appears on the
screen.
9.4 Memory tests identify failures in cards. The programs work
by writing various test patterns into memory and reading them
back after a default or user-specified delay. Memory testing is
entirely automatic or partially manual/partially automatic. If
entirely automatic, defaulted or modified time delays are used.
Manual testing detects soft memory faults in which CPU
operation is interrupted for a time period set by the user. Manual
testing consists of the first two of a set of four tests used in
memory testing. The first two tests write data patterns “00” and
“FF” throughout the entire memory range with a user specified
delay between the write and read. Manu.al testing runs with all
pages or just one page, and with all ranges or just one range.
The following events occur as part of manual testing:
1. Type in first test pattern “00”
2. Terminal indicates that CPU is in waiting state.
3. Wait for desired amount of time delay between write and read
functions. Type I‘$“ to begin read-back portion of test.
- Card is tested for memory storage ability. Test results are
displayed on the terminal screen.
4. WAIT message reappears on terminal screen. Repeat process
by typing in second test pattern “FF. “
5. Wait for desired amount of time delay between read and write
functions. Type I‘$“ to begin read-back portion of the test.
Results are displayed on the terminal screen.
5210
8t87
M-339
TL-130200-1001
Automatic Testing
9.5 After all manual tests are completed, the program changes
over to automatic testing with test results displayed as before.
Automatic testing repeats tests one and two under CPU control
with a one-second delay between write and read. Test three
writes all possible data patterns into each address location with
data in the adjacent address location incremented by one.
Example:
. .
If address A000 contained a data pattern of “01 “, successive
address locations in test three appear as follows:
Address
Pass #l
Data
Pass #2
Data
Pass #255
Data
Pass #256
Data
A000
01
02
FF
00
A001
02
03
00
01
A002
03
04
01
02
A003
04
05
02
03
A004
05
06
03
04
Every address location is tested with every data pattern. Tests
are also conducted for internal memory chip errors such as
multiple address activation, adjacent memory cell interaction,
and data bridging. All 256 individual write/read trials are
performed in test three with the data base pattern “01“ through
“00” displayed during each testing sequence.
Test four increments the data written into each block of one
hundred hexadecimal addresses. Checks are made for address
decoding errors, multiple memory chip activations, and memory
location with all possible data pattern combinations. As with test
three, 256 individual trials are performed with the data base
pattern displayed during each sequence. Test results are
displayed at the end of the trial sequence following test three and
test four.
The delays for all tests can change to meet certain conditions.
Tests one and two default to one second between write and read.
Tests three and four are set not to delay because of the time
involved in writing all possible combinations in all memory
locations. If the delays are changed in tests three and four, the
time it would take to run these tests could be extremely long.
M-340
8167
5210
TL-130200-1001
Fast Test Option
9.6 Fast test option reduces the amount of time spent running
memory tests. This is done by using a shorter data pattern which
reduces the number of patterns written to memory in tests three
and four.
Retest Option
9.7 Automatic testing restarts the retest option if no failures have
occurred. If a failure does occur, testing stops and the results of
all ranges are displayed in circular order.
System
Memory Test
9.8 This test checks the ability of system memory to
store information on the One Megabyte Memory card (FB17314-A -lA) and the Multiprocessor Buffer 8085 card (FB17215-A). One memory page, or part of a memory page, can
be selected for testing. The “all or one page“ option selects the
number of pages. The “page set“ option selects the exact page.
The amount of memory tested is defined by range numbers.
System memory is divided into blocks of memory addresses
called ranges with each assigned a number used for memory
testing purposes only. The blocks of memory addresses and
range number assignments appear in Table 9.2.
There is a relationship between range numbers and their
physical location on a circuit card. Excluding part of the memory
from testing limits the amount of information about the card. Full
memory tests should be run in order to obtain as much
information about the card as possible.
The System Memory Test cannot be repeated without loading the
maintenance disk into memory. The memory content is the last
test pattern used in the actual test when the System Memory Test
is completed.
5210
8f87
M-341
TL-130200-1001
Table 9.2 S ‘stem Mema
IO-17
Dl-D7
Range No.
Address
Range
r Test Card and Address Range Correlation
Do (2,3)
Card Slot
Range No.
Function
I0200 to IFFF
0860 to 08BF
1OAOO to OABF
/OCOO
Pad Memory
(both files)
1000 to 13FF
co
Y5
Common Memory
Get Started File
1400 to 17FF
Cl
Y4
Common Memory
Expansion Fife
2
Yl
( 2050 to 3FFF
Yl
2
3
I
Yl
I
4
5
6
COO0 to DFFF
7
EOOO to FFFF
8
NOTES:
1. Range 1 does not exist for Il. I1 contains the Off-Line
Diagnostic Program at range 1 during the test.
2. Ranges A, B, and P will always be tested.
3. Ranges CO and Cl are tested only if data page 0 is tested.
Range 0 is tested if common memory tests were specified.
Range Cl is tested if both common memory tests were
specified and the Expansion File was specified in the system’s
configuration when testing was started.
M-342
8187
5210
:
TL-130200-1001
System Memory
Testing Procedures
_’
9.8.1
Use the following steps to conduct the System Memory
Test:
1. Select option “0“ from the Menu of Test Options. The system
responds:
Fujitsu GTE OMNI SI SYSTEM MEMORY TEST
TO DEFAULT ALL VALUES TYPE 0 OTHERWISE TYPE 1
2. If all values are to stay at their default values type “0” If not,
type “1.” If a “0” value was typed, the test begins. If a “1” was
typed, the system responds:
ALL PAGES TYPE 0; OTHERWISE TYPE 4
3. If all data and instruction pages are tested, type a “0”;
otherwise, type “1” If “0” was typed, go to step 5; otherwise,
the system responds:
r----------------------------------------------------~
; TO TEST A SINGEL PAGE, TYPE PAGE #
; (0-INST O/l-INST l/2-DATA O/3-DATA 1)
; (4-INST2/5-INST3/6-QATA 2/7-DATA 3)
; (8-INST 4/9 INST 5/l 0 DATA 4/l 4 -DATA 5)
; (12-INST-6/13-INST 7/14-DATA 6115~DATA 7)
I
L,---------------------------------------------------~
4. Type the number that matches the page tested. The system
responds:
FOR COMMON MEMORY TEST TYPE 0 /NO TEST TYPE 1
5. If common memory is tested, type “0”; otherwise, type “1” The
system responds:
FOR RETEST TYPE O/ SINGLE TYPE 1
6. If testing is to continue after a complete pass on all pages and
ranges selected, type “0.” If only one pass is desired, type
” 1 ” . The system responds:
TO RUN FAST TEST TYPE 0 LONG TEST TYPE 1
7. If the short memory test is used, type “0.” The short test does
not do any of the extensive address checking, nor does it have
a delay between the write and read of a memory location. The
short memory test detects all hard errors and some soft errors.
If the normal test is desired, type ” I”. The system responds;
AUTO TEST TYPE 01 MANUAL TYPE 1
5210
8187
M-343
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TL-130200-1001
8. If automatic delay (under system control) is used, type “0”.
For manual time delay, type “1 “. The system will respond:
TO DEFAULT INTER TEST TIME DELAY TYPE 0,
OTHERWISE TYPE 1
9. If default values are used, type “0” and tests begin. If other
time values are used, type ” 1.” The system responds:
FOR EACH TEST’S DELAY TIME, TYPE TWO DIGITS:
XX - FOR # OF SECONDS DELAY IN TEST 1 & 2
10. Enter values from “00“ to “FF” for the time delay on tests 1
‘* and 2 (“00” means no time delay, “FF” means 255
seconds). The system responds:
XX - FOR # OF SECONDS DELAY IN TEST 3
11. Enter values from “00” to “FF“ for the time delay on test 3.
The system responds:
XX - FOR # OF SECONDS DELAY IN TEST 4
12.
Test Results
Enter values from “00 “ to “FF “ for the time delay on test 4.
9.8.2 All of the test results described may not appear since they
depend on how the System Memory Test was set up. A
response should appear for each range tested.
1. Page location and range number are printed as each range
passes test 1, 2, 3, and 4. The pages appear as follows:
-
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
0,
1,
2,
3,
4,
5,
6,
7,
-
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
0,
1,
2,
3,
4,
5,
6,
7,
“DO”
“Dl I‘
“D2”
“D3“
“D4“
“D5”
” D6”
” D7”
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
“CO”
“Cl “
“C2”
“C3“
“C4”
“C5“
“C6”
“C7”
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
precedes the range #
2. If a failure does occur, the following sample message appears
on the terminal screen:
8187
5210
l-L-1 30200-l 001
INST PAGE 0 RANGE 01 TEST #3
MEMORY FAILURE LOCATION IS: 5FE0
DATA: WRITTEN FO READ Fl
3. A pass count occurs after all ranges selected for testing are
completed and a retest requested. The count appears in
decimal, runs from “00” to “99”, and repeats beginning at
” 00.”
*
4. Testing stops on the range for that pass only when a failure
occurs. At the start of each pass, all ranges selected for
testing are retested if the retest option was selected.
5. If a failure occurs on ranges CO and Cl, replace the MPB85
card (FB-17215-A) and cable in the OMNI SI Get Started
File and then the Expansion File. Reinstall the original card if
the replacement does not fix the problem.
Channel Memory Test
9.9 This test checks the ability of the channel memory to store
information on the Channel Memory 8085 card (FB-17218-A).
None, one, or both channel memories can be tested. In order to
test both channels memories, an Expansion File is needed.
Table 9.3
Channel Memory Test - Card and Address Range Correlation
Card Slot
Address Range
on Data Page 0
Y15
0400 to 045F
Channel Memory Get Started File
x01
0200 to 025F
Channel Memory Expansion File
Channel Memory
Testing Procedures
Function
9.9.1 Use the following steps to conduct the Channel Memory
Test:
1. Select option ” 1” from the Menu of Test Options. The system
responds:
CHANNEL MEMORY TEST
ENTER EACH FILE (0 - GET STARTED / 1 - EXPANSION)
THAT IS TO BE TESTED, THEN A (CR)
5210
8187
M-345
2. Enter a “0” if the Get Started File is tested and/or a “1” if the
Expansion File is tested, followed by a (CR). If both files’
channel memories are tested, type “01”. If all files are
selected, then a (CR) is not needed. The system responds:
FOR RETEST TYPE 0; OTHERWISE TYPE 1
3. Now refer to step five of the System Memory Test procedures
and continue (paragraph 96.1).
.: Test Results
9.9.2 All of the test results described may not appear since they
depend on how the Channel Memory Test was set up.
1 LAS each file is finished with a pass, the message “PASS”
along with the pass number is displayed under each file’s
header. The pass number is incremented by one with each
pass. The count is reset to 00 after reaching 99 if multiple
tests are requested.
EXAMPLE:
A successful single test for both files causes the following
message to be displayed:
FILES:
GET STARTED
PASS 00
EXPANSION
PASS 00
2. An error message giving the file and test which failed, the
locations where the failure was detected, and the data written
versus the data read is displayed on finding a failure. The
error message appears as follows:
GET STARTED FILE
TEST #l
MEMORY FAILURE LOCATION: 0400
DATA: WRITTEN AA
READ FF
3. The entire range(s) are tested.
Paging Card Test
9.10 This test checks the Memory Paging 16 Page card (FB17213-BOA) for wrong settings or multiple writes. One
memory location for each range on a page is checked. Memory
addresses are initialized to “FF“ and then the page number of
that particular page is written. The memory is checked for
proper numbering and cross-checked for duplicate writes. All
memory pages are thus checked for no writes or duplicate
writes.
Paging Card
Testing Procedures
8.10.1 The following action begins the Paging Card Test:
Select option “2” from the Menu of Test Options and follow the
procedures.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Test Results
9.192 After completion of the Paging Card Test, the system
responds with the following :
1. With successful completion of the test the system responds:
PAGING CARD PASSES TEST
2. Memory read-after-write error on instruction page 0,
memory address 1100. The system responds:
MEMORY WRITE FAILURE ON PAGING TEST
PAGE 00
MEMORY FAILURE LOCATION IS: 1100
3. Paging failure in which page write went to Instruction Page 1
instead of instruction page 0 writing to range #l. The system
responds:
PAGING CARD FAILURE
CORRECT PAGE # 00 INCORRECT PAGE # 01 RANGE #l
MEMORY FAILURE LOCATION IS: 1100
Network Test
9.11 This test checks the networking capability of the Channel
Memory 8085 card (FB-17218-A). The card test follows:
1. Control memories for a time slot are written to return a PCM
sample.
2. “FF“ is written into channel memory for that time slot. When it
recognizes the “FF”, the card sends the test “10101010” ,or its
inverse to the network and expects the same thing back during
the time slot. The pattern is inverted for the next frame. A
failure latch is set if the test pattern is not returned correctly.
Network Testing
Procedures
9.11.1 Use the following steps to conduct the Network Test:
1. Select Option ” 3” from the Menu of Test Options. The system
responds:
NETWORK TEST
2. The system runs the Network Test.
Test Results
9.11.2 Depending on the results, the system responds in the
following manner:
1. If the network test was successful, the system responds:
NETWORK PASSES TEST
5210
8/87
M-347
TL-130200-1001
2. If the channel memory was not initialized, the system responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: CAN’T WRITE TO CHANNEL
MEMORY
TESTING STOPPED DUE TO THE ABOVE ERRORS
3. If control memories A or B were not initialized, the system
responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: CAN’T WRITE TO CONTROL
TESTING STOPPED DUE TO THE ABOVE ERRORS
4.. If pad memory was not initialized, the system responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: CAN’T WRITE TO PAD MEMORY
TESTING STOPPED DUE TO ABOVE ERRORS
5. If channel, control, or pad memory was not read, testing ends
and the system responds:
READ AFTER WRITE FAILURE
MEMORY FAILURE LOCATION IS: XXXX
6. If network failure occurs three times, the system responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: ADDRESS = XXXX
XXXX is the memory address at which the fault is located.
Use the following table to determine which card caused the
failure:
Problem Area
Memory Address
I
0200 to 025F
Expansion File Channel Memory
0400 to 045F
Get Started File Channel Memory
0800 to 08BF
1 Control Memory A
OAOO to OABF
Control Memory B
OCOO to OCBF
Pad Memory
I
NOTE: A network failure occurs if there is a problem writing to
channel, control, or pad memory, or if the latch bit returned
during the test indicates failure.
M-348
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Fault Correction
9.11.3 The following steps correct faults detected by the Network
Test:
1. If the problem was found to be initializing or writing to channel,
control, or pad memory, replace the Channel Memory 8085
card (FB-17218-A). Reinstall the original card if the problem
continues after replacement.
2. Repeat the Network Test.
3. If the failure continues, check all cabinet cables for short
circuits. If an open is found, replace the faulty cable and rerun
the Network Test.
NOTE: Steps 4, 5, and 6 are used if there was no initialization or
write check error.
4. Replace the Expandable Pulse Code Modulation Network card
(FB-17217-A) and repeat the Network Test. Reinstall the
original card if the problem continues after replacement,
5 Replace the Intermediate Network Clock card (FB-207711A) or Synchronized Intermediate Network Clock card (FB20922-A) and repeat the Network Test. Reinstall the original
card(s) if the problem continues after replacement.
6. Perform the System Memory Test.
Disk Device Tests
9.12 These tests check the operation of the disk subsystem
including the File Management System Data card (FB-17229BOA), the disk drive, and the Administrative Maintenance
Processor A (FB-17229-A) and B (FB-17230-BOA) cards.
Diagnostic tests of the disk subsystem sends sequences of
command messages to the FMSD card. Status messages and
other outputs returned by the File Management System measure
the successful execution of each command. Because of the
nature of these tests, successful completion means that the
tested devices are fully operational.
Disk Device Testing
Procedures
9.12.1
Use the following steps to conduct Disk Device Tests :
1. Select option “4” from the Menu of Test Options. The system
responds:
DISK DEVICE TESTS
2. The system conducts a test of the File Management System
(FMS) to CEC communications link. This enables further
non-destructive testing. The system also conducts a check
of the on-board FMS RAM, and an equipment status check
for site configuration.
5210
8187
M-349
TL-130200-1001
3. Verification of the FMS/disk communications link generates the
following menu:
I-------------------------------------------------,
I
I
I
/ DISK DEVICE TEST SELECTION MENU
I
I
) 0) REPEAT FMS TEST
I
I
I 1) TEST DEVICE #O (10 MBYTE FIXED)
I
I
I2) TEST DEVICE #2 (800 KBYTE)
I X) RETURN TO MAIN OFF LINE DIAGNOSTICS MENU i
) ENTER SELECTION - > >
I
I
!
I
I
IL---___------__-----------------------------------,
I
- Selection of option “0” repeats the FMS test (on-line)
- Selection of option “1” repeats the FMS test (on-line) .
- Selection of option “2“ executes tests of the 800 Kbyte
floppy disk (on-line)
- Selection of Option “X“ returns the user to the Main OffLine Diagnostics Menu
Repeat FMS Test
9.12.2 Repeat FMS Test (Option 0) instructs the system to
repeat the following tests:
* FMS to CEC communications test
* FMS RAM test
0 Poll for FMS disk configuration
1. Progress of the test appears on the terminal screen as the
system completes each step:
FMS TEST IN PROGRESS....
PERFORMING FMS COMMUNICATION TEST
PERFORMING FMS RAM TEST
POLLING FMS FOR DISK CONFIGURATION
FMS TEST SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETE The system then
displays the “DISK DEVICE TEST SELECTION MENU”
prompt.
2. An error detected in any part of the FMS Test results in the
following:
e Display of an error message
@ Termination of FMS Test
o Display of “DISK DEVICE TEST SELECTION MENU” without
option 1.
M-350
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
3. Examples of FMS Test error messages include:
. FMS COMMUNICATIONS ERROR
PERFORMING FMS COMMUNICATION TEST
ERROR DETECTED WHILE PERFORMING FMS
COMMUNICATION TEST
FMS TEST ENDED
l
FMS RAM ERROR
PERFORMING FMS RAM TEST
ERROR DETECTED WHILE PERFORMING FMS RAM TEST
FMS TEST ENDED
o FMS CONFIGURATION ERROR
POLLING FMS FOR DISK CONFIGURATION
ERROR DETECTED WHILE POLLING FMS FOR DISK
CONFIGURATION
FMS TEST ENDED
l
DISK TEST MENU WHEN FMS TEST FAILS
DISK DEVICE TEST SELECTION MENU
0) REPEAT FMS TEST
X) RETURN TO MAIN OFF-LINE DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ENTER SELECTION > >
Test Device #O
9.12.3 Test device #O (option 1) instructs the system to perform
a read/write verification for the FMS and the hard disk (10MBYTE
Fixed Disk). The hard disk must be verified prior to starting the
test. If the test is performed on a drive which is not formatted, the
test will fail.
Testing fixed disk devices begins with a request to the controller
board to execute its on-board diagnostic programs. These
programs test the disk drive controller, its on-board RAM
memory, and the disk drive. Successful completion of these
tests ensures that the controller is communicating with File
Management Systems (FMS) and that the disk is properly
formatted.
Following the successful completion of the controller’s on-board
diagnostic programs, a test file containing up to 2,500 records is
created. Data is written to the disk and then read back to prove
the disk’s rear and write capabilities. After reading all records
from disk, the ?st file is deleted and the fixed disk test
terminated.
5210
8187
M-351
TL-130200-1001
The above steps generate the following messages as the system
completes each operation:
~-------------------------------------------------------------~
I
I
I
:
! FIXED DISK DEVICE TEST IN PROGRESS....
1 PERFORMING DISK CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS
I
- STILL PERFORMING DISK CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS
I D E LETE TEST FILE
j DETERMINING DISK FREE S P A C E
I
CREATING TEST FILE
/ WRITING TO TEST FILE
I
STILLWRiTiNG TO TEST FILE
I
I
STILLWRITING TO TEST FILE
I
I
STiLLWRiTiNG TO TEST FILE
I
II
STILLWRITING TO TEST FILE
I
STILLWRiTiNG TO TEST FILE
I
I
STILLWRITING TO TEST FILE
I
I
STILLWRITING TO TEST FILE
I
I
STILLWRITING TO TEST FILE
I
I
STILLWRITING TO TEST FILE
1 CLOSING TEST FILE
I OPENIONG TEST FILE
/ READING TEST FILE
I
STILL READING TO TEST FiLE
I
I
STILL READING TO TEST FILE
I
I
STILL READING TO TEST FILE
II
STILL READING TO TEST FILE
I
I
STILL READING TO TEST FiLE
I
I
STILL READING TO TEST FILE
I
I
STILL READING TO TEST FILE
I
I
STILL READING TO TEST FILE
: CLOSING TEST FiLE
j DELETING TEST FiLE
l
-------------_-----_____________
I
-----
in addition, three diagnostic tests performed by the disk drive
controller are executed before creating the test file. These
diagnostic programs test the disk drive controller, the disk drive
controller buffer RAM, and the disk drive itself. Successful
completion of these tests ensures communication between the
controller and host, verifies that the disk has been formatted, and
guarantees that the first field ID of each track is good. if any
errors are found, ail, except three, will be reported to the user
and will result in termination of the test. if the diagnostics are
successful, a test file will be created and a read/write identical to
that performed for the floppy disk will be executed. Successful
completion of the Fixed Device Test is shown in the prompt
below.
M-352
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
r---------------------------------------------
; FIXED DEVICE TEST SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED f
IL-------------------------------------------------~
I
The system displays the “DISK DEVICE TEST SELECTION
MENU” on completion of this test.
Test Device #2
9.12.4 Test Device #l (option 2) instructs the system to perform
a read/write verification for the FMS and a floppy disk in the disk
drive. The following prompts appear:
INSERT A SPARE FLOPPY DISK IN DISK DRIVE
NOTE: ANY DATA ON DISK WILL BE OVERWRITTEN BY
THIS TEST
PRESSANYCHARACTERTOSTARTTEST
>>
The following caution appears on the terminal screen:
CAUTION
ANY DATA ON THE FLOPPY DISK WILL BE
DESTROYED BY THIS TEST. DO NOT USE CURRENT
GENERIC, DATA BASE, OR OFF-LINE DIAGNOSTIC
1. When the user inserts a floppy disk into the disk drive and
types any character, the test tells the system to do the
following:
a. Format the floppy disk.
b. Determine the number of records available on the floppy
disk (675 maximum).
c. Create a file with maximum number of records.
d. Write all records of the file.
e. Read and verify all records of the file.
f. Delete the file.
2. The steps listed above generate the following messages as the
system completes each operation:
FLOPPY DISK DEVICE TEST IN PROGRESS
DISMOUNTING FLOPPY DISK
FORMATTING FLOPPY DISK
STILL FORMATTING FLOPPY DISK
5210
8l87
M-353
..
TL-130200-1001
STILL FORMATTING FLOPPY DISK
MOUNTING FLOPPY DISK
DETERMINING DISK FREE SPACE
CREATING TEST FILE
WRITING TO TEST FILE
STILL WRITING TO TEST FILE
STILL WRITING TO TEST FILE
CLOSING TEST FILE
OPENING TEST FILE
READING TEST FILE
STILL READING TEST FILE
STILL READING TEST FILE
CLOSING TEST FILE
DELETING TEST FILE
FLOPPY DISK DEVICE TEST
SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED
The system displays the “DISK DEVICE TEST SELECTION
MENU” on completion of this test.
Return to Main Menu
9.12.5 Return to Main Menu (Option X) instructions the system to
display the Off-Line Diagnostic Menu. The following prompt
appears:
DISK DEVICE TESTS ENDED
The system then displays the Menu of Test Options.
Serial Device
Controller Test
M-354
9.13 This test checks the terminal and Narrow Serial
Device Controller card (FB-20992-A) for correct key
recognition.
Em7
5210
TL-130200-1001
Serial Device Controller
Testing Procedures
9.13.1 Use the following steps to conduct the Serial Device
Controller Test:
1. Select Option “5” from the Menu of Test Options. The system
responds:
TYPE THE SDC PORT # YOU WISH TO TEST (0 OR 1) > >
2. If Off-Line Diagnostics is not running on this port go to step 4.
Otherwise, the system responds:
_.
TYPE ANY CHARACTER AND IT WILL BE ECHOED ON
THE TERMINAL.
TYPE CONTROL-K TO EXIT FROM THIS TEST
3. Any character key typed on the terminal keyboard will be
echoed at the terminal.
4. If the user selects “O“, the system responds:
THE BAUD RATE IS REQUIRED FOR PORT 1
TYPE THE LETTER OF THE APPROPRIATE BAUD RATE:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
110 BAUD
150 BAUD
300 BAUD
600 BAUD
1200 BAUD
2400 BAUD
4800 BAUD
9600 BAUD
5. Enter the correct letter and the system responds:
ATTENTION SHOULD NOW BE DIRECTED TO THE PORT
1 DEVICE
6. To end the test, type CONTROL-K on the tested terminal. The
system responds:
SERIAL DEVICE CONTROLLER TEST OVER
Fault Correction
9.13.2 Replace the NSDC card (FB-20992-A). If the wrong
character echoes on the terminal, reload the system and repeat
the test.
Tone Test
9.14 This test checks the tone output of the System Pulse Code
Modulation card (FB-20974-A). The test begins with a tone
time slot number written into the control memory of the network.
The user audibly and visually verifies each tone by listening and
following the terminal display.
5210
6187
M-355
TL-130200-1001
Tone Test
Testing Procedures
9.14.1
Use the following steps to conduct the Tone Test:
1. Select option “6” from the Menu of Test Options. The system
responds:
TONE CARD TEST
PICK A CONVENIENT PHONE WITH WHICH TO LISTEN
TO THE TONES. ENTER THE PHYSICAL LOCATION OF
THIS PHONE.
FILE NUMBER (A -- > D) > > . .
2. Type the correct file letter. The system responds:
SLOT NUMBER (0 -- > 11) > > . .
3. Type the correct universal card slot number. The system
responds:
CIRCUIT NUMBER (0 -- > 7) > > . .
4. Type the correct circuit number.
Test Results
9.14.2 The following Tone Test results may appear:
1. When the Tone Test is successfully completed, the system
immediately connects the phone to the first system tone and
prints the tone description. Tone Test outputs appear in Table
9.4.
Type “G” to listen to the next tone.
With the connection of the last tone, the system responds:
END OF TONE TEST
2. If channel memory does not initialize, the system responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: CAN’T WRITE TO CHANNEL
MEMORY
TESTING ENDED DUE TO ABOVE ERRORS
3. If control memory A or B is not initialized, the system responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: CAN’T WRITE TO CONTROL
MEMORY < A OR B >
TESTING ENDED DUE TO ABOVE ERRORS
M-356
6B7
5210
TL-130200-1001
Table 9.4 Tone Test Outputs
r
No.
Terminal Output
4
Busy Tone,
Feature Confirmation Tone
5
Reorder, Camp on
Call-Waiting Tone
6
Tick Tone
Test Tone (1004 Hz, 1
Milliwatt)
Ringback Tone
I Dial Tone
10
DTMF “1”
11
DTMF “2”
12
DTMF “3”
1
3
114
DTMF “4”
15
I DTMF “5”
DTMF “6”
16
DTMF “7”
20
DTMF I’*”
21
DTMF ‘I#”
1MF
5210
“KP”
23
MF “1”
24
MF “2”
125
I MF “3”
8187
I
M-357
TL-130200-1001
Table 9.4 Tone Test Outputs (Continued)
No.
2
6
Terminal Output
M F “4”
27
M F “5”
28
MF “6”
29
MF “7”
30
MF “8”
3
1
MF “9”
33
MF “ST”
34
MF “STP”
35
MF “ST2P“
36
MF “ST3P”
37
I CAS Tone (440 Hz)
38
CAS Tone (480 Hz)
39
Confirmation Tone
Interrupted Dial Tone
41
CAS Tone (620 Hz)
42
Dial Tone at - 19 DBM
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
4. If Pad memory not initialized, the system responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: CAN’T WRITE TO PAD MEMORY
TESTING ENDED DUE TO ABOVE ERRORS
5. If, during test, channel, control, or pad memory cannot be
read, the system responds:
READ AFTER WRITE FAILURE
MEMORY FAILURE LOCATION IS: XXXX
TESTING ENDED DUE TO ABOVE ERRORS
NOTE: See Network Test Results (Paragraph 8.11) to
memory address of the card causing the problem.
6. The system will continue sending the same tone if a “G” is not
entered to send the next tone.
7. If the phone tested in steps 1 through 4 does not actually exist,
the system responds:
PHONE HARDWARE NOT AVAILABLE
Fault Correction
9.14.3 The following steps correct faults detected by the Tone
Test:
1. If the problem is found to be initializing or writing to channel,
control, or pad memory, replace the Channel Memory 8085
card (FB-17218-A). Reinstall the original card if the problem
continues after replacement.
2. Replace the System Pulse Code Modulation card (FB20974-BOA)
if tones do not work. Initialize the new card by
writing “FF” into address 08FF on memory page DO.
3. Repeat the Tone Test.
4. Reinstall and initiate the original card. Conduct the Network
Test and/or the Line/Trunk Test on the circuit if the tones still
do not work.
5. Check the data base for a different phone and repeat the Tone
Test, if the original phone hardware was not available.
Attendant Interface Card
9.15 This test checks for transmission errors on the Attendant
Interface Number 2 (ATT12) card (FB-17208-A). The test
consists of sending a data pattern out of the card and looping it
back to the input. The two data patterns are compared to see if
the data pattern received is exactly the same as the data pattern
sent. The test flags an error if the two data patterns somehow
are different.
Temporary wiring changes are required to conduct this test.
Exercise extreme care when making these wiring changes.
5210
8f87
M-359
TL-130200-1001
Attendant Interface
Card Test
Testing Procedures
9.15.1
Use the following steps to conduct the Attendant Interface
Card test:
1. Remove the Attendant Interface card (FB-17208-A) from the
cabinet. Make sure that all four dip-toggle switches are in the
off position. Reinstall the card into the cabinet.
2. Disconnect the cable for the Attendant/BLDU interface on the
Attendant Interface card.
3. Strap together the transmit (TRAN) and receive (REC) leads on
the Attendant Interface card (FB-17208-A). Pin 93 is
strapped to pin 95 for Port 0 while pin 56 is strapped to pin 58
- for Port 1.
4. Select Option “7” from the Menu of Test Options. The system
responds:
ATT12 CARD TEST
ENTER THE LOCATION OF THE ATT12
FILE NUMBER (A -- >) > >..
CARD
5. Type the correct file letter. The system responds:
SLOT NUMBER (0 -- > 11) > >
6. Type the correct universal card slot number. The system
responds:
CIRCUIT NUMBER (0 OR 1) > >
7. Type the correct circuit number (port) to test.
Test Results
9.15.2 The following Attendant Interface Card Test results may
appear:
1. If the ATT12 card passes the test, the system responds:
ATT12
CARD PASSES TEST
2. If the ATT12 card fails the test, the system responds:
ATT12 CARD FAILURE, DATA = XX
(XX = data pattern which caused failure)
3. If test could not start due to the lack of a steady signal, the
system responds:
NO READY SIGNAL FROM ATT12
CARD
4. If no phone hardware exists, the system responds:
PHONE HARDWARE NOT AVAILABLE
M-360
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Fault Correction
9.15.3 The following steps correct faults detected by the
Attendant Interface Card Test:
1. Check the transmit and receive strapping if a “NO READY “
signal error occurs. Also, remove the AMP connector from the
ATT12 card slot and repeat the test. Replace the ATT12 card if
the “NO READY“ signal error appears again and repeat the
test.
2. If the ATT12 card itself failed the test, replace the card, and
repeat the test.
3. If the actual phone hardware was not available, check for a
different instrument, and repeat the test.
Line/Trunk Test
5210
9.16 This test checks the two-way connection between a
specified phone and a test phone. Due to the lack of a central
office response, only those trunk circuits found on the DirectInward-Dialing (DID) Trunk card (PILT, FB-51280-A) are
tested. Line circuits found on PCM Off-Premises Station Line
cards (POPS, FB-17250-A) and PCM Line Circuit cards
(PLCC, FB-17254-1A) are also tested. Attach phones to the
circuits at the CDF by referring to Table 9.5.an 9.6.
667
M-361
TL-130200-1001
Table 9.5
Line/Trunk Pair to Point Conversion
Circuit No.
CDF Points
1Line Circuit 0
1Tip 1, Ring 1
Line Circuit 1
1Tip 2, Ring 2
Line Circuit 2
I Tip 3, Ring 3
Line Circuit 3
1Tip 4, Ring 4
Line Circuit 4
’ 1Tip 5, Ring 5
Line Circuit 6
I Tip 7, Ring 7
Tip 8, Ring 8
Line Circuit 7
Table 9.6
Line/Trunk Pair to CDF Roint Conversion
Circuit No.
CDF Points
Trunk Circuit 0
Tip 1, Ring 1
Trunk Circuit 1
I Tip 2, Ring 2
Trunk Circuit 2
I Tip 3, Ring 3
Trunk Circuit 3
Tip 4, Ring 4
Line/Trunk Test
Testing Procedures
I
9.16.1 Use the following steps to conduct the Line/Trunk Test:
1. Select Option “8” from the Menu of Test Options. The system
responds:
LINE AND TRUNK TEST
IS THE FIRST CIRCUIT ON A LINE CARD OR TRUNK
CARD?
TYPE “L” FOR LINES, TYPE “T” FOR TRUNKS > >..
2. Type the correct response for the line or trunk circuit. The
system responds:
ENTER THE PHYSICAL LOCATION OF THIS PHONE
FILE NUMBER (A -- > D) > > . .
3. Type the correct file letter for the circuit. The system responds:
SLOT NUMBER (0 -- > 11) > > . .
M-362
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
4. Type the correct universal card slot number for the circuit. The
system responds:
ClRCUlT NUMBER (0 -- > X) > > . .
where X = 3 for a trunk card
and X = 7 for a line card
5. Type the correct circuit number for the line or trunk circuit. The
system responds:
.-.
IS SECOND CIRCUIT ON A LINE CARD OR ON A TRUNK
CARD?
TYPE “L” FOR LINES, TYPE,“T” FOR TRUNKS > > . .
6. Type the correct response for the second line or trunk circuit.
Repeat steps two through five for this circuit.
Test Results
9.16.2 The following Line/Trunk Test results may appear:
1. With successful test completion the system responds:
THE TWO SELECTED CIRCUITS NOW HAVE A
TRANSMISSION PATH. WHEN YOU WISH TO EXIT FROM
THIS TEST AND CLEAR THE NETWORK DEPRESS ANY
CHARACTER > > . .
I.
5210
8/87
M-363
To end the test and break the transmission path, type any
character.
2. If channel memory does not initialize, the system responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: CAN’T WRITE TO CHANNEL MEMORY
TESTING ENDED DUE TO ABOVE ERRORS
3. If control memory A or B is not initialized, the system responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: CAN’T WRITE TO CONTROL MEMORY
TESTING ENDED DUE TO ABOVE ERRORS
4. If pad memory is not initialized, the system responds:
NETWORK FAILURE: CAN’T WRITE TO PAD MEMORY
TESTING ENDED DUE TO ABOVE ERRORS
5. During test if it cannot read channel, control, or pad memory,
the system responds:
READ AFTER WRITE FAILURE
MEMORY LOCATION IS: XXXX
TESTING ENDED DUE TO ABOVE ERRORS
NOTE: See Network Test Results (Paragraph 9.11) to find
memory address of the card causing the problem.
6. If the phones tested in steps one through five do not actually
exist, the system responds:
PHONE HARDWARE NOT AVAILABLE
Fault Correction
9.16.3 The following steps correct faults detected by the Line/
Trunk Test:
1. If the transmission path is distorted, replace the tested PILT
card, POPS card, or PLCC card, and repeat the test.
2. If no transmission path was established, replace the tested
PILT card, POPS card, or PLCC card, and repeat the test.
3. If replacement of the PILT, POPS, or PLCC card does not
solve the problem, perform the Network Test (see paragraph
8.11).
4. If the Network Test passes, reinstall the original card and
repeat the Network Test.
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
Touch Calling Receiver
Test
Automatic Testing
Procedures
9.17 This test checks a specified PCM Dual Tone Multiple
Frequency receiver (PDTMF, FB-17203-A) for proper tone
reception. The test may be conducted either automatically or
manually. The automatic test procedure places a particular time
slot (information memory location) into the control memory of the
PDTMF. The microprocessor address of the Multi-Processor
Buffer 8085 (MPB85, FB-17215-A) is monitored for correct
tone translation. If the correct translation occurs, a new tone is
tested. An error message is displayed if this translation is
incorrect. The manual test links a specified touch calling phone
to the PDTMF. As each number of the touch calling phone is
depressed, a DTMF tone is sent to the PDTMF. A description of
the DTMF tone is displayed as it is translated by the PDTMF.
9.17.1
Use the following steps to conduct the automatic Touch
Calling Receiver Test:
1. Select option “9” from the Menu of Test Options. The system
responds:
TOUCH CALLING RECEIVER TEST
DO YOU WISH TO USE THE TONE CARD?
IF YES TYPE “Y” , IF NO TYPE “N”
2. Type “Y’ if there is a PDTMF card in the system. The system
responds:
ENTER THE LOCATION OF THE TCR TO BE TESTED
FILE NUMBER (A -- > D) > > . .
3. Type the correct file letter of the TCR. The system responds:
SLOT NUMBER (0 -- > 11) > >
4. Type the correct universal card slot number. The system
responds:
CIRCUIT NUMBER (0 -- > 3) > > . .
5. Type the correct circuit number. The test begins.
Automatic Test
Results
9.17.2 The following automatic Touch Calling Receiver Test
results may appear:
1. If the PDTMF passes the test, the system responds:
TCR PASSES TEST
2. If the PDTMF fails the test, the system responds:
TCR FAILED DIAGNOSTIC
5210
8187
M-365
r
TL-130200-1001
Manual Testing
Procedures
9.17.3 Use the following procedures to conduct the manual
Touch Calling Receiver Test:
1. Select option “A” from the Touch Calling Receiver Test Option.
The system responds:
TOUCH CALLING RECEIVER TEST
DO YOU WISH TO USE THE TONE CARD?
IF YES TYPE “Y”g IF NO TYPE “N”
2. Type “N “. The system responds:
A TOUCH CALLING PHONE IS TO BE USED TO SEND
TONES TO THE TCR RECEIVER. ENTER THE LOCATION
OF THIS PHONE.
FILE NUMBER (A -- > D) > > . .
3. Type the correct file letter. The system responds:
SLOT NUMBER (0 -- > 11) > >..
4. Type the correct universal card slot number. The system
responds:
CIRCUIT NUMBER (0 -- > 7) > >..
5. Type the correct circuit number. The system responds:
ENTER THE LOCATION OF THE TCR TO BE TESTED
FILE NUMBER (A.-- > D) > >..
6. Type the correct file letter of the TCR. The system responds:
SLOT NUMBER (0 -- > 11) > >..
7. Type the correct universal card slot number. The system
responds:
CIRCUIT NUMBER (0 -- > 3) > > . .
8. Type the correct circuit number. The system responds:
ANY DIGIT WHICH IS DEPRESSED WILL BE ECHOED ON
THE TELETYPE. WHEN YOU WISH TO EXIT FROM THIS
TEST, TYPE ANY CHARACTER > >..
9. Depress any digit and monitor the terminal tone description.
10. After all digits are checked, type any character on the
terminal to end the test.
M-366
8187
5210
TL-130200-1001
A
Access Recent Change, M-281
Access On-Line Maintenance, M-85
Acrxunting
Reports, M-248
Add-a CAS Main/ACD Agent Group, M-305
Agent -Data Displays and Changes, M-300
Agent Group Call Waiting Levels, M-315
Agent Group Delay Routing Display, M-314
Agent Instruments, M-60
Agent Position Status Display, M-300, M-302
Agent Status Report, M-293
Alarms, M-l 78
Alarm Command Codes, M-80
Attendant and Busy Lamp Display Unit, M-60
Attendant Console Code Display Fault, M-108
Attendant Interface Card, M-359
Attendant Interface Card Test Testing Procedures, M-360
Automatic Circuit Assurance Log Request Commands, M-43
Automatic Testing, M-340
Automatic Testing Procedures, M-365
Automatic Test Results, M-365
BLDU Unit Troubleshooting Procedure, M-160
Bulk Downloading Commands, M-66B
Bulk Input Command, M-788
Call Store, M-236
Call Waiting Data Menu, M-313
Call Waiting Data Menu Access, M-313
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL.130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
D a t a Base
S=TL-130500-1001
S y s t e m ConfIguration
A=TL-100000-1001
A D M P UsersGuide
TL-130200-1001
Card List, M-17
CALL TRACING, M-21 1
Call Tracing Examples, M-217
Cancel a Trend Report, M-299
CASACD
Source Group Report, M-291
CAS Main/ACD Data .-Menu Instrument, M-31 8
CAS Main/ACD Help, M-284
CAS MAlNiACD
Source, M-295
CAS Main/ACD Supervisor Options, M-282
CAS Main/ACD Supervisory Recent Change, M-299
CAS Main/ACD Trunk Data Menu, M-306
CAS Main/ACD Trunk Data Transactions, M-307
Change a Repertory Dial Key Set, M-319
Change a Source Message, M-312
Change Alternate Destination of an Agent Group, M-317
Change Call Waiting Indicator Levels, M-318
Control Card Removal and Replacement, M-20
Change Day/Night Mode (87), M-321
Change Delay Routing of an Agent Group, M-315
Change FADS Automatic Dump Period, M-297
Change the FADS Automatic Dump Selections, M-297
Change FADS Data Collection Start Time, M-298
Change FADS Periodic Data Collection Period, M-296
Change First Recorded Announcement, M-31 6
Change Night Destination of an Agent Group, M-305
Change Recorded Announcement Delay or Repetition Timing, M-317
Change Second Recorded Announcement, M-31 6
Change Special Message (88), M-324
Change the Group/Supervisor of an Agent Position, M-304
Change the Source Group of a Trunk, M-31
Change the State of an Agent Position, M-304
Change the State of a CAS Main/ACD Trunk, M-309
Channel Memory Test, M-345
Channel Memory Testing Procedures, M-345
F=TL-I~OOOO-iooi
FeatlIES
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M = TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S-TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
r
TL-130200-1001
Channel Unit Removal, M-177
Connection Between Files, M-21 9
Connection to a TCR, M-218
Current Collection Parameter Settings, M-91
D
Display Command, M-50
Downloading Featurephones, M-63
Downloading VCIP, DVCIP., and VPLC Cards, M-65
Downloading, ADMP, UCB (DCP), and NIC Card, M-66
Disk Backup of Room Status, M-83
Data Switch Device Status Display, M-99
Disk Backup Option, M-101
Device Catalog Display Option, M-102
Dedicated Time Slot, M-218
Digit Store, M-230
Data System Administrative and Maintenance Features, M-248
Data System Troubleshooting, M-250
Display Software Version Command, M-254
Display All FADS Options, M-296
Delete a CAS Main/ACD, M-306
Display/change FADS Delay Timing, M-306
Display Trunks by Trunk Number, M-307
Display CAS MainiACD Trunks by Agent Group Number, M-308
Display R/A Trunk Number and State, M-313
Display a Repertory Dial key Set, M-319
Day/Night Mode Data Menu, M-320
Display Day/Night Mode (86), M-321
Disk Device Tests, M-349
Disk Device Testing Procedures, M-349
Display Trunks with a Specific Source Group, M-309
E
Event Reports, M-249
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I =TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
ConfiguratIon
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130200-1001
FADS, CAS Main/ACD Transactions, M-285F
FADS Control Transactions, M-296
FADS Control Data Menu, M-295
FADS Display Options Menu, M-287
FADS Display Transactions, M-288
FADS Recent Chang, M-287
Fast Test Option, M-341
Fault Code Procedures and F!owcharts, M-155
Fault CorrectionM
-349, M-355, M-361, M-364
Fault Isolation, M-l 55
Fault Log Request Commands, M-24
Fault Resolution, M-277
Featurephones, M-57
Featurephones (PD-200) M-255
Featurephone Self-Test Diagnostics, M-l 62
Force Download, M-61
Force In Service Out of Service Command, M-57, M-255
Frame Image, M-15
3GENERAL,
M-l
General Read and Data General Read Commands, M-73
General Write Command, M-77
Handling Cards, M-20
Hardware Write Command, M-79
nitiate a Trend Report, M-298
Line Cards with Featurephones, M-59
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
hl=TL-130200-1001
I=TL-130300-1001
Maintenance
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
UsersGuide
TL-130400-1001
Line/Trunk Test, M-361
Line/Trunk Test Testing Procedures, M-362
Load Commands, M-258
Load Command Responses, M-261
Loading the Program, M-338
Maintenance Command,M -55
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS AND DISPLAYS, M-23, M-249
Manual Changes and Recent Change Summary (Voice Configuration), M-324
Maintenance Displays, M-23
Maintenance Options, M-67
Maintenance Request Command, M-79
Maintenance Terminals, M-l 3
Maintenance Tools, M-263
Manual Hardware Testing, M-l 5
Manual Testing, M-339
Manual Testing Procedures, M-366
Mass Storage Utility Menu, M-100
Memory Access Commands, M-73
Memory Dumps, M-216
Memory Dump Contents, M-216
Memory Test Results, M-97
Memory Watch Command, M-68
Network Test, M-90
Network Test, M-347
Network Testing Procedures, M-347N
Night Destination of All Agent Groups, M-303
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-I
30400-l 001
OFF-LINE DIAGNOSTICS, M-337
ON-LINE
MAINTENANCE.
M-85
Packet Line Cards Status, M-99
Paging Card Test, M-346
Paging Card Testing Procedures, M-346
PD-200 Data-System Devices, M-253
PD-200 MAINTENANCE, M-247
PD-200 Maintenance Tools and Fault Isolation, M-263
Physical Locations, M-337
Power Restrictions, M-20
Preventive Maintenance, M-l 07
PUT Command Entry, M-69
Quick Reference Chart, M-107
Reference Documents, M - l 5
Return to Maintenance Options, M-96
Remote Processors Status, M-l 00
1 RECENT CHANGE, M-28
Real-Time Agent Status Display, M-288
Real-Time System Status Display, M-289
Retest Option, M-341
Repeat FMS Test, M-350
Return to Main Menu, M-354
s
Security Codes, M-14
Security Levels, M-l 3
Self-Testing Diagnostics, M-l 4
F=TL-130000-1001
Features
O=TL-130100-1001
Operation
hl=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL.130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data Base
S-TL-130500-1001
SystemConfiguration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMPUsers
Guide
TL-130400-1001
i’
Send a Special Message (49), M-322
Send a Unique Message (97) M-323
Serial Device Controller Test, M-354
Serial Device Controller Testing Procedures, M-355
Software Identity Calculations (Lines), M-28
Source Message Display, M-31 1
Special Message Display (84) M-323
Spare Cards, M-107
Super&or Message Handler, M-321
Supervisor Message Options Menu (85),
M-322
System Configuration, M-l 5
System Diagnostics, M-l 4
SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL
PRINCIPLES,
M-107
System Memory Test, M-341
System Memory Testing Procedures, M-343
System Operation Checks, M-107
System Software and Maintenance Applications, M-l 3
System Status, M-23
System Status Display, M-88
System Status Report, M-289
System Voltage Checks, M-107
Test Command (Featurephone), M-72
Test Device #0, M-351
Test Device #2, M-353
Testing, M-l 79
Test Options Menu, M-337
Test Results, M-344, M-346, M-347, M-356,M -360, M-363
Three-Party Connection, M-21 7
Tone Test, M-355
Tone Test Testing Procedures, M-356
Touch Call Receiver Status, M-96
Touch Call Receiver Test, M-89
F =TL-130000-1001
Features
Cl=TL-130100-1001
Operation
M=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I=TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data saw.2
S-TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
TL-130400-1001
Touch Calling Receiver Test, M-365
Traffic Data Menu Options Menu, M-91
Traffic Meters Menu, M-92
TROUBLESHOOTING,
M-155
Trunks, M-59, M-256
Trunk Sequence State Display, M-98
Tl -Type Trunk Maintenance, M-l 76
Tl Trunk Trouble, M-180
TTY Response Log Display, M-36
Two-Party Connection, M-21 7
Typical Recent Change Sequences, M-333
IJ
Unlock Command, M-73
F=TL-130000-1001
O=TL-130100-1001
Fe.dWS
Operation
M
=TL-130200-1001
Maintenance
I =TL-130300-1001
Installation
D=TL-130400-1001
Data
Base
S=TL-130500-1001
System
Configuration
A=TL-100000-1001
ADMP
Users
Guide
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 950 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Layout : SinglePage Mod Date : 2002:02:18 21:37:02-06:00 Creation Date : 2000:10:17 10:30:08-07:00 Producer : Acrobat 4.05 Scan Plug-in for Windows Author : EZ Manuals Modify Date : 2002:02:18 21:37:02-06:00 Create Date : 2000:10:17 10:30:08-07:00 Metadata Date : 2002:02:18 21:37:02-06:00 Creator : EZ ManualsEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools